—

R E L I O N ® 670 SERIES

Bay control REC670

Version 2.2 ANSI
Application manual
 Document ID: 1MRK 511 401-UUS
Issued: October 2017
Revision: A
Product version: 2.2.1

© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved

Copyright
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written
permission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party,
nor used for any unauthorized purpose.

The software and hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and
may be used or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.

This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the
OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/) This product includes cryptographic
software written/developed by: Eric Young ([email protected]) and Tim Hudson
([email protected]).

Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or
product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective holders.

Warranty
Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.
Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept or
product description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed properties.
All persons responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this manual must
satisfy themselves that each intended application is suitable and acceptable, including
that any applicable safety or other operational requirements are complied with. In
particular, any risks in applications where a system failure and/or product failure would
create a risk for harm to property or persons (including but not limited to personal
injuries or death) shall be the sole responsibility of the person or entity applying the
equipment, and those so responsible are hereby requested to ensure that all measures
are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks.

This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be
completely ruled out. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested to
notify the manufacturer. Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in no
event shall ABB be responsible or liable for any loss or damage resulting from the use
of this manual or the application of the equipment.
Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities
on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment for
use within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC). This
conformity is the result of tests conducted by ABB in accordance with the product
standard EN 60255-26 for the EMC directive, and with the product standards EN
60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the low voltage directive. The product is designed in
accordance with the international standards of the IEC 60255 series and ANSI C37.90.
 Table of contents

Table of contents

Section 1 Introduction..........................................................................21
This manual............................................................................................ 21
Intended audience.................................................................................. 21
Product documentation...........................................................................22
Product documentation set................................................................22
Document revision history................................................................. 23
Related documents............................................................................24
Document symbols and conventions...................................................... 24
Symbols.............................................................................................24
Document conventions...................................................................... 25
IEC 61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping.................................................26

Section 2 Application...........................................................................37
General IED application..........................................................................37
Main protection functions........................................................................38
Back-up protection functions.................................................................. 39
Control and monitoring functions............................................................ 40
Communication.......................................................................................48
Basic IED functions.................................................................................51

Section 3 Configuration....................................................................... 53
Description of configuration REC670......................................................53
Introduction........................................................................................53
Description of configuration A30...................................................53
Description of configuration B30...................................................55
Description of configuration C30.................................................. 57
Description of configuration D30.................................................. 59

Section 4 Analog inputs.......................................................................61

Introduction............................................................................................. 61
Setting guidelines................................................................................... 61
Setting of the phase reference channel.............................................61
Example........................................................................................62
Setting of current channels................................................................62
Example 1.....................................................................................63
Example 2.....................................................................................63
Example 3.....................................................................................64

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 1

Application manual
Table of contents

Examples on how to connect, configure and set CT inputs

for most commonly used CT connections.................................... 67
Example on how to connect a wye connected three-phase
CT set to the IED.......................................................................... 68
Example how to connect delta connected three-phase CT
set to the IED................................................................................73
Example how to connect single-phase CT to the IED.................. 76
Relationships between setting parameter Base Current, CT
rated primary current and minimum pickup of a protection IED........ 78
Setting of voltage channels............................................................... 78
Example........................................................................................79
Examples how to connect, configure and set VT inputs for
most commonly used VT connections..........................................79
Examples on how to connect a three phase-to-ground
connected VT to the IED.............................................................. 80
Example on how to connect a phase-to-phase connected
VT to the IED................................................................................ 82
Example on how to connect an open delta VT to the IED for
high impedance grounded or ungrounded networks.................... 84
Example how to connect the open delta VT to the IED for
low impedance grounded or solidly grounded power systems..... 87

Section 5 Local HMI............................................................................ 91

Display.................................................................................................... 92
LEDs....................................................................................................... 95
Keypad....................................................................................................96
Local HMI functionality............................................................................98
Protection and alarm indication......................................................... 98
Parameter management ...................................................................99
Front communication....................................................................... 100

Section 6 Wide area measurement system.......................................101

C37.118 Phasor Measurement Data Streaming Protocol
Configuration PMUCONF..................................................................... 101
Identification.................................................................................... 101
Application....................................................................................... 101
Operation principle.......................................................................... 101
Short guidance for use of TCP................................................... 102
Short guidance for use of UDP...................................................103
Protocol reporting via IEEE 1344 and C37.118 PMUREPORT............ 105
Identification.................................................................................... 105
Application....................................................................................... 106

2 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
 Table of contents

Operation principle.......................................................................... 108

Frequency reporting................................................................... 110
Reporting filters.......................................................................... 112
Scaling Factors for ANALOGREPORT channels....................... 113
PMU Report Function Blocks Connection Rules in PCM600
Application Configuration Tool (ACT)......................................... 115
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 121

Section 7 Differential protection........................................................ 127

High impedance differential protection, single phase HZPDIF (87)......127
Identification.................................................................................... 127
Application....................................................................................... 127
The basics of the high impedance principle............................... 129
Connection examples for high impedance differential protection.... 135
Connections for three-phase high impedance differential
protection....................................................................................135
Connections for 1Ph High impedance differential protection
HZPDIF (87)............................................................................... 136
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 137
Configuration.............................................................................. 138
Settings of protection function.................................................... 138
T-feeder protection..................................................................... 138
Tertiary reactor protection.......................................................... 142
Alarm level operation..................................................................145

Section 8 Current protection..............................................................147

Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC (50).................. 147
Identification.................................................................................... 147
Application....................................................................................... 147
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 148
Meshed network without parallel line..........................................149
Meshed network with parallel line...............................................151
Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps
OC4PTOC(51_67)................................................................................ 153
Identification.................................................................................... 153
Application....................................................................................... 153
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 154
Settings for each step.................................................................156
Setting example..........................................................................160
Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC (50N)............. 165
Identification.................................................................................... 165

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 3

Application manual
Table of contents

Application....................................................................................... 165
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 165
Directional residual overcurrent protection, four steps EF4PTOC
(51N/67N)............................................................................................. 168
Identification.................................................................................... 168
Application....................................................................................... 169
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 171
Common settings for all steps.................................................... 171
2nd harmonic restrain.................................................................173
Parallel transformer inrush current logic.....................................173
Switch onto fault logic.................................................................174
Settings for each step (x = 1, 2, 3 and 4)................................... 175
Line application example............................................................ 178
Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent
protection NS4PTOC (46I2)..................................................................183
Identification.................................................................................... 184
Application....................................................................................... 184
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 186
Settings for each step ................................................................186
Common settings for all steps.................................................... 189
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection
SDEPSDE (67N)...................................................................................190
Identification.................................................................................... 191
Application....................................................................................... 191
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 193
Thermal overload protection, one time constant Fahrenheit/
Celsius LFPTTR/LCPTTR (26)............................................................. 202
Identification.................................................................................... 202
Thermal overload protection, two time constants TRPTTR (49)...........202
Identification.................................................................................... 202
Application....................................................................................... 202
Setting guideline.............................................................................. 203
Breaker failure protection CCRBRF(50BF)...........................................206
Identification.................................................................................... 206
Application....................................................................................... 206
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 207
Stub protection STBPTOC (50STB)..................................................... 210
Identification.................................................................................... 210
Application....................................................................................... 210
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 211

4 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
 Table of contents

Pole discrepancy protection CCPDSC(52PD)...................................... 212

Identification.................................................................................... 212
Application....................................................................................... 212
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 213
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP (37)..............................214
Identification.................................................................................... 214
Application....................................................................................... 214
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 216
Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP (32)................................220
Identification.................................................................................... 220
Application....................................................................................... 220
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 222
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC (46)............................................. 226
Identification.................................................................................... 226
Application....................................................................................... 227
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 227
Capacitor bank protection CBPGAPC.................................................. 227
Identification.................................................................................... 227
Application....................................................................................... 228
SCB protection........................................................................... 230
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 232
Restrike detection.......................................................................234
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection VRPVOC (51V)...........235
Identification.................................................................................... 235
Application....................................................................................... 235
Base quantities........................................................................... 236
Application possibilities...............................................................236
Undervoltage seal-in...................................................................237
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 237
Explanation of the setting parameters........................................ 237
Voltage-restrained overcurrent protection for generator and
step-up transformer.................................................................... 239
Overcurrent protection with undervoltage seal-in....................... 239

Section 9 Voltage protection............................................................. 241

Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV (27)................................241
Identification.................................................................................... 241
Application....................................................................................... 241
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 242
Equipment protection, such as for motors and generators.........242

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 5

Application manual
Table of contents

Disconnected equipment detection............................................ 242

Power supply quality ..................................................................242
Voltage instability mitigation....................................................... 242
Backup protection for power system faults.................................243
Settings for two step undervoltage protection............................ 243
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV (59)................................. 244
Identification.................................................................................... 245
Application....................................................................................... 245
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 246
Equipment protection, such as for motors, generators,
reactors and transformers.......................................................... 246
Equipment protection, capacitors............................................... 246
Power supply quality...................................................................247
High impedance grounded systems........................................... 247
The following settings can be done for the two step
overvoltage protection................................................................ 247
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV (59N)...............249
Identification.................................................................................... 249
Application....................................................................................... 249
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 250
Equipment protection, such as for motors, generators,
reactors and transformersEquipment protection
for transformers.......................................................................... 250
Equipment protection, capacitors............................................... 250
Power supply quality...................................................................251
High impedance grounded systems........................................... 251
Direct grounded system..............................................................252
Settings for two step residual overvoltage protection................. 252
Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV (60)..................................... 254
Identification.................................................................................... 254
Application....................................................................................... 254
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 256
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV (27).................................................. 258
Identification.................................................................................... 258
Application....................................................................................... 258
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 258
Advanced users settings............................................................ 258

Section 10 Frequency protection.........................................................259

Underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81).............................................259
Identification.................................................................................... 259

6 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
 Table of contents

Application....................................................................................... 259
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 260
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81)...............................................260
Identification.................................................................................... 261
Application....................................................................................... 261
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 261
Rate-of-change of frequency protection SAPFRC (81)........................ 262
Identification.................................................................................... 262
Application....................................................................................... 262
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 263
Frequency time accumulation protection function FTAQFVR (81A).....264
Identification.................................................................................... 264
Application....................................................................................... 264
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 266

Section 11 Multipurpose protection..................................................... 269

General current and voltage protection CVGAPC................................ 269
Identification.................................................................................... 269
Application....................................................................................... 269
Current and voltage selection for CVGAPC function..................270
Base quantities for CVGAPC function........................................ 273
Application possibilities...............................................................273
Inadvertent generator energization.............................................274
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 275
Directional negative sequence overcurrent protection............... 275
Negative sequence overcurrent protection.................................277
Generator stator overload protection in accordance with IEC
or ANSI standards...................................................................... 280
Open phase protection for transformer, lines or generators
and circuit breaker head flashover protection for generators..... 282
Voltage restrained overcurrent protection for generator and
step-up transformer.................................................................... 283
Loss of excitation protection for a generator.............................. 283

Section 12 System protection and control...........................................287

Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC..............................................................287
Identification.................................................................................... 287
Application....................................................................................... 287
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 289
Setting example..........................................................................289

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 7

Application manual
Table of contents

Section 13 Secondary system supervision..........................................293

Current circuit supervision (87).............................................................293
Identification.................................................................................... 293
Application....................................................................................... 293
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 294
Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC...................................................... 294
Identification.................................................................................... 294
Application....................................................................................... 294
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 295
General.......................................................................................295
Setting of common parameters.................................................. 296
Negative sequence based.......................................................... 296
Zero sequence based.................................................................297
Delta V and delta I ..................................................................... 298
Dead line detection.....................................................................298
Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC (60).................................................299
Identification.................................................................................... 299
Application....................................................................................... 299
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 300

Section 14 Control...............................................................................303
Synchronism check, energizing check, and synchronizing
SESRSYN (25)..................................................................................... 303
Identification.................................................................................... 303
Application....................................................................................... 303
Synchronizing............................................................................. 303
Synchronism check.................................................................... 305
Energizing check........................................................................ 307
Voltage selection........................................................................ 308
External fuse failure....................................................................309
Application examples.......................................................................310
Single circuit breaker with single busbar.................................... 311
Single circuit breaker with double busbar, external voltage
selection..................................................................................... 312
Single circuit breaker with double busbar, internal voltage
selection..................................................................................... 313
Double circuit breaker.................................................................314
Breaker-and-a-half......................................................................315
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 318

8 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
 Table of contents

Autorecloser for 1 phase, 2 phase and/or 3 phase operation

SMBRREC (79).................................................................................... 323
Identification.................................................................................... 323
Application....................................................................................... 324
Auto reclosing operation Off and On.......................................... 327
Initiate auto reclosing and conditions for start of a reclosing
cycle........................................................................................... 328
Initiate auto reclosing from circuit breaker open information...... 328
Blocking of the auto recloser...................................................... 328
Control of the auto reclosing dead time for shot 1......................329
Long trip signal........................................................................... 329
Maximum number of reclosing shots..........................................330
ARMode = 3ph, (normal setting for a three-phase shot)............ 330
ARMode = 1/2/3ph..................................................................... 330
ARMode = 1/2ph, 1-phase or 2-phase reclosing in the
first shot...................................................................................... 331
ARMode = 1ph+1*2ph, 1-phase or 2-phase reclosing in the
first shot...................................................................................... 331
ARMode = 1/2ph + 1*3ph, 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase
reclosing in the first shot.............................................................331
ARMode = 1ph + 1*2/3ph, 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase
reclosing in the first shot.............................................................331
External selection of auto reclosing mode..................................332
Auto reclosing reset timer...........................................................333
Pulsing of the circuit breaker closing command and counter..... 333
Transient fault.............................................................................333
Permanent fault and reclosing unsuccessful signal....................333
Lock-out initiation........................................................................334
Evolving fault.............................................................................. 335
Automatic continuation of the auto reclosing sequence............. 336
Thermal overload protection holding the auto recloser back......336
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 336
Configuration.............................................................................. 336
Auto recloser settings................................................................. 345
Apparatus control APC......................................................................... 350
Application....................................................................................... 350
Bay control QCBAY.................................................................... 356
Switch controller SCSWI............................................................ 357
Switches SXCBR/SXSWI........................................................... 357
Proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE
XLNPROXY................................................................................ 358

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 9

Application manual
Table of contents

Reservation function (QCRSV and RESIN)................................361

Interaction between modules...........................................................363
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 367
Bay control (QCBAY)..................................................................367
Switch controller (SCSWI).......................................................... 367
Switch (SXCBR/SXSWI).............................................................368
Proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE
XLNPROXY................................................................................ 369
Bay Reserve (QCRSV)...............................................................370
Reservation input (RESIN)......................................................... 370
Interlocking (3)...................................................................................... 370
Configuration guidelines.................................................................. 371
Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE (3)............................................ 372
Application.................................................................................. 372
Signals from bypass busbar....................................................... 372
Signals from bus-coupler............................................................373
Configuration setting...................................................................377
Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC (3).................................. 378
Application.................................................................................. 378
Configuration.............................................................................. 378
Signals from all feeders.............................................................. 378
Signals from bus-coupler............................................................381
Configuration setting...................................................................382
Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO (3)..............................383
Application.................................................................................. 383
Signals from bus-coupler............................................................384
Configuration setting...................................................................385
Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS (3)...........................386
Application.................................................................................. 386
Signals from all feeders.............................................................. 386
Configuration setting...................................................................389
Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC (3).................. 390
Application.................................................................................. 390
Signals in single breaker arrangement....................................... 390
Signals in double-breaker arrangement..................................... 393
Signals in breaker and a half arrangement.................................396
Interlocking for busbar grounding switch BB_ES (3)....................... 397
Application.................................................................................. 397
Signals in single breaker arrangement....................................... 398
Signals in double-breaker arrangement..................................... 402

10 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
 Table of contents

Signals in breaker and a half arrangement.................................403

Interlocking for double CB bay DB (3)............................................. 404
Application.................................................................................. 404
Configuration setting...................................................................404
Interlocking for breaker-and-a-half diameter BH (3)........................ 405
Application.................................................................................. 405
Configuration setting...................................................................406
Voltage control......................................................................................407
Identification.................................................................................... 407
Application....................................................................................... 407
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 443
TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC general settings...................................443
TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) Setting group ....................... 444
TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC (84) general settings.........................454
Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation
SLGAPC............................................................................................... 455
Identification.................................................................................... 455
Application....................................................................................... 455
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 455
Selector mini switch VSGAPC.............................................................. 456
Identification.................................................................................... 456
Application....................................................................................... 456
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 457
Generic communication function for Double Point indication
DPGAPC...............................................................................................457
Identification.................................................................................... 457
Application....................................................................................... 457
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 458
Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC...............................458
Identification.................................................................................... 459
Application....................................................................................... 459
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 459
AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0 AUTOBITS................ 459
Identification.................................................................................... 460
Application....................................................................................... 460
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 460
Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD.......................................... 460
Identification.................................................................................... 460
Application....................................................................................... 461
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 462

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 11

Application manual
Table of contents

Section 15 Scheme communication.................................................... 465

Scheme communication logic for distance or overcurrent
protection ZCPSCH(85)........................................................................465
Identification.................................................................................... 465
Application....................................................................................... 465
Blocking schemes.......................................................................466
Delta blocking scheme............................................................... 467
Permissive schemes...................................................................468
Intertrip scheme..........................................................................472
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 472
Blocking scheme........................................................................ 472
Delta blocking scheme............................................................... 473
Permissive underreaching scheme............................................ 473
Permissive overreaching scheme...............................................473
Unblocking scheme.................................................................... 473
Intertrip scheme..........................................................................474
Current reversal and Weak-end infeed logic for distance protection
3-phase ZCRWPSCH (85)....................................................................474
Identification.................................................................................... 474
Application....................................................................................... 474
Current reversal logic................................................................. 474
Weak-end infeed logic................................................................ 475
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 476
Current reversal logic................................................................. 476
Weak-end infeed logic................................................................ 477
Local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH.................................................... 477
Identification.................................................................................... 477
Application....................................................................................... 477
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 478
Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection
ECPSCH (85)....................................................................................... 479
Identification.................................................................................... 479
Application....................................................................................... 479
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 480
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual
overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH (85)............................................. 481
Identification.................................................................................... 481
Application....................................................................................... 481
Fault current reversal logic......................................................... 481
Weak-end infeed logic................................................................ 482

12 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
 Table of contents

Setting guidelines............................................................................ 482

Current reversal..........................................................................483
Weak-end infeed........................................................................ 484

Section 16 Logic..................................................................................485
Tripping logic SMPPTRC (94).............................................................. 485
Identification.................................................................................... 485
Application....................................................................................... 485
Three-pole tripping..................................................................... 486
Single- and/or three-pole tripping............................................... 487
Single-, two- or three-pole tripping............................................. 488
Lock-out......................................................................................489
Example of directional data........................................................ 489
Blocking of the function block..................................................... 491
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 491
Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC..................................................................491
Identification.................................................................................... 492
Application....................................................................................... 492
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 492
Logic for group alarm ALMCALH..........................................................492
Identification.................................................................................... 492
Application....................................................................................... 493
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 493
Logic for group alarm WRNCALH.........................................................493
Identification.................................................................................... 493
Application.................................................................................. 493
Setting guidelines....................................................................... 493
Logic for group indication INDCALH.....................................................493
Identification.................................................................................... 493
Application.................................................................................. 494
Setting guidelines....................................................................... 494
Configurable logic blocks......................................................................494
Application....................................................................................... 494
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 494
Configuration.............................................................................. 495
Fixed signal function block FXDSIGN...................................................496
Identification.................................................................................... 496
Application....................................................................................... 496
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I.................................................497
Identification.................................................................................... 497

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 13

Application manual
Table of contents

Application....................................................................................... 498
Boolean to integer conversion with logical node representation, 16
bit BTIGAPC......................................................................................... 499
Identification.................................................................................... 499
Application....................................................................................... 499
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion IB16.................................................500
Identification.................................................................................... 500
Application....................................................................................... 500
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation
ITBGAPC.............................................................................................. 501
Identification.................................................................................... 502
Application....................................................................................... 502
Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and overflow
supervision TEIGAPC...........................................................................503
Identification.................................................................................... 503
Application....................................................................................... 503
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 503
Comparator for integer inputs - INTCOMP........................................... 504
Identification.................................................................................... 504
Application....................................................................................... 504
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 504
Setting example...............................................................................505
Comparator for real inputs - REALCOMP.............................................506
Identification.................................................................................... 506
Application....................................................................................... 506
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 506
Setting example...............................................................................507

Section 17 Monitoring..........................................................................509
Measurement........................................................................................509
Identification.................................................................................... 509
Application....................................................................................... 510
Zero clamping..................................................................................511
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 512
Setting examples........................................................................ 515
Gas medium supervision SSIMG (63).................................................. 522
Identification.................................................................................... 522
Application....................................................................................... 522
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 523
Liquid medium supervision SSIML (71)................................................ 524
Identification.................................................................................... 524

14 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
 Table of contents

Application....................................................................................... 524
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 524
Breaker monitoring SSCBR.................................................................. 525
Identification.................................................................................... 525
Application....................................................................................... 525
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 529
Setting procedure on the IED..................................................... 529
Event function EVENT.......................................................................... 530
Identification.................................................................................... 530
Application....................................................................................... 530
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 531
Disturbance report DRPRDRE............................................................. 531
Identification.................................................................................... 532
Application....................................................................................... 532
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 533
Recording times..........................................................................536
Binary input signals.................................................................... 536
Analog input signals................................................................... 537
Sub-function parameters............................................................ 538
Consideration............................................................................. 538
Logical signal status report BINSTATREP........................................... 539
Identification.................................................................................... 539
Application....................................................................................... 540
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 540
Fault locator LMBRFLO........................................................................ 540
Identification.................................................................................... 540
Application....................................................................................... 540
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 541
Connection of analog currents....................................................542
Limit counter L4UFCNT........................................................................ 543
Identification.................................................................................... 543
Application....................................................................................... 544
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 544
Running hour-meter TEILGAPC........................................................... 544
Identification.................................................................................... 544
Application....................................................................................... 544
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 545
Estimation of transformer insulation life LOLSPTR (26/49HS)............. 545
Application....................................................................................... 545
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 550

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 15

Application manual
Table of contents

Setting example...............................................................................559
Transformer Rated Data.............................................................559
Setting parameters for insulation loss of life calculation
function (LOL1)...........................................................................560

Section 18 Metering............................................................................ 565

Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT................................................................565
Identification.................................................................................... 565
Application....................................................................................... 565
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 565
Function for energy calculation and demand handling ETPMMTR...... 566
Identification.................................................................................... 566
Application....................................................................................... 566
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 567

Section 19 Ethernet-based communication.........................................569

Access point......................................................................................... 569
Application....................................................................................... 569
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 569
Redundant communication................................................................... 571
Identification.................................................................................... 571
Application....................................................................................... 571
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 573
Merging unit.......................................................................................... 574
Application....................................................................................... 574
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 575
Routes.................................................................................................. 575
Application....................................................................................... 575
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 575

Section 20 Station communication...................................................... 577

Communication protocols..................................................................... 577
IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol............................................... 577
Application IEC 61850-8-1...............................................................577
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 579
Horizontal communication via GOOSE........................................... 579
Sending data.............................................................................. 579
Receiving data............................................................................580
LON communication protocol............................................................... 582
Application....................................................................................... 582
MULTICMDRCV and MULTICMDSND............................................584

16 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
 Table of contents

Identification............................................................................... 584
Application.................................................................................. 584
Setting guidelines....................................................................... 584
SPA communication protocol................................................................584
Application....................................................................................... 584
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 586
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol........................................... 587
Application....................................................................................... 587
Functionality............................................................................... 587
Design........................................................................................ 588
Settings............................................................................................590
Settings for RS485 and optical serial communication................ 590
Settings from PCM600............................................................... 591
Function and information types....................................................... 593
DNP3 Communication protocol............................................................ 594
Application....................................................................................... 594

Section 21 Remote communication.....................................................595

Binary signal transfer............................................................................ 595
Identification.................................................................................... 595
Application....................................................................................... 595
Communication hardware solutions........................................... 596
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 597

Section 22 Security............................................................................. 603

Authority status ATHSTAT....................................................................603
Application....................................................................................... 603
Self supervision with internal event list INTERRSIG............................ 603
Application....................................................................................... 603
Change lock CHNGLCK....................................................................... 604
Application....................................................................................... 604
Denial of service SCHLCCH/RCHLCCH ............................................. 605
Application....................................................................................... 605
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 606

Section 23 Basic IED functions........................................................... 607

IED identifiers TERMINALID.................................................................607
Application....................................................................................... 607
Product information PRODINF............................................................. 607
Application....................................................................................... 607
Factory defined settings.................................................................. 608

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 17

Application manual
Table of contents

Measured value expander block RANGE_XP...................................... 608

Identification.................................................................................... 609
Application....................................................................................... 609
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 609
Parameter setting groups..................................................................... 609
Application....................................................................................... 609
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 610
Rated system frequency PRIMVAL...................................................... 610
Identification.................................................................................... 610
Application....................................................................................... 610
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 610
Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM.................................................... 611
Application....................................................................................... 611
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 611
Global base values GBASVAL............................................................. 611
Identification.................................................................................... 611
Application....................................................................................... 612
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 612
Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI.....................................................612
Application....................................................................................... 612
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 612
Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO ................................................613
Application....................................................................................... 613
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 613
Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI........................................................ 613
Application....................................................................................... 613
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 613
Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI....................................................613
Application....................................................................................... 614
Frequency values............................................................................ 614
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 615
Test mode functionality TESTMODE....................................................620
Application....................................................................................... 620
IEC 61850 protocol test mode.................................................... 620
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 621
Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN..............................................622
Application....................................................................................... 622
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 623
System time................................................................................623
Synchronization.......................................................................... 623

18 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
 Table of contents

Section 24 Requirements.................................................................... 627

Current transformer requirements........................................................ 627
Current transformer basic classification and requirements............. 627
Conditions........................................................................................629
Fault current.....................................................................................630
Secondary wire resistance and additional load............................... 630
General current transformer requirements...................................... 631
Rated equivalent secondary e.m.f. requirements............................ 631
Breaker failure protection........................................................... 632
Non-directional instantaneous and definitive time, phase
and residual overcurrent protection............................................ 632
Non-directional inverse time delayed phase and residual
overcurrent protection.................................................................633
Directional phase and residual overcurrent protection............... 634
Current transformer requirements for CTs according to other
standards.........................................................................................635
Current transformers according to IEC 61869-2, class P, PR.... 635
Current transformers according to IEC 61869-2, class PX,
PXR (and old IEC 60044-6, class TPS
and old British Standard, class X).............................................. 635
Current transformers according to ANSI/IEEE........................... 636
Voltage transformer requirements........................................................ 637
SNTP server requirements................................................................... 637
PTP requirements.................................................................................637
Sample specification of communication requirements for the
protection and control terminals in digital telecommunication
networks............................................................................................... 638

Section 25 Glossary............................................................................ 641

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 19

Application manual
20
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 1
Introduction

Section 1 Introduction

1.1 This manual GUID-AB423A30-13C2-46AF-B7FE-A73BB425EB5F v18

The application manual contains application descriptions and setting guidelines sorted
per function. The manual can be used to find out when and for what purpose a typical
protection function can be used. The manual can also provide assistance for calculating
settings.

1.2 Intended audience GUID-C9B8127F-5748-4BEA-9E4F-CC762FE28A3A v11

This manual addresses the protection and control engineer responsible for planning,
pre-engineering and engineering.

The protection and control engineer must be experienced in electrical power

engineering and have knowledge of related technology, such as protection schemes and
communication principles.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 21

Application manual
Section 1 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Introduction

1.3 Product documentation

1.3.1 Product documentation set GUID-3AA69EA6-F1D8-47C6-A8E6-562F29C67172 v15

Deinstalling & disposal

Planning & purchase

Decommissioning
Commissioning

Maintenance
Engineering

Operation
Installing
Engineering manual
Installation manual

Commissioning manual
Operation manual

Application manual

Technical manual

Communication
protocol manual
Cyber security
deployment guideline
IEC07000220-4-en.vsd

IEC07000220 V4 EN-US

Figure 1: The intended use of manuals throughout the product lifecycle

The engineering manual contains instructions on how to engineer the IEDs using the
various tools available within the PCM600 software. The manual provides instructions
on how to set up a PCM600 project and insert IEDs to the project structure. The
manual also recommends a sequence for the engineering of protection and control
functions, LHMI functions as well as communication engineering for IEC
60870-5-103, IEC 61850, DNP3, LON and SPA.

The installation manual contains instructions on how to install the IED. The manual
provides procedures for mechanical and electrical installation. The chapters are
organized in the chronological order in which the IED should be installed.

22 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 1
Introduction

The commissioning manual contains instructions on how to commission the IED. The
manual can also be used by system engineers and maintenance personnel for assistance
during the testing phase. The manual provides procedures for the checking of external
circuitry and energizing the IED, parameter setting and configuration as well as
verifying settings by secondary injection. The manual describes the process of testing
an IED in a substation which is not in service. The chapters are organized in the
chronological order in which the IED should be commissioned. The relevant
procedures may be followed also during the service and maintenance activities.

The operation manual contains instructions on how to operate the IED once it has been
commissioned. The manual provides instructions for the monitoring, controlling and
setting of the IED. The manual also describes how to identify disturbances and how to
view calculated and measured power grid data to determine the cause of a fault.

The application manual contains application descriptions and setting guidelines sorted
per function. The manual can be used to find out when and for what purpose a typical
protection function can be used. The manual can also provide assistance for calculating
settings.

The technical manual contains operation principle descriptions, and lists function
blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data,
sorted per function. The manual can be used as a technical reference during the
engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service.

The communication protocol manual describes the communication protocols supported

by the IED. The manual concentrates on the vendor-specific implementations.

The point list manual describes the outlook and properties of the data points specific to
the IED. The manual should be used in conjunction with the corresponding
communication protocol manual.

The cyber security deployment guideline describes the process for handling cyber
security when communicating with the IED. Certification, Authorization with role
based access control, and product engineering for cyber security related events are
described and sorted by function. The guideline can be used as a technical reference
during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during normal
service.

1.3.2 Document revision history GUID-C8027F8A-D3CB-41C1-B078-F9E59BB73A6C v4

Document revision/date History

–/May 2017 First release

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 23

Application manual
Section 1 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Introduction

1.3.3 Related documents GUID-94E8A5CA-BE1B-45AF-81E7-5A41D34EE112 v5

Documents related to REC670 Document numbers

Application manual 1MRK 511 401-UUS
Commissioning manual 1MRK 511 403-UUS
Product guide 1MRK 511 404-BEN
Technical manual 1MRK 511 402-UUS
Type test certificate 1MRK 511 404-TUS

670 series manuals Document numbers

Operation manual 1MRK 500 127-UUS
Engineering manual 1MRK 511 398-UUS
Installation manual 1MRK 514 026-UUS
Communication protocol manual, DNP3 1MRK 511 391-UUS
Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 1MRK 511 393-UEN
Edition 2
Point list manual, DNP3 1MRK 511 397-UUS
Accessories guide 1MRK 514 012-BUS
Connection and Installation components 1MRK 513 003-BEN
Test system, COMBITEST 1MRK 512 001-BEN

1.4 Document symbols and conventions

1.4.1 Symbols GUID-2945B229-DAB0-4F15-8A0E-B9CF0C2C7B15 v12

The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which

could result in electrical shock.

The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result
in personal injury.

The caution hot surface icon indicates important information or

warning about the temperature of product surfaces.

24 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 1
Introduction

Class 1 Laser product. Take adequate measures to protect the eyes and
do not view directly with optical instruments.

The caution icon indicates important information or warning related to

the concept discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence of a
hazard which could result in corruption of software or damage to
equipment or property.

The information icon alerts the reader of important facts and

conditions.

The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your
project or how to use a certain function.

Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it is necessary to understand

that under certain operational conditions, operation of damaged equipment may result
in degraded process performance leading to personal injury or death. It is important
that the user fully complies with all warning and cautionary notices.

1.4.2 Document conventions GUID-96DFAB1A-98FE-4B26-8E90-F7CEB14B1AB6 v6

• Abbreviations and acronyms in this manual are spelled out in the glossary. The
glossary also contains definitions of important terms.
• Push button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using the push
button icons.
For example, to navigate between the options, use and .
• HMI menu paths are presented in bold.
For example, select Main menu/Settings.
• LHMI messages are shown in Courier font.
For example, to save the changes in non-volatile memory, select Yes and press
.
• Parameter names are shown in italics.
For example, the function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting.
• Each function block symbol shows the available input/output signal.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 25

Application manual
Section 1 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Introduction

• the character ^ in front of an input/output signal name indicates that the

signal name may be customized using the PCM600 software.
• the character * after an input signal name indicates that the signal must be
connected to another function block in the application configuration to
achieve a valid application configuration.
• Logic diagrams describe the signal logic inside the function block and are
bordered by dashed lines.
• Signals in frames with a shaded area on their right hand side represent
setting parameter signals that are only settable via the PST, ECT or LHMI.
• If an internal signal path cannot be drawn with a continuous line, the suffix -
int is added to the signal name to indicate where the signal starts and
continues.
• Signal paths that extend beyond the logic diagram and continue in another
diagram have the suffix ”-cont.”
• Dimensions are provided both in inches and millimeters. If it is not specifically
mentioned then the dimension is in millimeters.

Illustrations are used as an example and might show other products

than the one the manual describes. The example that is illustrated is still
valid.

1.5 IEC 61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping GUID-C5133366-7260-4C47-A975-7DBAB3A33A96 v4

Function block names are used in ACT and PST to identify functions. Respective
function block names of Edition 1 logical nodes and Edition 2 logical nodes are shown
in the table below.
Table 1: IEC 61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping
Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes
AEGPVOC AEGGAPC AEGPVOC
AGSAL AGSAL AGSAL
SECLLN0
ALMCALH ALMCALH ALMCALH
ALTIM - ALTIM
ALTMS - ALTMS
ALTRK - ALTRK
BCZPDIF BCZPDIF BCZPDIF
BCZSPDIF BCZSPDIF BCZSPDIF
Table continues on next page

26 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 1
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

BCZTPDIF BCZTPDIF BCZTPDIF
BDCGAPC SWSGGIO BBCSWI
BDCGAPC
BDZSGAPC BBS6LLN0 LLN0
BDZSGAPC BDZSGAPC
BFPTRC_F01 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F02 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F03 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F04 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F05 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F06 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F07 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F08 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F09 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F10 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F11 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F12 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F13 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F14 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F15 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F16 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F17 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F18 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F19 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F20 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F21 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F22 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F23 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F24 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BICPTRC_01 BICPTRC BICPTRC
BICPTRC_02 BICPTRC BICPTRC
BICPTRC_03 BICPTRC BICPTRC
BICPTRC_04 BICPTRC BICPTRC
BICPTRC_05 BICPTRC BICPTRC
BRCPTOC BRCPTOC BRCPTOC
BRPTOC BRPTOC BRPTOC
BTIGAPC B16IFCVI BTIGAPC
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 27

Application manual
Section 1 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

BUSPTRC_B1 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BBSPLLN0
BUSPTRC_B2 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B3 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B4 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B5 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B6 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B7 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B8 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B9 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B10 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B11 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B12 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B13 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B14 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B15 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B16 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B17 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B18 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B19 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B20 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B21 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B22 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B23 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B24 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUTPTRC_B1 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BBTPLLN0
BUTPTRC_B2 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B3 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B4 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B5 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B6 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B7 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B8 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BZISGGIO BZISGGIO BZISGAPC
BZITGGIO BZITGGIO BZITGAPC
BZNPDIF_Z1 BZNPDIF BZNPDIF
Table continues on next page

28 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 1
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

BZNPDIF_Z2 BZNPDIF BZNPDIF
BZNPDIF_Z3 BZNPDIF BZNPDIF
BZNPDIF_Z4 BZNPDIF BZNPDIF
BZNPDIF_Z5 BZNPDIF BZNPDIF
BZNPDIF_Z6 BZNPDIF BZNPDIF
BZNSPDIF_A BZNSPDIF BZASGAPC
BZASPDIF
BZNSGAPC
BZNSPDIF
BZNSPDIF_B BZNSPDIF BZBSGAPC
BZBSPDIF
BZNSGAPC
BZNSPDIF
BZNTPDIF_A BZNTPDIF BZATGAPC
BZATPDIF
BZNTGAPC
BZNTPDIF
BZNTPDIF_B BZNTPDIF BZBTGAPC
BZBTPDIF
BZNTGAPC
BZNTPDIF
CBPGAPC CBPLLN0 CBPMMXU
CBPMMXU CBPPTRC
CBPPTRC HOLPTOV
HOLPTOV HPH1PTOV
HPH1PTOV PH3PTOC
PH3PTUC PH3PTUC
PH3PTOC RP3PDOP
RP3PDOP
CCPDSC CCRPLD CCPDSC
CCRBRF CCRBRF CCRBRF
CCRWRBRF CCRWRBRF CCRWRBRF
CCSRBRF CCSRBRF CCSRBRF
CCSSPVC CCSRDIF CCSSPVC
CMMXU CMMXU CMMXU
CMSQI CMSQI CMSQI
COUVGAPC COUVLLN0 COUVPTOV
COUVPTOV COUVPTUV
COUVPTUV
CVGAPC GF2LLN0 GF2MMXN
GF2MMXN GF2PHAR
GF2PHAR GF2PTOV
GF2PTOV GF2PTUC
GF2PTUC GF2PTUV
GF2PTUV GF2PVOC
GF2PVOC PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 29

Application manual
Section 1 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

CVMMXN CVMMXN CVMMXN
D2PTOC D2LLN0 D2PTOC
D2PTOC PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
DPGAPC DPGGIO DPGAPC
DRPRDRE DRPRDRE DRPRDRE
ECPSCH ECPSCH ECPSCH
ECRWPSCH ECRWPSCH ECRWPSCH
EF2PTOC EF2LLN0 EF2PTRC
EF2PTRC EF2RDIR
EF2RDIR GEN2PHAR
GEN2PHAR PH1PTOC
PH1PTOC
EF4PTOC EF4LLN0 EF4PTRC
EF4PTRC EF4RDIR
EF4RDIR GEN4PHAR
GEN4PHAR PH1PTOC
PH1PTOC
EFPIOC EFPIOC EFPIOC
EFRWPIOC EFRWPIOC EFRWPIOC
ETPMMTR ETPMMTR ETPMMTR
FDPSPDIS FDPSPDIS FDPSPDIS
FMPSPDIS FMPSPDIS FMPSPDIS
FRPSPDIS FPSRPDIS FPSRPDIS
FTAQFVR FTAQFVR FTAQFVR
FUFSPVC SDDRFUF FUFSPVC
SDDSPVC
GENPDIF GENPDIF GENGAPC
GENPDIF
GENPHAR
GENPTRC
GOPPDOP GOPPDOP GOPPDOP
PH1PTRC
GRPTTR GRPTTR GRPTTR
GSPTTR GSPTTR GSPTTR
GUPPDUP GUPPDUP GUPPDUP
PH1PTRC
HZPDIF HZPDIF HZPDIF
INDCALCH INDCALH INDCALH
ITBGAPC IB16FCVB ITBGAPC
L3CPDIF L3CPDIF L3CGAPC
L3CPDIF
L3CPHAR
L3CPTRC
Table continues on next page

30 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 1
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

L4CPDIF L4CLLN0 LLN0
L4CPDIF L4CGAPC
L4CPTRC L4CPDIF
L4CPSCH
L4CPTRC
L4UFCNT L4UFCNT L4UFCNT
L6CPDIF L6CPDIF L6CGAPC
L6CPDIF
L6CPHAR
L6CPTRC
LAPPGAPC LAPPLLN0 LAPPPDUP
LAPPPDUP LAPPPUPF
LAPPPUPF
LCCRPTRC LCCRPTRC LCCRPTRC
LCNSPTOC LCNSPTOC LCNSPTOC
LCNSPTOV LCNSPTOV LCNSPTOV
LCP3PTOC LCP3PTOC LCP3PTOC
LCP3PTUC LCP3PTUC LCP3PTUC
LCPTTR LCPTTR LCPTTR
LCZSPTOC LCZSPTOC LCZSPTOC
LCZSPTOV LCZSPTOV LCZSPTOV
LD0LLN0 LLN0 -
LDLPSCH LDLPDIF LDLPSCH
LDRGFC STSGGIO LDRGFC
LEXPDIS LEXPDIS LEXPDIS
LEXPTRC
LFPTTR LFPTTR LFPTTR
LMBRFLO LMBRFLO LMBRFLO
LOLSPTR LOLSPTR LOLSPTR
LOVPTUV LOVPTUV LOVPTUV
LPHD LPHD
LPTTR LPTTR LPTTR
LT3CPDIF LT3CPDIF LT3CGAPC
LT3CPDIF
LT3CPHAR
LT3CPTRC
LT6CPDIF LT6CPDIF LT6CGAPC
LT6CPDIF
LT6CPHAR
LT6CPTRC
MVGAPC MVGGIO MVGAPC
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 31

Application manual
Section 1 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

NS2PTOC NS2LLN0 NS2PTOC
NS2PTOC NS2PTRC
NS2PTRC
NS4PTOC EF4LLN0 EF4PTRC
EF4PTRC EF4RDIR
EF4RDIR PH1PTOC
GEN4PHAR
PH1PTOC
O2RWPTOV GEN2LLN0 O2RWPTOV
O2RWPTOV PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
OC4PTOC OC4LLN0 GEN4PHAR
GEN4PHAR PH3PTOC
PH3PTOC PH3PTRC
PH3PTRC
OEXPVPH OEXPVPH OEXPVPH
OOSPPAM OOSPPAM OOSPPAM
OOSPTRC
OV2PTOV GEN2LLN0 OV2PTOV
OV2PTOV PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
PAPGAPC PAPGAPC PAPGAPC
PCFCNT PCGGIO PCFCNT
PH4SPTOC GEN4PHAR GEN4PHAR
OCNDLLN0 PH1BPTOC
PH1BPTOC PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
PHPIOC PHPIOC PHPIOC
PSLPSCH ZMRPSL PSLPSCH
PSPPPAM PSPPPAM PSPPPAM
PSPPTRC
QCBAY QCBAY BAY/LLN0
QCRSV QCRSV QCRSV
RCHLCCH RCHLCCH RCHLCCH
REFPDIF REFPDIF REFPDIF
ROTIPHIZ ROTIPHIZ ROTIPHIZ
ROTIPTRC
ROV2PTOV GEN2LLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC ROV2PTOV
ROV2PTOV
SAPFRC SAPFRC SAPFRC
SAPTOF SAPTOF SAPTOF
SAPTUF SAPTUF SAPTUF
SCCVPTOC SCCVPTOC SCCVPTOC
Table continues on next page

32 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 1
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

SCHLCCH SCHLCCH SCHLCCH
SCILO SCILO SCILO
SCSWI SCSWI SCSWI
SDEPSDE SDEPSDE SDEPSDE
SDEPTOC
SDEPTOV
SDEPTRC
SESRSYN RSY1LLN0 AUT1RSYN
AUT1RSYN MAN1RSYN
MAN1RSYN SYNRSYN
SYNRSYN
SLGAPC SLGGIO SLGAPC
SMBRREC SMBRREC SMBRREC
SMPPTRC SMPPTRC SMPPTRC
SP16GAPC SP16GGIO SP16GAPC
SPC8GAPC SPC8GGIO SPC8GAPC
SPGAPC SPGGIO SPGAPC
SSCBR SSCBR SSCBR
SSIMG SSIMG SSIMG
SSIML SSIML SSIML
STBPTOC STBPTOC BBPMSS
STBPTOC
STEFPHIZ STEFPHIZ STEFPHIZ
STTIPHIZ STTIPHIZ STTIPHIZ
SXCBR SXCBR SXCBR
SXSWI SXSWI SXSWI
T2WPDIF T2WPDIF T2WGAPC
T2WPDIF
T2WPHAR
T2WPTRC
T3WPDIF T3WPDIF T3WGAPC
T3WPDIF
T3WPHAR
T3WPTRC
TCLYLTC TCLYLTC TCLYLTC
TCSLTC
TCMYLTC TCMYLTC TCMYLTC
TEIGAPC TEIGGIO TEIGAPC
TEIGGIO
TEILGAPC TEILGGIO TEILGAPC
TMAGAPC TMAGGIO TMAGAPC
TPPIOC TPPIOC TPPIOC
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 33

Application manual
Section 1 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

TR1ATCC TR1ATCC TR1ATCC
TR8ATCC TR8ATCC TR8ATCC
TRPTTR TRPTTR TRPTTR
U2RWPTUV GEN2LLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC U2RWPTUV
U2RWPTUV
UV2PTUV GEN2LLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC UV2PTUV
UV2PTUV
VDCPTOV VDCPTOV VDCPTOV
VDSPVC VDRFUF VDSPVC
VMMXU VMMXU VMMXU
VMSQI VMSQI VMSQI
VNMMXU VNMMXU VNMMXU
VRPVOC VRLLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC PH1PTUV
PH1PTUV VRPVOC
VRPVOC
VSGAPC VSGGIO VSGAPC
WRNCALH WRNCALH WRNCALH
ZC1PPSCH ZPCPSCH ZPCPSCH
ZC1WPSCH ZPCWPSCH ZPCWPSCH
ZCLCPSCH ZCLCPLAL ZCLCPSCH
ZCPSCH ZCPSCH ZCPSCH
ZCRWPSCH ZCRWPSCH ZCRWPSCH
ZCVPSOF ZCVPSOF ZCVPSOF
ZGVPDIS ZGVLLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC ZGVPDIS
ZGVPDIS ZGVPTUV
ZGVPTUV
ZMCAPDIS ZMCAPDIS ZMCAPDIS
ZMCPDIS ZMCPDIS ZMCPDIS
ZMFCPDIS ZMFCLLN0 PSFPDIS
PSFPDIS ZMFPDIS
ZMFPDIS ZMFPTRC
ZMFPTRC ZMMMXU
ZMMMXU
ZMFPDIS ZMFLLN0 PSFPDIS
PSFPDIS PSFPDIS
ZMFPDIS ZMFPDIS
ZMFPTRC ZMFPTRC
ZMMMXU ZMMMXU
ZMHPDIS ZMHPDIS ZMHPDIS
Table continues on next page

34 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 1
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

ZMMAPDIS ZMMAPDIS ZMMAPDIS
ZMMPDIS ZMMPDIS ZMMPDIS
ZMQAPDIS ZMQAPDIS ZMQAPDIS
ZMQPDIS ZMQPDIS ZMQPDIS
ZMRAPDIS ZMRAPDIS ZMRAPDIS
ZMRPDIS ZMRPDIS ZMRPDIS
ZMRPSB ZMRPSB ZMRPSB
ZSMGAPC ZSMGAPC ZSMGAPC

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 35

Application manual
36
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 2
Application

Section 2 Application

2.1 General IED application

M13637-3 v13

The Intelligent Electronic Device (IED) is used for the control, protection and
monitoring of different types of bays in power networks. The IED is especially suitable
for applications in control systems where the IEC 61850–8–1 Ed 1 or Ed 2 station bus
features of the IED can be fully utilized. It is used for station-wide interlocking via
GOOSE messages and vertical client-server MMS communication to a local station or
remote SCADA operator workplace. This supports the architecture with distributed
control IEDs in all bays with high demands on reliability. Redundant communication is
obtained through the built-in PRP and HSR features which can be used in star or
ringbus architectures. The IED can be used on all voltage levels. It is suitable for the
control of all apparatuses in any type of switchgear arrangement.

The control is performed from remote (SCADA/Station) through the IEC 61850–8–1
Ed1 or Ed2 station communication or from the built-in multi-display local HMI. Cyber
security measures are implemented to secure safe autonomous operation of the
protection and control functions even if simultaneous cyber attacks occur. For all
common types of switchgear arrangements, there are different pre-configurations for
control and interlocking. One control IED can be used for single bay or multi-bay
applications. The control operation is based on the select-before-execute principle to
give highest possible security. There are synchrocheck functions available to assist
optimal breaker closing at the right instance in synchronous as well as asynchronous
networks.

A number of protection functions are available for flexibility in use for different station
types and busbar arrangements. To fulfil the user's application requirements, the IED
features, for example, up to six instantaneous phase and ground overcurrent functions,
4–step directional or non-directional delayed-phase and ground overcurrent functions,
thermal overload and frequency functions, two instances of 2–step under- and
overvoltage functions, autorecloser functions and several different measuring
functions. This, together with the multi-display local HMI that can show one or more
pages per feeder allows using the IED for protection and control for up to six bays in a
substation.

The auto-reclose for single-, two-, and/or three-pole reclose includes priority circuits
for multi-breaker arrangements. It co-operates with the synchronism check function
with high-speed or delayed reclosing. Several breaker failure functions are available to

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 37

Application manual
Section 2 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Application

provide a breaker failure function independent from the protection IEDs, also for a
complete breaker-and-a-half diameter.

Disturbance recording and fault locator are available to allow independent post-fault
analysis after primary disturbances in case of a failure in the protection system.

Duplex communication channels for transfer of up to 192 intertrip and binary signals
are available on each remote-end data communication card (LDCM). Typical
applications are the communication between IEDs inside the station or with IEDs in a
remote station as remote I/O.

Logic is prepared with a graphical tool. The advanced logic capability allows special
applications such as automatic opening of disconnectors in multi-breaker
arrangements, closing of breaker rings, load transfer logics and so on. The graphical
configuration tool ensures simple and fast testing and commissioning.

Forcing of binary inputs and outputs is a convenient way to test wiring in substations
as well as testing configuration logic in the IEDs. Basically it means that all binary
inputs and outputs on the IED I/O modules (BOM, BIM, IOM & SOM) can be forced
to arbitrary values.

Central Account Management is an authentication infrastructure that offers a secure

solution for enforcing access control to IEDs and other systems within a substation.
This incorporates management of user accounts, roles and certificates and the
distribution of such, a procedure completely transparent to the user.

Flexible Product Naming allows the customer to use an IED-vendor independent IEC
61850 model of the IED. This customer model will be used as the IEC 61850 data
model, but all other aspects of the IED will remain unchanged (e.g., names on the local
HMI and names in the tools). This offers significant flexibility to adapt the IED to the
customers' system and standard solution.
GUID-F5776DD1-BD04-4872-BB89-A0412B4B5CC3 v1

The following tables list all the functions available in the IED. Those
functions that are not exposed to the user or do not need to be
configured are not described in this manual.

2.2 Main protection functions GUID-66BAAD98-851D-4AAC-B386-B38B57718BD2 v13

Table 2: Example of quantities

2 = number of basic instances

0-3 = option quantities
3-A03 = optional function included in packages A03 (refer to ordering details)

38 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 2
Application

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Bay control

function name
REC670 (Customized)
Differential protection
HZPDIF 87 High impedance differential protection, single phase 0-6

2.3 Back-up protection functions GUID-A8D0852F-807F-4442-8730-E44808E194F0 v13

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description

function name
REC670 (Customized)
Current protection
PHPIOC 50 Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 0-6
OC4PTOC 51_671) Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps 0-6

EFPIOC 50N Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection 0-6

EF4PTOC 51N Directional residual overcurrent protection, four steps 0-6
67N2)
NS4PTOC 46I2 Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent 0-6
protection
SDEPSDE 67N Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection 0-6
LCPTTR 26 Thermal overload protection, one time constant, Celsius 0-6
LFPTTR 26 Thermal overload protection, one time constant, Fahrenheit 0-6
TRPTTR 49 Thermal overload protection, two time constants 0-6
CCRBRF 50BF Breaker failure protection 0-6
STBPTOC 50STB Stub protection 0-6
CCPDSC 52PD Pole discordance protection 0-6
GUPPDUP 37 Directional underpower protection 0-2
GOPPDOP 32 Directional overpower protection 0-2
BRCPTOC 46 Broken conductor check 0-1
CBPGAPC Capacitor bank protection 0-3
VRPVOC 51V Voltage restrained overcurrent protection 0-3

Voltage protection
UV2PTUV 27 Two step undervoltage protection 0-2
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 39

Application manual
Section 2 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Application

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description

function name
REC670 (Customized)
OV2PTOV 59 Two step overvoltage protection 0-2
ROV2PTOV 59N Two step residual overvoltage protection 0-2
VDCPTOV 60 Voltage differential protection 0-6
LOVPTUV 27 Loss of voltage check 0-2

Frequency protection
SAPTUF 81 Underfrequency protection 0-6
SAPTOF 81 Overfrequency protection 0-6
SAPFRC 81 Rate-of-change of frequency protection 0-6
FTAQFVR 81A Frequency time accumulation protection 0-12

Multipurpose protection
CVGAPC General current and voltage protection 0-9

General calculation
SMAIHPAC Multipurpose filter 0-6

1) 67 requires voltage
2) 67N requires voltage

2.4 Control and monitoring functions GUID-E3777F16-0B76-4157-A3BF-0B6B978863DE v15

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Bay control

function name
REC670
(Customized)
Control
SESRSYN 25 Synchrocheck, energizing check and synchronizing 0-6
SMBRREC 79 Autorecloser 0-6
APC10 3 Control functionality for a single bay, max 10 objects 0-1
(1CB), including interlocking (see Table 4)
APC15 3 Control functionality for a single bay, max 15 objects 0-1
(2CB), including interlocking (see Table 5)
APC30 3 Control functionality for up to 6 bays, max 30 objects 0-1
(6CBs), including interlocking (see Table 6)
QCBAY Bay control 1+5/APC30
LOCREM Handling of LR-switch positions 1+5/APC30
Table continues on next page

40 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 2
Application

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Bay control

function name
REC670
(Customized)
LOCREMCTRL LHMI control of PSTO 1
SXCBR Circuit breaker 18
TR1ATCC 90 Automatic voltage control for tap changer, single control 0-4
TR8ATCC 90 Automatic voltage control for tap changer, parallel control 0-4
TCMYLTC 84 Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs 0-4
TCLYLTC 84 Tap changer control and supervision, 32 binary inputs 0-4
SLGAPC Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI 15
presentation
VSGAPC Selector mini switch 30
DPGAPC Generic communication function for Double Point 16
indication
SPC8GAPC Single point generic control function 8 signals 5
AUTOBITS Automation bits, command function for DNP3.0 3
SINGLECMD Single command, 16 signals 4
I103CMD Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 1
I103GENCMD Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103 50
I103POSCMD IED commands with position and select for IEC 50
60870-5-103
I103POSCMDV IED direct commands with position for IEC 60870-5-103 50
I103IEDCMD IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 1
I103USRCMD Function commands user defined for IEC 60870-5-103 4
Secondary system
supervision
CCSSPVC 87 Current circuit supervision 0-6
FUFSPVC Fuse failure supervision 0-4
VDSPVC 60 Fuse failure supervision based on voltage difference 0-2
Logic
SMPPTRC 94 Tripping logic 12
SMAGAPC General start matrix block 12
TMAGAPC Trip matrix logic 12
ALMCALH Logic for group alarm 5
WRNCALH Logic for group warning 5
INDCALH Logic for group indication 5
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 41

Application manual
Section 2 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Application

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Bay control

function name
REC670
(Customized)
AND, GATE, INV, Basic configurable logic blocks (see Table 3) 40-420
LLD, OR,
PULSETIMER,
RSMEMORY,
SRMEMORY,
TIMERSET, XOR
ANDQT, Configurable logic blocks Q/T (see Table 7) 0-1
INDCOMBSPQT,
INDEXTSPQT,
INVALIDQT,
INVERTERQT,
ORQT,
PULSETIMERQT,
RSMEMORYQT,
SRMEMORYQT,
TIMERSETQT,
XORQT
AND, GATE, INV, Extension logic package (see Table 8) 0-1
LLD, OR,
PULSETIMER,
RSMEMORY,
SLGAPC,
SRMEMORY,
TIMERSET,
VSGAPC, XOR
FXDSIGN Fixed signal function block 1
B16I Boolean to integer conversion, 16 bit 18
BTIGAPC Boolean to integer conversion with logical node 16
representation, 16 bit
IB16 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion 18
ITBGAPC Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with Logic Node 16
representation
TEIGAPC Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and 12
overflow supervision
INTCOMP Comparator for integer inputs 30
REALCOMP Comparator for real inputs 30

Table 3: Total number of instances for basic configurable logic blocks

Basic configurable logic block Total number of instances
AND 280
GATE 40
INV 420
LLD 40
OR 298
Table continues on next page

42 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 2
Application

Basic configurable logic block Total number of instances

PULSETIMER 40
RSMEMORY 40
SRMEMORY 40
TIMERSET 60
XOR 40

Table 4: Number of function instances in APC10

Function name Function description Total number of instances
SCILO Interlocking 10
BB_ES 3
A1A2_BS 2
A1A2_DC 3
ABC_BC 1
BH_CONN 1
BH_LINE_A 1
BH_LINE_B 1
DB_BUS_A 1
DB_BUS_B 1
DB_LINE 1
ABC_LINE 1
AB_TRAFO 1
SCSWI Switch controller 10
SXSWI Circuit switch 9
QCRSV Apparatus control 2
RESIN1 1
RESIN2 59
POS_EVAL Evaluation of position indication 10
XLNPROXY Proxy for signals from switching 12
device via GOOSE
GOOSEXLNRCV GOOSE function block to receive 12
a switching device

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 43

Application manual
Section 2 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Application

Table 5: Number of function instances in APC15

Function name Function description Total number of instances
SCILO Interlocking 15
BB_ES 3
A1A2_BS 2
A1A2_DC 3
ABC_BC 1
BH_CONN 1
BH_LINE_A 1
BH_LINE_B 1
DB_BUS_A 1
DB_BUS_B 1
DB_LINE 1
ABC_LINE 1
AB_TRAFO 1
SCSWI Switch controller 15
SXSWI Circuit switch 14
QCRSV Apparatus control 2
RESIN1 1
RESIN2 59
POS_EVAL Evaluation of position indication 15
XLNPROXY Proxy for signals from switching 20
device via GOOSE
GOOSEXLNRCV GOOSE function block to receive 20
a switching device

44 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 2
Application

Table 6: Number of function instances in APC30

Function name Function description Total number of instances
SCILO Interlocking 30
BB_ES 6
A1A2_BS 4
A1A2_DC 6
ABC_BC 2
BH_CONN 2
BH_LINE_A 2
BH_LINE_B 2
DB_BUS_A 3
DB_BUS_B 3
DB_LINE 3
ABC_LINE 6
AB_TRAFO 4
SCSWI Switch controller 30
SXSWI Circuit switch 24
QCRSV Apparatus control 6
RESIN1 1
RESIN2 59
POS_EVAL Evaluation of position indication 30
QCBAY Bay control 5
LOCREM Handling of LR-switch positions 5
XLNPROXY Proxy for signals from switching 42
device via GOOSE
GOOSEXLNRCV GOOSE function block to receive 42
a switching device

Table 7: Total number of instances for configurable logic blocks Q/T

Configurable logic blocks Q/T Total number of instances
ANDQT 120
INDCOMBSPQT 20
INDEXTSPQT 20
INVALIDQT 22
INVERTERQT 120
ORQT 120
PULSETIMERQT 40
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 45

Application manual
Section 2 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Application

Configurable logic blocks Q/T Total number of instances

RSMEMORYQT 40
SRMEMORYQT 40
TIMERSETQT 40
XORQT 40

Table 8: Total number of instances for extended logic package

Extended configurable logic block Total number of instances
AND 180
GATE 49
INV 180
LLD 49
OR 180
PULSETIMER 89
RSMEMORY 40
SLGAPC 74
SRMEMORY 130
TIMERSET 109
VSGAPC 120
XOR 89

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Bay control

function name
REC670
(Customized)
Monitoring
CVMMXN Power system measurement 6
CMMXU Current measurement 10
VMMXU Voltage measurement phase-phase 6
CMSQI Current sequence measurement 6
VMSQI Voltage sequence measurement 6
VNMMXU Voltage measurement phase-ground 6
AISVBAS General service value presentation of analog inputs 1
EVENT Event function 20
DRPRDRE, Disturbance report 1
A4RADR,
B1RBDR-
B22RBDR
Table continues on next page

46 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 2
Application

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Bay control

function name
REC670
(Customized)
SPGAPC Generic communication function for Single Point indication 64
SP16GAPC Generic communication function for Single Point indication 24
16 inputs
MVGAPC Generic communication function for measured values 24
BINSTATREP Logical signal status report 3
RANGE_XP Measured value expander block 66
SSIMG 63 Insulation supervision for gas medium 21
SSIML 71 Insulation supervision for liquid medium 3
SSCBR Circuit breaker condition monitoring 0-18
LMBRFLO Fault locator 0-1
LOLSPTR 26/49 Transformer insulation loss of life monitoring 0-4
HS
I103MEAS Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 1
I103MEASUSR Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103 3
I103AR Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103 1
I103EF Function status earth-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 1
I103FLTPROT Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103 1
I103IED IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 1
I103SUPERV Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 1
I103USRDEF Status for user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103 20
L4UFCNT Event counter with limit supervision 30
TEILGAPC Running hour meter 6
Metering
PCFCNT Pulse-counter logic 16
ETPMMTR Function for energy calculation and demand handling 6

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 47

Application manual
Section 2 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Application

2.5 Communication GUID-5F144B53-B9A7-4173-80CF-CD4C84579CB5 v15

IEC 61850 or function ANSI Function description Bay control

name
REC670
(Customized)
Station communication
LONSPA, SPA SPA communication protocol 1
ADE LON communication protocol 1
HORZCOMM Network variables via LON 1
RS485GEN RS485 1
DNPGEN DNP3.0 communication general protocol 1
CHSERRS485 DNP3.0 for EIA-485 communication protocol 1
CH1TCP, CH2TCP, DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication protocol 1
CH3TCP, CH4TCP
CHSEROPT DNP3.0 for TCP/IP and EIA-485 communication protocol 1
MSTSER DNP3.0 serial master 1
MST1TCP, DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication protocol 1
MST2TCP,
MST3TCP,
MST4TCP
DNPFREC DNP3.0 fault records for TCP/IP and EIA-485 communication 1
protocol
IEC 61850-8-1 IEC 61850 1
GOOSEINTLKRCV Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking 59
GOOSEBINRCV GOOSE binary receive 16
GOOSEDPRCV GOOSE function block to receive a double point value 64
GOOSEINTRCV GOOSE function block to receive an integer value 32
GOOSEMVRCV GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value 60
GOOSESPRCV GOOSE function block to receive a single point value 64
GOOSEVCTRRCV Horizontal communication via GOOSE for VCTR 7
GOOSEVCTRCONF GOOSE VCTR configuration for send and receive 1
MULTICMDRCV, Multiple command and transmit 60/10
MULTICMDSND
OPTICAL103 IEC 60870-5-103 Optical serial communication 1
RS485103 IEC 60870-5-103 serial communication for RS485 1
AGSAL Generic security application component 1
LD0LLN0 IEC 61850 LD0 LLN0 1
SYSLLN0 IEC 61850 SYS LLN0 1
Table continues on next page

48 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 2
Application

IEC 61850 or function ANSI Function description Bay control

name
REC670
(Customized)
LPHD Physical device information 1
PCMACCS IED configuration protocol 1
SECALARM Component for mapping security events on protocols such as 1
DNP3 and IEC103
FSTACCS Field service tool access 1
IEC 61850-9-2 Process bus communication, 8 merging units 0-1
ACTIVLOG Activity logging 1
ALTRK Service tracking 1
PRP IEC 62439-3 Parallel redundancy protocol 0-1
HSR IEC 62439-3 High-availability seamless redundancy 0-1
PMUCONF, Synchrophasor report, 8 phasors (see Table 9) 0-1
PMUREPORT,
PHASORREPORT1,
ANALOGREPORT1
BINARYREPORT1,
SMAI1 - SMAI12
3PHSUM
PMUSTATUS
PTP Precision time protocol 1
FRONTSTATUS Access point diagnostic for front Ethernet port 1
SCHLCCH Access point diagnostic for non-redundant Ethernet port 6
RCHLCCH Access point diagnostic for redundant Ethernet ports 3
DHCP DHCP configuration for front access point 1
QUALEXP IEC 61850 quality expander 96
Remote communication
BinSignRec1_1 Binary signal transfer receive 3/3/6
BinSignRec1_2
BinSignReceive2
BinSignTrans1_1 Binary signal transfer transmit 3/3/6
BinSignTrans1_2
BinSignTransm2
BinSigRec1_12M Binary signal transfer, 2Mbit receive/transmit 3
BinSigRec1_22M
BinSigTran1_12M
BinSigTran1_22M
LDCMTRN Transmission of analog data from LDCM 1
LDCMTRN_2M Transmission of analog data from LDCM, 2Mbit 6
LDCMRecBinStat1 Receive binary status from remote LDCM 6/3/3
LDCMRecBinStat2
LDCMRecBinStat3
LDCMRecBinS2_2M Receive binary status from LDCM, 2Mbit 3
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 49

Application manual
Section 2 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Application

IEC 61850 or function ANSI Function description Bay control

name
REC670
(Customized)
LDCMRecBinS3_2M Receive binary status from remote LDCM, 2Mbit 3
Scheme communication
ZCPSCH 85 Scheme communication logic with delta based blocking scheme 0-1
signal transmit
ZCRWPSCH 85 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for distance protection 0-1
ZCLCPSCH Local acceleration logic 0-1
ECPSCH 85 Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection 0-1
ECRWPSCH 85 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual 0-1
overcurrent protection

Table 9: Number of function instances in Synchrophasor report, 8 phasors

Function name Function description Number of instances
PMUCONF Configuration parameters for C37.118 2011 and IEEE1344 protocol 1
PMUREPORT Protocol reporting via IEEE 1344 and C37.118 1
PHASORREPORT1 Protocol reporting of phasor data via IEEE 1344 and C37.118, phasors 1-8 1
ANALOGREPORT1 Protocol reporting of analog data via IEEE 1344 and C37.118, analogs 1-8 1
BINARYREPORT1 Protocol reporting of binary data via IEEE 1344 and C37.118, binary 1-8 1
SMAI1–SMAI12 Signal matrix for analog inputs 1
3PHSUM Summation block 3 phase 6
PMUSTATUS Diagnostics for C37.118 2011 and IEEE1344 protocol 1

50 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 2
Application

2.6 Basic IED functions GUID-C8F0E5D2-E305-4184-9627-F6B5864216CA v12

Table 10: Basic IED functions

IEC 61850 or function Description
name
INTERRSIG Self supervision with internal event list
TIMESYNCHGEN Time synchronization module
BININPUT, Time synchronization
SYNCHCAN,
SYNCHGPS,
SYNCHCMPPS,
SYNCHLON,
SYNCHPPH,
SYNCHPPS, SNTP,
SYNCHSPA
PTP Precision time protocol
TIMEZONE Time synchronization
IRIG-B Time synchronization
SETGRPS Number of setting groups
ACTVGRP Parameter setting groups
TESTMODE Test mode functionality
CHNGLCK Change lock function
SMBI Signal matrix for binary inputs
SMBO Signal matrix for binary outputs
SMMI Signal matrix for mA inputs
SMAI1 - SMAI12 Signal matrix for analog inputs
3PHSUM Summation block 3 phase
ATHSTAT Authority status
ATHCHCK Authority check
AUTHMAN Authority management
FTPACCS FTP access with password
GBASVAL Global base values for settings
ALTMS Time master supervision
ALTIM Time management
COMSTATUS Protocol diagnostic

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 51

Application manual
Section 2 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Application

Table 11: Local HMI functions

IEC 61850 or function ANSI Description
name
LHMICTRL Local HMI signals
LANGUAGE Local human machine language
SCREEN Local HMI Local human machine screen behavior
FNKEYTY1–FNKEYTY5 Parameter setting function for HMI in PCM600
FNKEYMD1–
FNKEYMD5
LEDGEN General LED indication part for LHMI
OPENCLOSE_LED LHMI LEDs for open and close keys
GRP1_LED1– Basic part for CP HW LED indication module
GRP1_LED15
GRP2_LED1–
GRP2_LED15
GRP3_LED1–
GRP3_LED15

52 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 3
Configuration

Section 3 Configuration

3.1 Description of configuration REC670 IP14799-1 v2

3.1.1 Introduction IP14800-1 v1

3.1.1.1 Description of configuration A30 M15200-3 v7

The configuration of the IED is shown in Figure 2.

This configuration is used in single breaker arrangements with single or double busbar.

Control, measuring and interlocking is fully configured.

The following should be noted. The configuration is made with the binary input and
binary output boards in the basic delivery. In many cases this is sufficient, in other
cases, for example with full control of all apparatuses included, more IO cards are
required. Our proposal for a full version with control is to use two binary input
modules and one binary output module.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 53

Application manual
Section 3 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Configuration

WA1 REC670 A30 – Double busbar in single breaker arrangement 12AI (6I + 6U)

WA2 3 Control 3 Control 3 Control

S CILO S CSWI S XSWI
QB1 QB2
3 Control 3 Control 3 Control
S CILO S CSWI S XSWI

WA2_VT MET UN
VN MMXU

QC1 WA1_VT 3 Control 3 Control 3 Control

S CILO S CSWI S XSWI

QA1 3 Control 3 Control 3 Control MET UN 25 SC/VC

S CILO S CSWI S XCBR VN MMXU SES RSYN

QC2
3 Control 3 Control 3 Control
S CILO S CSWI S XSWI

LINE_CT Control
Control
Control MET I MET Isqi MET P/Q U>/I<
SSSCBR
S SCBR
SCBR C MMXU C MSQI CV MMXN FUF SPVC

3 Control 3 Control 3 Control MET W/Varh

S CILO S CSWI S XSWI ETP MMTR
QB9
3 Control 3 Control 3 Control 63 71
S CILO S CSWI S XSWI S SIMG S SIML
QC9
DFR/SER DR 3 Control 3 Control

LINE_VT DRP RDRE Q CBAY Q CRSV

MET U MET Usqi MET UN

V MMXU V MSQI VN MMXU

Other Functions available from the function library

46 Iub> 52PD PD 87 INd/I 21FL FL 27 3U< 3 Control 94 1 0 84 84

BRC PTOC CC PDSC CCS SPVC LMB RFLO LOV PTUV R ESIN SMP PTRC TCL YLTC TCM YLTC

60 Ud>
VDC PTOV

Optional Functions

50BF 3I>BF 2(I>/U<) 85 85 50N IN>> 51N_67N 4(IN>) 32 P> 37 P< 87 Id>
CC RBRF CV GAPC EC PSCH ECRW PSCH EF PIOC EF4 PTOC GOP PDOP GUP PDUP HZ PDIF

26 θ> 26 θ> 46I2 4(I2>) 51_67 4(3I>) 59 2(3U>) 50 3I>> 59N 2(U0>) 81 df/dt<>
LC PTTR LF PTTR NS4 PTOC OC4 PTOC OV2 PTOV PH PIOC PMU REP ROV2 PTOV SA PFRC

81 f> 81 f< 67N IN> 79 5(0 1) 50STB 3I>STB 49 θ> 90 U↑↓ 90 U↑↓ 27 2(3U<)
SA PTOF SA PTUF SDE PSDE SMB RREC STB PTOC TR PTTR TR1 ATCC TR8 ATCC UV2 PTUV

60 Ud> 51V 2(I>/U<) 85 85

VD SPVC VR PVOC ZCLC PSCH ZC PSCH ZCRW PSCH

IEC05000837-5-en.vsd

IEC05000837 V5 EN-US

Figure 2: Configuration diagram for configuration A30

54 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 3
Configuration

3.1.1.2 Description of configuration B30 M15200-12 v5

The configuration of the IED is shown in Figure 3.

This configuration is used in double breaker arrangements.

Control, measuring and interlocking is fully configured, including communication with

other bays such as other lines and the bus coupler over GOOSE.

The following should be noted. The configuration is made with the binary input and
binary output boards in the basic IED delivery. In many cases this is sufficient, in other
cases e.g. with full control of all apparatuses included more IO cards are required. Our
proposal for a full version with control is to use two binary input modules and one or
two binary output modules. For systems without Substation Automation a second
binary output board might be required.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 55

Application manual
Section 3 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Configuration

WA1
REC670 B30 - Double breaker arrangement 12AI (6I + 6U)
WA2

3 Control 3 Control 3 Control

S CILO S CSWI S XSWI
WA2_VT
QB1 QB2
3 Control 3 Control 3 Control MET UN 25 SC/VC

WA1_VT S CILO S CSWI S XSWI VN MMXU SES RSYN

3 Control 3 Control 3 Control MET UN 25 SC/VC

S CILO S CSWI S XCBR VN MMXU SES RSYN
QA1 QA2
3 Control 3 Control 3 Control
S CILO S CSWI S XCBR

LINE_CT1 Control
Control
Control
SSSSCBR
SCBR
SCBR
MET I MET Isqi U>/I<

LINE_CT2 C MMXU C MSQI FUF SPVC

Control
Control
Control
SSSSCBR
SCBR
SCBR

3 Control 3 Control 3 Control MET P/Q

QB61 QB62
S CILO S CSWI S XSWI CV MMXN

3 Control 3 Control 3 Control MET W/Varh

S CILO S CSWI S XSWI ETP MMTR

3 Control 3 Control 3 Control

S CILO S CSWI S XSWI

3 Control 3 Control 3 Control

QB9 S CILO S CSWI S XSWI
QC9
DFR/SER DR 3 Control 3 Control 63 71
LINE_VT DRP RDRE Q CBAY Q CRSV S SIMG S SIML

MET U MET Usqi MET UN

V MMXU V MSQI VN MMXU

Other Functions available from the function library

46 Iub> 52PD PD 87 INd/I 21FL FL 27 3U< 3 Control 94 1 0 84 84
BRC PTOC CC PSDC CCS SPVC LMB RFLO LOV PTUV R ESIN SMP PTRC TCL YLTC TCM YLTC

60 Ud>
VDC PTOV

Optional Functions
50BF 3I>BF 2(I>/U<) 85 85 50N IN>> 51N_67N 4(IN>) 32 P> 37 P< 87 Id>
CC RBRF CV GAPC EC PSCH ECRW PSCH EF PIOC EF4 PTOC GOP PDOP GUP PDUP HZ PDIF

26 θ 26 θ 46I2 4(I2>) 51_67 4(3I>) 59 2(3U>) 50 3I>> 59N 2(U0>) 81 df/dt<>

LC PTTR LF PTTR NS4 PTOC OC4 PTOC OV2 PTOV PH PIOC PMU REP ROV2 PTOV SA PFRC

f> f< θ U↑↓ U↑↓ 2(3U<)

↓

81 81 67N IN> 79 5(0 1) 50STB 3I>STB 49 90 90 27

SA PTOF SA PTUF SDE PSDE SMB RREC STB PTOC TR PTTR TR1 ATCC TR8 ATCC UV2 PTUV

60 Ud> 51V 2(I>/U<) 85 85

VD SPVC VR PVOC ZCLC PSCH ZC PSCH ZCRW PSCH

=IEC05000838=5=en=Original.vsd
IEC05000838 V5 EN-US

Figure 3: Configuration diagram for configuration B30

56 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 3
Configuration

3.1.1.3 Description of configuration C30 M15200-24 v5

The configuration of the IED is shown on Figure 4.

This configuration is used in breaker-and-a-half arrangements for a full diameter. The

configuration can also be used for a section of the diameter with utilization of a part of
the apparatuses only.

Control, measuring and interlocking is fully configured, including communication with

other bays such as other lines and the bus coupler over GOOSE.

The following should be noted. The configuration is made with the binary input and
binary output boards in the basic IED delivery. In many cases this is sufficient, in other
cases, for example with full control of all apparatuses included more IO cards are
required. Our proposal for a full version with control is to use three binary input
modules and two binary output modules. For systems without Substation Automation a
second binary output board might be required.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 57

Application manual
Section 3 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Configuration

WA1
REC670C30 – Complete one-and a half breaker diameter arrangement 24AI (6I + 6U, 6I+6U)

QB1 3 Control 3 Control 3 Control

S CILO S CSWI S XSWI
WA1_VT

WA1_QA1 3 Control 3 Control 3 Control MET UN 25 SC

25 SC
25 SC/VC
S CILO S CSWI S XCBR VN MMXU SES RSYN
SES RSYN
SES RSYN
WA1_CT Control
Control
Control
SSSCBR
S SCBR
SCBR
MET I MET Isqi MET P/Q U>/I<
Σ
C MMXU C MSQI CV MMXN FUF SPVC
Control
Control
Control
WA1_QB6
SSSCBR
S SCBR
SCBR
LINE1_QB9
3 Control 3 Control 3 Control MET W/Varh
S CILO S CSWI S XSWI ETP MMTR

3 Control 3 Control 3 Control

QB61 S CILO S CSWI S XSWI
LINE1_QC9
3 Control 3 Control 3 Control
S CILO S CSWI S XSWI
LINE1_VT
3 Control 3 Control 3 Control
S CILO S CSWI S XSWI

TIE_QA1
3 Control 3 Control 3 Control MET U MET Usqi MET UN
S CILO S CSWI S XCBR V MMXU V MSQI VN MMXU
TIE_CT
MET I MET Isqi MET P/Q U>/I<
Control
Control
Σ
Control C MMXU C MSQI CV MMXN FUF SPVC
QB62
SSSCBR
S SCBR
SCBR
LINE2_QB9
3 Control 3 Control 3 Control MET W/Varh
S CILO S CSWI S XSWI ETP MMTR

3 Control 3 Control 3 Control

WA2_QB6 S CILO S CSWI S XSWI

WA2_CT
LINE2_QC9
3 Control 3 Control 3 Control DFR/SER DR

LINE2_VT S CILO S CSWI S XSWI DRP RDRE

3 Control 3 Control 3 Control MET U MET Usqi MET UN

S CILO S CSWI S XSWI V MMXU V MSQI VN MMXU

3 Control 3 Control 3 Control 63 71

WA2_QA1 S CILO S CSWI S XCBR S SIMG S SIML
WA2_VT

3 Control 3 Control 3 Control MET UN

S CILO S CSWI S XSWI VN MMXU
QB2
3 Control 3 Control
WA2 Q CBAY Q CRSV

Other Functions available from the function library

46 Iub> 52PD PD 87 INd/I 21FL FL 27 3U< 3 Control 94 1 0 84 84 60 Ud>
BRC PTOC CC PDSC CCS SPVC LMB RFLO LOV PTUV R ESIN SMP PTRC TCL YLTC TCM YLTC VDC PTOV

Optional Functions
50BF 3I>BF U</I> 85 85 50N IN>> 51N_67N 4(IN>) 32 P> 37 P< 87 Id> 26 θ>
CC RBRF CV GAPC EC PSCH ECRW PSCH EF PIOC EF4 PTOC GOP PDOP GUP PDUP HZ PDIF LC PTTR

26 θ> 46I2 4(I2>) 51_67 4(3I>) 59 2(3U>) 50 3I>> 59N 2(U0>) 81 df/dt<> 81 f> 81 f<
LF PTTR NS4 PTOC OC4 PTOC OV2 PTOV PH PIOC PMU REP ROV2 PTOV SA PFRC SA PTOF SA PTUF

67N IN> 79 5(0 1) 50STB 3I>STB 49 θ> 90 U↑↓ 90 U↑↓ 27 2(3U<) 60 Ud> 51V 2(I>/U<)
↓

SDE PSDE SMB RREC STB PTOC TR PTTR TR1 ATCC TR8 ATCC UV2 PTUV VD SPVC VR PVOC ZCLC PSCH

85 85
ZC PSCH ZCRW PSCH

IEC05000839-5-en.vsd

IEC05000839 V5 EN-US

Figure 4: Configuration diagram for configuration C30

58 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 3
Configuration

3.1.1.4 Description of configuration D30 GUID-15D86A4C-4D37-432E-8DC2-518814830097 v1

WA1 REC670 D30 – Double busbar in single breaker arrangement with PMU functionality
12AI (6I + 6U)

WA2 3 Control 3 Control 3 Control

S CILO S CSWI S XSWI

QB1 QB2
3 Control 3 Control 3 Control

S CILO S CSWI S XSWI

WA2_VT MET UN
VN MMXU

QC1 WA1_VT 3 Control 3 Control 3 Control

S CILO S CSWI S XSWI

QA1 3 Control 3 Control 3 Control MET UN 25 SC/VC

S CILO S CSWI S XCBR VN MMXU SES RSYN
QC2
3 Control 3 Control 3 Control

S CILO S CSWI S XSWI

LINE_CT Control
Control
Control MET I MET Isqi MET P/Q U>/I<
SSCBR
S
S SCBR
SCBR C MMXU C MSQI CV MMXN FUF SPVC

3 Control 3 Control 3 Control MET W/Varh

S CILO S CSWI S XSWI ETP MMTR
QB9
3 Control 3 Control 3 Control

S CILO S CSWI S XSWI

QC9 Pha sor data
DFR/SER DR 3 Control 3 Control IEEE Std 1344

LINE_VT DRP RDRE Q CBAY Q CRSV PMU REP IEEE Std C37.118

MET U MET Usqi MET UN

V MMXU V MSQI VN MMXU

Other Functions available from the function library

46 Iub> 52PD PD 87 INd/I 21FL FL 27 3U< 3 Control 94 1 0 84 84
BRC PTOC CC PDSC CCS SPVC LMB RFLO LOV PTUV R ESIN SMP PTRC TCL YLTC TCM YLTC

60 Ud>
VDC PTOV

Optional Functions

50BF 3I>BF 2(I>/U<) 85 85 50N IN>> 51N_67N 4(IN>) 32 P> 37 P< 87 Id>
CC RBRF CV GAPC EC PSCH ECRW PSCH EF PIOC EF4 PTOC GOP PDOP GUP PDUP HZ PDIF

26 θ> 26 θ> 46I2 4(I2>) 51_67 4(3I>) 59 2(3U>) 50 3I>> 59N 2(U0>) 81 df/dt<> 81 f>
LC PTTR LF PTTR NS4 PTOC OC4 PTOC OV2 PTOV PH PIOC ROV2 PTOV SA PFRC SA PTOF

81 f< 67N IN> 79 5(0 1) 50STB 3I>STB 49 θ> 90 U↑↓ 90 U↑↓ 27 2(3U<) 60 Ud>
SA PTUF SDE PSDE SMB RREC STB PTOC TR PTTR TR1 ATCC TR8 ATCC UV2 PTUV VD SPVC

51V 2(I>/U<) 85 85
VR PVOC ZCLC PSCH ZC PSCH ZCRW PSCH
IEC16000194=IEC16000194=1=en=Original
.vsdx

IEC16000194 V1 EN-US

Figure 5: Configuration diagram for configuration D30

SEMOD51278-4 v11

Four packages have been defined for following applications:

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 59

Application manual
Section 3 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Configuration

• Single breaker (double or single bus) arrangement (A30)

• Double breaker arrangement (B30)
• Breaker-and-a-half arrangement for a complete diameter (C30)
• Single breaker (double bus) arrangement with PMU functionality (D30)

Optional functions are available in PCM600 Application Configuration Tool and can
be configured by the user. Interface to analog and binary IO:s are configurable without
need of configuration changes. Analog and control circuits have been pre-defined.
Other signals need to be applied as required for each application. The main differences
between the packages above are the interlocking modules and the number of
apparatuses to control.

60 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 4
Analog inputs

Section 4 Analog inputs

4.1 Introduction SEMOD55003-5 v11

Analog input channels must be configured and set properly in order to get correct
measurement results and correct protection operations. For power measuring, all
directional and differential functions, the directions of the input currents must be
defined in order to reflect the way the current transformers are installed/connected in
the field ( primary and secondary connections ). Measuring and protection algorithms
in the IED use primary system quantities. Setting values are in primary quantities as
well and it is important to set the data about the connected current and voltage
transformers properly.

An AISVBAS reference PhaseAngleRef can be defined to facilitate service values

reading. This analog channel's phase angle will always be fixed to zero degrees and
remaining analog channel's phase angle information will be shown in relation to this
analog input. During testing and commissioning of the IED, the reference channel can
be changed to facilitate testing and service values reading.

The availability of VT inputs depends on the ordered transformer input

module (TRM) type.

4.2 Setting guidelines SEMOD55068-1 v1

SEMOD130348-4 v4

The available setting parameters related to analog inputs are depending

on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in
PCM600.

4.2.1 Setting of the phase reference channel SEMOD55055-5 v3

All phase angles are calculated in relation to a defined reference. An appropriate

analog input channel is selected and used as phase reference. The parameter
PhaseAngleRef defines the analog channel that is used as phase angle reference.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 61

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Analog inputs

4.2.1.1 Example SEMOD55055-11 v5

Usually the A phase-to-ground voltage connected to the first VT channel number of the
transformer input module (TRM) is selected as the phase reference. The first VT
channel number depends on the type of transformer input module.

For a TRM with 6 current and 6 voltage inputs the first VT channel is 7. The setting
PhaseAngleRef=7 shall be used if the phase reference voltage is connected to that
channel.

4.2.2 Setting of current channels SEMOD55055-16 v6

The direction of a current to the IED is depending on the connection of the CT. Unless
indicated otherwise, the main CTs are supposed to be Wye (star) connected and can be
connected with the grounding point to the object or from the object. This information
must be set in the IED. The convention of the directionality is defined as follows: A
positive value of current, power, and so on means that the quantity has the direction
into the object and a negative value means direction out from the object. For
directional functions the direction into the object is defined as Forward and the
direction out from the object is defined as Reverse. See Figure 6

A positive value of current, power, and so on (forward) means that the quantity flows
towards the object. A negative value of current, power, and so on (reverse) means that
the quantity flows away from the object. See Figure 6.

Definition of direction Definition of direction

for directional functions for directional functions
Reverse Forward Forward Reverse

Protected Object
Line, transformer, etc
e.g. P, Q, I e.g. P, Q, I
Measured quantity is Measured quantity is
positive when flowing positive when flowing
towards the object towards the object

Set parameter Set parameter

CTStarPoint CTStarPoint
Correct Setting is Correct Setting is
"ToObject" "FromObject"

en05000456-2.vsd
ANSI05000456 V2 EN-US

Figure 6: Internal convention of the directionality in the IED

With correct setting of the primary CT direction, CT_WyePoint set to FromObject or

ToObject, a positive quantities always flowing towards the protected object and a
direction defined as Forward always is looking towards the protected object. The
following examples show the principle.

62 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 4
Analog inputs

4.2.2.1 Example 1 SEMOD55055-23 v6

Two IEDs used for protection of two objects.

Line

Ip
Transformer Ip Ip
Line
Reverse Forward

Definition of direction
for directional functions
Transformer
Is Is
protection Line protection

IED IED

Setting of current input: Setting of current input: Setting of current input:

Set parameter Set parameter Set parameter
CT_WyePoint with CT_WyePoint with CT_WyePoint with
Transformer as Transformer as Line as
reference object. reference object. reference object.
Correct setting is Correct setting is Correct setting is
"ToObject" "ToObject" "FromObject"

ANSI05000753.vsd
ANSI05000753 V2 EN-US

Figure 7: Example how to set CT_WyePoint parameters in the IED

Figure 7 shows the normal case where the objects have their own CTs. The settings for
CT direction shall be done according to the figure. To protect the line, direction of the
directional functions of the line protection shall be set to Forward. This means that the
protection is looking towards the line.

4.2.2.2 Example 2 SEMOD55055-29 v7

Two IEDs used for protection of two objects and sharing a CT.

Figure 8: Example how to set CT_WyePoint parameters in the IED

This example is similar to example 1, but here the transformer is feeding just one line
and the line protection uses the same CT as the transformer protection does. The CT
direction is set with different reference objects for the two IEDs though it is the same
current from the same CT that is feeding the two IEDs. With these settings, the
directional functions of the line protection shall be set to Forward to look towards the
line.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 63

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Analog inputs

4.2.2.3 Example 3 SEMOD55055-35 v7

One IED used to protect two objects.

Transformer
Line

Forward Reverse

Definition of direction for

directional
Transformer and line functions
Line protection

Setting of current input: Setting of current input:

Set parameter Set parameter
CT_WyePoint with CT_WyePoint with
Transformer as Transformer as
reference object. reference object.
Correct setting is Correct setting is
"ToObject" "ToObject"

en05000461_ansi.vsd

ANSI05000461 V1 EN-US

Figure 9: Example how to set CT_WyePoint parameters in the IED

In this example, one IED includes both transformer and line protections and the line
protection uses the same CT as the transformer protection does. For both current input
channels, the CT direction is set with the transformer as reference object. This means
that the direction Forward for the line protection is towards the transformer. To look
towards the line, the direction of the directional functions of the line protection must be
set to Reverse. The direction Forward/Reverse is related to the reference object that is
the transformer in this case.

When a function is set to Reverse and shall protect an object in reverse direction, it
shall be noted that some directional functions are not symmetrical regarding the reach
in forward and reverse direction. It is in first hand the reach of the directional criteria
that can differ. Normally it is not any limitation but it is advisable to have it in mind
and check if it is acceptable for the application in question.

If the IED has sufficient number of analog current inputs, an alternative solution is
shown in Figure 10. The same currents are fed to two separate groups of inputs and the
line and transformer protection functions are configured to the different inputs. The CT

64 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 4
Analog inputs

direction for the current channels to the line protection is set with the line as reference
object and the directional functions of the line protection shall be set to Forward to
protect the line.

Transformer

Line

Reverse Forward

Definition of direction for

directional
Transformer and line functions
Line protection

Setting of current input

for line functions:
Set parameter
CT_WyePoint with
Line as
Setting of current input Setting of current input reference object.
for transformer functions: for transformer functions: Correct setting is
Set parameter Set parameter "FromObject"
CT_WyePoint with CT_WyePoint with
Transformer as Transformer as
reference object. reference object.
Correct setting is Correct setting is
"ToObject" "ToObject"
en05000462_ansi.vsd

ANSI05000462 V1 EN-US

Figure 10: Example how to set CT_WyePoint parameters in the IED

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 65

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Analog inputs

Busbar

2
Busbar
Protection

2 1

en06000196_ansi.vsd

ANSI06000196 V1 EN-US

Figure 11: Example how to set CT_WyePoint parameters in the IED

For busbar protection, it is possible to set the CT_WyePoint parameters in two ways.

The first solution will be to use busbar as a reference object. In that case for all CT
inputs marked with 1 in Figure 11, set CT_WyePoint = ToObject, and for all CT inputs
marked with 2 in Figure 11, set CT_WyePoint = FromObject.

The second solution will be to use all connected bays as reference objects. In that case
for all CT inputs marked with 1 in Figure 11, set CT_WyePoint = FromObject, and for
all CT inputs marked with 2 in Figure 11, set CT_WyePoint = ToObject.

66 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 4
Analog inputs

Regardless which one of the above two options is selected, busbar differential
protection will behave correctly.

The main CT ratios must also be set. This is done by setting the two parameters CTsec
and CTprim for each current channel. For a 1000/5 A CT, the following settings shall
be used:
• CTprim = 1000 (value in A)
• CTsec =5 (value in A).

4.2.2.4 Examples on how to connect, configure and set CT inputs for most
commonly used CT connections SEMOD55055-296 v7

Figure 12 defines the marking of current transformer terminals commonly used around
the world:

In the SMAI function block, you have to set if the SMAI block is
measuring current or voltage. This is done with the parameter:
AnalogInputType: Current/Voltage. The ConnectionType: phase -phase/
phase-ground and GlobalBaseSel.

P1 P2
IPri

ISec (H1) (H2)

S1 (X1) S2 (X2)
x S2 (X2) x S1 (X1)

P2 P1
(H2) (H1)

a) b) c)

en06000641.vsd
IEC06000641 V1 EN-US

Figure 12: Commonly used markings of CT terminals

Where:
a) is symbol and terminal marking used in this document. Terminals marked with a square
indicates the primary and secondary winding terminals with the same (that is, positive)
polarity
b) and are equivalent symbols and terminal marking used by IEC (ANSI) standard for CTs. Note that
c) for these two cases the CT polarity marking is correct!

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 67

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Analog inputs

It shall be noted that depending on national standard and utility practices, the rated
secondary current of a CT has typically one of the following values:

• 1A
• 5A

However, in some cases, the following rated secondary currents are used as well:

• 2A
• 10A

The IED fully supports all of these rated secondary values.

It is recommended to:
• use 1A rated CT input into the IED in order to connect CTs with
1A and 2A secondary rating
• use 5A rated CT input into the IED in order to connect CTs with
5A and 10A secondary rating

4.2.2.5 Example on how to connect a wye connected three-phase CT set to the

IED SEMOD55055-352 v11

Figure 13 gives an example about the wiring of a wye connected two-phase CT set to
the IED. It gives an overview of the actions which are needed to make this
measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions within the IED
as well.

For correct terminal designations, see the connection diagrams valid for
the delivered IED.

68 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 4
Analog inputs

A B C
IED
1 2 4

I_C
I_B
I_A

3
SMAI_20
I_A
CT 600/5
I_B
Wye Connected
I_C

Protected Object

ANSI13000002-3-en.vsd
ANSI13000002 V3 EN-US

Figure 13: Wye connected three-phase CT set with wye point towards the protected object

Where:
1) The drawing shows how to connect three individual phase currents from a wye connected
three-phase CT set to the three CT inputs of the IED.
2) The current inputs are located in the TRM. It shall be noted that for all these current inputs the
following setting values shall be entered for the example shown in Figure 13.

• CTprim=600A
• CTsec=5A
• CTStarPoint=ToObject

Ratio of the first two parameters is only used inside the IED. The third parameter
(CTStarPoint=ToObject) as set in this example causes no change on the measured currents. In
other words, currents are already measured towards the protected object.
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 69

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Analog inputs

3) These three connections are the links between the three current inputs and the three input
channels of the preprocessing function block 4). Depending on the type of functions, which
need this current information, more than one preprocessing block might be connected in
parallel to the same three physical CT inputs.
4) The preprocessing block that has the task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and
calculate:

• fundamental frequency phasors for all three input channels

• harmonic content for all three input channels
• positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency
phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence
quantities)

These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions within
the IED, which are connected to this preprocessing function block. For this application most of
the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values.
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for
IEDs installed in power plants), then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be set
accordingly.
Section SMAI in this manual provides information on adaptive frequency tracking for the signal
matrix for analogue inputs (SMAI).
5) AI3P in the SMAI function block is a grouped signal which contains all the data about the
phases A, B, C and neutral quantity; in particular the data about fundamental frequency
phasors, harmonic content and positive sequence, negative and zero sequence quantities are
available.
AI1, AI2, AI3, AI4 are the output signals from the SMAI function block which contain the
fundamental frequency phasors and the harmonic content of the corresponding input channels
of the preprocessing function block.
AIN is the signal which contains the fundamental frequency phasors and the harmonic content
of the neutral quantity. In this example, GRP2N is not connected so this data is calculated by
the preprocessing function block on the basis of the inputs GRP_A, GRP_B and GRP_C. If
GRP2N is connected, the data reflects the measured value of GRP2N.

Another alternative is to have the wye point of the three-phase CT set as shown in
figure 14:

70 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 4
Analog inputs

A B C
IED

IC
IB
IA

3 4
1

SMAI_20_2
IC BLOCK AI3P
REVROT AI1
IB ^GRP2_A 5 AI2
^GRP2_B AI3
^GRP2_C AI4
CT 800/1 IA ^GRP2N AIN
Wye Connected

Protected Object

ANSI11000026-5-en-.vsd

ANSI11000026 V5 EN-US

Figure 14: Wye connected three-phase CT set with its wye point away from the protected object

In the example, everything is done in a similar way as in the above described example
(Figure 13). The only difference is the setting of the parameter CTStarPoint of the used
current inputs on the TRM (item 2 in Figure 14 and 13):

• CTprim=600A
• CTsec=5A
• CTWyePoint=FromObject

The ratio of the first two parameters is only used inside the IED. The third parameter as
set in this example will negate the measured currents in order to ensure that the
currents are measured towards the protected object within the IED.

A third alternative is to have the residual/neutral current from the three-phase CT set
connected to the IED as shown in Figure 14.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 71

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Analog inputs

A B C
IED
6
IA

IB

IC
3

IN 1 4 SMAI2
1 BLOCK AI3P
2 AI 01 (I) ^GRP2_A AI1

IC ^GRP2_B AI2
3
^GRP2_C AI3
4 AI 02 (I)
^GRP2N AI4
IB 5 TYPE AIN
6 AI 03 (I)
CT 800/1
IA 7
Wye Connected
8 AI 04 (I)
5
9
2 10 AI 05 (I)
11
12 AI 06 (I)

Protected Object

ANSI06000644-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000644 V2 EN-US

Figure 15: Wye connected three-phase CT set with its wye point away from the protected object and the
residual/neutral current connected to the IED

Where:
1) Shows how to connect three individual phase currents from a wye connected three-phase CT
set to the three CT inputs of the IED.
2) Shows how to connect residual/neutral current from the three-phase CT set to the fourth input
in the IED. It shall be noted that if this connection is not made, the IED will still calculate this
current internally by vectorial summation of the three individual phase currents.
3) Is the TRM where these current inputs are located. It shall be noted that for all these current
inputs the following setting values shall be entered.

• CTprim=800A
• CTsec=1A
• CTStarPoint=FromObject
• ConnectionType=Ph-N

The ratio of the first two parameters is only used inside the IED. The third parameter as set in
this example will have no influence on measured currents (that is, currents are already
measured towards the protected object).
4) Are three connections made in the Signal Matrix tool (SMT) and Application configuration tool
(ACT), which connects these three current inputs to the first three input channels on the
preprocessing function block 6). Depending on the type of functions, which need this current
information, more than one preprocessing block might be connected in parallel to these three
CT inputs.
Table continues on next page

72 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 4
Analog inputs

5) Is a connection made in the Signal Matrix tool (SMT) and Application configuration tool (ACT),
which connects the residual/neutral current input to the fourth input channel of the
preprocessing function block 6). Note that this connection in SMT shall not be done if the
residual/neutral current is not connected to the IED.
6) Is a Preprocessing block that has the task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and
calculate:

• fundamental frequency phasors for all input channels

• harmonic content for all input channels
• positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency
phasors of the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence
quantities)

These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions within
the IED, which are connected to this preprocessing function block in the configuration tool. For
this application, most of the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values.
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for
IEDs installed in the generating stations), then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be
set accordingly.

4.2.2.6 Example how to connect delta connected three-phase CT set to the IED SEMOD55055-392 v7

Figure 16 gives an example how to connect a delta connected three-phase CT set to the
IED. It gives an overview of the required actions by the user in order to make this
measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions in the IED as
well.

For correct terminal designations, see the connection diagrams valid for
the delivered IED.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 73

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Analog inputs

A B C IED
2

1 4

IC
IB
IA

SMAI_20
3
IA-IB
DAB Connected

IB-IC
CT 600/5
in Delta

IC-IA

ANSI11000027-2-en.vsd

Protected Object

ANSI11000027 V2 EN-US

Figure 16: Delta DAB connected three-phase CT set

74 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 4
Analog inputs

Where:
1) shows how to connect three individual phase currents from a delta connected three-phase CT
set to three CT inputs of the IED.
2) is the TRM where these current inputs are located. It shall be noted that for all these current
inputs the following setting values shall be entered.
CTprim=600A
CTsec=5A

• CTWyePoint=ToObject
• ConnectionType=Ph-Ph

3) are three connections made in Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), Application configuration tool (ACT),
which connect these three current inputs to first three input channels of the preprocessing
function block 4). Depending on the type of functions which need this current information, more
then one preprocessing block might be connected in parallel to these three CT inputs.
4) is a Preprocessing block that has the task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and
calculate:

• fundamental frequency phasors for all three input channels

• harmonic content for all three input channels
• positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency
phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence
quantities)

These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions within
the IED, which are connected to this preprocessing function block. For this application most of
the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values.
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for
IEDs installed in the generating stations) then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be
set accordingly.

Another alternative is to have the delta connected CT set as shown in figure 17:

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 75

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Analog inputs

A B C IED

2
4

IC
IB
IA

3 SMAI_20

IA-IC
DCA Connected

IB-IA
CT 800/1
in Delta

IC-IB

ANSI11000028-2-en.vsd

Protected Object

ANSI11000028 V2 EN-US

Figure 17: Delta DAC connected three-phase CT set

In this case, everything is done in a similar way as in the above described example,
except that for all used current inputs on the TRM the following setting parameters
shall be entered:

CTprim=800A

CTsec=1A

• CTWyePoint=ToObject
• ConnectionType=Ph-Ph

It is important to notice the references in SMAI. As inputs at Ph-Ph are expected to be

A-B, B-Crespectively C-A we need to tilt 180º by setting ToObject.

4.2.2.7 Example how to connect single-phase CT to the IED SEMOD55055-431 v8

Figure 18 gives an example how to connect the single-phase CT to the IED. It gives an
overview of the required actions by the user in order to make this measurement
available to the built-in protection and control functions within the IED as well.

76 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 4
Analog inputs

For correct terminal designations, see the connection diagrams valid for
the delivered IED.

IED
Protected Object

A B C

SMAI_20_2
1 BLOCK AI3P
(+) REVROT AI1
^GRP2_A AI2
INS
CT 1000/1

^GRP2_B AI3
a) (+) ^GRP2_C AI4
(-) ^GRP2_N AIN
(+)
b) (-)
INS
3
(-)
ANSI11000029-3-en.vsd
INP

ANSI11000029 V3 EN-US

Figure 18: Connections for single-phase CT input

Where:
1) shows how to connect single-phase CT input in the IED.
2) is TRM where these current inputs are located. It shall be noted that for all these current
inputs the following setting values shall be entered.
For connection (a) shown in Fgure 18:
CTprim= 1000 A
CTsec= 1A
CTWyePoint=ToObject

For connection (b) shown in Figure 18:

CTprim= 1000 A
CTsec= 1A
CTWyePoint=FromObject
3) shows the connection made in SMT tool, which connect this CT input to the fourth input
channel of the preprocessing function block 4).
4) is a Preprocessing block that has the task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and
calculate values. The calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and
control functions within the IED, which are connected to this preprocessing function block.
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for
IEDs installed in the power plants) then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be set
accordingly.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 77

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Analog inputs

4.2.3 Relationships between setting parameter Base Current, CT

rated primary current and minimum pickup of a protection IED GUID-8EB19363-9178-4F04-A6AC-AF0C2F99C5AB v1

Note that for all line protection applications (e.g. distance protection or line differential
protection) the parameter Base Current (i.e. IBase setting in the IED) used by the
relevant protection function, shall always be set equal to the largest rated CT primary
current among all CTs involved in the protection scheme. The rated CT primary current
value is set as parameter CTPrim under the IED TRM settings.

For all other protection applications (e.g. generator, shunt reactor, shunt capacitor and
transformer protection) it is typically desirable to set IBase parameter equal to the rated
current of the protected object. However this is only recommended to do if the rated
current of the protected object is within the range of 40% to 120% of the selected CT
rated primary current. If for any reason (e.g. high maximum short circuit current) the
rated current of the protected object is less than 40% of the rated CT primary current, it
is strongly recommended to set the parameter IBase in the IED to be equal to the
largest rated CT primary current among all CTs involved in the protection scheme and
installed on the same voltage level. This will effectively make the protection scheme
less sensitive; however, such measures are necessary in order to avoid possible
problems with loss of the measurement accuracy in the IED.

Regardless of the applied relationship between the IBase parameter and the rated CT
primary current, the corresponding minimum pickup of the function on the CT
secondary side must always be verified. It is strongly recommended that the minimum
pickup of any instantaneous protection function (e.g. differential, restricted earth fault,
distance, instantaneous overcurrent, etc.) shall under no circumstances be less than 4%
of the used IED CT input rating (i.e. 1A or 5A). This corresponds to 40mA secondary
for IED 1A rated inputs and to 200mA secondary for IED 5A rated inputs used by the
function. This shall be individually verified for all current inputs involved in the
protection scheme.

Note that exceptions from the above 4% rule may be acceptable for very special
applications (e.g. when Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC is involved in the protection
scheme).

4.2.4 Setting of voltage channels SEMOD55055-44 v4

As the IED uses primary system quantities, the main VT ratios must be known to the
IED. This is done by setting the two parameters VTsec and VTprim for each voltage
channel. The phase-to-phase value can be used even if each channel is connected to a
phase-to-ground voltage from the VT.

78 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 4
Analog inputs

4.2.4.1 Example SEMOD55055-47 v3

Consider a VT with the following data:

132kV 120V
3 3
EQUATION1937 V1 EN-US (Equation 1)

The following setting should be used: VTprim=132 (value in kV) VTsec=120 (value in
V)

4.2.4.2 Examples how to connect, configure and set VT inputs for most
commonly used VT connections SEMOD55055-60 v6

Figure 19 defines the marking of voltage transformer terminals commonly used around
the world.

+ + A a A da A a
(H1) (X1) (H1) (X1) (H1) (X1)
VPri VSec

N n N dn B b
(H2) (X2) (H2) (X2) (H2) (X2)
a) b) c) d)

ANSI11000175_1_en.vsd
ANSI11000175 V1 EN-US

Figure 19: Commonly used markings of VT terminals

Where:
a) is the symbol and terminal marking used in this document. Terminals marked with a square
indicate the primary and secondary winding terminals with the same (positive) polarity
b) is the equivalent symbol and terminal marking used by IEC (ANSI) standard for phase-to-
ground connected VTs
c) is the equivalent symbol and terminal marking used by IEC (ANSI) standard for open delta
connected VTs
d) is the equivalent symbol and terminal marking used by IEC (ANSI) standard for phase-to-phase
connected VTs

It shall be noted that depending on national standard and utility practices the rated
secondary voltage of a VT has typically one of the following values:

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 79

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Analog inputs

• 100 V
• 110 V
• 115 V
• 120 V
• 230 V

The IED fully supports all of these values and most of them will be shown in the
following examples.

4.2.4.3 Examples on how to connect a three phase-to-ground connected VT to

the IED SEMOD55055-87 v9

Figure 20 gives an example on how to connect the three phase-to-ground connected

VT to the IED. It gives an overview of required actions by the user in order to make
this measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions within the
IED.

For correct terminal designations, see the connection diagrams valid for
the delivered IED.

80 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 4
Analog inputs

A
B IED
C 2
5
3
66 kV
1 13
3
110V 14 AI 07 (I) SMAI2

3 15 BLOCK AI3P

16 AI 08 (V) ^GRP2_A AI1

17 ^GRP2_B AI2
18 AI 09 (V) ^GRP2_C AI3
66 kV 19 #Not used ^GRP2N AI4

3 20 AI 10 (V) TYPE AIN

110V 21
3 22 AI 11 (V)
4
23
24 AI 12 (V)

66 kV
3
110V
3

ANSI06000599-2-en.vsd

ANSI06000599 V2 EN-US

Figure 20: A Three phase-to-ground connected VT

L1

L2 IED

2
3
132 kV
2 1
110V
2
SMAI2
BLOCK AI2P
^GRP2L1 AI1
^GRP2L2 5 AI2
132 kV ^GRP2L1L2 AI3
^GRP2N AI4
2 AIN
110V
2 4

IEC16000140-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000140 V1 EN-US

Figure 21: A two phase-to-earth connected VT

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 81

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Analog inputs

Where:
1) shows how to connect three secondary phase-to-ground voltages to three VT inputs on the
IED
2) is the TRM where these three voltage inputs are located. For these three voltage inputs, the
following setting values shall be entered:
VTprim =132 kV
VTsec = 110 V
Inside the IED, only the ratio of these two parameters is used. It shall be noted that the ratio
of the entered values exactly corresponds to ratio of one individual VT.

66
66 3
=
110 110
3
EQUATION1903 V1 EN-US (Equation 2)

3) are three connections made in Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), which connect these three voltage
inputs to first three input channels of the preprocessing function block 5). Depending on the
type of functions which need this voltage information, more then one preprocessing block
might be connected in parallel to these three VT inputs.
4) shows that in this example the fourth (that is, residual) input channel of the preprocessing
block is not connected in SMT tool. Thus the preprocessing block will automatically calculate
3Vo inside by vectorial sum from the three phase to ground voltages connected to the first
three input channels of the same preprocessing block. Alternatively, the fourth input channel
can be connected to open delta VT input, as shown in Figure 23.
5) is a Preprocessing block that has the task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and
calculate:

• fundamental frequency phasors for all input channels

• harmonic content for all input channels
• positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency
phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for
sequence quantities)

These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions
within the IED, which are connected to this preprocessing function block in the configuration
tool. For this application most of the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values.
However the following settings shall be set as shown here:
VBase=66 kV (that is, rated Ph-Ph voltage)
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for
IEDs installed in the generating stations) then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be
set accordingly.

4.2.4.4 Example on how to connect a phase-to-phase connected VT to the IED SEMOD55055-134 v7

Figure 22 gives an example how to connect a phase-to-phase connected VT to the IED.

It gives an overview of the required actions by the user in order to make this
measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions within the IED.
It shall be noted that this VT connection is only used on lower voltage levels (that is,
rated primary voltage below 40 kV).

82 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 4
Analog inputs

B
C
13.8kV 13.8kV IED
120V 120V

2
5
3
1 13
14 AI 07(I)
SMAI2
15 BLOCK AI3P
16 AI 08(V) ^GRP2_A (A-B) AI1

17 ^GRP2_B (B-C) AI2

AI 09(V) ^GRP2_C (C-A) AI3
18
#Not Used ^GRP2N AI4
19
TYPE AIN
20 AI 10(V)
21
22 AI 11(V) 4
23
24 AI 12(V)

ANSI06000600-3-en.vsd

ANSI06000600 V3 EN-US

Figure 22: A Two phase-to-phase connected VT

Where:
1) shows how to connect the secondary side of a phase-to-phase VT to the VT inputs on the IED
2) is the TRM where these three voltage inputs are located. It shall be noted that for these three
voltage inputs the following setting values shall be entered:
VTprim=13.8 kV
VTsec=120 V
Please note that inside the IED only ratio of these two parameters is used.
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 83

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Analog inputs

3) are three connections made in the Signal Matrix tool (SMT), Application configuration tool
(ACT), which connects these three voltage inputs to first three input channels of the
preprocessing function block 5). Depending on the type of functions, which need this voltage
information, more than one preprocessing block might be connected in parallel to these three
VT inputs
4) shows that in this example the fourth (that is, residual) input channel of the preprocessing block
is not connected in SMT. Note. If the parameters VA, VB, VC, VN should be used the open delta
must be connected here.
5) Preprocessing block has a task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and calculate:

• fundamental frequency phasors for all four input channels

• harmonic content for all four input channels
• positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency
phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence
quantities)

These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions within
the IED, which are connected to this preprocessing function block in the configuration tool. For
this application most of the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values. However
the following settings shall be set as shown here:
ConnectionType=Ph-Ph
VBase=13.8 kV
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for
IEDs installed in the generating stations) then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be
set accordingly.

4.2.4.5 Example on how to connect an open delta VT to the IED for high
impedance grounded or ungrounded networks SEMOD55055-163 v9

Figure 23 gives an example about the wiring of an open delta VT to the IED for high
impedance grounded or ungrounded power systems. It shall be noted that this type of
VT connection presents a secondary voltage proportional to 3V0 to the IED.

In case of a solid ground fault close to the VT location the primary value of 3Vo will be
equal to:

3Vo = 3 × VPh - Ph = 3 × VPh - Gnd

EQUATION1922-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 3)

The primary rated voltage of an open Delta VT is always equal to VPh-Gnd. Three series
connected VT secondary windings gives a secondary voltage equal to three times the
individual VT secondary winding rating. Thus the secondary windings of open delta
VTs quite often have a secondary rated voltage equal to one third of the rated phase-to-
phase VT secondary voltage (110/3V in this particular example).

Figure 23 gives overview of required actions by the user in order to make this
measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions within the IED
as well.

84 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 4
Analog inputs

B IED

C
2

6.6kV
13
3 AI 07 (I) 5
110V 14
3 15
16 AI 08 (V)
17 SMAI2
18 AI 09 (V) BLOCK AI3P
6.6kV 19 3 ^GRP2_A AI1
1 # Not Used
20 AI 10 (V)
3 # Not Used ^GRP2_B AI2
110V 21 # Not Used ^GRP2_C AI3
3 AI 11 (V)
+3Vo 22 ^GRP2N AI4
23 TYPE AIN
24 AI 12 (V)
4
6.6kV
3
110V
3

ANSI06000601-2-en.vsd

ANSI06000601 V2 EN-US

Figure 23: Open delta connected VT in high impedance grounded power system

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 85

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Analog inputs

Where:
1) shows how to connect the secondary side of the open delta VT to one VT input on the IED.

+3Vo shall be connected to the IED

2) is the TRM where this voltage input is located. It shall be noted that for this voltage input the
following setting values shall be entered:

VTprim = 3 × 6.6 = 11.43kV

EQUATION1923 V1 EN-US (Equation 4)

110
VT sec = 3 × = 110V
3
EQUATION1924 V1 EN-US (Equation 5)

Inside the IED, only the ratio of these two parameters is used. It shall be noted that the ratio
of the entered values exactly corresponds to ratio of one individual open delta VT.

6.6
3 × 6.6 3
=
110 110
3
EQUATION1925 V1 EN-US (Equation 6)

3) shows that in this example the first three input channel of the preprocessing block is not
connected in SMT tool or ACT tool.
4) shows the connection made in Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), Application configuration tool
(ACT), which connect this voltage input to the fourth input channel of the preprocessing
function block 5).
5) is a Preprocessing block that has the task to digitally filter the connected analog input and
calculate:

• fundamental frequency phasors for all four input channels

• harmonic content for all four input channels
• positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency
phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence
quantities)

These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions
within the IED, which are connected to this preprocessing function block in the configuration
tool. For this application most of the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values.
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for
IEDs installed in the generating stations ) then the setting parameters DFTReference shall
be set accordingly.

86 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 4
Analog inputs

4.2.4.6 Example how to connect the open delta VT to the IED for low
impedance grounded or solidly grounded power systems SEMOD55055-199 v6

Figure 24 gives an example about the connection of an open delta VT to the IED for
low impedance grounded or solidly grounded power systems. It shall be noted that this
type of VT connection presents secondary voltage proportional to 3V0 to the IED.

In case of a solid ground fault close to the VT location the primary value of 3Vo will be
equal to:

VPh - Ph
3Vo = = VPh - Gnd
3
EQUATION1927-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 7)

The primary rated voltage of such VT is always equal to VPh-Gnd. Therefore, three
series connected VT secondary windings will give the secondary voltage equal only to
one individual VT secondary winding rating. Thus the secondary windings of such
open delta VTs quite often has a secondary rated voltage close to rated phase-to-phase
VT secondary voltage, that is, 115V or 115/√3V as in this particular example. Figure
24 gives an overview of the actions which are needed to make this measurement
available to the built-in protection and control functions within the IED.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 87

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Analog inputs

B IED
C
2

138kV
13 5
3 14 AI07 (I)
115V
15
3
16 AI08 (V)
17 SMAI2
18 AI09 (V) BLOCK AI3P
138kV 1 19 3
# Not Used ^GRP2_A AI1
3 20 AI10 (V) # Not Used ^GRP2_B AI2
115V 21
# Not Used ^GRP2_C AI3
3 +3Vo 22 AI11 (V)
^GRP2N AI4
23
AI12 (V) TYPE AIN
24
4
138kV
3
115V
3
ANSI06000602-2-en.vsd

ANSI06000602 V2 EN-US

Figure 24: Open delta connected VT in low impedance or solidly grounded power system

88 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 4
Analog inputs

Where:
1) shows how to connect the secondary side of open delta VT to one VT input in the
IED.

+3Vo shall be connected to the IED.

2) is TRM where this voltage input is located. It shall be noted that for this voltage input
the following setting values shall be entered:

138
VTprim = 3× = 138 kV
3
EQUATION1928 V1 EN-US (Equation 8)

115
VT sec = 3× = 115V
3
EQUATION1929 V1 EN-US (Equation 9)

Inside the IED, only the ratio of these two parameters is used. It shall be noted that
the ratio of the entered values exactly corresponds to ratio of one individual open
delta VT.

138
138 3
=
115 115
3
EQUATION1930 V1 EN-US (Equation 10)

3) shows that in this example the first three input channel of the preprocessing block is
not connected in SMT tool.
4) shows the connection made in Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), which connect this voltage
input to the fourth input channel of the preprocessing function block 4).
5) preprocessing block has a task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and
calculate:

• fundamental frequency phasors for all four input channels

• harmonic content for all four input channels
• positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental
frequency phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as
reference for sequence quantities)

These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control
functions within the IED, which are connected to this preprocessing function block in
the configuration tool. For this application most of the preprocessing settings can be
left to the default values.
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required
only for IEDs installed in the generating stations) then the setting parameters
DFTReference shall be set accordingly.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 89

Application manual
90
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 5
Local HMI

Section 5 Local HMI AMU0600442 v14

ANSI13000239-2-en.vsd
ANSI13000239 V2 EN-US

Figure 25: Local human-machine interface

The LHMI of the IED contains the following elements:

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 91

Application manual
Section 5 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Local HMI

• Keypad
• Display (LCD)
• LED indicators
• Communication port for PCM600

The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling.

5.1 Display GUID-55739D4F-1DA5-4112-B5C7-217AAF360EA5 v11

The LHMI includes a graphical monochrome liquid crystal display (LCD) with a
resolution of 320 x 240 pixels. The character size can vary.

The display view is divided into four basic areas.

92 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 5
Local HMI

IEC15000270-1-en.vsdx

IEC15000270 V1 EN-US

Figure 26: Display layout

1 Path
2 Content
3 Status
4 Scroll bar (appears when needed)

The function key button panel shows on request what actions are possible with the
function buttons. Each function button has a LED indication that can be used as a
feedback signal for the function button control action. The LED is connected to the
required signal with PCM600.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 93

Application manual
Section 5 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Local HMI

IEC13000281-1-en.vsd
GUID-C98D972D-D1D8-4734-B419-161DBC0DC97B V1 EN-US

Figure 27: Function button panel

The indication LED panel shows on request the alarm text labels for the indication
LEDs. Three indication LED pages are available.

IEC13000240-1-en.vsd
GUID-5157100F-E8C0-4FAB-B979-FD4A971475E3 V1 EN-US

Figure 28: Indication LED panel

The function button and indication LED panels are not visible at the same time. Each
panel is shown by pressing one of the function buttons or the Multipage button.
Pressing the ESC button clears the panel from the display. Both panels have a dynamic
width that depends on the label string length.

94 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 5
Local HMI

5.2 LEDs AMU0600427 v13

The LHMI includes three protection status LEDs above the display: Normal, Pickup
and Trip.

There are 15 programmable indication LEDs on the front of the LHMI. Each LED can
indicate three states with the colors: green, yellow and red. The texts related to each
three-color LED are divided into three panels.

There are 3 separate panels of LEDs available. The 15 physical three-color LEDs in
one LED group can indicate 45 different signals. Altogether, 135 signals can be
indicated since there are three LED groups. The LEDs are lit according to priority, with
red being the highest and green the lowest priority. For example, if on one panel there
is an indication that requires the green LED to be lit, and on another panel there is an
indication that requires the red LED to be lit, the red LED takes priority and is lit. The
LEDs can be configured with PCM600 and the operation mode can be selected with
the LHMI or PCM600.

Information panels for the indication LEDs are shown by pressing the Multipage
button. Pressing that button cycles through the three pages. A lit or un-acknowledged
LED is indicated with a highlight. Such lines can be selected by using the Up/Down
arrow buttons. Pressing the Enter key shows details about the selected LED. Pressing
the ESC button exits from information pop-ups as well as from the LED panel as such.

The Multipage button has a LED. This LED is lit whenever any LED on any panel is
lit. If there are un-acknowledged indication LEDs, then the Multipage LED blinks. To
acknowledge LEDs, press the Clear button to enter the Reset menu (refer to description
of this menu for details).

There are two additional LEDs which are next to the control buttons and .
These LEDs can indicate the status of two arbitrary binary signals by configuring the
OPENCLOSE_LED function block. For instance, OPENCLOSE_LED can be
connected to a circuit breaker to indicate the breaker open/close status on the LEDs.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 95

Application manual
Section 5 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Local HMI

IEC16000076-1-en.vsd
IEC16000076 V1 EN-US

Figure 29: OPENCLOSE_LED connected to SXCBR

5.3 Keypad AMU0600428 v17

The LHMI keypad contains push-buttons which are used to navigate in different views
or menus. The push-buttons are also used to acknowledge alarms, reset indications,
provide help and switch between local and remote control mode.

The keypad also contains programmable push-buttons that can be configured either as
menu shortcut or control buttons.

96 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 5
Local HMI

24

1
23
2
18

3
19

6 20

21

7 22

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

ANSI15000157-1-en.vsdx

ANSI15000157 V1 EN-US

Figure 30: LHMI keypad with object control, navigation and command push-
buttons and RJ-45 communication port

1...5 Function button

6 Close
7 Open
8 Escape
9 Left
10 Down
11 Up
12 Right
13 Key
14 Enter
15 Remote/Local
16 Uplink LED
17 Not in use
18 Multipage

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 97

Application manual
Section 5 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Local HMI

19 Menu
20 Clear
21 Help
22 Communication port
23 Programmable indication LEDs
24 IED status LEDs

5.4 Local HMI functionality

5.4.1 Protection and alarm indication GUID-09CCB9F1-9B27-4C12-B253-FBE95EA537F5 v15

Protection indicators
The protection indicator LEDs are Normal, Pickup and Trip.
Table 12: Normal LED (green)
LED state Description
Off Auxiliary supply voltage is disconnected.
On Normal operation.
Flashing Internal fault has occurred.

Table 13: PickUp LED (yellow)

LED state Description
Off Normal operation.
On A protection function has picked up and an indication message is displayed.
The pick up indication is latching and must be reset via communication,
LHMI or binary input on the LEDGEN component. To open the reset menu
on the LHMI, press .

Flashing The IED is in test mode and protection functions are blocked, or the
IEC61850 protocol is blocking one or more functions.
The indication disappears when the IED is no longer in test mode and
blocking is removed. The blocking of functions through the IEC61850
protocol can be reset in Main menu/Test/Reset IEC61850 Mod. The yellow
LED changes to either On or Off state depending on the state of operation.

98 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 5
Local HMI

Table 14: Trip LED (red)

LED state Description
Off Normal operation.
On A protection function has tripped. An indication message is displayed if the
auto-indication feature is enabled in the local HMI.
The trip indication is latching and must be reset via communication, LHMI or
binary input on the LEDGEN component. To open the reset menu on the
LHMI, press .

Flasing Configuration mode.

Alarm indicators
The 15 programmable three-color LEDs are used for alarm indication. An individual
alarm/status signal, connected to any of the LED function blocks, can be assigned to
one of the three LED colors when configuring the IED.
Table 15: Alarm indications
LED state Description
Off Normal operation. All activation signals are off.
On • Follow-S sequence: The activation signal is on.
• LatchedColl-S sequence: The activation signal is on, or it is off but the indication has
not been acknowledged.
• LatchedAck-F-S sequence: The indication has been acknowledged, but the
activation signal is still on.
• LatchedAck-S-F sequence: The activation signal is on, or it is off but the indication
has not been acknowledged.
• LatchedReset-S sequence: The activation signal is on, or it is off but the indication
has not been acknowledged.

Flashing • Follow-F sequence: The activation signal is on.

• LatchedAck-F-S sequence: The activation signal is on, or it is off but the indication
has not been acknowledged.
• LatchedAck-S-F sequence: The indication has been acknowledged, but the
activation signal is still on.

5.4.2 Parameter management GUID-5EE466E3-932B-4311-9FE1-76ECD8D6E245 v9

The LHMI is used to access the relay parameters. Three types of parameters can be
read and written.
• Numerical values
• String values
• Enumerated values

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 99

Application manual
Section 5 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Local HMI

Numerical values are presented either in integer or in decimal format with minimum
and maximum values. Character strings can be edited character by character.
Enumerated values have a predefined set of selectable values.

5.4.3 Front communication GUID-FD72A445-C8C1-4BFE-90E3-0AC78AE17C45 v11

The RJ-45 port in the LHMI enables front communication.

• The green uplink LED on the left is lit when the cable is successfully connected to
the port.
• The yellow LED is not used; it is always off.

IEC13000280-1-en.vsd
GUID-94AF2358-6905-4782-B37B-ACD3DCBF7F9C V1 EN-US

Figure 31: RJ-45 communication port and green indicator LED

1 RJ-45 connector
2 Green indicator LED

The default IP address for the IED front port is 10.1.150.3 and the corresponding
subnetwork mask is 255.255.254.0. It can be set through the local HMI path Main
menu/Configuration/Communication/Ethernet configuration/FRONT port/
AP_FRONT.

Do not connect the IED front port to a LAN. Connect only a single
local PC with PCM600 to the front port. It is only intended for
temporary use, such as commissioning and testing.

100 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 6
Wide area measurement system

Section 6 Wide area measurement system

6.1 C37.118 Phasor Measurement Data Streaming

Protocol Configuration PMUCONF GUID-747C6AD7-E6A1-466E-92D1-68865681F92F v1

6.1.1 Identification
GUID-1E140EA0-D198-443A-B445-47CEFD2E6134 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Configuration parameters for IEEE PMUCONF - -
1344 and C37.118 protocol

6.1.2 Application GUID-33694C62-A109-4D8F-9063-CEFA5D0E78BC v4

The IED supports the following IEEE synchrophasor standards:

• IEEE 1344-1995 (Both measurements and data communication)
• IEEE Std C37.118-2005 (Both measurements and data communication)
• IEEE Std C37.118.1–2011 and C37.118.1a-2014 (Measurements)
• IEEE Std C37.118.2-2011 (Data communication)

PMUCONF contains the PMU configuration parameters for both IEEE C37.118 and
IEEE 1344 protocols. This means all the required settings and parameters in order to
establish and define a number of TCP and/or UDP connections with one or more PDC
clients (synchrophasor client). This includes port numbers, TCP/UDP IP addresses, and
specific settings for IEEE C37.118 as well as IEEE 1344 protocols.

6.1.3 Operation principle GUID-2608FBC4-9036-476A-942B-13452019BC11 v2

The Figure 32 demonstrates the communication configuration diagram. As can be seen,

the IED can support communication with maximum 8 TCP clients and 6 UDP client
groups, simultaneously. Every client can communicate with only one instance of the
two available PMUREPORT function block instances at a time. It means that one client
cannot communicate with both PMUREPORT:1 and PMUREPORT:2 at the same time.
However, multiple clients can communicate with the same instance of PMUREPORT
function block at the same time. For TCP clients, each client can decide to
communicate with an existing instance of PMUREPORT by knowing the

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 101

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Wide area measurement system

corresponding PMU ID for that PMUREPORT instance. Whereas, for UDP clients, the
PMUREPORT instance for each UDP channel is defined by the user in the PMU and
the client has to know the PMU ID corresponding to that instance in order to be able to
communicate. More information is available in the sections Short guidance for the use
of TCP and Short guidance for the use of UDP.

IED
PMU ID

1344/C37.118
PMUREPORT: 1 PMUREPORT: 2 TCP Client_1
1344/C37.118
TCP Client_2
1344/C37.118
TCP Client_3
PMU ID: X
1344/C37.118
TCP IP TCP Client_4
PMU ID: Y 1344/C37.118
TCP Port TCP Client_5
1344/C37.118 TCP Client_6
1344/C37.118 TCP Client_7
1344/C37.118 TCP Client_8

PMU ID

PMUREPORT Instance: 1 or 2 1344/C37.118

UDP 1 Unicast/Multicast
UDP Client Group_1

PMUREPORT Instance: 1 or 2 1344/C37.118

UDP 2 Unicast/Multicast
UDP Client Group_2

PMUREPORT Instance: 1 or 2 1344/C37.118

UDP 3 Unicast/Multicast
UDP Client Group_3

PMUREPORT Instance: 1 or 2 1344/C37.118

UDP 4 Unicast/Multicast
UDP Client Group_4

PMUREPORT Instance: 1 or 2 1344/C37.118

UDP 5 Unicast/Multicast
UDP Client Group_5

PMUREPORT Instance: 1 or 2 1344/C37.118

UDP 6 Unicast/Multicast
UDP Client Group_6

IEC140000117-1.en.vsd
IEC140000117 V2 EN-US

Figure 32: The communication configuration (PMUCONF) structure in the IED

6.1.3.1 Short guidance for use of TCP GUID-700B2618-3719-4C17-A1F8-3B8F5834FE95 v3

Port 7001 is used by the SPA on TCP/IP (field service tool). If the port
is used for any other protocol, for example C37.118, the SPA on
TCP/IP stops working.

The IED supports 8 concurrent TCP connections using IEEE1344 and/or C37.118
protocol. The following parameters are used to define the TCP connection between the
IED and the TCP clients:
1. 1344TCPport– TCP port for control of IEEE 1344 data for TCP clients
2. C37.118TCPport – TCP port for control of IEEE C37.118 data for TCP clients

102 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 6
Wide area measurement system

As can be seen, there are two separate parameters in the IED for selecting port numbers
for TCP connections; one for IEEE1344 protocol (1344TCPport) and another one for
C37.118 protocol (C37.118 TCPport). Client can communicate with the IED over
IEEE1344 protocol using the selected TCP port defined in 1344TCPport, and can
communicate with the IED over IEEE C37.118 protocol using the selected TCP port
number in C37.118TCPport.

All the frames (the header frame, configuration frame, command frame and data frame)
are communicated over the same TCP port. The client can request (by sending a
command frame) a configuration and/or header via the TCP channel and the requested
configuration and/or header will be sent back to the client (as Configuration frame/
Header frame) over the same TCP channel.

Once the TCP client connects to the IED, the client has to necessarily send a command
frame to start a communication. As shown in Figure 32, the IED can support 2
PMUREPORT instances and the client has to specify the PMU ID Code in order to
know which PMUREPORT data needs to be sent out to that client. In this figure, X and
Y are referring to the user-defined PMU ID Codes for PMUREPORT instances 1 or 2,
respectively. It is up to the TCP client to decide which PMUREPORT function block
shall communicate with that client. Upon successful reception of the first command by
the IED, the PMU ID will be extracted out of the command; if there is a PMUREPORT
instance configured in the IED with matching PMU ID, then the client connection over
TCP with the IED will be established and further communication will take place.
Otherwise, the connection will be terminated and the TCPCtrlCfgErrCnt is
incremented in the PMU Diagnostics on the Local HMI under Main menu/
Diagnostics/Communication/PMU diagnostics/PMUSTATUS:1

It is possible to turn off/on the TCP data communication by sending a IEEE1344 or

C37.118 command frame remotely from the client to the PMU containing RTDOFF/
RTDON command.

At any given point of time maximum of 8 TCP clients can be connected to the IED for
IEEE1344/C37.118 protocol. If there is an attempt made by the 9th client, the
connection to the new client will be terminated without influencing the connection of
the other clients already connected. A list of active clients can be seen on the Local
HMI in the diagnostics menu under Main menu/Diagnostics/Communication/PMU
diagnostics/PMUSTATUS:1

6.1.3.2 Short guidance for use of UDP GUID-F5BCBBF7-4EED-4E79-9E86-AF046D201BB1 v3

The IED supports maximum of 6 concurrent UDP streams. They can be individually
configured to send IEEE1344 or C37.118 data frames as unicast / multicast. Note that
[x] at the end of each parameter is referring to the UDP stream number (UDP client
group) and is a number between 1 and 6. Each of the 6 UDP groups in the IED has the
following settings:

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 103

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Wide area measurement system

1. SendDataUDP[x] – Enable / disable UDP data stream

2. ProtocolOnUDP[x] – Send IEEE1344 or C37.118 on UDP
3. PMUReportUDP[x] – Instance number of PMUREPORT function block that must
send data on this UDP stream (UDP client group[x])
4. UDPDestAddres[x] – UDP destination address for UDP client group[x] (unicast /
multicast address range)
5. UDPDestPort[x] – UDP destination port number for UDP client group[x]
6. TCPportUDPdataCtrl[x] – TCP port to control of data sent over UDP client
group[x], i.e. to receive commands and send configuration frames
7. SendCfgOnUDP[x] – Send configuration frame 2 (CFG-2) on UDP for client
group[x]

It is possible to turn off/on the UDP data communication either by setting the
parameter SendDataUDP[x] to Disable/Enable locally in the PMU or by sending a
C37.118 or IEEE1344 command frame (RTDOFF/RTDON) remotely from the client to
the PMU as defined in IEEE 1344/C37.118 standard.

However, such a remote control to stop the streams from the client is only possible
when the parameter SendDataUDP[x] is set to SetByProtocol. The command
RTDOFF/RTDON sent by the client is stored in the IED, i.e. if the IED is rebooted for
some reason, the state of the stream will remain the same.

If the parameter SendDataUDP[x] is set toEnable the RTDOFF/RTDON commands

received from the clients are ignored in the IED.

It is recommended not to set the parameter SendDataUDP[x] to SetByProtocol in case

of a multicast. This is because if one of the clients sends the RTDOFF command, all
the clients will stop receiving the frames.

The UDP implementation in the IED is a UDP_TCP. This means that by default, only
the data frames are sent out on UDP stream and the header frame, configuration frame
and command frame are sent over TCP. This makes the communication more reliable
especially since commands are sent over TCP which performs request/
acknowledgment exchange to ensure that no data (command in this case) is lost.

However, by setting the parameter SendCfgOnUDP[x] to Enable, the configuration

frame 2 (CFG-2) of IEEEC37.118 data stream is cyclically sent on the corresponding
UDP stream (UDP client group[x]) once per minute. This is useful in case of multicast
UDP data stream when a lot of PMU clients are receiving the same UDP stream from
the same UDP group (UDP client group[x]).

As shown in Figure 32, there are maximum 2 instances of PMUREPORT function

blocks available in the IED. Each UDP client group[x] can only connect to one of the
PMUREPORT instances at the same time. This is defined in the PMU by the parameter
PMUReportUDP[x] which is used to define the instance number of PMUREPORT
function block that must send data on this UDP stream (UDP client group[x]).

104 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 6
Wide area measurement system

The data streams in the IED can be sent as unicast or as multicast. The user-defined IP
address set in the parameter UDPDestAddress[x] for each UDP stream defines if it is a
Unicast or Multicast. The address range 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255 (Class D IP
addresses) is treated as multicast. Any other IP address outside this range is treated as
unicast and the UDP data will be only sent to that specific unicast IP address. In
addition to UDPDestAddress[x] parameter, UDPDestPort[x] parameter is used to
define the UDP destination port number for UDP client group[x].

In case of multicast IP, it will be the network switches and routers that take care of
replicating the packet to reach multiple receivers. Multicast mechanism uses network
infrastructure efficiently by requiring the IED to send a packet only once, even if it
needs to be delivered to a large number of receivers.

If there are more than one UDP client group defined as multicast, the user shall set
different multicast IP addresses for each UDP group.

The PMU clients receiving the UDP frames can also connect to the IED to request
(command frame) config frame 1, config frame 2, config frame 3, or header frame, and
to disable/enable real time data. This can be done by connecting to the TCP port
selected in TCPportUDPdataCtrl[x] for each UDP group. This connection is done
using TCP. The IED allows 4 concurrent client connections for every
TCPportUDPdataCtrl[x] port (for each UDP client group[x]).

If the client tries to connect on TCPportUDPdataCtrl[x] port using a PMU-ID other

than what is configured for that PMUREPORT instance (PMUReportUDP[x]), then
that client is immediately disconnected and the UDPCtrlCfgErrCnt is incremented in
PMU Diagnostics on LHMI at Main menu/Diagnostics/Communication/PMU
diagnostics/PMUSTATUS:1

Even if the parameter SendDataUDP[x] is set to Disable it is still possible for the
clients to connect on the TCP port and request the configuration frames.

6.2 Protocol reporting via IEEE 1344 and C37.118

PMUREPORT GUID-0C45D2FA-1B95-4FCA-B23B-A28C2770B817 v1

6.2.1 Identification
GUID-0090956B-48F1-4E8B-9A40-90044C71DF20 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Protocol reporting via IEEE 1344 and PMUREPORT - -
C37.118

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 105

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Wide area measurement system

6.2.2 Application GUID-8DF29209-252A-4E51-9F4A-B14B669E71AB v4

The phasor measurement reporting block moves the phasor calculations into an IEEE
C37.118 and/or IEEE 1344 synchrophasor frame format. The PMUREPORT block
contains parameters for PMU performance class and reporting rate, the IDCODE and
Global PMU ID, format of the data streamed through the protocol, the type of reported
synchrophasors, as well as settings for reporting analog and digital signals.

The message generated by the PMUREPORT function block is set in accordance with
the IEEE C37.118 and/or IEEE 1344 standards.

There are settings for Phasor type (positive sequence, negative sequence or zero
sequence in case of 3-phase phasor and A, B or C in case of single phase phasor),
PMU's Service class (Protection or Measurement), Phasor representation (polar or
rectangular) and the data types for phasor data, analog data and frequency data.

Synchrophasor data can be reported to up to 8 clients over TCP and/or 6 UDP group
clients for multicast or unicast transmission of phasor data from the IED. More
information regarding synchrophasor communication structure and TCP/UDP
configuration is available in section C37.118 Phasor Measurement Data Streaming
Protocol Configuration.

Multiple PMU functionality can be configured in the IED, which can stream out same
or different data at different reporting rates or different performance (service) classes.
There are 2 instances of PMU functionality available in the IED. Each instance of
PMU functionality includes a set of PMU reporting function blocks tagged by the same
instance number (1 or 2). As shown in the following figures, each set of PMU
reporting function blocks includes PMUREPORT, PHASORREPORT1-4,
ANALOGREPORT1-3, and BINARYREPORT1-3 function blocks. In general, each
instance of PMU functionality has 32 configurable phasor channels
(PHASORREPORT1–4 blocks), 24 analog channels (ANALOGREPORT1-3 blocks),
and 28 digital channels (24 digital-report channels in BINARYREPORT1-3 and 4
trigger-report channels in PMUREPORT function block). Special rules shall be taken
into account in PCM600 for Application Configuration and Parameter Settings of
multiple PMUREPORT blocks. These rules are explained in the the Application
Manual in section PMU Report Function Blocks Connection Rules.

Figure 33 shows both instances of the PMUREPORT function block. As seen, each
PMUREPORT instance has 4 predefined binary input signals corresponding to the Bits
03-00: Trigger Reason defined in STAT field of the Data frame in IEEE C37.118.2
standard. These are predefined inputs for Frequency Trigger, Rate of Change of
Frequency trigger, Magnitude High and Magnitude Low triggers.

106 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 6
Wide area measurement system

IEC140000118-2-en.vsd
IEC140000118 V2 EN-US

Figure 33: Multiple instances of PMUREPORT function block

Figure 34 shows both instances of the PHASORREPORT function blocks. The

instance number is visible in the bottom of each function block. For each instance,
there are four separate PHASORREPORT blocks including 32 configurable phasor
channels (8 phasor channels in each PHASORREPORT block). Each phasor channel
can be configured as a 3-phase (symmetrical components positive/negative/zero) or
single-phase phasor (A/B/C).

IEC140000119-2-en.vsd
IEC140000119 V2 EN-US

Figure 34: Multiple instances of PHASORREPORT blocks

Figure 35 shows both instances of ANALOGREPORT function blocks. The instance

number is visible in the bottom of each function block. For each instance, there are
three separate ANALOGREPORT blocks capable of reporting up to 24 Analog signals
(8 Analog signals in each ANALOGREPORT block). These can include for example
transfer of active and reactive power or reporting the milliampere input signals to the
PDC clients as defined in IEEE C37.118 data frame format.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 107

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Wide area measurement system

IEC140000120-2-en.vsd
IEC140000120 V2 EN-US

Figure 35: Multiple instances of ANALOGREPORT blocks

Figure 36 shows both instances of BINARYREPORT function blocks. The instance

number is visible in the bottom of each function block. For each instance, there are
three separate BINARYREPORT blocks capable of reporting up to 24 Binary signals
(8 Binary signals in each BINARYREPORT block). These binary signals can be for
example dis-connector or breaker position indications or internal/external protection
alarm signals.

IEC140000121-2-en.vsd
IEC140000121 V2 EN-US

Figure 36: Multiple instances of BINARYREPORT blocks

6.2.3 Operation principle GUID-EB2B9096-2F9D-4264-B2D2-8D9DC65697E8 v3

The Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) features three main functional principles:

108 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 6
Wide area measurement system

• To measure the power system related AC quantities (voltage, current) and to

calculate the phasor representation of these quantities.
• To synchronize the calculated phasors with the UTC by time-tagging, in order to
make synchrophasors (time is reference).
• To publish all phasor-related data by means of TCP/IP or UDP/IP, following the
standard IEEE C37.118 protocol.

The C37.118 standard imposes requirements on the devices and describes the
communication message structure and data. The PMU complies with all the standard
requirements with a specific attention to the Total Vector Error (TVE) requirement.
The TVE is calculated using the following equation:

2
( X r ( n ) - X r )2 + ( X i ( n ) - X i )
TVE =
X r2 + X i2
GUID-80D9B1EA-A770-4F50-9530-61644B4DEBBE V1 EN-US (Equation 11)

where,

Xr(n) and Xi(n) are the measured values

Xr and Xi are the theoretical values

In order to comply with TVE requirements, special calibration is done in the factory on
the analog input channels of the PMU, resulting in increased accuracy of the
measurements. The IEEE C37.118 standard also imposes a variety of steady state and
dynamic requirements which are fulfilled in the IED with the help of high accuracy
measurements and advanced filtering techniques.

Figure 37 shows an overview of the PMU functionality and operation. In this figure,
only one instance of PMUREPORT (PMUREPORT1) is shown. Note that connection
of different signals to the PMUREPORT, in this figure, is only an example and the
actual connections and reported signals on the IEEEC37.118/1344 can be defined by
the user.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 109

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Wide area measurement system

U/I samples

PMUREPORT1

MU PHASOR1
PHASOR2 8 TCP
U IEEEC37.118 / 1344
TRM SMAI messages NUM
I
U 6 UDC
TRM PHASOR32
I

ANALOG1
I/P MIM SMMI ANALOG2

MEAS. ANALOG24

BINARY1
BINARY2
BIM

OR
BINARY24
PROTECTION

GPS / OP
IRIG-B FREQTRIG
UP
DFDTTRIG
OC
PPS time data MAGHIGHTRIG
MAGLOWTRIG
UV

IEC140000146-1-en.vsd

IEC140000146 V2 EN-US

Figure 37: Overview of reporting functionality (PMUREPORT)

The TRM modules are individually AC-calibrated in the factory. The calibration data is
stored in the prepared area of the TRM EEProm. The pre-processor block is extended
with calibration compensation and a new angle reference method based on timestamps.
The AI3P output of the preprocessor block is used to provide the required information
for each respective PMUREPORT phasor channel. More information about
preprocessor block is available in the section Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI.

6.2.3.1 Frequency reporting GUID-4F3BA7C7-8C9B-4266-9F72-AFB139E9DC21 v2

By using patented algorithm the IED can track the power system frequency in quite
wide range from 9 Hz to 95 Hz. In order to do that, the three-phase voltage signal shall
be connected to the IED. Then IED can adapt its filtering algorithm in order to properly
measure phasors of all current and voltage signals connected to the IED. This feature is
essential for proper operation of the PMUREPORT function or for protection during
generator start-up and shut-down procedure.

110 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 6
Wide area measurement system

This adaptive filtering is ensured by proper configuration and settings of all relevant
pre-processing blocks, see Signal matrix for analog inputs in the Application manual.
Note that in all preconfigured IEDs such configuration and settings are already made
and the three-phase voltage are used as master for frequency tracking. With such
settings the IED will be able to properly estimate the magnitude and the phase angle of
measured current and voltage phasors in this wide frequency range.

One of the important functions of a PMU is reporting a very accurate system frequency
to the PDC client. In the IED, each of the PMUREPORT instances is able to report an
accurate frequency. Each voltage-connected preprocessor block (SMAI block) delivers
the frequency data, derived from the analog input AC voltage values, to the respective
voltage phasor channel. Every phasor channel has a user-settable parameter
(PhasorXUseFreqSrc) to be used as a source of frequency data for reporting to the
PDC client. It is very important to set this parameter to On for the voltage-connected
phasor channels. There is an automatic frequency source selection logic to ensure an
uninterrupted reporting of the system frequency to the PDC client. In this frequency
source selection logic, the following general rules are applied:
• Only the voltage phasor channels are used
• The phasor channel with a lower channel number is prioritized to the one with a
higher channel number

As a result, the first voltage phasor is always the one delivering the system frequency
to the PDC client and if, by any reason, this voltage gets disconnected then the next
available voltage phasor is automatically used as the frequency source and so on. If the
first voltage phasor comes back, since it has a higher priority compare to the currently
selected phasor channel, after 500 ms it will be automatically selected again as the
frequency source. There is also an output available on the component which shows if
the reference frequency is good, error or reference channel unavailable.

It is possible to monitor the status of the frequency reference channel (frequency

source) for the respective PMUREPORT instance on Local HMI under Test/Function
status/Communication/Station Communication/PMU Report/PMUREPORT:1/
Outputs, where the FREQREFCHSEL output shows the selected channel as the
reference for frequency and FREQREFCHERR output states if the reference frequency
is good, or if there is an error or if the reference channel is unavailable. For more
information refer to the table PMUREPORT monitored data.
PID-6244-MONITOREDDATA v2

Table 16: PMUREPORT Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TIMESTAT BOOLEAN 1=Ready - Time synchronization status
0=Fail
FREQ REAL - Hz Frequency
FREQGRAD REAL - - Rate of change of frequency
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 111

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Wide area measurement system

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

FREQREFCHSEL INTEGER - - Frequency reference channel
number selected
FREQREFCHERR BOOLEAN 0=Freq ref not - Frequency reference channel
available error
1=Freq ref error
2=Freq ref
available
FREQTRIG BOOLEAN - - Frequency trigger
DFDTTRIG BOOLEAN - - Rate of change of frequency
trigger
MAGHIGHTRIG BOOLEAN - - Magnitude high trigger
MAGLOWTRIG BOOLEAN - - Magnitude low trigger

6.2.3.2 Reporting filters GUID-D39153B5-81CE-4C1F-A816-C7A4C3407048 v2

The PMUREPORT function block implements the reporting filters designed to avoid
aliasing as the reporting frequency is lower than the sample/calculation frequency. This
means, the synchrophasor and frequency data which are included in the C37.118
synchrophasor streaming data are filtered in order to suppress aliasing effects, as the
rate of the C37.118 data is slower than the data rate for internal processing. For this
purpose, there is an anti-aliasing filter designed for each reporting rate. The correct
anti-aliasing filter will be automatically selected based on the reporting rate and the
performance class (P/M) settings. The filters are designed to attenuate all aliasing
frequencies to at least -40 dB (a gain of 0.01) at M class.

The synchrophasor measurement is adaptive as it follows the

fundamental frequency over a wide range despite the reporting rate.

For example, when the synchrophasor measurement follows the fundamental frequency
beyond the fixed Nyquist limits in C37.118 standard, the anti-aliasing filter stopband
moves with the measured fundamental frequency. This has to be considered in
connection with C37.118, where the passband is defined relative to a fixed nominal
frequency as shown in the equation 12.

Fs
f0 ±
2
IECEQUATION2418 V1 EN-US (Equation 12)
where,

f0 is the nominal frequency

Fs is the reporting rate

112 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 6
Wide area measurement system

6.2.3.3 Scaling Factors for ANALOGREPORT channels GUID-0DDAF6A9-8643-4FDD-97CF-9E35EF40AF7E v2

The internal calculation of analog values in the IED is based on 32 bit floating point.
Therefore, if the user selects to report the analog data (AnalogDataType) as Integer,
there will be a down-conversion of a 32 bit floating value to a new 16 bit integer value.
In such a case, in order to optimize the resolution of the reported analog data, the user-
defined analog scaling is implemented in the IED.

The analog scaling in the IED is automatically calculated by use of the user-defined
parameters AnalogXRange for the respective analog channel X. The analog data value
on the input X will have a range between -AnalogXRange and +AnalogXRange. The
resulting scale factor will be applied to the reported analog data where applicable.

If the AnalogDataType is selected as Float, then these settings are ignored.

The analog scaling in the IED is calculated using the equation:

AnalogXRange ´ 2
S calefactor =
65535.0
offset = 0.0
65535.0 = 16 bit integer range
IECEQUATION2443 V1 EN-US

According to the IEEE C37.118.2 standard, the scale factors (conversion factor) for
analog channels are defined in configuration frame 2 (CFG-2) and configuration frame
3 (CFG-3) frames as follows:
• CFG-2 frame: The field ANUNIT (4 bytes) specifies the conversion factor as a
signed 24 bit word for user defined scaling. Since it is a 24 bit integer, in order to
support the floating point scale factor, the scale factor itself is multiplied in 10, so
that a minimum of 0.1 scale factor can be sent over the CFG-2 frame. The
resulting scale factor is rounded to the nearest decimal value. The clients receiving
the Analog scale factor over CFG-2 should divide the received scale factor by 10
and then apply it to the corresponding analog data value.
• CFG-3 frame: The field ANSCALE (8 bytes) specifies the conversion factor as
X’ = M * X + B where; M is magnitude scaling in 32 bit floating point (first 4
bytes) and B is the offset in 32 bit floating point (last 4 bytes).

The server uses CFG-3 scale factor to scale the analog data values. As a result, the
clients which use scale factors in CFG-3 in order to recalculate analog values, will get
a better resolution than using the scale factors in CFG-2.

The following examples show how the scale factor is calculated.

Example 1:

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 113

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Wide area measurement system

AnalogXRange = 3277.0
IECEQUATION2446 V1 EN-US

The scale factor is calculated as follows:

(3277.0 ´ 2.0 )
sc alefactor = = 0.1 a nd offse t = 0.0
65535.0
IECEQUATION2447 V1 EN-US

The scale factor will be sent as 1 on configuration frame 2, and 0.1 on configuration
frame 3. The range of analog values that can be transmitted in this case is -0.1 to
-3276.8 and +0.1 to +3276.7.

Example 2:

AnalogXRange = 4915.5
IECEQUATION2448 V1 EN-US

The scale factor is calculated as follows:

(4915.5 ´ 2.0 )
sc alefac tor = = 0.15 a nd offse t = 0.0
65535.0
IECEQUATION2449 V1 EN-US

The scale factor will be sent as 1 on configuration frame 2, and 0.15 on configuration
frame 3. The range of analog values that can be transmitted in this case is -0.15 to
-4915.5 and +0.15 to +4915.5.

Example 3:

Analo gXRange = 10000000000

IECEQUATION2450 V1 EN-US

The scale factor is calculated as follows:

(10000000000 ´ 2.0)
sc alefac tor = = 305180.43 a nd offse t = 0.0
65535.5
IECEQUATION2451 V1 EN-US

The scale factor will be sent as 3051804 on configuration frame 2, and 305180.43 on
configuration frame 3. The range of analog values that can be transmitted in this case is
-305181 to -10000000000 and +305181 to +10000000000.

114 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 6
Wide area measurement system

6.2.3.4 PMU Report Function Blocks Connection Rules in PCM600 Application

Configuration Tool (ACT) GUID-66667179-F3E1-455B-8B99-6D73F37E949B v3

There are 3 important general rules which have to be considered in PCM600 ACT for
the connection of preprocessor blocks (SMAI) and 3PHSUM blocks to
PHASORREPORT blocks:

Rule 1:

Only SMAI or 3PHSUM blocks shall be connected to PMU PHASORREPORT blocks

and they shall have the same cycle time, 0.9 ms.

Figure 38 shows an example of correct connection of SMAI and PHASORREPORT

blocks in ACT where both function blocks are working on 0.9 ms cycle time.

IEC140000124-2-en.vsd
IEC140000124 V2 EN-US

Figure 38: An example of correct connection of SMAI and PHASORREPORT

blocks in ACT

Figure 39 shows an example of wrong connection of SMAI and PHASORREPORT

blocks in ACT where the SMAI block is working on 3 ms while PHASORREPORT
block is working on 0.9 ms cycle time.

IEC140000125-2-en.vsd
IEC140000125 V2 EN-US

Figure 39: An example of wrong connection of SMAI and PHASORREPORT

blocks in ACT

Violation of rule 1 results in PMU applications not running at all. The reason is the
inconsistent cycle time. For example, in Figure 39, the SMAI block is updating its
output every 3 ms while the PHASORREPORT block is expecting input every 0.9 ms.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 115

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Wide area measurement system

The PHASORREPORT filtering window is designed to receive updated input every 0.9
ms and therefore the application will fail.

Rule 2:

The same SMAI or 3PHSUM block can be connected to more than one
PHASORREPORT block only if all the connected PHASORREPORT blocks have
similar instance number or only if all the connected PHASORREPORT blocks have
similar settings for SvcClass and ReportRate. Figure 40 shows the settings for
PMUREPORT function block demonstrated by PCM600 Parameter Setting Tool
(PST).

IEC140000126-2-en.vsd
IEC140000126 V2 EN-US

Figure 40: PMUREPORT settings in PCM600 PST

Figure 41 shows an example of correct connection of SMAI and PHASORREPORT

blocks in ACT where two different SMAI blocks are connected to different
PHASORREPORT blocks with different instance numbers. In this example, as the
PHASORREPORT blocks have different instance numbers and different settings for
SvcClass and ReportRate, a separate SMAI block is used for each PHASORREPORT
block.

116 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 6
Wide area measurement system

IEC140000127-2-en.vsd
IEC140000127 V2 EN-US

Figure 41: An example of correct connection of SMAI and PHASORREPORT

blocks in ACT

Figure 42 shows an example of wrong connection of SMAI and PHASORREPORT

blocks in ACT where the same SMAI block is connected to different
PHASORREPORT blocks with different instance numbers. Such connection will be
only correct if both connected PHASORREPORT blocks have similar settings for
SvcClass and ReportRate. If settings for PMUREPORT instances differ for SvcClass or
ReportRate, then PHASOR1 connection in PHASORREPORT1 instance 2 will not be
compliant with IEEE C37.118 standard. The reason is that the filtering in SMAI/
3PHSUM block is adapted according to the performance class (SvcClass) and
reporting rate of the connected instance of PHASORREPORT function block. In this
example, SMAI1 will adapt its filtering according to PHASORREPORT instance 1
(because of higher priority) and therefore PHASORREPORT instance 2 will receive
data which does not match its performance class and report rate.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 117

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Wide area measurement system

IEC140000128-2-en.vsd
IEC140000128 V2 EN-US

Figure 42: An example of wrong connection of SMAI and PHASORREPORT

blocks in ACT

Rule 3:

This rule is only related to the connection of 3PHSUM block to the PHASORREPORT
block. If 3PHSUM block is configured to use external DFT reference (from SMAI
reference block), it shall only be connected to the same PHASORREPORT block
instance as the one the SMAI reference block is connected to. In other words, both the
SMAI reference block and 3PHSUM block (3PHSUM block with external DFT
reference) shall be connected to the same instance of PHASORREPORT block
(PHASOR1-32 of Instance number 1 or 2).

Figure 43 shows an example of correct connection of 3PHSUM and

PHASORREPORT blocks in ACT where SMAI3 is configured as the reference block
for DFT reference external out (DFTRefExtOut) and 3PHSUM uses external DFT
reference (from SMAI3). Figures 44 and 45 show the corresponding setting
parameters.

118 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 6
Wide area measurement system

IEC140000129-2-en.vsd
IEC140000129 V2 EN-US

Figure 43: An example of correct connection of 3PHSUM and PHASORREPORT

blocks in ACT

IEC140000130-1-en.vsd
IEC140000130 V1 EN-US

Figure 44: SMAI1 setting parameters example-showing that SMAI3 is selected as

the DFT reference (DFTRefGrp3)

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 119

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Wide area measurement system

IEC140000131-1-en
IEC140000131 V1 EN-US

Figure 45: 3PHSUM setting parameters example-showing that 3PHSUM is using

the External DFT reference coming indirectly from SMAI3

Figure 46 shows an example of wrong connection of 3PHSUM and PHASORREPORT

blocks in ACT where SMAI3 is configured as the reference block for DFT reference
external out (DFTRefExtOut) and 3PHSUM uses external DFT reference (from
SMAI3).

IEC140000132-2-en.vsd
IEC140000132 V2 EN-US

Figure 46: An example of wrong connection of 3PHSUM and PHASORREPORT

blocks in ACT

If settings for PMUREPORT instances (PHASORREPORT1 instances 1 and 2 above)

differ for SvcClass or ReportRate, then the synchrophasor reported by PHASOR2
connection from PHASORREPORT1 instance 2 will not be compliant with IEEE
C37.118 standard. The reason is as in the rule 2, the filtering in SMAI/3PHSUM block

120 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 6
Wide area measurement system

is adapted according to the performance class (SvcClass) and reporting rate of the
connected instance of PHASORREPORT function block. On the other hand, when
3PHSUM uses external DFT reference, it also adapts its filtering according to the
SMAI reference block. Therefore, in order to avoid two different filtering applied to
the 3PHSUM block, both SMAI reference block and 3PHSUM shall be connected to
the same PHASORREPORT instance. In this example (Figure 46), SMAI3 adapts its
filtering according to PHASORREPORT1 instance 2 (due to connection) and
3PHSUM is adapting its filtering according to PHASORREPORT1 instance 1. On the
other hand, since 3PHSUM is set to receive external DFT reference from SMAI3,
therefore If settings for PHASORREPORT1 instances 1 and 2 above differ for
SvcClass or ReportRate, then 3PHSUM block will be affected by two different filtering
at the same time which is not possible. For example in Figure 46, PHASOR2 from
PHASORREPORT1 instance 1 may not be fully compliant with IEEE C37.118
standard.

Note: If the SMAI reference block is not connected to any PHASORREPORT block,
then 3PHSUM block can be freely connected to any PHASORREPORT block
regardless of its DFT reference setting.

Note: If more 3PHSUM blocks need to be used, all 3PHSUM blocks (using external
DFT ref) have to be connected to the same instance of PHASORREPORT blocks
(PHASOR1-32 of Instance number 1 or 2).

Note: If settings SvcClass and ReportRate are the same for different instances of
PHASORREPORT blocks, then 3PHSUM block can be freely connected to any of
them regardless of 3PHSUM block DFT reference setting or the reference SMAI block
connection.

Note: Violation of rules 2 or 3 results in non-compliancy with IEEE C37.118 standard

for some of the synchrophasors. In case of rule 2 violation, the non-compliancy only
applies to synchrophasors from instance 2 and the synchrophasors from instance 1 will
be still compliant. The non-compliancy with the standard may be quite obvious as in
case of rule 2 violation with different SvcClass settings. This produces big angle error.
On the other hand, it may be difficult to detect the non-compliancy with the standard if
rule 2 is violated with different ReportRates, or if rule 3 is violated. In such cases, the
synchrophasors may only fail to comply (with small error) in some particular test
case(s).

For more information regarding 3PHSUM block application, please refer to the
Application Manual under section Basic IED functions.

6.2.4 Setting guidelines GUID-83969957-DABF-4B9B-95C7-B9F0AF6E647A v2

Based on the functionality and appearance in PCM600, the PMU reporting

functionality is categorized into 4 different categories (function block) as follows:

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 121

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Wide area measurement system

1. PMUREPORT
2. PHASORREPORT
3. ANALOGREPORT
4. BINARYREPORT

Each category has its corresponding parameter settings except for BINARYREPORT
function block which does not have any specific parameters and settings.

1. PMUREPORT is the main function block which controls the operation of other
PMU reporting function blocks. Each instance of PMUREPORT function block
has the following parameters:
• Operation: Enables/Disables the operation of the corresponding instance of
PMU reporting functionality by choosing On/Off setting.
• SvcClass: It refers to the 1-byte SVC_CLASS field of the configuration
frame 3 (CFG-3) organization defined in IEEE C37.118.2 message format.
Here the user can select the performance class (service class) used for
synchrophasor data measurement according to IEEE C37.118.1 standard.
The options are P class or M class.
Note: There are 2 PMUREPORT instances available (PMUREPORT:1 and
PMUREPORT:2) corresponding to 2 independent data streams. The user can
set different or identical service class for each data stream. In case of
different service classes, special rules shall be considered in PCM600 ACT
for the connection of preprocessor blocks (SMAI) and 3PHSUM blocks to
PHASORREPORT blocks. More details are available under section PMU
Report Function Blocks Connection Rules in PCM600 Application
Configuration Tool (ACT).
• Global_PMU_ID: It refers to the 16-byte G_PMU_ID field of the
configuration frame 3 (CFG-3) organization defined in IEEE C37.118.2
message format. It is a 16-character (128 bits) user-assigned value which can
be sent with the configuration 3 message. It allows uniquely identifying
PMUs in a system that has more than 65535 PMUs. The coding for the 16
bytes is left to the user for assignment.
• PMUdataStreamIDCODE: It refers to the 2-byte IDCODE field of the
configuration frame and data frame organization defined in IEEE C37.118.2
message format. It is a user assigned ID number (1-65534) for each data
stream sent out from the PMU. This is especially important when having
multiple data streams (multiple PMU functionality).
Note: The data stream IDCODE is a unique code for each and every data
stream in one physical PMU device. In the IED, there are 2 PMUREPORT
instances available (PMUREPORT:1 and PMUREPORT:2) corresponding to
2 independent data streams. The user must set different IDCODEs for each
instance.
• PhasorFormat: It refers to the Bit 0 of the FORMAT field of the
configuration frames 1, 2 and 3 organization defined in IEEE C37.118.2
message format. Here the user can select the format of the calculated

122 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 6
Wide area measurement system

synchrophasors. The options are Rectangular or Polar format. Rectangular

format represents the synchrophasor as real and imaginary values, real value
first (a + bj) while the Polar format represents the synchrophasor as
magnitude and angle, magnitude first (A ejα).
• PhasorDataType: It refers to the Bit 1 of the FORMAT field of the
configuration frames 1, 2 and 3 organization defined in IEEE C37.118.2
message format. Here the user can select the data type of the calculated
synchrophasors. The options are Integer or Float data. The synchrophasor
data are sent via the PHASORS field of data frame organization of IEEE
C37.118.2 message format. Depends on the phasor data type, the size of
PHASORS field can be 4 (Integer) or 8 (Float) bytes per IEEE C37.118.2
message.
Integer data type for the phasors corresponds to a 16-bit integer value. It
represents a 16-bit signed integer, range –32 767 to +32 767, in rectangular
format, and in polar format it represents a 16-bit unsigned integer range 0 to
65535 for the magnitude and a 16-bit signed integer, in radians × 104, range
–31 416 to +31 416 for the angle.
Float data type for the phasors corresponds to 32-bit values in IEEE
floating-point format. In rectangular format, it represents real and imaginary,
in engineering units (real value first) and in polar format it represents
magnitude and angle, in engineering units (magnitude first) and angle in
radians, range –π to + π.
• AnalogDataType: It refers to the Bit 2 of the FORMAT field of the
configuration frames 1, 2 and 3 organization defined in IEEE C37.118.2
message format. Here the user can select the type of the analog data which
are reported along with the synchrophasor data over IEEE C37.118.2
message. The options are Integer or Float data corresponding to the 16-bit
integer or 32-bit IEEE floating-point values, respectively. The analog data
could be sampled data such as control signal or transducer values, or it can
be active and reactive power measurement values from each feeder in the
substation. Values and ranges are separately defined by user via the
parameter settings related to the ANALOGREPORT function block. The
analog data are sent via the ANALOG field of data frame organization of
IEEE C37.118.2 message format. Depends on the analog data type, the size
of ANALOG field can be 2 (Integer) or 4 (Float) bytes per IEEE C37.118.2
message. More information is available under the section Scaling Factors for
ANALOGREPORT channels.
• FrequencyDataType: It refers to the Bit 3 of the FORMAT field of the
configuration frames 1, 2 and 3 organization defined in IEEE C37.118.2
message format. Here the user can select the type of the frequency-deviation
and rate-of-change-of-frequency data (FREQ/DFREQ) which can be
reported along with the synchrophasor data over IEEE C37.118.2 message.
The options are Integer or Float data corresponding to the 16-bit integer or
32-bit IEEE floating-point value, respectively.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 123

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Wide area measurement system

The frequency-deviation and rate-of-change-of-frequency data are sent via

the FREQ and DFREQ fields of data frame organization of IEEE C37.118.2
message format. Depends on the selected data type, the size of each field can
be 2 (Integer) or 4 (Float) bytes per IEEE C37.118.2 message.
The data sent via the FREQ field is frequency deviation from nominal
frequency (50 Hz or 60 Hz), in mHz. It is ranged from –32.767 to +32.767
Hz. Integer data type for frequency-deviation data represents 16-bit signed
integers, range –32 767 to +32 767 32, and Float data type represents actual
frequency value in IEEE floating-point format.
The data sent via the DFREQ field is Rate Of Change Of Frequency
(ROCOF), in Hertz per second times 100. It is ranged from –327.67 to
+327.67 Hz per second. Integer data type for ROCOF data represents 16-bit
signed integers, range –32 767 to +32 767 32, and Float data type represents
actual value in IEEE floating-point format.
• SendFreqInfo: Enables/Disables sending of the frequency-deviation and Rate
Of Change Of Frequency (ROCOF) data by choosing On/Off setting.
• ReportRate: It refers to the 2-byte DATA_RATE field of the configuration
frames 1, 2 and 3 organization defined in IEEE C37.118.2 message format.
The DATA_RATE field is identifying the Rate of phasor data transmissions
by a 2-byte integer word (–32 767 to +32 767). Here the user can select the
synchrophasor data reporting rate from the PMU based on the number of
frames per second.
In general, the IED has 5 different reporting rates (10, 25, 50, 100, 200 fr/s)
on the 50 Hz system frequency, and has 8 different reporting rates (10, 12,
15, 20, 30, 60, 120, 240 fr/s) on the 60 Hz system frequency. The options are
as follows:
• 10/10 fr/s (60/50Hz)
• 12/10 fr/s (60/50Hz)
• 15/10 fr/s (60/50Hz)
• 20/25 fr/s (60/50Hz)
• 30/25 fr/s (60/50Hz)
• 60/50 fr/s (60/50Hz)
• 120/100 fr/s (60/50Hz)
• 240/200 fr/s (60/50Hz)
The first number is identifying the reporting rate in a 60Hz system, and the
second number is the reporting rate in a 50Hz system. For example, if the
selected setting is 15/10 fr/s (60/50Hz), this means that the synchrophasor
data reporting rate would be 15 frames per second if the system frequency is
60Hz. Likewise, if the system frequency is 50Hz, the selected rate is equal to
10 frames per second.
• RptTimetag: It refers to the method of time-tagging used in the IED which is
related to the phasor estimation and filtering technique. The options are
FirstSample, MiddleSample and LastSample. The time-stamp of the PMU
output represents the phasor equivalent, frequency, and ROCOF of the

124 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 6
Wide area measurement system

power system signal at the time it is applied to the PMU input. All of these
estimates must be compensated for PMU processing delays including analog
input filtering, sampling, and estimation group delay. If the sample time tags
are compensated for all input delays, the time tag of the sample in the middle
of the estimation window can be used for the phasor estimation (output) time
tag as long as the filtering coefficients are symmetrical across the filtering
window.
Note: It is recommended to set this parameter on MiddleSample.
2. PHASORREPORT is the function block responsible for reporting the
synchrophasors. Each instance of PMUREPORT function block has 32 phasor
channels with the following setting parameters; where X is a number from 1 to 32:
• PhasorXReport: Enables/Disables the phasor channel X (reporting of
PhasorX) by choosing On/Off setting.
• PhasorX: The group selector for PhasorX. Here, the user can select the type
of reported synchrophasor from the phasor channel X as either a 3-phase
symmetrical component or a single-phase phasor. The options are as follows:
• A
• B
• C
• NEGSEQ
• POSSEQ
• ZEROSEQ
• PhasorXUseFreqSrc: Enables/Disables the contribution of Phasor channel X
in automatic frequency source selection by choosing On/Off setting. Each
voltage-connected preprocessor block delivers the frequency data, derived
from the analog input AC voltage values, to the respective voltage phasor
channel. Every phasor channel has a user-settable parameter
(PhasorXUseFreqSrc) to be used as a source of frequency data for reporting
to the PDC client. It is very important to set this parameter to On for the
voltage-connected phasor channels. There is an automatic frequency source
selection logic to ensure an uninterrupted reporting of the system frequency
to the PDC client. More information is available under the section Frequency
reporting.
3. ANALOGREPORT is the function block responsible for reporting the analog
values. Each instance of ANALOGREPORT function block has 24 analog
channels with the following setting parameters; where X is a number from 1 to 24:
• AnalogXRange: This parameter defines a range between -AnalogXRange and
+AnalogXRange for AnalogX value. The range will be used by the IED to
apply a proper scale factor to the AnalogX values when Integer format is
used. It refers to the 4-byte ANUNIT field of the configuration frames 1, 2
organization and the 8-byte ANSCALE field of the configuration frame 3
organization defined in IEEE C37.118.2 message format. The
AnalogXRange value can be a number between 3277.0 and 10000000000.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 125

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Wide area measurement system

This setting is only important if the AnalogDataType setting is selected as

Integer. More information is available under the section Scaling Factors for
ANALOGREPORT channels.
• AnalogXUnitType: Unit type for analog signal X. It refers to the 4-byte
ANUNIT field of the configuration frames 1, 2 organization defined in IEEE
C37.118.2 message format. The options are Single point-on-wave, RMS of
analog input and Peak of analog input.

126 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 7
Differential protection

Section 7 Differential protection

7.1 High impedance differential protection, single phase

HZPDIF (87) IP14239-1 v4

7.1.1 Identification M14813-1 v4

IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

Function description
identification identification device number

High impedance differential protection,

HZPDIF Id 87
single phase

SYMBOL-CC V2 EN-US

7.1.2 Application IP14944-1 v3

SEMOD54734-4 v8

The 1Ph High impedance differential protection function HZPDIF (87) can be used as:

• Generator differential protection

• Reactor differential protection
• Busbar differential protection
• Autotransformer differential protection (for common and serial windings only)
• T-feeder differential protection
• Capacitor differential protection
• Restricted ground fault protection for transformer, generator and shunt reactor
windings
• Restricted ground fault protection

The application is dependent on the primary system arrangements and location of

breakers, available CT cores and so on.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 127

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Differential protection

87N 3·87

3·87B

3·87

3·87B

3·87T

3·87

3·87T

3·87G G

ANSI05000163-1-en.vsd
ANSI05000163 V2 EN-US

128 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 7
Differential protection

52 52

3·87 52
21

3·87

21

ANSI05000738-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000738 V2 EN-US

Figure 47: Different applications of a 1Ph High impedance differential protection

HZPDIF (87) function

7.1.2.1 The basics of the high impedance principle SEMOD54734-153 v9

The high impedance differential protection principle has been used for many years and
is well documented in literature publicly available. Its operating principle provides
very good sensitivity and high speed operation. One main benefit offered by the
principle is an absolute stability (that is, no operation) for external faults even in the
presence of heavy CT saturation. The principle is based on the CT secondary current
circulating between involved current transformers and not through the IED due to high
impedance in the measuring branch. This stabilizing resistance is in the range of
hundreds of ohms and sometimes above one kilo Ohm. When an internal fault occurs
the current cannot circulate and is forced through the measuring branch causing relay
operation.

It should be remembered that the whole scheme, its built-in components and wiring
must be adequately maintained throughout the lifetime of the equipment in order to be
able to withstand the high voltage peaks (that is, pulses) which may appear during an
internal fault. Otherwise any flash-over in CT secondary circuits or any other part of
the scheme may prevent correct operation of the high impedance differential relay for
an actual internal fault.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 129

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Differential protection

87N

en05000164_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000164 V1 EN-US

Figure 48: Example for the high impedance restricted earth fault protection
application

For a through fault one current transformer might saturate when the other CTs still will
feed current. For such a case a voltage will be developed across the measuring branch.
The calculations are made with the worst situations in mind and a minimum operating
voltage VR is calculated according to equation 13

VR > IF max × ( Rct + Rl )

EQUATION1531-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 13)

where:
IFmax is the maximum through fault current at the secondary side of the CT
Rct is the current transformer secondary winding resistance and
Rl is the maximum loop resistance of the circuit at any CT.

130 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 7
Differential protection

The minimum operating voltage has to be calculated (all loops) and the IED function is
set higher than the highest achieved value (setting TripPickup). As the loop resistance
is the value to the connection point from each CT, it is advisable to do all the CT core
summations in the switchgear to have shortest possible loops. This will give lower
setting values and also a better balanced scheme. The connection in to the control room
can then be from the most central bay.

For an internal fault, all involved CTs will try to feed current through the measuring
branch. Depending on the size of current transformer, relatively high voltages will be
developed across the series resistor. Note that very high peak voltages can appear. To
prevent the risk of flashover in the circuit, a voltage limiter must be included. The
voltage limiter is a voltage dependent resistor (Metrosil).

The external unit with stabilizing resistor has a value of either 6800 ohms or 1800
ohms (depending on ordered alternative) with a sliding link to allow adjustment to the
required value. Select a suitable value of the resistor based on the VR voltage
calculated. A higher resistance value will give a higher sensitivity and a lower value a
lower sensitivity of the relay.

The function has a recommended operating current range 40 mA to 1.0A for 1 A inputs
and 200 mA to 5A for 5A inputs. This, together with the selected and set value, is used
to calculate the required value of current at the set TripPickup and R series values.

The CT inputs used for 1Ph High impedance differential protection

HZPDIF (87) function, shall be set to have ratio 1:1. So the parameters
CTsecx and CTprimx of the relevant channel x of TRM and/or AIM shall
be set equal to 1 A by PST in PCM600; The parameter CTStarPointx
may be set to ToObject.

The tables 17, 18 below show, the operating currents for different settings of operating
voltages and selected resistances. Adjust as required based on tables 17, 18 or to values
in between as required for the application.

Minimum ohms can be difficult to adjust due to the small value

compared to the total value.

Normally the voltage can be increased to higher values than the calculated minimum
TripPickup with a minor change of total operating values as long as this is done by
adjusting the resistor to a higher value. Check the sensitivity calculation below for
reference.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 131

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Differential protection

Table 17: 1 A channels: input with minimum operating down to 40 mA

Operating Stabilizing Operating Stabilizing Operating
voltage resistor R current level resistor R current level
TripPickup ohms 1A ohms 1A
20 V 500 0.040 A -- --
40 V 1000 0.040 A -- --
60 V 1500 0.040 A 600 0.100 A
80 V 2000 0.040 A 800 0.100 A
100 V 2500 0.040 A 1000 0.100 A
150 V 3750 0.040 A 1500 0.100 A
200 V 5000 0.040 A 2000 0.100 A

Table 18: 5 A channels: input with minimum operating down to 100 mA

Operating Stabilizing Operating Stabilizing Operating Stabilizing Operating
voltage resistor R1 current level resistor R1 current level resistor R1 current level
TripPickup ohms 5A ohms 5A ohms 5A
20 V 200 0.100 A 100 0.200 A -- --
40 V 400 0.100 A 200 0.200 A 100 0.400
60 V 600 0.100 A 300 0.200 A 150 0.400 A
80 V 800 0.100 A 400 0.200 A 200 0.400 A
100 V 1000 0.100 A 500 0.200 A 250 0.400 A
150 V 1500 0.100 A 750 0.200 A 375 0.400 A
200 V 2000 0.100 A 1000 0.200 A 500 0.400 A

The current transformer saturation voltage must be at least 2 ˣ TripPickup to have

sufficient operating margin. This must be checked after calculation of TripPickup.

When the R value has been selected and the TripPickup value has been set, the
sensitivity of the scheme IP can be calculated. The IED sensitivity is decided by the
total current in the circuit according to equation 14.

IP = n × ( IR + Ires + å lmag )
EQUATION1747 V1 EN-US (Equation 14)

where:
n is the CT ratio
IP primary current at IED pickup,
Table continues on next page

132 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 7
Differential protection

IR IED pickup current (U>Trip/SeriesResistor)

Ires is the current through the voltage limiter and
ΣImag is the sum of the magnetizing currents from all CTs in the circuit (for example, 4 for
restricted earth fault protection, 2 for reactor differential protection, 3-5 for autotransformer
differential protection).

It should be remembered that the vectorial sum of the currents must be used (IEDs,
Metrosil and resistor currents are resistive). The current measurement is insensitive to
DC component in fault current to allow the use of only the AC components of the fault
current in the above calculations.

The voltage dependent resistor (Metrosil) characteristic is shown in Figure 54.

Series resistor thermal capacity SEMOD54734-336 v6

The series resistor is dimensioned for 200 W. Care shall be exercised while testing to
ensure that if current needs to be injected continuously or for a significant duration of
time, check that the heat dissipation Vxxx Series Resistance value does not exceed 200
W. Otherwise injection time shall be reduced to the minimum.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 133

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Differential protection

Rl Rl

Rct VR Rct
R
Rres

I>

Protected Object

VR

a) Through load situation

VR

b) Through fault situation

VR

c) Internal faults
ANSI05000427-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000427 V2 EN-US

Figure 49: The high impedance principle for one phase with two current
transformer inputs

134 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 7
Differential protection

7.1.3 Connection examples for high impedance differential

protection GUID-8C58A73D-7C2E-4BE5-AB87-B4C93FB7D62B v5

WARNING! USE EXTREME CAUTION! Dangerously high

voltages might be present on this equipment, especially on the plate
with resistors. De-energize the primary object protected with this
equipment before connecting or disconnecting wiring or performing
any maintenance. The plate with resistors should be provided with a
protective cover, mounted in a separate box or in a locked cubicle.
National law and standards shall be followed.

7.1.3.1 Connections for three-phase high impedance differential protection GUID-C12CCAAF-5AE5-4A9C-AC9C-F56A66FD2C14 v8

Generator, reactor or busbar differential protection is a typical application for three-

phase high impedance differential protection. Typical CT connections for three-phase
high impedance differential protection scheme are shown in figure 50.

L1 L2 L3
(A) (B) (C)
7 SMAI2
1 BLOCK G2AI3P
AI01 REVROT G2AI1
CT 1200/1 2 (I) ^GRP2_A G2AI2

Star/Wye 3 ^GRP2_B G2AI3

AI02 ^GRP2_C G2AI4
Connected 4 (I) ^GRP2_N G2N

5
AI03
6 (I)
7
AI04
8 (I)
9
1
AI05
0 (I)
1 1
1
1
AI06
2 (I)
Protected Object IED
N
L3 (C)
L2 (B)
L1 (A)

N 4
L3 (C)
L2 (B)

CT 1200/1 L1 (A) 5
Star/Wye
Connected X1 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2

3
1

1
3

3
R4

R5

R6

R1

R2

R3
2 U

2 U

2 U

4
2

L1 L2 L3 X X 6
(A) (B) (C) 3-Ph Plate with Metrosils and Resistors
ANSI09000169-4-en.vsdx

ANSI09000169 V4 EN-US

Figure 50: CT connections for high impedance differential protection

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 135

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Differential protection

Pos Description
1 Scheme grounding point

It is important to insure that only one grounding point exist in this scheme.

2 Three-phase plate with setting resistors and metrosils. Protective ground is a separate 4 mm screw
terminal on the plate.
3 Necessary connection for three-phase metrosil set.
4 Position of optional test switch for secondary injection into the high impedance differential IED.
5 Necessary connection for setting resistors.
6 Factory-made star point on a three-phase setting resistor set.

The star point connector must be removed for installations with 670 series
IEDs. This star point is required for RADHA schemes only.

7 Connections of three individual phase currents for high impedance scheme to three CT inputs in
the IED.

7.1.3.2 Connections for 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF (87) GUID-D68A237F-610C-4AF0-870F-273117F64D92 v10

Restricted earth fault protection is a typical application for 1Ph High impedance
differential protection HZPDIF (87). Typical CT connections for the high impedance
based protection scheme are shown in figure 51.

136 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 7
Differential protection

L1 L2 L3
(A) (B) (C)

CT 1500/5 2 AI01 (I)

Star/Wye 3
SMAI2
Connected 4 AI02 (I)
BLOCK G2AI3P

5 REVROT G2AI1

6 6 AI03 (I) ^GRP2_A G2AI2

^GRP2_B G2AI3
7
^GRP2_C G2AI4
8 AI04 (I)
^GRP2_N G2N

9
10 AI05 (I)
11
Protected Object 12 AI06 (I)

L1 L2 L3
IED
N
(A) (B) (C)

4
1
N
CT 1500/5

X1 4 5 1 2 3
2
3
5

1
3
R1

R2
2 V

4
2
1-Ph Plate with Metrosil and Resistor
ANSI09000170-5-en.vsdx

ANSI09000170 V5 EN-US

Figure 51: CT connections for restricted earth fault protection

Pos Description
1 Scheme grounding point

Ensure that only one grounding point exists in this scheme.

2 One-phase plate with stabilizing resistor and metrosil. Protective ground is a separate 4 mm screw
terminal on the plate.
3 Necessary connection for the metrosil.
4 Position of optional test switch for secondary injection into the high impedance differential IED.
5 Necessary connection for stabilizing resistor.
6 How to connect the high impedance restricted earth fault protection scheme to one CT input in IED.

7.1.4 Setting guidelines IP14945-1 v1

M13076-3 v2

The setting calculations are individual for each application. Refer to the different
application descriptions below.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 137

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Differential protection

7.1.4.1 Configuration M13076-5 v4

The configuration is done in the Application Configuration tool.

7.1.4.2 Settings of protection function M13076-10 v6

Operation: The operation of the high impedance differential function can be switched
Enabled or Disabled.

AlarmPickup: Set the alarm level. The sensitivity can roughly be calculated as a certain
percentage of the selected Trip level. A typical setting is 10% of TripPickup. This
alarm stage can be used for scheme CT supervision.

tAlarm: Set the time delay for the alarm. A typical setting is 2-3 seconds.

TripPickup: Set the trip level according to the calculations (see examples below for a
guidance). The level is selected with margin to the calculated required voltage to
achieve stability. Values can be within 20V - 400V range dependent on the application.

R series: Set the value of the used stabilizing series resistor. Calculate the value
according to the examples for each application. Adjust the resistor as close as possible
to the calculated value. Measure the value achieved and set this value for this
parameter.

The value shall always be high impedance. This means for example, for
1A circuits say bigger than 400 ohms (400 VA) and for 5 A circuits say
bigger than 100 ohms (2500 VA). This ensures that the current will
circulate and not go through the differential circuit at through faults.

That the settings of U>Alarm, U>Trip and SeriesResistor must be

chosen such that both U>Alarm/SeriesResistor and U>Trip/
SeriesResistor are >4% of IRated of the used current input. Normally
the settings shall also be such that U>Alarm/SeriesResistor and
U>Trip/SeriesResistor both gives a value <4*IRated of the used current
input. If not, the limitation in how long time the actual current is
allowed to persist not to overload the current input must be considered
especially during the secondary testing.

7.1.4.3 T-feeder protection M16850-4 v6

In many busbar arrangements such as breaker-and-a-half, ring breaker, mesh corner,

there will be a T-feeder from the current transformer at the breakers up to the current

138 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 7
Differential protection

transformers in the feeder circuit (for example, in the transformer bushings). It is often
required to separate the protection zones that the feeder is protected with one scheme
while the T-zone is protected with a separate differential protection scheme. The 1Ph
high impedance differential HZPDIF (87) function in the IED allows this to be done
efficiently, see Figure 52.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 139

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Differential protection

87

en05000165_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000165 V1 EN-US

3·87

ANSI05000739-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000739 V2 EN-US

140 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 7
Differential protection

Figure 52: The protection scheme utilizing the high impedance function for the T-
feeder

Normally this scheme is set to achieve a sensitivity of around 20 percent of the used
CT primary rating so that a low ohmic value can be used for the series resistor.

It is strongly recommended to use the highest tap of the CT whenever

high impedance protection is used. This helps in utilizing maximum CT
capability, minimize the secondary fault current, thereby reducing the
stability voltage limit. Another factor is that during internal faults, the
voltage developed across the selected tap is limited by the non-linear
resistor but in the unused taps, owing to auto-transformer action,
voltages induced may be much higher than design limits.

Setting example
Basic data:
Current transformer ratio: 2000/5A
CT Class: C800 (At max tap of 2000/5A)
Secondary resistance: 0.5 Ohm (2000/5A tap)
Cable loop resistance: 2

Max fault current: Equal to switchgear rated fault current 40 kA

Calculation:

40000
VR > × ( 0.5 + 0.4 ) = 90V
400
EQUATION1751-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 15)

Select a setting of TripPickup=100 V.

The current transformer saturation voltage must be at least twice the set operating voltage TripPickup.

VkneeANSI > (0.5 + 8) × 100 * 0.7 = 595V

EQUATION1752-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 16)

that is, bigger than 2 ˣTripPickup

Check from the table of selected resistances the required series stabilizing resistor
value to use. As this application requires to be so sensitive select R Series= 500 ohm,
which gives an IED operating current of 200 mA.

Calculate the primary sensitivity at operating voltage using the following equation.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 141

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Differential protection

2000
IP = ( 200 0° + 3 × 50 -60° ) ×10-3 £ approx.100 A
5
EQUATION1887-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 17)

where
100 mA is the current drawn by the IED circuit and
10 mA is the current drawn by each CT just at pickup
20 mA is current drawn by metrosil at pickup

The magnetizing current is taken from the magnetizing curve for the current
transformer cores which should be available. The current value at TripPickup is taken.

It can clearly be seen that the sensitivity is not so much influenced by the selected
voltage level so a sufficient margin should be used. The selection of the stabilizing
resistor and the level of the magnetizing current (mostly dependent of the number of
turns) are the most important factors.

7.1.4.4 Tertiary reactor protection M16850-118 v5

Reactive power equipment (for example shunt reactors and/or shunt capacitors) can be
connected to the tertiary winding of the power transformers. The 1Ph High impedance
differential protection function HZPDIF (87) can be used to protect the tertiary reactor
for phase faults as well as ground faults if the power system of the tertiary winding is
direct or low impedance grounded.

142 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 7
Differential protection

3·87

ANSI05000176-2-en.vsd

ANSI05000176 V2 EN-US

Figure 53: Application of the1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF (87) function on a reactor

Setting example

It is strongly recommended to use the highest tap of the CT whenever

high impedance protection is used. This helps in utilizing maximum CT
capability, minimize the secondary fault, thereby reducing the stability
voltage limit. Another factor is that during internal faults, the voltage
developed across the selected tap is limited by the non-linear resistor

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 143

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Differential protection

but in the unused taps, owing to auto-transformer action, voltages much

higher than design limits might be induced.

Basic data:
Current transformer ratio: 100/5 A (Note: Must be the same at all locations)
CT Class: C200
Secondary resistance: 0.1 Ohms (At 100/5 Tap)
Cable loop resistance: <100 ft AWG10 (one way between the junction point and the farthest
CT) to be limited to approximately 0.1 Ohms at 75deg C
Note! Only one way as the tertiary power system grounding is limiting
the ground-fault current. If high ground-fault current exists use two way
cable length.
Max fault current: The maximum through fault current is limited by the reactor reactance
and the inrush will be the worst for a reactor for example, 800 A.

Calculation:

800
VR > × (0.1 + 0.1) = 8
20
EQUATION1768-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 18)

Select a setting of TripPickup=30 V.

The current transformer knee point voltage must be at least, twice the set operating voltage TripPickup.

VkneeANSI > ( 2 + 0.1) × 100 × 0.7 = 147 V

EQUATION1779-ANSI V2 EN-US (Equation 19)

that is, greater than 2 ˣ TripPickup.

Check from the table of selected resistances the required series stabilizing resistor
value to use. Since this application requires good sensitivity, select R Series = 100
ohm, which gives an IED current of 200 mA.

To calculate the sensitivity at operating voltage, refer to equation 20, which gives an
acceptable value, ignoring the current drawn by the non-linear resistor. A little lower
sensitivity could be selected by using a lower resistance value.

100
IP = × (200 + 2 × 30) £ approx.5.2 A
5
EQUATION1769-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 20)

144 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 7
Differential protection

Where 200mA is the current drawn by the IED circuit and 50mA is the current drawn
by each CT just at pickup. The magnetizing current is taken from the magnetizing
curve of the current transformer cores, which should be available. The current value at
TripPickup is taken.

7.1.4.5 Alarm level operation M16850-196 v6

The 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF (87) function has a separate
alarm level, which can be used to give alarm for problems with an involved current
transformer circuit. The setting level is normally selected to be around 10% of the
operating voltage TripPickup.

As seen in the setting examples above the sensitivity of HZPDIF (87) function is
normally high, which means that the function will in many cases operate also for short
circuits or open current transformer secondary circuits. However the stabilizing resistor
can be selected to achieve sensitivity higher than normal load current and/or separate
criteria can be added to the operation, like a check zone. This can be either another
IED, with the same HZPDIF (87) function, or be a check about the fault condition,
which is performed by a ground overcurrent function or neutral point voltage function.

For such cases where operation is not expected during normal service the alarm output
should be used to activate an external shorting of the differential circuit avoiding
continuous high voltage in the circuit. A time delay of a few seconds is used before the
shorting and alarm are activated. Auxiliary relays with contacts that can withstand high
voltage shall be used, like RXMVB types.

The metrosil operating characteristic is given in the following figure.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 145

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Differential protection

IEC05000749 V1 EN-US

Figure 54: Current voltage characteristics for the non-linear resistors, in the range 10-200 V, the average
range of current is: 0.01–10 mA

146 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

Section 8 Current protection

8.1 Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC

(50) IP14506-1 v6

8.1.1 Identification
M14880-1 v5

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Instantaneous phase overcurrent PHPIOC 50
protection
3I>>

SYMBOL-Z V1 EN-US

8.1.2 Application M12911-3 v6

Long transmission lines often transfer great quantities of electric power from
generation to consumption areas. The unbalance of the produced and consumed electric
power at each end of the transmission line is very large. This means that a fault on the
line can easily endanger the stability of a complete system.

The transient stability of a power system depends mostly on three parameters (at
constant amount of transmitted electric power):

• The type of the fault. Three-phase faults are the most dangerous, because no power
can be transmitted through the fault point during fault conditions.
• The magnitude of the fault current. A high fault current indicates that the decrease
of transmitted power is high.
• The total fault clearing time. The phase angles between the EMFs of the
generators on both sides of the transmission line increase over the permitted
stability limits if the total fault clearing time, which consists of the protection
operating time and the breaker opening time, is too long.

The fault current on long transmission lines depends mostly on the fault position and
decreases with the distance from the generation point. For this reason the protection

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 147

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

must operate very quickly for faults very close to the generation (and relay) point, for
which very high fault currents are characteristic.

The instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC (50) can operate in 10 ms for
faults characterized by very high currents.

8.1.3 Setting guidelines IP14979-1 v1

M12915-4 v9

The parameters for instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC (50) are set via
the local HMI or PCM600.

This protection function must operate only in a selective way. So check all system and
transient conditions that could cause its unwanted operation.

Only detailed network studies can determine the operating conditions under which the
highest possible fault current is expected on the line. In most cases, this current appears
during three-phase fault conditions. But also examine single-phase-to-ground and two-
phase-to-ground conditions.

Also study transients that could cause a high increase of the line current for short times.
A typical example is a transmission line with a power transformer at the remote end,
which can cause high inrush current when connected to the network and can thus also
cause the operation of the built-in, instantaneous, overcurrent protection.

Common base IED values for primary current (IBase), primary voltage (UBase) and
primary power (SBase) are set in the global base values for settings function
GBASVAL.

GlobalBaseSel: This is used to select GBASVAL function for reference of base values.

Operation: Set the protection to On/Off.

OpModeSel: This parameter can be set to 2 out of 3 or 1 out of 3. The setting controls
the minimum number of phase currents that must be larger than the set operate current
Pickup for operation. Normally this parameter is set to 1 out of 3and will thus detect all
fault types. If the protection is to be used mainly for multi phase faults, 2 out of 3
should be chosen.

Pickup: Set operate current in % of IB.

IP>>Max and IP>>Min should only be changed if remote setting of operation current
level, IP>>, is used. The limits are used for decreasing the used range of the IP>>
setting. If IP>> is set outside IP>>Max and IP>>Min, the closest of the limits to
IP>> is used by the function. If IP>>Max is smaller than IP>>Min, the limits are
swapped.

148 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

MultPU: The set operate current can be changed by activation of the binary input
MULTPU to the set factor MultPU.

8.1.3.1 Meshed network without parallel line M12915-9 v8

The following fault calculations have to be done for three-phase, single-phase-to-

ground and two-phase-to-ground faults. With reference to Figure 55, apply a fault in B
and then calculate the current through-fault phase current IfB. The calculation should be
done using the minimum source impedance values for ZA and the maximum source
impedance values for ZB in order to get the maximum through fault current from A to
B.

I fB
A B
ZA ZL ZB
~ ~
IED

Fault

ANSI09000022-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000022 V1 EN-US

Figure 55: Through fault current from A to B: IfB

Then a fault in A has to be applied and the through fault current IfA has to be
calculated, Figure 56. In order to get the maximum through fault current, the minimum
value for ZB and the maximum value for ZA have to be considered.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 149

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

I fA
A B
ZA ZL ZB
~ ~
IED

Fault
ANSI09000023-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000023 V1 EN-US

Figure 56: Through fault current from B to A: IfA

The IED must not trip for any of the two through-fault currents. Hence the minimum
theoretical current setting (Imin) will be:

Imin ³ MAX(I fA, IfB )

EQUATION78 V1 EN-US (Equation 21)

A safety margin of 5% for the maximum protection static inaccuracy and a safety
margin of 5% for the maximum possible transient overreach have to be introduced. An
additional 20% is suggested due to the inaccuracy of the instrument transformers under
transient conditions and inaccuracy in the system data.

The minimum primary setting (Is) for the instantaneous phase overcurrent protection is
then:

I s ³ 1.3 × I min
EQUATION79 V3 EN-US (Equation 22)

The protection function can be used for the specific application only if this setting
value is equal to or less than the maximum fault current that the IED has to clear, IF in
Figure 57.

150 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

IF
A B
ZA ZL ZB
~ ~
IED

Fault
ANSI09000024-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000024 V1 EN-US

Figure 57: Fault current: IF

The IED setting value Pickup is given in percentage of the primary base current value,
IBase. The value for Pickup is given from this formula:

Is
Pickup = × 100
IBase
ANSIEQUATION1147 V1 EN-US (Equation 23)

8.1.3.2 Meshed network with parallel line M12915-34 v7

In case of parallel lines, the influence of the induced current from the parallel line to
the protected line has to be considered. One example is given in Figure 58, where the
two lines are connected to the same busbars. In this case the influence of the induced
fault current from the faulty line (line 1) to the healthy line (line 2) is considered
together with the two through fault currents IfA and IfB mentioned previously. The
maximal influence from the parallel line for the IED in Figure 58 will be with a fault at
the C point with the C breaker open.

A fault in C has to be applied, and then the maximum current seen from the IED (IM )
on the healthy line (this applies for single-phase-to-ground and two-phase-to-ground
faults) is calculated.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 151

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

Line 1
A C B
ZL1

ZA ZB
~ Fault M ~
ZL2

IM

IED Line 2
ANSI09000025_2_en.vsd
ANSI09000025 V2 EN-US

Figure 58: Two parallel lines. Influence from parallel line to the through fault
current: IM

The minimum theoretical current setting for the overcurrent protection function (Imin)
will be:

Imin ³ MAX(I fA, IfB , IM )

EQUATION82 V1 EN-US (Equation 24)

Where IfA and IfB have been described in the previous paragraph. Considering the
safety margins mentioned previously, the minimum setting (Is) for the instantaneous
phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output is then:

Is ³1.3·Imin
EQUATION83 V2 EN-US (Equation 25)

The protection function can be used for the specific application only if this setting
value is equal or less than the maximum phase fault current that the IED has to clear.

The IED setting value Pickup is given in percentage of the primary base current value,
IBase. The value for Pickup is given from this formula:

Is
Pickup = × 100
IBase
ANSIEQUATION1147 V1 EN-US (Equation 26)

152 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

8.2 Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps

OC4PTOC(51_67) SEMOD129998-1 v8

8.2.1 Identification
M14885-1 v6

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Directional phase overcurrent OC4PTOC 51_67
protection, four steps

TOC-REVA V2 EN-US

8.2.2 Application M15335-3 v9

Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps OC4PTOC (51_67) is used in

several applications in the power system. Some applications are:

• Short circuit protection of feeders in distribution and subtransmission systems.

Normally these feeders have a radial structure.
• Back-up short circuit protection of transmission lines.
• Back-up short circuit protection of power transformers.
• Short circuit protection of different kinds of equipment connected to the power
system such as; shunt capacitor banks, shunt reactors, motors and others.
• Back-up short circuit protection of power generators.

In many applications several steps with different current pickup levels and time delays
are needed. OC4PTOC (51_67) can have up to four different, individually settable
steps. The following options are possible:

Non-directional / Directional function: In most applications the non-directional

functionality is used. This is mostly the case when no fault current can be fed from the
protected object itself. In order to achieve both selectivity and fast fault clearance, the
directional function can be necessary.

If VT inputs are not available or not connected, the setting parameter

DirModeSelx (x = step 1, 2, 3 or 4) shall be left to the default value
Non-directional.

Choice of time delay characteristics: There are several types of time delay
characteristics available such as definite time delay and different types of inverse time

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 153

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

delay characteristics. The selectivity between different overcurrent protections is

normally enabled by co-ordination between the function time delays of the different
protections. To enable optimal co-ordination between all overcurrent protections, they
should have the same time delay characteristic. Therefore, a wide range of standardized
inverse time characteristics are available for IEC and ANSI. It is also possible to tailor
make the inverse time characteristic.

Normally, it is required that the phase overcurrent protection shall reset as fast as
possible when the current level gets lower than the operation level. In some cases some
sort of delayed reset is required. Therefore, different kinds of reset characteristics can
be used.

For some protection applications, there can be a need to change the current pick-up
level for some time. A typical case is when the protection will measure the current to a
large motor. At the start up sequence of a motor the start current can be significantly
larger than the rated current of the motor. Therefore, there is a possibility to give a
setting of a multiplication factor to the current pick-up level. This multiplication factor
is activated from a binary input signal to the function.

Power transformers can have a large inrush current, when being energized. This
phenomenon is due to saturation of the transformer magnetic core during parts of the
period. There is a risk that inrush current will reach levels above the pick-up current of
the phase overcurrent protection. The inrush current has a large 2nd harmonic content.
This can be used to avoid unwanted operation of the protection function. Therefore,
OC4PTOC (51/67) has a possibility of 2nd harmonic restrain if the level of 2nd
harmonic current reaches a value above a set percent of the fundamental current.

The phase overcurrent protection is often used as a protection for two and three phase
short circuits. In some cases, it is not wanted to detect single-phase ground faults by
the phase overcurrent protection. This fault type is detected and cleared after operation
of ground fault protection. Therefore, it is possible to make a choice how many phases,
at minimum, that have to have current above the pick-up level, to enable operation. If
set 1 of 3 it is sufficient to have high current in one phase only. If set 2 of 3 or 3 of 3
single-phase ground faults are not detected.

8.2.3 Setting guidelines IP14982-1 v1

M12982-4 v13

When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected, the trip time

of the stage will be the sum of the inverse time delay and the set
definite time delay. Thus, if only the inverse time delay is required, it is
important to set the definite time delay for that stage to zero.

154 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

The parameters for the directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps OC4PTOC
(51/67) are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

The following settings can be done for OC4PTOC (51/67).

Common base IED values for primary current (IBase), primary voltage (UBase) and
primary power (SBase) are set in the global base values for settings function
GBASVAL.

GlobalBaseSel: This is used to select GBASVAL function for reference of base values.

MeasType: Selection of discrete Fourier filtered (DFT) or true RMS filtered (RMS)
signals. RMS is used when the harmonic contents are to be considered, for example in
applications with shunt capacitors.

Operation: The protection can be set to Enabled or Disabled.

AngleRCA: Protection characteristic angle set in degrees. If the angle of the fault loop
current has the angle RCA, the direction to the fault is forward.

AngleROA: Angle value, given in degrees, to define the angle sector of the directional
function, shown in Figure 59.

NumPhSel: Number of phases, with high current, required for operation. The setting
possibilities are: 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 and 3 out of 3. The default setting is 1 out of 3.

PUMinOpPhSel: Minimum current setting level for releasing the directional start
signals in % of IB. This setting should be less than the lowest step setting. The default
setting is 7% of IB.

2ndHarmStab: Operate level of 2nd harmonic current restrain set in % of the

fundamental current. The setting range is 5 - 100% in steps of 1%. The default setting
is 20%.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 155

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

Vref

2
4

Idir

ANSI09000636-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000636 V1 EN-US

Figure 59: Directional function characteristic

1. RCA = Relay characteristic angle

2. ROA = Relay operating angle
3. Reverse
4. Forward

8.2.3.1 Settings for each step M12982-19 v10

x means step 1, 2, 3 and 4.

DirModeSelx: The directional mode of step x. Possible settings are Disabled/Non-

directional/Forward/Reverse.

156 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

Characteristx: Selection of time characteristic for step x. Definite time delay and
different types of inverse time characteristics are available according to Table 19.
Table 19: Inverse time characteristics
Curve name
ANSI Extremely Inverse
ANSI Very Inverse
ANSI Normal Inverse
ANSI Moderately Inverse
ANSI/IEEE Definite time
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse
ANSI Long Time Inverse
IEC Normal Inverse
IEC Very Inverse
IEC Inverse
IEC Extremely Inverse
IEC Short Time Inverse
IEC Long Time Inverse
IEC Definite Time
User Programmable
ASEA RI
RXIDG or RD (logarithmic)

The different characteristics are described in Technical manual.

Pickupx: Operate phase current level for step x given in % of IB.

Ix>Max and Ix>Min should only be changed if remote setting of operation current
level, Ix>, is used. The limits are used for decreasing the used range of the Ix> setting.
If Ix> is set outside Ix>Max and Ix>Min, the closest of the limits to Ix> is used by the
function. If Ix>Max is smaller than Ix>Min, the limits are swapped.

tx: Definite time delay for step x. The definite time tx is added to the inverse time when
inverse time characteristic is selected. Note that the value set is the time between
activation of the start and the trip outputs.

TDx: Time multiplier for inverse time delay for step x.

IMinx: Minimum operate current in % of IB for all inverse time characteristics, below
which no operation takes place.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 157

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

IMinx: Minimum pickup current for step x in % of IBase. Set IMinx below Pickupx for
every step to achieve ANSI reset characteristic according to standard. If IMinx is set
above Pickupx for any step the ANSI reset works as if current is zero when current
drops below IMinx.

txMin: Minimum trip time for all inverse time characteristics. At high currents the
inverse time characteristic might give a very short operation time. By setting this
parameter the operation time of the step can never be shorter than the setting. Setting
range: 0.000 - 60.000s in steps of 0.001s.

MultPUx: Multiplier for scaling of the current setting value. If a binary input signal
ENMULTx (enableMultiplier) is activated the current operation level is increased by
this setting constant. Setting range: 1.0-10.0

Trip time

tx

txMin

Pickup current
ANSI10000058-1-en.vsdx
ANSI10000058 V1 EN-US

Figure 60: Minimum pickup current and trip time for inverse time characteristics

In order to fully comply with the definition of the curve, the setting parameter txMin
shall be set to a value equal to the operating time of the selected inverse curve for
twenty times the set current pickup value. Note that the operate time is dependent on
the selected time multiplier setting kx.

ResetTypeCrvx: The reset of the delay timer can be made as shown in Table 20.

158 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

Table 20: Reset possibilities

Curve name Curve index no.
Instantaneous 1
IEC Reset (constant time) 2
ANSI Reset (inverse time) 3

The delay characteristics are described in Technical manual. There are some
restrictions regarding the choice of the reset delay.

For the definite time delay characteristics, the possible delay time setting instantaneous
(1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).

For ANSI inverse time characteristics, all three types of reset time characteristics are
available: instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant time reset) and ANSI (3 = current
dependent reset time).

For IEC inverse time characteristics, the possible delay time settings are instantaneous
(1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).

For the customer tailor-made inverse time delay characteristics (type 17), all three
types of reset time characteristics are available: instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant
time reset) and ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time). If the current-dependent type
is used, settings pr, tr and cr must be given.

tResetx: Constant reset time delay in seconds for step x.

tPCrvx, tACrvx, tBCrvx, tCCrvx: These parameters are used by the customer to create
the inverse time characteristic curve. See equation 27 for the time characteristic
equation. For more information, refer to Technical manual.

æ ö
ç A ÷
t [s] = ç + B ÷ × MultPUx
çæ i ö ÷
p

çç ÷ -C ÷
è è in > ø ø
ANSI-EQUATION1261 V1 EN-US (Equation 27)

tPRCrvx, tTRCrvx, tCRCrvx: These parameters are used by the customer to create the
inverse reset time characteristic curve. For more information, refer to Technical
manual.

HarmRestrainx: Enables the block of step x from the harmonic restrain function (2nd
harmonic). This function should be used when there is a risk of an unwanted trip
caused by power transformer inrush currents. It can be set to Disabled/Enabled.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 159

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

8.2.3.2 Setting example GUID-20729467-24AB-42F0-9FD1-D2959028732E v1

Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps can be used in different ways,
depending on the application where the protection is used. A general description is
given below.

The pickup current setting of the inverse time protection, or the lowest current step of
the definite time protection, must be defined so that the highest possible load current
does not cause protection operation. The protection reset current must also be
considered so that a short peak of overcurrent does not cause the operation of a
protection even when the overcurrent has ceased. This phenomenon is described in
Figure 61.

Current I

Line phase current

Pickup current

Reset current

The IED does not reset

Time t

ANSI09000146-en-1.vsd
ANSI09000146 V1 EN-US

Figure 61: Pickup and reset current for an overcurrent protection

The lowest setting value can be written according to Equation 28.

160 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

Im ax
Ipu ³ 1.2 ×
k
EQUATION1262 V2 EN-US (Equation 28)

where:
1.2 is a safety factor
k is the reset ratio of the protection
Imax is the maximum load current

The load current up to the present situation can be found from operation statistics. The
current setting must remain valid for several years. In most cases, the setting values are
updated once every five years or less often. Investigate the maximum load current that
the equipment on the line can withstand. Study components, such as line conductors,
current transformers, circuit breakers, and disconnectors. The manufacturer of the
equipment normally gives the maximum thermal load current of the equipment.

The maximum load current on the line has to be estimated. There is also a demand that
all faults within the zone that the protection shall cover must be detected by the phase
overcurrent protection. The minimum fault current Iscmin to be detected by the
protection must be calculated. Taking this value as a base, the highest pickup current
setting can be written according to Equation 29.

Ipu £ 0.7 × Isc min

EQUATION1263 V2 EN-US (Equation 29)

where:
0.7 is a safety factor
Iscmin is the smallest fault current to be detected by the overcurrent protection.

As a summary, the pickup current shall be chosen within the interval stated in
Equation 30.

Im ax
1.2 × £ Ipu £ 0.7 × Isc min
k
EQUATION1264 V2 EN-US (Equation 30)

The high current function of the overcurrent protection, which only has a short-delay
trip time, must be given a current setting so that the protection is selective to other
protection functions in the power system. It is desirable to have rapid tripping of faults
within a large part of the power system to be protected by the protection (primary

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 161

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

protected zone). A fault current calculation gives the largest current of faults, Iscmax,
at the most remote part of the primary protected zone. The risk of transient overreach
must be considered, due to a possible DC component of the short circuit current. The
lowest current setting of the fastest stage can be written according to

I high ³ 1.2 × kt × I sc max

EQUATION1265 V1 EN-US (Equation 31)

where:
1.2 is a safety factor
kt is a factor that takes care of the transient overreach due to the DC component of the fault current
and can be considered to be less than 1.05
Iscmax is the largest fault current at a fault at the most remote point of the primary protection zone.

The operate time of the phase overcurrent protection has to be chosen so that the fault
time is short enough that the protected equipment will not be destroyed due to thermal
overload while, at the same time, selectivity is assured. For overcurrent protection in a
radial fed network, the time setting can be chosen in a graphical way. This is mostly
used in the case of inverse time overcurrent protection. Figure 62 shows how the time-
versus-current curves are plotted in a diagram. The time setting is chosen to get the
shortest fault time with maintained selectivity. Selectivity is assured if the time
difference between the curves is larger than a critical time difference.

162 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

Time-current curves
10

tfunc1n
Trip time

tfunc2n

0.01
10 Strn 10000
Fault Current
en05000204.ai
IEC05000204 V2 EN-US

Figure 62: Fault time with maintained selectivity

The operation time can be set individually for each overcurrent protection.

To assure selectivity between different protection functions in the radial network, there
has to be a minimum time difference Dt between the time delays of two protections. To
determine the shortest possible time difference, the operation time of the protection, the
breaker opening time and the protection resetting time must be known. These time
delays can vary significantly between different protective equipment. The following
time delays can be estimated:

Protection operation 15-60 ms

time:
Protection resetting time: 15-60 ms
Breaker opening time: 20-120 ms

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 163

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

Example for time coordination

Assume two substations A and B directly connected to each other via one line, as
shown in the Figure 63. Consider a fault located at another line from the station B. The
fault current to the overcurrent protection of IED B1 has a magnitude so that the
overcurrent protection will start and subsequently trip, and the overcurrent protection
of IED A1 must have a delayed operation in order to avoid maloperation. The sequence
of events during the fault can be described using a time axis shown in Figure 63.

A1 B1
Feeder

51 51

Time axis

t=0 t=t1 t=t2 t=t3

The fault Protection Breaker at Protection
occurs B1 trips B1 opens A1 resets en05000205_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000205 V1 EN-US

Figure 63: Sequence of events during fault

where:
t=0 is when the fault occurs
t=t1 is when protection IED B1 and protection IED A1 start

t=t2 is when the trip signal from the overcurrent protection at IED B1 is sent to the circuit breaker.

t=t3 is when the circuit breaker at IED B1 opens. The circuit breaker opening time is t3 - t2

t=t4 is when the overcurrent protection at IED A1 resets. The protection resetting time is t4 - t3.

To ensure that the overcurrent protection at IED A1 is selective to the overcurrent

protection at IED B1, the minimum time difference must be larger than the time t3.
There are uncertainties in the values of protection operation time, breaker opening time
and protection resetting time. Therefore a safety margin has to be included. With
normal values the needed time difference can be calculated according to Equation 32.

164 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

Dt ³ 40 ms + 100 ms + 40 ms + 40 ms = 220 ms
EQUATION1266 V1 EN-US (Equation 32)

where it is considered that:

the operate time of overcurrent protection B1 is 40 ms
the breaker open time is 100 ms
the resetting time of protection A1 is 40 ms and
the additional margin is 40 ms

8.3 Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC

(50N) IP14508-1 v3

8.3.1 Identification
M14887-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Instantaneous residual overcurrent EFPIOC 50N
protection
IN>>

IEF V1 EN-US

8.3.2 Application M12699-3 v5

In many applications, when fault current is limited to a defined value by the object
impedance, an instantaneous ground-fault protection can provide fast and selective
tripping.

The Instantaneous residual overcurrent EFPIOC (50N), which can operate in 15 ms (50
Hz nominal system frequency) for faults characterized by very high currents, is
included in the IED.

8.3.3 Setting guidelines IP14985-1 v1

M12762-44
M12762-4 v4
v2

The parameters for the Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC (50N)
are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

Some guidelines for the choice of setting parameter for EFPIOC (50N) is given.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 165

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

M12762-6 v8

Common base IED values for primary current (IBase), primary voltage (VBase) and
primary power (SBase) are set in the global base values for settings function
GBASVAL.

GlobalBaseSel: This is used to select GBASVAL function for reference of base values.

The basic requirement is to assure selectivity, that is EFPIOC (50N) shall not be
allowed to operate for faults at other objects than the protected object (line).

For a normal line in a meshed system single phase-to-ground faults and phase-to-
phase-to-ground faults shall be calculated as shown in Figure 64 and Figure 65. The
residual currents (3I0) to the protection are calculated. For a fault at the remote line end
this fault current is IfB. In this calculation the operational state with high source
impedance ZA and low source impedance ZB should be used. For the fault at the home
busbar this fault current is IfA. In this calculation the operational state with low source
impedance ZA and high source impedance ZB should be used.

I fB
A B
ZA ZL ZB
~ ~
IED

Fault

ANSI09000022-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000022 V1 EN-US

Figure 64: Through fault current from A to B: IfB

I fA
A B
ZA ZL ZB
~ ~
IED

Fault
ANSI09000023-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000023 V1 EN-US

Figure 65: Through fault current from B to A: IfA

166 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

The function shall not operate for any of the calculated currents to the protection. The
minimum theoretical current setting (Imin) will be:

Im in  MAX  I fA , I fB 
EQUATION284 V2 EN-US (Equation 33)

A safety margin of 5% for the maximum static inaccuracy and a safety margin of 5%
for maximum possible transient overreach have to be introduced. An additional 20% is
suggested due to inaccuracy of instrument transformers under transient conditions and
inaccuracy in the system data.

The minimum primary current setting (Is) is:

Is = 1.3 × Imin
EQUATION285 V3 EN-US (Equation 34)

In case of parallel lines with zero sequence mutual coupling a fault on the parallel line,
as shown in Figure 66, should be calculated.

Line 1
A C B
ZL1

ZA ZB
~ Fault M ~
ZL2

IM

IED Line 2
ANSI09000025_2_en.vsd
ANSI09000025 V2 EN-US

Figure 66: Two parallel lines. Influence from parallel line to the through fault
current: IM

The minimum theoretical current setting (Imin) will in this case be:

I m in ³ M A X ( IfA, I fB, I M )
EQUATION287 V1 EN-US (Equation 35)

Where:
IfA and IfB have been described for the single line case.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 167

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

Considering the safety margins mentioned previously, the minimum setting (Is) is:

Is = 1.3 × Imin
EQUATION288 V3 EN-US (Equation 36)

The IED setting value IN>> is given in percent of the primary base current value,
IBase. The value for IN>> is given by the formula:

IN  ( I s IBase)  100

IECEQUATION17003 V1 EN-US (Equation 37)

Transformer inrush current shall be considered.

The setting of the protection is set as a percentage of the base current (IBase).

Operation: set the protection to Enabled or Disabled.

Pickup: Set operate current in % of IB.

IN>>Max and IN>>Min should only be changed if remote setting of operation current
level, IN>>, is used. The limits are used for decreasing the used range of the IN>>
setting. If IN>> is set outside IN>>Max and IN>>Min, the closest of the limits to
IN>> is used by the function. If IN>>Max is smaller than IN>>Min, the limits are
swapped.

MultPU: The set operate current can be changed by activation of the binary input
MULTPU to the set factor MultPU.

8.4 Directional residual overcurrent protection, four steps

EF4PTOC (51N/67N) IP14509-1 v8

8.4.1 Identification
M14881-1 v6

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Directional residual overcurrent EF4PTOC 51N_67N
4(IN>)
protection, four steps
4
alt
4
TEF-REVA V2 EN-US

168 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

8.4.2 Application M12509-12 v10

The directional residual overcurrent protection, four steps EF4PTOC (51N_67N) is

used in several applications in the power system. Some applications are:

• Ground-fault protection of feeders in effectively grounded distribution and

subtransmission systems. Normally these feeders have radial structure.
• Back-up ground-fault protection of transmission lines.
• Sensitive ground-fault protection of transmission lines. EF4PTOC (51N_67N) can
have better sensitivity to detect resistive phase-to-ground-faults compared to
distance protection.
• Back-up ground-fault protection of power transformers.
• Ground-fault protection of different kinds of equipment connected to the power
system such as shunt capacitor banks, shunt reactors and others.

In many applications, several steps with different current pickup levels and time delays
are needed. EF4PTOC (51N_67N) can have up to four, individual settable steps. The
flexibility of each step of EF4PTOC (51N_67N) is great. The following options are
possible:

Non-directional/Directional function: In some applications the non-directional

functionality is used. This is mostly the case when no fault current can be fed from the
protected object itself. In order to achieve both selectivity and fast fault clearance, the
directional function can be necessary. This can be the case for ground-fault protection
in meshed and effectively grounded transmission systems. The directional residual
overcurrent protection is also well suited to operate in teleprotection communication
schemes, which enables fast clearance of ground faults on transmission lines. The
directional function uses the polarizing quantity as decided by setting. Voltage
polarizing is the most commonly used, but alternatively current polarizing where
currents in transformer neutrals providing the neutral source (ZN) is used to polarize
(IN · ZN) the function. Dual polarizing, where the sum of both voltage and current
components is allowed to polarize can also be selected.

Choice of time characteristics: There are several types of time characteristics available
such as definite time delay and different types of inverse time characteristics. The
selectivity between different overcurrent protections is normally enabled by co-
ordination between the operate time of the different protections. To enable optimal co-
ordination all overcurrent protections, to be co-ordinated against each other, should
have the same time characteristic. Therefore a wide range of standardized inverse time
characteristics are available for IEC and ANSI.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 169

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

Table 21: Time characteristics

Curve name
ANSI Extremely Inverse
ANSI Very Inverse
ANSI Normal Inverse
ANSI Moderately Inverse
ANSI/IEEE Definite time
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse
ANSI Long Time Inverse
IEC Normal Inverse
IEC Very Inverse
IEC Inverse
IEC Extremely Inverse
IEC Short Time Inverse
IEC Long Time Inverse
IEC Definite Time
User Programmable
ASEA RI
RXIDG or RD (logarithmic)

It is also possible to tailor make the inverse time characteristic.

Normally it is required that EF4PTOC (51N_67N) shall reset as fast as possible when
the current level gets lower than the operation level. In some cases some sort of
delayed reset is required. Therefore different kinds of reset characteristics can be used.

For some protection applications, there can be a need to change the current pickup
level for some time. Therefore, there is a possibility to give a setting of a multiplication
factor INxMult to the residual current pick-up level. This multiplication factor is
activated from a binary input signal MULTPUx to the function.

Power transformers can have a large inrush current, when being energized. This inrush
current can produce residual current component. The phenomenon is due to saturation
of the transformer magnetic core during parts of the cycle. There is a risk that inrush
current will give a residual current that reaches level above the pickup current of the
residual overcurrent protection. The inrush current has a large second harmonic
content. This can be used to avoid unwanted operation of the protection. Therefore,
EF4PTOC (51N_67N) has a possibility of second harmonic restrain if the level of 2nd
harmonic current reaches a value above a set percent of the fundamental current.

170 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

8.4.3 Setting guidelines IP14988-1 v1

M15282-3 v11

When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected, the trip time

of the stage will be the sum of the inverse time delay and the set
definite time delay. Thus, if only the inverse time delay is required, it is
important to set the definite time delay for that stage to zero.

The parameters for the four step residual overcurrent protection are set via the local
HMI or PCM600. The following settings can be done for the function.

Common base IED values for primary current (IBase), primary voltage (UBase) and
primary power (SBase) are set in the global base values for settings function
GBASVAL.

GlobalBaseSel: This is used to select GBASVAL function for reference of base values.

SeqTypeUPol: This is used to select the type of voltage polarising quantity i.e. Zero seq
and Neg seq for direction detection.

SeqTypeIPol: This is used to select the type of current polarising quantity i.e. Zero seq
and Neg seq for direction detection.

SeqTypeIDir: This is used to select the type of operating current quantity i.e. Zero seq
and Neg seq for direction detection.

8.4.3.1 Common settings for all steps M15282-81 v10

AngleRCA: Relay characteristic angle given in degree. This angle is defined as shown
in Figure 67. The angle is defined positive when the residual current lags the reference
voltage (Vpol = 3V0 or V2)

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 171

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

RCA V pol = 3V0 or V2

Operation

IDirPU

en 05000135-4- ansi. vsd

ANSI05000135 V3 EN-US

Figure 67: Relay characteristic angle given in degree

In a normal transmission network a normal value of RCA is about 65°. The setting
range is -180° to +180°.

polMethod: Defines if the directional polarization is from

• Voltage (3V0 or V2)
• Current (3I0 · ZNpol or 3I2 ·ZNpol where ZNpol is RNpol + jXNpol), or
• both currents and voltage, Dual (dual polarizing, (3V0 + 3I0 · ZNpol) or (V2 + I2 ·
ZNpol)).

Normally voltage polarizing from the internally calculated residual sum or an external
open delta is used.

Current polarizing is useful when the local source is strong and a high sensitivity is
required. In such cases the polarizing voltage (3V0) can be below 1% and it is then
necessary to use current polarizing or dual polarizing. Multiply the required set current
(primary) with the minimum impedance (ZNpol) and check that the percentage of the
phase-to-ground voltage is definitely higher than 1% (minimum 3V0>VPolMin setting)
as a verification.

RNPol, XNPol: The zero-sequence source is set in primary ohms as base for the current
polarizing. The polarizing voltage is then achieved as 3I0 · ZNpol. The ZNpol can be
defined as (ZS1-ZS0)/3, that is the ground return impedance of the source behind the
protection. The maximum ground-fault current at the local source can be used to

172 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

calculate the value of ZN as V/(√3 · 3I0) Typically, the minimum ZNPol (3 · zero
sequence source) is set. The setting is in primary ohms.

When the dual polarizing method is used, it is important that the setting Pickupx or the
product 3I0 · ZNpol is not greater than 3V0. If so, there is a risk for incorrect operation
for faults in the reverse direction.

IPolMin: is the minimum ground-fault current accepted for directional evaluation. For
smaller currents than this value, the operation will be blocked. A typical setting is
5-10% of IB.

VPolMin: Minimum polarization (reference) polarizing voltage for the directional

function, given in % of VBase/√3.

IDirPU: Operate residual current release level in % of IB for directional comparison

scheme. The setting is given in % of IB and must be set below the lowest INx> setting,
set for the directional measurement. The output signals, PUFW and PUREV can be
used in a teleprotection scheme. The appropriate signal should be configured to the
communication scheme block.

8.4.3.2 2nd harmonic restrain M15282-90 v6

If a power transformer is energized there is a risk that the current transformer core will
saturate during part of the period, resulting in a transformer inrush current. This will
give a declining residual current in the network, as the inrush current is deviating
between the phases. There is a risk that the residual overcurrent function will give an
unwanted trip. The inrush current has a relatively large ratio of 2nd harmonic
component. This component can be used to create a restrain signal to prevent this
unwanted function.

At current transformer saturation a false residual current can be measured by the

protection. Here the 2nd harmonic restrain can prevent unwanted operation as well.

2ndHarmStab: The rate of 2nd harmonic current content for activation of the 2nd
harmonic restrain signal. The setting is given in % of the fundamental frequency
residual current.

8.4.3.3 Parallel transformer inrush current logic M15282-97 v6

In case of parallel transformers there is a risk of sympathetic inrush current. If one of

the transformers is in operation, and the parallel transformer is switched in, the
asymmetric inrush current of the switched-in transformer will cause partial saturation
of the transformer already in service. This is called transferred saturation. The 2nd
harmonic of the inrush currents of the two transformers will be in phase opposition.
The summation of the two currents will thus give a small 2nd harmonic current. The

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 173

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

residual fundamental current will however be significant. The inrush current of the
transformer in service before the parallel transformer energizing, will be a little
delayed compared to the first transformer. Therefore, we will have high 2nd harmonic
current initially. After a short period this current will however be small and the normal
2nd harmonic blocking will reset.

51N 51N
Power System

en05000136_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000136 V1 EN-US

Figure 68: Application for parallel transformer inrush current logic

If the BlkParTransf function is activated, the 2nd harmonic restrain signal will latch as
long as the residual current measured by the relay is larger than a selected step current
level. Assume that step 4 is chosen to be the most sensitive step of the four step
residual overcurrent protection function EF4PTOC (51N_67N). The harmonic restrain
blocking is enabled for this step. Also the same current setting as this step is chosen for
the blocking at parallel transformer energizing.

The settings for the parallel transformer logic are described below.

BlkParTransf: This is used to Enable blocking at energising of parallel transformers.

Use_PUValue: Gives which current level should be used for the activation of the
blocking signal. This is given as one of the settings of the steps: Step 1/2/3/4.
Normally, the step having the lowest operation current level should be set.

8.4.3.4 Switch onto fault logic M15282-106 v4

In case of energizing a faulty object there is a risk of having a long fault clearance
time, if the fault current is too small to give fast operation of the protection. The switch
on to fault function can be activated from auxiliary signals from the circuit breaker,
either the close command or the open/close position (change of position).

This logic can be used to issue a fast trip if one breaker pole does not close properly at
a manual or automatic closing.

SOTF and under time are similar functions to achieve fast clearance at asymmetrical
closing based on requirements from different utilities.

174 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

The function is divided into two parts. The SOTF function will give operation from
step 2 or 3 during a set time after change in the position of the circuit breaker. The
SOTF function has a set time delay. The under time function, which has 2nd harmonic
restrain blocking, will give operation from step 4. The 2nd harmonic restrain will
prevent unwanted function in case of transformer inrush current. The under time
function has a set time delay.

Below the settings for switch on to fault logics are described.

SOTF: This parameter can be set: Disabled/SOTF/Under Time/SOTF+Under Time.

SOTFSel: This setting will select the signal to activate SOTF function; CB position
open/CB position closed/CB close command.

StepForSOTF: If this parameter is set on step 3, the step 3 pickup signal will be used as
current set level. If set on step 2, the step 2 pickup signal will be used as current set
level.

HarmBlkSOTF: This is used to On/Off harmonic restrain during SOTF conditions.

tSOTF: Time delay for operation of the SOTF function. The setting range is 0.000 -
60.000 s in step of 0.001 s. The default setting is 0.100 s

t4U: Time interval when the SOTF function is active after breaker closing. The setting
range is 0.000 - 60.000 s in step of 0.001 s. The default setting is 1.000 s.

ActUndrTimeSel: Describes the mode to activate the sensitive undertime function. The
function can be activated by Circuit breaker position (change) or Circuit breaker
command.

tUnderTime: Time delay for operation of the sensitive undertime function. The setting
range is 0.000 - 60.000 s in step of 0.001 s. The default setting is 0.300 s

8.4.3.5 Settings for each step (x = 1, 2, 3 and 4) M15282-9 v12

Operation: Sets the protection to Enabled or Disabled.

DirModeSelx: The directional mode of step x. Possible settings are Disabled/Non-

directional/Forward/Reverse.

Characteristx: Selection of time characteristic for step x. Definite time delay and
different types of inverse time characteristics are available.

Inverse time characteristic enables fast fault clearance of high current faults at the same
time as selectivity to other inverse time phase overcurrent protections can be assured.
This is mainly used in radial fed networks but can also be used in meshed networks. In
meshed networks, the settings must be based on network fault calculations.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 175

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

To assure selectivity between different protections, in the radial network, there has to
be a minimum time difference Dt between the time delays of two protections. To
determine the shortest possible time difference, the operation time of protections,
breaker opening time and protection resetting time must be known. These time delays
can vary significantly between different protective equipment. The following time
delays can be estimated:

Protection trip time: 15-60 ms

Protection resetting time: 15-60 ms
Breaker opening time: 20-120 ms

The different characteristics are described in the technical reference manual.

tx: Definite time delay for step x. The definite time tx is added to the inverse time when
inverse time characteristic is selected. Note that the value set is the time between
activation of the start and the trip outputs.

Pickup"x": Operate residual current level for step x given in % of IB.

INx>Max and INx>Min should only be changed if remote setting of operation current
level, INx>, is used. The limits are used for decreasing the used range of the INx>
setting. If INx> is set outside INx>Max and INx>Min, the closest of the limits to INx>
is used by the function. If INx>Max is smaller than INx>Min, the limits are swapped.

kx: Time multiplier for the dependent (inverse) characteristic for step x.

IMinx: Minimum pickup current for step x in % of IB. Set IMinx below Pickupx for
every step to achieve ANSI reset characteristic according to standard. If IMinx is set
above for any step, signal will reset at current equals to zero.

txMin: Minimum operating time for inverse time characteristics. At high currents, the
inverse time characteristic might give a very short operation time. By setting this
parameter, the operation time of the step can never be shorter than the setting.

176 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

Trip time

tx

txMin

Pickup current
ANSI10000058-1-en.vsdx
ANSI10000058 V1 EN-US

Figure 69: Minimum pickup current and trip time for inverse time characteristics

In order to fully comply with the curves definition, the setting parameter txMin shall be
set to the value which is equal to the operate time of the selected IEC inverse curve for
measured current of twenty times the set current pickup value. Note that the operate
time value is dependent on the selected setting value for time multiplier kx.

INxMult: Multiplier for scaling of the current setting value. If a binary input signal
(MULTPUx) is activated, the current operation level is increased by this setting
constant.

ResetTypeCrvx: The reset of the delay timer can be made in different ways. The
possibilities are described in the technical reference manual.

tResetx: Constant reset time delay in s for step x.

HarmBlockx: This is used to enable block of step x from 2nd harmonic restrain
function.

tPCrvx, tACrvx, tBCrvx, tCCrvx: Parameters for user programmable of inverse time
characteristic curve. The time characteristic equation is according to equation 38:

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 177

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

æ ö
ç ÷
A
t [s ] = ç + B ÷ × TD
ç æ i öp ÷
çç ÷ - C ÷
è è ipickup ø ø
EQUATION1722 V1 EN-US (Equation 38)

Further description can be found in the technical reference manual.

tPRCrvx, tTRCrvx, tCRCrvx: Parameters for user programmable of inverse reset time
characteristic curve. Further description can be found in the technical reference
manual.

8.4.3.6 Line application example M15282-184 v8

Four step residual overcurrent protection can be used in different ways. Below is
described one application possibility to be used in meshed and effectively grounded
systems.

The protection measures the residual current out on the protected line. The protection
function has a directional function where the polarizing voltage (zero-sequence
voltage) is the polarizing quantity.

The polarizing voltage and current can be internally generated when a three-phase set
of voltage transformers and current transformers are used.

178 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

67N

xx05000149_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000149 V1 EN-US

Figure 70: Connection of polarizing voltage from an open (ANSI-broken) delta

The different steps can be described as follows.

Step 1 M15282-123 v6

This step has directional instantaneous function. The requirement is that overreaching
of the protected line is not allowed.

3I0

67
67N
N

One- or two-phase ground-fault

ANSI05000150_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000150 V2 EN-US

Figure 71: Step 1, first calculation

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 179

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

The residual current out on the line is calculated at a fault on the remote busbar (one-
or two-phase-to-ground fault). To assure selectivity it is required that step 1 shall not
give a trip at this fault. The requirement can be formulated according to Equation 39.

Istep1 ³ 1.2 × 3I 0 (remote busbar)

EQUATION1199 V3 EN-US (Equation 39)

As a consequence of the distribution of zero sequence current in the power system, the
current to the protection might be larger if one line out from the remote busbar is taken
out of service, see Figure 72.

3I0

67N

One- or two-phase-ground-fault

en05000151_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000151 V2 EN-US

Figure 72: Step 1, second calculation. Remote busbar with, one line taken out of
service

The requirement is now according to Equation 40.

Istep1 ³ 1.2 × 3I 0 (remote busbar with one line out)

EQUATION1200 V3 EN-US (Equation 40)

A higher value of step 1 might be necessary if a big power transformer (Y0/D) at

remote bus bar is disconnected.

A special case occurs at double circuit lines, with mutual zero-sequence impedance
between the parallel lines, see Figure 73.

180 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

3I0

67N

One phase-to-ground fault

ANSI05000152_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000152 V2 EN-US

Figure 73: Step 1, third calculation

In this case the residual current out on the line can be larger than in the case of ground
fault on the remote busbar.

Istep1 ³ 1.2 × 3I 0
EQUATION1201 V3 EN-US (Equation 41)

The current setting for step 1 is chosen as the largest of the above calculated residual
currents, measured by the protection.

Step 2 M15282-144 v7

This step has directional function and a short time delay, often about 0.4 s. Step 2 shall
securely detect all ground faults on the line, not detected by step 1.

3I0

50/51N
67N

One- or two-phase ground-fault

ANSI05000154_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000154 V2 EN-US

Figure 74: Step 2, check of reach calculation

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 181

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

The residual current, out on the line, is calculated at an operational case with minimal
ground-fault current. The requirement that the whole line shall be covered by step 2
can be formulated according to equation 42.

Istep2 ³ 0.7 × 3I0 (at remote busbar)

EQUATION1202 V4 EN-US (Equation 42)

To assure selectivity the current setting must be chosen so that step 2 does not operate
at step 2 for faults on the next line from the remote substation. Consider a fault as
shown in Figure 75.

3I0 3I0x

One phase-ground-fault
50/51N 50/51N
67N 67N

ANSI05000155_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000155 V2 EN-US

Figure 75: Step 2, selectivity calculation

A second criterion for step 2 is according to equation 43.

3I0
Istep2 ³ 1.2 × × Istep1
3I01
EQUATION1203 V4 EN-US (Equation 43)

where:
Istep1 is the current setting for step 1 on the faulted line.

Step 3 M15282-164 v6

This step has directional function and a time delay slightly larger than step 2, often 0.8
s. Step 3 shall enable selective trip of ground faults having higher fault resistance to
ground, compared to step 2. The requirement on step 3 is selectivity to other ground-
fault protections in the network. One criterion for setting is shown in Figure 76.

182 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

3I0 3I0x

One phase
67N 67N ground fault

en05000156_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000156 V1 EN-US

Figure 76: Step 3, Selectivity calculation

3I0
Istep3 ³ 1.2 × × Istep2
3I02
EQUATION1204 V4 EN-US (Equation 44)

where:
Istep2 is the chosen current setting for step 2 on the faulted line.

Step 4 M15282-177 v4

This step normally has non-directional function and a relatively long time delay. The
task for step 4 is to detect and initiate trip for ground faults with large fault resistance,
for example tree faults. Step 4 shall also detect series faults where one or two poles, of
a breaker or other switching device, are open while the other poles are closed.

Both high resistance ground faults and series faults give zero-sequence current flow in
the network. Such currents give disturbances on telecommunication systems and
current to ground. It is important to clear such faults both concerning personal security
as well as risk of fire.

The current setting for step 4 is often set down to about 100 A (primary 3I0). In many
applications definite time delay in the range 1.2 - 2.0 s is used. In other applications a
current dependent inverse time characteristic is used. This enables a higher degree of
selectivity also for sensitive ground-fault current protection.

8.5 Four step directional negative phase sequence

overcurrent protection NS4PTOC (46I2) GUID-E8CF8AA2-AF54-4FD1-A379-3E55DCA2FA3A v1

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 183

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

8.5.1 Identification
GUID-E1720ADA-7F80-4F2C-82A1-EF2C9EF6A4B4 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Four step negative sequence NS4PTOC 46I2
overcurrent protection I2
4
alt
4
IEC10000053 V1 EN-US

8.5.2 Application GUID-343023F8-AFE3-41C2-8440-1779DD7F5621 v2

Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC (4612) is used in

several applications in the power system. Some applications are:

• Ground-fault and phase-phase short circuit protection of feeders in effectively

grounded distribution and subtransmission systems. Normally these feeders have
radial structure.
• Back-up ground-fault and phase-phase short circuit protection of transmission
lines.
• Sensitive ground-fault protection of transmission lines. NS4PTOC (4612) can
have better sensitivity to detect resistive phase-to-ground-faults compared to
distance protection.
• Back-up ground-fault and phase-phase short circuit protection of power
transformers.
• Ground-fault and phase-phase short circuit protection of different kinds of
equipment connected to the power system such as shunt capacitor banks, shunt
reactors and others.

In many applications several steps with different current pickup levels and time delays
are needed. NS4PTOC (4612) can have up to four, individual settable steps. The
flexibility of each step of NS4PTOC (4612) function is great. The following options
are possible:

Non-directional/Directional function: In some applications the non-directional

functionality is used. This is mostly the case when no fault current can be fed from the
protected object itself. In order to achieve both selectivity and fast fault clearance, the
directional function can be necessary. This can be the case for unsymmetrical fault
protection in meshed and effectively grounded transmission systems. The directional
negative sequence overcurrent protection is also well suited to operate in teleprotection
communication schemes, which enables fast clearance of unsymmetrical faults on
transmission lines. The directional function uses the voltage polarizing quantity.

184 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

Choice of time characteristics: There are several types of time characteristics available
such as definite time delay and different types of inverse time characteristics. The
selectivity between different overcurrent protections is normally enabled by co-
ordination between the operating time of the different protections. To enable optimal
co-ordination all overcurrent relays, to be co-ordinated against each other, should have
the same time characteristic. Therefore a wide range of standardized inverse time
characteristics are available: IEC and ANSI.
Table 22: Inverse time characteristics
Curve name
ANSI Extremely Inverse
ANSI Very Inverse
ANSI Normal Inverse
ANSI Moderately Inverse
ANSI/IEEE Definite time
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse
ANSI Long Time Inverse
IEC Normal Inverse
IEC Very Inverse
IEC Inverse
IEC Extremely Inverse
IEC Short Time Inverse
IEC Long Time Inverse
IEC Definite Time
User Programmable
ASEA RI
RXIDG (logarithmic)

There is also a user programmable inverse time characteristic.

Normally it is required that the negative sequence overcurrent function shall reset as
fast as possible when the current level gets lower than the operation level. In some
cases some sort of delayed reset is required. Therefore different kinds of reset
characteristics can be used.

For some protection applications there can be a need to change the current pickup level
for some time. Therefore there is a possibility to give a setting of a multiplication
factor MultPUx to the negative sequence current pick-up level. This multiplication
factor is activated from a binary input signal MULTPUx to the function.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 185

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

8.5.3 Setting guidelines GUID-460D6C58-598C-421E-AA9E-FD240210A6CC v2

The parameters for Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC
(46I2) are set via the local HMI or Protection and Control Manager (PCM600).

The following settings can be done for the four step negative sequence overcurrent
protection:

Operation: Sets the protection to Enabled or Disabled.

Common base IED values for primary current (IBase), primary voltage (VBase) and
primary power (SBase) are set in Global base values for settings function GBASVAL.
GlobalBaseSel: It is used to select a GBASVAL function for reference of base values.
GUID-F7AA2194-4D1C-4475-8853-C7D064912614 v4

When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected, the trip time

of the stage will be the sum of the inverse time delay and the set
definite time delay. Thus, if only the inverse time delay is required, it is
important to set the definite time delay for that stage to zero.

8.5.3.1 Settings for each step GUID-CFB327EF-C5C4-44B5-AB4B-9C2916355FC5 v5

x means step 1, 2, 3 and 4.

DirModeSelx: The directional mode of step x. Possible settings are off/nondirectional/

forward/reverse.

Characteristx: Selection of time characteristic for step x. Definite time delay and
different types of inverse time characteristics are available.
Table 23: Inverse time characteristics
Curve name
ANSI Extremely Inverse
ANSI Very Inverse
ANSI Normal Inverse
ANSI Moderately Inverse
ANSI/IEEE Definite time
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse
ANSI Long Time Inverse
Table continues on next page

186 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

Curve name
IEC Normal Inverse
IEC Very Inverse
IEC Inverse
IEC Extremely Inverse
IEC Short Time Inverse
IEC Long Time Inverse
IEC Definite Time
User Programmable
ASEA RI
RXIDG (logarithmic)

The different characteristics are described in the Technical Reference Manual (TRM).

Pickupx: Operation negative sequence current level for step x given in % of IBase.

tx: Definite time delay for step x. The definite time tx is added to the inverse time when
inverse time characteristic is selected. Note that the value set is the time between
activation of the start and the trip outputs.

TDx: Time multiplier for the dependent (inverse) characteristic.

IMinx: Minimum pickup current for step x in % of IBase. Set IMinx below Pickupx for
every step to achieve ANSI reset characteristic according to standard. If IMinx is set
above Pickupx for any step the ANSI reset works as if current is zero when current
drops below IMinx.

MultPUx: Multiplier for scaling of the current setting value. If a binary input signal
(ENMULTx) is activated the current operation level is multiplied by this setting
constant.

txMin: Minimum operation time for inverse time characteristics. At high currents the
inverse time characteristic might give a very short operation time. By setting this
parameter the operation time of the step can never be shorter than the setting.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 187

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

Operate time

tx

txMin

IMinx Current

IEC10000058
IEC10000058 V2 EN-US

Figure 77: Minimum operate current and operation time for inverse time
characteristics

ResetTypeCrvx: The reset of the delay timer can be made in different ways. By
choosing setting there are the following possibilities:
Curve name
Instantaneous
IEC Reset (constant time)
ANSI Reset (inverse time)

The different reset characteristics are described in the Technical Reference Manual
(TRM). There are some restrictions regarding the choice of reset delay.

For the independent time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings are
instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).

For ANSI inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset time characteristics
are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant time reset) and ANSI (3 =
current dependent reset time).

For IEC inverse time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings are
instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).

For the programmable inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset time
characteristics are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant time reset) and
ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time). If the current dependent type is used settings
pr, tr and cr must be given.

188 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

tPCrvx, tACrvx, tBCrvx, tCCrvx: Parameters for programmable inverse time

characteristic curve. The time characteristic equation is according to equation 45:

æ ö
ç ÷
A
t [s ] = ç + B ÷ × TD
ç æ i öp ÷
çç ÷ - C ÷
è è ipickup ø ø
EQUATION1722 V1 EN-US (Equation 45)

Further description can be found in the Technical reference manual (TRM).

tPRCrvx, tTRCrvx, tCRCrvx: Parameters for customer creation of inverse reset time
characteristic curve. Further description can be found in the Technical Reference
Manual.

8.5.3.2 Common settings for all steps GUID-A00A942B-E760-42EE-8FEB-F723426783F3 v1

x means step 1, 2, 3 and 4.

AngleRCA: Relay characteristic angle given in degrees. This angle is defined as shown
in figure 78. The angle is defined positive when the residual current lags the reference
voltage (Vpol = -)

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 189

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

Reverse
Area

AngleRCA Vpol=-V2

Forward
Area
Iop = I2

ANSI10000031-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000031 V1 EN-US

Figure 78: Relay characteristic angle given in degree

In a transmission network a normal value of RCA is about 80°.

VPolMin: Minimum polarization (reference) voltage % of VBase.

I>Dir: Operate residual current level for directional comparison scheme. The setting is
given in % of IBase. The pickup forward or pickup reverse signals can be used in a
communication scheme. The appropriate signal must be configured to the
communication scheme block.

8.6 Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power

protection SDEPSDE (67N) SEMOD171436-1 v4

190 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

8.6.1 Identification
SEMOD172025-2 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Sensitive directional residual over SDEPSDE - 67N
current and power protection

8.6.2 Application SEMOD171959-4 v12

In networks with high impedance grounding, the phase-to-ground fault current is

significantly smaller than the short circuit currents. Another difficulty for ground fault
protection is that the magnitude of the phase-to-ground fault current is almost
independent of the fault location in the network.

Directional residual current can be used to detect and give selective trip of phase-to-
ground faults in high impedance grounded networks. The protection uses the residual
current component 3I0 · cos φ, where φ is the angle between the residual current and
the residual voltage (-3V0), compensated with a characteristic angle. Alternatively, the
function can be set to strict 3I0 level with a check of angle φ.

Directional residual power can also be used to detect and give selective trip of phase-
to-ground faults in high impedance grounded networks. The protection uses the
residual power component 3I0 · 3V0 · cos φ, where φ is the angle between the residual
current and the reference residual voltage, compensated with a characteristic angle.

A normal non-directional residual current function can also be used with definite or
inverse time delay.

A backup neutral point voltage function is also available for non-directional residual
overvoltage protection.

In an isolated network, that is, the network is only coupled to ground via the
capacitances between the phase conductors and ground, the residual current always has
-90º phase shift compared to the residual voltage (3V0). The characteristic angle is
chosen to -90º in such a network.

In resistance grounded networks or in Petersen coil grounded, with a parallel resistor,

the active residual current component (in phase with the residual voltage) should be
used for the ground fault detection. In such networks, the characteristic angle is chosen
to 0º.

As the magnitude of the residual current is independent of the fault location, the
selectivity of the ground fault protection is achieved by time selectivity.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 191

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

When should the sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection be used and when
should the sensitive directional residual power protection be used? Consider the
following:

• Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection gives possibility for better

sensitivity. The setting possibilities of this function are down to 0.25 % of IBase, 1
A or 5 A. This sensitivity is in most cases sufficient in high impedance network
applications, if the measuring CT ratio is not too high.
• Sensitive directional residual power protection gives possibility to use inverse time
characteristics. This is applicable in large high impedance grounded networks,
with large capacitive ground fault currents. In such networks, the active fault
current would be small and by using sensitive directional residual power
protection, the operating quantity is elevated. Therefore, better possibility to detect
ground faults. In addition, in low impedance grounded networks, the inverse time
characteristic gives better time-selectivity in case of high zero-resistive fault
currents.

Phase
currents
IN

Phase
ground
voltages
VN

ANSI13000013-1-en.vsd

ANSI13000013 V1 EN-US

Figure 79: Connection of SDEPSDE to analog preprocessing function block

Overcurrent functionality uses true 3I0, i.e. sum of GRPxA, GRPxB and GRPxC. For
3I0 to be calculated, connection is needed to all three phase inputs.

Directional and power functionality uses IN and VN. If a connection is made to

GRPxN this signal is used, else if connection is made to all inputs GRPxA, GRPxB
and GRPxC the internally calculated sum of these inputs (3I0 and 3V0) will be used.

192 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

8.6.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD171961-4 v10

The sensitive ground-fault protection is intended to be used in high impedance

grounded systems, or in systems with resistive grounding where the neutral point
resistor gives an ground-fault current larger than what normal high impedance gives
but smaller than the phase to phase short circuit current.

In a high impedance system the fault current is assumed to be limited by the system
zero sequence shunt impedance to ground and the fault resistance only. All the series
impedances in the system are assumed to be zero.

In the setting of ground-fault protection, in a high impedance grounded system, the

neutral point voltage (zero sequence voltage) and the ground-fault current will be
calculated at the desired sensitivity (fault resistance). The complex neutral point
voltage (zero sequence) can be calculated as:

Vphase
V0 =
3× Rf
1+
Z0
EQUATION2020-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 46)

Where
Vphase is the phase voltage in the fault point before the fault,

Rf is the resistance to ground in the fault point and

Z0 is the system zero sequence impedance to ground

The fault current, in the fault point, can be calculated as:

3 × Vphase
I j = 3I 0 =
Z0 + 3 × R f
EQUATION2021 V1 EN-US (Equation 47)

The impedance Z0 is dependent on the system grounding. In an isolated system

(without neutral point apparatus) the impedance is equal to the capacitive coupling
between the phase conductors and ground:

3 × Vphase
Z0 = - jX c = - j
Ij
EQUATION2022-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 48)

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 193

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

Where
Ij is the capacitive ground fault current at a non-resistive phase-to-ground fault

Xc is the capacitive reactance to ground

In a system with a neutral point resistor (resistance grounded system) the impedance Z0
can be calculated as:

- jX c × 3R n
Z0 =
- jX c + 3R n
EQUATION1946 V1 EN-US (Equation 49)

Where
Rn is the resistance of the neutral point resistor

In many systems there is also a neutral point reactor (Petersen coil) connected to one or
more transformer neutral points. In such a system the impedance Z0 can be calculated
as:

9R n X n X c
Z 0 = - jX c // 3R n // j3X n =
3X n X c + j3R n × ( 3X n - X c )
EQUATION1947 V1 EN-US (Equation 50)

Where
Xn is the reactance of the Petersen coil. If the Petersen coil is well tuned we have 3Xn = Xc In this
case the impedance Z0 will be: Z0 = 3Rn

Now consider a system with an grounding via a resistor giving higher ground fault
current than the high impedance grounding. The series impedances in the system can
no longer be neglected. The system with a single phase to ground fault can be
described as in Figure 80.

194 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

Source impedance
Zsc (pos. seq)
RN

ZT,1 (pos. seq)

ZT,0 (zero seq)

V0A Substation A

3I0

ZlineAB,1 (pos. seq)

ZlineAB,0 (zero seq)

V0B Substation B

ZlineBC,1 (pos. seq)

ZlineBC,0 (zero seq)

Phase to ground fault

en06000654_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000654 V1 EN-US

Figure 80: Equivalent of power system for calculation of setting

The residual fault current can be written:

3Vphase
3I 0 =
2 × Z1 + Z0 + 3 × R f
EQUATION2023-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 51)

Where
Vphase is the phase voltage in the fault point before the fault

Z1 is the total positive sequence impedance to the fault point. Z1 = Zsc+ZT,1+ZlineAB,1+ZlineBC,1

Z0 is the total zero sequence impedance to the fault point. Z0 = ZT,0+3RN+ZlineAB,0+ZlineBC,0

Rf is the fault resistance.

The residual voltages in stations A and B can be written:

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 195

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

V0 A = 3I 0 × (Z T ,0 + 3R N )
EQUATION2024-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 52)

VOB = 3I 0 × (Z T ,0 + 3R N + Z lineAB,0 )
EQUATION2025-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 53)

The residual power, measured by the sensitive ground fault protections in A and B will
be:

S0A = 3V0A × 3I 0
EQUATION2026-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 54)

S0B = 3V0B × 3I 0
EQUATION2027-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 55)

The residual power is a complex quantity. The protection will have a maximum
sensitivity in the characteristic angle RCA. The apparent residual power component in
the characteristic angle, measured by the protection, can be written:

S0 A ,prot = 3V0 A × 3I 0 × cos j A

EQUATION2028-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 56)

S0 B,prot = 3V0 B × 3I 0 × cos j B

EQUATION2029-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 57)

The angles φA and φB are the phase angles between the residual current and the
residual voltage in the station compensated with the characteristic angle RCA.

The protection will use the power components in the characteristic angle direction for
measurement, and as base for the inverse time delay.

The inverse time delay is defined as:

TDSN × (3I 0 × 3V0 × cos f (reference))

t inv =
3I 0 × 3V0 cos f (measured)
EQUATION2069 V1 EN-US (Equation 58)

The function can be set Enabled/Disabled with the setting of Operation.

196 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

GlobalBaseSel: It is used to select a GBASVAL function for reference of base values.

RotResU: It is a setting for rotating the polarizing quantity (3V0) by 0 or 180 degrees.
This parameter is set to 180 degrees by default in order to inverse the residual voltage
(3V0) to calculate the reference voltage (-3V0 e-jRCADir). Since the reference voltage is
used as the polarizing quantity for directionality, it is important to set this parameter
correctly.

With the setting OpModeSel the principle of directional function is chosen.

With OpModeSel set to 3I0cosfi the current component in the direction equal to the
characteristic angleRCADir has the maximum sensitivity. The characteristic for
RCADir is equal to 0° is shown in Figure 81.

Vref RCA = 0°, ROA = 90°

3I0

= ang(3I0) - ang(3Vref)
-3V0=Vref
3I0 cos

en06000648_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000648 V1 EN-US

Figure 81: Characteristic for RCADir equal to 0°

The characteristic is for RCADir equal to -90° is shown in Figure 82.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 197

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

RCA = -90°, ROA = 90°

Vref

3I0
3I0 cos

= ang(3I0) – ang(Vref)

-3V0

en06000649_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000649 V1 EN-US

Figure 82: Characteristic for RCADir equal to -90°

When OpModeSel is set to 3I03V0Cosfi the apparent residual power component in the
direction is measured.

When OpModeSel is set to 3I0 and fi the function will operate if the residual current is
larger than the setting INDirPU and the residual current angle is within the sector
RCADir ± ROADir.

The characteristic for this OpModeSel when RCADir = 0° and ROADir = 80° is shown
in figure 83.

198 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

RCA = 0º

ROA = 80º

Operate area

3I0

Vref=-3V0

ANSI06000652-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000652 V2 EN-US

Figure 83: Characteristic for RCADir = 0° and ROADir = 80°

DirMode is set Forward or Reverse to set the direction of the operation for the
directional function selected by the OpModeSel.

All the directional protection modes have a residual current release level setting
INRelPU which is set in % of IBase. This setting should be chosen smaller than or
equal to the lowest fault current to be detected.

All the directional protection modes have a residual voltage release level setting
VNRelPU which is set in % of VBase. This setting should be chosen smaller than or
equal to the lowest fault residual voltage to be detected.

tDef is the definite time delay, given in s, for the directional residual current protection.

tReset is the time delay before the definite timer gets reset, given in s. With a tReset
time of few cycles, there is an increased possibility to clear intermittent ground faults
correctly. The setting shall be much shorter than the set trip delay. In case of
intermittent ground faults, the fault current is intermittently dropping below the set
value during consecutive cycles. Therefore the definite timer should continue for a
certain time equal to tReset even though the fault current has dropped below the set
value.

The characteristic angle of the directional functions RCADir is set in degrees. RCADir
is normally set equal to 0° in a high impedance grounded network with a neutral point
resistor as the active current component is appearing out on the faulted feeder only.
RCADir is set equal to -90° in an isolated network as all currents are mainly capacitive.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 199

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

ROADir is Relay Operating Angle. ROADir is identifying a window around the

reference direction in order to detect directionality. ROADir is set in degrees. For
angles differing more than ROADir from RCADir the function is blocked. The setting
can be used to prevent unwanted operation for non-faulted feeders, with large
capacitive ground fault current contributions, due to CT phase angle error.

INCosPhiPU is the pickup current level for the directional function when OpModeSel
is set 3I0Cosfi. The setting is given in % of IBase. The setting should be based on
calculation of the active or capacitive ground fault current at required sensitivity of the
protection.

SN_PU is the pickup power level for the directional function when OpModeSel is set
3I03V0Cosfi. The setting is given in % of SBase. The setting should be based on
calculation of the active or capacitive ground fault residual power at required
sensitivity of the protection.

The input transformer for the Sensitive directional residual over current and power
protection function has the same short circuit capacity as the phase current
transformers. Hence, there is no specific requirement for the external CT core, i.e. any
CT core can be used.

If the time delay for residual power is chosen the delay time is dependent on two
setting parameters. SRef is the reference residual power, given in % of SBase. TDSN is
the time multiplier. The time delay will follow the following expression:

TDSN × Sref
t inv =
3I 0 × 3V0 × cos j(measured)
EQUATION2030-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 59)

INDirPU is the pickup current level for the directional function when OpModeSel is set
3I0 and fi. The setting is given in % of IBase. The setting should be based on
calculation of the ground fault current at required sensitivity of the protection.

OpINNonDir is set Enabled to activate the non-directional residual current protection.

INNonDirPU is the pickup current level for the non-directional function. The setting is
given in % of IBase. This function can be used for detection and clearance of cross-
country faults in a shorter time than for the directional function. The current setting
should be larger than the maximum single-phase residual current on the protected line.

TimeChar is the selection of time delay characteristic for the non-directional residual
current protection. Definite time delay and different types of inverse time
characteristics are available:

200 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

Table 24: Inverse time characteristics

Curve name
ANSI Extremely Inverse
ANSI Very Inverse
ANSI Normal Inverse
ANSI Moderately Inverse
ANSI/IEEE Definite time
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse
ANSI Long Time Inverse
IEC Normal Inverse
IEC Very Inverse
IEC Inverse
IEC Extremely Inverse
IEC Short Time Inverse
IEC Long Time Inverse
IEC Definite Time
User Programmable
ASEA RI
RXIDG (logarithmic)

See chapter “Inverse time characteristics” in Technical Manual for the description of
different characteristics

tPCrv, tACrv, tBCrv, tCCrv: Parameters for customer creation of inverse time
characteristic curve (Curve type = 17). The time characteristic equation is:

æ ö
ç ÷
ç A
t [s] = + B ÷ × InMult
çæ i ö
p
÷
çç ÷ - C ÷
è è Pickup _ N ø ø
EQUATION2031-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 60)

tINNonDir is the definite time delay for the non directional ground fault current
protection, given in s.

OpVN is set Enabled to activate the trip function of the residual over voltage
protection.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 201

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

tVN is the definite time delay for the trip function of the residual voltage protection,
given in s.

8.7 Thermal overload protection, one time constant

Fahrenheit/Celsius LFPTTR/LCPTTR (26) IP14512-1 v7

8.7.1 Identification

8.8 Thermal overload protection, two time constants

TRPTTR (49) IP14513-1 v4

8.8.1 Identification
M14877-1 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Thermal overload protection, two time TRPTTR 49
constants

SYMBOL-A V1 EN-US

8.8.2 Application M15341-3 v5

Transformers in the power system are designed for a certain maximum load current
(power) level. If the current exceeds this level the losses will be higher than expected.
As a consequence the temperature of the transformer will increase. If the temperature
of the transformer reaches too high a value, the equipment might be damaged;

• The insulation within the transformer experiences forced ageing. As a

consequence of this, the risk of internal phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground faults
increases.
• There might be hot spots within the transformer, which degrades the paper
insulation. It might also cause bubbling in the transformer oil.

In stressed situations in the power system it can be required to overload transformers

for a limited time. This should be done without the above mentioned risks. The thermal

202 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

overload protection provides information and makes temporary overloading of

transformers possible.

The permissible load level of a power transformer is highly dependent on the cooling
system of the transformer. There are two main principles:

• OA: The air is naturally circulated to the coolers without fans and the oil is
naturally circulated without pumps.
• FOA: The coolers have fans to force air for cooling and pumps to force the
circulation of the transformer oil.

The protection can have two sets of parameters, one for non-forced cooling and one for
forced cooling. Both the permissive steady state loading level as well as the thermal
time constant is influenced by the cooling system of the transformer. The two
parameters sets can be activated by the binary input signal COOLING. This can be
used for transformers where forced cooling can be taken out of operation, for example
at fan or pump faults.

The thermal overload protection estimates the internal heat content of the transformer
(temperature) continuously. This estimation is made by using a thermal model of the
transformer which is based on current measurement.

If the heat content of the protected transformer reaches a set alarm level a signal can be
given to the operator. Two alarm levels are available. This enables preventive actions
in the power system to be taken before dangerous temperatures are reached. If the
temperature continues to increase to the trip value, the protection initiates a trip of the
protected transformer.

After tripping by the thermal overload protection, the transformer will cool down over
time. There will be a time gap before the heat content (temperature) reaches such a
level so that the transformer can be taken into service again. Therefore, the function
will continue to estimate the heat content using a set cooling time constant. Energizing
of the transformer can be blocked until the heat content has reached a set level.

8.8.3 Setting guideline M13250-3 v8

The parameters for the thermal overload protection, two time constants (TRPTTR, 49)
are set via the local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM600).

The following settings can be done for the thermal overload protection:

Operation: Disabled/Enabled

Operation: Sets the mode of operation. Disabled switches off the complete function.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 203

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
(IBase), (UBase) and (SBase).

IRef: Reference level of the current given in % of IBase. When the current is equal to
IRef the final (steady state) heat content is equal to 1. It is suggested to give a setting
corresponding to the rated current of the transformer winding.

IRefMult: If a binary input ENMULT is activated the reference current value can be
multiplied by the factor IRefMult. The activation could be used in case of deviating
ambient temperature from the reference value. In the standard for loading of a
transformer an ambient temperature of 20°C is used. For lower ambient temperatures
the load ability is increased and vice versa. IRefMult can be set within a range: 0.01 -
10.00.

IBase1: Base current for setting given as percentage of IBase. This setting shall be
related to the status with no COOLING input. It is suggested to give a setting
corresponding to the rated current of the transformer with natural cooling (OA).

IBase2: Base current for setting given as percentage of IBase. This setting shall be
related to the status with activated COOLING input. It is suggested to give a setting
corresponding to the rated current of the transformer with forced cooling (FOA). If the
transformer has no forced cooling IBase2 can be set equal to IBase1.

Tau1: The thermal time constant of the protected transformer, related to IBase1 (no
cooling) given in minutes.

Tau2: The thermal time constant of the protected transformer, related to IBase2 (with
cooling) given in minutes.

The thermal time constant should be obtained from the transformer manufacturers
manuals. The thermal time constant is dependent on the cooling and the amount of oil.
Normal time constants for medium and large transformers (according to IEC 60076-7)
are about 2.5 hours for naturally cooled transformers and 1.5 hours for forced cooled
transformers.

The time constant can be estimated from measurements of the oil temperature during a
cooling sequence (described in IEC 60076-7). It is assumed that the transformer is
operated at a certain load level with a constant oil temperature (steady state operation).
The oil temperature above the ambient temperature is DQo0. Then the transformer is
disconnected from the grid (no load). After a time t of at least 30 minutes the
temperature of the oil is measured again. Now the oil temperature above the ambient
temperature is DQot. The thermal time constant can now be estimated as:

t
t=
ln DQ o 0 - ln DQ ot
EQUATION1180 V1 EN-US (Equation 61)

204 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

If the transformer has forced cooling (FOA) the measurement should be made both
with and without the forced cooling in operation, giving Tau2 and Tau1.

The time constants can be changed if the current is higher than a set value or lower
than a set value. If the current is high it is assumed that the forced cooling is activated
while it is deactivated at low current. The setting of the parameters below enables
automatic adjustment of the time constant.

Tau1High: Multiplication factor to adjust the time constant Tau1 if the current is higher
than the set value IHighTau1. IHighTau1 is set in % of IBase1.

Tau1Low: Multiplication factor to adjust the time constant Tau1 if the current is lower
than the set value ILowTau1. ILowTau1 is set in % of IBase1.

Tau2High: Multiplication factor to adjust the time constant Tau2 if the current is higher
than the set value IHighTau2. IHighTau2 is set in % of IBase2.

Tau2Low: Multiplication factor to adjust the time constant Tau2 if the current is lower
than the set value ILowTau2. ILowTau2 is set in % of IBase2.

The possibility to change time constant with the current value as the base can be useful
in different applications. Below some examples are given:

• In case a total interruption (low current) of the protected transformer all cooling
possibilities will be inactive. This can result in a changed value of the time
constant.
• If other components (motors) are included in the thermal protection, there is a risk
of overheating of that equipment in case of very high current. The thermal time
constant is often smaller for a motor than for the transformer.

ITrip: The steady state current that the transformer can withstand. The setting is given
in % of IBase1 or IBase2.

Alarm1: Heat content level for activation of the signal ALARM1. ALARM1 is set in %
of the trip heat content level.

Alarm2: Heat content level for activation of the output signal ALARM2. ALARM2 is
set in % of the trip heat content level.

LockoutReset: Lockout release level of heat content to release the lockout signal. When
the thermal overload protection trips a lock-out signal is activated. This signal is
intended to block switching on of the protected circuit transformer as long as the
transformer temperature is high. The signal is released when the estimated heat content
is below the set value. This temperature value should be chosen below the alarm
temperature. LockoutReset is set in % of the trip heat content level.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 205

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

ThetaInit: Heat content before activation of the function. This setting can be set a little
below the alarm level. If the transformer is loaded before the activation of the
protection function, its temperature can be higher than the ambient temperature. The
start point given in the setting will prevent risk of no trip at overtemperature during the
first moments after activation. ThetaInit: is set in % of the trip heat content level.

Warning: If the calculated time to trip factor is below the setting Warning a warning
signal is activated. The setting is given in minutes.

8.9 Breaker failure protection CCRBRF(50BF) IP14514-1 v6

8.9.1 Identification
M14878-1 v5

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Breaker failure protection, 3-phase CCRBRF 50BF
activation and output
3I>BF

SYMBOL-U V1 EN-US

8.9.2 Application M13916-3 v7

In the design of the fault clearance system the N-1 criterion is often used. This means
that a fault needs to be cleared even if any component in the fault clearance system is
faulty. One necessary component in the fault clearance system is the circuit breaker. It
is from practical and economical reason not feasible to duplicate the circuit breaker for
the protected object. Instead a breaker failure protection is used.

Breaker failure protection, 3-phase activation and output (CCRBRF, 50BF) will issue a
back-up trip command to adjacent circuit breakers in case of failure to trip of the
“normal” circuit breaker for the protected object. The detection of failure to break the
current through the breaker is made by means of current measurement or as detection
of remaining trip signal (unconditional).

CCRBRF (50BF) can also give a re-trip. This means that a second trip signal is sent to
the protected circuit breaker. The re-trip function can be used to increase the
probability of operation of the breaker, or it can be used to avoid back-up trip of many
breakers in case of mistakes during relay maintenance and testing.

206 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

8.9.3 Setting guidelines M11546-4 v9

The parameters for Breaker failure protection 3-phase activation and output CCRBRF
(50BF) are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

The following settings can be done for the breaker failure protection.

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
IBase, VBase and SBase as applicable.

Operation: Disabled/Enabled

FunctionMode This parameter can be set Current or Contact. This states the way the
detection of failure of the breaker is performed. In the mode current the current
measurement is used for the detection. In the mode Contact the long duration of
breaker position signal is used as indicator of failure of the breaker. The mode Current/
Contact means that both ways of detections are activated. Contact mode can be usable
in applications where the fault current through the circuit breaker is small. This can be
the case for some generator protection application (for example reverse power
protection) or in case of line ends with weak end infeed.

RetripMode: This setting states how the re-trip function shall operate. Retrip Off means
that the re-trip function is not activated. CB Pos Check (circuit breaker position check)
and Current means that a phase current must be larger than the operate level to allow
re-trip. CB Pos Check (circuit breaker position check) and Contact means re-trip is
done when circuit breaker is closed (breaker position is used). No CBPos Check means
re-trip is done without any check of breaker position.
Table 25: Dependencies between parameters RetripMode and FunctionMode
RetripMode FunctionMode Description
Retrip Off N/A the re-trip function is not
activated
CB Pos Check Current re-trip is done if the phase
current is larger than the operate
level after re-trip time has
elapsed
Contact re-trip is done when auxiliary
contact position indicates that
breaker is still closed after re-trip
time has elapsed
Current/Contact both methods according to above
are used but taken into account
also I>BlkCont
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 207

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

RetripMode FunctionMode Description

No CBPos Check Current re-trip is done without check of
current level
Contact re-trip is done without check of
auxiliary contact position
Current/Contact re-trip is done without check of
current level or auxiliary contact
position

BuTripMode: Back-up trip mode is given to state sufficient current criteria to detect
failure to break. For Current operation 2 out of 4 means that at least two currents, of
the three-phase currents and the residual current, shall be high to indicate breaker
failure. 1 out of 3 means that at least one current of the three-phase currents shall be
high to indicate breaker failure. 1 out of 4 means that at least one current of the three-
phase currents or the residual current shall be high to indicate breaker failure. In most
applications 1 out of 3 is sufficient. For Contact operation means back-up trip is done
when circuit breaker is closed (breaker position is used).

Pickup_PH: Current level for detection of breaker failure, set in % of IBase. This
parameter should be set so that faults with small fault current can be detected. The
setting can be chosen in accordance with the most sensitive protection function to start
the breaker failure protection. Typical setting is 10% of IBase.

Pickup_BlkCont: If any contact based detection of breaker failure is used, this function
can be blocked if any phase current is larger than this setting level. If the
FunctionMode is set Current/Contact breaker failure for high current faults are safely
detected by the current measurement function. To increase security the contact based
function should be disabled for high currents. The setting can be given within the range
5 – 200% of IBase.

Pickup_N: Residual current level for detection of breaker failure set in % of IBase. In
high impedance grounded systems the residual current at phase- to-ground faults are
normally much smaller than the short circuit currents. In order to detect breaker failure
at single-phase-ground faults in these systems it is necessary to measure the residual
current separately. Also in effectively grounded systems the setting of the ground-fault
current protection can be chosen to relatively low current level. The BuTripMode is set
1 out of 4. The current setting should be chosen in accordance to the setting of the
sensitive ground-fault protection. The setting can be given within the range 2 – 200 %
of IBase.

t1: Time delay of the re-trip. The setting can be given within the range 0 – 60s in steps
of 0.001 s. Typical setting is 0 – 50ms.

208 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

t2: Time delay of the back-up trip. The choice of this setting is made as short as
possible at the same time as unwanted operation must be avoided. Typical setting is 90
– 200ms (also dependent of re-trip timer).

The minimum time delay for the re-trip can be estimated as:

t 2 ³ t1 + tcbopen + t BFP _ reset + t margin

EQUATION1430 V1 EN-US (Equation 62)

where:
tcbopen is the maximum opening time for the circuit breaker

tBFP_reset is the maximum time for breaker failure protection to detect correct breaker function (the
current criteria reset)
tmargin is a safety margin

It is often required that the total fault clearance time shall be less than a given critical
time. This time is often dependent of the ability to maintain transient stability in case
of a fault close to a power plant.

Protection
operate time
Normal tcbopen

The fault Retrip delay t1 tcbopen after re-trip

occurs
tBFPreset
Margin

Minimum back-up trip delay t2

Critical fault clearance time for stability

Time
Trip and Pickup
CCRBRF
(50BF)

ANSI05000479_3_en.vsd
ANSI05000479 V3 EN-US

Figure 84: Time sequence

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 209

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

t2MPh: Time delay of the back-up trip at multi-phase initiate. The critical fault
clearance time is often shorter in case of multi-phase faults, compared to single phase-
to-ground faults. Therefore there is a possibility to reduce the back-up trip delay for
multi-phase faults. Typical setting is 90 – 150 ms.

t3: Additional time delay to t2 for a second back-up trip TRBU2. In some applications
there might be a requirement to have separated back-up trip functions, tripping
different back-up circuit breakers.

tCBAlarm: Time delay for alarm in case of indication of faulty circuit breaker. There is
a binary input 52FAIL from the circuit breaker. This signal is activated when internal
supervision in the circuit breaker detect that the circuit breaker is unable to clear fault.
This could be the case when gas pressure is low in a SF6 circuit breaker. After the set
time an alarm is given, so that actions can be done to repair the circuit breaker. The
time delay for back-up trip is bypassed when the 52FAIL is active. Typical setting is
2.0 seconds.

tPulse: Trip pulse duration. This setting must be larger than the critical impulse time of
circuit breakers to be tripped from the breaker failure protection. Typical setting is 200
ms.

8.10 Stub protection STBPTOC (50STB) IP14515-1 v3

8.10.1 Identification
M17108-1 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Stub protection STBPTOC 50STB

3I>STUB

SYMBOL-T V1 EN-US

8.10.2 Application M12904-3 v5

In a breaker-and-a-half switchyard the line protection and the busbar protection

normally have overlap when a connected object is in service. When an object is taken
out of service it is normally required to keep the diagonal of the breaker-and-a-half
switchyard in operation. This is done by opening the disconnector to the protected
object. This will, however, disable the normal object protection (for example the
distance protection) of the energized part between the circuit breakers and the open
disconnector.

210 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

Stub protection STBPTOC (50STB) is a simple phase overcurrent protection, fed from
the two current transformer groups feeding the object taken out of service. The stub
protection is only activated when the disconnector of the object is open. STBPTOC
(50STB) enables fast fault clearance of faults at the section between the CTs and the
open disconnector.

ANSI05000465 V2 EN-US

Figure 85: Typical connection for STBPTOC (50STB) in breaker-and-a-half

arrangement.

8.10.3 Setting guidelines M12909-3 v5

The parameters for Stub protection STBPTOC (50STB) are set via the local HMI or
PCM600.

The following settings can be done for the stub protection.

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
IBase, VBase and SBase as applicable.

Operation: Disabled/Enabled

EnableMode: This parameter can be set Enable or Continuous. With theEnable setting
the function is only active when a binary release signal ENABLE into the function is
activated. This signal is normally taken from an auxiliary contact (normally closed) of
the line disconnector and connected to a binary input ENABLE of the IED. With the

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 211

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

settingContinuous the function is activated independent of presence of any external

release signal.

IPickup: Current level for the Stub protection, set in % of IBase. This parameter should
be set so that all faults on the stub can be detected. The setting should thus be based on
fault calculations.

t: Time delay of the operation. Normally the function shall be instantaneous.

8.11 Pole discrepancy protection CCPDSC(52PD) IP14516-1 v5

8.11.1 Identification
M14888-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Pole discrepancy protection CCPDSC 52PD

PD

SYMBOL-S V1 EN-US

8.11.2 Application M13270-3 v6

There is a risk that a circuit breaker will get discrepancy between the poles at circuit
breaker operation: closing or opening. One pole can be open and the other two closed,
or two poles can be open and one closed. Pole discrepancy of a circuit breaker will
cause unsymmetrical currents in the power system. The consequence of this can be:

• Negative sequence currents that will give stress on rotating machines

• Zero sequence currents that might give unwanted operation of sensitive ground-
fault protections in the power system.

It is therefore important to detect situations with pole discrepancy of circuit breakers.

When this is detected the breaker should be tripped directly.

Pole discordance protection CCPDSC (52PD) will detect situation with deviating
positions of the poles of the protected circuit breaker. The protection has two different
options to make this detection:

• By connecting the auxiliary contacts in the circuit breaker so that logic is created,
a signal can be sent to the protection, indicating pole discrepancy. This logic can

212 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

also be realized within the protection itself, by using opened and close signals for
each circuit breaker pole, connected to the protection.
• Each phase current through the circuit breaker is measured. If the difference
between the phase currents is larger than a CurrUnsymPU this is an indication of
pole discrepancy, and the protection will operate.

8.11.3 Setting guidelines M13274-3 v8

The parameters for the Pole discordance protection CCPDSC (52PD) are set via the
local HMI or PCM600.

The following settings can be done for the pole discrepancy protection.

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
IBase, VBase and SBase as applicable.

Operation: Disabled or Enabled

tTrip: Time delay of the operation.

ContactSel: Operation of the contact based pole discrepancy protection. Can be set:
Disabled/PD signal from CB. If PD signal from CB is chosen the logic to detect pole
discrepancy is made in the vicinity to the breaker auxiliary contacts and only one signal
is connected to the pole discrepancy function. If the Pole pos aux cont. alternative is
chosen each open close signal is connected to the IED and the logic to detect pole
discrepancy is realized within the function itself.

CurrentSel: Operation of the current based pole discrepancy protection. Can be set:
Disabled/CB oper monitor/Continuous monitor. In the alternative CB oper monitor the
function is activated only directly in connection to breaker open or close command
(during 200 ms). In the alternative Continuous monitor function is continuously
activated.

CurrUnsymPU: Unsymmetrical magnitude of lowest phase current compared to the

highest, set in % of the highest phase current. Natural difference between phase
currents in breaker-and-a-half installations must be considered. For circuit breakers in
breaker-and-a-half configured switch yards there might be natural unbalance currents
through the breaker. This is due to the existence of low impedance current paths in the
switch yard. This phenomenon must be considered in the setting of the parameter.

CurrRelPU: Current magnitude for release of the function in % of IBase.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 213

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

8.12 Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP (37) SEMOD156693-1 v4

8.12.1 Identification
SEMOD158941-2 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP 37
P<
2
SYMBOL-LL V2 EN-US

8.12.2 Application SEMOD151283-4 v5

The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as a

torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy.

Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it
does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator
becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the
power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate as
motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator under consideration is
very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect it
to ease the task for the rest of the power system.

Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state.
The task of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect the
generator itself.

Steam turbines easily become overheated if the steam flow becomes too low or if the
steam ceases to flow through the turbine. Therefore, turbo-generators should have
reverse power protection. There are several contingencies that may cause reverse
power: break of a main steam pipe, damage to one or more blades in the steam turbine
or inadvertent closing of the main stop valves. In the last case, it is highly desirable to
have a reliable reverse power protection. It may prevent damage to an otherwise
undamaged plant.

During the routine shutdown of many thermal power units, the reverse power
protection gives the tripping impulse to the generator breaker (the unit breaker). By
doing so, one prevents the disconnection of the unit before the mechanical power has
become zero. Earlier disconnection would cause an acceleration of the turbine
generator at all routine shutdowns. This should have caused overspeed and high
centrifugal stresses.

214 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

When the steam ceases to flow through a turbine, the cooling of the turbine blades will
disappear. Now, it is not possible to remove all heat generated by the windage losses.
Instead, the heat will increase the temperature in the steam turbine and especially of the
blades. When a steam turbine rotates without steam supply, the electric power
consumption will be about 2% of rated power. Even if the turbine rotates in vacuum, it
will soon become overheated and damaged. The turbine overheats within minutes if the
turbine loses the vacuum.

The critical time to overheating a steam turbine varies from about 0.5 to 30 minutes
depending on the type of turbine. A high-pressure turbine with small and thin blades
will become overheated more easily than a low-pressure turbine with long and heavy
blades. The conditions vary from turbine to turbine and it is necessary to ask the
turbine manufacturer in each case.

Power to the power plant auxiliaries may come from a station service transformer
connected to the secondary side of the step-up transformer. Power may also come from
a start-up service transformer connected to the external network. One has to design the
reverse power protection so that it can detect reverse power independent of the flow of
power to the power plant auxiliaries.

Hydro turbines tolerate reverse power much better than steam turbines do. Only
Kaplan turbine and bulb turbines may suffer from reverse power. There is a risk that
the turbine runner moves axially and touches stationary parts. They are not always
strong enough to withstand the associated stresses.

Ice and snow may block the intake when the outdoor temperature falls far below zero.
Branches and leaves may also block the trash gates. A complete blockage of the intake
may cause cavitations. The risk for damages to hydro turbines can justify reverse
power protection in unattended plants.

A hydro turbine that rotates in water with closed wicket gates will draw electric power
from the rest of the power system. This power will be about 10% of the rated power. If
there is only air in the hydro turbine, the power demand will fall to about 3%.

Diesel engines should have reverse power protection. The generator will take about
15% of its rated power or more from the system. A stiff engine may require perhaps
25% of the rated power to motor it. An engine that is good run in might need no more
than 5%. It is necessary to obtain information from the engine manufacturer and to
measure the reverse power during commissioning.

Gas turbines usually do not require reverse power protection.

Figure 86 illustrates the reverse power protection with underpower protection and with
overpower protection. The underpower protection gives a higher margin and should
provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk for unwanted operation
immediately after synchronization may be higher. One should set the underpower

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 215

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

protection (reference angle set to 0) to trip if the active power from the generator is less
than about 2%. One should set the overpower protection (reference angle set to 180) to
trip if the power flow from the network to the generator is higher than 1%.

Underpower protection Overpower protection

Operate
Q Q
Operate
Line Line

Margin Margin
P P

Operating point Operating point

without without
turbine torque turbine torque

IEC09000019-2-en.vsd
IEC09000019 V2 EN-US

Figure 86: Reverse power protection with underpower or overpower protection

8.12.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD172134-4 v7

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
IBase, VBase and SBase as applicable.

Operation: With the parameter Operation the function can be set Enabled/Disabled.

Mode: The voltage and current used for the power measurement. The setting
possibilities are shown in table 26.
Table 26: Complex power calculation
Set value Mode Formula used for complex power calculation
A, B, C
S = V A × I A* + VB × I B* + VC × I C *
EQUATION2055-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 64)
Arone
S = VAB × I A* - VBC × IC *
EQUATION2056-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 65)
PosSeq
S = 3 × VPosSeq × I PosSeq*
EQUATION2057-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 66)
AB
S = VAB × ( I A* - I B* )
EQUATION2058-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 67)
Table continues on next page

216 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

Set value Mode Formula used for complex power calculation

BC
S = VBC × ( I B* - I C * )
EQUATION2059-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 68)
CA
S = VCA × ( I C * - I A* )
EQUATION2060-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 69)
A
S = 3 × VA × I A*
EQUATION2061-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 70)
B
S = 3 × VB × I B*
EQUATION2062-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 71)
C
S = 3 × VC × I C *
EQUATION2063-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 72)

The function has two stages that can be set independently.

With the parameter OpMode1(2) the function can be set Enabled/Disabled.

The function gives trip if the power component in the direction defined by the setting
Angle1(2) is smaller than the set pick up power value Power1(2)

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 217

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

Power1(2)

Angle1(2)
P
Operate

en06000441.vsd
IEC06000441 V1 EN-US

Figure 87: Underpower mode

The setting Power1(2) gives the power component pick up value in the Angle1(2)
direction. The setting is given in p.u. of the generator rated power, see equation 73.

Minimum recommended setting is 0.2% of SN when metering class CT inputs into the
IED are used.

SN = 3 × VBase × IBase
EQUATION2047 V1 EN-US (Equation 73)

The setting Angle1(2) gives the characteristic angle giving maximum sensitivity of the
power protection function. The setting is given in degrees. For active power the set
angle should be 0° or 180°. 0° should be used for generator low forward active power
protection.

218 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

Operate
Angle1(2) = 0°
P
Power1(2)

en06000556.vsd
IEC06000556 V1 EN-US

Figure 88: For low forward power the set angle should be 0° in the underpower
function

TripDelay1(2) is set in seconds to give the time delay for trip of the stage after pick up.

Hysteresis1(2) is given in p.u. of generator rated power according to equation 74.

SN = 3 × VBase × IBase
EQUATION2047 V1 EN-US (Equation 74)

The drop out power will be Power1(2) + Hysteresis1(2).

The possibility to have low pass filtering of the measured power can be made as shown
in the formula:

S = TD ⋅ SOld + (1 − TD ) ⋅ SCalculated
EQUATION1893-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 75)

Where
S is a new measured value to be used for the protection function
Sold is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle

SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

TD is settable parameter

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 219

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

The value of k=0.92 is recommended in generator applications as the trip delay is

normally quite long.

The calibration factors for current and voltage measurement errors are set % of rated
current/voltage:

IMagComp5, IMagComp30, IMagComp100

VMagComp5, VMagComp30, VMagComp100

IMagComp5, IMagComp30, IMagComp100

The angle compensation is given as difference between current and voltage angle
errors.

The values are given for operating points 5, 30 and 100% of rated current/voltage. The
values should be available from instrument transformer test protocols.

8.13 Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP (32) SEMOD172360-1 v4

8.13.1 Identification
SEMOD176574-2 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP 32
P>
2
DOCUMENT172362-IMG158942
V2 EN-US

8.13.2 Application SEMOD172358-4 v2

The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as a

torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy.

Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it
does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator
becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the
power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate as
motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator under consideration is
very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect it
to ease the task for the rest of the power system.

220 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state.
The task of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect the
generator itself.

Steam turbines easily become overheated if the steam flow becomes too low or if the
steam ceases to flow through the turbine. Therefore, turbo-generators should have
reverse power protection. There are several contingencies that may cause reverse
power: break of a main steam pipe, damage to one or more blades in the steam turbine
or inadvertent closing of the main stop valves. In the last case, it is highly desirable to
have a reliable reverse power protection. It may prevent damage to an otherwise
undamaged plant.

During the routine shutdown of many thermal power units, the reverse power
protection gives the tripping impulse to the generator breaker (the unit breaker). By
doing so, one prevents the disconnection of the unit before the mechanical power has
become zero. Earlier disconnection would cause an acceleration of the turbine
generator at all routine shutdowns. This should have caused overspeed and high
centrifugal stresses.

When the steam ceases to flow through a turbine, the cooling of the turbine blades will
disappear. Now, it is not possible to remove all heat generated by the windage losses.
Instead, the heat will increase the temperature in the steam turbine and especially of the
blades. When a steam turbine rotates without steam supply, the electric power
consumption will be about 2% of rated power. Even if the turbine rotates in vacuum, it
will soon become overheated and damaged. The turbine overheats within minutes if the
turbine loses the vacuum.

The critical time to overheating of a steam turbine varies from about 0.5 to 30 minutes
depending on the type of turbine. A high-pressure turbine with small and thin blades
will become overheated more easily than a low-pressure turbine with long and heavy
blades. The conditions vary from turbine to turbine and it is necessary to ask the
turbine manufacturer in each case.

Power to the power plant auxiliaries may come from a station service transformer
connected to the primary side of the step-up transformer. Power may also come from a
start-up service transformer connected to the external network. One has to design the
reverse power protection so that it can detect reverse power independent of the flow of
power to the power plant auxiliaries.

Hydro turbines tolerate reverse power much better than steam turbines do. Only
Kaplan turbine and bulb turbines may suffer from reverse power. There is a risk that
the turbine runner moves axially and touches stationary parts. They are not always
strong enough to withstand the associated stresses.

Ice and snow may block the intake when the outdoor temperature falls far below zero.
Branches and leaves may also block the trash gates. A complete blockage of the intake

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 221

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

may cause cavitations. The risk for damages to hydro turbines can justify reverse
power protection in unattended plants.

A hydro turbine that rotates in water with closed wicket gates will draw electric power
from the rest of the power system. This power will be about 10% of the rated power. If
there is only air in the hydro turbine, the power demand will fall to about 3%.

Diesel engines should have reverse power protection. The generator will take about
15% of its rated power or more from the system. A stiff engine may require perhaps
25% of the rated power to motor it. An engine that is well run in might need no more
than 5%. It is necessary to obtain information from the engine manufacturer and to
measure the reverse power during commissioning.

Gas turbines usually do not require reverse power protection.

Figure 89 illustrates the reverse power protection with underpower IED and with
overpower IED. The underpower IED gives a higher margin and should provide better
dependability. On the other hand, the risk for unwanted operation immediately after
synchronization may be higher. One should set the underpower IED to trip if the active
power from the generator is less than about 2%. One should set the overpower IED to
trip if the power flow from the network to the generator is higher than 1%.

Underpower IED Overpower IED

Operate
Q Q
Operate
Line Line

Margin Margin
P P

Operating point Operating point

without without
turbine torque turbine torque

IEC06000315-2-en.vsd
IEC06000315 V2 EN-US

Figure 89: Reverse power protection with underpower IED and overpower IED

8.13.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD172150-4 v7

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
IBase, VBase and SBase as applicable.

Operation: With the parameter Operation the function can be set Enabled/Disabled.

222 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

Mode: The voltage and current used for the power measurement. The setting
possibilities are shown in table 27.
Table 27: Complex power calculation
Set value Mode Formula used for complex power calculation
A,B,C * * *
S = V A × IA + V B × IB + V C × IC
EQUATION2038 V1 EN-US (Equation 77)
Arone * *
S = V AB × I A - V BC × I C
EQUATION2039 V1 EN-US (Equation 78)
PosSeq *
S = 3 × V PosSeq × I PosSeq
EQUATION2040 V1 EN-US (Equation 79)
A,B * *
S = V AB × (I A - I B )
EQUATION2041 V1 EN-US (Equation 80)
B,C * *
S = V BC × (I B - I C )
EQUATION2042 V1 EN-US (Equation 81)
C,A * *
S = V CA × (I C - I A )
EQUATION2043 V1 EN-US (Equation 82)
A *
S = 3 × V A × IA
EQUATION2044 V1 EN-US (Equation 83)
B *
S = 3 × V B × IB
EQUATION2045 V1 EN-US (Equation 84)
C *
S = 3 × V C × IC
EQUATION2046 V1 EN-US (Equation 85)

The function has two stages that can be set independently.

With the parameter OpMode1(2) the function can be set Enabled/Disabled.

The function gives trip if the power component in the direction defined by the setting
Angle1(2) is larger than the set pick up power value Power1(2)

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 223

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

Operate

Power1(2)

Angle1(2)
P

en06000440.vsd
IEC06000440 V1 EN-US

Figure 90: Overpower mode

The setting Power1(2) gives the power component pick up value in the Angle1(2)
direction. The setting is given in p.u. of the generator rated power, see equation 86.

Minimum recommended setting is 0.2% of SN when metering class CT inputs into the
IED are used.

SN = 3 × VBase × IBase
EQUATION2047 V1 EN-US (Equation 86)

The setting Angle1(2) gives the characteristic angle giving maximum sensitivity of the
power protection function. The setting is given in degrees. For active power the set
angle should be 0° or 180°. 180° should be used for generator reverse power
protection.

224 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

Operate Angle1(2 ) = 180 o

P
Power1(2)

IEC06000557-2-en.vsd
IEC06000557 V2 EN-US

Figure 91: For reverse power the set angle should be 180° in the overpower
function

TripDelay1(2) is set in seconds to give the time delay for trip of the stage after pick up.

Hysteresis1(2) is given in p.u. of generator rated power according to equation 87.

SN = 3 × VBase × IBase
EQUATION2047 V1 EN-US (Equation 87)

The drop out power will be Power1(2) - Hysteresis1(2).

The possibility to have low pass filtering of the measured power can be made as shown
in the formula:

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 225

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

S = TD ⋅ SOld + (1 − TD ) ⋅ SCalculated
EQUATION1893-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 88)

Where
S is a new measured value to be used for the protection function
Sold is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle

SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

TD is settable parameter

The value of TD=0.92 is recommended in generator applications as the trip delay is

normally quite long.

The calibration factors for current and voltage measurement errors are set % of rated
current/voltage:

IMagComp5, IMagComp30, IMagComp100

VMagComp5, VMagComp30, VMagComp100

IAngComp5, IAngComp30, IAngComp100

The angle compensation is given as difference between current and voltage angle
errors.

The values are given for operating points 5, 30 and 100% of rated current/voltage. The
values should be available from instrument transformer test protocols.

8.14 Broken conductor check BRCPTOC (46) SEMOD171761-1 v3

8.14.1 Identification
SEMOD172362-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC - 46

226 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

8.14.2 Application SEMOD171858-5 v3

Conventional protection functions can not detect the broken conductor condition.
Broken conductor check (BRCPTOC, 46) function, consisting of continuous current
unsymmetrical check on the line where the IED connected will give alarm or trip at
detecting broken conductors.

8.14.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD171866-5 v4

Broken conductor check BRCPTOC (46) must be set to detect open phase/s (series
faults) with different loads on the line. BRCPTOC (46) must at the same time be set to
not operate for maximum asymmetry which can exist due to, for example, not
transposed power lines.

All settings are in primary values or percentage.

Set IBase (given in GlobalBaseSel) to power line rated current or CT rated current.

Set minimum operating level per phase Pickup_PH to typically 10-20% of rated
current.

Set the unsymmetrical current, which is relation between the difference of the
minimum and maximum phase currents to the maximum phase current to typical
Pickup_ub = 50%.

Note that it must be set to avoid problem with asymmetry under

minimum operating conditions.

Set the time delay tOper = 5 - 60 seconds and reset time tReset = 0.010 - 60.000
seconds.

8.15 Capacitor bank protection CBPGAPC GUID-41731DCF-840C-4717-9F51-899FC648F881 v2

8.15.1 Identification
GUID-67FC8DBF-4391-4562-A630-3F244CBB4A33 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Capacitor bank protection CBPGAPC - -

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 227

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

8.15.2 Application GUID-5EC8BAEC-9118-49EC-970C-43D6C416640A v1

GUID-BACAE67B-E64B-4963-B323-ECB0B69031B9 v2

Shunt capacitor banks (SCBs) are somewhat specific and different from other power
system elements. These specific features of SCB are briefly summarized in this section.

A capacitor unit is the building block used for SCB construction. The capacitor unit is
made up of individual capacitor elements, arranged in parallel or series connections.
Capacitor elements normally consist of aluminum foil, paper, or film-insulated cells
immersed in a biodegradable insulating fluid and are sealed in a metallic container. The
internal discharge resistor is also integrated within the capacitor unit in order to reduce
trapped residual voltage after disconnection of the SCB from the power system. Units
are available in a variety of voltage ratings (240V to 25kV) and sizes (2.5kVAr to
about 1000kVAr). Capacitor unit can be designed with one or two bushings.

The high-voltage SCB is normally constructed using individual capacitor units

connected in series and/or parallel to obtain the required voltage and MVAr rating.
Typically the neighboring capacitor units are mounted in racks. Each rack must be
insulated from the other by insulators because the can casing within each rack are at a
certain potential. Refer figure 92 for an example:

228 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

Rack

Capacitor Unit
(Can)

IEC09000753_1_en.vsd
IEC09000753 V1 EN-US

Figure 92: Replacement of a faulty capacitor unit within SCB

There are four types of the capacitor unit fusing designs which are used for
construction of SCBs:

Externally where an individual fuse, externally mounted, protects each capacitor unit.
fused
Internally where each capacitor element is fused inside the capacitor unit
fused
Fuseless where SCB is built from series connections of the individual capacitor units (that is,
strings) and without any fuses
Unfused where, in contrary to the fuseless configuration, a series or parallel connection of the
capacitor units is used to form SCB, still without any fuses

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 229

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

Which type of fusing is used may depend on can manufacturer or utility preference and
previous experience.

Because the SCBs are built from the individual capacitor units the overall connections
may vary. Typically used SCB configurations are:

1. Delta-connected banks (generally used only at distribution voltages)

2. Single wye-connected banks
3. Double wye-connected banks
4. H-configuration, where each phase is connected in a bridge

Additionally, the SCB star point, when available, can be either grounded , grounded via
impedance or isolated from ground. Which type of SCB grounding is used depends on
voltage level, used circuit breaker, utility preference and previous experience. Many
utilities have standard system grounding principle to ground neutrals of SCB above
100 kV.

Switching of SCB will produce transients in power system. The transient inrush current
during SCB energizing typically has high frequency components and can reach peak
current values, which are multiples of SCB rating. Opening of capacitor bank circuit
breaker may produce step recovery voltages across open CB contact, which can
consequently cause restrikes upon the first interruption of capacitive current. In modern
power system the synchronized CB closing/opening may be utilized in such a manner
that transients caused by SCB switching are avoided.

8.15.2.1 SCB protection GUID-9E537AFB-BB23-4431-AC98-D4827A608F81 v2

IED protection of shunt capacitor banks requires an understanding of the capabilities

and limitations of the individual capacitor units and associated electrical equipment.
Different types of shunt capacitor bank fusing, configuration or grounding may affect
the IED selection for the protection scheme. Availability and placement of CTs and
VTs can be additional limiting factor during protection scheme design.

SCB protection schemes are provided in order to detect and clear faults within the
capacitor bank itself or in the connected leads to the substation busbar. Bank protection
may include items such as a means to disconnect a faulted capacitor unit or capacitor
element(s), a means to initiate a shutdown of the bank in case of faults that may lead to
a catastrophic failure and alarms to indicate unbalance within the bank.

Capacitor bank outages and failures are often caused by accidental contact by animals.
Vermin, monkeys, birds, may use the SCB as a resting place or a landing site. When
the animal touches the HV live parts this can result in a flash-over, can rapture or a
cascading failures that might cause extensive damages, fire or even total destruction of
the whole SCB, unless the bank is sufficiently fitted with protection IEDs.

230 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

In addition, to fault conditions SCB can be exposed to different types of abnormal

operating conditions. In accordance with IEC and ANSI standards capacitors shall be
capable of continuous operation under contingency system and bank conditions,
provided the following limitations are not exceeded:

1. Capacitor units should be capable of continuous operation including harmonics,

but excluding transients, to 110% of rated IED root-mean-square (RMS) voltage
and a crest voltage not exceeding of rated RMS voltage. The capacitor should also
be able to carry 135% of nominal current. The voltage capability of any series
element of a capacitor unit shall be considered to be its share of the total capacitor
unit voltage capability.
2. Capacitor units should not give less than 100% nor more than 110% of rated
reactive power at rated sinusoidal voltage and frequency, measured at a uniform
case and internal temperature of 25°C.
3. Capacitor units mounted in multiple rows and tiers should be designed for
continuous operation for a 24h average temperature of 40 °C during the hottest
day, or −40 °C during the coldest day expected at the location.
4. Capacitor units should be suitable for continuous operation at up to 135% of rated
reactive power caused by the combined effects of:
• Voltage in excess of the nameplate rating at fundamental frequency, but not
over 110% of rated RMS voltage
• Harmonic voltages superimposed on the fundamental frequency
• Reactive power manufacturing tolerance of up to 115% of rated reactive
power
5. Capacitor units rated above 600 V shall have an internal discharge device to
reduce the residual voltage to 50 V or less in 5 or 10 minutes (depending on
national standard).

Note that capacitor units designed for special applications can exceed these ratings.

Thus, as a general rule, the minimum number of capacitor units connected in parallel
within a SCB is such that isolation of one capacitor unit in a group should not cause a
voltage unbalance sufficient to place more than 110% of rated voltage on the remaining
capacitors of that parallel group. Equally, the minimum number of series connected
groups within a SCB is such that complete bypass of one group should not pause
voltage higher than 110% of the rated voltage on the remaining capacitors of that serial
group. The value of 110% is the maximum continuous overvoltage capability of
capacitor units as per IEEE Std 18-1992.

The SCB typically requires the following types of IED protection:

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 231

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

1. Short circuit protection for SCB and connecting leads (can be provided by using
PHPIOC, OC4PTOC, CVGAPC, T2WPDIF/T3WPDIF or HZPDIF functions)
2. Ground-fault protection for SCB and connecting leads (can be provided by using
EFPIOC, EF4PTOC, CVGAPC, T2WPDIF/T3WPDIF or HZPDIF functions)
3. Current or Voltage based unbalance protection for SCB (can be provided by using
EF4PTOC, OC4PTOC, CVGAPC or VDCPTOV functions)
4. Overload protection for SCB
5. Undercurrent protection for SCB
6. Reconnection inhibit protection for SCB
7. Restrike condition detection

CBPGAPC function can be used to provide the last four types of protection mentioned
in the above list.

8.15.3 Setting guidelines GUID-CECD6525-779C-4A77-844D-031AAEE3A5B6 v1

GUID-7C456976-BA0D-4AAC-9C7A-F73AF52B2B44 v2

This setting example will be done for application as shown in figure 93:

400kV

Preprocessing Capacitor bank

Function Block protection function
SMAI CBPGAPC

500/1

200MVAr
400kV IED

IEC09000754-1-en.vsd
IEC09000754 V1 EN-US

Figure 93: Single line diagram for the application example

From figure 93 it is possible to calculate the following rated fundamental frequency

current for this SCB:

232 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

1000 × 200[ MVAr ]

Ir = = 289 A
3 × 400[ kV ]
IEC09000755 V1 EN-US (Equation 89)

or on the secondary CT side:

289 A
I r _ S ec = = 0.578 A
500 1
IEC09000756 V1 EN-US (Equation 90)

Note that the SCB rated current on the secondary CT side is important for secondary
injection of the function.

The parameters for the Capacitor bank protection function CBPGAPC are set via the
local HMI or PCM600. The following settings are done for this function:

General Settings:

Operation =Enabled; to enable the function

IBase =289A; Fundamental frequency SCB rated current in primary amperes. This
value is used as a base value for pickup settings of all other features integrated in this
function.

Reconnection inhibit feature:

OperationRecIn =Enabled; to enable this feature

IRecInhibit =10% (of IBase); Current level under which function will detect that SCB
is disconnected from the power system

tReconnInhibit =300s; Time period under which SCB shall discharge remaining
residual voltage to less than 5%.

Overcurrent feature:

OperationOC =Enabled; to enable this feature

PU 51 =135% (of IBase); Current level for overcurrent pickup. Selected value gives
pickup recommended by international standards.

tOC =30s; Time delay for overcurrent trip

Undercurrent feature:

Operation37 =Enabled; to enable this feature

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 233

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

PU_37 =70% (of IBase); Current level for undercurrent pickup

tUC =5s; Time delay for undercurrent trip

Undercurrent feature is blocked by operation of Reconnection inhibit

feature.

Reactive power overload feature:

Operation QOL =Enabled; to enable this feature

UP_QOL =130% (of SCB MVAr rating); Reactive power level required for pickup.
Selected value gives pickup recommended by international standards.

tQOL =60s; Time delay for reactive power overload trip

Harmonic voltage overload feature:

OperationHOL =Enabled; to enable this feature

Settings for definite time delay step

HOL_DT_V =200% (of SCB voltage rating); Voltage level required for pickup

tHOL_DT =10s; Definite time delay for harmonic overload trip

Settings for IDMT delay step

PU_HOL_DT_V =110% (of SCB voltage rating); Voltage level required for pickup of
IDMT stage. Selected value gives pickup recommended by international standards.

k_HOL_IDMT =1.0; Time multiplier for IDMT stage. Selected value gives operate
time in accordance with international standards

tMax_HOL_IDMT =2000s; Maximum time delay for IDMT stage for very low level of
harmonic overload

tMin_HOL_IDMT =0.1s; Minimum time delay for IDMT stage. Selected value gives
operate time in accordance with international standards

8.15.3.1 Restrike detection GUID-114747A5-0F7C-4F48-A32D-0C13BFF6ADCE v1

Opening of SCBs can be quite problematic for certain types of circuit breakers (CBs).
Typically such problems are manifested as CB restrikes.

234 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

In simple words this means that the CB is not breaking the current at the first zero
crossing after separation of the CB contacts. Instead current is re-ignited and only
braked at consecutive current zero crossings. This condition is manifested as high
current pulses at the moment of current re-ignition.

To detect this CB condition, the built in overcurrent feature can be used. Simply, any
start of the overcurrent feature during breaker normal opening means a restrike.
Therefore simple logic can be created in the Application Configuration tool to detect
such CB behavior. Such CB condition can be just alarmed, and if required, the built in
disturbance recorder can also be triggered.

To create this logic, a binary signal that the CB is going to be opened (but not trip
command) shall be made available to the IED.

8.16 Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection

VRPVOC (51V) GUID-613620B1-4092-4FB6-901D-6810CDD5C615 v4

8.16.1 Identification GUID-7835D582-3FF4-4587-81CE-3B40D543E287 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent VRPVOC I>/U< 51V
protection

8.16.2 Application GUID-622CDDDD-6D03-430E-A82D-861A4CBE067C v7

A breakdown of the insulation between phase conductors or a phase conductor and

ground results in a short-circuit or a ground fault. Such faults can result in large fault
currents and may cause severe damage to the power system primary equipment.

A typical application of the voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection is in the

generator protection system, where it is used as backup protection. If a phase-to-phase
fault affects a generator, the fault current amplitude is a function of time, and it
depends on generator characteristic (reactances and time constants), its load conditions
(immediately before the fault) and excitation system performance and characteristic.
So the fault current amplitude may decay with time. A voltage-restrained overcurrent
relay can be set in order to remain in the picked-up state in spite of the current decay,
and perform a backup trip in case of failure of the main protection.

The IED can be provided with a voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection

(VRPVOC, 51V). The VRPVOC (51V) function is always connected to three-phase

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 235

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool, but it will always
measure the maximum phase current and the minimum phase-to-phase voltage.

VRPVOC (51V) function module has two independent protection each consisting of:

• One overcurrent step with the following built-in features:

• Selectable definite time delay or Inverse Time IDMT characteristic
• Voltage restrained/controlled feature is available in order to modify the pick-
up level of the overcurrent stage in proportion to the magnitude of the
measured voltage
• One undervoltage step with the following built-in feature:
• Definite time delay

The undervoltage function can be enabled or disabled. Sometimes in order to obtain the
desired application functionality it is necessary to provide interaction between the two
protection elements within the VRPVOC (51V) function by appropriate IED
configuration (for example, overcurrent protection with under-voltage seal-in).
Sometimes in order to obtain the desired application functionality it is necessary to
provide interaction between the two protection elements within the D2PTOC(51V)
function by appropriate IED configuration (for example, overcurrent protection with
under-voltage seal-in).

8.16.2.1 Base quantities GUID-08944177-73CF-4FB4-818E-3B7AC4F625EE v4

GlobalBaseSel defines the particular Global Base Values Group where the base
quantities of the function are set. In that Global Base Values Group:

IBase shall be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in primary
amperes.

VBase shall be entered as rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in

primary kV.

8.16.2.2 Application possibilities GUID-5053F964-C2D6-4611-B5EF-AC3DB0889F51 v5

VRPVOC (51V) function can be used in one of the following applications:

• voltage controlled over-current

• voltage restrained over-current

In both applications a seal-in of the overcurrent function at under-voltage can be

included by configuration.

236 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

8.16.2.3 Undervoltage seal-in GUID-13BE02D3-1322-4075-859B-617CFF608657 v7

In the case of a generator with a static excitation system, which receives its power from
the generator terminals, the magnitude of a sustained phase short-circuit current
depends on the generator terminal voltage. In case of a nearby multi-phase fault, the
generator terminal voltage may drop to quite low level, for example, less than 25%,
and the generator fault current may consequently fall below the pickup level of the
overcurrent protection. The short-circuit current may drop below the generator rated
current after 0.5...1 s. Also, for generators with an excitation system not fed from the
generator terminals, a fault can occur when the automatic voltage regulator is out of
service. In such cases, to ensure tripping under such conditions, overcurrent protection
with undervoltage seal-in can be used.

To apply the VRPVOC(51V) function, the configuration is done according to figure

94. As seen in the figure, the pickup of the overcurrent stage will enable the
undervoltage stage. Once enabled, the undervoltage stage will start a timer, which
causes function tripping, if the voltage does not recover above the set value. To ensure
a proper reset, the function is blocked two seconds after the trip signal is issued.

VRPVOC (51V)
I3P* TRIP
Trip output
OR I3P*
V3P* TROC TRIP
V3P*
BLOCK TROC
27 Trip
t
BLOCK
BLKOC 27 Trip
PICKUP
OR BLKOC
BLKUV PICKUP
PU_OC
BLKUV 27PU_OC
PU
27 PU

ANSI12000183-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000183 V1 EN-US

Figure 94: Undervoltage seal-in of current pickup

8.16.3 Setting guidelines GUID-2AE85EC4-669E-47C0-ADD4-3DBA83581096 v2

8.16.3.1 Explanation of the setting parameters GUID-9B777E6D-602B-4214-9170-A44ED2D725BF v3

Operation: Set to On in order to activate the function; set to Off to switch off the
complete function.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 237

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

Pickup_Curr: Operation phase current level given in % of IBase.

Characterist: Selection of time characteristic: Definite time delay and different types
of inverse time characteristics are available; see Technical Manual for details.

tDef_OC: Definite time delay. It is used if definite time characteristic is chosen; it shall
be set to 0 s if the inverse time characteristic is chosen and no additional delay shall be
added. Note that the value set is the time between activation of the start and the trip
outputs.

k: Time multiplier for inverse time delay.

tMin: Minimum operation time for all inverse time characteristics. At high currents the
inverse time characteristic might give a very short operation time. By setting this
parameter the operation time of the step can never be shorter than the setting.

Operation_UV: it sets On/Off the operation of the under-voltage stage.

PickUp_Volt: Operation phase-to-phase voltage level given in % of VBase for the

under-voltage stage. Typical setting may be, for example, in the range from 70% to
80% of the rated voltage of the generator.

tDef_UV: Definite time delay. Since it is related to a backup protection function, a long
time delay (for example 0.5 s or more) is typically used. Note that the value set is the
time between activation of the start and the trip outputs.

EnBlkLowV: This parameter enables the internal block of the undervoltage stage for
low voltage condition; the voltage level is defined by the parameter BlkLowVolt.

BlkLowVolt: Voltage level under which the internal blocking of the undervoltage stage
is activated; it is set in % of VBase. This setting must be lower than the setting
StartVolt. The setting can be very low, for example, lower than 10%.

VDepMode: Selection of the characteristic of the start level of the overcurrent stage as
a function of the phase-to-phase voltage; two options are available: Slope and Step. See
Technical Manual for details about the characteristics.

VDepFact: Slope mode: it is the pickup level of the overcurrent stage given in % of
Pickup_Curr when the voltage is lower than 25% of VBase; so it defines the first point
of the characteristic (VDepFact*Pickup_Curr/100*IBase ; 0.25*VBase).

Step mode: it is the pickup level of the overcurrent stage given in % of Pickup_Curr
when the voltage is lower than VHighLimit/100*VBase.

VHighLimit: when the measured phase-to-phase voltage is higher than VHighLimit/

100*VBase, than the pickup level of the overcurrent stage is Pickup_Curr/100*IBase.
In particular, in Slope mode it define the second point of the characteristic
(Pickup_Curr/100*IBase ; VHighLimit/100*VBase).

238 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 8
Current protection

8.16.3.2 Voltage-restrained overcurrent protection for generator and step-up

transformer GUID-263B960B-2280-461C-B455-F17B7D278F60 v8

An example of how to use VRPVOC (51V) function to provide voltage restrained

overcurrent protection for a generator is given below. Let us assume that the time
coordination study gives the following required settings:

• Inverse Time Over Current IDMT curve: IEC very inverse, with multiplier k=1
• Pickup current of 185% of generator rated current at rated generator voltage
• Pickup current 25% of the original pickup current value for generator voltages
below 25% of rated voltage

To ensure proper operation of the function:

1. Set Operation to Enabled

2. Set GlobalBaseSel to the right value in order to select the Global Base Values
Group with VBase and IBase equal to the rated phase-to-phase voltage and the
rated phase current of the generator.
3. Connect three-phase generator currents and voltages to VRPVOC (51V) in the
application configuration.
4. Select Characterist to match the type of overcurrent curves used in the network
IEC Very inv.
5. Set the multiplier k = 1 (default value).
6. Set tDef_OC = 0.00 s, in order to add no additional delay to the trip time defined
by the inverse time characteristic.
7. If required, set the minimum operating time for this curve by using the parameter
t_MinTripDelay (default value 0.05 s).
8. Set PickupCurr to the value 185%.
9. Set VDepMode to Slope (default value).
10. Set VDepFact to the value 25% (default value).
11. Set VHighLimit to the value 100% (default value).

All other settings can be left at the default values.

8.16.3.3 Overcurrent protection with undervoltage seal-in GUID-B58E1CD6-F9AE-4301-ABE7-90DBFC987D69 v6

To obtain this functionality, the IED application configuration shall include a logic in
accordance to figure 94 and, of course, the relevant three-phase generator currents and
voltages shall be connected to VRPVOC. Let us assume that, taking into account the
characteristic of the generator, the excitation system and the short circuit study, the
following settings are required:

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 239

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Current protection

• Pickup current of the overcurrent stage: 150% of generator rated current at rated
generator voltage;
• Pickup voltage of the undervoltage stage: 70% of generator rated voltage;
• Trip time: 3.0 s.

The overcurrent stage and the undervoltage stage shall be set in the following way:
1. Set Operation to Enabled.
2. Set GlobalBaseSel to the right value in order to select the Global Base Values
Group with VBase and IBase equal to the rated phase-to-phase voltage and the
rated phase current of the generator.
3. Set StartCurr to the value 150%.
4. Set Characteristic to IEC Def. Time.
5. Set tDef_OC to 6000.00 s, if no trip of the overcurrent stage is required.
6. Set VDepFact to the value 100% in order to ensure that the pickup value of the
overcurrent stage is constant, irrespective of the magnitude of the generator
voltage.
7. Set Operation_UV to Enabled to activate the undervoltage stage.
8. Set StartVolt to the values 70%.
9. Set tDef_UV to 3.0 s.
10. Set EnBlkLowV to Disabled (default value) to disable the cut-off level for low-
voltage of the undervoltage stage.

The other parameters may be left at their default value.

240 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 9
Voltage protection

Section 9 Voltage protection

9.1 Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV (27) IP14544-1 v3

9.1.1 Identification
M16876-1 v7

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV 27

3U<

V2 EN-US
SYMBOL-R-2U-GREATER-THAN

9.1.2 Application M13790-3 v8

Two-step undervoltage protection function (UV2PTUV ,27) is applied to power system

elements, such as generators, transformers, motors and power lines in order to detect
low voltage conditions. It is used as a supervision and fault detection function for other
protection functions as well, to increase the security of a complete protection system.
Low voltage conditions are caused by abnormal operation or faults in the power
system, such as:

• Malfunctioning of a voltage regulator or wrong settings under manual control

(symmetrical voltage decrease)
• Overload (symmetrical voltage decrease)
• Short circuits, often as phase-to-ground faults (unsymmetrical voltage decrease)

UV2PTUV (27) is used in combination with overcurrent protections, either as restraint

or in logic "and gates" of the trip signals issued by the two functions. It can also be
used to:

• Detect no voltage conditions, for example, before the energization of a HV line or

for automatic breaker trip in case of a blackout
• Initiate voltage correction measures, like insertion of shunt capacitor banks to
compensate for reactive load and thereby increasing the voltage
• Disconnect apparatuses, like electric motors, which will be damaged when subject
to service under low voltage conditions.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 241

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Voltage protection

The function has a high measuring accuracy and a settable hysteresis to allow
applications to control reactive load.

In many cases, UV2PTUV (27) is a useful function in circuits for local or remote
automation processes in the power system.

9.1.3 Setting guidelines M13851-3 v9

All the voltage conditions in the system where UV2PTUV (27) performs its functions
should be considered. The same also applies to the associated equipment, its voltage
and time characteristic.

There is a very wide application area where general undervoltage functions are used.
All voltage-related settings are made as a percentage of the global base value VBase,
which normally is set to the primary rated voltage level (phase-to-phase) of the power
system or the high voltage equipment under consideration.

The trip time setting for UV2PTUV (27) is normally not critical, since there must be
enough time available for the main protection to clear short circuits and ground faults.

Some applications and related setting guidelines for the voltage level are described in
the following sections.

9.1.3.1 Equipment protection, such as for motors and generators M13851-50 v3

The setting must be below the lowest occurring "normal" voltage and above the lowest
acceptable voltage for the equipment.

9.1.3.2 Disconnected equipment detection M13851-53 v3

The setting must be below the lowest occurring "normal" voltage and above the highest
occurring voltage, caused by inductive or capacitive coupling, when the equipment is
disconnected.

9.1.3.3 Power supply quality M13851-56 v3

The setting must be below the lowest occurring "normal" voltage and above the lowest
acceptable voltage, due to regulation, good practice or other agreements.

9.1.3.4 Voltage instability mitigation M13851-59 v3

This setting is very much dependent on the power system characteristics, and thorough
studies have to be made to find the suitable levels.

242 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 9
Voltage protection

9.1.3.5 Backup protection for power system faults M13851-62 v3

The setting must be below the lowest occurring "normal" voltage and above the highest
occurring voltage during the fault conditions under consideration.

9.1.3.6 Settings for two step undervoltage protection M13851-65 v14

The following settings can be done for Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV
(27):

ConnType: Sets whether the measurement shall be phase-to-ground fundamental value,

phase-to-phase fundamental value, phase-to-ground RMS value or phase-to-phase
RMS value.

Operation: Disabled or Enabled.

VBase (given in GlobalBaseSel): Base voltage phase-to-phase in primary kV. This

voltage is used as reference for voltage setting. UV2PTUV (27) will operate if the
voltage becomes lower than the set percentage of VBase. This setting is used when
ConnType is set to PhPh DFT or PhPh RMS. Therefore, always set VBase as rated
primary phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object. For more information, refer to
the Technical manual.

The setting parameters described below are identical for the two steps (n = 1 or 2).
Therefore, the setting parameters are described only once.

Characteristicn: This parameter gives the type of time delay to be used. The setting
can be Definite time, Inverse Curve A, Inverse Curve B, Prog. inv. curve. The selection
is dependent on the protection application.

OpModen: This parameter describes how many of the three measured voltages should
be below the set level to give operation for step n. The setting can be 1 out of 3, 2 out
of 3 or 3 out of 3. In most applications, it is sufficient that one phase voltage is low to
give operation. If UV2PTUV (27) shall be insensitive for single phase-to-ground
faults, 2 out of 3 can be chosen. In subtransmission and transmission networks the
undervoltage function is mainly a system supervision function and 3 out of 3 is
selected.

Pickupn: Set pickup undervoltage operation value for step n, given as % of the
parameter VBase. The setting is highly dependent on the protection application. It is
essential to consider the minimum voltage at non-faulted situations. Normally, this
non-faulted voltage is larger than 90% of the nominal voltage.

tn: time delay of step n, given in s. This setting is dependent on the protection
application. In many applications the protection function shall not directly trip when

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 243

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Voltage protection

there is a short circuit or ground faults in the system. The time delay must be
coordinated to the other short circuit protections.

tResetn: Reset time for step n if definite time delay is used, given in s. The default
value is 25 ms.

tnMin: Minimum operation time for inverse time characteristic for step n, given in s.
When using inverse time characteristic for the undervoltage function during very low
voltages can give a short operation time. This might lead to unselective tripping. By
setting t1Min longer than the operation time for other protections, such unselective
tripping can be avoided.

ResetTypeCrvn: This parameter for inverse time characteristic can be set to

Instantaneous, Frozen time, Linearly decreased. The default setting is Instantaneous.

tIResetn: Reset time for step n if inverse time delay is used, given in s. The default
value is 25 ms.

TDn: Time multiplier for inverse time characteristic. This parameter is used for
coordination between different inverse time delayed undervoltage protections.

ACrvn, BCrvn, CCrvn, DCrvn, PCrvn: Parameters to create a programmable under

voltage inverse time characteristic. Description of this can be found in the Technical
manual.

CrvSatn: Tuning parameter that is used to compensate for the undesired discontinuity
created when the denominator in the equation for the customer programmable curve is
equal to zero. For more information, see the Technical manual.

IntBlkSeln: This parameter can be set to Disabled, Block of trip, Block all. In case of a
low voltage the undervoltage function can be blocked. This function can be used to
prevent function when the protected object is switched off. If the parameter is set Block
of trip or Block all unwanted trip is prevented.

IntBlkStValn: Voltage level under which the blocking is activated set in % of VBase.
This setting must be lower than the setting Pickupn. As switch of shall be detected the
setting can be very low, that is, about 10%.

tBlkUVn: Time delay to block the undervoltage step n when the voltage level is below
IntBlkStValn, given in s. It is important that this delay is shorter than the trip time delay
of the undervoltage protection step.

9.2 Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV (59) IP14545-1 v3

244 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 9
Voltage protection

9.2.1 Identification
M17002-1 v8

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification device number
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV 59

3U>

SYMBOL-C-2U-SMALLER-THAN V2 EN-US

9.2.2 Application M13799-3 v9

Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV (59) is applicable in all situations, where
reliable detection of high voltage is necessary. OV2PTOV (59) is used for supervision
and detection of abnormal conditions, which, in combination with other protection
functions, increase the security of a complete protection system.

High overvoltage conditions are caused by abnormal situations in the power system.
OV2PTOV (59) is applied to power system elements, such as generators, transformers,
motors and power lines in order to detect high voltage conditions. OV2PTOV (59) is
used in combination with low current signals, to identify a transmission line, open in
the remote end. In addition to that, OV2PTOV (59) is also used to initiate voltage
correction measures, like insertion of shunt reactors, to compensate for low load, and
thereby decreasing the voltage. The function has a high measuring accuracy and
hysteresis setting to allow applications to control reactive load.

OV2PTOV (59) is used to disconnect apparatuses, like electric motors, which will be
damaged when subject to service under high voltage conditions. It deals with high
voltage conditions at power system frequency, which can be caused by:

1. Different kinds of faults, where a too high voltage appears in a certain power
system, like metallic connection to a higher voltage level (broken conductor
falling down to a crossing overhead line, transformer flash over fault from the high
voltage winding to the low voltage winding and so on).
2. Malfunctioning of a voltage regulator or wrong settings under manual control
(symmetrical voltage decrease).
3. Low load compared to the reactive power generation (symmetrical voltage
decrease).
4. Ground-faults in high impedance grounded systems causes, beside the high
voltage in the neutral, high voltages in the two non-faulted phases, (unsymmetrical
voltage increase).

OV2PTOV (59) prevents sensitive equipment from running under conditions that could
cause their overheating or stress of insulation material, and, thus, shorten their life time

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 245

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Voltage protection

expectancy. In many cases, it is a useful function in circuits for local or remote

automation processes in the power system.

9.2.3 Setting guidelines M13852-4 v10

The parameters for Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV ,59) are set via the
local HMI or PCM600.

All the voltage conditions in the system where OV2PTOV (59) performs its functions
should be considered. The same also applies to the associated equipment, its voltage
and time characteristic.

There are wide applications where general overvoltage functions are used. All voltage
related settings are made as a percentage of a settable base primary voltage, which is
normally set to the nominal voltage level (phase-to-phase) of the power system or the
high voltage equipment under consideration.

The time delay for the OV2PTOV (59) can sometimes be critical and related to the size
of the overvoltage - a power system or a high voltage component can withstand smaller
overvoltages for some time, but in case of large overvoltages the related equipment
should be disconnected more rapidly.

Some applications and related setting guidelines for the voltage level are given below:

The hysteresis is for overvoltage functions very important to prevent that a transient
voltage over set level is not “sealed-in” due to a high hysteresis. Typical values should
be ≤ 0.5%.

9.2.3.1 Equipment protection, such as for motors, generators, reactors and

transformers M13852-10 v3

High voltage will cause overexcitation of the core and deteriorate the winding
insulation. The setting has to be well above the highest occurring "normal" voltage and
well below the highest acceptable voltage for the equipment.

9.2.3.2 Equipment protection, capacitors M13852-13 v1

High voltage will deteriorate the dielectricum and the insulation. The setting has to be
well above the highest occurring "normal" voltage and well below the highest
acceptable voltage for the capacitor.

246 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 9
Voltage protection

9.2.3.3 Power supply quality M13852-16 v1

The setting has to be well above the highest occurring "normal" voltage and below the
highest acceptable voltage, due to regulation, good practice or other agreements.

9.2.3.4 High impedance grounded systems M13852-19 v6

In high impedance grounded systems, ground-faults cause a voltage increase in the

non-faulty phases. Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV, 59) is used to detect
such faults. The setting must be above the highest occurring "normal" voltage and
below the lowest occurring voltage during faults. A metallic single-phase ground-fault
causes the non-faulted phase voltages to increase a factor of √3.

9.2.3.5 The following settings can be done for the two step overvoltage
protection M13852-22 v10

ConnType: Sets whether the measurement shall be phase-to-ground fundamental value,

phase-to-phase fundamental value, phase-to-ground RMS value or phase-to-phase
RMS value.

Operation: Disabled/Enabled.

VBase (given in GlobalBaseSel): Base voltage phase to phase in primary kV. This
voltage is used as reference for voltage setting. OV2PTOV (59) measures selectively
phase-to-ground voltages, or phase-to-phase voltage chosen by the setting ConnType.
The function will operate if the voltage gets lower than the set percentage of VBase.
When ConnType is set to PhN DFT or PhN RMS then the IED automatically divides set
value for VBase by √3. When ConnType is set to PhPh DFT or PhPh RMS then set
value for VBase is used. Therefore, always set VBase as rated primary phase-to-phase
ground voltage of the protected object. If phase to neutral (PhN) measurement is
selected as setting, the operation of phase-to-ground over voltage is automatically
divided by sqrt3. This means operation for phase-to-ground voltage over:

V > (%) × VBase( kV ) / 3

EQUATION1713 V2 EN-US (Equation 91)

and operation for phase-to-phase voltage over:

Vpickup > (%) × VBase(kV)

EQUATION1992-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 92)

The below described setting parameters are identical for the two steps (n = 1 or 2).
Therefore the setting parameters are described only once.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 247

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Voltage protection

Characteristicn: This parameter gives the type of time delay to be used. The setting
can be Definite time, Inverse Curve A, Inverse Curve B, Inverse Curve C or I/Prog. inv.
curve. The choice is highly dependent of the protection application.

OpModen: This parameter describes how many of the three measured voltages that
should be above the set level to give operation. The setting can be 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3,
3 out of 3. In most applications it is sufficient that one phase voltage is high to give
operation. If the function shall be insensitive for single phase-to-ground faults 1 out of
3 can be chosen, because the voltage will normally rise in the non-faulted phases at
single phase-to-ground faults. In subtransmission and transmission networks the UV
function is mainly a system supervision function and 3 out of 3 is selected.

Pickupn: Set pickup overvoltage operation value for step n, given as % of VBase. The
setting is highly dependent of the protection application. Here it is essential to consider
the maximum voltage at non-faulted situations. Normally this voltage is less than 110%
of nominal voltage.

tn: time delay of step n, given in s. The setting is highly dependent of the protection
application. In many applications the protection function is used to prevent damages to
the protected object. The speed might be important for example in case of protection of
transformer that might be overexcited. The time delay must be co-ordinated with other
automated actions in the system.

tResetn: Reset time for step n if definite time delay is used, given in s. The default
value is 25 ms.

tnMin: Minimum operation time for inverse time characteristic for step n, given in s.
For very high voltages the overvoltage function, using inverse time characteristic, can
give very short operation time. This might lead to unselective trip. By setting t1Min
longer than the operation time for other protections such unselective tripping can be
avoided.

ResetTypeCrvn: This parameter for inverse time characteristic can be set:

Instantaneous, Frozen time, Linearly decreased. The default setting is Instantaneous.

tIResetn: Reset time for step n if inverse time delay is used, given in s. The default
value is 25 ms.

TDn: Time multiplier for inverse time characteristic. This parameter is used for co-
ordination between different inverse time delayed undervoltage protections.

ACrvn, BCrvn, CCrvn, DCrvn, PCrvn: Parameters to set to create programmable under
voltage inverse time characteristic. Description of this can be found in the technical
reference manual.

CrvSatn: When the denominator in the expression of the programmable curve is equal
to zero the time delay will be infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity.

248 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 9
Voltage protection

Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the
voltage interval Pickup> up to Pickup> · (1.0 + CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be:
Pickup> · (1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used, this parameter must
be calculated so that:

CrvSatn
B× -C > 0
100
EQUATION1448 V1 EN-US (Equation 93)

HystAbsn: Absolute hysteresis set in % of VBase. The setting of this parameter is

highly dependent of the application. If the function is used as control for automatic
switching of reactive compensation devices the hysteresis must be set smaller than the
voltage change after switching of the compensation device.

9.3 Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV

(59N) IP14546-1 v4

9.3.1 Identification
SEMOD54295-2 v6

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Two step residual overvoltage ROV2PTOV 59N
protection
2(U0>)

IEC15000108 V1 EN-US

9.3.2 Application M13809-3 v8

Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV (59N) is primarily used in high
impedance grounded distribution networks, mainly as a backup for the primary ground
fault protection of the feeders and the transformer. To increase the security for different
ground fault related functions, the residual overvoltage signal can be used as a release
signal. The residual voltage can be measured either at the transformer neutral or from a
voltage transformer open delta connection. The residual voltage can also be calculated
internally, based on the measurement of the three phase-to-ground voltages.

In high impedance grounded systems the residual voltage will increase in case of any
fault connected to ground. Depending on the type of fault and fault resistance the
residual voltage will reach different values. The highest residual voltage, equal to three
times the phase-to-ground voltage, is achieved for a single phase-to-ground fault. The
residual voltage increases approximately to the same level in the whole system and

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 249

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Voltage protection

does not provide any guidance in finding the faulted component. Therefore,
ROV2PTOV (59N) is often used as a backup protection or as a release signal for the
feeder ground fault protection.

9.3.3 Setting guidelines M13853-3 v8

All the voltage conditions in the system where ROV2PTOV (59N) performs its
functions should be considered. The same also applies to the associated equipment, its
voltage withstand capability and time characteristic.

All voltage-related settings are made as a percentage of a settable base voltage, which
shall be set to the primary nominal voltage (phase-phase) level of the power system or
the high-voltage equipment under consideration.

The time delay for ROV2PTOV (59N) is seldom critical, since residual voltage is
related to ground faults in a high-impedance grounded system, and enough time must
normally be given for the primary protection to clear the fault. In some more specific
situations, where the residual overvoltage protection is used to protect some specific
equipment, the time delay is shorter.

Some applications and related setting guidelines for the residual voltage level are given
below.

9.3.3.1 Equipment protection, such as for motors, generators, reactors and

transformersEquipment protection for transformers M13853-9 v8

High residual voltage indicates ground fault in the system, perhaps in the component to
which two step residual overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV, 59N) is connected. For
selectivity reasons to the primary protection for the faulted device, ROV2PTOV (59N)
must trip the component with some time delay. The setting must be above the highest
occurring "normal" residual voltage and below the highest acceptable residual voltage
for the equipment.

9.3.3.2 Equipment protection, capacitors M13853-12 v4

High voltage will deteriorate the dielectric and the insulation. Two step residual
overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV, 59N) has to be connected to a neutral or open
delta winding. The setting must be above the highest occurring "normal" residual
voltage and below the highest acceptable residual voltage for the capacitor.

250 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 9
Voltage protection

9.3.3.3 Power supply quality M13853-15 v3

The setting must be above the highest occurring "normal" residual voltage and below
the highest acceptable residual voltage, due to regulation, good practice or other
agreements.

9.3.3.4 High impedance grounded systems M13853-18 v10

In high impedance grounded systems, ground faults cause a neutral voltage in the
feeding transformer neutral. Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV
(59N) is used to trip the transformer, as a backup protection for the feeder ground fault
protection, and as a backup for the transformer primary ground fault protection. The
setting must be above the highest occurring "normal" residual voltage, and below the
lowest occurring residual voltage during the faults under consideration. A metallic
single-phase ground fault causes a transformer neutral to reach a voltage equal to the
nominal phase-to-ground voltage.

The voltage transformers measuring the phase-to-ground voltages measure zero

voltage in the faulty phase. The two healthy phases will measure full phase-to-phase
voltage, as the faulty phase will be connected to ground. The residual overvoltage will
be three times the phase-to-ground voltage. See figure 95.
V_A
F

V_
C
V_

BF

C V_
V_ B
3V0

CF
V_

ANSI07000190-1-en.vsd
ANSI07000190 V1 EN-US

Figure 95: Ground fault in Non-effectively grounded systems

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 251

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Voltage protection

9.3.3.5 Direct grounded system GUID-EA622F55-7978-4D1C-9AF7-2BAB5628070A v8

In direct grounded systems, an ground fault on one phase is indicated by voltage

collapse in that phase. The other healthy phase will still have normal phase-to-ground
voltage. The residual sum will have the same value as the remaining phase-to-ground
voltage, which is shown in Figure 96.

V_A

F
IL1
F
V_A
V_
B
3V0

C C V_
V_ V_ B

ANSI07000189-1-en.vsd
ANSI07000189 V1 EN-US

Figure 96: Ground fault in Direct grounded system

9.3.3.6 Settings for two step residual overvoltage protection M13853-21 v13

Operation: Disabled or Enabled

VBase (given in GlobalBaseSel) is used as voltage reference for the set pickup values.
The voltage can be fed to the IED in different ways:
1. The IED is fed from a normal voltage transformer group where the residual
voltage is calculated internally from the phase-to-ground voltages within the
protection. The setting of the analogue input is given as VBase=Vph-ph.
2. The IED is fed from a broken delta connection normal voltage transformer group.
In an open delta connection the protection is fed by the voltage 3V0 (single input).
Section Analog inputs in the Application manual explains how the analog input
needs to be set.
3. The IED is fed from a single voltage transformer connected to the neutral point of
a power transformer in the power system. In this connection the protection is fed
by the voltage VN=V0 (single input). Section Analog inputs in the Application
manual explains how the analog input needs to be set.

252 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 9
Voltage protection

ROV2PTOV (59N) will measure the residual voltage corresponding to the nominal
phase-to-ground voltage for a high-impedance grounded system. The measurement will
be based on the neutral voltage displacement.

The setting parameters described below are identical for the two steps (n = step 1 and
2). Therefore the setting parameters are described only once.

OperationStepn: This is to enable/disable operation of step n.

Characteristicn: Selected inverse time characteristic for step n. This parameter gives
the type of time delay to be used. The setting can be, Definite time or Inverse curve A
or Inverse curve B or Inverse curve C or Prog. inv. curve. The choice is highly
dependent of the protection application.

Pickupn: Set operate overvoltage operation value for step n, given as % of residual
voltage corresponding to VBase:

V > ( % ) × VBase ( kV ) 3
ANSIEQUATION2290 V1 EN-US (Equation 94)

The setting depends on the required sensitivity of the protection and the type of system
grounding. In non-effectively grounded systems, the residual voltage cannot be higher
than three times the rated phase-to-ground voltage, which should correspond to 100%.

In effectively grounded systems, this value depends on the ratio Z0/Z1. The required
setting to detect high resistive ground faults must be based on network calculations.

tn: time delay of step n, given in s. The setting is highly dependent on the protection
application. In many applications, the protection function has the task to prevent
damage to the protected object. The speed might be important, for example, in the case
of the protection of a transformer that might be overexcited. The time delay must be
co-ordinated with other automated actions in the system.

tResetn: Reset time for step n if definite time delay is used, given in s. The default
value is 25 ms.

tnMin: Minimum operation time for inverse time characteristic for step n, given in s.
For very high voltages the overvoltage function, using inverse time characteristic, can
give very short operation time. This might lead to unselective trip. By setting t1Min
longer than the operation time for other protections such unselective tripping can be
avoided.

ResetTypeCrvn: Set reset type curve for step n. This parameter can be set:
Instantaneous,Frozen time,Linearly decreased. The default setting is Instantaneous.

tIResetn: Reset time for step n if inverse time delay is used, given in s. The default
value is 25 ms.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 253

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Voltage protection

TDn: Time multiplier for inverse time characteristic. This parameter is used for co-
ordination between different inverse time delayed undervoltage protections.

ACrvn, BCrvn, CCrvn, DCrvn, PCrvn: Parameters for step n, to set to create
programmable undervoltage inverse time characteristic. Description of this can be
found in the technical reference manual.

CrvSatn: Set tuning parameter for step n. When the denominator in the expression of
the programmable curve is equal to zero, the time delay will be infinite. There will be
an undesired discontinuity. Therefore, a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate
for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Pickup> up to Pickup> · (1.0 + CrvSatn/
100) the used voltage will be: Pickup> · (1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the programmable
curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:

CrvSatn
B× -C > 0
100
EQUATION1448 V1 EN-US (Equation 95)

HystAbsn: Absolute hysteresis for step n, set in % of VBase. The setting of this
parameter is highly dependent of the application. The hysteresis is used to avoid
oscillations of the PICKUP output signal. This signal resets when the measured voltage
drops below the setting level and leaves the hysteresis area. Make sure that the set
value for parameter HystABSn is somewhat smaller than the set pickup value.
Otherwise there is a risk that step n will not reset properly.

9.4 Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV (60) SEMOD153860-1 v2

9.4.1 Identification
SEMOD167723-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV - 60

9.4.2 Application SEMOD153893-5 v3

The Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV (60) functions can be used in some
different applications.

• Voltage unbalance protection for capacitor banks. The voltage on the bus is
supervised with the voltage in the capacitor bank, phase- by phase. Difference
indicates a fault, either short-circuited or open element in the capacitor bank. It is
mainly used on elements with external fuses but can also be used on elements with

254 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 9
Voltage protection

internal fuses instead of a current unbalance protection measuring the current

between the neutrals of two half’s of the capacitor bank. The function requires
voltage transformers in all phases of the capacitor bank. Figure 97 shows some
different alternative connections of this function.

V1

Vd>L1
Single grounded wye
V2

Ph C Ph B

Vd>A Double wye

V1 V2

Ph C Ph B Ph C Ph B
en06000390_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000390 V1 EN-US

Figure 97: Connection of voltage differential protection VDCPTOV (60) function to

detect unbalance in capacitor banks (one phase only is shown)

VDCPTOV (60) function has a block input (BLOCK) where a fuse failure supervision
(or MCB tripped) can be connected to prevent problems if one fuse in the capacitor
bank voltage transformer set has opened and not the other (capacitor voltage is
connected to input V2). It will also ensure that a fuse failure alarm is given instead of a
Undervoltage or Differential voltage alarm and/or tripping.

Fuse failure supervision (SDDRFUF) function for voltage transformers. In many

application the voltages of two fuse groups of the same voltage transformer or fuse
groups of two separate voltage transformers measuring the same voltage can be
supervised with this function. It will be an alternative for example, generator units
where often two voltage transformers are supplied for measurement and excitation
equipment.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 255

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Voltage protection

The application to supervise the voltage on two voltage transformers in the generator
circuit is shown in figure 98.

To Protection
V1
Vd>
v2
To Excitation

Gen en06000389_ansi.vsd

ANSI06000389 V1 EN-US

Figure 98: Supervision of fuses on generator circuit voltage transformers

9.4.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD153915-5 v3

The parameters for the voltage differential function are set via the local HMI or
PCM600.

The following settings are done for the voltage differential function.

Operation: Off/On

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
IBase, VBase and SBase as applicable.

BlkDiffAtVLow: The setting is to block the function when the voltages in the phases are
low.

RFLx: Is the setting of the voltage ratio compensation factor where possible differences
between the voltages is compensated for. The differences can be due to different
voltage transformer ratios, different voltage levels e.g. the voltage measurement inside
the capacitor bank can have a different voltage level but the difference can also e.g. be
used by voltage drop in the secondary circuits. The setting is normally done at site by
evaluating the differential voltage achieved as a service value for each phase. The

256 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 9
Voltage protection

factor is defined as V2 · RFLx and shall be equal to the V1 voltage. Each phase has its
own ratio factor.

VDTrip: The voltage differential level required for tripping is set with this parameter.
For application on capacitor banks the setting will depend of the capacitor bank voltage
and the number of elements per phase in series and parallel. Capacitor banks must be
tripped before excessive voltage occurs on the healthy capacitor elements. The setting
values required are normally given by the capacitor bank supplier. For other
applications it has to be decided case by case. For fuse supervision normally only the
alarm level is used.

tTrip: The time delay for tripping is set by this parameter. Normally, the delay does not
need to be so short in capacitor bank applications as there is no fault requiring urgent
tripping.

tReset: The time delay for reset of tripping level element is set by this parameter.
Normally, it can be set to a short delay as faults are permanent when they occur.

For the advanced users following parameters are also available for setting. Default
values are here expected to be acceptable.

V1Low: The setting of the undervoltage level for the first voltage input is decided by
this parameter. The proposed default setting is 70%.

V2Low: The setting of the undervoltage level for the second voltage input is decided by
this parameter. The proposed default setting is 70%.

tBlock: The time delay for blocking of the function at detected undervoltages is set by
this parameter.

VDAlarm: The voltage differential level required for alarm is set with this parameter.
For application on capacitor banks the setting will depend of the capacitor bank voltage
and the number of elements per phase in series and parallel. Normally values required
are given by capacitor bank supplier.

For fuse supervision normally only this alarm level is used and a suitable voltage level
is 3-5% if the ratio correction factor has been properly evaluated during
commissioning.

For other applications it has to be decided case by case.

tAlarm: The time delay for alarm is set by this parameter. Normally, few seconds delay
can be used on capacitor banks alarm. For fuse failure supervision (SDDRFUF) the
alarm delay can be set to zero.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 257

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Voltage protection

9.5 Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV (27) SEMOD171868-1 v2

9.5.1 Identification
SEMOD171954-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV - 27

9.5.2 Application SEMOD171876-4 v3

The trip of the circuit breaker at a prolonged loss of voltage at all the three phases is
normally used in automatic restoration systems to facilitate the system restoration after
a major blackout. Loss of voltage check (LOVPTUV, 27) generates a TRIP signal only
if the voltage in all the three phases is low for more than the set time. If the trip to the
circuit breaker is not required, LOVPTUV (27) is used for signallization only through
an output contact or through the event recording function.

9.5.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD171929-4 v5

Loss of voltage check (LOVPTUV, 27) is in principle independent of the protection

functions. It requires to be set to open the circuit breaker in order to allow a simple
system restoration following a main voltage loss of a big part of the network and only
when the voltage is lost with breakers still closed.

All settings are in primary values or per unit. Set operate level per phase to typically
70% of the global parameter VBase level. Set the time delay tTrip=5-20 seconds.

9.5.3.1 Advanced users settings SEMOD171929-8 v4

For advanced users the following parameters need also to be set. Set the length of the
trip pulse to typical tPulse=0.15 sec. Set the blocking time tBlock to block Loss of
voltage check (LOVPTUV, 27), if some but not all voltage are low, to typical 5.0
seconds and set the time delay for enabling the function after restoration tRestore to 3 -
40 seconds.

258 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 10
Frequency protection

Section 10 Frequency protection

10.1 Underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) IP15746-1 v3

10.1.1 Identification
M14865-1 v5

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF 81

f<

SYMBOL-P V1 EN-US

10.1.2 Application M13350-3 v4

Underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) is applicable in all situations, where reliable

detection of low fundamental power system frequency is needed. The power system
frequency, and the rate of change of frequency, is a measure of the unbalance between
the actual generation and the load demand. Low fundamental frequency in a power
system indicates that the available generation is too low to fully supply the power
demanded by the load connected to the power grid. SAPTUF (81) detects such
situations and provides an output signal, suitable for load shedding, generator boosting,
HVDC-set-point change, gas turbine start up and so on. Sometimes shunt reactors are
automatically switched in due to low frequency, in order to reduce the power system
voltage and hence also reduce the voltage dependent part of the load.

SAPTUF (81) is very sensitive and accurate and is used to alert operators that
frequency has slightly deviated from the set-point, and that manual actions might be
enough. The underfrequency signal is also used for overexcitation detection. This is
especially important for generator step-up transformers, which might be connected to
the generator but disconnected from the grid, during a roll-out sequence. If the
generator is still energized, the system will experience overexcitation, due to the low
frequency.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 259

Application manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Frequency protection

10.1.3 Setting guidelines M13355-3 v8

All the frequency and voltage magnitude conditions in the system where SAPTUF (81)
performs its functions should be considered. The same also applies to the associated
equipment, its frequency and time characteristic.

There are two specific application areas for SAPTUF (81):

1. to protect equipment against damage due to low frequency, such as generators,

transformers, and motors. Overexcitation is also related to low frequency
2. to protect a power system, or a part of a power system, against breakdown, by
shedding load, in generation deficit situations.

The under frequency pickup value is set in Hz. All voltage magnitude related settings
are made as a percentage of a global base voltage parameter. The UBase value should
be set as a primary phase-to-phase value.

Some applications and related setting guidelines for the frequency level are given
below:

Equipment protection, such as for motors and generators

The setting has to be well below the lowest occurring "normal" frequency and well
above the lowest acceptable frequency for the equipment.

Power system protection, by load shedding

The setting has to be below the lowest occurring "normal" frequency and well above
the lowest acceptable frequency for power stations, or sensitive loads. The setting
level, the number of levels and the distance between two levels (in time and/or in
frequency) depends very much on the characteristics of the power system under
consideration. The size of the "largest loss of production" compared to "the size of the
power system" is a critical parameter. In large systems, the load shedding can be set at
a fairly high frequency level, and the time delay is normally not critical. In smaller
systems the frequency pickup level has to be set at a lower value, and the time delay
must be rather short.

The voltage related time delay is used for load shedding. The settings of SAPTUF (81)
could be the same all over the power system. The load shedding is then performed
firstly in areas with low voltage magnitude, which normally are the most problematic
areas, where the load shedding also is most efficient.

10.2 Overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81) IP15747-1 v3

260 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 10
Frequency protection

10.2.1 Identification
M14866-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF 81

f>

SYMBOL-O V1 EN-US

10.2.2 Application M14952-3 v4

Overfrequency protection function SAPTOF (81) is applicable in all situations, where

reliable detection of high fundamental power system frequency is needed. The power
system frequency, and rate of change of frequency, is a measure of the unbalance
between the actual generation and the load demand. High fundamental frequency in a
power system indicates that the available generation is too large compared to the power
demanded by the load connected to the power grid. SAPTOF (81) detects such
situations and provides an output signal, suitable for generator shedding, HVDC-set-
point change and so on. SAPTOF (81) is very sensitive and accurate and can also be
used to alert operators that frequency has slightly deviated from the set-point, and that
manual actions might be enough.

10.2.3 Setting guidelines M14959-3 v7

All the frequency and voltage magnitude conditions in the system where SAPTOF (81)
performs its functions must be considered. The same also applies to the associated
equipment, its frequency and time characteristic.

There are two application areas for SAPTOF (81):

1. to protect equipment against damage due to high frequency, such as generators,

and motors
2. to protect a power system, or a part of a power system, against breakdown, by
shedding generation, in over production situations.

The overfrequency pickup value is set in Hz. All voltage magnitude related settings are
made as a percentage of a settable global base voltage parameter VBase. The UBase
value should be set as a primary phase-to-phase value.

Some applications and related setting guidelines for the frequency level are given
below:

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 261

Application manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Frequency protection

Equipment protection, such as for motors and generators

The setting has to be well above the highest occurring "normal" frequency and well
below the highest acceptable frequency for the equipment.

Power system protection, by generator shedding

The setting must be above the highest occurring "normal" frequency and below the
highest acceptable frequency for power stations, or sensitive loads. The setting level,
the number of levels and the distance between two levels (in time and/or in frequency)
depend very much on the characteristics of the power system under consideration. The
size of the "largest loss of load" compared to "the size of the power system" is a critical
parameter. In large systems, the generator shedding can be set at a fairly low frequency
level, and the time delay is normally not critical. In smaller systems the frequency
PICKUP level has to be set at a higher value, and the time delay must be rather short.

10.3 Rate-of-change of frequency protection SAPFRC (81) IP15748-1 v4

10.3.1 Identification
M14868-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Rate-of-change of frequency protection SAPFRC 81

df/dt >
<

SYMBOL-N V1 EN-US

10.3.2 Application M14966-3 v5

Rate-of-change of frequency protection (SAPFRC, 81) is applicable in all situations,

where reliable detection of change of the fundamental power system voltage frequency
is needed. SAPFRC (81) can be used both for increasing frequency and for decreasing
frequency. SAPFRC (81) provides an output signal, suitable for load shedding or
generator shedding, generator boosting, HVDC-set-point change, gas turbine start up
and so on. Very often SAPFRC (81) is used in combination with a low frequency
signal, especially in smaller power systems, where loss of a fairly large generator will
require quick remedial actions to secure the power system integrity. In such situations
load shedding actions are required at a rather high frequency level, but in combination
with a large negative rate-of-change of frequency the underfrequency protection can be
used at a rather high setting.

262 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 10
Frequency protection

10.3.3 Setting guidelines M14971-3 v7

The parameters for Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC (81) are set via the
local HMI or or through the Protection and Control Manager (PCM600).

All the frequency and voltage magnitude conditions in the system where SAPFRC (81)
performs its functions should be considered. The same also applies to the associated
equipment, its frequency and time characteristic.

There are two application areas for SAPFRC (81):

1. to protect equipment against damage due to high or too low frequency, such as
generators, transformers, and motors
2. to protect a power system, or a part of a power system, against breakdown by
shedding load or generation, in situations where load and generation are not in
balance.

SAPFRC (81) is normally used together with an overfrequency or underfrequency

function, in small power systems, where a single event can cause a large imbalance
between load and generation. In such situations load or generation shedding has to take
place very quickly, and there might not be enough time to wait until the frequency
signal has reached an abnormal value. Actions are therefore taken at a frequency level
closer to the primary nominal level, if the rate-of-change frequency is large (with
respect to sign).

The pickup value for SAPFRC (81) is set in Hz/s. All voltage magnitude related
settings are made as a percentage of a settable base voltage, which normally is set to
the primary nominal voltage level (phase-phase) of the power system or the high
voltage equipment under consideration.

SAPFRC (81) is not instantaneous, since the function needs some time to supply a
stable value. It is recommended to have a time delay long enough to take care of signal
noise. However, the time, rate-of-change frequency and frequency steps between
different actions might be critical, and sometimes a rather short operation time is
required, for example, down to 70 ms.

Smaller industrial systems might experience rate-of-change frequency as large as 5

Hz/s, due to a single event. Even large power systems may form small islands with a
large imbalance between load and generation, when severe faults (or combinations of
faults) are cleared - up to 3 Hz/s has been experienced when a small island was isolated
from a large system. For more "normal" severe disturbances in large power systems,
rate-of-change of frequency is much less, most often just a fraction of 1.0 Hz/s.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 263

Application manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Frequency protection

10.4 Frequency time accumulation protection function

FTAQFVR (81A) GUID-124A1F91-44C0-4DB6-8603-CC8CA19AE2A6 v3

10.4.1 Identification GUID-87605DA0-EAA6-4A6C-BF03-7FDB187E1B29 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/

identification identification IEEEidentification
Frequency time accumulation FTAQFVR f<> 81A
protection

10.4.2 Application GUID-82CA8336-82BE-42AB-968A-D4F08941C9D0 v3

Generator prime movers are affected by abnormal frequency disturbances. Significant

frequency deviations from rated frequency occur in case of major disturbances in the
system. A rise of frequency occurs in case of generation surplus, while a lack of
generation results in a drop of frequency.

The turbine blade is designed with its natural frequency adequately far from the rated
speed or multiples of the rated speed of the turbine. This design avoids the mechanical
resonant condition, which can lead to an increased mechanical stress on turbine blade.
If the ratio between the turbine resonant frequencies to the system operating frequency
is nearly equal to 1, mechanical stress on the blades is approximately 300 times the
nonresonant operating condition stress values. The stress magnification factor is shown
in the typical resonance curve in Figure 99.

264 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 10
Frequency protection

300

250

Stress Magnification Factor 200

150

100

50

- 1.0 +
Frequency or Resonant Frequency
Ratio
IEC12000611-2-en.vsd
IEC12000611 V2 EN-US

Figure 99: Typical stress magnification factor curve according ANSI/IEEE

C37.106-2003 Standard

Each turbine manufactured for different design of blades has various time restriction
limits for various frequency bands. The time limits depend on the natural frequencies
of the blades inside the turbine, corrosion and erosion of the blade edges and additional
loss of blade lifetime during the abnormal operating conditions.

The frequency limitations and their time restrictions for different types of turbines are
similar in many aspects with steam turbine limitations. Certain differences in design
and applications may result in different protective requirements. Therefore, for
different type of turbine systems, different recommendations on the time restriction
limits are specified by the manufacturer.

However, the IEEE/ANSI C37.106-2003 standard "Guide for Abnormal Frequency

Protection for Power Generating Plants" provides some examples where the time
accumulated within each frequency range is as shown in Figure 100.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 265

Application manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Frequency protection

Prohibited Operation Prohibited Operation

62 62
Restricted Time Operation

Frequency (Hz)

Frequency (Hz)
60 60 Continuous operation
Continuous operation

Restricted Time Operation

58 58

Prohibited Operation
Restricted Time Operation
56 56
0.01 0.1 1 10 100 1000 0.01 0.1 1 10 100 1000
Time (Minutes) Time (Minutes)

Prohibited Operation
62 Prohibited Operation 62
Restricted Time Operation
Frequency (Hz)

Frequency (Hz)
60 Continuous operation 60 Continuous operation

58 58
Restricted Time Operation
Restricted Time Operation Prohibited Operation

Prohibited Operation
56 56
0.01 0.1 1 10 100 1000 0.01 0.1 1 10 100 1000
Time (Minutes) Time (Minutes)
IEC13000258-1-en.ai
IEC13000258 V1 EN-US

Figure 100: Examples of time frequency characteristics with various frequency

band limits

Another application for the FTAQFVR (81A) protection function is to supervise

variations from rated voltage-frequency. Generators are designed to accommodate the
IEC 60034-3:1996 requirement of continuous operation within the confines of their
capability curves over the ranges of +/-5% in voltage and +/-2% in frequency.
Operation of the machine at rated power outside these voltage-frequency limits lead to
increased temperatures and reduction of insulation life.

10.4.3 Setting guidelines GUID-62C6D764-CAF2-4C2F-B91A-EBC611987D72 v3

Among the generator protection functions, the frequency time accumulation protection
FTAQFVR (81A) may be used to protect the generator as well as the turbine.
Abnormal frequencies during normal operation cause material fatigue on turbine
blades, trip points and time delays should be established based on the turbine
manufacture’s requirements and recommendations.

Continuous operation of the machine at rated power outside voltage-frequency limits

lead to increased rotor temperatures and reduction of insulation life. Setting of extent,
duration and frequency of occurrence should be set according to manufacture’s
requirements and recommendations.

266 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 10
Frequency protection

Setting procedure on the IED

The parameters for the frequency time accumulation protection FTAQFVR (81A) are
set using the local HMI or through the dedicated software tool in Protection and
Control Manager (PCM600).

Common base IED values for primary current IBase and primary voltage VBase are set
in the global base values for settings function GBASVAL. The GlobalBaseSel is used
to select GBASVAL for the reference of base values.

FTAQFVR (81A) used to protect a turbine:

Frequency during start-up and shutdown is normally not calculated, consequently the
protection function is blocked by CB position, parameter CBCheck enabled. If the
generator supply any load when CB is in open position e.g. excitation equipment and
auxiliary services this may be considered as normal condition and CBCheck is ignored
when the load current is higher then the set value of PickupCurrentLevel. Set the
current level just above minimum load.

EnaVoltCheck set to Disable.

tCont: to be coordinated to the grid requirements.

tAccLimit, FreqHighLimit and FreqLowLimit setting is derived from the turbine

manufacturer's operating requirements, note that FreqLowLimit setting must always be
lower than the set value of FreqHighLimit.

FTAQFVR (81A) used to protect a generator:

Frequency during start-up and shutdown is normally not calculated, consequently the
protection function is blocked by CB position, parameter CBCheck enabled.

PickupCurrentLevel set to Disable.

EnaVoltCheck set to Enable, voltage and frequency limits set according to the
generators manufacturer's operating requirements. Voltage and frequency settings
should also be coordinated with the pickup values for over and underexcitation
protection.

tCont: to be coordinated to the grid requirements.

tAccLimit, FreqHighLimit and FreqLowLimit setting is derived from the generator

manufacturer's operating requirements.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 267

Application manual
268
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 11
Multipurpose protection

Section 11 Multipurpose protection

11.1 General current and voltage protection CVGAPC IP14552-1 v2

11.1.1 Identification
M14886-2 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
General current and voltage protection CVGAPC 2(I>/U<) -

11.1.2 Application IP15008-1 v1

M13084-3 v4

A breakdown of the insulation between phase conductors or a phase conductor and

ground results in a short circuit or a ground fault respectively. Such faults can result in
large fault currents and may cause severe damage to the power system primary
equipment. Depending on the magnitude and type of the fault different overcurrent
protections, based on measurement of phase, ground or sequence current components
can be used to clear these faults. Additionally it is sometimes required that these
overcurrent protections shall be directional and/or voltage controlled/restrained.

The over/under voltage protection is applied on power system elements, such as

generators, transformers, motors and power lines in order to detect abnormal voltage
conditions. Depending on the type of voltage deviation and type of power system
abnormal condition different over/under voltage protections based on measurement of
phase-to-ground, phase-to-phase, residual- or sequence- voltage components can be
used to detect and operate for such incident.

The IED can be provided with multiple General current and voltage protection
(CVGAPC) protection modules. The function is always connected to three-phase
current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool, but it will always
measure only one current and one voltage quantity selected by the end user in the
setting tool.

Each CVGAPC function module has got four independent protection elements built
into it.

1. Two overcurrent steps with the following built-in features:

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 269

Application manual
Section 11 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Multipurpose protection

• Definite time delay or Inverse Time Overcurrent TOC/IDMT delay for both
steps
• Second harmonic supervision is available in order to only allow operation of
the overcurrent stage(s) if the content of the second harmonic in the
measured current is lower than pre-set level
• Directional supervision is available in order to only allow operation of the
overcurrent stage(s) if the fault location is in the pre-set direction (Forward
or Reverse). Its behavior during low-level polarizing voltage is settable
(Non-Directional,Block,Memory)
• Voltage restrained/controlled feature is available in order to modify the pick-
up level of the overcurrent stage(s) in proportion to the magnitude of the
measured voltage
• Current restrained feature is available in order to only allow operation of the
overcurrent stage(s) if the measured current quantity is bigger than the set
percentage of the current restrain quantity.
2. Two undercurrent steps with the following built-in features:
• Definite time delay for both steps
3. Two overvoltage steps with the following built-in features
• Definite time delay or Inverse Time Overcurrent TOC/IDMT delay for both
steps
4. Two undervoltage steps with the following built-in features
• Definite time delay or Inverse Time Overcurrent TOC/IDMT delay for both
steps

All these four protection elements within one general protection function works
independently from each other and they can be individually enabled or disabled.
However it shall be once more noted that all these four protection elements measure
one selected current quantity and one selected voltage quantity (see table 28 and
table 29). It is possible to simultaneously use all four-protection elements and their
individual stages. Sometimes in order to obtain desired application functionality it is
necessary to provide interaction between two or more protection elements/stages
within one CVGAPC function by appropriate IED configuration (for example, dead
machine protection for generators).

11.1.2.1 Current and voltage selection for CVGAPC function SEMOD53443-6 v3

CVGAPC function is always connected to three-phase current and three-phase voltage

input in the configuration tool, but it will always measure only the single current and
the single voltage quantity selected by the end user in the setting tool (selected current
quantity and selected voltage quantity).

270 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 11
Multipurpose protection

The user can select, by a setting parameter CurrentInput, to measure one of the
following current quantities shown in table 28.
Table 28: Available selection for current quantity within CVGAPC function
Set value for parameter Comment
"CurrentInput”
1 PhaseA CVGAPC function will measure the phase A current phasor
2 PhaseB CVGAPC function will measure the phase B current phasor
3 PhaseC CVGAPC function will measure the phase C current phasor
4 PosSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive
sequence current phasor
5 NegSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative
sequence current phasor
6 3 · ZeroSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence
current phasor multiplied by factor 3
7 MaxPh CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with
maximum magnitude
8 MinPh CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with
minimum magnitude
9 UnbalancePh CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance current,
which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference
between the current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude
and current phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase
angle will be set to 0° all the time
10 PhaseA-PhaseB CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally
calculated as the vector difference between the phase A current
phasor and phase B current phasor (VA-VB)
11 PhaseB-PhaseC CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally
calculated as the vector difference between the phase B current
phasor and phase C current phasor (VB-VC)
12 PhaseC-PhaseA CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally
calculated as the vector difference between the phase C current
phasor and phase A current phasor ( VC-VA)
13 MaxPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the
maximum magnitude
14 MinPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the
minimum magnitude
15 UnbalancePh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance current,
which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference
between the ph-ph current phasor with maximum magnitude and
ph-ph current phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be
set to 0° all the time

The user can select, by a setting parameter VoltageInput, to measure one of the
following voltage quantities shown in table 29.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 271

Application manual
Section 11 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Multipurpose protection

Table 29: Available selection for voltage quantity within CVGAPC function
Set value for parameter Comment
"VoltageInput"
1 PhaseA CVGAPC function will measure the phase A voltage phasor
2 PhaseB CVGAPC function will measure the phase B voltage phasor
3 PhaseC CVGAPC function will measure the phase C voltage phasor
4 PosSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive
sequence voltage phasor
5 -NegSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative
sequence voltage phasor. This voltage phasor will be intentionally
rotated for 180° in order to enable easier settings for the directional
feature when used.
6 -3*ZeroSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence
voltage phasor multiplied by factor 3. This voltage phasor will be
intentionally rotated for 180° in order to enable easier settings for
the directional feature when used.
7 MaxPh CVGAPC function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with
maximum magnitude
8 MinPh CVGAPC function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with
minimum magnitude
9 UnbalancePh CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage,
which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference
between the voltage phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude
and voltage phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase
angle will be set to 0° all the time
10 PhaseA-PhaseB CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally
calculated as the vector difference between the phase A voltage
phasor and phase B voltage phasor (VA-VB)
11 PhaseB-PhaseC CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally
calculated as the vector difference between the phase B voltage
phasor and phase C voltage phasor (VB-VC)
12 PhaseC-PhaseC CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally
calculated as the vector difference between the phase C voltage
phasor and phase A voltage phasor (VC-VA)
13 MaxPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the
maximum magnitude
14 MinPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the
minimum magnitude
15 UnbalancePh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage,
which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference
between the ph-ph voltage phasor with maximum magnitude and
ph-ph voltage phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will
be set to 0° all the time

It is important to notice that the voltage selection from table 29 is always applicable
regardless the actual external VT connections. The three-phase VT inputs can be
connected to IED as either three phase-to-groundvoltages VA, VB and VC or three

272 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 11
Multipurpose protection

phase-to-phase voltages VAB, VBC and VCA. This information about actual VT
connection is entered as a setting parameter for the pre-processing block, which will
then take automatically care about it.

11.1.2.2 Base quantities for CVGAPC function SEMOD53443-112 v3

The parameter settings for the base quantities, which represent the base (100%) for
pickup levels of all measuring stages shall be entered as setting parameters for every
CVGAPC function.

Base current shall be entered as:

1. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes, when the measured
Current Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 28.
2. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes multiplied by √3
(1.732 x Iphase), when the measured Current Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as
shown in table 28.

Base voltage shall be entered as:

1. rated phase-to-ground voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the
measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 29.
2. rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the
measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as shown in table 29.

11.1.2.3 Application possibilities SEMOD53443-136 v2

Due to its flexibility the general current and voltage protection (CVGAPC) function
can be used, with appropriate settings and configuration in many different applications.
Some of possible examples are given below:

1. Transformer and line applications:

• Underimpedance protection (circular, non-directional characteristic) (21)
• Underimpedance protection (circular mho characteristic) (21)
• Voltage Controlled/Restrained Overcurrent protection (51C, 51V)
• Phase or Negative/Positive/Zero Sequence (Non-Directional or Directional)
Overcurrent protection (50, 51, 46, 67, 67N, 67Q)
• Phase or phase-to-phase or Negative/Positive/Zero Sequence over/under
voltage protection (27, 59, 47)
• Special thermal overload protection (49)
• Open Phase protection
• Unbalance protection
2. Generator protection

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 273

Application manual
Section 11 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Multipurpose protection

• 80-95% Stator earth fault protection (measured or calculated 3Vo) (59GN)

• Rotor earth fault protection (with external COMBIFLEX RXTTE4 injection
unit) (64F)
• Underimpedance protection (21)
• Voltage Controlled/Restrained Overcurrent protection (51C, 51V)
• Turn-to-Turn & Differential Backup protection (directional Negative
Sequence. Overcurrent protection connected to generator HV terminal CTs
looking into generator) (67Q)
• Stator Overload protection (49S)
• Rotor Overload protection (49R)
• Loss of Excitation protection (directional pos. seq. OC protection) (40)
• Reverse power/Low forward power protection (directional pos. seq. OC
protection, 2% sensitivity) (32)
• Dead-Machine/Inadvertent-Energizing protection (51/27)
• Breaker head flashover protection
• Improper synchronizing detection
• Sensitive negative sequence generator over current protection and alarm (46)
• Phase or phase-to-phase or Negative/Positive/Zero Sequence over/under
voltage protection (27x, 59x, 47)
• Generator out-of-step detection (based on directional pos. seq. OC) (78)
• Inadvertent generator energizing

11.1.2.4 Inadvertent generator energization SEMOD151947-4 v2

When the generator is taken out of service, and stand-still, there is a risk that the
generator circuit breaker is closed by mistake.

Three-phase energizing of a generator, which is at standstill or on turning gear, causes

it to behave and accelerate similarly to an induction motor. The machine, at this point,
essentially represents the subtransient reactance to the system and it can be expected to
draw from one to four per unit current, depending on the equivalent system impedance.
Machine terminal voltage can range from 20% to 70% of rated voltage, again,
depending on the system equivalent impedance (including the block transformer).
Higher quantities of machine current and voltage (3 to 4 per unit current and 50% to
70% rated voltage) can be expected if the generator is connected to a strong system.
Lower current and voltage values (1 to 2 per unit current and 20% to 40% rated
voltage) are representative of weaker systems.

Since a generator behaves similarly to an induction motor, high currents will develop
in the rotor during the period it is accelerating. Although the rotor may be thermally
damaged from excessive high currents, the time to damage will be on the order of a
few seconds. Of more critical concern, however, is the bearing, which can be damaged
in a fraction of a second due to low oil pressure. Therefore, it is essential that high
speed tripping is provided. This tripping should be almost instantaneous (< 100 ms).

274 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 11
Multipurpose protection

There is a risk that the current into the generator at inadvertent energization will be
limited so that the “normal” overcurrent or underimpedance protection will not detect
the dangerous situation. The delay of these protection functions might be too long. The
reverse power protection might detect the situation but the operation time of this
protection is normally too long.

For big and important machines, fast protection against inadvertent energizing should,
therefore, be included in the protective scheme.

The protection against inadvertent energization can be made by a combination of

undervoltage, overvoltage and overcurrent protection functions. The undervoltage
function will, with a delay for example 10 s, detect the situation when the generator is
not connected to the grid (standstill) and activate the overcurrent function. The
overvoltage function will detect the situation when the generator is taken into operation
and will disable the overcurrent function. The overcurrent function will have a pick-up
value about 50% of the rated current of the generator. The trip delay will be about 50
ms.

11.1.3 Setting guidelines IP15009-1 v2

GUID-F7AA2194-4D1C-4475-8853-C7D064912614 v4

When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected, the trip time

of the stage will be the sum of the inverse time delay and the set
definite time delay. Thus, if only the inverse time delay is required, it is
important to set the definite time delay for that stage to zero.
M13088-237 v3

The parameters for the general current and voltage protection function (CVGAPC) are
set via the local HMI or Protection and Control Manager (PCM600).

The overcurrent steps has a IMinx (x=1 or 2 depending on step) setting

to set the minimumpickup current. Set IMinx below PickupCurr_OCx
for every step to achieve ANSI reset characteristic according to
standard. If IMinx is set above PickupCurr_OCx for any step the ANSI
reset works as if current is zero when current drops below IMinx.

11.1.3.1 Directional negative sequence overcurrent protection M13088-3 v5

Directional negative sequence overcurrent protection is typically used as sensitive

ground-fault protection of power lines where incorrect zero sequence polarization may
result from mutual induction between two or more parallel lines. Additionally, it can be
used in applications on underground cables where zero-sequence impedance depends
on the fault current return paths, but the cable negative-sequence impedance is

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 275

Application manual
Section 11 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Multipurpose protection

practically constant. It shall be noted that directional negative sequence OC element

offers protection against all unbalance faults (phase-to-phase faults as well). Care shall
be taken that the minimum pickup of such protection function shall be set above
natural system unbalance level.

An example will be given, how sensitive-ground-fault protection for power lines can
be achieved by using negative-sequence directional overcurrent protection elements
within a CVGAPC function.

This functionality can be achieved by using one CVGAPC function. The following
shall be done to ensure proper operation of the function:

1. Connect three-phase power line currents and three-phase power line voltages to
one CVGAPC instance (for example, GF04)
2. Set CurrentInput to NegSeq (please note that CVGAPC function measures I2
current and NOT 3I2 current; this is essential for proper OC pickup level setting)
3. Set VoltageInput to -NegSeq (please note that the negative sequence voltage phasor
is intentionally inverted in order to simplify directionality
4. Set base current IBase value equal to the rated primary current of power line CTs
5. Set base voltage UBase value equal to the rated power line phase-to-phase voltage
in kV
6. Set RCADir to value +65 degrees (NegSeq current typically lags the inverted
NegSeq voltage for this angle during the fault)
7. Set ROADir to value 90 degree
8. Set LowVolt_VM to value 2% (NegSeq voltage level above which the directional
element will be enabled)
9. Enable one overcurrent stage (for example, OC1)
10. By parameter CurveType_OC1 select appropriate TOC/IDMT or definite time
delayed curve in accordance with your network protection philosophy
11. Set PickupCurr_OC1 to value between 3-10% (typical values)
12. Set tDef_OC1 or parameter “TD” when TOC/IDMT curves are used to insure
proper time coordination with other ground-fault protections installed in the
vicinity of this power line
13. Set DirMode_OC1 to Forward
14. Set DirPrinc_OC1 to IcosPhi&U
15. Set ActLowVolt1_VM to Block
• In order to insure proper restraining of this element for CT saturations during
three-phase faults it is possible to use current restraint feature and enable this
element to operate only when NegSeq current is bigger than a certain
percentage (10% is typical value) of measured PosSeq current in the power
line. To do this the following settings within the same function shall be done:
16. Set EnRestrainCurr to On
17. Set RestrCurrInput to PosSeq
18. Set RestrCurrCoeff to value 0.1

276 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 11
Multipurpose protection

If required, this CVGAPC function can be used in directional comparison protection

scheme for the power line protection if communication channels to the remote end of
this power line are available. In that case typically two NegSeq overcurrent steps are
required. One for forward and one for reverse direction. As explained before the OC1
stage can be used to detect faults in forward direction. The built-in OC2 stage can be
used to detect faults in reverse direction.

However the following shall be noted for such application:

• the set values for RCADir and ROADir settings will be as well applicable for OC2
stage
• setting DirMode_OC2 shall be set to Reverse
• setting parameter PickupCurr_OC2 shall be made more sensitive than pickup
value of forward OC1 element (that is, typically 60% of OC1 set pickup level) in
order to insure proper operation of the directional comparison scheme during
current reversal situations
• pickup signals from OC1 and OC2 elements shall be used to send forward and
reverse signals to the remote end of the power line
• the available scheme communications function block within IED shall be used
between multipurpose protection function and the communication equipment in
order to insure proper conditioning of the above two pickup signals

Furthermore the other built-in UC, OV and UV protection elements can be used for
other protection and alarming purposes.

11.1.3.2 Negative sequence overcurrent protection M13088-5 v4

Example will be given how to use one CVGAPC function to provide negative
sequence inverse time overcurrent protection for a generator with capability constant of
20s, and maximum continuous negative sequence rating of 7% of the generator rated
current.

The capability curve for a generator negative sequence overcurrent protection, often
used world-wide, is defined by the ANSI standard in accordance with the following
formula:

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 277

Application manual
Section 11 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Multipurpose protection

TD
t op = 2
æ I NS ö
ç I ÷
è r ø
EQUATION1740-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 96)

where:
top is the operating time in seconds of the negative sequence overcurrent IED

TD is the generator capability constant in seconds

INS is the measured negative sequence current

Ir is the generator rated current

By defining parameter x equal to maximum continuous negative sequence rating of the

generator in accordance with the following formula

x = 7% = 0.07 pu
EQUATION1756-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 97)

Equation 96 can be re-written in the following way without changing the value for the
operate time of the negative sequence inverse overcurrent IED:

1
TD ×
t op = x2
2
æ I NS ö
ç x×I ÷
è r ø

EQUATION1741-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 98)

In order to achieve such protection functionality with one CVGAPC functions the
following must be done:

1. Connect three-phase generator currents to one CVGAPC instance (for example,

GF01)
2. Set parameter CurrentInput to value NegSeq
3. Set base current value to the rated generator current in primary amperes
4. Enable one overcurrent step (for example, OC1)
5. Select parameter CurveType_OC1 to value Programmable

278 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 11
Multipurpose protection

æ A ö
t op = TD × ç + B÷
è M -C
P
ø
EQUATION1742-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 99)

where:
top is the operating time in seconds of the Inverse Time Overcurrent TOC/IDMT algorithm
TD is time multiplier (parameter setting)
M is ratio between measured current magnitude and set pickup current level
A, B, C and P are user settable coefficients which determine the curve used for Inverse Time Overcurrent
TOC/IDMT calculation

When the equation 96 is compared with the equation 98 for the inverse time
characteristic of the OC1 it is obvious that if the following rules are followed:

1. set TD equal to the generator negative sequence capability value

2. set A_OC1 equal to the value 1/x2
3. set B_OC1 = 0.0, C_OC1=0.0 and P_OC1=2.0
4. set PickupCurr_OC1 equal to the value x

then the OC1 step of the CVGAPC function can be used for generator negative
sequence inverse overcurrent protection.

For this particular example the following settings shall be entered to insure proper
function operation:

1. select negative sequence current as measuring quantity for this CVGAPC function
2. make sure that the base current value for the CVGAPC function is equal to the
generator rated current
3. set TD_OC1 = 20
4. set A_OC1= 1/0.072 = 204.0816
5. set B_OC1 = 0.0, C_OC1 = 0.0 and P_OC1 = 2.0
6. set PickupCurr_OC1 = 7%

Proper timing of the CVGAPC function made in this way can easily be verified by
secondary injection. All other settings can be left at the default values. If required
delayed time reset for OC1 step can be set in order to ensure proper function operation
in case of repetitive unbalance conditions.

Furthermore the other built-in protection elements can be used for other protection and
alarming purposes (for example, use OC2 for negative sequence overcurrent alarm and
OV1 for negative sequence overvoltage alarm).

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 279

Application manual
Section 11 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Multipurpose protection

11.1.3.3 Generator stator overload protection in accordance with IEC or ANSI

standards M13088-81 v3

Example will be given how to use one CVGAPC function to provide generator stator
overload protection in accordance with IEC or ANSI standard if minimum-operating
current shall be set to 116% of generator rating.

The generator stator overload protection is defined by IEC or ANSI standard for turbo
generators in accordance with the following formula:

TD
t op = 2
æ Im ö
ç ÷ -1
è Ir ø
EQUATION1743-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 100)

where:
top is the operating time of the generator stator overload IED

TD is the generator capability constant in accordance with the relevant standard (TD = 37.5 for the
IEC standard or TD = 41.4 for the ANSI standard)
Im is the magnitude of the measured current

Ir is the generator rated current

This formula is applicable only when measured current (for example, positive sequence
current) exceeds a pre-set value (typically in the range from 105 to 125% of the
generator rated current).

By defining parameter x equal to the per unit value for the desired pickup for the
overload IED in accordance with the following formula:

x = 116% = 1.16 pu
EQUATION1755-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 101)

formula 3.5can be re-written in the following way without changing the value for the
operate time of the generator stator overload IED:

1
TD ×
t op = x2
2
æ Im ö 1
ç ÷ - 2
è x × Ir ø x
EQUATION1744-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 102)

280 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 11
Multipurpose protection

In order to achieve such protection functionality with one CVGAPC functions the
following must be done:

1. Connect three-phase generator currents to one CVGAPC instance (for example,

GF01)
2. Set parameter CurrentInput to value PosSeq
3. Set base current value to the rated generator current in primary amperes
4. Enable one overcurrent step (for example OC1)
5. Select parameter CurveType_OC1 to value Programmable

æ A ö
t op = TD × ç + B÷
è M P
- C ø
EQUATION1745-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 103)

where:
top is the operating time in seconds of the Inverse Time Overcurrent TOC/IDMT algorithm

TD is time multiplier (parameter setting)

M is ratio between measured current magnitude and set pickup current level
A, B, C and P are user settable coefficients which determine the curve used for Inverse Time Overcurrent
TOC/IDMT calculation

When the equation 102 is compared with the equation 103 for the inverse time
characteristic of the OC1 step in it is obvious that if the following rules are followed:

1. set TD equal to the IEC or ANSI standard generator capability value

2. set parameter A_OC1 equal to the value 1/x2
3. set parameter C_OC1 equal to the value 1/x2
4. set parameters B_OC1 = 0.0 and P_OC1=2.0
5. set PickupCurr_OC1 equal to the value x

then the OC1 step of the CVGAPC function can be used for generator negative
sequence inverse overcurrent protection.

1. select positive sequence current as measuring quantity for this CVGAPC function
2. make sure that the base current value for CVGAPC function is equal to the
generator rated current
3. set TD = 37.5 for the IEC standard or TD = 41.4 for the ANSI standard
4. set A_OC1= 1/1.162 = 0.7432
5. set C_OC1= 1/1.162 = 0.7432
6. set B_OC1 = 0.0 and P_OC1 = 2.0
7. set PickupCurr_OC1 = 116%

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 281

Application manual
Section 11 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Multipurpose protection

Proper timing of CVGAPC function made in this way can easily be verified by
secondary injection. All other settings can be left at the default values. If required
delayed time reset for OC1 step can be set in order to insure proper function operation
in case of repetitive overload conditions.

Furthermore the other built-in protection elements can be used for other protection and
alarming purposes.

In the similar way rotor overload protection in accordance with ANSI standard can be
achieved.

11.1.3.4 Open phase protection for transformer, lines or generators and circuit
breaker head flashover protection for generators M13088-142 v3

Example will be given how to use one CVGAPC function to provide open phase
protection. This can be achieved by using one CVGAPC function by comparing the
unbalance current with a pre-set level. In order to make such a function more secure it
is possible to restrain it by requiring that at the same time the measured unbalance
current must be bigger than 97% of the maximum phase current. By doing this it will
be insured that function can only pickup if one of the phases is open circuited. Such an
arrangement is easy to obtain in CVGAPC function by enabling the current restraint
feature. The following shall be done in order to insure proper operation of the function:

1. Connect three-phase currents from the protected object to one CVGAPC instance
(for example, GF03)
2. Set CurrentInput to value UnbalancePh
3. Set EnRestrainCurr to On
4. Set RestrCurrInput to MaxPh
5. Set RestrCurrCoeff to value 0.97
6. Set base current value to the rated current of the protected object in primary
amperes
7. Enable one overcurrent step (for example, OC1)
8. Select parameter CurveType_OC1 to value IEC Def. Time
9. Set parameter PickupCurr_OC1 to value 5%
10. Set parameter tDef_OC1 to desired time delay (for example, 2.0s)

Proper operation of CVGAPC function made in this way can easily be verified by
secondary injection. All other settings can be left at the default values. However it shall
be noted that set values for restrain current and its coefficient will as well be applicable
for OC2 step as soon as it is enabled.

Furthermore the other built-in protection elements can be used for other protection and
alarming purposes. For example, in case of generator application by enabling OC2 step
with set pickup to 200% and time delay to 0.1s simple but effective protection against
circuit breaker head flashover protection is achieved.

282 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 11
Multipurpose protection

11.1.3.5 Voltage restrained overcurrent protection for generator and step-up

transformer M13088-158 v4

Example will be given how to use one CVGAPC function to provide voltage restrained
overcurrent protection for a generator. Let us assume that the time coordination study
gives the following required settings:

• Inverse Time Over Current TOC/IDMT curve: ANSI very inverse

• Pickup current of 185% of generator rated current at rated generator voltage
• Pickup current 25% of the original pickup current value for generator voltages
below 25% of rated voltage

This functionality can be achieved by using one CVGAPC function. The following
shall be done in order to ensure proper operation of the function:

1. Connect three-phase generator currents and voltages to one CVGAPC instance

(for example, GF05)
2. Set CurrentInput to value MaxPh
3. Set VoltageInput to value MinPh-Ph (it is assumed that minimum phase-to-phase
voltage shall be used for restraining. Alternatively, positive sequence voltage can
be used for restraining by selecting PosSeq for this setting parameter)
4. Set base current value to the rated generator current primary amperes
5. Set base voltage value to the rated generator phase-to-phase voltage in kV
6. Enable one overcurrent step (for example, OC1)
7. Select CurveType_OC1 to value ANSI Very inv
8. If required set minimum operating time for this curve by using parameter
tMin_OC1 (default value 0.05s)
9. Set PickupCurr_OC1 to value 185%
10. Set VCntrlMode_OC1 to On
11. Set VDepMode_OC1 to Slope
12. Set VDepFact_OC1 to value 0.25
13. Set VHighLimit_OC1 to value 100%
14. Set VLowLimit_OC1 to value 25%

Proper operation of the CVGAPC function made in this way can easily be verified by
secondary injection. All other settings can be left at the default values. Furthermore the
other built-in protection elements can be used for other protection and alarming
purposes.

11.1.3.6 Loss of excitation protection for a generator M13088-182 v3

Example will be given how by using positive sequence directional overcurrent

protection element within a CVGAPC function, loss of excitation protection for a

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 283

Application manual
Section 11 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Multipurpose protection

generator can be achieved. Let us assume that from rated generator data the following
values are calculated:

• Maximum generator capability to contentiously absorb reactive power at zero

active loading 38% of the generator MVA rating
• Generator pull-out angle 84 degrees

This functionality can be achieved by using one CVGAPC function. The following
shall be done in order to insure proper operation of the function:

1. Connect three-phase generator currents and three-phase generator voltages to one

CVGAPC instance (for example, GF02)
2. Set parameter CurrentInput to PosSeq
3. Set parameter VoltageInput to PosSeq
4. Set base current value to the rated generator current primary amperes
5. Set base voltage value to the rated generator phase-to-phase voltage in kV
6. Set parameter RCADir to value -84 degree (that is, current lead voltage for this
angle)
7. Set parameter ROADir to value 90 degree
8. Set parameter LowVolt_VM to value 5%
9. Enable one overcurrent step (for example, OC1)
10. Select parameter CurveType_OC1 to value IEC Def. Time
11. Set parameter PickupCurr_OC1 to value 38%
12. Set parameter tDef_OC1 to value 2.0s (typical setting)
13. Set parameter DirMode_OC1 to Forward
14. Set parameter DirPrinc_OC1 to IcosPhi&V
15. Set parameter ActLowVolt1_VM to Block

Proper operation of the CVGAPC function made in this way can easily be verified by
secondary injection. All other settings can be left at the default values. However it shall
be noted that set values for RCA & ROA angles will be applicable for OC2 step if
directional feature is enabled for this step as well. Figure 101 shows overall protection
characteristic

Furthermore the other build-in protection elements can be used for other protection and
alarming purposes.

284 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 11
Multipurpose protection

Q [pu]
A Operating region
0.8

ILowSet
0.6 B IPS
0.4

rca
0.2

0
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 P [pu] VPS
-rca
-0.2
C
-0.4 ILowSet
D

-0.6 Operating Region

-0.8
en05000535_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000535 V1 EN-US

Figure 101: Loss of excitation

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 285

Application manual
286
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 12
System protection and control

Section 12 System protection and control

12.1 Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC GUID-6B541154-D56B-452F-B143-4C2A1B2D3A1F v1

12.1.1 Identification GUID-8224B870-3DAA-44BF-B790-6600F2AD7C5D v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC - -

12.1.2 Application GUID-A1F20DD8-571E-42C3-84F3-C557EC352ED0 v1

The multi-purpose filter, function block with name SMAI HPAC, is arranged as a
three-phase filter. It has very much the same user interface (e.g. function block outputs)
as the standard pre-processing function block SMAI. However the main difference is
that it can be used to extract any frequency component from the input signal. For all
four analogue input signals into this filter (i.e. three phases and the residual quantity)
the input samples from the TRM module, which are coming at rate of 20 samples per
fundamental system cycle, are first stored. When enough samples are available in the
internal memory, the phasor values at set frequency defined by the setting parameter
SetFrequency are calculated. The following values are internally available for each of
the calculated phasors:
• Magnitude
• Phase angle
• Exact frequency of the extracted signal

The SMAI HPAC filter is always used in conjunction with some other protection
function (e.g. multi-purpose protection function or overcurrent function or over-voltage
function or over-power function). In this way many different protection applications
can be arranged. For example the following protection, monitoring or measurement
features can be realized:

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 287

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
System protection and control

• Sub-synchronous resonance protection for turbo generators

• Sub-synchronous protection for wind turbines/wind farms
• Detection of sub-synchronous oscillation between HVDC links and synchronous
generators
• Super-synchronous protection
• Detection of presence of the geo-magnetic induced currents
• Overcurrent or overvoltage protection at specific frequency harmonic, sub-
harmonic, inter-harmonic etc.
• Presence of special railway frequencies (e.g. 16.7Hz or 25Hz) in the three-phase
power system
• Sensitive reverse power protection
• Stator or rotor earth fault protection for special injection frequencies (e.g. 25Hz)
• etc.

The filter output can also be connected to the measurement function blocks such as
CVMMXN (Measurements), CMMXU (Phase current measurement), VMMXU
(Phase-phase voltage measurement), etc. in order to report the extracted phasor values
to the supervisory system (e.g. MicroSCADA).

The following figure shoes typical configuration connections required to utilize this
filter in conjunction with multi-purpose function as non-directional overcurrent
protection.

IEC13000179-1-en.vsd
IEC13000179 V1 EN-US

Figure 102: Required ACT configuration

Such overcurrent arrangement can be for example used to achieve the subsynchronous
resonance protection for turbo generators.

288 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 12
System protection and control

12.1.3 Setting guidelines

12.1.3.1 Setting example GUID-5A3F67BD-7D48-4734-948C-01DAF9470EF8 v2

A relay type used for generator subsynchronous resonance overcurrent protection shall
be replaced. The relay had inverse time operating characteristic as given with the
following formula:

K
top = T01 +
Is
EQUATION13000029 V1 EN-US (Equation 104)

Where:
• top is the operating time of the relay
• T01 is fixed time delay (setting)
• K is a constant (setting)
• IS is measured subsynchronous current in primary amperes

The existing relay was applied on a large 50Hz turbo generator which had shaft
mechanical resonance frequency at 18.5Hz. The relay settings were T01 = 0.64
seconds, K= 35566 Amperes and minimal subsynchronous current trip level was set at
IS0=300 Amperes primary.

Solution:

First the IED configuration shall be arranged as shown in Figure 102. Then the settings
for SMAI HPAC filter and multipurpose function shall be derived from existing relay
settings in the following way:

The subsynchronous current frequency is calculated as follows:

fs = 50 Hz - 18.5Hz = 31.5Hz
EQUATION13000030 V1 EN-US (Equation 105)

In order to properly extract the weak subsynchronous signal in presence of the

dominating 50Hz signal the SMAI HPAC filter shall be set as given in the following
table:
Table 30: Proposed settings for SMAIHPAC

I_HPAC_31_5Hz: SMAIHPAC:1
ConnectionType Ph — N
SetFrequency 31.5
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 289

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
System protection and control

FreqBandWidth 0.0
FilterLength 1.0 s
OverLap 75
Operation On

Now the settings for the multi-purpose overcurrent stage one shall be derived in order
to emulate the existing relay operating characteristic. To achieve exactly the same
inverse time characteristic the programmable IDMT characteristic is used which for
multi-purpose overcurrent stage one, which has the following equation (for more
information see Section “Inverse time characteristics” in the TRM).

æ ö
ç ÷
A
t [s] = ç + B÷×k
ç æ i öp ÷
çç ÷ -C ÷
è è in > ø ø
EQUATION13000031 V1 EN-US (Equation 106)

In order to adapt to the previous relay characteristic the above equation can be re-
written in the following way:

æ K ö
ç ÷
ç I so ÷
t [s] = + T01 ÷ × 1
ç 1
ç æç I s ÷ö - 0 ÷
ç I ÷
è è so ø ø
EQUATION13000032 V1 EN-US (Equation 107)

Thus if the following rules are followed when multi-purpose overcurrent stage one is
set:
• in > = IS0= 300A
• K 35566
A= = = 118.55
I so 300
• B = T01 = 0.64
• C = 0.0
• p = 1.0
• k = 1.0

290 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 12
System protection and control

then exact replica of the existing relay will be achieved. The following table
summarizes all required settings for the multi-purpose function:

Setting Group1
Operation On
CurrentInput MaxPh
IBase 1000
VoltageInput MaxPh
UBase 20.50
OPerHarmRestr Off
I_2ndI_fund 20.0
BlkLevel2nd 5000
EnRestrainCurr Off
RestrCurrInput PosSeq
RestrCurrCoeff 0.00
RCADir -75
ROADir 75
LowVolt_VM 0.5

OC1
Setting Group1
Operation_OC1 On
StartCurr_OC1 30.0
CurrMult_OC1 2.0
CurveType_OC1 Programmable
tDef_OC1 0.00
k_OC1 1.00
tMin1 30
tMin_OC1 1.40
ResCrvType_OC1 Instantaneous
tResetDef_OC1 0.00
P_OC1 1.000
A_OC1 118.55
B_OC1 0.640
C_OC1 0.000

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 291

Application manual
292
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 13
Secondary system supervision

Section 13 Secondary system supervision

13.1 Current circuit supervision (87) IP14555-1 v5

13.1.1 Identification
M14870-1 v5

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC - 87

13.1.2 Application M12395-13 v9

Open or short circuited current transformer cores can cause unwanted operation of
many protection functions such as differential, ground-fault current and negative-
sequence current functions. When currents from two independent three-phase sets of
CTs, or CT cores, measuring the same primary currents are available, reliable current
circuit supervision can be arranged by comparing the currents from the two sets. If an
error in any CT circuit is detected, the protection functions concerned can be blocked
and an alarm given.

In case of large currents, unequal transient saturation of CT cores with different

remanence or different saturation factor may result in differences in the secondary
currents from the two CT sets. Unwanted blocking of protection functions during the
transient stage must then be avoided.

Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC (87) must be sensitive and have short operate
time in order to prevent unwanted tripping from fast-acting, sensitive numerical
protections in case of faulty CT secondary circuits.

Open CT circuits creates extremely high voltages in the circuits which

is extremely dangerous for the personnel. It can also damage the
insulation and cause new problems. The application shall, thus, be done
with this in consideration, especially if the protection functions are
blocked.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 293

Application manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Secondary system supervision

13.1.3 Setting guidelines M12397-17 v8

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
IBase, VBase and SBase as applicable.

Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC (87) compares the residual current from a three-
phase set of current transformer cores with the neutral point current on a separate input
taken from another set of cores on the same current transformer.

IMinOp: It must be set as a minimum to twice the residual current in the supervised CT
circuits under normal service conditions and rated primary current.

Pickup_Block: It is normally set at 150% to block the function during transient

conditions.

The FAIL output is connected to the blocking input of the protection function to be
blocked at faulty CT secondary circuits.

13.2 Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC IP14556-1 v3

13.2.1 Identification
M14869-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC - -

13.2.2 Application SEMOD113803-4 v10

Different protection functions within the protection IED, operates on the basis of the
measured voltage in the relay point. Examples are:

• impedance protection functions

• undervoltage function
• energizing check function and voltage check for the weak infeed logic

These functions can operate unintentionally if a fault occurs in the secondary circuits
between the voltage instrument transformers and the IED.

It is possible to use different measures to prevent such unwanted operations. Miniature

circuit breakers in the voltage measuring circuits should be located as close as possible

294 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 13
Secondary system supervision

to the voltage instrument transformers, and shall be equipped with auxiliary contacts
that are wired to the IEDs. Separate fuse-failure monitoring IEDs or elements within
the protection and monitoring devices are another possibilities. These solutions are
combined to get the best possible effect in the fuse failure supervision function
(FUFSPVC).

FUFSPVC function built into the IED products can operate on the basis of external
binary signals from the miniature circuit breaker or from the line disconnector. The
first case influences the operation of all voltage-dependent functions while the second
one does not affect the impedance measuring functions.

The negative sequence detection algorithm, based on the negative-sequence measuring

quantities is recommended for use in isolated or high-impedance grounded networks: a
high value of voltage 3V2 without the presence of the negative-sequence current 3I2 is
a condition that is related to a fuse failure event.

The zero sequence detection algorithm, based on the zero sequence measuring
quantities is recommended for use in directly or low impedance grounded networks: a
high value of voltage 3V0 without the presence of the residual current 3I0 is a condition
that is related to a fuse failure event. In cases where the line can have a weak-infeed of
zero sequence current this function shall be avoided.

A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage measurements can be added to the
fuse failure supervision function in order to detect a three phase fuse failure. This is
beneficial for example during three phase transformer switching.

13.2.3 Setting guidelines IP15000-1 v1

13.2.3.1 General M13683-3 v5

The negative and zero sequence voltages and currents always exist due to different
non-symmetries in the primary system and differences in the current and voltage
instrument transformers. The minimum value for the operation of the current and
voltage measuring elements must always be set with a safety margin of 10 to 20%,
depending on the system operating conditions.

Pay special attention to the dissymmetry of the measuring quantities when the function
is used on long untransposed lines, on multicircuit lines and so on.

The settings of negative sequence, zero sequence and delta algorithm are in percent of
the base voltage and base current for the function. Common base IED values for
primary current (IBase), primary voltage (VBase) and primary power (SBase) are set in
Global Base Values GBASVAL. The setting GlobalBaseSel is used to select a particular
GBASVAL and used its base values.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 295

Application manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Secondary system supervision

13.2.3.2 Setting of common parameters M13683-9 v9

Set the operation mode selector Operation to Enabled to release the fuse failure
function.

The voltage threshold VPPU is used to identify low voltage condition in the system.
Set VPPU below the minimum operating voltage that might occur during emergency
conditions. We propose a setting of approximately 70% of VBase.

The drop off time of 200 ms for dead phase detection makes it recommended to always
set SealIn to Enabled since this will secure a fuse failure indication at persistent fuse
fail when closing the local breaker when the line is already energized from the other
end. When the remote breaker closes the voltage will return except in the phase that
has a persistent fuse fail. Since the local breaker is open there is no current and the
dead phase indication will persist in the phase with the blown fuse. When the local
breaker closes the current will start to flow and the function detects the fuse failure
situation. But due to the 200 ms drop off timer the output BLKZ will not be activated
until after 200 ms. This means that distance functions are not blocked and due to the
“no voltage but current” situation might issue a trip.

The operation mode selector OpModeSel has been introduced for better adaptation to
system requirements. The mode selector enables selecting interactions between the
negative sequence and zero sequence algorithm. In normal applications, the
OpModeSel is set to either V2I2 for selecting negative sequence algorithm or V0I0 for
zero sequence based algorithm. If system studies or field experiences shows that there
is a risk that the fuse failure function will not be activated due to the system conditions,
the dependability of the fuse failure function can be increased if the OpModeSel is set
to V0I0 OR V2I2 or OptimZsNs. In mode V0I0 OR V2I2 both negative and zero
sequence based algorithms are activated and working in an OR-condition. Also in
mode OptimZsNs both negative and zero sequence algorithms are activated and the one
that has the highest magnitude of measured negative or zero sequence current will
operate. If there is a requirement to increase the security of the fuse failure function
OpModeSel can be selected to V0I0 AND V2I2 which gives that both negative and zero
sequence algorithms are activated and working in an AND-condition, that is, both
algorithms must give condition for block in order to activate the output signals BLKV
or BLKZ.

13.2.3.3 Negative sequence based M13683-17 v9

The relay setting value 3V2PU is given in percentage of the base voltage VBase and
should not be set lower than the value that is calculated according to equation 108.

296 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 13
Secondary system supervision

V2
3V 2 PU  100
VBase 3
EQUATION1757-ANSI V4 EN-US (Equation 108)

where:
V2PU is the maximal negative sequence voltage during normal operation conditions, plus a margin of
10...20%
VBase is the base voltage for the function according to the setting GlobalBaseSel

The setting of the current limit 3I2PU is in percentage of parameter IBase. The setting
of 3I2PU must be higher than the normal unbalance current that might exist in the
system and can be calculated according to equation 109.

I2
3 I 2 PU   100
IBase
EQUATION1758-ANSI V4 EN-US (Equation 109)

where:
I2 is the maximal negative sequence current during normal operating conditions, plus a margin of
10...20%
IBase is the base current for the function according to the setting GlobalBaseSel

13.2.3.4 Zero sequence based M13683-43 v8

The IED setting value 3V0PU is given in percentage of the base voltage VBase. The
setting of 3V0PU should not be set lower than the value that is calculated according to
equation 110.

3V 0
3V 0 PU  100
VBase 3
EQUATION1759-ANSI V4 EN-US (Equation 110)

where:
3V0 is the maximal zero sequence voltage during normal operation conditions, plus a margin of
10...20%
VBase is the base voltage for the function according to the setting GlobalBaseSel

The setting of the current limit 3I0PU is done in percentage of IBase. The setting of
pickup must be higher than the normal unbalance current that might exist in the
system. The setting can be calculated according to equation 111.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 297

Application manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Secondary system supervision

3I 0
3I 0 PU = × 100
IBase
EQUATION2293-ANSI V2 EN-US (Equation 111)

where:
3I0PU is the maximal zero sequence current during normal operating conditions, plus a margin of
10...20%
IBase is the base current for the function according to the setting GlobalBaseSel

13.2.3.5 Delta V and delta I GUID-02336F26-98C0-419D-8759-45F5F12580DE v7

Set the operation mode selector OpDVDI to Enabled if the delta function shall be in
operation.

The setting of DVPU should be set high (approximately 60% of VBase) and the current
threshold DIPU low (approximately 10% of IBase) to avoid unwanted operation due to
normal switching conditions in the network. The delta current and delta voltage
function shall always be used together with either the negative or zero sequence
algorithm. If VSetprim is the primary voltage for operation of dU/dt and ISetprim the
primary current for operation of dI/dt, the setting of DVPU and DIPU will be given
according to equation 112 and equation 113.

VSet prim
DVPU = ⋅100
VBase
EQUATION1765-ANSI V2 EN-US (Equation 112)

ISet prim
DIPU = ⋅100
IBase
ANSIEQUATION2385 V2 EN-US (Equation 113)

The voltage thresholds VPPU is used to identify low voltage condition in the system.
Set VPPU below the minimum operating voltage that might occur during emergency
conditions. A setting of approximately 70% of VBase is recommended.

The current threshold 50P shall be set lower than the IMinOp for the distance
protection function. A 5...10% lower value is recommended.

13.2.3.6 Dead line detection M13683-78 v4

The condition for operation of the dead line detection is set by the parameters IDLDPU
for the current threshold and UDLD< for the voltage threshold.

298 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 13
Secondary system supervision

Set the IDLDPU with a sufficient margin below the minimum expected load current. A
safety margin of at least 15-20% is recommended. The operate value must however
exceed the maximum charging current of an overhead line, when only one phase is
disconnected (mutual coupling to the other phases).

Set the VDLDPU with a sufficient margin below the minimum expected operating
voltage. A safety margin of at least 15% is recommended.

13.3 Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC (60) GUID-9C5BA1A7-DF2F-49D4-A13A-C6B483DDFCDC v2

13.3.1 Identification GUID-109434B0-23E5-4053-9E6E-418530A07F9C v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC VTS 60

13.3.2 Application GUID-AD63BF6C-0351-4E48-9FB2-9AB5CF0C521E v2

Some protection functions operate on the basis of measured voltage at the relay point.
Examples of such protection functions are distance protection function, undervoltage
function and energisation-check function. These functions might mal-operate if there is
an incorrect measured voltage due to fuse failure or other kind of faults in voltage
measurement circuit.

VDSPVC is designed to detect fuse failures or faults in voltage measurement circuit

based on comparison of the voltages of the main and pilot fused circuits phase wise.
VDSPVC output can be configured to block voltage dependent protection functions
such as high-speed distance protection, undervoltage relays, underimpedance relays
and so on.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 299

Application manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Secondary system supervision

A B C

V1C
V1A

V1B
V2C
V2A

V2B

Main Vt circuit
Pilot VT circuit

IED
FuseFailSupvn

ANSI12000143-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000143 V1 EN-US

Figure 103: Application of VDSPVC

13.3.3 Setting guidelines GUID-0D5A517C-1F92-46B9-AC2D-F41ED4E7C39E v1

GUID-52BF4E8E-0B0C-4F75-99C4-0BCB22CDD166 v2

The parameters for Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC are set via the local HMI or
PCM600.
GUID-0B298162-C939-47E4-A89B-7E6BD7BEBB2C v2

The voltage input type (phase-to-phase or phase-to-neutral) is selected using

ConTypeMain and ConTypePilot parameters, for main and pilot fuse groups
respectively.

300 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 13
Secondary system supervision

The connection type for the main and the pilot fuse groups must be
consistent.

The settings Vdif Main block, Vdif Pilot alarm and VSealIn are in percentage of the
base voltage, VBase. Set VBase to the primary rated phase-to-phase voltage of the
potential voltage transformer. VBase is available in the Global Base Value groups; the
particular Global Base Value group, that is used by VDSPVC (60), is set by the setting
parameter GlobalBaseSel.

The settings Vdif Main block and Vdif Pilot alarm should be set low (approximately
30% of VBase) so that they are sensitive to the fault on the voltage measurement
circuit, since the voltage on both sides are equal in the healthy condition. If VSetPrim is
the desired pick up primary phase-to-phase voltage of measured fuse group, the setting
of Vdif Main block and Vdif Pilot alarm will be given according to equation 114.

VSetPrim
Vdif Main block or Vdif Pilot alarm= ⋅100
VBase
ANSI13000279 V1 EN-US (Equation 114)

VSetPrim is defined as phase to neutral or phase to phase voltage dependent of the

selected ConTypeMain and ConTypePilot. If ConTypeMain and ConTypePilot are set to
Ph-N than the function performs internally the rescaling of VSetPrim.

When SealIn is set to On and the fuse failure has last for more than 5 seconds, the
blocked protection functions will remain blocked until normal voltage conditions are
restored above the VSealIn setting. The fuse failure outputs are deactivated when the
normal voltage conditions are restored.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 301

Application manual
302
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

Section 14 Control

14.1 Synchronism check, energizing check, and

synchronizing SESRSYN (25) IP14558-1 v4

14.1.1 Identification
M14889-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and SESRSYN 25
synchronizing
sc/vc

SYMBOL-M V1 EN-US

14.1.2 Application IP15111-1 v1

14.1.2.1 Synchronizing SEMOD171992-5 v9

To allow closing of breakers between asynchronous networks, a synchronizing feature

is provided. The breaker close command is issued at the optimum time when
conditions across the breaker are satisfied in order to avoid stress on the network and
its components.

The systems are defined as asynchronous when the frequency difference between bus
and line is larger than an adjustable parameter. If the frequency difference is less than
this threshold value the system is defined to have a parallel circuit and the synchronism
check function is used.

The synchronizing function measures the difference between the V-Line and the V-
Bus. It operates and enables a closing command to the circuit breaker when the
calculated closing angle is equal to the measured phase angle and the following
conditions are simultaneously fulfilled:

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 303

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

• The voltages V-Line and V-Bus are higher than the set values for VHighBusSynch
and VHighLineSynch of the respective base voltages GblBaseSelBus and
GblBaseSelLine.
• The difference in the voltage is smaller than the set value of VDiffSynch.
• The difference in frequency is less than the set value of FreqDiffMax and larger
than the set value of FreqDiffMin. If the frequency is less than FreqDiffMin the
synchronism check is used and the value of FreqDiffMin must thus be identical to
the value FreqDiffM resp FreqDiffA for synchronism check function. The bus and
line frequencies must also be within a range of ±5 Hz from the rated frequency.
When the synchronizing option is included also for autoreclose there is no reason
to have different frequency setting for the manual and automatic reclosing and the
frequency difference values for synchronism check should be kept low.
• The frequency rate of change is less than set value for both V-Bus and V-Line.
• The difference in the phase angle is smaller than the set value of CloseAngleMax.
• The closing angle is decided by the calculation of slip frequency and required pre-
closing time.

The synchronizing function compensates for the measured slip frequency as well as the
circuit breaker closing delay. The phase angle advance is calculated continuously. The
calculation of the operation pulse sent in advance is using the measured SlipFrequency
and the set tBreaker time. To prevent incorrect closing pulses, a maximum closing
angle between bus and line is set with CloseAngleMax. Table 31 below shows the
maximum settable value for tBreaker when CloseAngleMax is set to 15 or 30 degrees,
at different allowed slip frequencies for synchronizing. To minimize the moment stress
when synchronizing near a power station, a narrower limit for the CloseAngleMax
needs to be used.
Table 31: Dependencies between tBreaker and SlipFrequency with different CloseAngleMax
values
tBreaker [s] (max settable value) tBreaker [s] (max settable value) with SlipFrequency [Hz]
with CloseAngleMax = 15 degrees CloseAngleMax = 30 degrees [max (BusFrequency -
[default value] value] LineFrequency)
0.040 0.080 1.000
0.050 0.100 0.800
0.080 0.160 0.500
0.200 0.400 0.200
0.400 0.810 0.100
1.000 0.080
0.800 0.050
1.000 0.040

304 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

The reference voltage can be phase-neutral A, B, C or phase-phase A-B, B-C, C-A or

positive sequence (Require a three phase voltage, that is VA, VB and VC) . By setting
the phases used for SESRSYN, with the settings SelPhaseBus1, SelPhaseBus2,
SelPhaseLine2 and SelPhaseLine2, a compensation is made automatically for the
voltage amplitude difference and the phase angle difference caused if different setting
values are selected for the two sides of the breaker. If needed an additional phase angle
adjustment can be done for selected line voltage with the PhaseShift setting.

14.1.2.2 Synchronism check M12309-6 v10

The main purpose of the synchronism check function is to provide control over the
closing of circuit breakers in power networks in order to prevent closing if conditions
for synchronism are not detected. It is also used to prevent the re-connection of two
systems, which are divided after islanding and after a three pole reclosing.

Single pole auto-reclosing does not require any synchronism check

since the system is tied together by two phases.

SESRSYN (25) function block includes both the synchronism check function and the
energizing function to allow closing when one side of the breaker is dead. SESRSYN
(25) function also includes a built in voltage selection scheme which allows adoption
to various busbar arrangements.

~ ~
en04000179_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000179 V1 EN-US

Figure 104: Two interconnected power systems

Figure 104 shows two interconnected power systems. The cloud means that the
interconnection can be further away, that is, a weak connection through other stations.
The need for a check of synchronization increases if the meshed system decreases
since the risk of the two networks being out of synchronization at manual or automatic
closing is greater.

The synchronism check function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker and
compares them to set limits. Output is generated only when all measured conditions are
within their set limits simultaneously. The check consists of:

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 305

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

• Live line and live bus.

• Voltage level difference.
• Frequency difference (slip). The bus and line frequency must also be within a
range of ±5 Hz from rated frequency.
• Phase angle difference.

A time delay is available to ensure that the conditions are fulfilled for a minimum
period of time.

In very stable power systems the frequency difference is insignificant or zero for
manually initiated closing or closing by automatic restoration. In steady conditions a
bigger phase angle difference can be allowed as this is sometimes the case in a long
and loaded parallel power line. For this application we accept a synchronism check
with a long operation time and high sensitivity regarding the frequency difference. The
phase angle difference setting can be set for steady state conditions.

Another example is the operation of a power network that is disturbed by a fault event:
after the fault clearance a highspeed auto-reclosing takes place. This can cause a power
swing in the net and the phase angle difference may begin to oscillate. Generally, the
frequency difference is the time derivative of the phase angle difference and will,
typically oscillate between positive and negative values. When the circuit breaker
needs to be closed by auto-reclosing after fault-clearance some frequency difference
should be tolerated, to a greater extent than in the steady condition mentioned in the
case above. But if a big phase angle difference is allowed at the same time, there is
some risk that auto-reclosing will take place when the phase angle difference is big and
increasing. In this case it should be safer to close when the phase angle difference is
smaller.

To fulfill the above requirements the synchronism check function is provided with
duplicate settings, one for steady (Manual) conditions and one for operation under
disturbed conditions (Auto).

306 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

52

SynchroCheck
Bus voltage
VHighBusSC > 50 – 120% of GblBaseSelBus Fuse fail
VHighLineSC >50 – 120% of GblBaseSelLine
Line
VDiffSC < 0.02 – 0.50 p.u. Line Bus Voltage
reference
PhaseDiffM < 5 – 90 degrees voltage
PhaseDiffA < 5 – 90 degrees Fuse fail Line Voltage
FreqDiffM < 3 – 1000 mHz
FreqDiffA < 1000 mHz

ANSI10000079-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000079 V2 EN-US

Figure 105: Principle for the synchronism check function

14.1.2.3 Energizing check M12310-3 v12

The main purpose of the energizing check function is to facilitate the controlled re-
connection of disconnected lines and buses to energized buses and lines.

The energizing check function measures the bus and line voltages and compares them
to both high and low threshold values. The output is given only when the actual
measured conditions match the set conditions. Figure 106 shows two substations,
where one (1) is energized and the other (2) is not energized. The line between CB A
and CB B is energized (DLLB) from substation 1 via the circuit breaker A and
energization of station 2 is done by CB B energization check device for that breaker
DBLL. (or Both).

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 307

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

1 2
A B

Bus voltage Line voltage

EnergizingCheck
VLiveBusEnerg > 50 - 120 % of GblBaseSelBus
VLiveLineEnerg > 50 - 120 % of GblBaseSelLine
VDeadBusEnerg < 10 - 80 % of GblBaseSelBus
VDeadLineEnerg < 10 - 80 % of GblBaseSelLine
VMaxEnerg < 50 - 180 % of GblBaseSelBus and/or
GblBaseSelLine

ANSI10000078-4-en.vsd
ANSI10000078 V4 EN-US

Figure 106: Principle for the energizing check function

The energizing operation can operate in the dead line live bus (DLLB) direction, dead
bus live line (DBLL) direction, or in both directions over the circuit breaker.
Energizing from different directions can be different for automatic reclosing and
manual closing of the circuit breaker. For manual closing it is also possible to allow
closing when both sides of the breaker are dead, Dead Bus Dead Line (DBDL).

The equipment is considered energized (Live) if the voltage is above the set value for
VLiveBusEnerg or VLiveLineEnerg of the base voltages GblBaseSelBus and
VGblBaseSelLine, which are defined in the Global Base Value groups, according to the
setting of GblBaseSelBus and GblBaseSelLine; in a similar way, the equipment is
considered non-energized (Dead) if the voltage is below the set value for
VDeadBusEnerg or VDeadLineEnerg of the respective Global Base Value groups. A
disconnected line can have a considerable potential due to factors such as induction
from a line running in parallel, or feeding via extinguishing capacitors in the circuit
breakers. This voltage can be as high as 50% or more of the base voltage of the line.
Normally, for breakers with single breaking elements (<330 kV) the level is well below
30%.

When the energizing direction corresponds to the settings, the situation has to remain
constant for a certain period of time before the close signal is permitted. The purpose
of the delayed operate time is to ensure that the dead side remains de-energized and
that the condition is not due to temporary interference.

14.1.2.4 Voltage selection M12321-3 v11

The voltage selection function is used for the connection of appropriate voltages to the
synchronism check, synchronizing and energizing check functions. For example, when
the IED is used in a double bus arrangement, the voltage that should be selected

308 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

depends on the status of the breakers and/or disconnectors. By checking the status of
the disconnectors auxiliary contacts, the right voltages for the synchronism check and
energizing check functions can be selected.

Available voltage selection types are for single circuit breaker with double busbars and
the breaker-and-a-half arrangement. A double circuit breaker arrangement and single
circuit breaker with a single busbar do not need any voltage selection function. Neither
does a single circuit breaker with double busbars using external voltage selection need
any internal voltage selection.

Manual energization of a completely open diameter in breaker-and-a-half switchgear is

allowed by internal logic.

The voltages from busbars and lines must be physically connected to the voltage inputs
in the IED and connected, using the PCM software, to each of the SESRSYN (25)
functions available in the IED.

14.1.2.5 External fuse failure M12322-3 v12

Either external fuse-failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse (or miniature circuit
breaker) are connected to HW binary inputs of the IED; these signals are connected to
inputs of SESRSYN function in the application configuration tool of PCM600. The
internal fuse failure supervision function can also be used if a three phase voltage is
present. The signal BLKV, from the internal fuse failure supervision function, is then
used and connected to the fuse supervision inputs of the SESRSYN function block. In
case of a fuse failure, the SESRSYN energizing (25) function is blocked.

The VB1OK/VB2OK and VB1FF/VB2FF inputs are related to the busbar voltage and
the VL1OK/VL2OK and VL1FF/VL2FF inputs are related to the line voltage.

External selection of energizing direction M12322-10 v8

The energizing can be selected by use of the available logic function blocks. Below is
an example where the choice of mode is done from a symbol ,created in the Graphical
Design Editor (GDE) tool on the local HMI, through selector switch function block,
but alternatively there can for example, be a physical selector switch on the front of the
panel which is connected to a binary to integer function block (B16I).

If the PSTO input is used, connected to the Local-Remote switch on the local HMI, the
choice can also be from the station HMI system, typically ABB Microscada through
IEC 61850–8–1 communication.

The connection example for selection of the manual energizing mode is shown in
figure 107. Selected names are just examples but note that the symbol on the local HMI
can only show the active position of the virtual selector.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 309

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

SLGGIO

PSTO SESRSYN (25)

INTONE

NAME1 SWPOSN MENMODE

OFF
NAME2
DL
DB NAME3
DLB NAME4

ANSI09000171_1_en.vsd
ANSI09000171 V1 EN-US

Figure 107: Selection of the energizing direction from a local HMI symbol through a
selector switch function block.

14.1.3 Application examples M12323-3 v7

The synchronism check function block can also be used in some switchyard
arrangements, but with different parameter settings. Below are some examples of how
different arrangements are connected to the IED analog inputs and to the function
block SESRSYN, 25. One function block is used per circuit breaker.

The input used below in example are typical and can be changed by use
of configuration and signal matrix tools.

The SESRSYN and connected SMAI function block instances must

have the same cycle time in the application configuration.

310 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

14.1.3.1 Single circuit breaker with single busbar M12324-3 v12

SESRSYN (25)
V3PB1* SYNOK
Bus 1 V3PB2* AUTOSYOK
V3PL1* AUTOENOK
V3PL2* MANSYOK
BLOCK MANENOK
BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK
189 BLKSC TSTAUTSY
BLKENERG TSTMANSY
BUS1_OP TSTENOK
BUS1_CL VSELFAIL
Fuse
BUS2_OP B1SEL
VT
BUS2_CL B2SEL
bus1Voltage LINE1_OP L1SEL
V REF1 152 LINE1_CL L2SEL
LINE2_OP SYNPROGR
LINE2_CL SYNFAIL
VB1OK VOKSYN
VB1FF VDIFFSYN
VB2OK FRDIFSYN
VB2FF FRDIFFOK
VL1OK FRDERIVA
VL1FF VOKSC
VL2OK VDIFFSC
lineVoltage/1/2/3 VL2FF FRDIFFA
VA/VB/VC STARTSYN PHDIFFA
Fuse TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM
VT TSTSC PHDIFFM
TSTENERG INADVCLS
AENMODE VDIFFME
Line MENMODE FRDIFFME
PHDIFFME
Vbus
VLine
MODEAEN
MODEMEN

ANSI0000093-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000093 V1 EN-US

Figure 108: Connection of SESRSYN (25) function block in a single busbar

arrangement

Figure 108 illustrates connection principles for a single busbar. For the SESRSYN (25)
function there is one voltage transformer on each side of the circuit breaker. The
voltage transformer circuit connections are straightforward; no special voltage
selection is necessary.

The voltage from busbar VT is connected to V3PB1 and the voltage from the line VT
is connected to V3PL1. The conditions of the VT fuses shall also be connected as
shown above. The voltage selection parameter CBConfig is set to No voltage sel.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 311

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

14.1.3.2 Single circuit breaker with double busbar, external voltage selection M12325-3 v8

SESRSYN (25)
V3PB1* SYNOK
V3PB2* AUTOSYOK
Bus 1 V3PL1* AUTOENOK
V3PL2* MANSYOK
Bus 2 BLOCK MANENOK
BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK
BLKSC TSTAUTSY
BLKENERG TSTMANSY
BUS1_OP TSTENOK
Fuse BUS1_CL VSELFAIL
Fuse VT BUS2_OP B1SEL
VT BUS2_CL B2SEL
bus Voltage LINE1_OP L1SEL
LINE1_CL L2SEL
LINE2_OP SYNPROGR
VREF1 LINE2_CL SYNFAIL
VB1OK VOKSYN
VB1FF VDIFFSYN
VB2OK FRDIFSYN
189 VB2FF FRDIFFOK
VL1OK FRDERIVA
VL1FF VOKSC
289 VL2OK VDIFFSC
VL2FF FRDIFFA
STARTSYN PHDIFFA
TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM
TSTSC PHDIFFM
TSTENERG INADVCLS
152 AENMODE VDIFFME
MENMODE FRDIFFME
PHDIFFME
Voltag Vbus
Line 1/2/3
V e VLine
MODEAEN
VA/VB/ Fuse
MODEMEN
C VT
Line
ANSI10000094-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000094 V1 EN-US

Figure 109: Connection of SESRSYN (25) function block in a single breaker,

double busbar arrangement with external voltage selection

In this type of arrangement no internal voltage selection is required. The voltage

selection is made by external relays typically connected according to figure 109.
Suitable voltage and VT fuse failure supervision from the two busbars are selected
based on the position of the busbar disconnectors. This means that the connections to
the function block will be the same as for the single busbar arrangement. The voltage
selection parameter CBConfig is set to No voltage sel.

312 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

14.1.3.3 Single circuit breaker with double busbar, internal voltage selection M12326-3 v7

SESRSYN (25)
V3PB1* SYNOK
V3PB2* AUTOSYOK
V3PL1* AUTOENOK
V3PL2* MANSYOK
Bus 1 BLOCK MANENOK
Bus 2 BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK
BLKSC TSTAUTSY
BLKENERG TSTMANSY
BUS1_OP TSTENOK
BUS1_CL VSELFAIL
BUS2_OP B1SEL
BUS2_CL B2SEL
Fuse
bus1 Voltage VT
LINE1_OP L1SEL
LINE1_CL L2SEL
VREF 1 LINE2_OP SYNPROGR
LINE2_CL SYNFAIL
Fuse
bus2 Voltage VT VB1OK VOKSYN
V REF 2 VB1FF VDIFFSYN
VB2OK FRDIFSYN
VB2FF FRDIFFOK
VL1OK FRDERIVA
189 VL1FF VOKSC
VL2OK VDIFFSC
VL2FF FRDIFFA
STARTSYN PHDIFFA
289 TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM
TSTSC PHDIFFM
TSTENERG INADVCLS
AENMODE VDIFFME
MENMODE FRDIFFME
PHDIFFME
152 Vbus
VLine
MODEAEN
MODEMEN
lineVoltage /1/2/3
VA/VB/VC
Fuse
VT

Line ANSI10000095-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000095 V1 EN-US

Figure 110: Connection of the SESRSYN function block in a single breaker, double
busbar arrangement with internal voltage selection

When internal voltage selection is needed, the voltage transformer circuit connections
are made according to figure 110. The voltage from the busbar 1 VT is connected to
V3PB1 and the voltage from busbar 2 is connected to V3PB2. The voltage from the
line VT is connected to V3PL1. The positions of the disconnectors and VT fuses shall
be connected as shown in figure 110. The voltage selection parameter CBConfig is set
to Double bus.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 313

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

14.1.3.4 Double circuit breaker M12329-3 v7

152
SESRSYN (25)
Bus 1 V3PB1* SYNOK
Bus 2 V3PB2*
V3PL1*
AUTOSYOK
AUTOENOK
V3PL2* MANSYOK
BLOCK MANENOK
BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK
BLKSC TSTAUTSY
BLKENERG TSTMANSY
BUS1_OP TSTENOK
BUS1_CL VSELFAIL
Fuse BUS2_OP B1SEL
bus 1 Voltage VT BUS2_CL B2SEL
LINE1_OP L1SEL
VREF1 LINE1_CL L2SEL
LINE2_OP SYNPROGR
Fuse LINE2_CL SYNFAIL
bus 2 Voltage VT 152 VB1OK VOKSYN
VB1FF VDIFFSYN
VREF2 VB2OK FRDIFSYN
VB2FF FRDIFFOK
VL1OK FRDERIVA
252 VL1FF VOKSC
VL2OK VDIFFSC
VL2FF FRDIFFA
STARTSYN PHDIFFA
TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM
TSTSC PHDIFFM
TSTENERG INADVCLS
AENMODE VDIFFME
MENMODE FRDIFFME
lineVoltage/1/2/3 PHDIFFME
Fuse Vbus
VA/VB/VC VT
VLine
MODEAEN
MODEMEN
Line 252
SESRSYN (25)
V3PB1* SYNOK
V3PB2* AUTOSYOK
V3PL1* AUTOENOK
V3PL2* MANSYOK
BLOCK MANENOK
BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK
BLKSC TSTAUTSY
BLKENERG TSTMANSY
BUS1_OP TSTENOK
BUS1_CL VSELFAIL
BUS2_OP B1SEL
BUS2_CL B2SEL
LINE1_OP L1SEL
LINE1_CL L2SEL
LINE2_OP SYNPROGR
LINE2_CL SYNFAIL
VB1OK VOKSYN
VB1FF VDIFFSYN
VB2OK FRDIFSYN
VB2FF FRDIFFOK
VL1OK FRDERIVA
VL1FF VOKSC
VL2OK VDIFFSC
VL2FF FRDIFFA
STARTSYN PHDIFFA
TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM
TSTSC PHDIFFM
TSTENERG INADVCLS
AENMODE VDIFFME
MENMODE FRDIFFME
PHDIFFME
Vbus
VLine
MODEAEN
MODEMEN
ANSI10000096-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000096 V1 EN-US

Figure 111: Connections of the SESRSYN (25) function block in a double breaker
arrangement

314 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

A double breaker arrangement requires two function blocks, one for breaker
WA1_QA1 and one for breaker WA2_QA1. No voltage selection is necessary, because
the voltage from busbar 1 VT is connected to V3PB1 on SESRSYN for WA1_QA1
and the voltage from busbar 2 VT is connected toV3PB1 on SESRSYN for
WA2_QA1. The voltage from the line VT is connected to V3PL1 on both function
blocks. The condition of VT fuses shall also be connected as shown in figure 110. The
voltage selection parameter CBConfig is set to No voltage sel. for both function blocks.

14.1.3.5 Breaker-and-a-half M12330-3 v8

Figure 112 describes a breaker-and-a-half arrangement with three SESRSYN functions

in the same IED, each of them handling voltage selection for WA1_QA1, TIE_QA1
and WA2_QA1 breakers respectively. The voltage from busbar 1 VT is connected to
V3PB1 on all three function blocks and the voltage from busbar 2 VT is connected to
V3PB2 on all three function blocks. The voltage from line1 VT is connected to V3PL1
on all three function blocks and the voltage from line2 VT is connected to V3PL2 on
all three function blocks. The positions of the disconnectors and VT fuses shall be
connected as shown in Figure 112.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 315

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

Bus 1 Bus 1 CB
SESRSYN (25)
Bus 2 V3PB1* SYNOK
V3PB2* AUTOSYOK
V3PL1* AUTOENOK
189 189 V3PL2* MANSYOK
BLOCK MANENOK
BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK
152 152 BLKSC TSTAUTSY
Fuse BLKENERG TSTMANSY
BUS1_OP TSTENOK
bus1 Voltage VT BUS1_CL VSELFAIL
VREF1 289 289 BUS2_OP B1SEL
BUS2_CL B2SEL
Fuse LINE1_OP L1SEL
LINE1_CL L2SEL
bus 2Voltage VT LINE2_OP SYNPROGR
VREF2 LINE2_CL SYNFAIL
VB1OK VOKSYN
VB1FF VDIFFSYN
VB2OK FRDIFSYN
VB2FF FRDIFFOK
VL1OK FRDERIVA
VL1FF VOKSC
VL2OK VDIFFSC
152 VL2FF
STARTSYN
FRDIFFA
PHDIFFA
6189 6289 TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM
TSTSC PHDIFFM
TSTENERG INADVCLS
AENMODE VDIFFME
989 989 MENMODE FRDIFFME
line 1 Voltage Fuse PHDIFFME
VT Vbus
1/2/3 VLine
VA/VB/VC MODEAEN
MODEMEN
Fuse SESRSYN (25)
line 2 Voltage VT V3PB1* SYNOK
VREF3 V3PB2* AUTOSYOK
V3PL1* AUTOENOK
V3PL2* MANSYOK
BLOCK MANENOK
BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK
BLKSC TSTAUTSY
Line 1 Line 2 BLKENERG TSTMANSY
BUS1_OP TSTENOK
BUS1_CL VSELFAIL
BUS2_OP B1SEL
BUS2_CL B2SEL
LINE1_OP L1SEL
LINE1_CL L2SEL
LINE2_OP SYNPROGR
LINE2_CL SYNFAIL
VB1OK VOKSYN
VB1FF VDIFFSYN
VB2OK FRDIFSYN
VB2FF FRDIFFOK
VL1OK FRDERIVA
VL1FF VOKSC
VL2OK VDIFFSC
VL2FF FRDIFFA
STARTSYN PHDIFFA
TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM
TSTSC PHDIFFM
TSTENERG INADVCLS
AENMODE VDIFFME
MENMODE FRDIFFME
PHDIFFME
Vbus
VLine
MODEAEN
MODEMEN
Tie CB
ANSI10000097-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000097 V1 EN-US

Figure 112: Connections of the SESRSYN (25) function block in a breaker-and-a-half arrangement with internal
voltage selection

316 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

The connections are similar in all SESRSYN functions, apart from the breaker position
indications. The physical analog connections of voltages and the connection to the IED
and SESRSYN (25) function blocks must be carefully checked in PCM600. In all
SESRSYN functions the connections and configurations must abide by the following
rules: Normally apparatus position is connected with contacts showing both open (b-
type) and closed positions (a-type).

WA1_QA1:

• BUS1_OP/CL = Position of TIE_QA1 breaker and belonging disconnectors

• BUS2_OP/CL = Position of WA2_QA1 breaker and belonging disconnectors
• LINE1_OP/CL = Position of LINE1_QB9 disconnector
• LINE2_OP/CL = Position of LINE2_QB9 disconnector
• VB1OK/FF = Supervision of WA1_MCB fuse
• VB2OK/FF = Supervision of WA2_MCB fuse
• VL1OK/FF = Supervision of LINE1_MCB fuse
• VL2OK/FF = Supervision of LINE2_MCB fuse
• Setting CBConfig = 1 1/2 bus CB

TIE_QA1:

• BUS1_OP/CL = Position of WA1_QA1 breaker and belonging disconnectors

• BUS2_OP/CL = Position of WA2_QA1 breaker and belonging disconnectors
• LINE1_OP/CL = Position of LINE1_QB9 disconnector
• LINE2_OP/CL = Position of LINE2_QB9 disconnector
• VB1OK/FF = Supervision of WA1_MCB fuse
• VB2OK/FF = Supervision of WA2_MCB fuse
• VL1OK/FF = Supervision of LINE1_MCB fuse
• VL2OK/FF = Supervision of LINE2_MCB fuse
• Setting CBConfig = Tie CB

WA2_QA1:

• BUS1_OP/CL = Position of WA1_QA1 breaker and belonging disconnectors

• BUS2_OP/CL = Position of TIE_QA1 breaker and belonging disconnectors
• LINE1_OP/CL = Position of LINE1_QB9 disconnector
• LINE2_OP/CL = Position of LINE2_QB9 disconnector
• VB1OK/FF = Supervision of WA1_MCB fuse
• VB2OK/FF = Supervision of WA2_MCB fuse
• VL1OK/FF = Supervision of LINE1_MCB fuse
• VL2OK/FF = Supervision of LINE2_MCB fuse
• Setting CBConfig = 1 1/2 bus alt. CB

If only two SESRSYN functions are provided in the same IED, the connections and
settings are according to the SESRSYN functions for WA1_QA1 and TIE_QA1.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 317

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

14.1.4 Setting guidelines M12550-3 v14

The setting parameters for the Synchronizing, synchronism check and energizing check
function SESRSYN (25) are set via the local HMI (LHMI) or PCM600.

This setting guidelines describes the settings of the SESRSYN (25) function via the
LHMI.

Common base IED value for primary voltage ( VBase ) is set in a Global base value
function, GBASVAL, found under Main menu//Configuration/Power system/
GlobalBaseValue/GBASVAL_X/VBase. The SESRSYN (25) function has one setting
for the bus reference voltage (GblBaseSelBus) and one setting for the line reference
voltage (GblBaseSelLine) which independently of each other can be set to select one of
the twelve GBASVAL functions used for reference of base values. This means that the
reference voltage of bus and line can be set to different values. The settings for the
SESRSYN (25) function are found under Main menu/Settings/IED Settings/Control/
Synchronizing(25,SC/VC)/SESRSYN(25,SC/VC):X has been divided into four
different setting groups: General, Synchronizing, Synchrocheck and Energizingcheck.

General settings
Operation: The operation mode can be set Enabled or Disabled. The setting Disabled
disables the whole function.

GblBaseSelBus and GblBaseSelLine

These configuration settings are used for selecting one of twelve GBASVAL functions,
which then is used as base value reference voltage, for bus and line respectively.

SelPhaseBus1 and SelPhaseBus2

Configuration parameters for selecting the measuring phase of the voltage for busbar 1
and 2 respectively, which can be a single-phase (phase-neutral), two-phase (phase-
phase) or a positive sequence voltage.

SelPhaseLine1 and SelPhaseLine2

Configuration parameters for selecting the measuring phase of the voltage for line 1
and 2 respectively, which can be a single-phase (phase-neutral), two-phase (phase-
phase) or a positive sequence voltage.

CBConfig

This configuration setting is used to define type of voltage selection. Type of voltage
selection can be selected as:

318 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

• no voltage selection, No voltage sel.

• single circuit breaker with double bus, Double bus
• breaker-and-a-half arrangement with the breaker connected to busbar 1, 1 1/2 bus
CB
• breaker-and-a-half arrangement with the breaker connected to busbar 2, 1 1/2 bus
alt. CB
• breaker-and-a-half arrangement with the breaker connected to line 1 and 2, Tie CB

PhaseShift

This setting is used to compensate the phase shift between the measured bus voltage
and line voltage when:
• different phase-neutral voltages are selected (for example UL1 for bus and UL2
for line);
• one available voltage is phase-phase and the other one is phase-neutral (for
example UL1L2 for bus and UL1 for line).

The set value is added to the measured line phase angle. The bus voltage is reference
voltage.

Synchronizing settings
OperationSynch

The setting Off disables the Synchronizing function. With the setting On, the function
is in the service mode and the output signal depends on the input conditions.

VHighBusSynch and VHighLineSynch

The voltage level settings shall be chosen in relation to the bus/line network voltage.
The threshold voltages VHighBusSynch and VHighLineSynch have to be set lower than
the value where the network is expected to be synchronized. A typical value is 80% of
the rated voltage.

VDiffSynch

Setting of the voltage difference between the line voltage and the bus voltage. The
difference is set depending on the network configuration and expected voltages in the
two networks running asynchronously. A normal setting is 0.10-0.15 p.u.

FreqDiffMin

The setting FreqDiffMin is the minimum frequency difference where the systems are
defined to be asynchronous. For frequency differences lower than this value, the
systems are considered to be in parallel. A typical value for FreqDiffMin is 10 mHz.
Generally, the value should be low if both synchronizing and synchrocheck functions

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 319

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

are provided, and it is better to let the synchronizing function close, as it will close at
exactly the right instance if the networks run with a frequency difference.

To avoid overlapping of the synchronizing function and the

synchrocheck function the setting FreqDiffMin must be set to a higher
value than used setting FreqDiffM, respective FreqDiffA used for
synchrocheck.

FreqDiffMax

The setting FreqDiffMax is the maximum slip frequency at which synchronizing is

accepted. 1/FreqDiffMax shows the time for the vector to move 360 degrees, one turn
on the synchronoscope, and is called Beat time. A typical value for FreqDiffMax is
200-250 mHz, which gives beat times on 4-5 seconds. Higher values should be avoided
as the two networks normally are regulated to nominal frequency independent of each
other, so the frequency difference shall be small.

FreqRateChange

The maximum allowed rate of change for the frequency.

CloseAngleMax

The setting CloseAngleMax is the maximum closing angle between bus and line at
which synchronizing is accepted. To minimize the moment stress when synchronizing
near a power station, a narrower limit should be used. A typical value is 15 degrees.

tBreaker

The tBreaker shall be set to match the closing time for the circuit breaker and should
also include the possible auxiliary relays in the closing circuit. It is important to check
that no slow logic components are used in the configuration of the IED as there then
can be big variations in closing time due to those components. Typical setting is
80-150 ms depending on the breaker closing time.

tClosePulse

The setting for the duration of the breaker close pulse.

tMaxSynch

The setting tMaxSynch is set to reset the operation of the synchronizing function if the
operation does not take place within this time. The setting must allow for the setting of
FreqDiffMin, which will decide how long it will take maximum to reach phase
equality. At the setting of 10 mHz, the beat time is 100 seconds and the setting would
thus need to be at least tMinSynch plus 100 seconds. If the network frequencies are

320 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

expected to be outside the limits from the start, a margin needs to be added. A typical
setting is 600 seconds.

tMinSynch

The setting tMinSynch is set to limit the minimum time at which the synchronizing
closing attempt is given. The synchronizing function will not give a closing command
within this time, from when the synchronizing is started, even if a synchronizing
condition is fulfilled. A typical setting is 200 ms.

Synchrocheck settings
OperationSC

The OperationSC setting Off disables the synchrocheck function and sets the outputs
AUTOSYOK, MANSYOK, TSTAUTSY and TSTMANSY to low. With the setting
On, the function is in the service mode and the output signal depends on the input
conditions.

VHighBusSC and VHighLineSC

The voltage level settings must be chosen in relation to the bus or line network voltage.
The threshold voltages VHighBusSC and VHighLineSC have to be set lower than the
value at which the breaker is expected to close with the synchronism check. A typical
value can be 80% of the base voltages.

VDiffSC

The setting for voltage difference between line and bus in p.u. This setting in p.u. is
defined as (V-Bus/GblBaseSelBus) - (V-Line/GblBaseSelLine). A normal setting is
0,10-0,15 p.u.

FreqDiffM and FreqDiffA

The frequency difference level settings, FreqDiffM and FreqDiffA, shall be chosen
depending on the condition in the network. At steady conditions a low frequency
difference setting is needed, where the FreqDiffM setting is used. For autoreclosing a
bigger frequency difference setting is preferable, where the FreqDiffA setting is used.
A typical value for FreqDiffM can be10 mHz, and a typical value for FreqDiffA can be
100-200 mHz.

PhaseDiffM and PhaseDiffA

The phase angle difference level settings, PhaseDiffM and PhaseDiffA, shall also be
chosen depending on conditions in the network. The phase angle setting must be
chosen to allow closing under maximum load condition. A typical maximum value in
heavy-loaded networks can be 45 degrees, whereas in most networks the maximum
occurring angle is below 25 degrees. The PhaseDiffM setting is a limitation to

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 321

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

PhaseDiffA setting. Fluctuations occurring at high speed autoreclosing limit

PhaseDiffA setting.

tSCM and tSCA

The purpose of the timer delay settings, tSCM and tSCA, is to ensure that the
synchrocheck conditions remains constant and that the situation is not due to a
temporary interference. Should the conditions not persist for the specified time, the
delay timer is reset and the procedure is restarted when the conditions are fulfilled
again. Circuit breaker closing is thus not permitted until the synchrocheck situation has
remained constant throughout the set delay setting time. Manual closing is normally
under more stable conditions and a longer operation time delay setting is needed,
where the tSCM setting is used. During auto-reclosing, a shorter operation time delay
setting is preferable, where the tSCA setting is used. A typical value for tSCM can be 1
second and a typical value for tSCA can be 0.1 seconds.

Energizingcheck settings
AutoEnerg and ManEnerg

Two different settings can be used for automatic and manual closing of the circuit
breaker. The settings for each of them are:

• Disabled, the energizing function is disabled.

• DLLB, Dead Line Live Bus, the line voltage is below set value of
VDeadLineEnerg and the bus voltage is above set value of VLIveBusEnerg.
• DBLL, Dead Bus Live Line, the bus voltage is below set value of VDeadBusEnerg
and the line voltage is above set value of VLiveLineEnerg.
• Both, energizing can be done in both directions, DLLB or DBLL.

ManEnergDBDL

If the parameter is set to Enabled, manual closing is also enabled when both line
voltage and bus voltage are below VDeadLineEnerg and VDeadBusEnerg respectively,
and ManEnerg is set to DLLB, DBLL or Both.

VLiveBusEnerg and VLiveLineEnerg

The voltage level settings must be chosen in relation to the bus or line network voltage.
The threshold voltages VLiveBusEnerg and VLiveLineEnerg have to be set lower than
the value at which the network is considered to be energized. A typical value can be
80% of the base voltages.

VDeadBusEnerg and VDeadLineEnerg

322 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

The threshold voltages VDeadBusEnerg and VDeadLineEnerg, have to be set to a

value greater than the value where the network is considered not to be energized. A
typical value can be 40% of the base voltages.

A disconnected line can have a considerable potential due to, for

instance, induction from a line running in parallel, or by being fed via
the extinguishing capacitors in the circuit breakers. This voltage can be
as high as 30% or more of the base line voltage.

Because the setting ranges of the threshold voltages VLiveBusEnerg/VLiveLineEnerg

and VDeadBusEnerg/VDeadLineEnerg partly overlap each other, the setting conditions
may be such that the setting of the non-energized threshold value is higher than that of
the energized threshold value. The parameters must therefore be set carefully to avoid
overlapping.

VMaxEnerg

This setting is used to block the closing when the voltage on the live side is above the
set value of VMaxEnerg.

tAutoEnerg and tManEnerg

The purpose of the timer delay settings, tAutoEnerg and tManEnerg, is to ensure that
the dead side remains de-energized and that the condition is not due to a temporary
interference. Should the conditions not persist for the specified time, the delay timer is
reset and the procedure is restarted when the conditions are fulfilled again. Circuit
breaker closing is thus not permitted until the energizing condition has remained
constant throughout the set delay setting time.

14.2 Autorecloser for 1 phase, 2 phase and/or 3 phase

operation SMBRREC (79) IP14559-1 v6

14.2.1 Identification
M14890-1 v7

Function Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Autorecloser for 1 phase, 2 phase and/or 3 SMBRREC 79
phase
5(0 -->1)
IEC15000204 V1 EN-US

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 323

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

14.2.2 Application M12391-3 v8

Automatic reclosing is a well-established method for the restoration of service in a

power system after a transient line fault. The majority of line faults are flashovers,
which are transient by nature. When the power line is switched off by the operation of
line protection and line breakers, the arc de-ionizes and recovers its ability to withstand
voltage at a somewhat variable rate. Thus, a certain dead time with a de-energized line
is necessary. Line service can then be resumed by automatic reclosing of the line
breakers. The dead time selected should be long enough to ensure a high probability of
arc de-ionization and successful reclosing.

For individual line breakers, auto reclosing equipment, the required circuit breaker
dead time is used to determine the “dead time” setting value. When simultaneous
tripping and reclosing at the two line ends occurs, line dead time is approximately
equal to the auto recloser “dead time”. If the auto reclosing dead time and line “dead
time” differ then, the line will be energized until the breakers at both ends have opened.
Instant of fault

Operates
Operates

Line
Resets

Resets
Fault
protection

Operate
Operate time
time

Closed
Circuit
breaker

Open

Break time Closing time Break time

Contacts separated

Contact closed
Close command
Are extinguishers
Trip command

Fault duration AR open time for breaker Fault duration

Set AR open time Reset time

Auto-reclosing
Reclosing
command

function
Initiate

AR reset
AR

en04000146_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000146 V1 EN-US

Figure 113: Single-shot automatic reclosing at a permanent fault

324 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

Single-pole tripping and single-phase automatic reclosing is a way of limiting the

effect of a single-phase line fault on power system operation. Especially at higher
voltage levels, the majority of faults are of single-phase type (around 90%). To
maintain system stability in power systems with limited meshing or parallel routing
single-phase auto reclosing is of particular value. During the single-phase dead time
the system is still capable of transmitting load on the two healthy phases and the
system is still synchronized. It requires that each circuit breaker pole can be operated
individually, which is usually the case for higher transmission voltages.

A somewhat longer dead time may be required for single-phase reclosing compared to
high-speed three-phase reclosing. This is due to the influence on the fault arc from the
voltage and the current in the non-faulted phases.

To maximize the availability of the power system it is possible to choose single-phase

tripping and automatic reclosing during single-phase faults and three-phase tripping
and automatic reclosing during multi-phase faults. Three-phase automatic reclosing can
be performed with or without the use of synchrocheck.

During the single-phase dead time there is an equivalent "series"-fault in the system
resulting in a flow of zero sequence current. It is therefore necessary to coordinate the
residual current protections (ground fault protection) with the single-phase tripping and
the auto reclosing function. Attention shall also be paid to “pole discrepancy” that
arises when circuit breakers are provided with single-phase operating devices. These
breakers need pole discrepancy protection. They must also be coordinated with the
single-phase auto recloser and blocked during the dead time when a normal
discrepancy occurs. Alternatively, they should use a trip time longer than the set single-
phase dead time.

For the individual line breakers and auto reclosing equipment, the auto reclosing dead
time expression is used. This is the dead time setting for the auto recloser. During
simultaneous tripping and reclosing at the two line ends, auto reclosing dead time is
approximately equal to the line dead time. Otherwise these two times may differ as one
line end might have a slower trip than the other end which means that the line will not
be dead until both ends have opened.

If the fault is permanent, the line protection will trip again when reclosing is attempted
in order to clear the fault.

It is common to use one automatic reclosing function per line circuit breaker (CB).
When one CB per line end is used, then there is one auto- recloser per line end. If auto
reclosers are included in duplicated line protection, which means two auto reclosers per
CB, one should take measures to avoid uncoordinated reclosing commands. In breaker-
and-a-half, double-breaker and ring bus arrangements, two CBs per line end are
operated. One auto recloser per CB is recommended. Arranged in such a way, that
sequential reclosing of the two CBs can be arranged with a priority circuit available in
the auto recloser. In case of a permanent fault and unsuccessful reclosing of the first

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 325

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

CB, reclosing of the second CB is cancelled and thus the stress on the power system is
limited.

The auto recloser can be selected to perform single-phase and/or three-phase automatic
reclosing from several single-shot to multiple-shot reclosing programs. The three-phase
auto reclosing dead time can be set to give either High-Speed Automatic Reclosing
(HSAR) or Delayed Automatic Reclosing (DAR). These expressions, HSAR and DAR,
are mostly used for three-phase auto reclosing as single-phase auto reclosing is always
high speed to avoid maintaining the unsymmetrical condition. HSAR usually means a
dead time of less than 1 second.

In power transmission systems it is common practice to apply single- and/or three-

phase, single-shot auto reclosing. In sub-transmission and distribution systems tripping
and auto reclosing are usually three-phase. The mode of automatic reclosing varies
however. Single-shot and multi-shot are in use. The first shot can have a short delay,
HSAR, or a longer delay, DAR. The second and following reclosing shots have a rather
long delay. When multiple shots are used the dead time must harmonize with the
breaker duty-cycle capacity.

Automatic reclosing is usually started by the line protection and in particular by

instantaneous tripping of such protection. The auto recloser can be inhibited (blocked)
when certain protection functions detecting permanent faults, such as shunt reactor,
cable or busbar protection are in operation. Back-up protection zones indicating faults
outside the own line are typically connected to inhibit the auto recloser.

Automatic reclosing should not be attempted when closing a CB and energizing a line
onto a fault (SOTF), except when multiple-shots are used where shots 2 etc. will be
started at SOTF. Likewise a CB in a multi-breaker busbar arrangement which was not
closed when a fault occurred should not be closed by operation of the auto recloser.
Auto reclosing is often combined with a release condition from synchronism check and
dead line or dead busbar check. In order to limit the stress on turbo generator sets from
auto reclosing onto a permanent fault, one can arrange to combine auto reclosing with
a synchronism check on line terminals close to such power stations and attempt
energizing from the side furthest away from the power station and perform the
synchronism check at the local end if the energizing was successful.

Transmission protection systems are usually sub-divided and provided with two
redundant protection IEDs. In such systems it is common to provide auto reclosing in
only one of the sub-systems as the requirement is for fault clearance and a failure to
reclose because of the auto recloser being out of service is not considered a major
disturbance. If two auto reclosers are provided on the same breaker, the application
must be carefully checked and normally one must be the master and be connected to
inhibit the other auto recloser if it has started. This inhibit can, for example, be done
from an auto recloser for 3-phase operation in progress signal.

326 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

When Single and/or three phase auto reclosing is considered, there are a number of
cases where the tripping shall be three phase anyway. For example:

• Evolving fault where the fault during the dead-time spreads to another phase. The
other two phases must then be tripped and a three phase dead-time and auto
reclose initiated
• Permanent fault
• Fault during three-phase dead time
• Auto recloser out of service or circuit breaker not ready for an auto reclosing cycle

“Prepare three-pole tripping” is then used to switch the tripping to three-pole. This
signal is generated by the auto-recloser and connected to the trip function block and
also connected outside the IED through IO when a common auto-recloser is provided
for two sub-systems. An alternative signal “Prepare 1 Pole tripping” is also provided
and can be used as an alternative when the autorecloser is shared with another
subsystem. This provides a fail safe connection so that even a failure in the IED with
the auto-recloser will mean that the other sub-system will start a three-pole trip.

A permanent fault will cause the line protection to trip again when it recloses in an
attempt to energize the line.

The auto reclosing function allows a number of parameters to be adjusted.

Examples:

• number of auto reclosing shots

• auto reclosing program
• auto reclosing dead times for each shot

14.2.2.1 Auto reclosing operation Off and On M12391-91 v6

Operation of the automatic recloser can be set to Off and On by a setting parameter or
by external control. The setting parameter Operation = Disabled, or Enabled sets the
function to Off or On. With the settings Operation = Enabled and ExternalCtrl =
Enabled , the control is made by input signal pulses to the inputs On and Off, for
example, from a control system or by a control switch.

When the auto recloser is set On, the SETON output is set, and the auto recloser
becomes operative if other conditions such as circuit breaker is closed and circuit
breaker is ready are also fulfilled, the READY output is activated (high). Then the auto
recloser is ready to accept a start.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 327

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

14.2.2.2 Initiate auto reclosing and conditions for start of a reclosing cycle M12391-94 v5

The usual way to start an auto reclosing cycle, or sequence, is to start it at selective
tripping by line protection by applying a signal to the RI input. Starting signals can be
either, general trip signals or, only the conditions for differential, distance protection
zone 1 and distance protection aided trip. In some cases also directional ground fault
protection aided trip can be connected to start an auto reclose attempt. If general trip is
used to start the auto recloser it is important to block it from other functions that should
not start an auto reclosing sequence.

In cases where one wants to differentiate three-phase auto reclosing dead time, for
different power system configuration or at tripping by different protection stages, one
can also use the RI_HS input (initiate high-speed reclosing). When initiating RI_HS,
the auto reclosing dead time for three-phase shot 1, t1 3PhHS is used and the closing is
done without checking the synchrocheck condition.

A number of conditions need to be fulfilled for the start to be accepted and a new auto
reclosing cycle to be started. They are linked to dedicated inputs. The inputs are:
• CBREADY, circuit breaker ready for a reclosing cycle, for example, charged
operating gear.
• CBCLOSED to ensure that the circuit breaker was closed when the line fault
occurred and start was applied.
• No signal at INHIBIT input that is, no blocking or inhibit signal present. After the
start has been accepted, it is latched in and an internal signal “start” is set. It can be
interrupted by certain events, like an “inhibit” signal.

14.2.2.3 Initiate auto reclosing from circuit breaker open information M12391-100 v6

If a user wants to initiate auto reclosing from the circuit breaker open position instead
of from protection trip signals, the function offers such a possibility. This starting mode
is selected with the setting parameter StartByCBOpen=Enabled. Typically a circuit
breaker auxiliary contact of type NO (normally open) is connected to CBCLOSED and
RI. When the signal changes from circuit breaker closed to circuit breaker open an auto
reclosing start pulse is generated and latched in the function, subject to the usual
checks. The auto reclosing sequence continues then as usual. Signals from manual
tripping and other functions, which shall prevent auto reclosing, need to be connected
to the INHIBIT input.

14.2.2.4 Blocking of the auto recloser M12391-103 v4

Auto reclose attempts are expected to take place only for faults on the own line. The
auto recloser must be blocked by activating the INHIBIT input for the following
conditions:

328 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

• Tripping from delayed distance protection zones

• Tripping from back-up protection functions
• Tripping from breaker failure function
• Intertrip received from remote end circuit breaker failure function
• Busbar protection tripping

Depending of the starting principle (general trip or only instantaneous trip) adopted
above the delayed and back-up zones might not be required. Breaker failure trip local
and remote must however always be connected.

14.2.2.5 Control of the auto reclosing dead time for shot 1 M12391-113 v5

Up to four different time settings can be used for the first shot, and one extension time.
There are separate settings for single-, two- and three-phase auto reclosing dead time,
t1 1Ph, t1 2Ph, t1 3Ph. If no particular input signal is applied, and an auto reclosing
program with single-phase auto reclosing is selected, the auto reclosing dead time t1
1Ph will be used. If one of the TR2P or TR3P inputs is activated in connection with the
start, the auto reclosing dead time for two-phase or three-phase auto reclosing is used.
There is also a separate time setting facility for three-phase high-speed auto reclosing
without synchrocheck, t1 3PhHS, available for use when required. It is activated by the
RI_HS input.

A time extension delay, tExtended t1, can be added to the dead time delay for the first
shot. It is intended to come into use if the communication channel for permissive line
protection is lost. In a case like this there can be a significant time difference in fault
clearance at the two line ends, where a longer auto reclosing dead time can be useful.
This time extension is controlled by the setting Extended t1 = On and the PLCLOST
input. If this functionality is used the auto recloser start must also be allowed from
distance protection zone 2 time delayed trip. Time extension delay is not possible to
add to the three-phase high-speed auto reclosing dead time, t1 3PhHS.

14.2.2.6 Long trip signal M12391-117 v4

In normal circumstances the auto recloser is started with a protection trip command
which resets quickly due to fault clearing. The user can set a maximum start pulse
duration tLongStartInh. This start pulse duration time is controlled by setting
LongStartInhib.

When start pulse duration signal is longer than set maximum start pulse duration, the
auto reclosing sequence interrupts in the same way as for a signal to the INHIBIT input.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 329

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

14.2.2.7 Maximum number of reclosing shots M12391-120 v7

The maximum number of auto reclosing shots in an auto reclosing cycle is selected by
the setting NoOfShots. A maximum of five shots can be done. The type of auto
reclosing used at the first auto reclosing shot is set by the setting ARMode. The first
alternative is three-phase auto reclosing. The other alternatives include some single-
phase or two-phase auto reclosing. Usually there is no two-pole tripping arranged, and
then there will be no two-phase auto reclosing.

The decision for single- and three-phase trip is also made in the tripping logic
(SMPTTRC) function block where the setting 3 phase, 1ph/3Ph (or 1ph/2ph/3Ph) is
selected.

14.2.2.8 ARMode = 3ph, (normal setting for a three-phase shot) M12391-124 v5

Three-phase auto reclosing, one to five shots according to the NoOfShots setting. The
prepare three-pole trip PREP3P output is always set (high). A trip operation is made as
a three-pole trip for all type of faults. The auto reclosing is as a three-phase auto
reclosing as in mode 1/2/3ph described below. All signals, blockings, inhibits, timers,
requirements and so on, are the same as in the example described below.

14.2.2.9 ARMode = 1/2/3ph M12391-127 v8

Single-phase, two-phase or three-phase auto reclosing first shot, followed by 3-phase

auto reclosing shots, if selected. Here, the auto recloser is assumed to be "On" and
"Ready". The circuit breaker is closed and the operation gear ready (operating energy
stored). START input (or STARTHS) is received and sealed-in. The READY output is
reset (set to false). ACTIVE output is set.

• If TR2P and TR3P inputs are low (i.e. single-phase trip): The timer for single-
phase auto reclosing dead time is started and the 1PT1 output (single-phase
reclosing in progress) is activated. It can be used to suppress pole disagreement
and earth-fault protection trip during the single-phase dead time interval..
• If TR2P input is high and TR3P input is low (i.e. two-phase trip): The timer for
two-phase auto reclosing dead time is started and the 2PT1 output (two-phase
reclosing in progress) is activated.
• If TR3P input is high (i.e. three-phase trip): The timer for three-phase auto
reclosing dead time, t1 3Ph or t1 3PhHS, is started depending on if START or
STARTHS input has been activated and 3PT1 output (three-phase reclosing shot 1
in progress) is set..

While any of the auto reclosing dead time timers are running, the INPROGR output is
activated. When the dead time runs out, the respective internal signal is transmitted to
the output module for further checks and to issue a breaker closing command.

330 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

When a circuit breaker closing command is issued, the prepare three-pole output trip is
set. When issuing a circuit breaker closing command the tReclaim timer is started. If no
tripping takes place during that time, the auto recloser resets to the “Ready” state and
the ACTIVE output resets. If the first reclosing shot fails, a three-phase trip will be
initiated and three-phase reclosing can follow, if selected.

14.2.2.10 ARMode = 1/2ph, 1-phase or 2-phase reclosing in the first shot M12391-136 v5

At single-pole or two-pole tripping, the operation is as in the example described above,

program mode 1/2/3ph. If the first reclosing shot fails, a three-pole trip will be issued
and three-pole auto reclosing can follow, if selected. In the event of a three-pole trip,
TR3P input high, the auto recloser will be inhibited and no auto reclosing takes place.

14.2.2.11 ARMode = 1ph+1*2ph, 1-phase or 2-phase reclosing in the first shot M12391-139 v5

At single-pole tripping, the operation is as in the above described example, program

mode 1/2/3ph. The single-pole auto reclosing attempt can be followed by three-pole
reclosing, if selected. At two-pole trip, a failure of a two-pole auto reclosing attempt
will inhibit the auto recloser. No more shots are attempted. If the first trip is a three-
pole trip, the auto-reclosing will be inhibited. No more shots are attempted. The
expression “1*2ph” should be understood as “Only one shot at two-phase auto
reclosing”.

14.2.2.12 ARMode = 1/2ph + 1*3ph, 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase reclosing in the

first shot GUID-9C2FB801-F324-465E-8FD2-715A9C3D0BD8 v2

At single-pole or two-pole tripping, the operation is as in the example described above,

program mode 1/2/3ph. If the first reclosing shot fails, a three-pole trip will be issued
and three-pole reclosing will follow, if selected. At three-pole trip, a failure of a three-
pole auto reclosing attempt will inhibit the auto recloser. No more shots are attempted.
The expression “1*3ph” should be understood as “Only one shot at three-pole auto
reclosing”.

14.2.2.13 ARMode = 1ph + 1*2/3ph, 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase reclosing in the

first shot M12391-146 v5

At single-pole or two-pole tripping, the operation is as in the above described example,

program mode 1/2/3ph. If the first reclosing shot fails, a three-pole trip will be issued
and three-pole reclosing will follow, if selected. At two-pole or three-pole trip a failure
of a two-pole or three-pole auto reclosing attempt will inhibit the auto recloser. No
more shots are attempted. The expression “1*2/3ph” should be understood as “Only
one shot at two-pole or three-pole auto reclosing”.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 331

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

Table 32: Type of reclosing shots at different settings of ARMode or integer inputs to MODEINT
MODEINT (integer) ARMode Type of fault 1st shot 2nd-5th shot
1ph 3ph 3ph
1 3ph 2ph 3ph 3ph
3ph 3ph 3ph
1ph 1ph 3ph
2 1/2/3ph 2ph 2ph 3ph
3ph 3ph 3ph
1ph 1ph 3ph
3 1/2ph 2ph 2ph 3ph
3ph ..... .....
1ph 1ph 3ph
4 1ph + 1*2ph 2ph 2ph .....
3ph ..... .....
1ph 1ph 3ph
5 1/2ph + 1*3ph 2ph 2ph 3ph
3ph 3ph .....
1ph 1ph 3ph
6 1ph + 1*2/3ph 2ph 2ph .....
3ph 3ph .....

A start of a new auto reclosing cycle during the set “reset time” is blocked when the set
number of reclosing shots have been reached.

14.2.2.14 External selection of auto reclosing mode M12391-241 v5

The auto reclosing mode can be selected by use of available logic function blocks.
Below is an example where the choice of mode, ARMode=3ph or ARMode=1/2/3ph, is
done from a hardware function key at the front of the IED, but alternatively there can
for example, be a physical selector switch on the front of the panel which is connected
to a binary to integer function block (BTIGAPC).

The connection example for selection of the auto reclosing mode is shown in Figure
114.

332 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

SLGGIO

PSTO
INTONE
SMBRREC (79)
NAME1 SWPOSN MODEINT
3
1/3 NAME2

ANSI09000168_1_en.vsd
ANSI09000168 V1 EN-US

Figure 114: Selection of the auto-reclose mode from a hardware functional key in
front of the IED

14.2.2.15 Auto reclosing reset timer M12391-202 v4

The tReset timer defines the time it takes from issue of the breaker closing command,
until the auto recloser resets. Should a new trip occur during this time, it is treated as a
continuation of the first fault. The reclaim timer is started when the circuit breaker
closing command is given.

14.2.2.16 Pulsing of the circuit breaker closing command and counter M12391-205 v4

The circuit breaker closing command, CLOSECB is given as a pulse with a duration set
by the tPulse setting. For circuit breakers without an anti-pumping function, close
pulse cutting can be used. It is selected by the CutPulse setting. In case of a new start
pulse (trip), the breaker closing command pulse is then cut (interrupted). The minimum
breaker closing command pulse length is always 50ms. At the issue of the breaker
closing command, the appropriate auto recloser operation counter is incremented.
There is a counter for each type of auto reclosing command and one for the total
number of auto reclosing commands.

14.2.2.17 Transient fault M12391-208 v4

After the breaker closing command the reclaim timer keeps running for the set
tReclaim time. If no start (trip) occurs within this time, the auto recloser will reset. The
circuit breaker remains closed and the operating gear recharges. The CBCLOSED and
CBREADY input signals will be set.

14.2.2.18 Permanent fault and reclosing unsuccessful signal M12391-211 v5

If a new start occurs, and the number of auto reclosing shots is set to 1, and a new
START or TRSOTF input signal appears, after the circuit breaker closing command, the
UNSUCCL output (unsuccessful reclosing) is set high. The timer for the first shot can
no longer be started. Depending on the set number of auto reclosing shots further shots

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 333

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

may be made or the auto reclosing sequence is ended. After reclaim timer time-out the
auto recloser resets, but the circuit breaker remains open. The circuit breaker closed
information through the CBCLOSED input is missing. Thus, the auto recloser is not
ready for a new auto reclosing cycle. Normally, the UNSUCCL output appears when a
new start is received after the last auto reclosing shot has been made and the auto
recloser is inhibited. The output signal resets after reclaim time. The “unsuccessful”
signal can also be made to depend on the circuit breaker position input. The
UnsucClByCBChk setting should then be set to CBCheck, and the tUnsucCl timer
should be set too. If the circuit breaker does not respond to the breaker closing
command and does not close, but remains open, the UNSUCCL output is set high after
the set tUnsucCl time. The UNSUCCL output can for example, be used in multi-
breaker arrangement to cancel the auto reclosing for the second circuit breaker, if the
first circuit breaker closed onto a persistent fault. It can also be used to generate a lock-
out of manual circuit breaker closing until the operator has reset the lock-out, see
separate section.

14.2.2.19 Lock-out initiation M12391-214 v8

In many cases there is a requirement that a lock-out is generated when the auto
reclosing attempt fails. This is done with logic connected to the in- and outputs of the
auto recloser and connected to binary I/O as required. Many alternative ways of
performing the logic exist depending on whether manual circuit breaker closing is
interlocked in the IED, whether an external physical lock-out relay exists and whether
the reset is hardwired, or carried out by means of communication. There are also
different alternatives regarding what shall generate lock-out. Examples of questions
are:

• shall back-up time delayed trip give lock-out (normally yes)

• shall lock-out be generated when closing onto a fault (mostly)
• shall lock-out be generated when the auto recloser is Off at the fault or for
example, in single-phase auto recloser mode and the fault was multi-phase
(normally not as no closing attempt has been given)
• shall lock-out be generated if the circuit breaker did not have sufficient operating
power for an auto reclosing sequence (normally not as no auto closing attempt has
been given)

In Figures 115 and 116 the logic shows how a closing lock-out logic can be designed
with the lock-out relay as an external relay alternatively with the lock-out created
internally with the manual closing going through the synchrocheck function. An
example of lock-out logic.

334 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

SMBRREC (79)
BJ-TRIP
ZCVPSOF-TRIP OR INHIBIT

UNSUCCL

SMBO
OR ELECTRICAL RESET
RELAY
Lock-out
CCRBRF (50BF) RXMD1
11
TRBU SET 21
12
RESET

MAIN ZAK CLOSE CLOSE COMMAND

ANSI05000315_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000315 V2 EN-US

Figure 115: Lock-out arranged with an external lock-out relay

SMBRREC (79)
BJ-TRIP
ZCVPSOF-TRIP OR INHIBIT

UNSUCCL
SMPPTRC (94)

OR SETLKOUT

CLLOUT
CCRBRF (50BF) SOFTWARE RESET LOCK-OUT RSTLOUT
OR IO RESET
BJTRIP

MAN CLOSE SMBO

OR AND
SMBRREC (79) CLOSE

SESRSYN (25)

AUTO STOP
CLOSE COMMAND
OR
MAN ENOK

ANSI05000316_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000316 V2 EN-US

Figure 116: Lock-out arranged with internal logic with manual closing going through
in IED

14.2.2.20 Evolving fault M12391-217 v4

An evolving fault starts as a single-phase fault which leads to single-pole tripping and
then the fault spreads to another phase. The second fault is then cleared by three-pole
tripping.

The auto recloser will first receive a start signal (START) without any three-phase
signal (TR3P). The auto recloser will start a single-phase auto reclosing sequence, if
programmed to do so. At the evolving fault clearance there will be a new START signal
and three-phase trip information, TR3P. The single-phase auto reclosing sequence will

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 335

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

then be stopped, and instead the timer, t1 3Ph, for three-pole auto reclosing will be
started from zero. The sequence will continue as a three-pole auto reclosing sequence,
if it is a selected alternative reclosing mode. The second fault which can be single-
phase is tripped three-pole because the trip function (SMPPTRC) in the IED has an
evolving fault timer which ensures that second fault is always tripped three-pole. For
other types of relays where the relays do not include this function, the PREP3PH
output (or the inverted PERMIT1PH output) is used to prepare the other sub-system for
three-phase tripping. This signal will, for evolving fault situations, be activated a short
time after the first trip has reset and will thus ensure that new starts (trips) will be three
phase.

14.2.2.21 Automatic continuation of the auto reclosing sequence M12391-223 v5

The auto recloser can be programmed to proceed to the next auto reclosing shots (if
multiple shots are selected) even if start signals are not received from protection
functions, but the circuit breaker is still not closed. This is done by setting AutoCont =
Enabled and tAutoContWait to the required delay for the function to proceed without a
new start.

14.2.2.22 Thermal overload protection holding the auto recloser back M12391-226 v3

If the THOLHOLD input (thermal overload protection holding auto reclosing back) is
activated, it will keep the auto recloser on a hold until it is reset. There may thus be a
considerable delay between start of the auto recloser and the breaker closing command
to the circuit breaker. An external logic limiting the time and sending an inhibit to the
INHIBIT input can be used. The input can also be used to set the auto recloser on hold
for a longer or shorter period.

14.2.3 Setting guidelines IP14929-1 v1

14.2.3.1 Configuration M12399-3 v3

Use the PCM600 configuration tool to configure signals.

Auto recloser function parameters are set via the local HMI or Parameter Setting Tool
(PST). Parameter Setting Tool is a part of PCM600.

Recommendations for input signals M12399-7 v10

Please see Figure 117, Figure 118 and Figure 119 and default factory configuration for
examples.

336 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

BLKOFF
Used to unblock the auto recloser when it has been blocked due to activating BLKON
input or by an unsuccessful auto reclosing attempt if the BlockByUnsucCl setting is set
to On.

BLKON
Used to block the auto recloser, for example, when certain special service conditions
arise. When used, blocking must be reset with BLKOFF.

CBCLOSED and CBREADY

These binary inputs should pick-up information from the circuit breaker. At three
operating gears in the circuit breaker (single pole operated circuit breakers) the
connection should be “All poles closed” (series connection of the NO contacts) or “At
least one pole open” (parallel connection of NC contacts). The CBREADY is a signal
meaning that the circuit breaker is ready for an auto reclosing operation, either Close-
Open (CO), or Open-Close-Open (OCO). If the available signal is of type “circuit
breaker not charged” or “not ready”, an inverter can be inserted in front of the
CBREADY input.

INHIBIT
To this input shall be connected signals that interrupt an auto reclosing cycle or prevent
a start from being accepted. Such signals can come from protection for a line
connected shunt reactor, from transfer trip receive, from back-up protection functions,
busbar protection trip or from breaker failure protection. When the circuit breaker open
position is set to start the auto recloser, then manual opening must also be connected
here. The inhibit is often a combination of signals from external IEDs via the I/O and
internal functions. An OR-gate is then used for the combination.

MODEINT
The auto reclosing mode is selected with the ARMode setting. As an alternative to the
setting, the mode can be selected by connecting an integer, for example from function
block B16I, to the MODEINT input. The six possible modes are described in table 6
with their corresponding MODEINT integer value. When a valid integer is connected
to the input MODEINT the selected ARMode setting will be invalid and the MODEINT
input value will be used instead. The selected mode is reported as an integer on the
MODE output.

ON and OFF
These inputs can be connected to binary inputs or to a communication interface block
for external control.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 337

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

PLCLOST
This is intended for line protection permissive signal channel lost (fail) for example,
PLC= Power Line Carrier failure. It can be connected, when it is required to prolong
the auto reclosing dead time when communication is not working, that is, one line end
might trip with a zone2 delay. If this is used the auto recloser must also be started from
zone2 time delayed trip.

RESET
Used to reset the auto recloser to start conditions. Possible hold by thermal overload
protection will be reset. Circuit breaker position will be checked and time settings will
be restarted with their set times.

RSTCOUNT
There is a counter for each type of auto reclosing and one for the total number of
circuit breaker close commands issued. All counters are reset with the RSTCOUNT
input or by an IEC 61850 command.

SKIPHS
The high-speed auto reclosing sequence can be skipped and be replaced by normal auto
reclosing sequence by activating SKIPHS input before the STARTHS high-speed start
input is activated. The replacement is done for the 1st shot.

RI
The START input should be connected to the trip function (SMPPTRC) output, which
starts the auto recloser for 1/2/3-phase operation. It can also be connected to a binary
input for start from an external contact. A logical OR-gate can be used to combine the
number of start sources.

If StartByCBOpen is used, the circuit breaker open condition shall also

be connected to the RI input.

RI_HS, Initiate high-speed auto reclosing

It may be used when one wants to use two different dead times in different protection
trip operations. This input starts the dead time t1 3PhHS. High-speed reclosing shot 1
started by this input is without a synchronization check.

SYNC
This input is connected to the internal synchronism check function when required or to
an external device for synchronism. If neither internal nor external synchronism or
energizing check is required, it can be connected to a permanently high source, TRUE.

338 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

The signal is required for three-phase shots 1-5 to proceed (Note! Not the high-speed
step).

THOLHOLD
Signal “Thermal overload protection holding back auto reclosing”. It can be connected
to a thermal overload protection trip signal which resets only when the thermal content
has fallen to an acceptable level, for example, 70%. As long as the signal is high,
indicating that the line is hot, the auto reclosing is held back. When the signal resets, a
reclosing cycle will continue. Observe that this have a considerable delay. Input can
also be used for other purposes if for some reason the auto reclosing shot needs to be
halted.

TR2P and TR3P

They are usually connected to the corresponding output of the trip function block. They
control the choice of dead time and the auto reclosing cycle according to the selected
program. Signal TR2P needs to be connected only if the trip function block has been
selected to give 1/2/3 pole trip and an auto reclosing cycle with two phase reclosing is
foreseen.

TRSOTF
This is the signal “Trip by Switch Onto Fault”. It is usually connected to the “switch
onto fault” output of line protection if multi-shot auto reclosing attempts are used. The
input will start the shots two to five.

WAIT
Used to hold back reclosing of the “low priority unit” during sequential auto reclosing.
See “Recommendation for multi-breaker arrangement” below. The signal is activated
from output WFMASTER on the second breaker auto recloser in multi-breaker
arrangements.

ZONESTEP
The ZONESTEP input is used when coordination between local auto reclosers and
down stream auto reclosers is needed. When this input is activated the auto recloser
increases its actual shot number by one and enters “reclaim time” status. If a start is
received during this reclaim time the auto recloser is proceeding as usual but with the
dead time for the increased shot number. Every new increase of the shot number needs
a new activation of the ZONESTEP input. This functionality is controlled by the setting
ZoneSeqCoord.

Recommendations for output signals M12399-46 v9

Please see Figure 117, Figure 118 and Figure 119 and default factory configuration for
examples.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 339

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

1PT1 and 2PT1

Indicates that single-pole or two-pole auto reclosing is in progress. It is used to
temporarily block an ground-fault and/or pole disagreement function during the single-
pole or two-pole open interval.

3PT1, 3PT2, 3PT3, 3PT4 and 3PT5

Indicates that three-pole auto reclosing shots one to five are in progress. The signals
can be used as an indication of progress or for own logic.

ABORTED
The ABORTED output indicates that the auto recloser is inhibited while it is in one of
the following internal states:
• inProgress: auto recloser is started and dead time is in progress
• reclaimTimeStarted: the circuit breaker closing command has started the reclaim
timer
• wait: an auto recloser, acting as slave, is waiting for a release from the master to
proceed with its own reclosing sequence

ACTIVE
Indicates that the auto recloser is active, from start until end of reset time.

BLOCKED
Indicates that auto recloser is temporarily or permanently blocked.

CLOSECMD
Connect to a binary output for circuit breaker closing command.

COUNT1P, COUNT2P, COUNT3P1, COUNT3P2, COUNT3P3,

COUNT3P4 and COUNT3P5
Indicates the number of auto reclosing shots made for respective shot.

COUNTAR
Indicates the total number of auto reclosing shots made.

INHIBOUT
If the INHIBIT input is activated it is reported on the INHIBOUT output.

INPROGR
Indicates that an auto recloser sequence is in progress, from start until circuit breaker
close command.

340 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

MODE
When a valid integer is connected to the MODEINT input, the selected ARMode setting
will be invalid and the MODEINT input value will be used instead. The selected mode
is reported as an integer on the MODE output. The six possible modes are described in
Table 32 with their corresponding MODEINT integer value.

PERMIT1P
Permit single-pole trip is the inverse of PREP3P. It can be connected to a binary output
relay for connection to external protection or trip relays. In case of a total loss of
auxiliary power, the output relay drops and does not allow single-pole trip.

PREP3P
Prepare three-pole trip is usually connected to the trip block to force a coming trip to
be a three-pole one. If the auto recloser cannot make a single-pole or two-pole auto
reclosing, the tripping should be three-pole.

READY
Indicates that the auto recloser is ready for a new and complete auto reclosing
sequence. It can be connected to the zone extension if a line protection should have
extended zone reach before auto reclosing.

SETON
Indicates that auto recloser is switched on and operative.

SUCCL
If the circuit breaker closing command is given and the circuit breaker is closed within
the set time interval tUnsucCl, the SUCCL output is activated after the set time interval
tSuccessful.

SYNCFAIL
The SYNCFAIL output indicates that the auto recloser is inhibited because the
synchrocheck or energizing check condition has not been fulfilled within the set time
interval, tSync. Also ABORTED output will be activated.

UNSUCCL
Indicates unsuccessful reclosing.

WFMASTER
Wait from master is used in high priority units to hold back auto reclosing of the low
priority unit during sequential auto reclosing. Refer to the recommendation for multi-
breaker arrangements in Figure 119.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 341

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

Connection and setting examples

Figure 117 is showing an example of how to connect the auto recloser when used for
three-pole auto reclosing and Figure 118 is showing an example of how to connect the
auto recloser when used for single-pole, two-pole or three-pole auto reclosing.

IOM IOM
INPUT SMBRREC (79) OUTPUT
xx ON BLOCKED xx
xx OFF SETON xx
xx BLKON INPROGR xx
xx BLKOFF ACTIVE xx
xx INHIBIT UNSUCCL xx
xx SUCCL xx
xx CBREADY xx
xx 52a xx
xx PLCLOST CLOSECMD xx
xx xx
RESET PERMIT1P
PREP3P
PROTECTION READY
xxxx-TRIP OR RI
RI_HS 1PT1
SKIPHS 2PT1
ZCVPSOF-TRIP 3PT1
ZMQPDIS (21)--TRIP OR TRSOTF 3PT2
3PT3
THOLHOLD
3PT4
TR2P
TRUE 3PT5
TR3P
SESRSYN (25)-AUTOOK
SYNC
WAIT
RSTCOUNT
WFMASTER

ANSI04000135-3-en.vsd
ANSI04000135 V3 EN-US

Figure 117: Example of I/O-signal connections at a three-phase auto reclosing

sequence

342 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

IOM IOM
INPUT SMBRREC (79) OUTPUT
xx ON BLOCKED xx
xx OFF SETON xx
xx BLKON INPROGR xx
xx BLKOFF ACTIVE xx
xx INHIBIT UNSUCCL xx
xx SUCCL xx
xx CBREADY xx
xx 52a xx
xx PLCLOST CLOSECB xx
xx PERMIT1P xx
RESET
PREP3P TRIP-P3PTR
PROTECTION RI READY
xxxx-TRIP OR 1PT1 GROUND RELAYS
OR BLOCK
2PT1

RI_HS 3PT1
3PT2
SKIPHS
ZCVPSOF-TRIP 3PT3
TRSOTF 3PT4
ZMQPDIS (21)-TRIP OR
3PT5
THOLHOLD
TRIP-TR2P
TR2P
TRIP-TR3P TR3P
SESRSYN (25)-AUTOOK SYNC
WAIT
RSTCOUNT
WFMASTER

ANSI04000136-3-en.vsd
ANSI04000136 V3 EN-US

Figure 118: Example of I/O-signal connections for a single-phase, two-phase or

three-phase auto reclosing sequence

Setting recommendations for multi-breaker arrangements M12399-87 v6

Sequential reclosing in multi-breaker arrangements, like breaker-and-a-half, double

breaker and ring bus, is achieved by giving the two line breakers different priorities.
Refer to figure 119. In a single breaker arrangement the setting is Priority = None. In a
multi-breaker arrangement the setting for the first circuit breaker, the master, is Priority
= High and for the other circuit breaker Priority = Low.

While the auto reclosing of the master is in progress, it issues the WFMASTER output.
After an unsuccessful reclosing the WFMASTER output is also maintained by the
UNSUCCL signal. When activating the WAIT input, in the auto recloser set as slave,
every dead timer is changed to the value of setting tSlaveDeadTime and holds back the
auto reclosing operation. When the WAIT input is reset at the time of a successful
reclosing of the first circuit breaker, the slave is released to continue the reclosing
sequence after the set tSlaveDeadTime. The reason for shortening the time, for the
normal dead timers with the value of tSlaveDeadTime, is to give the slave permission
to react almost immediately when the WAIT input resets. The mimimum settable time

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 343

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

for tSlaveDeadTime is 0.1sec because both master and slave should not send the
breaker closing command at the same time. The slave should take the duration of the
breaker closing time of the master into consideration before sending the breaker
closing command. A setting tWaitForMaster sets a maximum wait time for the WAIT
input to reset. If the wait time expires, the reclosing cycle of the slave is inhibited. If
auto reclosing of the first breaker is unsuccessful, the UNSUCCL output connected to
the INHIBIT input of the slave unit interrupts the auto reclosing sequence of the latter.

The signals can be cross-connected to allow simple changing of the

priority by just setting the High and the Low priorities without
changing the configuration. The input 52a for each circuit breaker is
important in multi-breaker arrangements to ensure that the circuit
breaker was closed at the beginning of the cycle. If the High priority
circuit breaker is not closed the High priority moves to the low priority
circuit breaker.

344 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

Terminal ‘‘ Master ”
Priority = High
SMBRREC (79)
ON BLOCKED
OFF SETON
BLKON INPROGR
BLKOFF ACTIVE
INHIBIT UNSUCCL
RESET SUCCL
PLCLOST READY
RI CB1 x
CLOSEMD
RI_HS
PERMIT1P
SKIPHS
PREP3P
THOLHOLD
TRSOTF 1PT1
2PT1
CBREADY 3PT1
52a 3PT2
SYNC 3PT3
3PT4
WAIT 3PT5
RSTCOUNT
WFMASTER

Terminal ‘‘ Slave ”
Priority = Low

SMBRREC (79)
ON BLOCKED
OFF SETON
BLKON INPROGR
BLOCKOFF ACTIVE
INHIBIT
UNSUCCL
RESET
SUCCL
PLCLOST READY
RI x
CLOSEMD CB2
RI_HS
SKIPHS PERMIT1P
PREP3P
TRSOTF
THOLHOLD 1PT1
2PT1
CBREADY
3PT1
52a
3PT2
SYNC 3PT3
WAIT 3PT4
3PT5
WFMASTER

*) Other input/output signals as in previous single

breaker arrangements

ANSI04000137-3-en.vsd
ANSI04000137 V3 EN-US

Figure 119: Additional input and output signals at multi-breaker arrangement. The
connections can be made "symmetrical" to make it possible to control
the priority by the settings, Priority: High/Low

14.2.3.2 Auto recloser settings GUID-74980A07-CF89-488F-AB17-E5351D0032EE v1

The settings for the auto recloser are set using the local HMI (LHMI) or PCM600.

This setting guideline describes the settings of the auto recloser using the LHMI.

The settings for the auto recloser are found under Main menu/Settings/IED Settings/
Control/AutoRecloser(79,5(0->1))/SMBRREC(79,5(0->)):X and have been divided
into four different setting groups: General, CircuitBreaker, DeadTime and MasterSlave.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 345

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

General settings
Operation: The operation of the auto recloser can be switched Enabled or Disabled.

ExternalCtrl: This setting makes it possible to switch the auto recloser On or Off using
an external switch via IO or communication ports.

ARMode: There are six different possibilities in the selection of auto reclosing
programs. The type of auto reclosing used for different kinds of faults depends on the
power system configuration and the users practices and preferences. When the circuit
breaker only have three-pole operation, then three-pole auto reclosing has to be chosen.
This is usually the case in sub-transmission and distribution lines. Three-pole tripping
and reclosing for all types of faults is also widely accepted in completely meshed
power systems. In transmission systems with few parallel circuits, single-pole
reclosing for single-phase faults is an attractive alternative for maintaining service and
system stability.

AutoContinue: Automatic continuation to the next shot if the circuit breaker is not
closed within the set time of tAutoContWait. The normal setting is AutoContinue =
Disabled.

tAutoContWait: This is the length in time the auto recloser waits to see if the circuit
breaker is closed when AutoContinue is set to Enabled. Normally, the setting of
tAutoContWait can be 2 sec.

StartByCBOpen: The normal setting Disabled is used when the function is started by
protection trip signals. If set Enabled the start of the auto recloser is controlled by an
circuit breaker auxiliary contact.

LongStartInhib: Usually the protection trip command, used as an auto reclosing start
signal, resets quickly as the fault is cleared. A prolonged trip command may depend on
a circuit breaker failing to clear the fault. A protection trip signal present when the
circuit breaker is reclosed will result in a new trip. The user can set a maximum start
pulse duration time tLongStartInh. This start pulse duration time is controlled by the
LongStartInhib setting. When the start pulse duration signal is longer than set
maximum start pulse duration, the auto reclosing sequence interrupts in the same way
as for a signal to the INHIBIT input.

tLongStartInh: The user can set a maximum start pulse duration time tLongStartInh. At
a set time somewhat longer than the auto reclosing dead time, this facility will not
influence the auto reclosing. A typical setting of tLongStartInh could be close to the
auto reclosing dead time.

tInhibit: To ensure reliable interruption and temporary blocking of the auto recloser a
resetting time delay tInhibit is used. The auto recloser will be blocked this time after
the deactivation of the INHIBIT input. A typical resetting delay is 5.0 s.

346 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

ZoneSeqCoord: The ZONESTEP input is used when coordination between local auto
reclosers and down stream auto reclosers is needed. When this input is activated the
auto recloser increases its actual shot number by one and enters “reset time” status. If a
start is received during this reclaim time the auto recloser is proceeding as usual but
with the dead time for the increased shot number. Every new increase of the shot
number needs a new activation of the ZONESTEP input. The setting NoOfShots limits
of course the possibility to increase the shot number. This functionality is controlled by
the setting ZoneSeqCoord.

CircuitBreaker settings
CBReadyType: The selection depends on the type of performance available from the
circuit breaker operating gear. At setting OCO (circuit breaker ready for an Open –
Close – Open cycle), the condition is checked only at the start of the auto reclosing
cycle. The signal will disappear after tripping, but the circuit breaker will still be able
to perform the C-O sequence. For the selection CO (circuit breaker ready for a Close –
Open cycle) the condition is also checked after the set auto reclosing dead time. This
selection has a value first of all at multi-shot auto reclosing to ensure that the circuit
breaker is ready for a C-O sequence at shot two and further shots. During single-shot
auto reclosing, the OCO selection can be used. A breaker shall according to its duty
cycle always have storing energy for a CO operation after the first trip. (IEC 56 duty
cycle is O – 0.3sec – CO – 3min – CO).

FollowCB: The usual setting is Follow CB = Off. The setting On can be used for
delayed auto reclosing with long delay, to cover the case when a circuit breaker is
being manually closed during the auto reclosing dead time before the auto recloser has
issued its breaker close command.

UnsucClByCBChk: The normal setting is NoCBCheck and the auto reclosing

unsuccessful event is then decided by a new trip within the reclaim time after the last
reclosing shot. If one wants to get the UNSUCCL (Reclosing is unsuccessful) signal in
the case the circuit breaker does not respond to the circuit breaker close command, one
can set UnsucClByCBCheck = CB Check and set tUnsucCl for instance to 1.0 s.

BlockByUnsucCl: Setting of whether an unsuccessful auto reclosing attempt shall set

the auto recloser in blocked status. If used the BLKOFF input must be configured to
unblock the function after an unsuccessful auto reclosing attempt. Normal setting is
Disabled.

CutPulse: In circuit breakers without anti-pumping relays, the setting CutPulse =

Enabled can be used to avoid repeated closing operation when reclosing onto a fault. A
new start will then cut the ongoing pulse.

tPulse: The circuit breaker closing command should be long enough to ensure reliable
operation of the circuit breaker. The circuit breaker closing command pulse has a
duration set by the tPulse setting. A typical setting may be tPulse = 200 ms. A longer

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 347

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

pulse setting may facilitate dynamic indication at testing, for example, in debug mode
of the Application Configuration Tool (ACT) in PCM600. In circuit breakers without
anti-pumping relays, the setting CutPulse = Enabled can be used to avoid repeated
closing operations when reclosing onto a fault. A new start will then cut the ongoing
pulse.

tReset: The reclaim time sets the time for resetting the function to its original state,
after which a line fault and tripping will be treated as an independent new case with a
new auto reclosing cycle. One may consider a nominal CB duty cycle of for instance,
O – 0.3sec – CO – 3min – CO. However the 3 minute (180 s) recovery time is usually
not critical as fault levels are mostly lower than rated value and the risk of a new fault
within a short time is negligible. A typical time may be tReset = 60 or 180 s dependent
on the fault level and circuit breaker duty cycle.

tSync: Maximum wait time for fulfilled synchrocheck conditions. The time window
should be coordinated with the operate time and other settings of the synchrocheck
function. Attention should also be paid to the possibility of a power swing when
reclosing after a line fault. Too short a time may prevent a potentially successful auto
reclosing.

tCBClosedMin: A typical setting is 5.0 s. If the circuit breaker has not been closed for
at least this minimum time, an auto reclosing start will not be accepted.

tSuccessful: If the circuit breaker closing command is given and the circuit breaker is
closed within the set time interval tUnsucCl, the SUCCL output is activated after the
set time interval tSuccessful.

tUnsucCl: The reclaim timer, tReset, is started each time a circuit breaker closing
command is given. If no start occurs within this time, the auto recloser will reset. A
new start received in “restart time” status will reenter the auto recloser to “in progress”
status as long as the final shot is not reached. The auto recloser will reset and enter
“inactive” status if a new start is given during the final restart time. This will also
happen if the circuit breaker has not closed within set time interval tUnsucCl at the end
of the reclaim time. This latter case is controlled by setting UnsucClByCBChk. The
auto reclosing sequence is considered unsuccessful for both above cases and the
UNSUCCL output is activated.

DeadTime settings
NoOfShots: In power transmission one shot is mostly used. In most cases one auto
reclosing shot is sufficient as the majority of arcing faults will cease after the first auto
reclosing shot. In power systems with many other types of faults caused by other
phenomena, for example wind, a greater number of auto reclosing attempts (shots) can
be motivated.

t1 1Ph, t1 2Ph, t1 3Ph: There are separate settings for the first shot for single-, two-
and three-phase auto reclosing dead times.

348 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

Single-phase auto reclosing dead time: A typical setting is t1 1Ph = 800ms. Due to the
influence of energized phases the arc extinction may not be instantaneous. In long lines
with high voltage the use of shunt reactors in the form of a star with a neutral reactor
improves the arc extinction.

Three-phase auto reclosing dead time: Different local phenomena, such as moisture,
salt, pollution, can influence the required dead time. Some users apply Delayed Auto
Reclosing (DAR) with delays of 10s or more.

Extended t1: The time extension below is controlled by the Extended t1 setting.

tExtended t1: A time extension delay, tExtended t1, can be added to the dead time
delay for the first shot. It is intended to come into use if the communication channel for
permissive line protection is lost. The communication link in a permissive (not strict)
line protection scheme, for instance a power line carrier (PLC) link, may not always be
available. If lost, it can result in delayed tripping at one end of a line. There is a
possibility to extend the auto reclosing dead time in such a case by use of the
PLCLOST input, and the tExtended t1 setting. Typical setting in such a case: Extended
t1 = Enabled and tExtended t1 = 0.8 s.

t1 3PhHS: There is also a separate time setting facility for three-phase high-speed auto
reclosing, t1 3PhHS. This high-speed auto reclosing is activated by the STARTHS input
and is used when auto reclosing is done without the requirement of synchrocheck
conditions to be fulfilled. A typical dead time is 400ms.

t2 3Ph, t3 3Ph, t4 3Ph, t5 3Ph: The delay of auto reclosing shot two and possible later
shots are usually set at 30s or more. A check that the circuit breaker duty cycle can
manage the selected setting must be done. The setting can in some cases be restricted
by national regulations. For multiple shots the setting of shots two to five must be
longer than the circuit breaker duty cycle time.

MasterSlave settings
Priority: In single circuit breaker applications, one sets Priority = None. At sequential
reclosing the auto recloser for the first circuit breaker, e.g. near the busbar, is set as
master (High) and the auto recloser for the second circuit breaker is set as slave (Low).

tWaitForMaster: The slave should take the duration of the circuit breaker closing time
of the master into consideration before sending the circuit breaker closing command. A
setting tWaitForMaster sets a maximum wait time for the WAIT input to reset. If the
wait time expires, the auto reclosing cycle of the slave is inhibited. The maximum wait
time, tWaitForMaster for the second circuit breaker is set longer than the auto
reclosing dead time plus a margin for synchrocheck conditions to be fulfilled for the
first circuit breaker. Typical setting is 2sec.

tSlaveDeadTime: When activating the WAIT input, in the auto recloser set as slave,
every dead timer is changed to the value of setting tSlaveDeadTime and holds back the

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 349

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

auto reclosing operation. When the WAIT input is reset at the time of a successful
reclosing of the first circuit breaker, the slave is released to continue the auto reclosing
sequence after the set tSlaveDeadTime. The reason for shortening the time, for the
normal dead timers with the value of tSlaveDeadTime, is to give the slave permission
to react almost immediately when the WAIT input resets. The minimum settable time
for tSlaveDeadTime is 0.1sec because both master and slave should not send the circuit
breaker closing command at the same time.

14.3 Apparatus control APC IP14560-1 v2

14.3.1 Application IP14931-1 v1

M13443-4 v13

The apparatus control is a functionality for control and supervising of circuit breakers,
disconnectors, and grounding switches within a bay. Permission to operate is given
after evaluation of conditions from other functions such as interlocking, synchronism
check, operator place selection and external or internal blockings.

The complete apparatus control function is not included in this product,

and the information below is included for understanding of the
principle for the use of QCBAY, LOCREM, LOCREMCTRL, SCILO,
SCSWI, SXCBR.

Figure 120 shows from which places the apparatus control function receives
commands. The commands to an apparatus can be initiated from the Control Centre
(CC), the station HMI or the local HMI on the IED front.

350 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

cc

Station HMI

GW

Station bus

Local Local Local

HMI HMI HMI
IED IED IED
Apparatus Apparatus Apparatus
Control Control Control
CLOSE/OPEN CLOSE/OPEN CLOSE/OPEN

breakers disconnectors grounding switches

ANSI08000227.vsd
ANSI08000227 V1 EN-US

Figure 120: Overview of the apparatus control functions

Features in the apparatus control function:

• Operation of primary apparatuses

• Select-Execute principle to give high security
• Selection and reservation function to prevent simultaneous operation
• Selection and supervision of operator place
• Command supervision
• Block/deblock of operation
• Block/deblock of updating of position indications
• Substitution of position indications
• Overriding of interlocking functions
• Overriding of synchronism check
• Pole discrepancy supervision
• Operation counter
• Suppression of mid position

The apparatus control function is realized by means of a number of function blocks

designated:

• Switch controller SCSWI

• Circuit breaker SXCBR
• Circuit switch SXSWI
• Bay control QCBAY
• Bay reserve QCRSV

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 351

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

• Reservation input RESIN

• Local remote LOCREM
• Local remote control LOCREMCTRL

The signal flow between the function blocks is shown in Figure 121. To realize the
reservation function, the function blocks Reservation input (RESIN) and Bay reserve
(QCRSV) also are included in the apparatus control function. The application
description for all these functions can be found below. The function SCILO in the
Figure below is the logical node for interlocking.

When the circuit breaker or switch is located in a breaker IED, two more functions are
added:
• GOOSE receive for switching device GOOSEXLNRCV
• Proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE XLNPROXY

The extension of the signal flow and the usage of the GOOSE communication are
shown in Figure 122.

352 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

IEC 61850

QCBAY SCSWI SXCBR 189

SXCBR
SXCBR 152
SCILO

SCSWI SXSWI 989

SCILO

en05000116_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000116 V1 EN-US

Figure 121: Signal flow between apparatus control function blocks when all
functions are situated within the IED

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 353

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

IEC 61850 on
station bus

Bay level IED

QCBAY SCSWI

SCILO

GOOSEXLNRCV XLNPROXY

SCSWI

SCILO

GOOSEXLNRCV XLNPROXY

GOOSE over process bus

Merging Unit
XCBR
XCBR -QB1
XCBR -QA1

XSWI -QB9

IEC16000070-1-EN.vsdx
IEC16000070 V1 EN-US

Figure 122: Signal flow between apparatus control functions with XCBR and XSWI
located in a breaker IED

354 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

Control operation can be performed from the local IED HMI. If users are defined in the
IED, then the local/remote switch is under authority control, otherwise the default user
can perform control operations from the local IED HMI without logging in. The default
position of the local/remote switch is on remote.

Accepted originator categories for PSTO

If the requested command is accepted by the authority control, the value will change.
Otherwise the attribute blocked-by-switching-hierarchy is set in the cause signal. If the
PSTO value is changed during a command, then the command is aborted.

The accepted originator categories for each PSTO value are shown in Table 33.
Table 33: Accepted originator categories for each PSTO

Permitted Source To Operate Originator (orCat)

0 = Off 4,5,6
1 = Local 1,4,5,6
2 = Remote 2,3,4,5,6
3 = Faulty 4,5,6
4 = Not in use 4,5,6
5 = All 1,2,3,4,5,6
6 = Station 2,4,5,6
7 = Remote 3,4,5,6

PSTO = All, then it is no priority between operator places. All operator places are
allowed to operate.

According to IEC 61850 standard the orCat attribute in originator category are defined
in Table 34
Table 34: orCat attribute according to IE C61850

Value Description
0 not-supported
1 bay-control
2 station-control
3 remote-control
4 automatic-bay
5 automatic-station
6 automatic-remote
7 maintenance
8 process

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 355

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

14.3.1.1 Bay control QCBAY M16595-3 v9

The Bay control (QCBAY) is used to handle the selection of the operator place per bay.
The function gives permission to operate from two main types of locations either from
Remote (for example, control centre or station HMI) or from Local (local HMI on the
IED) or from all (Local and Remote). The Local/Remote switch position can also be
set to Off, which means no operator place selected that is, operation is not possible
either from local or from remote.

For IEC 61850-8-1 communication, the Bay Control function can be set to discriminate
between commands with orCat station and remote (2 and 3). The selection is then done
through the IEC 61850-8-1 edition 2 command LocSta.

QCBAY also provides blocking functions that can be distributed to different

apparatuses within the bay. There are two different blocking alternatives:

• Blocking of update of positions

• Blocking of commands

IEC13000016-2-en.vsd
IEC13000016 V2 EN-US

Figure 123: APC - Local remote function block

356 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

14.3.1.2 Switch controller SCSWI M16596-3 v5

SCSWI may handle and operate on one three-phase device or three one-phase
switching devices.

After the selection of an apparatus and before the execution, the switch controller
performs the following checks and actions:

• A request initiates to reserve other bays to prevent simultaneous operation.

• Actual position inputs for interlocking information are read and evaluated if the
operation is permitted.
• The synchronism check/synchronizing conditions are read and checked, and
performs operation upon positive response.
• The blocking conditions are evaluated
• The position indications are evaluated according to given command and its
requested direction (open or closed).

The command sequence is supervised regarding the time between:

• Select and execute.

• Select and until the reservation is granted.
• Execute and the final end position of the apparatus.
• Execute and valid close conditions from the synchronism check.

At error the command sequence is cancelled.

In the case when there are three one-phase switches (SXCBR) connected to the switch
controller function, the switch controller will "merge" the position of the three switches
to the resulting three-phase position. In case of a pole discrepancy situation, that is, the
positions of the one-phase switches are not equal for a time longer than a settable time;
an error signal will be given.

The switch controller is not dependent on the type of switching device SXCBR or
SXSWI. The switch controller represents the content of the SCSWI logical node
(according to IEC 61850) with mandatory functionality.

14.3.1.3 Switches SXCBR/SXSWI M16602-3 v6

Switches are functions used to close and interrupt an ac power circuit under normal
conditions, or to interrupt the circuit under fault, or emergency conditions. The
intention with these functions is to represent the lowest level of a power-switching
device with or without short circuit breaking capability, for example, circuit breakers,
disconnectors, grounding switches etc.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 357

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

The purpose of these functions is to provide the actual status of positions and to
perform the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to the primary apparatus
via output boards and to supervise the switching operation and position.

Switches have the following functionalities:

• Local/Remote switch intended for the switchyard

• Block/deblock for open/close command respectively
• Update block/deblock of position indication
• Substitution of position indication
• Supervision timer that the primary device starts moving after a command
• Supervision of allowed time for intermediate position
• Definition of pulse duration for open/close command respectively

The realizations of these functions are done with SXCBR representing a circuit breaker
and with SXSWI representing a circuit switch that is, a disconnector or an grounding
switch.

Circuit breaker (SXCBR) can be realized either as three one-phase switches or as one
three-phase switch.

The content of this function is represented by the IEC 61850 definitions for the logical
nodes Circuit breaker (SXCBR) and Circuit switch (SXSWI) with mandatory
functionality.

14.3.1.4 Proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE XLNPROXY GUID-2DA1E47C-5A9A-4C53-8D60-7B1729EF6B90 v1

The purpose of the proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE
(XLNPROXY) is to give the same internal representation of the position status and
control response for a switch modeled in a breaker IED as if represented by a SXCBR
or SXSWI function.

The command response functionality is dependent on the connection of the execution

information, XIN, from the SCSWI function controlling the represented switch.
Otherwise, the function only reflects the current status of the switch, such as blocking,
selection, position, operating capability and operation counter.

Since different switches are represented differently on IEC 61850, the data that is
mandatory to model in IEC 61850 is mandatory inputs and the other useful data for the
command and status following is optional. To make it easy to choose which data to use
for the XLNPROXY function, their usage is controlled by the connection of each
data’s signal input and valid input. These connections are usually from the
GOOSEXLNRCV function (see Figure 124 and Figure 125).

358 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

IEC16000071 V1 EN-US

Figure 124: Configuration with XLNPROXY and GOOSEXLNRCV where all the
IEC 61850 modelled data is used, including selection

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 359

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

IEC16000072 V1 EN-US

Figure 125: Configuration with XLNPROXY and GOOSEXLNRCV where only the
mandatory data in the IEC 61850 modelling is used

All the information from the XLNPROXY to the SCSWI about command following
status, causes for failed command and selection status is transferred in the output
XPOS. The other outputs may be used by other functions in the same way as the
corresponding outputs of the SXCBR and SXSWI function.

When a command has been issued from the connected SCSWI function, the
XLNPROXY function awaits the response on it from the represented switch through
the inputs POSVAL and OPOK. While waiting for the switch to start moving, it checks
if the switch is blocked for the operation. When the switch has started moving and no
blocking condition has been detected, XLNPROXY issues a response to the SCSWI
function that the command has started. If OPOK is used, this response is given when
XLNPROXY receives the signal.

If no movement of the switch is registered within the limit tStartMove, the command is
considered failed, and the cause of the failure is evaluated. In the evaluation, the
function checks if the state of the represented switch is indicating that the command is
blocked in any way during the command, and gives the appropriate cause to the
SCSWI function. This cause is also shown on the output L_CAUSE as indicated in the
following table:

360 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

Table 35: Possible cause values from XLNPROXY

Cause No Cause Description Conditions
8 Blocked-by-Mode The BEH input is 5.
2 Blocked-by-switching-hierarchy The LOC input indicates that only local commands are
allowed for the breaker IED function.
-24 Blocked-for-open-cmd The BLKOPN is active indicating that the switch is
blocked for open commands.
-25 Blocked-for-close-cmd The BLKCLS is active indicating that the switch is
blocked for close commands.
9 Blocked-by-process If the Blk input is connected and active indicating that the
switch is dynamically blocked. Or if the OPCAP input is
connected, it indicates that the operation capability of the
switch is not enough to perform the command.
5 Position-reached Switch is already in the intended position.
-31 Switch-not-start-moving Switch did not start moving within tStartMove.
-32 Persistent-intermediate-state The switch stopped in intermediate state for longer than
tIntermediate.
-33 Switch-returned-to-init-pos Switch returned to the initial position.
-34 Switch-in-bad-state Switch is in a bad position.
-35 Not-expected-final-position Switch did not reach the expected final position.

The OPCAP input and output are used for the CBOpCap data of a
XCBR respectively SwOpCap for a XSWI. The interpretation for the
command following is controlled through the setting SwitchType.

14.3.1.5 Reservation function (QCRSV and RESIN) M16609-3 v4

The purpose of the reservation function is primarily to transfer interlocking

information between IEDs in a safe way and to prevent double operation in a bay,
switchyard part, or complete substation.

For interlocking evaluation in a substation, the position information from switching

devices, such as circuit breakers, disconnectors and grounding switches can be required
from the same bay or from several other bays. When information is needed from other
bays, it is exchanged over the station bus between the distributed IEDs. The problem
that arises, even at a high speed of communication, is a space of time during which the
information about the position of the switching devices are uncertain. The interlocking
function uses this information for evaluation, which means that also the interlocking
conditions are uncertain.

To ensure that the interlocking information is correct at the time of operation, a unique
reservation method is available in the IEDs. With this reservation method, the bay that

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 361

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

wants the reservation sends a reservation request to other bays and then waits for a
reservation granted signal from the other bays. Actual position indications from these
bays are then transferred over the station bus for evaluation in the IED. After the
evaluation the operation can be executed with high security.

This functionality is realized over the station bus by means of the function blocks
QCRSV and RESIN. The application principle is shown in Figure 126.

The function block QCRSV handles the reservation. It sends out either the reservation
request to other bays or the acknowledgement if the bay has received a request from
another bay.

The other function block RESIN receives the reservation information from other bays.
The number of instances is the same as the number of involved bays (up to 60
instances are available). The received signals are either the request for reservation from
another bay or the acknowledgment from each bay respectively, which have received a
request from this bay. Also the information of valid transmission over the station bus
must be received.

IED IED

SCSWI
RES_GRT
RES_RQ

3 RESIN
EXCH_IN
QCRSV
EXCH_ OUT
RES_RQ1
... From other ..
SCSWI in RES_RQ8
...

the bay
RES_GRT1 To other
RESIN ..
SCSWI
EXCH_IN RES_GRT8
in the
EXCH_OUT RES_ DATA bay
3 2

...

Station bus

en 05000117_ansi. vsd
ANSI05000117 V2 EN-US

Figure 126: Application principles for reservation over the station bus

The reservation can also be realized with external wiring according to the application
example in Figure 127. This solution is realized with external auxiliary relays and extra
binary inputs and outputs in each IED, but without use of function blocks QCRSV and
RESIN.

362 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

IED IED

SCSWI
RES_ EXT
SELECTED

OR
Other SCSWI in the bay

BI BO BI BO

en 05000118_ ansi. vsd

ANSI05000118 V2 EN-US

Figure 127: Application principles for reservation with external wiring

The solution in Figure 127 can also be realized over the station bus according to the
application example in Figure 128. The solutions in Figure 127 and Figure 128 do not
have the same high security compared to the solution in Figure 126, but instead have a
higher availability, since no acknowledgment is required.

IED IED

IntlReceive SCSWI
RESGRANT RES_EXT

SELECTED
. . .
. . .

IntlReceive SPGAPC
RESGRANT Other SCWI in OR IN
the bay

...
Station bus

IEC05000178-3-en.vsd
IEC05000178 V3 EN-US

Figure 128: Application principle for an alternative reservation solution

14.3.2 Interaction between modules M16626-3 v8

A typical bay with apparatus control function consists of a combination of logical

nodes or functions that are described here:

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 363

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

• The Switch controller (SCSWI) initializes all operations for one apparatus. It is the
command interface of the apparatus. It includes the position reporting as well as
the control of the position
• The Circuit breaker (SXCBR) is the process interface to the circuit breaker for the
apparatus control function.
• The Circuit switch (SXSWI) is the process interface to the disconnector or the
grounding switch for the apparatus control function.
• The Bay control (QCBAY) fulfils the bay-level functions for the apparatuses, such
as operator place selection and blockings for the complete bay.
• The Reservation (QCRSV) deals with the reservation function.
• The Protection trip logic (SMPPTRC, 94) connects the "trip" outputs of one or
more protection functions to a common "trip" to be transmitted to SXCBR.
• The Autorecloser (SMBRREC, 79) consists of the facilities to automatically close
a tripped breaker with respect to a number of configurable conditions.
• The logical node Interlocking (SCILO, 3) provides the information to SCSWI
whether it is permitted to operate due to the switchyard topology. The interlocking
conditions are evaluated with separate logic and connected to SCILO (3).
• The Synchronism, energizing check, and synchronizing (SESRSYN, 25) calculates
and compares the voltage phasor difference from both sides of an open breaker
with predefined switching conditions (synchronism check). Also the case that one
side is dead (energizing-check) is included.
• The Generic Automatic Process Control function, GAPC, handles generic
commands from the operator to the system.

The overview of the interaction between these functions is shown in Figure 129 below.

364 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

SMPPTRC SESRSYN Synchronizing OK

(Trip logic) (Synchrocheck & Synchronizer)

Trip

Synchronizing
Synchrocheck

Synchronizing

in progress
Start
OK
QCBAY Operator place
(Bay control) selection Open cmd
Start AR

Close cmd
Res. req. SCSWI SXCBR
(Switching control) (Circuit breaker)
QCRSV Res. granted
(Reservation) Res. req.

Close CB
SMBRREC

Enable

Enable
close
open
(Auto- Position
reclosure)
I/O
SCILO
(Interlocking)
other bays
Pos. from

Open rel.
Interlocking Close rel.
function Open rel.
block Close rel. SCILO
(Not a LN) Position (Interlocking)
Enable Enable
open close

GAPC Res.
granted Open cmd
(Generic
Close cmd
Automatic SCSWI SXSWI
Process Open/Close (Switching control) (Disconnector)
Control) Open/Close

Position

I/O

IEC05000120-3-EN.vsdx
IEC05000120 V3 EN-US

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 365

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

ZMQPDIS SMPPTRC SECRSYN

(Distance) (Trip logic) (Synchrocheck)

Trip
Synchrocheck
OK

QCBAY Operator place

Initiate AR
(Bay control) selection Open cmd
Close cmd
Res. req. SCSWI SXCBR
Res. granted (Switching control) (Circuit breaker)
QCRSV
(Reservation) Res. req.

Close CB
SMBRREC

Enable

Enable
open

close
(Auto- Position
reclosure)
I/O
SCILO
(Interlocking)
other bays
Pos. from

Open rel.
Interlocking Close rel.
function Open rel.
block Close rel. SCILO
(Not a LN) Position (Interlocking)
Enable Enable
open close

GAPC Res.
granted Open cmd
(Generic
Close cmd
Automatic SCSWI SXSWI
Process Open/Close (Switching control) (Disconnector)
Control) Open/Close

Position

I/O
ANSI05000120-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000120 V2 EN-US

Figure 129: Example overview of the interactions between functions in a typical

bay

366 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

14.3.3 Setting guidelines M16669-3 v4

The setting parameters for the apparatus control function are set via the local HMI or
PCM600.

14.3.3.1 Bay control (QCBAY) M16670-3 v7

If the parameter AllPSTOValid is set to No priority, all originators from local and
remote are accepted without any priority.

If the parameter RemoteIncStation is set to Yes, commands from IEC 61850-8-1 clients
at both station and remote level are accepted, when the QCBAY function is in Remote.
If set to No, the command LocSta controls which operator place is accepted when
QCBAY is in Remote. If LocSta is true, only commands from station level are
accepted, otherwise only commands from remote level are accepted.

The parameter RemoteIncStation has only effect on the IEC 61850-8-1

communication. Further, when using IEC 61850 edition 1
communication, the parameter should be set to Yes, since the command
LocSta is not defined in IEC 61850-8-1 edition 1.

14.3.3.2 Switch controller (SCSWI) M16673-3 v6

The parameter CtlModel specifies the type of control model according to IEC 61850.
The default for control of circuit breakers, disconnectors and grounding switches the
control model is set to SBO Enh (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security.

When the operation shall be performed in one step, and no monitoring of the result of
the command is desired, the model direct control with normal security is used.

At control with enhanced security there is an additional supervision of the status value
by the control object, which means that each command sequence must be terminated
by a termination command.

The parameter PosDependent gives permission to operate depending on the position

indication, that is, at Always permitted it is always permitted to operate independent of
the value of the position. At Not perm at 00/11 it is not permitted to operate if the
position is in bad or intermediate state.

tSelect is the maximum allowed time between the select and the execute command
signal, that is, the time the operator has to perform the command execution after the
selection of the object to operate. When the time has expired, the selected output signal
is set to false and a cause-code is given.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 367

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

The time parameter tResResponse is the allowed time from reservation request to the
feedback reservation granted from all bays involved in the reservation function. When
the time has expired, the control function is reset, and a cause-code is given.

tSynchrocheck is the allowed time for the synchronism check function to fulfill the
close conditions. When the time has expired, the function tries to start the
synchronizing function. If tSynchrocheck is set to 0, no synchrocheck is done, before
starting the synchronizing function.

The timer tSynchronizing supervises that the signal synchronizing in progress is

obtained in SCSWI after start of the synchronizing function. The start signal for the
synchronizing is set if the synchronism check conditions are not fulfilled. When the
time has expired, the control function is reset, and a cause-code is given. If no
synchronizing function is included, the time is set to 0, which means no start of the
synchronizing function is done, and when tSynchrocheck has expired, the control
function is reset and a cause-code is given.

tExecutionFB is the maximum time between the execute command signal and the
command termination. When the time has expired, the control function is reset and a
cause-code is given.

tPoleDiscord is the allowed time to have discrepancy between the poles at control of
three single-phase breakers. At discrepancy an output signal is activated to be used for
trip or alarm, and during a command, the control function is reset, and a cause-code is
given.

SuppressMidPos when On suppresses the mid-position during the time tIntermediate of

the connected switches.

The parameter InterlockCheck decides if interlock check should be done at both select
and operate, Sel & Op phase, or only at operate, Op phase.

14.3.3.3 Switch (SXCBR/SXSWI) M16675-3 v8

tStartMove is the supervision time for the apparatus to start moving after a command
execution is done from the SCSWI function. When the time has expired, the command
supervision is reset, and a cause-code is given.

During the tIntermediate time, the position indication is allowed to be in an

intermediate (00) state. When the time has expired, the command supervision is reset,
and a cause-code is given. The indication of the mid-position at SCSWI is suppressed
during this time period when the position changes from open to close or vice-versa if
the parameter SuppressMidPos is set to On in the SCSWI function.

If the parameter AdaptivePulse is set to Adaptive the command output pulse resets
when a new correct end position is reached. If the parameter is set to Not adaptive the

368 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

command output pulse remains active until the timer tOpenPulsetClosePulse has
elapsed.

tOpenPulse is the output pulse length for an open command. If AdaptivePulse is set to
Adaptive, it is the maximum length of the output pulse for an open command. The
default length is set to 200 ms for a circuit breaker (SXCBR) and 500 ms for a
disconnector (SXSWI).

tClosePulse is the output pulse length for a close command. If AdaptivePulse is set to
Adaptive, it is the maximum length of the output pulse for an open command. The
default length is set to 200 ms for a circuit breaker (SXCBR) and 500 ms for a
disconnector (SXSWI).

14.3.3.4 Proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE XLNPROXY GUID-7C253FE7-6E02-4F94-96C7-81C9129D925D v1

The SwitchType setting controls the evaluation of the operating capability. If

SwitchType is set to Circuit Breaker, the input OPCAP is interpreted as a breaker
operating capability, otherwise it is interpreted as a switch operating capability.
Table 36: Operating capability values for breaker/switches
Value Breaker operating capability, CbOpCap Switch operating capability, SwOpCap
1 None None
2 Open Open
3 Close – Open Close
4 Open – Close – Open Close and Open
5 Close – Open – Close – Open Larger values handled as 4, both Close and
Open
6 Open – Close – Open – Close – Open
7 more

tStartMove is the supervision time for the apparatus to start moving after a command
execution is done from the SCSWI function. When the time has expired, the command
supervision is reset, and a cause-code is given.

During the tIntermediate time, the position indication is allowed to be in an

intermediate (00) state. When the time has expired, the command supervision is reset,
and a cause-code is given. The indication of the mid-position at SCSWI is suppressed
during this time period when the position changes from open to close or vice-versa if
the parameter SuppressMidPos is set to On in the SCSWI function.

In most cases, the same value can be used for both tStartMove and tIntermediate as in
the source function. However, tStartMove may need to be increased to accommodate
for the communication delays, mainly when representing a circuit breaker.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 369

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

14.3.3.5 Bay Reserve (QCRSV) M16677-3 v3

The timer tCancelRes defines the supervision time for canceling the reservation, when
this cannot be done by requesting bay due to for example communication failure.

When the parameter ParamRequestx (x=1-8) is set to Only own bay res. individually
for each apparatus (x) in the bay, only the own bay is reserved, that is, the output for
reservation request of other bays (RES_BAYS) will not be activated at selection of
apparatus x.

14.3.3.6 Reservation input (RESIN) M16678-3 v3

With the FutureUse parameter set to Bay future use the function can handle bays not
yet installed in the SA system.

14.4 Interlocking (3) IP15572-1 v2

M13530-4 v4

The main purpose of switchgear interlocking is:

• To avoid the dangerous or damaging operation of switchgear

• To enforce restrictions on the operation of the substation for other reasons for
example, load configuration. Examples of the latter are to limit the number of
parallel transformers to a maximum of two or to ensure that energizing is always
from one side, for example, the high voltage side of a transformer.

This section only deals with the first point, and only with restrictions caused by
switching devices other than the one to be controlled. This means that switch interlock,
because of device alarms, is not included in this section.

Disconnectors and grounding switches have a limited switching capacity.

Disconnectors may therefore only operate:

• With basically zero current. The circuit is open on one side and has a small
extension. The capacitive current is small (for example, < 5A) and power
transformers with inrush current are not allowed.
• To connect or disconnect a parallel circuit carrying load current. The switching
voltage across the open contacts is thus virtually zero, thanks to the parallel circuit
(for example, < 1% of rated voltage). Paralleling of power transformers is not
allowed.

Grounding switches are allowed to connect and disconnect grounding of isolated

points. Due to capacitive or inductive coupling there may be some voltage (for

370 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

example < 40% of rated voltage) before grounding and some current (for example <
100A) after grounding of a line.

Circuit breakers are usually not interlocked. Closing is only interlocked against
running disconnectors in the same bay, and the bus-coupler opening is interlocked
during a busbar transfer.

The positions of all switching devices in a bay and from some other bays determine the
conditions for operational interlocking. Conditions from other stations are usually not
available. Therefore, a line grounding switch is usually not fully interlocked. The
operator must be convinced that the line is not energized from the other side before
closing the grounding switch. As an option, a voltage indication can be used for
interlocking. Take care to avoid a dangerous enable condition at the loss of a VT
secondary voltage, for example, because of a blown fuse.

The switch positions used by the operational interlocking logic are obtained from
auxiliary contacts or position sensors. For each end position (open or closed) a true
indication is needed - thus forming a double indication. The apparatus control function
continuously checks its consistency. If neither condition is high (1 or TRUE), the
switch may be in an intermediate position, for example, moving. This dynamic state
may continue for some time, which in the case of disconnectors may be up to 10
seconds. Should both indications stay low for a longer period, the position indication
will be interpreted as unknown. If both indications stay high, something is wrong, and
the state is again treated as unknown.

In both cases an alarm is sent to the operator. Indications from position sensors shall be
self-checked and system faults indicated by a fault signal. In the interlocking logic, the
signals are used to avoid dangerous enable or release conditions. When the switching
state of a switching device cannot be determined operation is not permitted.

For switches with an individual operation gear per phase, the evaluation must consider
possible phase discrepancies. This is done with the aid of an AND-function for all three
phases in each apparatus for both open and close indications. Phase discrepancies will
result in an unknown double indication state.

14.4.1 Configuration guidelines M13529-4 v4

The following sections describe how the interlocking for a certain switchgear
configuration can be realized in the IED by using standard interlocking modules and
their interconnections. They also describe the configuration settings. The inputs for
delivery specific conditions (Qx_EXy) are set to 1=TRUE if they are not used, except
in the following cases:

• 989_EX2 and 989_EX4 in modules BH_LINE_A and BH_LINE_B

• 152_EX3 in module AB_TRAFO

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 371

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

when they are set to 0=FALSE.

14.4.2 Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE (3) IP14139-1 v2

14.4.2.1 Application M13561-3 v8

The interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE, 3) function is used for a line connected to a
double busbar arrangement with a transfer busbar according to figure 130. The
function can also be used for a double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar or a
single busbar arrangement with/without transfer busbar.

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)

189 289 789

189G

152
289G

989
989G

en04000478_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000478 V1 EN-US

Figure 130: Switchyard layout ABC_LINE (3)

M13560-4 v5

The signals from other bays connected to the module ABC_LINE (3) are described
below.

14.4.2.2 Signals from bypass busbar M13560-6 v5

To derive the signals:

Signal
BB7_D_OP All line disconnectors on bypass WA7 except in the own bay are open.
VP_BB7_D The switch status of disconnectors on bypass busbar WA7 are valid.
EXDU_BPB No transmission error from any bay containing disconnectors on bypass busbar
WA7

372 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

These signals from each line bay (ABC_LINE, 3) except that of the own bay are
needed:
Signal
789OPTR 789 is open
VP789TR The switch status for 789 is valid.
EXDU_BPB No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

For bay n, these conditions are valid:

789OPTR (bay 1)
789OPTR (bay 2) AND BB7_D_OP
. . .
. . .
789OPTR (bay n-1)

VP789TR (bay 1)
VP789TR (bay 2) AND VP_BB7_D
. . .
. . .
VP789TR (bay n-1)

EXDU_BPB (bay 1)
EXDU_BPB (bay 2) AND EXDU_BPB
. . .
. . .
EXDU_BPB (bay n-1)
en04000477_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000477 V1 EN-US

Figure 131: Signals from bypass busbar in line bay n

14.4.2.3 Signals from bus-coupler M13560-31 v4

If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors into bus sections, the busbar-
busbar connection could exist via the bus-section disconnector and bus-coupler within
the other bus section.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 373

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

Section 1 Section 2
(WA1)A1 A2
(WA2)B1 B2
(WA7)C C
A1A2_DC(BS)
B1B2_DC(BS)
ABC_LINE ABC_BC ABC_LINE ABC_BC

en04000479_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000479 V1 EN-US

Figure 132: Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

To derive the signals:

Signal
BC_12_CL A bus-coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2.
BC_17_OP No bus-coupler connection between busbar WA1 and WA7.
BC_17_CL A bus-coupler connection exists between busbar WA1and WA7.
BC_27_OP No bus-coupler connection between busbar WA2 and WA7.
BC_27_CL A bus-coupler connection exists between busbar WA2 and WA7.
VP_BC_12 The switch status of BC_12 is valid.
VP_BC_17 The switch status of BC_17 is valid.
VP_BC_27 The switch status of BC_27 is valid.
EXDU_BC No transmission error from any bus-coupler bay (BC).

These signals from each bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) are needed:

Signal
BC12CLTR A bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler exists between busbar WA1
and WA2.
BC17OPTR No bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler between busbar WA1 and
WA7.
BC17CLTR A bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler exists between busbar WA1
and WA7.
BC27OPTR No bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler between busbar WA2 and
WA7.
BC27CLTR A bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler exists between busbar WA2
and WA7.
VPBC12TR The switch status of BC_12 is valid.
VPBC17TR The switch status of BC_17 is valid.
VPBC27TR The switch status of BC_27 is valid.
EXDU_BC No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

374 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

These signals from each bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) are also needed.
For B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same type of
module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section
disconnector A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC.
Signal
DCOPTR The bus-section disconnector is open.
DCCLTR The bus-section disconnector is closed.
VPDCTR The switch status of bus-section disconnector DC is valid.
EXDU_DC No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

If the busbar is divided by bus-section circuit breakers, the signals from the bus-section
coupler bay (A1A2_BS), rather than the bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC)
must be used. For B1B2_BS, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same
type of module (A1A2_BS) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section
circuit breakers A1A2_BS and B1B2_BS.
Signal
S1S2OPTR No bus-section coupler connection between bus-sections 1 and 2.
S1S2CLTR A bus-section coupler connection exists between bus-sections 1 and 2.
VPS1S2TR The switch status of bus-section coupler BS is valid.
EXDU_BS No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

For a line bay in section 1, these conditions are valid:

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 375

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

BC12CLTR (sect.1)
BC_12_CL
DCCLTR (A1A2) OR
DCCLTR (B1B2) AND
BC12CLTR (sect.2)

VPBC12TR (sect.1)
VPDCTR (A1A2) VP_BC_12
VPDCTR (B1B2) AND
VPBC12TR (sect.2)

BC17OPTR (sect.1)
BC_17_OP
DCOPTR (A1A2) AND
OR
BC17OPTR (sect.2)

BC17CLTR (sect.1)
BC_17_CL
DCCLTR (A1A2) OR
AND
BC17CLTR (sect.2)

VPBC17TR (sect.1)
VPDCTR (A1A2) VP_BC_17
AND
VPBC17TR (sect.2)

BC27OPTR (sect.1)
BC_27_OP
DCOPTR (B1B2) AND
BC27OPTR (sect.2) OR

BC27CLTR (sect.1)
BC_27_CL
DCCLTR (B1B2) OR
AND
BC27CLTR (sect.2)

VPBC27TR (sect.1)
VPDCTR (B1B2) VP_BC_27
AND
VPBC27TR (sect.2)

EXDU_BC (sect.1)
EXDU_DC (A1A2) EXDU_BC
AND
EXDU_DC (B1B2)
EXDU_BC (sect.2)

en04000480_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000480 V1 EN-US

Figure 133: Signals to a line bay in section 1 from the bus-coupler bays in each
section

For a line bay in section 2, the same conditions as above are valid by changing section
1 to section 2 and vice versa.

376 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

14.4.2.4 Configuration setting M13560-108 v4

If there is no bypass busbar and therefore no 789 disconnector, then the interlocking for
789 is not used. The states for 789, 7189G, BB7_D, BC_17, BC_27 are set to open by
setting the appropriate module inputs as follows. In the functional block diagram, 0 and
1 are designated 0=FALSE and 1=TRUE:

• 789_OP = 1
• 789_CL = 0

• 7189G_OP = 1
• 7189G_CL = 0

• BB7_D_OP = 1

• BC_17_OP = 1
• BC_17_CL = 0
• BC_27_OP = 1
• BC_27_CL = 0

• EXDU_BPB = 1

• VP_BB7_D = 1
• VP_BC_17 = 1
• VP_BC_27 = 1

If there is no second busbar WA2 and therefore no 289 disconnector, then the
interlocking for 289 is not used. The state for 289, 2189G, BC_12, BC_27 are set to
open by setting the appropriate module inputs as follows. In the functional block
diagram, 0 and 1 are designated 0=FALSE and 1=TRUE:

• 289_OP = 1
• 289_CL = 0

• 2189G_OP = 1
• 2189G_CL = 0

• BC_12_CL = 0
• BC_27_OP = 1
• BC_27_CL = 0

• VP_BC_12 = 1

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 377

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

14.4.3 Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC (3) IP14144-1 v2

14.4.3.1 Application M13555-3 v8

The interlocking for bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC, 3) function is used for a bus-coupler
bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 134. The function
can also be used for a single busbar arrangement with transfer busbar or double busbar
arrangement without transfer busbar.

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)

189 289 2089 789

189G

152

289G

en04000514_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000514 V1 EN-US

Figure 134: Switchyard layout ABC_BC (3)

14.4.3.2 Configuration M13553-138 v4

The signals from the other bays connected to the bus-coupler module ABC_BC are
described below.

14.4.3.3 Signals from all feeders M13553-6 v4

To derive the signals:

Signal
BBTR_OP No busbar transfer is in progress concerning this bus-coupler.
VP_BBTR The switch status is valid for all apparatuses involved in the busbar transfer.
EXDU_12 No transmission error from any bay connected to the WA1/WA2 busbars.

These signals from each line bay (ABC_LINE), each transformer bay (AB_TRAFO),
and bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC), except the own bus-coupler bay are needed:

378 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

Signal
Q1289OPTR 189 or 289 or both are open.
VP1289TR The switch status of 189 and 289 are valid.
EXDU_12 No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

For bus-coupler bay n, these conditions are valid:

1289OPTR (bay 1)
BBTR_OP
1289OPTR (bay 2) AND
. . .
. . .
1289OPTR (bay n-1)

VP1289TR (bay 1)
VP_BBTR
VP1289TR (bay 2) AND
. . .
. . .
VP1289TR (bay n-1)

EXDU_12 (bay 1)
EXDU_12
EXDU_12 (bay 2) AND
. . .
. . .
EXDU_12 (bay n-1)

en04000481_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000481 V1 EN-US

Figure 135: Signals from any bays in bus-coupler bay n

If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors into bus-sections, the signals

BBTR are connected in parallel - if both bus-section disconnectors are closed. So for
the basic project-specific logic for BBTR above, add this logic:

Section 1 Section 2
(WA1)A1 A2
(WA2)B1 B2
(WA7)C C
A1A2_DC(BS)
B1B2_DC(BS) ABC_BC
ABC_LINE ABC_BC ABC_LINE AB_TRAFO

en04000482_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000482 V1 EN-US

Figure 136: Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 379

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

The following signals from each bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) are needed.
For B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same type of
module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section
disconnector A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC.
Signal
DCOPTR The bus-section disconnector is open.
VPDCTR The switch status of bus-section disconnector DC is valid.
EXDU_DC No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

If the busbar is divided by bus-section circuit breakers, the signals from the bus-section
coupler bay (A1A2_BS), rather than the bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC),
have to be used. For B1B2_BS, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The
same type of module (A1A2_BS) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-
section circuit breakers A1A2_BS and B1B2_BS.
Signal
S1S2OPTR No bus-section coupler connection between bus-sections 1 and 2.
VPS1S2TR The switch status of bus-section coupler BS is valid.
EXDU_BS No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

For a bus-coupler bay in section 1, these conditions are valid:

BBTR_OP (sect.1)
BBTR_OP
DCOPTR (A1A2) AND
DCOPTR (B1B2) OR
BBTR_OP (sect.2)

VP_BBTR (sect.1)
VPDCTR (A1A2) VP_BBTR
AND
VPDCTR (B1B2)
VP_BBTR (sect.2)

EXDU_12 (sect.1)
EXDU_DC (A1A2) EXDU_12
AND
EXDU_DC (B1B2)
EXDU_12 (sect.2)

en04000483_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000483 V1 EN-US

Figure 137: Signals to a bus-coupler bay in section 1 from any bays in each section

For a bus-coupler bay in section 2, the same conditions as above are valid by changing
section 1 to section 2 and vice versa.

380 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

14.4.3.4 Signals from bus-coupler M13553-58 v5

If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors into bus-sections, the signals

BC_12 from the busbar coupler of the other busbar section must be transmitted to the
own busbar coupler if both disconnectors are closed.

Section 1 Section 2
(WA1)A1 A2
(WA2)B1 B2
(WA7)C C
A1A2_DC(BS)
B1B2_DC(BS)
ABC_BC ABC_BC

en04000484_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000484 V1 EN-US

Figure 138: Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

To derive the signals:

Signal
BC_12_CL Another bus-coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2.
VP_BC_12 The switch status of BC_12 is valid.
EXDU_BC No transmission error from any bus-coupler bay (BC).

These signals from each bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC), except the own bay, are needed:
Signal
BC12CLTR A bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler exists between busbar WA1
and WA2.
VPBC12TR The switch status of BC_12 is valid.
EXDU_BC No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

These signals from each bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) are also needed.
For B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same type of
module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section
disconnector A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC.
Signal
DCCLTR The bus-section disconnector is closed.
VPDCTR The switch status of bus-section disconnector DC is valid.
EXDU_DC No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 381

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

If the busbar is divided by bus-section circuit breakers, the signals from the bus-section
coupler bay (A1A2_BS), rather than the bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC),
must be used. For B1B2_BS, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same
type of module (A1A2_BS) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section
circuit breakers A1A2_BS and B1B2_BS.
Signal
S1S2CLTR A bus-section coupler connection exists between bus sections 1 and 2.
VPS1S2TR The switch status of bus-section coupler BS is valid.
EXDU_BS No transmission error from the bay containing the above information.

For a bus-coupler bay in section 1, these conditions are valid:

DCCLTR (A1A2)
AND BC_12_CL
DCCLTR (B1B2)
BC12CLTR (sect.2)

VPDCTR (A1A2)
AND VP_BC_12
VPDCTR (B1B2)
VPBC12TR (sect.2)

EXDU_DC (A1A2)
AND EXDU_BC
EXDU_DC (B1B2)
EXDU_BC (sect.2)

en04000485_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000485 V1 EN-US

Figure 139: Signals to a bus-coupler bay in section 1 from a bus-coupler bay in

another section

For a bus-coupler bay in section 2, the same conditions as above are valid by changing
section 1 to section 2 and vice versa.

14.4.3.5 Configuration setting M13553-107 v4

If there is no bypass busbar and therefore no 289 and 789 disconnectors, then the
interlocking for 289 and 789 is not used. The states for 289, 789, 7189G are set to open
by setting the appropriate module inputs as follows. In the functional block diagram, 0
and 1 are designated 0=FALSE and 1=TRUE:

• 289_OP = 1
• 289_CL = 0

• 789_OP = 1
• 789_CL = 0

382 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

• 7189G_OP = 1
• 7189G_CL = 0

If there is no second busbar B and therefore no 289 and 2089 disconnectors, then the
interlocking for 289 and 2089 are not used. The states for 289, 2089, 2189G, BC_12,
BBTR are set to open by setting the appropriate module inputs as follows. In the
functional block diagram, 0 and 1 are designated 0=FALSE and 1=TRUE:

• 289_OP = 1
• 289_CL = 0

• 2089_OP = 1
• 2089_CL = 0

• 2189G_OP = 1
• 2189G_CL = 0

• BC_12_CL = 0
• VP_BC_12 = 1

• BBTR_OP = 1
• VP_BBTR = 1

14.4.4 Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO (3) IP14149-1 v2

14.4.4.1 Application M13567-3 v7

The interlocking for transformer bay (AB_TRAFO, 3) function is used for a

transformer bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 140.
The function is used when there is no disconnector between circuit breaker and
transformer. Otherwise, the interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE, 3) function can be
used. This function can also be used in single busbar arrangements.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 383

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)

189 289
189G

152 AB_TRAFO

289G

389G

252 252 and 489G are not

used in this interlocking
489G

389 489

en04000515_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000515 V1 EN-US

Figure 140: Switchyard layout AB_TRAFO (3)

M13566-4 v4

The signals from other bays connected to the module AB_TRAFO are described
below.

14.4.4.2 Signals from bus-coupler M13566-6 v4

If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors into bus-sections, the busbar-

busbar connection could exist via the bus-section disconnector and bus-coupler within
the other bus-section.

384 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

Section 1 Section 2
(WA1)A1 A2
(WA2)B1 B2
(WA7)C C
A1A2_DC(BS)
B1B2_DC(BS)

AB_TRAFO ABC_BC AB_TRAFO ABC_BC

en04000487_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000487 V1 EN-US

Figure 141: Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

The project-specific logic for input signals concerning bus-coupler are the same as the
specific logic for the line bay (ABC_LINE):
Signal
BC_12_CL A bus-coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2.
VP_BC_12 The switch status of BC_12 is valid.
EXDU_BC No transmission error from bus-coupler bay (BC).

The logic is identical to the double busbar configuration “Signals from bus-coupler“.

14.4.4.3 Configuration setting M13566-22 v5

If there are no second busbar B and therefore no 289 disconnector, then the
interlocking for 289 is not used. The state for 289, 2189G, BC_12 are set to open by
setting the appropriate module inputs as follows. In the functional block diagram, 0 and
1 are designated 0=FALSE and 1=TRUE:

• 289_OP = 1
• 289QB2_CL = 0

• 2189G_OP = 1
• 2189G_CL = 0

• BC_12_CL = 0
• VP_BC_12 = 1

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 385

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

If there is no second busbar B at the other side of the transformer and therefore no 489
disconnector, then the state for 489 is set to open by setting the appropriate module
inputs as follows:

• 489_OP = 1
• 489_CL = 0

14.4.5 Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS (3) IP14154-1 v2

14.4.5.1 Application M15110-3 v7

The interlocking for bus-section breaker (A1A2_BS ,3) function is used for one bus-
section circuit breaker between section 1 and 2 according to figure 142. The function
can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section circuit breaker.

WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)

189G 189 289 289G

152

389G 489G

A1A2_BS
en04000516_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000516 V1 EN-US

Figure 142: Switchyard layout A1A2_BS (3)

M15111-4 v3

The signals from other bays connected to the module A1A2_BS are described below.

14.4.5.2 Signals from all feeders M15111-6 v4

If the busbar is divided by bus-section circuit breakers into bus-sections and both
circuit breakers are closed, the opening of the circuit breaker must be blocked if a bus-
coupler connection exists between busbars on one bus-section side and if on the other
bus-section side a busbar transfer is in progress:

386 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

Section 1 Section 2
(WA1)A1 A2
(WA2)B1 B2
(WA7)C C
A1A2_BS
B1B2_BS

ABC_BC ABC_BC
ABC_LINE AB_TRAFO ABC_LINE AB_TRAFO

en04000489_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000489 V1 EN-US

Figure 143: Busbars divided by bus-section circuit breakers

To derive the signals:

Signal
BBTR_OP No busbar transfer is in progress concerning this bus-section.
VP_BBTR The switch status of BBTR is valid.
EXDU_12 No transmission error from any bay connected to busbar 1(A) and 2(B).

These signals from each line bay (ABC_LINE), each transformer bay (AB_TRAFO),
and bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) are needed:
Signal
1289OPTR 189 or 289 or both are open.
VP1289TR The switch status of 189 and 289 are valid.
EXDU_12 No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

These signals from each bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) are needed:

Signal
BC12OPTR No bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler between busbar WA1 and
WA2.
VPBC12TR The switch status of BC_12 is valid.
EXDU_BC No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

These signals from the bus-section circuit breaker bay (A1A2_BS, B1B2_BS) are
needed.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 387

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

Signal
S1S2OPTR No bus-section coupler connection between bus-sections 1 and 2.
VPS1S2TR The switch status of bus-section coupler BS is valid.
EXDU_BS No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

For a bus-section circuit breaker between A1 and A2 section busbars, these conditions
are valid:

S1S2OPTR (B1B2)
BC12OPTR (sect.1)

1289OPTR (bay 1/sect.2) OR

... AND BBTR_OP
... AND
1289OPTR (bay n/sect.2)

S1S2OPTR (B1B2)
BC12OPTR (sect.2)

1289OPTR (bay 1/sect.1) OR

...
... AND
1289OPTR (bay n /sect.1)

VPS1S2TR (B1B2)
VPBC12TR (sect.1)
VP1289TR (bay 1/sect.2)
...
...
VP1289TR (bay n/sect.1)
AND VP_BBTR

VPBC12TR (sect.2)
VP1289TR (bay 1/sect.1)
...
...
VP1289TR (bay n/sect.1)

EXDU_BS (B1B2)
EXDU_BC (sect.1)
EXDU_12 (bay 1/sect.2)
...
...
EXDU_12 (bay n /sect.2)
AND EXDU_12

EXDU_BC (sect.2)
EXDU_12(bay 1/sect.1)
...
...
EXDU_12 (bay n /sect.1)

en04000490_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000490 V1 EN-US

Figure 144: Signals from any bays for a bus-section circuit breaker between
sections A1 and A2

388 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

For a bus-section circuit breaker between B1 and B2 section busbars, these conditions
are valid:

S1S2OPTR (A1A2)
BC12OPTR (sect.1)
1289OPTR (bay 1/sect.2) OR
... AND BBTR_OP
... AND
1289OPTR (bay n/sect.2)

S1S2OPTR (A1A2)
BC12OPTR (sect.2)
1289OPTR (bay 1/sect.1) OR
... AND
...
1289OPTR (bay n /sect.1)

VPS1S2TR (A1A2)
VPBC12TR (sect.1)
VP1289TR (bay 1/sect.2)
...
...
VP1289TR (bay n/sect.1)
AND VP_BBTR

VPBC12TR (sect.2)
VP1289TR (bay 1/sect.1)
...
...
VP1289TR (bay n/sect.1)

EXDU_BS (A1A2)
EXDU_BC (sect.1)
EXDU_12(bay 1/sect.2)
...
...
EXDU_12 (bay n /sect.2)
AND EXDU_12

EXDU_BC (sect.2)
EXDU_12 (bay 1/sect.1)
...
...
EXDU_12 (bay n /sect.1)

en04000491_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000491 V1 EN-US

Figure 145: Signals from any bays for a bus-section circuit breaker between
sections B1 and B2

14.4.5.3 Configuration setting M15111-57 v3

If there is no other busbar via the busbar loops that are possible, then either the
interlocking for the 152 open circuit breaker is not used or the state for BBTR is set to
open. That is, no busbar transfer is in progress in this bus-section:

• BBTR_OP = 1
• VP_BBTR = 1

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 389

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

14.4.6 Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC (3) IP14159-1 v2

14.4.6.1 Application M13544-3 v7

The interlocking for bus-section disconnector (A1A2_DC, 3) function is used for one
bus-section disconnector between section 1 and 2 according to figure 146. A1A2_DC
(3) function can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section
disconnector.

WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)

52

189G 289G

A1A2_DC en04000492_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000492 V1 EN-US

Figure 146: Switchyard layout A1A2_DC (3)

M13542-4 v4

The signals from other bays connected to the module A1A2_DC are described below.

14.4.6.2 Signals in single breaker arrangement M13542-6 v5

If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors, the condition no other

disconnector connected to the bus-section must be made by a project-specific logic.

The same type of module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both
bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC. But for B1B2_DC, corresponding
signals from busbar B are used.

Section 1 Section 2 A2
(WA1)A1 A3
B2
(WA2)B1 B3
(WA7)C C
A1A2_DC(BS)
B1B2_DC(BS) ABC_BC
ABC_LINE AB_TRAFO ABC_LINE AB_TRAFO

en04000493_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000493 V1 EN-US

Figure 147: Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

To derive the signals:

390 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

Signal
S1DC_OP All disconnectors on bus-section 1 are open.
S2DC_OP All disconnectors on bus-section 2 are open.
VPS1_DC The switch status of disconnectors on bus-section 1 is valid.
VPS2_DC The switch status of disconnectors on bus-section 2 is valid.
EXDU_BB No transmission error from any bay that contains the above information.

These signals from each line bay (ABC_LINE), each transformer bay (AB_TRAFO),
and each bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) are needed:
Signal
189OPTR 189 is open.
289OPTR 289 is open (AB_TRAFO, ABC_LINE).
22089OTR 289 and 2089 are open (ABC_BC).
VP189TR The switch status of 189 is valid.
VP289TR The switch status of 289 is valid.
V22089TR The switch status of 289 and 2089 are valid.
EXDU_BB No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

If there is an additional bus-section disconnector, the signal from the bus-section

disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) must be used:
Signal
DCOPTR The bus-section disconnector is open.
VPDCTR The switch status of bus-section disconnector DC is valid.
EXDU_DC No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

If there is an additional bus-section circuit breaker rather than an additional bus-section

disconnector the signals from the bus-section, circuit-breaker bay (A1A2_BS) rather
than the bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) must be used:
Signal
189OPTR 189 is open.
289OPTR 289 is open.
VP189TR The switch status of 189 is valid.
VP289TR The switch status of 289 is valid.
EXDU_BS No transmission error from the bay BS (bus-section coupler bay) that contains the
above information.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 391

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

For a bus-section disconnector, these conditions from the A1 busbar section are valid:

189OPTR (bay 1/sect.A1)

... AND S1DC_OP
...
...
189OPTR (bay n/sect.A1)

VP189TR (bay 1/sect.A1)

... AND VPS1_DC
...
...
VP189TR (bay n/sect.A1)

EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.A1)

... AND EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.A1)

en04000494_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000494 V1 EN-US

Figure 148: Signals from any bays in section A1 to a bus-section disconnector

For a bus-section disconnector, these conditions from the A2 busbar section are valid:

189OPTR (bay 1/sect.A2)

... AND S2DC_OP
...
...
189OPTR (bay n/sect.A2)
DCOPTR (A2/A3)

VP189TR (bay 1/sect.A2)

... AND VPS2_DC
...
...
VP189TR (bay n/sect.A2)
VPDCTR (A2/A3)

EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.A2)

... AND EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.A2)
EXDU_DC (A2/A3)

en04000495_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000495 V1 EN-US

Figure 149: Signals from any bays in section A2 to a bus-section disconnector

For a bus-section disconnector, these conditions from the B1 busbar section are valid:

392 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

289OPTR (22089OTR)(bay 1/sect.B1)

... AND S1DC_OP
...
...
289OPTR (22089OTR)(bay n/sect.B1)

VP289TR (V22089TR)(bay 1/sect.B1)

... AND VPS1_DC
...
...
VP289TR (V22089TR)(bay n/sect.B1)

EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.B1)

... AND EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.B1)

en04000496_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000496 V1 EN-US

Figure 150: Signals from any bays in section B1 to a bus-section disconnector

For a bus-section disconnector, these conditions from the B2 busbar section are valid:

289OPTR (22089OTR)(bay 1/sect.B2)

... AND S2DC_OP
...
...
289OPTR (22089OTR)(bay n/sect.B2)
DCOPTR (B2/B3)

VP289TR(V22089TR) (bay 1/sect.B2)

... AND VPS2_DC
...
...
VP289TR(V22089TR) (bay n/sect.B2)
VPDCTR (B2/B3)

EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.B2)

... AND EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.B2)
EXDU_DC (B2/B3)

en04000497_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000497 V1 EN-US

Figure 151: Signals from any bays in section B2 to a bus-section disconnector

14.4.6.3 Signals in double-breaker arrangement M13542-80 v5

If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors, the condition for the busbar
disconnector bay no other disconnector connected to the bus-section must be made by
a project-specific logic.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 393

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

The same type of module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both
bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC. But for B1B2_DC, corresponding
signals from busbar B are used.

Section 1 Section 2
(WA1)A1 A2
(WA2)B1 B2

A1A2_DC(BS)
B1B2_DC(BS)
DB_BUS DB_BUS DB_BUS DB_BUS

en04000498_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000498 V1 EN-US

Figure 152: Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

To derive the signals:

Signal
S1DC_OP All disconnectors on bus-section 1 are open.
S2DC_OP All disconnectors on bus-section 2 are open.
VPS1_DC The switch status of all disconnectors on bus-section 1 is valid.
VPS2_DC The switch status of all disconnectors on bus-section 2 is valid.
EXDU_BB No transmission error from double-breaker bay (DB) that contains the above
information.

These signals from each double-breaker bay (DB_BUS) are needed:

Signal
189OPTR 189 is open.
289OPTR 289 is open.
VP189TR The switch status of 189 is valid.
VP289TR The switch status of 289 is valid.
EXDU_DB No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

The logic is identical to the double busbar configuration “Signals in single breaker
arrangement”.

For a bus-section disconnector, these conditions from the A1 busbar section are valid:

394 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

189OPTR (bay 1/sect.A1)

... AND S1DC_OP
...
...
189OPTR (bay n/sect.A1)

VP189TR (bay 1/sect.A1)

... AND VPS1_DC
...
...
VP189TR (bay n/sect.A1)

EXDU_DB (bay 1/sect.A1)

... AND EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_DB (bay n/sect.A1)

en04000499_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000499 V1 EN-US

Figure 153: Signals from double-breaker bays in section A1 to a bus-section

disconnector

For a bus-section disconnector, these conditions from the A2 busbar section are valid:

189OPTR (bay 1/sect.A2)

... AND S2DC_OP
...
...
189OPTR (bay n/sect.A2)

VP189TR (bay 1/sect.A2)

... AND VPS2_DC
...
...
VP189TR (bay n/sect.A2)

EXDU_DB (bay 1/sect.A2)

... AND EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_DB (bay n/sect.A2)

en04000500_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000500 V1 EN-US

Figure 154: Signals from double-breaker bays in section A2 to a bus-section

disconnector

For a bus-section disconnector, these conditions from the B1 busbar section are valid:

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 395

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

289OPTR (bay 1/sect.B1)

... AND S1DC_OP
...
...
289OPTR (bay n/sect.B1)

VP289TR (bay 1/sect.B1)

... AND VPS1_DC
...
...
VP289TR (bay n/sect.B1)

EXDU_DB (bay 1/sect.B1)

... AND EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_DB (bay n/sect.B1)

en04000501_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000501 V1 EN-US

Figure 155: Signals from double-breaker bays in section B1 to a bus-section

disconnector

For a bus-section disconnector, these conditions from the B2 busbar section are valid:

289OPTR (bay 1/sect.B2)

... AND S2DC_OP
...
...
289OPTR (bay n/sect.B2)

VP289TR (bay 1/sect.B2)

... AND VPS2_DC
...
...
VP289TR (bay n/sect.B2)

EXDU_DB (bay 1/sect.B2)

... AND EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_DB (bay n/sect.B2)

en04000502_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000502 V1 EN-US

Figure 156: Signals from double-breaker bays in section B2 to a bus-section

disconnector

14.4.6.4 Signals in breaker and a half arrangement M13542-127 v5

If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors, the condition for the busbar
disconnector bay no other disconnector connected to the bus-section must be made by
a project-specific logic.

The same type of module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both
bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC. But for B1B2_DC, corresponding
signals from busbar B are used.

396 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

Section 1 Section 2
(WA1)A1 A2
(WA2)B1 B2

A1A2_DC(BS)
B1B2_DC(BS)
BH_LINE BH_LINE BH_LINE BH_LINE

en04000503_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000503 V1 EN-US

Figure 157: Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

The project-specific logic is the same as for the logic for the double-breaker
configuration.
Signal
S1DC_OP All disconnectors on bus-section 1 are open.
S2DC_OP All disconnectors on bus-section 2 are open.
VPS1_DC The switch status of disconnectors on bus-section 1 is valid.
VPS2_DC The switch status of disconnectors on bus-section 2 is valid.
EXDU_BB No transmission error from breaker and a half (BH) that contains the above
information.

14.4.7 Interlocking for busbar grounding switch BB_ES (3) IP14164-1 v4

14.4.7.1 Application M15015-3 v7

The interlocking for busbar grounding switch (BB_ES, 3) function is used for one
busbar grounding switch on any busbar parts according to figure 158.

89G

en04000504.vsd
ANSI04000504 V1 EN-US

Figure 158: Switchyard layout BB_ES (3)

M15053-4 v4

The signals from other bays connected to the module BB_ES are described below.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 397

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

14.4.7.2 Signals in single breaker arrangement M15053-6 v5

The busbar grounding switch is only allowed to operate if all disconnectors of the bus-
section are open.

Section 1 Section 2
(WA1)A1 A2
(WA2)B1 B2
(WA7)C C
A1A2_DC(BS)
B1B2_DC(BS)
BB_ES ABC_BC BB_ES
ABC_LINE AB_TRAFO ABC_LINE

en04000505_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000505 V1 EN-US

Figure 159: Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

To derive the signals:

Signal
BB_DC_OP All disconnectors on this part of the busbar are open.
VP_BB_DC The switch status of all disconnector on this part of the busbar is valid.
EXDU_BB No transmission error from any bay containing the above information.

These signals from each line bay (ABC_LINE), each transformer bay (AB_TRAFO),
and each bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) are needed:
Signal
189OPTR 189 is open.
289OPTR 289 is open (AB_TRAFO, ABC_LINE)
22089OTR 289 and 2089 are open (ABC_BC)
789OPTR 789 is open.
VP189TR The switch status of 189 is valid.
VP289TR The switch status of 289 is valid.
V22089TR The switch status of 289and 2089 is valid.
VP789TR The switch status of 789 is valid.
EXDU_BB No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

These signals from each bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) are also needed.
For B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same type of
module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section
disconnectors A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC.

398 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

Signal
DCOPTR The bus-section disconnector is open.
VPDCTR The switch status of bus-section disconnector DC is valid.
EXDU_DC No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

If no bus-section disconnector exists, the signal DCOPTR, VPDCTR and EXDU_DC

are set to 1 (TRUE).

If the busbar is divided by bus-section circuit breakers, the signals from the bus-section
coupler bay (A1A2_BS) rather than the bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC)
must be used. For B1B2_BS, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same
type of module (A1A2_BS) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section
circuit breakers A1A2_BS and B1B2_BS.
Signal
189OPTR 189 is open.
289OPTR 289 is open.
VP189TR The switch status of 189 is valid.
VP289TR The switch status of 289 is valid.
EXDU_BS No transmission error from the bay BS (bus-section coupler bay) that contains the
above information.

For a busbar grounding switch, these conditions from the A1 busbar section are valid:

189OPTR (bay 1/sect.A1)

... AND BB_DC_OP
...
...
189OPTR (bay n/sect.A1)
DCOPTR (A1/A2)

VP189TR (bay 1/sect.A1)

... AND VP_BB_DC
...
...
VP189TR (bay n/sect.A1)
VPDCTR (A1/A2)

EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.A1)

... AND EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.A1)
EXDU_DC (A1/A2)

en04000506_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000506 V1 EN-US

Figure 160: Signals from any bays in section A1 to a busbar grounding switch in
the same section

For a busbar grounding switch, these conditions from the A2 busbar section are valid:

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 399

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

189OPTR (bay 1/sect.A2)

... AND BB_DC_OP
...
...
189OPTR (bay n/sect.A2)
DCOPTR (A1/A2)

VP189TR (bay 1/sect.A2)

... AND VP_BB_DC
...
...
VP189TR (bay n/sect.A2)
VPDCTR (A1/A2)

EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.A2)

... AND EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.A2)
EXDU_DC (A1/A2)

en04000507_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000507 V1 EN-US

Figure 161: Signals from any bays in section A2 to a busbar grounding switch in
the same section

For a busbar grounding switch, these conditions from the B1 busbar section are valid:

400 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

289OPTR(22089OTR)(bay 1/sect.B1)
... AND BB_DC_OP
...
...
289PTR (22089OTR)(bay n/sect.B1)
DCOPTR (B1/B2)

VP289TR(V22089TR) (bay 1/sect.B1) VP_BB_DC

... AND
...
...
VP289TR(V22089TR) (bay n/sect.B1)
VPDCTR (B1/B2)

EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.B1)

... AND EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.B1)
EXDU_DC (B1/B2)

en04000508_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000508 V1 EN-US

Figure 162: Signals from any bays in section B1 to a busbar grounding switch in
the same section

For a busbar grounding switch, these conditions from the B2 busbar section are valid:

289OPTR(22089OTR) (bay 1/sect.B2)

... AND BB_DC_OP
...
...
289OPTR(22089OTR) (bay n/sect.B2)
DCOPTR (B1/B2)

VP289TR(V22089TR) (bay 1/sect.B2)

... AND VP_BB_DC
...
...
VP289TR(V22089TR) (bay n/sect.B2)
VPDCTR (B1/B2)

EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.B2)

... AND EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.B2)
EXDU_DC (B1/B2)
en04000509_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000509 V1 EN-US

Figure 163: Signals from any bays in section B2 to a busbar grounding switch in
the same section

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 401

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

For a busbar grounding switch on bypass busbar C, these conditions are valid:

789OPTR (bay 1)
... BB_DC_OP
... AND
...
789OPTR (bay n)

VP789TR (bay 1)
... AND VP_BB_DC
...
...
VP789TR (bay n)

EXDU_BB (bay 1)
... AND EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_BB (bay n)
en04000510_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000510 V1 EN-US

Figure 164: Signals from bypass busbar to busbar grounding switch

14.4.7.3 Signals in double-breaker arrangement M15053-83 v4

The busbar grounding switch is only allowed to operate if all disconnectors of the bus
section are open.

Section 1 Section 2
(WA1)A1 A2
(WA2)B1 B2

A1A2_DC(BS)
BB_ES B1B2_DC(BS) BB_ES
DB_BUS DB_BUS

en04000511_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000511 V1 EN-US

Figure 165: Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

To derive the signals:

Signal
BB_DC_OP All disconnectors of this part of the busbar are open.
VP_BB_DC The switch status of all disconnectors on this part of the busbar are valid.
EXDU_BB No transmission error from any bay that contains the above information.

These signals from each double-breaker bay (DB_BUS) are needed:

402 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

Signal
189OPTR 189 is open.
289OPTR 289 is open.
VP189TR The switch status of 189 is valid.
VP289TR The switch status of 289 is valid.
EXDU_DB No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

These signals from each bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) are also needed.
For B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same type of
module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section
disconnectors A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC.
Signal
DCOPTR The bus-section disconnector is open.
VPDCTR The switch status of bus-section disconnector DC is valid.
EXDU_DC No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

The logic is identical to the double busbar configuration described in section “Signals
in single breaker arrangement”.

14.4.7.4 Signals in breaker and a half arrangement M15053-123 v4

The busbar grounding switch is only allowed to operate if all disconnectors of the bus-
section are open.

Section 1 Section 2
(WA1)A1 A2
(WA2)B1 B2

A1A2_DC(BS)
BB_ES B1B2_DC(BS) BB_ES
BH_LINE BH_LINE

en04000512_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000512 V1 EN-US

Figure 166: Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

The project-specific logic are the same as for the logic for the double busbar
configuration described in section “Signals in single breaker arrangement”.
Signal
BB_DC_OP All disconnectors on this part of the busbar are open.
VP_BB_DC The switch status of all disconnectors on this part of the busbar is valid.
EXDU_BB No transmission error from any bay that contains the above information.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 403

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

14.4.8 Interlocking for double CB bay DB (3) IP14167-1 v2

14.4.8.1 Application M13585-3 v10

The interlocking for a double busbar double circuit breaker bay including DB_BUS_A
(3), DB_BUS_B (3) and DB_LINE (3) functions are used for a line connected to a
double busbar arrangement according to figure 167.

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)

189 289
189G 489G

DB_BUS_A 152 252 DB_BUS_B

289G 589G

6189 6289
389G

DB_LINE
989

989G

en04000518_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000518 V1 EN-US

Figure 167: Switchyard layout double circuit breaker

Three types of interlocking modules per double circuit breaker bay are defined.
DB_BUS_A (3) handles the circuit breaker QA1 that is connected to busbar WA1 and
the disconnectors and grounding switches of this section. DB_BUS_B (3) handles the
circuit breaker QA2 that is connected to busbar WA2 and the disconnectors and
grounding switches of this section.
M13584-4 v4

For a double circuit-breaker bay, the modules DB_BUS_A, DB_LINE and

DB_BUS_B must be used.

14.4.8.2 Configuration setting M13584-6 v5

For application without 989 and 989G, just set the appropriate inputs to open state and
disregard the outputs. In the functional block diagram, 0 and 1 are designated
0=FALSE and 1=TRUE:

404 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

• 989_OP = 1
• 989_CL = 0

• 989G_OP = 1
• 989G_CL = 0

If, in this case, line voltage supervision is added, then rather than setting 989 to open
state, specify the state of the voltage supervision:

• 989_OP = VOLT_OFF
• 989_CL = VOLT_ON

If there is no voltage supervision, then set the corresponding inputs as follows:

• VOLT_OFF = 1
• VOLT_ON = 0

14.4.9 Interlocking for breaker-and-a-half diameter BH (3) IP14173-1 v3

14.4.9.1 Application M13570-3 v6

The interlocking for breaker-and-a-half diameter (BH_CONN(3), BH_LINE_A(3),

BH_LINE_B(3)) functions are used for lines connected to a breaker-and-a-half
diameter according to figure 168.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 405

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
189 289
189G 189G

152 152
289G 289G

689 689

389G 389G
BH_LINE_A BH_LINE_B

6189 6289
152

989 989
189G 289G
989G 989G

BH_CONN
en04000513_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000513 V1 EN-US

Figure 168: Switchyard layout breaker-and-a-half

M13570-7 v4

Three types of interlocking modules per diameter are defined. BH_LINE_A (3) and
BH_LINE_B (3) are the connections from a line to a busbar. BH_CONN (3) is the
connection between the two lines of the diameter in the breaker-and-a-half switchyard
layout.
M13569-4 v4

For a breaker-and-a-half arrangement, the modules BH_LINE_A, BH_CONN and

BH_LINE_B must be used.

14.4.9.2 Configuration setting M13569-6 v5

For application without 989 and 989G, just set the appropriate inputs to open state and
disregard the outputs. In the functional block diagram, 0 and 1 are designated
0=FALSE and 1=TRUE:

• 989_OP = 1
• 989_CL = 0

• 989G_OP = 1
• 989G_CL = 0

406 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

If, in this case, line voltage supervision is added, then rather than setting 989 to open
state, specify the state of the voltage supervision:

• 989_OP = VOLT_OFF
• 989_CL = VOLT_ON

If there is no voltage supervision, then set the corresponding inputs as follows:

• VOLT_OFF = 1
• VOLT_ON = 0

14.5 Voltage control SEMOD158732-1 v2

14.5.1 Identification
SEMOD173054-2 v5

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Automatic voltage control for tap TR1ATCC 90
changer, single control
U

IEC10000165 V1 EN-US

Automatic voltage control for tap TR8ATCC 90

changer, parallel control
U

IEC10000166 V1 EN-US

Tap changer control and supervision, 6 TCMYLTC - 84

binary inputs
Tap changer control and supervision, TCLYLTC - 84
32 binary inputs

14.5.2 Application SEMOD159067-1 v2

SEMOD159053-5 v5

When the load in a power network is increased the voltage will decrease and vice
versa. To maintain the network voltage at a constant level, power transformers are
usually equipped with on-load tap-changer. This alters the power transformer ratio in a
number of predefined steps and in that way changes the voltage. Each step usually
represents a change in voltage of approximately 0.5-1.7%.

The voltage control function is intended for control of power transformers with a motor
driven on-load tap-changer. The function is designed to regulate the voltage at the

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 407

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

secondary side of the power transformer. The control method is based on a step-by-step
principle which means that a control pulse, one at a time, will be issued to the tap
changer mechanism to move it one position up or down. The length of the control
pulse can be set within a wide range to accommodate different types of tap changer
mechanisms. The pulse is generated whenever the measured voltage, for a given time,
deviates from the set reference value by more than the preset deadband (degree of
insensitivity).

The voltage can be controlled at the point of voltage measurement, as well as at a load
point located out in the network. In the latter case, the load point voltage is calculated
based on the measured load current and the known impedance from the voltage
measuring point to the load point.

The automatic voltage control can be either for a single transformer, or for parallel
transformers. Parallel control of power transformers can be made in three alternative
ways:

• With the master-follower method

• With the reverse reactance method
• With the circulating current method

Of these alternatives, the first and the last require communication between the function
control blocks of the different transformers, whereas the middle alternative does not
require any communication.

The voltage control includes many extra features such as possibility to avoid
simultaneous tapping of parallel transformers, hot stand by regulation of a transformer
within a parallel group, with a LV CB open, compensation for a possible capacitor
bank on the LV side bay of a transformer, extensive tap changer monitoring including
contact wear and hunting detection, monitoring of the power flow in the transformer so
that for example, the voltage control can be blocked if the power reverses and so on.

The voltage control function is built up by two function blocks which both are logical
nodes in IEC 61850-8-1:

• Automatic voltage control for tap changer, TR1ATCC (90) for single control and
TR8ATCC (90) for parallel control.
• Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs, TCMYLTC (84) and 32
binary inputs, TCLYLTC (84)

Automatic voltage control for tap changer, TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) is a
function designed to automatically maintain the voltage at the LV-side side of a power
transformer within given limits around a set target voltage. A raise or lower command
is generated whenever the measured voltage, for a given period of time, deviates from
the set target value by more than the preset deadband value (degree of insensitivity). A

408 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

time delay (inverse or definite time) is set to avoid unnecessary operation during
shorter voltage deviations from the target value, and in order to coordinate with other
automatic voltage controllers in the system.

TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC (84)are an interface between the Automatic voltage control
for tap changer, TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) and the transformer load tap
changer itself. More specifically this means that it gives command-pulses to a power
transformer motor driven load tap changer and that it receives information from the
load tap changer regarding tap position, progress of given commands, and so on.

TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC (84) also serve the purpose of giving information about tap
position to the transformer differential protection.

Control location local/remote SEMOD159053-30 v3

The tap changer can be operated from the front of the IED or from a remote place
alternatively. On the IED front there is a local remote switch that can be used to select
the operator place. For this functionality the Apparatus control function blocks Bay
control (QCBAY), Local remote (LOCREM) and Local remote control
(LOCREMCTRL) are used.

Information about the control location is given to TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90)
function through connection of the Permitted Source to Operate (PSTO) output of the
QCBAY function block to the input PSTO of the TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90)
function block.

Control Mode SEMOD159053-35 v4

The control mode of the automatic voltage control for tap changer function, TR1ATCC
(90) for single control and TR8ATCC (90) for parallel control can be:

• Manual
• Automatic

The control mode can be changed from the local location via the command menu on
the local HMI under Main menu/Control/Commands/
TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC,90)/TR1ATCC:x/TR8ATCC:x, or changed
from a remote location via binary signals connected to the MANCTRL, AUTOCTRL
inputs on TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) function block.

Measured Quantities SEMOD159053-61 v4

In normal applications, the LV side of the transformer is used as the voltage measuring
point. If necessary, the LV side current is used as load current to calculate the line-
voltage drop to the regulation point.

Automatic voltage control for tap changer, TR1ATCC (90) for single control and
TR8ATCC (90) for parallel control function block has three inputs I3P1, I3P2 and
V3P2 corresponding to HV-current, LV-current and LV-voltage respectively. These

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 409

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

analog quantities are fed to the IED via the transformer input module, the Analog to
Digital Converter and thereafter a Pre-Processing Block. In the Pre-Processing Block, a
great number of quantities for example, phase-to-phase analog values, sequence values,
max value in a three phase group etc., are derived. The different function blocks in the
IED are then “subscribing” on selected quantities from the pre-processing blocks. In
case of TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90), there are the following possibilities:
SEMOD159053-65 v6

• I3P1 represents a three-phase group of phase current with the highest current in
any of the three phases considered. As only the highest of the phase current is
considered, it is also possible to use one single-phase current as well as two-phase
currents. In these cases, the currents that are not used will be zero.
• For I3P2 and V3P2 the setting alternatives are: any individual phase current/
voltage, as well as any combination of phase-phase current/voltage or the positive
sequence current/voltage. Thus, single-phase as well as, phase-phase or three-
phase feeding on the LV-side is possible but it is commonly selected for current
and voltage.

410 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

High Voltage Side

IA,IB,IC

IED
raise,lower

Load Tap
Changer
BOM
signals/alarms
BIM
position
MIM
(Load Current) IL

3ph or ph-ph or 1ph Currents

TRM
3ph or ph-ph or 1ph Voltages

Low Voltage Side

VB (Busbar Voltage)

Line Impedance R+jX

Load Center
VL (Load Point Voltage)

ANSI10000044-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000044 V1 EN-US

Figure 169: Signal flow for a single transformer with voltage control

On the HV side, the three-phase current is normally required in order to feed the three-
phase over current protection that blocks the load tap changer in case of over-current
above harmful levels.

The voltage measurement on the LV-side can be made single phase-ground. However,
it shall be remembered that this can only be used in solidly grounded systems, as the
measured phase-ground voltage can increase with as much as a factor √3 in case of
ground faults in a non-solidly grounded system.

The analog input signals are normally common with other functions in the IED for
example, protection functions.

The LV-busbar voltage is designated VB, the load current IL and load
point voltage VL.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 411

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

Automatic voltage control for a single transformer SEMOD159053-73 v6

Automatic voltage control for tap changer, single control TR1ATCC (90) measures the
magnitude of the busbar voltage VB. If no other additional features are enabled (line
voltage drop compensation), this voltage is further used for voltage regulation.

TR1ATCC (90) then compares this voltage with the set voltage, VSet and decides
which action should be taken. To avoid unnecessary switching around the setpoint, a
deadband (degree of insensitivity) is introduced. The deadband is symmetrical around
VSet, see figure 170, and it is arranged in such a way that there is an outer and an inner
deadband. Measured voltages outside the outer deadband start the timer to initiate tap
commands, whilst the sequence resets when the measured voltage is once again back
inside the inner deadband. One half of the outer deadband is denoted ΔV. The setting
of ΔV, setting Vdeadband should be set to a value near to the power transformer’s tap
changer voltage step (typically 75–125% of the tap changer step).

Security Range

*) *) *)
Raise Cmd DV DV Lower Cmd
DVin DVin

0 Vblock Vmin V1 Vset V2 Vmax Voltage Magnitude

*) Action in accordance with setting

ANSI06000489-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000489 V2 EN-US

Figure 170: Control actions on a voltage scale

During normal operating conditions the busbar voltage VB, stays within the outer
deadband (interval between V1 and V2 in figure 170). In that case no actions will be
taken by TR1ATCC (90). However, if VB becomes smaller than V1, or greater than
V2, an appropriate raise or lower timer will start. The timer will run as long as the
measured voltage stays outside the inner deadband. If this condition persists longer
than the preset time delay, TR1ATCC (90) will initiate that the appropriate VLOWER
or VRAISE command will be sent from TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC function block to
the transformer tap changer. If necessary, the procedure will be repeated until the
magnitude of the busbar voltage again falls within the inner deadband. One half of the
inner deadband is denoted ΔVin. The inner deadband ΔVin, setting VDeadbandInner
should be set to a value smaller than ΔV. It is recommended to set the inner deadband
to 25-70% of the ΔV value.

This way of working is used by TR1ATCC (90) while the busbar voltage is within the
security range defined by settings Vmin and Vmax.

A situation where VB falls outside this range will be regarded as an abnormal situation.

412 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

When VB falls below setting Vblock, or alternatively, falls below setting Vmin but still
above Vblock, or rises above Vmax, actions will be taken in accordance with settings
for blocking conditions (refer to table 40).

If the busbar voltage rises above Vmax, TR1ATCC (90) can initiate one or more fast
step down commands (VLOWER commands) in order to bring the voltage back into
the security range (settings Vmin, and Vmax). The fast step down function operation
can be set in one of the following three ways: off /auto/auto and manual, according to
the setting FSDMode. The VLOWER command, in fast step down mode, is issued with
the settable time delay tFSD.

The measured RMS magnitude of the busbar voltage VB is shown on the local HMI as
value BUSVOLT under Main menu/Test/Function status/Control/
TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC,90)/TR1ATCC:x/TR8ATCC:x.

Time characteristic SEMOD159053-82 v5

The time characteristic defines the time that elapses between the moment when
measured voltage exceeds the deadband interval until the appropriate VRAISE or
VLOWER command is initiated.

The purpose of the time delay is to prevent unnecessary load tap changer operations
caused by temporary voltage fluctuations and to coordinate load tap changer operations
in radial networks in order to limit the number of load tap changer operations. This can
be done by setting a longer time delay closer to the consumer and shorter time delays
higher up in the system.

The first time delay, t1, is used as a time delay (usually long delay) for the first
command in one direction. It can have a definite or inverse time characteristic,
according to the setting t1Use (Constant/Inverse). For inverse time characteristics
larger voltage deviations from the VSet value will result in shorter time delays, limited
by the shortest time delay equal to the tMin setting. This setting should be coordinated
with the tap changer mechanism operation time.

Constant (definite) time delay is independent of the voltage deviation.

The inverse time characteristic for the first time delay follows the formulas:

DA = VB - VSet
ANSIEQUATION2294 V1 EN-US (Equation 115)

DA
D=
DV
EQUATION1846-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 116)

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 413

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

tMin = Dt1
EQUATION1848 V2 EN-US (Equation 117)

Where:
DA absolute voltage deviation from the set point
D relative voltage deviation in respect to set deadband value

For the last equation, the condition t1 > tMin shall also be fulfilled. This practically
means that tMin will be equal to the set t1 value when absolute voltage deviation DA is
equal to ΔV ( relative voltage deviation D is equal to 1). For other values see
figure 171. It should be noted that operating times, shown in the figure 171 are for 30,
60, 90, 120, 150 & 180 seconds settings for t1 and 10 seconds for tMin.

t1=180

t1=150

t1=120

t1=90

t1=60

t1=30

IEC06000488_2_en.vsd
IEC06000488 V2 EN-US

Figure 171: Inverse time characteristic for TR1ATCC (90) and TR8ATCC (90)

The second time delay, t2, will be used for consecutive commands (commands in the
same direction as the first command). It can have a definite or inverse time
characteristic according to the setting t2Use (Constant/Inverse). Inverse time
characteristic for the second time delay follows the similar formulas as for the first
time delay, but the t2 setting is used instead of t1.

414 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

Line voltage drop SEMOD159053-105 v6

The purpose with the line voltage drop compensation is to control the voltage, not at
the power transformer low voltage side, but at a point closer to the load point.

Figure 172 shows the vector diagram for a line modelled as a series impedance with
the voltage VB at the LV busbar and voltage VL at the load center. The load current on
the line is IL, the line resistance and reactance from the station busbar to the load point
are RL and XL. The angle between the busbar voltage and the current, is j. If all these
parameters are known VL can be obtained by simple vector calculation.

Values for RL and XL are given as settings in primary system ohms. If more than one
line is connected to the LV busbar, an equivalent impedance should be calculated and
given as a parameter setting.

The line voltage drop compensation function can be turned Enabled/Disabled by the
setting parameter OperationLDC. When it is enabled, the voltage VL will be used by
the Automatic voltage control for tap changer function, TR1ATCC (90) for single
control and TR8ATCC (90) for parallel control for voltage regulation instead of VB.
However, TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) will still perform the following two
checks:

1. The magnitude of the measured busbar voltageVB, shall be within the security
range, (setting Vmin and Vmax). If the busbar voltage falls-out of this range the
line voltage drop compensation calculations will be temporarily stopped until the
voltage VB comes back within the range.
2. The magnitude of the calculated voltage VL at the load point, can be limited such
that it is only allowed to be equal to or smaller than the magnitude of VB,
otherwise VB will be used. However, a situation where VL>VB can be caused by a
capacitive load condition, and if the wish is to allow for a situation like that, the
limitation can be removed by setting the parameter OperCapaLDC to Enabled.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 415

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

RL XL
~

Load
VB

VB

VL jXLIL
Re
RLIL
ANSI06000487-2-en.vsd

ANSI06000487 V2 EN-US

Figure 172: Vector diagram for line voltage drop compensation

The calculated load voltage VL is shown on the local HMI as value ULOAD under
Main menu/Test/Function status/Control/TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC,90)/
TR1ATCC:x/TR8ATCC:x.

Load voltage adjustment SEMOD159053-118 v6

Due to the fact that most loads are proportional to the square of the voltage, it is
possible to provide a way to shed part of the load by decreasing the supply voltage a
couple of percent. During high load conditions, the voltage drop might be considerable
and there might be reasons to increase the supply voltage to keep up the power quality
and customer satisfaction.

It is possible to do this voltage adjustment in two different ways in Automatic voltage

control for tap changer, single control TR1ATCC (90) and parallel control TR8ATCC
(90):

1. Automatic load voltage adjustment, proportional to the load current.

2. Constant load voltage adjustment with four different preset values.

In the first case the voltage adjustment is dependent on the load and maximum voltage
adjustment should be obtained at rated load of the transformer.

In the second case, a voltage adjustment of the set point voltage can be made in four
discrete steps (positive or negative) activated with binary signals connected to
TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) function block inputs LVA1, LVA2, LVA3 and
LVA4. The corresponding voltage adjustment factors are given as setting parameters
LVAConst1, LVAConst2, LVAConst3 and LVAConst4. The inputs are activated with a
pulse, and the latest activation of anyone of the four inputs is valid. Activation of the
input LVARESET in TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) block, brings the voltage
setpoint back to Vset.

416 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

With these factors, TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) adjusts the value of the set
voltage Vset according to the following formula:

IL
Vsetadjust = Vset + Sa × + Sci
I 2 Base
EQUATION1978-ANSI V2 EN-US (Equation 118)

Vset, adjust Adjusted set voltage in per unit

VSet Original set voltage: Base quality is Vn2

Sa Automatic load voltage adjustment factor, setting VRAuto

IL Load current

I2Base Rated current, LV winding

Sci Constant load voltage adjust. factor for active input i (corresponding to
LVAConst1, LVAConst2, LVAConst3 and LVAConst4)

It shall be noted that the adjustment factor is negative in order to decrease the load
voltage and positive in order to increase the load voltage. After this calculation Vset,
adjust will be used by TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) for voltage regulation instead
of the original value Vset. The calculated set point voltage Vset, adjust is shown on the
local HMI as a service value under Main menu/Test/Function status/Control/
TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC,90)/TR1ATCC:x/TR8ATCC:x.

Automatic control of parallel transformers SEMOD159053-135 v5

Control of parallel transformers means control of two or more power transformers

connected to the same busbar on the LV side and in most cases also on the HV side.
Special measures must be taken in order to avoid a runaway situation where the tap
changers on the parallel transformers gradually diverge and end up in opposite end
positions.

Three alternative methods can be used for parallel control with the Automatic voltage
control for tap changer, single/parallel control TR8ATCC (90):
• master-follower method
• reverse reactance method
• circulating current method

In order to realize the need for special measures to be taken when controlling
transformers in parallel, consider first two parallel transformers which are supposed to
be equal with similar tap changers. If they would each be in automatic voltage control
for single transformer that is, each of them regulating the voltage on the LV busbar
individually without any further measures taken, then the following could happen.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 417

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

Assuming for instance that they start out on the same tap position and that the LV
busbar voltage VB is within VSet ± DV, then a gradual increase or decrease in the load
would at some stage make VB fall outside VSet ± DV and a raise or lower command
would be initiated. However, the rate of change of voltage would normally be slow,
which would make one tap changer act before the other. This is unavoidable and is due
to small inequalities in measurement and so on. The one tap changer that responds first
on a low voltage condition with a raise command will be prone to always do so, and
vice versa. The situation could thus develop such that, for example T1 responds first to
a low busbar voltage with a raise command and thereby restores the voltage. When the
busbar voltage thereafter at a later stage gets high, T2 could respond with a lower
command and thereby again restore the busbar voltage to be within the inner deadband.
However, this has now caused the load tap changer for the two transformers to be 2 tap
positions apart, which in turn causes an increasing circulating current. This course of
events will then repeat with T1 initiating raise commands and T2 initiating lower
commands in order to keep the busbar voltage within VSet ± DV, but at the same time
it will drive the two tap changers to their opposite end positions. High circulating
currents and loss of control would be the result of this runaway tap situation.

Parallel control with the master-follower method SEMOD159053-140 v5

In the master-follower method, one of the transformers is selected to be master, and

will regulate the voltage in accordance with the principles for Automatic voltage
control. Selection of the master is made by activating the binary input FORCMAST in
TR8ATCC (90) function block for one of the transformers in the group.

The followers can act in two alternative ways depending on the setting of the parameter
MFMode. When this setting is Follow Cmd, raise and lower commands (VRAISE and
VLOWER) generated by the master, will initiate the corresponding command in all
follower TR8ATCCs (90) simultaneously, and consequently they will blindly follow
the master irrespective of their individual tap positions. Effectively this means that if
the tap positions of the followers were harmonized with the master from the beginning,
they would stay like that as long as all transformers in the parallel group continue to
participate in the parallel control. On the other hand for example, one transformer is
disconnected from the group and misses a one tap step operation, and thereafter is
reconnected to the group again, it will thereafter participate in the regulation but with a
one tap position offset.

If the parameter MFMode is set to Follow Tap, then the followers will read the tap
position of the master and adopt to the same tap position or to a tap position with an
offset relative to the master, and given by setting parameter TapPosOffs (positive or
negative integer value). The setting parameter tAutoMSF introduces a time delay on
VRAISE/VLOWER commands individually for each follower when setting MFMode
has the value Follow Tap.

Selecting a master is made by activating the input FORCMAST in TR8ATCC (90)

function block. Deselecting a master is made by activating the input RSTMAST. These

418 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

two inputs are pulse activated, and the most recent activation is valid that is, an
activation of any of these two inputs overrides previous activations. If none of these
inputs has been activated, the default is that the transformer acts as a follower (given of
course that the settings are parallel control with the master follower method).

When the selection of master or follower in parallel control, or automatic control in

single mode, is made with a three position switch in the substation, an arrangement as
in figure 173 below is arranged with application configuration.

Figure 173: Principle for a three-position switch Master/Follower/Single

Parallel control with the reverse reactance method SEMOD159053-145 v4

Consider Figure 174 with two parallel transformers with equal rated data and similar
tap changers. The tap positions will diverge and finally end up in a runaway tap
situation if no measures to avoid this are taken.

T1 T2

IT1 IT2
VB
IL

VL Load

en06000486_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000486 V1 EN-US

Figure 174: Parallel transformers with equal rated data.

In the reverse reactance method, the line voltage drop compensation is used. The
original of the line voltage drop compensation function purpose is to control the
voltage at a load point further out in the network. The very same function can also be
used here to control the voltage at a load point inside the transformer, by choosing a
negative value of the parameter Xline.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 419

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

Figure 175, shows a vector diagram where the principle of reverse reactance has been
introduced for the transformers in figure 174. The transformers are here supposed to be
on the same tap position, and the busbar voltage is supposed to give a calculated
compensated value VL that coincides with the target voltage VSet.

RLIT1=RLIT2
= V set
V L1=V L2
jXLIT1=jXLIT2

VB

IT1=IT2=(IT1+IT2)/2
en06000485_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000485 V1 EN-US

Figure 175: Vector diagram for two transformers regulated exactly on target
voltage.

A comparison with figure 172 gives that the line voltage drop compensation for the
purpose of reverse reactance control is made with a value with opposite sign on XL,
hence the designation “reverse reactance” or “negative reactance”. Effectively this
means that, whereas the line voltage drop compensation in figure 172 gave a voltage
drop along a line from the busbar voltage VB to a load point voltage VL, the line
voltage drop compensation in figure 175 gives a voltage increase (actually, by
adjusting the ratio XL/RL with respect to the power factor, the length of the vector VL
will be approximately equal to the length of VB) from VB up towards the transformer
itself. Thus in principal the difference between the vector diagrams in figure 172 and
figure 175 is the sign of the setting parameter XL.

If now the tap position between the transformers will differ, a circulating current will
appear, and the transformer with the highest tap (highest no load voltage) will be the
source of this circulating current. Figure 176 below shows this situation with T1 being
on a higher tap than T2.

420 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

I
cc....T2

T1 T2
RLIT2 RIT1
I
V L1
cc....T1

jXLIT2 jXLIT
IT1 IT2 V L2
1
VB
-Icc VB
IL IT2
(IT1+IT2)/2
IT1 Icc
VL Load

en06000491_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000491 V1 EN-US

Figure 176: Circulating current caused by T1 on a higher tap than T2.

The circulating current Icc is predominantly reactive due to the reactive nature of the
transformers. The impact of Icc on the individual transformer currents is that it
increases the current in T1 (the transformer that is driving Icc) and decreases it in T2 at
the same time as it introduces contradictive phase shifts, as can be seen in figure 176.
The result is thus, that the line voltage drop compensation calculated voltage VL for T1
will be higher than the line voltage drop compensation calculated voltage VL for T2, or
in other words, the transformer with the higher tap position will have the higher VL
value and the transformer with the lower tap position will have the lower VL value.
Consequently, when the busbar voltage increases, T1 will be the one to tap down, and
when the busbar voltage decreases, T2 will be the one to tap up. The overall
performance will then be that the runaway tap situation will be avoided and that the
circulating current will be minimized.

Parallel control with the circulating current method SEMOD159053-159 v5

Two transformers with different turns ratio, connected to the same busbar on the HV-
side, will apparently show different LV-side voltage. If they are now connected to the
same LV busbar but remain unloaded, this difference in no-load voltage will cause a
circulating current to flow through the transformers. When load is put on the
transformers, the circulating current will remain the same, but now it will be
superimposed on the load current in each transformer. Voltage control of parallel
transformers with the circulating current method means minimizing of the circulating
current at a given voltage target value, thereby achieving:

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 421

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

1. that the busbar or load voltage is regulated to a preset target value

2. that the load is shared between parallel transformers in proportion to their ohmic
short circuit reactance

If the transformers have equal percentage impedance given in the respective

transformer MVA base, the load will be divided in direct proportion to the rated power
of the transformers when the circulating current is minimized.

This method requires extensive exchange of data between the TR8ATCC (90) function
blocks (one TR8ATCC (90) function for each transformer in the parallel group).
TR8ATCC (90) function block can either be located in the same IED, where they are
configured in PCM600 to co-operate, or in different IEDs. If the functions are located
in different IEDs they must communicate via GOOSE interbay communication on the
IEC 61850 communication protocol. Complete exchange of TR8ATCC (90) data,
analog as well as binary, via GOOSE is made cyclically every 300 ms.

The busbar voltage VB is measured individually for each transformer in the parallel
group by its associated TR8ATCC (90) function. These measured values will then be
exchanged between the transformers, and in each TR8ATCC (90) block, the mean
value of all VB values will be calculated. The resulting value VBmean will then be used
in each IED instead of VB for the voltage regulation, thus assuring that the same value
is used by all TR8ATCC functions, and thereby avoiding that one erroneous
measurement in one transformer could upset the voltage regulation. At the same time,
supervision of the VT mismatch is also performed. This works such that, if a measured
voltage VB, differs from VBmean with more than a preset value (setting parameter
VTmismatch) and for more than a pre set time (setting parameter tVTmismatch) an
alarm signal VTALARM will be generated.

The calculated mean busbar voltage VBmean is shown on the local HMI as a service
value BusVolt under Main menu/Test/Function status/Control/
TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC,90)/TR8ATCC:x.

Measured current values for the individual transformers must be communicated

between the participating TR8ATCC (90) functions, in order to calculate the circulating
current.

The calculated circulating current Icc_i for transformer “i” is shown on the HMI as a
service value ICIRCUL under Main menu/Test/Function status/Control/
TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC,90)/TR8ATCC:x.

When the circulating current is known, it is possible to calculate a no-load voltage for
each transformer in the parallel group. To do that the magnitude of the circulating
current in each bay, is first converted to a voltage deviation, Vdi, with equation 119:

422 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

Vdi = C i × I cc _ i × X i
EQUATION1979-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 119)

where Xi is the short-circuit reactance for transformer i and Ci, is a setting parameter
named Comp which serves the purpose of alternatively increasing or decreasing the
impact of the circulating current in TR8ATCC control calculations. It should be noted
that Vdi will have positive values for transformers that produce circulating currents and
negative values for transformers that receive circulating currents.

Now the magnitude of the no-load voltage for each transformer can be approximated
with:

Vi = VBmean + Vdi
EQUATION1980-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 120)

This value for the no-load voltage is then simply put into the voltage control function
for single transformer. There it is treated as the measured busbar voltage, and further
control actions are taken as described previously in section "Automatic voltage control
for a single transformer". By doing this, the overall control strategy can be summarized
as follows.

For the transformer producing/receiving the circulating current, the calculated no-load
voltage will be greater/smaller than the measured voltage VBmean. The calculated no-
load voltage will then be compared with the set voltage VSet. A steady deviation which
is outside the outer deadband will result in VLOWER or VRAISE being initiated
alternatively. In this way the overall control action will always be correct since the
position of a tap changer is directly proportional to the transformer no-load voltage.
The sequence resets when VBmean is inside the inner deadband at the same time as the
calculated no-load voltages for all transformers in the parallel group are inside the
outer deadband.

In parallel operation with the circulating current method, different VSet values for
individual transformers can cause the voltage regulation to be unstable. For this reason,
the mean value of VSet for parallel operating transformers can be automatically
calculated and used for the voltage regulation. This is set Enabled/Disabled by setting
parameter OperUsetPar. The calculated mean VSet value is shown on the local HMI as
a service value USETPAR under Main menu/Test/Function status/Control/
TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC,90)/TR8ATCC:x.

The use of mean VSet is recommended for parallel operation with the circulating
current method, especially in cases when Load Voltage Adjustment is also used.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 423

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

Line voltage drop compensation for parallel control SEMOD159053-186 v3

The line voltage drop compensation for a single transformer is described in section
"Line voltage drop". The same principle is used for parallel control with the circulating
current method and with the master – follower method, except that the total load
current, IL, is used in the calculation instead of the individual transformer current. (See
figure 172 for details). The same values for the parameters Rline and Xline shall be set
in all IEDs in the same parallel group. There is no automatic change of these
parameters due to changes in the substation topology, thus they should be changed
manually if needed.

Avoidance of simultaneous tapping SEMOD159053-189 v1

Avoidance of simultaneous tapping (operation with the circulating current

method) SEMOD159053-191 v3

For some types of tap changers, especially older designs, an unexpected interruption of
the auxiliary voltage in the middle of a tap manoeuvre, can jam the tap changer. In
order not to expose more than one tap changer at a time, simultaneous tapping of
parallel transformers (regulated with the circulating current method) can be avoided.
This is done by setting parameter OperSimTap to On. Simultaneous tapping is then
avoided at the same time as tapping actions (in the long term) are distributed evenly
amongst the parallel transformers.

The algorithm in Automatic voltage control for tap changer, parallel control TR8ATCC
(90) will select the transformer with the greatest voltage deviation Vdi to tap first. That
transformer will then start timing, and after time delay t1 the appropriate VRAISE or
VLOWER command will be initiated. If now further tapping is required to bring the
busbar voltage inside VDeadbandInner, the process will be repeated, and the
transformer with the then greatest value of Vdi amongst the remaining transformers in
the group will tap after a further time delay t2, and so on. This is made possible as the
calculation of Icc is cyclically updated with the most recent measured values. If two
transformers have equal magnitude of Vdi then there is a predetermined order
governing which one is going to tap first.

Avoidance of simultaneous tapping (operation with the master follower method) SEMOD159053-197 v2

A time delay for the follower in relation to the command given from the master can be
set when the setting MFMode is Follow Tap that is, when the follower follows the tap
position (with or without an offset) of the master. The setting parameter tAutoMSF then
introduces a time delay on VRAISE/VLOWER commands individually for each
follower, and effectively this can be used to avoid simultaneous tapping.

Homing SEMOD159053-200 v2

Homing (operation with the circulating current method) SEMOD159053-205 v3

This function can be used with parallel operation of power transformers using the
circulating current method. It makes possible to keep a transformer energized from the

424 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

HV side, but open on the LV side (hot stand-by), to follow the voltage regulation of
loaded parallel transformers, and thus be on a proper tap position when the LV circuit
breaker closes.

For this function, it is needed to have the LV VTs for each transformer on the cable
(tail) side (not the busbar side) of the CB, and to have the LV CB position hardwired to
the IED.

In TR8ATCC block for one transformer, the state "Homing" will be defined as the
situation when the transformer has information that it belongs to a parallel group (for
example, information on T1INCLD=1 or T2INCLD=1 ... and so on), at the same time
as the binary input DISC on TR8ATCC block is activated by open LV CB. If now the
setting parameter OperHoming = Enabled for that transformer, TR8ATCC will act in
the following way:

• The algorithm calculates the “true” busbar voltage, by averaging the voltage
measurements of the other transformers included in the parallel group (voltage
measurement of the “disconnected transformer” itself is not considered in the
calculation).
• The value of this true busbar voltage is used in the same way as Vset for control of
a single transformer. The “disconnected transformer” will then automatically
initiate VRAISE or VLOWER commands (with appropriate t1 or t2 time delay) in
order to keep the LV side of the transformer within the deadband of the busbar
voltage.

Homing (operation with the master follower method) SEMOD159053-216 v3

If one (or more) follower has its LV circuit breaker open and its HV circuit breaker
closed, and if OperHoming = Enabled, this follower continues to follow the master just
as it would have made with the LV circuit breaker closed. On the other hand, if the LV
circuit breaker of the master opens, automatic control will be blocked and TR8ATCC
function output MFERR will be activated as the system will not have a master.

Adapt mode, manual control of a parallel group SEMOD159053-219 v2

Adapt mode (operation with the circulating current method) SEMOD159053-221 v5

When the circulating current method is used, it is also possible to manually control the
transformers as a group. To achieve this, the setting OperationAdapt must be set
Enabled, then the control mode for one TR8ATCC (90) shall be set to “Manual” via
the binary input MANCTRL or the local HMI under Main menu/Control/
Commands/TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC,90)/TR8ATCC:x whereas the other
TR8ATCCs (90) are left in “Automatic”. TR8ATCCs (90) in automatic mode will then
observe that one transformer in the parallel group is in manual mode and will then
automatically be set in adapt mode. As the name indicates they will adapt to the
manual tapping of the transformer that has been put in manual mode.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 425

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

TR8ATCC (90) in adapt mode will continue the calculation of Vdi, but instead of
adding Vdi to the measured busbar voltage, it will compare it with the deadband DV.
The following control rules are used:

1. If Vdi is positive and its modulus is greater than DV, then initiate an VLOWER
command. Tapping will then take place after appropriate t1/t2 timing.
2. If Vdi is negative and its modulus is greater than DV, then initiate an VRAISE
command. Tapping will then take place after appropriate t1/t2 timing.
3. If Vdi modulus is smaller than DV, then do nothing.

The binary output signal ADAPT on the TR8ATCC (90) function block will be
activated to indicate that this TR8ATCC (90) is adapting to another TR8ATCC (90) in
the parallel group.

It shall be noted that control with adapt mode works as described under the condition
that only one transformer in the parallel group is set to manual mode via the binary
input MANCTRL or, the local HMI Main menu/Control/Commands/
TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC,90)/TR8ATCC:x.

In order to operate each tap changer individually when the circulating current method
is used, the operator must set each TR8ATCC (90) in the parallel group, in manual.

Adapt mode (operation with the master follower method) SEMOD159053-234 v5

When in master follower mode, the adapt situation occurs when the setting
OperationAdapt is Enabled, and the master is put in manual control with the followers
still in parallel master-follower control. In this situation the followers will continue to
follow the master the same way as when it is in automatic control.

If one follower in a master follower parallel group is put in manual mode, still with the
setting OperationAdaptEnabled, the rest of the group will continue in automatic master
follower control. The follower in manual mode will of course disregard any possible
tapping of the master. However, as one transformer in the parallel group is now
exempted from the parallel control, the binary output signal ADAPT on TR8ATCC
(90) function block will be activated for the rest of the parallel group.

Plant with capacitive shunt compensation (for operation with the

circulating current method) SEMOD159053-238 v4

If significant capacitive shunt generation is connected in a substation and it is not

symmetrically connected to all transformers in a parallel group, the situation may
require compensation of the capacitive current to the ATCC.

An asymmetric connection will exist if for example, the capacitor is situated on the LV-
side of a transformer, between the CT measuring point and the power transformer or at
a tertiary winding of the power transformer, see figure 177. In a situation like this, the
capacitive current will interact in opposite way in the different ATCCs with regard to

426 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

the calculation of circulating currents. The capacitive current is part of the imaginary
load current and therefore essential in the calculation. The calculated circulating
current and the real circulating currents will in this case not be the same, and they will
not reach a minimum at the same time. This might result in a situation when
minimizing of the calculated circulating current will not regulate the tap changers to
the same tap positions even if the power transformers are equal.

However if the capacitive current is also considered in the calculation of the circulating
current, then the influence can be compensated for.

I cc....T2 I cc....T2

T1 T2 T1 T2
I I cc....T1
cc....T1

IT1 IT2 IT1 IT2

IC
IT1 IT2
IC
IT2-IC

IT1
VB VB
IL IL

VL Load VL Load

en06000512_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000512 V1 EN-US

Figure 177: Capacitor bank on the LV-side

From figure 177 it is obvious that the two different connections of the capacitor banks
are completely the same regarding the currents in the primary network. However the
CT measured currents for the transformers would be different. The capacitor bank
current may flow entirely to the load on the LV side, or it may be divided between the
LV and the HV side. In the latter case, the part of IC that goes to the HV side will
divide between the two transformers and it will be measured with opposite direction

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 427

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

for T2 and T1. This in turn would be misinterpreted as a circulating current, and would
upset a correct calculation of Icc. Thus, if the actual connection is as in the left figure
the capacitive current IC needs to be compensated for regardless of the operating
conditions and in ATCC this is made numerically. The reactive power of the capacitor
bank is given as a setting Q1, which makes it possible to calculate the reactive
capacitance:

2
V
XC =
Q1
EQUATION1981-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 121)

Thereafter the current IC at the actual measured voltage VB can be calculated as:

VB
IC =
3 × XC
EQUATION1982-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 122)

In this way the measured LV currents can be adjusted so that the capacitor bank current
will not influence the calculation of the circulating current.

Three independent capacitor bank values Q1, Q2 and Q3 can be set for each
transformer in order to make possible switching of three steps in a capacitor bank in
one bay.

Power monitoring SEMOD159053-251 v4

The level (with sign) of active and reactive power flow through the transformer, can be
monitored. This function can be utilized for different purposes for example, to block
the voltage control function when active power is flowing from the LV side to the HV
side or to initiate switching of reactive power compensation plant, and so on.

There are four setting parameters P>, P<, Q> and Q< with associated outputs in
TR8ATCC (90) and TR1ATCC (90) function blocks PGTFWD, PLTREV, QGTFWD
and QLTREV. When passing the pre-set value, the associated output will be activated
after the common time delay setting tPower.

The definition of direction of the power is such that the active power P is forward when
power flows from the HV-side to the LV-side as shown in figure 178. The reactive
power Q is forward when the total load on the LV side is inductive ( reactance) as
shown in figure 178.

428 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

HV-side

Pforward
Qforward
(inductive)
IED

ATCC

LV-side
ANSI06000536-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000536 V2 EN-US

Figure 178: Power direction references

With the four outputs in the function block available, it is possible to do more than just
supervise a level of power flow in one direction. By combining the outputs with logical
elements in application configuration, it is also possible to cover for example, intervals
as well as areas in the P-Q plane.

Busbar topology logic SEMOD159053-259 v3

Information of the busbar topology that is, position of circuit breakers and isolators,
yielding which transformers that are connected to which busbar and which busbars that
are connected to each other, is vital for the Automatic voltage control for tap changer,
parallel control function TR8ATCC (90) when the circulating current or the master-
follower method is used. This information tells each TR8ATCC (90), which
transformers that it has to consider in the parallel control.

In a simple case, when only the switchgear in the transformer bays needs to be
considered, there is a built-in function in TR8ATCC (90) block that can provide
information on whether a transformer is connected to the parallel group or not. This is
made by connecting the transformer CB auxiliary contact status to TR8ATCC (90)
function block input DISC, which can be made via a binary input, or via GOOSE from
another IED in the substation. When the transformer CB is open, this activates that
input which in turn will make a corresponding signal DISC=1 in TR8ATCC (90) data
set. This data set is the same data package as the package that contains all TR8ATCC
(90) data transmitted to the other transformers in the parallel group (see section
"Exchange of information between TR8ATCC functions" for more details). Figure 179
shows an example where T3 is disconnected which will lead to T3 sending the DISC=1
signal to the other two parallel TR8ATCC (90) modules (T1 and T2) in the group. Also
see table 39.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 429

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

T1 T2 T3
V1 V2 V3

Z1 I1 Z2 I2 Z3 I3=0

IL=I1+I2
99000952.VSD
ANSI99000952 V1 EN-US

Figure 179: Disconnection of one transformer in a parallel group

When the busbar arrangement is more complicated with more buses and bus
couplers/bus sections, it is necessary to engineer a specific station topology logic. This
logic can be built in the application configuration in PCM600 and will keep record on
which transformers that are in parallel (in one or more parallel groups). In each
TR8ATCC (90) function block there are eight binary inputs (T1INCLD,..., T8INCLD)
that will be activated from the logic depending on which transformers that are in
parallel with the transformer to whom the TR8ATCC (90) function block belongs.

TR8ATCC (90) function block is also fitted with eight outputs (T1PG,..., T8PG) for
indication of the actual composition of the parallel group that it itself is part of. If
parallel operation mode has been selected in the IED with setting TrfId = Tx, then the
TxPG signal will always be set to 1. The parallel function will consider communication
messages only from the voltage control functions working in parallel (according to the
current station configuration). When the parallel voltage control function detects that
no other transformers work in parallel it will behave as a single voltage control
function in automatic mode.

Exchange of information between TR8ATCC functions SEMOD159053-267 v6

Each transformer in a parallel group needs an Automatic voltage control for tap
changer, parallel control TR8ATCC (90) function block of its own for the parallel
voltage control. Communication between these TR8ATCCs (90) is made either on the
GOOSE interbay communication on the IEC 61850 protocol if TR8ATCC (90)
functions reside in different IEDs, or alternatively configured internally in one IED if
multiple instances of TR8ATCC (90) reside in the same IED. Complete exchange of
TR8ATCC (90) data, analog as well as binary, on GOOSE is made cyclically every 300
ms.

TR8ATCC (90) function block has an output ATCCOUT. This output contains two sets
of signals. One is the data set that needs to be transmitted to other TR8ATCC (90)
blocks in the same parallel group, and the other is the data set that is transferred to the

430 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC (84) function block for the same transformer as TR8ATCC
(90) block belongs to.

There are 10 binary signals and 6 analog signals in the data set that is transmitted from
one TR8ATCC (90) block to the other TR8ATCC (90) blocks in the same parallel
group:
Table 37: Binary signals
Signal Explanation
TimerOn This signal is activated by the transformer that has started its timer and is going to
tap when the set time has expired.
automaticCTRL Activated when the transformer is set in automatic control
mutualBlock Activated when the automatic control is blocked
disc Activated when the transformer is disconnected from the busbar
receiveStat Signal used for the horizontal communication
TermIsForcedMaster Activated when the transformer is selected Master in the master-follower parallel
control mode
TermIsMaster Activated for the transformer that is master in the master-follower parallel control
mode
termReadyForMSF Activated when the transformer is ready for master-follower parallel control mode
raiseVoltageOut Order from the master to the followers to tap up
lowerVoltageOut Order from the master to the followers to tap down

Table 38: Analog signals

Signal Explanation
voltageBusbar Measured busbar voltage for this transformer
ownLoadCurrim Measured load current imaginary part for this transformer
ownLoadCurrre Measured load current real part for this transformer
reacSec Transformer reactance in primary ohms referred to the LV side
relativePosition The transformer's actual tap position
voltage Setpoint The transformer's set voltage (VSet) for automatic control

Manual configuration of VCTR GOOSE data set is required. Note that

both data value attributes and quality attributes have to be mapped. The
following data objects must be configured:
• BusV
• LodAIm
• LodARe
• PosRel

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 431

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

• SetV
• VCTRStatus
• X2

The transformers controlled in parallel with the circulating current method or the
master-follower method must be assigned unique identities. These identities are
entered as a setting in each TR8ATCC (90), and they are predefined as T1, T2, T3,...,
T8 (transformers 1 to 8). In figure 179 there are three transformers with the parameter
TrfId set to T1, T2 and T3, respectively.

For parallel control with the circulating current method or the master-follower method
alternatively, the same type of data set as described above, must be exchanged between
two TR8ATCC (90). To achieve this, each TR8ATCC (90) is transmitting its own data
set on the output ATCCOUT as previously mentioned. To receive data from the other
transformers in the parallel group, the output ATCCOUT from each transformer must
be connected (via GOOSE or internally in the application configuration) to the inputs
HORIZx (x = identifier for the other transformers in the parallel group) on TR8ATCC
(90) function block. Apart from this, there is also a setting in each TR8ATCC =/,..., =/
T1RXOP=Off/On,..., T8RXOP=Off/ On. This setting determines from which of the
other transformer individuals that data shall be received. Settings in the three
TR8ATCC blocks for the transformers in figure 179, would then be according to the
table 39:
Table 39: Setting of TxRXOP

TrfId=T1 T1RXOP= T2RXOP= T3RXOP= T4RXOP= T5RXOP= T6RXOP= T7RXOP= T8RXOP=

Off On On Off Off Off Off Off
TrfId=T2 T1RXOP= T2RXOP= T3RXOP= T4RXOP= T5RXOP= T6RXOP= T7RXOP= T8RXOP=
On Off On Off Off Off Off Off
TrfId=T3 T1RXOP= T2RXOP= T3RXOP= T4RXOP= T5RXOP= T6RXOP= T7RXOP= T8RXOP=
On On Off Off Off Off Off Off

Observe that this parameter must be set to Disabled for the “own” transformer. (for
transformer with identity T1 parameter T1RXOP must be set to Disabled, and so on.

Blocking SEMOD159053-275 v2

Blocking conditions SEMOD159053-277 v6

The purpose of blocking is to prevent the tap changer from operating under conditions
that can damage it, or otherwise when the conditions are such that power system
related limits would be exceeded or when, for example the conditions for automatic
control are not met.

432 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

For the Automatic voltage control for tap changer function, TR1ATCC (90) for single
control and TR8ATCC (90) for parallel control, three types of blocking are used:

Partial Block: Prevents operation of the tap changer only in one direction (only
VRAISE or VLOWER command is blocked) in manual and automatic control mode.

Auto Block: Prevents automatic voltage regulation, but the tap changer can still be
controlled manually.

Total Block: Prevents any tap changer operation independently of the control mode
(automatic as well as manual).

Setting parameters for blocking that can be set in TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90)
under general settings in PST/local HMI are listed in table 40.
Table 40: Blocking settings
Setting Values (Range) Description
OCBk Alarm When any one of the three HV currents exceeds the
(automatically Auto Block preset value IBlock, TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) will
reset) Auto&Man Block be temporarily totally blocked. The outputs IBLK and
TOTBLK or AUTOBLK will be activated depending on the
actual parameter setting.
OVPartBk Alarm If the busbar voltage VB(not the compensated load point
(automatically Auto&Man Block voltage UVL) exceedsVmax (see figure 170), an alarm
reset) will be initiated or further VRAISE commands will be
blocked. If permitted by setting in PST configuration, Fast
Step Down (FSD) of the tap changer will be initiated in
order to re-enter the voltage into the range Vmin < VB <
Vmax. The FSD function is blocked when the lowest
voltage tap position is reached. The time delay for the
FSD function is separately set. The output VHIGH will be
activated as long as the voltage is above Vmax.
UVPartBk Alarm If the busbar voltage VB (not the compensated load point
(automatically Auto&Man Block voltage VL) is between Vblock and Vmin (see figure170),
reset) an alarm will be initiated or further VLOWER commands
will be blocked. The output VLOW will be activated.
UVBk Alarm If the busbar voltage VB falls below Vblock this blocking
(automatically Auto Block condition is active. It is recommended to block automatic
reset) Auto&Man Block control in this situation and allow manual control. This is
because the situation normally would correspond to a
disconnected transformer and then it should be allowed to
operate the tap changer before reconnecting the
transformer. The outputs VBLK and TOTBLK or
AUTOBLK will be activated depending on the actual
parameter setting.
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 433

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

Setting Values (Range) Description

RevActPartBk(auto Alarm The risk of voltage instability increases as transmission
matically reset) Auto Block lines become more heavily loaded in an attempt to
maximize the efficient use of existing generation and
transmission facilities. In the same time lack of reactive
power may move the operation point of the power
network to the lower part of the P-V-curve (unstable part).
Under these conditions, when the voltage starts to drop, it
might happen that an VRAISE command can give
reversed result that is, a lower busbar voltage. Tap
changer operation under voltage instability conditions
makes it more difficult for the power system to recover.
Therefore, it might be desirable to block TR1ATCC (90) or
TR8ATCC (90) temporarily.
Requirements for this blocking are:

• The load current must exceed the set value

RevActLim
• After an VRAISE command, the measured busbar
voltage shall have a lower value than its previous
value
• The second requirement has to be fulfilled for two
consecutive VRAISE commands

If all three requirements are fulfilled, TR1ATCC (90) or

TR8ATCC (90) automatic control will be blocked for raise
commands for a period of time given by the setting
parameter tRevAct and the output signal REVACBLK will
be set. The reversed action feature can be turned off/on
with the setting parameter OperationRA.
CmdErrBk Alarm Typical operating time for a tap changer mechanism is
(manually reset) Auto Block around 3-8 seconds. Therefore, the function should wait
Auto&Man Block for a position change before a new command is issued.
The command error signal, CMDERRAL on the
TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC (84) function block, will be set if
the tap changer position does not change one step in the
correct direction within the time given by the setting
tTCTimeout in TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC (84) function
block. The tap changer module TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC
(84) will then indicate the error until a successful
command has been carried out or it has been reset by
changing control mode of TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC
(90) function to Manual and then back to Automatic. The
outputs CMDERRAL on TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC (84) and
TOTBLK or AUTOBLK on TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC
(90) will be activated depending on the actual parameter
setting.
This error condition can be reset by the input RESETERR
on TCMYLTC (84) function block, or alternatively by
changing control mode of TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC
(90) function to Manual and then back to Automatic.
Table continues on next page

434 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

Setting Values (Range) Description

TapChgBk Alarm If the input TCINPROG of TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC (84)
(manually reset Auto Block function block is connected to the tap changer
Auto&Man Block mechanism, then this blocking condition will be active if
the TCINPROG input has not reset when the tTCTimeout
timer has timed out. The output TCERRAL will be
activated depending on the actual parameter setting. In
correct operation the TCINPROG shall appear during the
VRAISE/VLOWER output pulse and disappear before the
tTCTimeout time has elapsed.
This error condition can be reset by the input RESETERR
on TCMYLTC (84) function block, or alternatively by
changing control mode of TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC
(90) function to Manual and then back to Automatic.
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 435

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

Setting Values (Range) Description

TapPosBk Alarm This blocking/alarm is activated by either:
(automatically Auto Block
reset/manually Auto&Man Block 1. The tap changer reaching an end position i.e. one of
reset) the extreme positions according to the setting
parameters LowVoltTap and HighVoltTap. When the
tap changer reaches one of these two positions
further commands in the corresponding direction will
be blocked. Effectively this will then be a partial
block if Auto Block or Auto&Man Block is set. The
outputs POSERRAL and LOPOSAL or HIPOSAL
will be activated.
2. Tap Position Error which in turn can be caused by
one of the following conditions:

• Tap position is out of range that is, the indicated

position is above or below the end positions.
• The tap changer indicates that it has changed more
than one position on a single raise or lower
command.
• The tap position reading shows a BCD code error
(unaccepted combination) or a parity fault.
• The reading of tap position shows a mA value that is
out of the mA-range. Supervision of the input signal
for MIM is made by setting the MIM parameters
I_Max and I_Min to desired values, for example,
I_Max = 20mA and I_Min = 4mA.
• Very low or negative mA-values.
• Indication of hardware fault on BIM or MIM module.
Supervision of the input hardware module is
provided by connecting the corresponding error
signal to the INERR input (input module error) or
BIERR on TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC (84) function
block.
• Interruption of communication with the tap changer.

The outputs POSERRAL and AUTOBLK or TOTBLK will

be set.
This error condition can be reset by the input RESETERR
on TCMYLTC (84) function block, or alternatively by
changing control mode of TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC
(90) function to Manual and then back to Automatic.
CircCurrBk Alarm When the magnitude of the circulating current exceeds
(automatically Auto Block the preset value (setting parameter CircCurrLimit) for
reset) Auto&Man Block longer time than the set time delay (setting parameter
tCircCurr) it will cause this blocking condition to be fulfilled
provided that the setting parameter OperCCBlock is
Enabled. The signal resets automatically when the
circulating current decreases below the preset value.
Usually this can be achieved by manual control of the tap
changers. TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) outputs
ICIRC and TOTBLK or AUTOBLK will be activated
depending on the actual parameter setting.
Table continues on next page

436 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

Setting Values (Range) Description

MFPosDiffBk Alarm In the master-follower mode, if the tap difference between
(manually reset) Auto Block a follower and the master is greater than the set value
(setting parameter MFPosDiffLim) then this blocking
condition is fulfilled and the outputs OUTOFPOS and
AUTOBLK (alternatively an alarm) will be set.

Setting parameters for blocking that can be set in TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90)
under setting group Nx in PST/ local HMI are listed in table 41.
Table 41: Blocking settings
Setting Value (Range) Description
TotalBlock (manually reset) Enabled/Disabled TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC
(90) function can be totally
blocked via the setting
parameter TotalBlock, which can
be set Enabled/Disabled from
the local HMI or PST. The output
TOTBLK will be activated.
AutoBlock (manually reset) Enabled/Disabled TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC
(90) function can be blocked for
automatic control via the setting
parameter AutoBlock, which can
be set Enabled/Disabled from
the local HMI or PST. The output
AUTOBLK will be set.

TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) blockings that can be made via input signals in the
function block are listed in table 42.
Table 42: Blocking via binary inputs
Input name Activation Description
BLOCK (manually reset) Enabled/Disabled(via binary The voltage control function can
input) be totally blocked via the binary
input BLOCK on TR1ATCC (90)
or TR8ATCC (90) function block.
The output TOTBLK will be
activated.
EAUTOBLK (manually reset) Enabled/Disabled(via binary The voltage control function can
input) be blocked for automatic control
via the binary input EAUTOBLK
on TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC
(90) function block. The output
AUTOBLK will be activated.
Deblocking is made via the input
DEBLKAUT.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 437

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

Blockings activated by the operating conditions, without setting or separate external

activation possibilities, are listed in table 43.
Table 43: Blockings without setting possibilities
Activation Type of blocking Description
Disconnected Auto Block Automatic control is blocked for a transformer when
transformer parallel control with the circulating current method is
(automatically reset) used, and that transformer is disconnected from the
LV-busbar. (This is under the condition that the
setting OperHoming is selected Off for the
disconnected transformer. Otherwise the transformer
will get into the state Homing). The binary input signal
DISC in TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) function
shall be used to supervise if the transformer LV
circuit breaker is closed or not. The outputs TRFDISC
and AUTOBLK will be activated . Blocking will be
removed when the transformer is reconnected (input
signal DISC set back to zero).
No Master/More than Auto Block Automatic control is blocked when parallel control
one Master with the master-follower method is used, and the
(automatically reset) master is disconnected from the LV-busbar. Also if
there for some reason should be a situation with
more than one master in the system, the same
blocking will occur. The binary input signal DISC in
TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) function shall be
used to supervise if the transformer LV circuit breaker
is closed or not. The outputs TRFDISC, MFERR and
AUTOBLK will be activated. The followers will also be
blocked by mutual blocking in this situation. Blocking
will be removed when the transformer is reconnected
(input signal DISC set back to zero).
One transformer in a Auto Block When the setting OperationAdapt is “Disabled”,
parallel group switched automatic control will be blocked when parallel
to manual control control with the master-follower or the circulating
(automatically reset) current method is used, and one of the transformers
in the group is switched from auto to manual. The
output AUTOBLK will be activated.
Communication error Auto block If the horizontal communication (GOOSE) for any one
(COMMERR) (automatic of TR8ATCCs (90) in the group fails it will cause
deblocking) blocking of automatic control in all TR8ATCC (90)
functions, which belong to that parallel group. This
error condition will be reset automatically when the
communication is re-established. The outputs
COMMERR and AUTOBLK will be set.

Circulating current method SEMOD159053-285 v4

Mutual blocking
When one parallel instance of voltage control TR8ATCC (90) blocks its operation, all
other TR8ATCCs (90) working in parallel with that module, shall block their operation
as well. To achieve this, the affected TR8ATCC (90) function broadcasts a mutual
block to the other group members via the horizontal communication. When mutual

438 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

block is received from any of the group members, automatic operation is blocked in the
receiving TR8ATCCs (90) that is, all units of the parallel group.

The following conditions in any one of TR8ATCCs (90) in the group will cause mutual
blocking when the circulating current method is used:

• Over-Current
• Total block via settings
• Total block via configuration
• Analog input error
• Automatic block via settings
• Automatic block via configuration
• Under-Voltage
• Command error
• Position indication error
• Tap changer error
• Reversed Action
• Circulating current
• Communication error

Master-follower method
When the master is blocked, the followers will not tap by themselves and there is
consequently no need for further mutual blocking. On the other hand, when a follower
is blocked there is a need to send a mutual blocking signal to the master. This will
prevent a situation where the rest of the group otherwise would be able to tap away
from the blocked individual, and that way cause high circulating currents.

Thus, when a follower is blocked, it broadcasts a mutual block on the horizontal

communication. The master picks up this message, and blocks its automatic operation
as well.

Besides the conditions listed above for mutual blocking with the circulating current
method, the following blocking conditions in any of the followers will also cause
mutual blocking:

• Master-follower out of position

• Master-follower error (No master/More than one master)

General
It should be noted that partial blocking will not cause mutual blocking.

TR8ATCC (90), which is the “source” of the mutual blocking will set its AUTOBLK
output as well as the output which corresponds to the actual blocking condition for

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 439

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

example, IBLK for over-current blocking. The other TR8ATCCs (90) that receive a
mutual block signal will only set its AUTOBLK output.

The mutual blocking remains until TR8ATCC (90) that dispatched the mutual block
signal is de-blocked. Another way to release the mutual blocking is to force TR8ATCC
(90), which caused mutual blocking to Single mode operation. This is done by
activating the binary input SNGLMODE on TR8ATCC (90) function block or by
setting the parameter OperationPAR to Off from the built-in local HMI or PST.

TR8ATCC (90) function can be forced to single mode at any time. It will then behave
exactly the same way as described in section "Automatic voltage control for a single
transformer", except that horizontal communication messages are still sent and
received, but the received messages are ignored. TR8ATCC (90) is at the same time
also automatically excluded from the parallel group.

Disabling of blockings in special situations SEMOD159053-329 v4

When the Automatic voltage control for tap changer TR1ATCC (90) for single control
and TR8ATCC (90) for parallel control, function block is connected to read back
information (tap position value and tap changer in progress signal) it may sometimes
be difficult to find timing data to be set in TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) for proper
operation. Especially at commissioning of for example, older transformers the sensors
can be worn and the contacts maybe bouncing etc. Before the right timing data is set it
may then happen that TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) becomes totally blocked or
blocked in auto mode because of incorrect settings. In this situation, it is recommended
to temporarily set these types of blockings to alarm instead until the commissioning of
all main items are working as expected.

Tap Changer position measurement and monitoring SEMOD159053-337 v1

Tap changer extreme positions SEMOD159053-339 v3

This feature supervises the extreme positions of the tap changer according to the
settings LowVoltTap and HighVoltTap. When the tap changer reaches its lowest/highest
position, the corresponding VLOWER/VRAISE command is prevented in both
automatic and manual mode.

Monitoring of tap changer operation SEMOD159053-344 v5

The Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC (84) or 32 binary
inputs TCLYLTC (84) output signal VRAISE or VLOWER is set high when
TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) function has reached a decision to operate the tap
changer. These outputs from TCMYLTC (84) and TCLYLTC (84) function blocks shall
be connected to a binary output module, BOM in order to give the commands to the tap
changer mechanism. The length of the output pulse can be set via TCMYLTC (84) or
TCLYLTC (84) setting parameter tPulseDur. When an VRAISE/VLOWER command
is given, a timer ( set by setting tTCTimeout ) (settable in PST/local HMI) is also
started, and the idea is then that this timer shall have a setting that covers, with some
margin, a normal tap changer operation.

440 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

Usually the tap changer mechanism can give a signal, “Tap change in progress”, during
the time that it is carrying through an operation. This signal from the tap changer
mechanism can be connected via a BIM module to TCMYLTC (84) or TCLYLTC (84)
input TCINPROG, and it can then be used by TCMYLTC (84) or TCLYLTC (84)
function in three ways, which is explained below with the help of figure 180.

b c

VRAISE/VLOWER

tTCTimeout

TCINPROG

e f
a
h
d
en06000482_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000482 V1 EN-US

Figure 180: Timing of pulses for tap changer operation monitoring

pos Description
a Safety margin to avoid that TCINPROG is not set high without the simultaneous presence of an
VRAISE or VLOWER command.
b Time setting tPulseDur.
c Fixed extension 4 sec. of tPulseDur, made internally in TCMYLTC (84) or TCLYLTC (84) function.
d Time setting tStable
e New tap position reached, making the signal “tap change in progress” disappear from the tap
changer, and a new position reported.
f The new tap position available in TCMYLTC (84) or TCLYLTC (84).
g Fixed extension 2 sec. of TCINPROG, made internally in TCMYLTC (84) or TCLYLTC (84) function.
h Safety margin to avoid that TCINPROG extends beyond tTCTimeout.

The first use is to reset the Automatic voltage control for tap changer function
TR1ATCC (90) for single control and TR8ATCC (90) for parallel control as soon as
the signal TCINPROG disappears. If the TCINPROG signal is not fed back from the
tap changer mechanism, TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) will not reset until
tTCTimeout has timed out. The advantage with monitoring the TCINPROG signal in
this case is thus that resetting of TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) can sometimes be
made faster, which in turn makes the system ready for consecutive commands in a
shorter time.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 441

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

The second use is to detect a jammed tap changer. If the timer tTCTimeout times out
before the TCINPROG signal is set back to zero, the output signal TCERRAL is set
high and TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) function is blocked.

The third use is to check the proper operation of the tap changer mechanism. As soon
as the input signal TCINPROG is set back to zero TCMYLTC (84) or TCLYLTC (84)
function expects to read a new and correct value for the tap position. If this does not
happen the output signal CMDERRAL is set high and TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC
(90) function is blocked. The fixed extension (g) 2 sec. of TCINPROG, is made to
prevent a situation where this could happen despite no real malfunction.

In figure 180, it can be noted that the fixed extension (c) 4 sec. of tPulseDur, is made
to prevent a situation with TCINPROG set high without the simultaneous presence of
an VRAISE or VLOWER command. If this would happen, TCMYLTC (84) or
TCLYLTC (84) would see this as a spontaneous TCINPROG signal without an
accompanying VRAISE or VLOWER command, and this would then lead to the
output signal TCERRAL being set high and TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90)
function being blocked. Effectively this is then also a supervision of a run-away tap
situation.

Hunting detection SEMOD159053-361 v4

Hunting detection is provided in order to generate an alarm when the voltage control
gives an abnormal number of commands or abnormal sequence of commands within a
pre-defined period of time.

There are three hunting functions:

1. The Automatic voltage control for tap changer function, TR1ATCC (90) for single
control and TR8ATCC (90) for parallel control will activate the output signal
DAYHUNT when the number of tap changer operations exceed the number given
by the setting DayHuntDetect during the last 24 hours (sliding window). Active as
well in manual as in automatic mode.
2. TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) function will activate the output signal
HOURHUNT when the number of tap changer operations exceed the number
given by the setting HourHuntDetect during the last hour (sliding window). Active
as well in manual as in automatic mode.
3. TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) function will activate the output signal
HUNTING when the total number of contradictory tap changer operations
(RAISE, LOWER, RAISE, LOWER, and so on) exceeds the pre-set value given
by the setting NoOpWindow within the time sliding window specified via the
setting parameter tWindowHunt. Only active in automatic mode.

Hunting can be the result of a narrow deadband setting or some other abnormalities in
the control system.

442 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

Wearing of the tap changer contacts SEMOD159053-376 v4

Two counters, ContactLife and NoOfOperations are available within the Tap changer
control and supervision function, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC or 32 binary inputs
TCLYLTC (84). They can be used as a guide for maintenance of the tap changer
mechanism. The ContactLife counter represents the remaining number of operations
(decremental counter) at rated load.

a
æ I load ö
ContactLife n+1 = ContactLife - ç ÷÷
n ç
è I rated ø
EQUATION1873 V2 EN-US (Equation 123)

where n is the number of operations and α is an adjustable setting parameter,

CLFactor, with default value is set to 2. With this default setting an operation at rated
load (current measured on HV-side) decrements the ContactLife counter with 1.

The NoOfOperations counter simply counts the total number of operations

(incremental counter).

Both counters are stored in a non-volatile memory as well as, the times and dates of
their last reset. These dates are stored automatically when the command to reset the
counter is issued. It is therefore necessary to check that the IED internal time is correct
before these counters are reset. The counter value can be reset on the local HMI under
Main menu/Reset/Reset counters/TransformerTapControl(YLTC,84)/TCMYLTC:
1 or TCLYLTC:1/Reset Counter and ResetCLCounter

Both counters and their last reset dates are shown on the local HMI as service values
under Main menu/Test/Function status/Control/TransformerTapControl(YLTC,
84)/TCMYLTC:x/TCLYLTC:x/CLCNT_VALandMain menu/Test/Function status/
Control/TransformerTapControl (YLTC,84)/TCMYLTC:x/TCLYLTC:x/
CNT_VAL

14.5.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD171503-1 v1

14.5.3.1 TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC general settings SEMOD171501-4 v3

TrfId: The transformer identity is used to identify transformer individuals in a parallel

group. Thus, transformers that can be part of the same parallel group must have unique
identities. Moreover, all transformers that communicate over the same horizontal
communication (GOOSE) must have unique identities.

Xr2: The reactance of the transformer in primary ohms referred to the LV side.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 443

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

tAutoMSF: Time delay set in a follower for execution of a raise or lower command
given from a master. This feature can be used when a parallel group is controlled in the
master-follower mode, follow tap, and it is individually set for each follower, which
means that different time delays can be used in the different followers in order to avoid
simultaneous tapping if this is wanted. It shall be observed that it is not applicable in
the follow command mode.

OperationAdapt: This setting enables or disables adapt mode for parallel control with
the circulating current method or the master-follower method.

MFMode: Selection of Follow Command or Follow Tap in the master-follower mode.

CircCurrBk: Selection of action to be taken in case the circulating current exceeds

CircCurrLimit.

CmdErrBk: Selection of action to be taken in case the feedback from the tap changer
has resulted in command error.

OCBk: Selection of action to be taken in case any of the three phase currents on the
HV-side has exceeded Iblock.

MFPosDiffBk: Selection of action to be taken in case the tap difference between a

follower and the master is greater than MFPosDiffLim.

OVPartBk: Selection of action to be taken in case the busbar voltage VB exceeds

Vmax.

RevActPartBk: Selection of action to be taken in case Reverse Action has been

activated.

TapChgBk: Selection of action to be taken in case a Tap Changer Error has been
identified.

TapPosBk: Selection of action to be taken in case of Tap Position Error, or if the tap
changer has reached an end position.

UVBk: Selection of action to be taken in case the busbar voltage VB falls below Vblock.

UVPartBk: Selection of action to be taken in case the busbar voltage VB is between

UVblock and Vmin.

14.5.3.2 TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) Setting group SEMOD171501-22 v8

General
Operation: Switching automatic voltage control for tap changer, TR1ATCC (90) for
single control and TR8ATCC (90) for parallel control function Enabled/Disabled.

444 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

I1Base: Base current in primary Ampere for the HV-side of the transformer.

I2Base: Base current in primary Ampere for the LV-side of the transformer.

VBase: Base voltage in primary kV for the LV-side of the transformer.

MeasMode: Selection of single phase, or phase-phase, or positive sequence quantity to

be used for voltage and current measurement on the LV-side. The involved phases are
also selected. Thus, single phase as well as phase-phase or three-phase feeding on the
LV-side is possible but it is commonly selected for current and voltage.

Q1, Q2 and Q3: Mvar value of a capacitor bank or reactor that is connected between
the power transformer and the CT, such that the current of the capacitor bank (reactor)
needs to be compensated for in the calculation of circulating currents. There are three
independent settings Q1, Q2 and Q3 in order to make possible switching of three steps
in a capacitor bank in one bay.

TotalBlock: When this setting is Enabled the voltage control function, TR1ATCC (90)
for single control and TR8ATCC (90) for parallel control, is totally blocked for manual
as well as automatic control.

AutoBlock: When this setting is Enabled the voltage control function, TR1ATCC (90)
for single control and TR8ATCC (90) for parallel control, is blocked for automatic
control.

Operation
FSDMode: This setting enables/disables the fast step down function. Enabling can be
for automatic and manual control, or for only automatic control alternatively.

tFSD: Time delay to be used for the fast step down tapping.

Voltage
UseCmdUSet: This setting enabled makes it possible to set the target voltage level via
IEC 61850 set point command. This, in turn, makes the setting USet redundant.

VSet: Setting value for the target voltage, to be set in percent of VBase.

VDeadband: Setting value for one half of the outer deadband, to be set in percent of
VBase. The deadband is symmetrical around VSet, see section "Automatic voltage
control for a single transformer", figure 170. In that figure VDeadband is equal to DV.
The setting is normally selected to a value near the power transformer’s tap changer
voltage step (typically 75 - 125% of the tap changer step).

VDeadbandInner: Setting value for one half of the inner deadband, to be set in percent
of VBase. The inner deadband is symmetrical around VSet, see section "Automatic
voltage control for a single transformer",figure 170. In that figure VDeadbandInner is

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 445

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

equal to DVin. The setting shall be smaller than VDeadband. Typically the inner
deadband can be set to 25-70% of the VDeadband value.

Vmax: This setting gives the upper limit of permitted busbar voltage (see section
"Automatic voltage control for a single transformer", figure 170). It is set in percent of
VBase. If OVPartBk is set to Auto&ManBlock, then busbar voltages above Vmax will
result in a partial blocking such that only lower commands are permitted.

Vmin This setting gives the lower limit of permitted busbar voltage (see section
"Automatic voltage control for a single transformer", figure 170). It is set in percent of
VBase. If UVPartBk is set to Auto Block orAuto&ManBlock, then busbar voltages
below Vmin will result in a partial blocking such that only raise commands are
permitted.

Vblock: Voltages below Vblock normally correspond to a disconnected transformer and

therefore it is recommended to block automatic control for this condition (setting
UVBk). Vblock is set in percent of VBase.

Time
t1Use: Selection of time characteristic (definite or inverse) for t1.

t1: Time delay for the initial (first) raise/lower command.

t2Use: Selection of time characteristic (definite or inverse) for t2.

t2: Time delay for consecutive raise/lower commands. In the circulating current
method, the second, third, etc. commands are all executed with time delay t2
independently of which transformer in the parallel group that is tapping. In the master-
follower method with the follow tap option, the master is executing the second, third,
etc. commands with time delay t2. The followers on the other hand read the master’s
tap position, and adapt to that with the additional time delay given by the setting
tAutoMSF and set individually for each follower.

t_MinTripDelay: The minimum operate time when inverse time characteristic is used
(see section "Time characteristic", figure 171).

Line voltage drop compensation (LDC)

OpertionLDC: Sets the line voltage drop compensation function Enabled/Disabled.

OperCapaLDC: This setting, if set Enabled, will permit the load point voltage to be
greater than the busbar voltage when line voltage drop compensation is used. That
situation can be caused by a capacitive load. When the line voltage drop compensation
function is used for parallel control with the reverse reactance method, then
OperCapaLDC must always be set Enabled.

446 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

Rline and Xline: For line voltage drop compensation, these settings give the line
resistance and reactance from the station busbar to the load point. The settings for
Rline and Xline are given in primary system ohms. If more than one line is connected
to the LV busbar, equivalent Rline and Xline values should be calculated and given as
settings.

When the line voltage drop compensation function is used for parallel control with the
reverse reactance method, then the compensated voltage which is designated “load
point voltage” VL is effectively an increase in voltage up into the transformer. To
achieve this voltage increase, Xline must be negative. The sensitivity of the parallel
voltage regulation is given by the magnitude of Rline and Xline settings, with Rline
being important in order to get a correct control of the busbar voltage. This can be
realized in the following way. Figure 172 shows the vector diagram for a transformer
controlled in a parallel group with the reverse reactance method and with no circulation
(for example, assume two equal transformers on the same tap position). The load
current lags the busbar voltage VB with the power factor j and the argument of the
impedance Rline and Xline is designated j1.

Rline
j1

Xline Zline
IT*Rline
VL

jIT*Xline
DV

j VB
j2

IT

en06000626_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000626 V1 EN-US

Figure 181: Transformer with reverse reactance regulation and no circulating

current

The voltage DV=VB-VL=IT*Rline+j IT*Xline has the argument j2 and it is realised that
if j2 is slightly less than -90°, then VL will have approximately the same length as VB
regardless of the magnitude of the transformer load current IT (indicated with the
dashed line). The automatic tap change control regulates the voltage towards a set
target value, representing a voltage magnitude, without considering the phase angle.
Thus, VB as well as VL and also the dashed line could all be said to be on the target
value.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 447

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

Assume that we want to achieve that j2 = -90°, then:

DV = Z ´ I
ß
0
DVe - j 90 = Ze jj1 ´ Ie jj = ZIe j (j1 +j )
ß
-900 = j1 + j
ß
j1 = -j - 900
EQUATION1983-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 124)

If for example cosj = 0.8 then j = arcos 0.8 = 37°. With the references in figure 181, j
will be negative (inductive load) and we get:

j1 = - ( -37 0 ) - 90 0 = -530
EQUATION1939 V1 EN-US (Equation 125)

To achieve a more correct regulation, an adjustment to a value of j2 slightly less than

-90° (2 – 4° less) can be made.

The effect of changing power factor of the load will be that j2 will no longer be close
to -90° resulting in VL being smaller or greater than VB if the ratio Rline/Xline is not
adjusted.

Figure 182 shows an example of this where the settings of Rline and Xline for j = 11°
from figure 181 has been applied with a different value of j (j = 30°).

448 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

j1=110-900=-790
Rline
j1

Xline Zline
IT*Rline
VL

DV
jIT*Xline

VB
j=300 j2

IT en06000630_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000630 V1 EN-US

Figure 182: Transformer with reverse reactance regulation poorly adjusted to the
power factor

As can be seen in figure 182, the change of power factor has resulted in an increase of
j2 which in turn causes the magnitude of VL to be greater than VB. It can also be noted
that an increase in the load current aggravates the situation, as does also an increase in
the setting of Zline (Rline and Xline).

Apparently the ratio Rline/Xline according to equation 125, that is the value of j1
must be set with respect to the power factor, also meaning that the reverse reactance
method should not be applied to systems with varying power factor.

The setting of Xline gives the sensitivity of the parallel regulation. If Xline is set too
low, the transformers will not pull together and a run away tap situation will occur. On
the other hand, a high setting will keep the transformers strongly together with no, or
only a small difference in tap position, but the voltage regulation as such will be more
sensitive to a deviation from the anticipated power factor. A too high setting of Xline
can cause a hunting situation as the transformers will then be prone to over react on
deviations from the target value.

There is no rule for the setting of Xline such that an optimal balance between control
response and susceptibility to changing power factor is achieved. One way of
determining the setting is by trial and error. This can be done by setting e.g. Xline equal
to half of the transformer reactance, and then observe how the parallel control behaves
during a couple of days, and then tune it as required. It shall be emphasized that a
quick response of the regulation that quickly pulls the transformer tap changers into
equal positions, not necessarily corresponds to the optimal setting. This kind of
response is easily achieved by setting a high Xline value, as was discussed above, and
the disadvantage is then a high susceptibility to changing power factor.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 449

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

A combination of line voltage drop compensation and parallel control with the negative
reactance method is possible to do simply by adding the required Rline values and the
required Xline values separately to get the combined impedance. However, the line
drop impedance has a tendency to drive the tap changers apart, which means that the
reverse reactance impedance normally needs to be increased.

Load voltage adjustment (LVA)

LVAConst1: Setting of the first load voltage adjustment value. This adjustment of the
target value VSet is given in percent of VBase.

LVAConst2: Setting of the second load voltage adjustment value. This adjustment of
the target value VSet is given in percent of VBase.

LVAConst3: Setting of the third load voltage adjustment value. This adjustment of the
target value VSet is given in percent of VBase.

LVAConst4: Setting of the fourth load voltage adjustment value. This adjustment of the
target value VSet is given in percent of VBase.

VRAuto: Setting of the automatic load voltage adjustment. This adjustment of the target
value VSet is given in percent of VBase, and it is proportional to the load current with
the set value reached at the nominal current I2Base.

RevAct
OperationRA: This setting enables/disables the reverse action partial blocking function.

tRevAct: After the reverse action has picked up, this time setting gives the time during
which the partial blocking is active.

RevActLim: Current threshold for the reverse action activation. This is just one of two
criteria for activation of the reverse action partial blocking.

Tap changer control (TCCtrl)

Iblock: Current setting of the over current blocking function. In case, the transformer is
carrying a current exceeding the rated current of the tap changer for example, because
of an external fault. The tap changer operations shall be temporarily blocked. This
function typically monitors the three phase currents on the HV side of the transformer.

DayHuntDetect: Setting of the number of tap changer operations required during the
last 24 hours (sliding window) to activate the signal DAYHUNT

HourHuntDetect: Setting of the number of tap changer operations required during the
last hour (sliding window) to activate the signal HOURHUNT

450 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

tWindowHunt: Setting of the time window for the window hunting function. This
function is activated when the number of contradictory commands to the tap changer
exceeds the specified number given by NoOpWindow within the time tWindowHunt.

NoOpWindow: Setting of the number of contradictory tap changer operations (RAISE,

LOWER, RAISE, LOWER etc.) required during the time window tWindowHunt to
activate the signal HUNTING.

Power
P>: When the active power exceeds the value given by this setting, the output
PGTFWD will be activated after the time delay tPower. It shall be noticed that the
setting is given with sign, which effectively means that a negative value of P> means
an active power greater than a value in the reverse direction. This is shown in figure
183 where a negative value of P> means pickup for all values to the right of the
setting. Reference is made to figure 178 for definition of forward and reverse direction
of power through the transformer.

P> P

en06000634_2_en.vsd
IEC06000634 V2 EN-US

Figure 183: Setting of a negative value for P>

P<: When the active power falls below the value given by this setting, the output
PLTREV will be activated after the time delay tPower. It shall be noticed that the
setting is given with sign, which effectively means that, for example a positive value of
P< means an active power less than a value in the forward direction. This is shown in
figure 184 where a positive value of P< means pickup for all values to the left of the
setting. Reference is made to figure 178 for definition of forward and reverse direction
of power through the transformer.

P< P

en06000635_2_en.vsd
IEC06000635 V2 EN-US

Figure 184: Setting of a positive value for P<

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 451

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

Q>: When the reactive power exceeds the value given by this setting, the output
QGTFWD will be activated after the time delay tPower. It shall be noticed that the
setting is given with sign, which effectively means that the function picks up for all
values of reactive power greater than the set value, similar to the functionality for P>.

Q<: When the reactive power falls below the value given by this setting, the output
QLTREV will be activated after the time delay tPower. It shall be noticed that the
setting is given with sign, which effectively means that the function picks up for all
values of reactive power less than the set value, similar to the functionality for P<.

tPower: Time delay for activation of the power monitoring output signals (PGTFWD,
PLTREV, QGTFWD and QLTREV).

Parallel control (ParCtrl)

OperationPAR: Setting of the method for parallel operation.

OperCCBlock: This setting enables/disables blocking if the circulating current exceeds

CircCurrLimit.

CircCurrLimit: Pick up value for the circulating current blocking function. The setting
is made in percent of I2Base.

tCircCurr: Time delay for the circulating current blocking function.

Comp: When parallel operation with the circulating current method is used, this setting
increases or decreases the influence of the circulating current on the regulation.

If the transformers are connected to the same bus on the HV- as well as the LV-side,
Comp can be calculated with the following formula which is valid for any number of
two-winding transformers in parallel, irrespective if the transformers are of different
size and short circuit impedance.

2 ´ DV
Comp = a ´ ´ 100%
n´p
EQUATION1984-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 126)

where:

• DV is the deadband setting in percent.

• n denotes the desired number of difference in tap position between the

transformers, that shall give a voltage deviation Vdi which corresponds to the
dead-band setting.

• p is the tap step (in percent of transformer nominal voltage).

452 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

• a is a safety margin that shall cover component tolerances and other non-linear
measurements at different tap positions (for example, transformer reactances
changes from rated value at the ends of the regulation range). In most cases a
value of a = 1.25 serves well.

This calculation gives a setting of Comp that will always initiate an action (start timer)
when the transformers have n tap positions difference.

OperSimTap: Enabling/disabling the functionality to allow only one transformer at a

time to execute a Lower/Raise command. This setting is applicable only to the
circulating current method, and when enabled, consecutive tap changes of the next
transformer (if required) will be separated with the time delay t2.

OperUsetPar: Enables/disables the use of a common setting for the target voltage VSet.
This setting is applicable only to the circulating current method, and when enabled, a
mean value of the VSet values for the transformers in the same parallel group will be
calculated and used.

OperHoming: Enables/disables the homing function. Applicable for parallel control

with the circulating current method, as well for parallel control with the master-
follower method.

VTmismatch: Setting of the level for activation of the output VTALARM in case the
voltage measurement in one transformer bay deviates to the mean value of all voltage
measurements in the parallel group.

tVTmismatch: Time delay for activation of the output VTALARM.

T1RXOP.......T8RXOP: This setting is set Enabled for every transformer that can
participate in a parallel group with the transformer in case. For this transformer (own
transformer), the setting must always be Disabled.

TapPosOffs: This setting gives the tap position offset in relation to the master so that
the follower can follow the master’s tap position including this offset. Applicable when
regulating in the follow tap command mode.

MFPosDiffLim: When the difference (including a possible offset according to

TapPosOffs) between a follower and the master reaches the value in this setting, then
the output OUTOFPOS in the Automatic voltage control for tap changer, parallel
control TR8ATCC (90) function block of the follower will be activated after the time
delay tMFPosDiff.

tMFPosDiff: Time delay for activation of the output OUTOFPOS.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 453

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

14.5.3.3 TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC (84) general settings SEMOD171501-150 v6

LowVoltTap: This gives the tap position for the lowest LV-voltage.

HighVoltTap: This gives the tap position for the highest LV-voltage.

mALow: The mA value that corresponds to the lowest tap position. Applicable when
reading of the tap position is made via a mA signal.

mAHigh: The mA value that corresponds to the highest tap position. Applicable when
reading of the tap position is made via a mA signal.

CodeType: This setting gives the method of tap position reading.

UseParity: Sets the parity check Enabled/Disabled for tap position reading when this is
made by Binary, BCD, or Gray code.

tStable: This is the time that needs to elapse after a new tap position has been reported
to TCMYLTC until it is accepted.

CLFactor: This is the factor designated “a” in equation 126. When a tap changer
operates at nominal load current (current measured on the HV-side), the ContactLife
counter decrements with 1, irrespective of the setting of CLFactor. The setting of this
factor gives the weighting of the deviation with respect to the load current.

InitCLCounter: The ContactLife counter monitors the remaining number of operations

(decremental counter). The setting InitCLCounter then gives the start value for the
counter that is, the total number of operations at rated load that the tap changer is
designed for.

EnabTapCmd: This setting enables/disables the lower and raise commands to the tap
changer. It shall be Enabled for voltage control, and Disabled for tap position feedback
to the transformer differential protection T2WPDIF (87T) or T3WPDIF (87T).

TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC (84) Setting group SEMOD171501-157 v3

General
Operation: Switching the TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC (84) function Enabled/Disabled.

IBase: Base current in primary Ampere for the HV-side of the transformer.

tTCTimeout: This setting gives the maximum time interval for a raise or lower
command to be completed.

tPulseDur: Length of the command pulse (VRAISE/VLOWER) to the tap changer. It

shall be noticed that this pulse has a fixed extension of 4 seconds that adds to the
setting value of tPulseDur.

454 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

14.6 Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI

presentation SLGAPC SEMOD114936-1 v4

14.6.1 Identification
SEMOD167845-2 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Logic rotating switch for function SLGAPC - -
selection and LHMI presentation

14.6.2 Application SEMOD114927-4 v6

The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation function
(SLGAPC) (or the selector switch function block, as it is also known) is used to get a
selector switch functionality similar with the one provided by a hardware multi-
position selector switch. Hardware selector switches are used extensively by utilities,
in order to have different functions operating on pre-set values. Hardware switches are
however sources for maintenance issues, lower system reliability and extended
purchase portfolio. The virtual selector switches eliminate all these problems.

SLGAPC function block has two operating inputs (UP and DOWN), one blocking
input (BLOCK) and one operator position input (PSTO).

SLGAPC can be activated both from the local HMI and from external sources
(switches), via the IED binary inputs. It also allows the operation from remote (like the
station computer). SWPOSN is an integer value output, giving the actual output
number. Since the number of positions of the switch can be established by settings (see
below), one must be careful in coordinating the settings with the configuration (if one
sets the number of positions to x in settings – for example, there will be only the first x
outputs available from the block in the configuration). Also the frequency of the (UP or
DOWN) pulses should be lower than the setting tPulse.

From the local HMI, the selector switch can be operated from Single-line diagram
(SLD).

14.6.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD115063-294 v6

The following settings are available for the Logic rotating switch for function selection
and LHMI presentation (SLGAPC) function:

Operation: Sets the operation of the function Enabled or Disabled.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 455

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

NrPos: Sets the number of positions in the switch (max. 32).

OutType: Steady or Pulsed.

tPulse: In case of a pulsed output, it gives the length of the pulse (in seconds).

tDelay: The delay between the UP or DOWN activation signal positive front and the
output activation.

StopAtExtremes: Sets the behavior of the switch at the end positions – if set to
Disabled, when pressing UP while on first position, the switch will jump to the last
position; when pressing DOWN at the last position, the switch will jump to the first
position; when set to Enabled, no jump will be allowed.

14.7 Selector mini switch VSGAPC SEMOD158754-1 v3

14.7.1 Identification
SEMOD167850-2 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Selector mini switch VSGAPC - 43

14.7.2 Application SEMOD158803-5 v8

Selector mini switch (VSGAPC) function is a multipurpose function used in the

configuration tool in PCM600 for a variety of applications, as a general purpose
switch. VSGAPC can be used for both acquiring an external switch position (through
the IPOS1 and the IPOS2 inputs) and represent it through the single line diagram
symbols (or use it in the configuration through the outputs POS1 and POS2) as well as,
a command function (controlled by the PSTO input), giving switching commands
through the CMDPOS12 and CMDPOS21 outputs.

The output POSITION is an integer output, showing the actual position as an integer
number 0 – 3, where 0 = MidPos, 1 = Open, 2 = Closed and 3 = Error.

An example where VSGAPC is configured to switch Autorecloser enabled–disabled

from a button symbol on the local HMI is shown in figure185. The Close and Open
buttons on the local HMI are normally used for enable–disable operations of the circuit
breaker.

456 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

INV
OUT INPUT
VSGAPC
PSTO
INTONE
IPOS1
IPOS2
SMBRREC_79
NAM_POS1 CMDPOS12 ON SETON
Disabled
Enabled NAM_POS2 CMDPOS21 OFF

ANSI07000112-3-en.vsd
ANSI07000112 V3 EN-US

Figure 185: Control of Autorecloser from local HMI through Selector mini switch

VSGAPC is also provided with IEC 61850 communication so it can be controlled from
SA system as well.

14.7.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD158807-4 v4

Selector mini switch (VSGAPC) function can generate pulsed or steady commands (by
setting the Mode parameter). When pulsed commands are generated, the length of the
pulse can be set using the tPulse parameter. Also, being accessible on the single line
diagram (SLD), this function block has two control modes (settable through CtlModel):
Dir Norm and SBO Enh.

14.8 Generic communication function for Double Point

indication DPGAPC SEMOD55384-1 v4

14.8.1 Identification
GUID-E16EA78F-6DF9-4B37-A92D-5C09827E2297 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Generic communication function for DPGAPC - -
Double Point indication

14.8.2 Application SEMOD55391-5 v8

Generic communication function for Double Point indication (DPGAPC) function

block is used to send double point position indication to other systems, equipment or
functions in the substation through IEC 61850-8-1 or other communication protocols.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 457

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

It is especially intended to be used in the interlocking station-wide logics. To be able to

get the signals into other systems, equipment or functions, one must use other tools,
described in the Engineering manual, and define which function block in which
systems, equipment or functions should receive this information.

More specifically, DPGAPC function reports a combined double point position

indication output POSITION, by evaluating the value and the timestamp attributes of
the inputs OPEN and CLOSE, together with the logical input signal VALID.

When the input signal VALID is active, the values of the OPEN and CLOSE inputs
determine the two-bit integer value of the output POSITION. The timestamp of the
output POSITION will have the latest updated timestamp of the inputs OPEN and
CLOSE.

When the input signal VALID is inactive, DPGAPC function forces the position to
intermediated state.

When the value of the input signal VALID changes, the timestamp of the output
POSITION will be updated as the time when DPGAPC function detects the change.

Refer to Table 44 for the description of the input-output relationship in terms of the
value and the quality attributes.
Table 44: Description of the input-output relationship
POSITION
VALID OPEN CLOSE
Value Description
0 - - 0 Intermediate
1 0 0 0 Intermediate
1 1 0 1 Open
1 0 1 2 Closed
1 1 1 3 Bad State

14.8.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD55398-5 v4

The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

14.9 Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC SEMOD176448-1 v3

458 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

14.9.1 Identification
SEMOD176456-2 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC - -

14.9.2 Application SEMOD176511-4 v6

The Single point generic control 8 signals (SPC8GAPC) function block is a collection
of 8 single point commands that can be used for direct commands for example reset of
LED's or putting IED in "ChangeLock" state from remote. In this way, simple
commands can be sent directly to the IED outputs, without confirmation. Confirmation
(status) of the result of the commands is supposed to be achieved by other means, such
as binary inputs and SPGAPC function blocks.

PSTO is the universal operator place selector for all control functions.
Even if PSTO can be configured to allow LOCAL or ALL operator
positions, the only functional position usable with the SPC8GAPC
function block is REMOTE.

14.9.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD176518-4 v6

The parameters for the single point generic control 8 signals (SPC8GAPC) function are
set via the local HMI or PCM600.

Operation: turning the function operation Enabled/Disabled.

There are two settings for every command output (totally 8):

PulseModex: decides if the command signal for output x is Latched (steady) or Pulsed.

tPulsex: if PulseModex is set to Pulsed, then tPulsex will set the length of the pulse (in
seconds).

14.10 AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0

AUTOBITS SEMOD158589-1 v3

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 459

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

14.10.1 Identification
GUID-C3BB63F5-F0E7-4B00-AF0F-917ECF87B016 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
AutomationBits, command function for
AUTOBITS - -
DNP3

14.10.2 Application SEMOD158637-5 v4

Automation bits, command function for DNP3 (AUTOBITS) is used within PCM600
in order to get into the configuration the commands coming through the DNP3.0
protocol.The AUTOBITS function plays the same role as functions GOOSEBINRCV
(for IEC 61850) and MULTICMDRCV (for LON).AUTOBITS function block have 32
individual outputs which each can be mapped as a Binary Output point in DNP3. The
output is operated by a "Object 12" in DNP3. This object contains parameters for
control-code, count, on-time and off-time. To operate an AUTOBITS output point,
send a control-code of latch-On, latch-Off, pulse-On, pulse-Off, Trip or Close. The
remaining parameters are regarded as appropriate. For example, pulse-On, on-
time=100, off-time=300, count=5 would give 5 positive 100 ms pulses, 300 ms apart.

For description of the DNP3 protocol implementation, refer to the Communication

manual.

14.10.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD158639-5 v3

AUTOBITS function block has one setting, (Operation: Enabled/Disabled) enabling or

disabling the function. These names will be seen in the DNP3 communication
management tool in PCM600.

14.11 Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD SEMOD119849-1 v2

14.11.1 Identification
GUID-2217CCC2-5581-407F-A4BC-266CD6808984 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD - -

460 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

14.11.2 Application M12445-3 v3

Single command, 16 signals (SINGLECMD) is a common function and always

included in the IED.

The IEDs may be provided with a function to receive commands either from a
substation automation system or from the local HMI. That receiving function block has
outputs that can be used, for example, to control high voltage apparatuses in
switchyards. For local control functions, the local HMI can also be used. Together with
the configuration logic circuits, the user can govern pulses or steady output signals for
control purposes within the IED or via binary outputs.

Figure 186 shows an application example of how the user can connect SINGLECMD
via configuration logic circuit to control a high-voltage apparatus. This type of
command control is normally carried out by sending a pulse to the binary outputs of
the IED. Figure 186 shows a close operation. An open breaker operation is performed
in a similar way but without the synchro-check condition.

Single
command
function Configuration logic circuits
SINGLECMD

Close CB1 CMDOUTy

OUTy
User- AND
defined
conditions
Synchro-
check
en04000206_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000206 V2 EN-US

Figure 186: Application example showing a logic diagram for control of a circuit
breaker via configuration logic circuits

Figure 187 and figure 188 show other ways to control functions, which require steady
Enabled/Disabled signals. Here, the output is used to control built-in functions or
external devices.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 461

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Control

Single
command
function Function n
SINGLECMD

Function n CMDOUTy

OUTy

en04000207.vsd
IEC04000207 V2 EN-US

Figure 187: Application example showing a logic diagram for control of built-in
functions

Single
command
function Configuration logic circuits
SINGLESMD

Device 1 CMDOUTy

OUTy
User- AND
defined
conditions

en04000208_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000208 V2 EN-US

Figure 188: Application example showing a logic diagram for control of external
devices via configuration logic circuits

14.11.3 Setting guidelines M12448-3 v2

The parameters for Single command, 16 signals (SINGLECMD) are set via the local
HMI or PCM600.

462 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 14
Control

Parameters to be set are MODE, common for the whole block, and CMDOUTy which
includes the user defined name for each output signal. The MODE input sets the
outputs to be one of the types Disabled, Steady, or Pulse.

• Disabled, sets all outputs to 0, independent of the values sent from the station
level, that is, the operator station or remote-control gateway.
• Steady, sets the outputs to a steady signal 0 or 1, depending on the values sent
from the station level.
• Pulse, gives a pulse with 100 ms duration, if a value sent from the station level is
changed from 0 to 1. That means the configured logic connected to the command
function block may not have a cycle time longer than the cycle time for the
command function block.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 463

Application manual
464
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 15
Scheme communication

Section 15 Scheme communication

15.1 Scheme communication logic for distance or

overcurrent protection ZCPSCH(85) IP15749-1 v3

15.1.1 Identification
M14854-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Scheme communication logic for ZCPSCH - 85
distance or overcurrent protection

15.1.2 Application IP15020-1 v1

M16866-3 v5

To achieve fast fault clearing for a fault on the part of the line not covered by the
instantaneous zone 1, the stepped distance protection function can be supported with
logic that uses a communication channel.

One communication channel in each direction, which can transmit an on/off signal is
required. The performance and security of this function is directly related to the
transmission channel speed and security against false or lost signals. Communication
speed, or minimum time delay, is always of utmost importance because the purpose for
using communication is to improve the tripping speed of the scheme.

To avoid false signals that could cause false tripping, it is necessary to pay attention to
the security of the communication channel. At the same time it is important to pay
attention to the communication channel dependability to ensure that proper signals are
communicated during power system faults, the time during which the protection
schemes must perform their tasks flawlessly.

The logic supports the following communications schemes:

• blocking schemes (blocking and delta blocking)

• permissive schemes (overreaching and underreaching)
• unblocking scheme and direct intertrip

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 465

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Scheme communication

A permissive scheme is inherently faster and has better security against false tripping
than a blocking scheme. On the other hand, a permissive scheme depend on a received
CR signal for a fast trip, so its dependability is lower than that of a blocking scheme.

15.1.2.1 Blocking schemes M16866-24 v5

In a blocking scheme a reverse looking zone is used to send a block signal to the
remote end to block an overreaching zone.

Since the scheme is sending the blocking signal during conditions where the protected
line is healthy, it is common to use the line itself as communication media (PLC). The
scheme can be used on all line lengths.

The blocking scheme is very dependable because it will operate for faults anywhere on
the protected line if the communication channel is out of service. On the other hand, it
is less secure than permissive schemes because it will trip for external faults within the
reach of the tripping function if the communication channel is out of service.

Inadequate speed or dependability can cause spurious tripping for external faults.
Inadequate security can cause delayed tripping for internal faults.

To secure that the send signal will arrive before the zone used in the communication
scheme will trip, the trip is released first after the time delay tCoord has elapsed. The
setting of tCoord must be set longer than the maximal transmission time of the channel.
A security margin of at least 10 ms should be considered.

The timer tSendMin for prolonging the send signal is proposed to set to zero.

466 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 15
Scheme communication

Z revA

A B

ORB

Z revA CSA TRIPB = ORB+ tCoord+ CR

IEC09000015_2_en.vsd
IEC09000015 V2 EN-US

Figure 189: Principle of blocking scheme

OR: Overreaching
CR: Communication signal received
CS: Communication signal send
Z revA: Reverse zone

15.1.2.2 Delta blocking scheme GUID-D699D2D8-6479-4B40-8B09-7B24CA86C24B v1

In the delta blocking scheme a fault inception detection element using delta based
quantities of voltage and current will send a block signal to the remote end to block an
overreaching zone.

The delta based pickup is very fast and if the transmission channel is fast then there is
no need for delaying the operation of remote distance element. If the fault is in forward
direction, the sending is inhibited by a forward directed distance (or directional current
or directional ground fault) element.

Since the scheme is sending the blocking signal during conditions where the protected
line is healthy, it is common to use the line itself as communication media (PLC). The
scheme can be used on all line lengths.

The blocking scheme is very dependable because it will operate for faults anywhere on
the protected line if the communication channel is out of service. Conversely, it is less
secure than permissive schemes because it will trip for external faults within the reach
of the tripping function if the communication channel is out of service.

Inadequate speed or dependability can cause spurious tripping for external faults.
Inadequate security can cause delayed tripping for internal faults.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 467

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Scheme communication

Since the blocking signal is initiated by the delta based detection which is very fast the
time delay tCoord can be set to zero seconds, except in cases where the transmission
channel is slow.

The timer tSendMin for prolonging the send signal is proposed to set to zero.
DeltaBasedDetection (deltaA)

A B

ORB

deltaA CS TRIPB = ORB+ tCoord+ CR

IEC11000252-1-en.vsd
IEC11000252 V1 EN-US

Figure 190: Principle of delta blocking scheme

OR: Overreaching
CR: Communication signal received
CS: Communication signal send
deltaA: Delta based fault inception detection on A side that gets inhibited for forward faults

15.1.2.3 Permissive schemes M16866-33 v4

In permissive schemes, the permission to trip is sent from the local end to the remote
end(s), when the protection at the local end has detected a fault on the protected object.
The received signal(s) is combined with an overreaching zone and gives an
instantaneous trip if the received signal is present during the time the chosen zone has
detected a fault.

Either end may send a permissive (or command) signal to trip to the other end(s), and
the teleprotection equipment needs to be able to receive while transmitting.

A general requirement on permissive schemes is that it shall be fast and secure.

If the sending signal(s) is issued by underreaching or overreaching zone, it is divided

into a permissive underreach or permissive overreach scheme.

468 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 15
Scheme communication

Permissive underreaching scheme M16866-53 v4

Permissive underreaching scheme is not suitable to use on short line length due to
difficulties for distance protection measurement in general to distinguish between
internal and external faults in those applications.

The underreaching zones at the local and remote end(s) must overlap in reach to
prevent a gap between the protection zones where faults would not be detected. If the
underreaching zone do not meet the required sensitivity due to for instance fault infeed
from the remote end, a blocking or permissive overreaching scheme should be
considered.

The received signal (CR) must be received when the overreaching zone is activated to
achieve an instantaneous trip. In some cases, due to the fault current distribution, the
overreaching zone can operate only after the fault has been cleared at the terminal
nearest to the fault. There is a certain risk that in case of a trip from an independent
tripping zone, the zone issuing the send signal (CS) resets before the overreaching zone
has started at the remote terminal. To assure a sufficient duration of the received signal
(CR), the send signal (CS) can be prolonged by a tSendMin reset timer. The
recommended setting of tSendMin is 100 ms.

Since the received communication signal is combined with the output from an
overreaching zone, there is less concern about a false signal causing an incorrect trip.
Therefore set the timer tCoord to zero.

Failure of the communication channel does not affect the selectivity, but delays
tripping at one end(s) for certain fault locations.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 469

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Scheme communication

ORA
URA
CSA

A B
URB
CSB
ORB

TRIP: UR or OR+CR
IEC09000013-2-en.vsd
IEC09000013 V2 EN-US

Figure 191: Principle of Permissive underreaching scheme

UR: Underreaching
OR: Overreaching
CR: Communication signal received
CS: Communication signal send

Permissive overreaching scheme M16866-41 v4

In a permissive overreaching scheme there is an overreaching zone that issues the send
signal. At the remote end the received signal together with the start of an overreaching
zone will give an instantaneous trip. The scheme can be used for all line lengths.

In permissive overreaching schemes, the communication channel plays an essential roll

to obtain fast tripping at both ends. Failure of the communication channel may affect
the selectivity and delay the tripping at one end at least, for faults anywhere along the
protected circuit.

Teleprotection, operating in permissive overreaching scheme, must consider besides

the general requirement of fast and secure operation also consider requirement on the
dependability. Inadequate security can cause unwanted tripping for external faults.
Inadequate speed or dependability can cause delayed tripping for internal faults or even
unwanted operations.

This scheme may use virtually any communication media that is not adversely affected
by electrical interference from fault generated noise or by electrical phenomena, such
as lightning. Communication media that uses metallic paths are particularly subjected
to this type of interference, therefore they must be properly shielded or otherwise
designed to provide an adequate communication signal during power system faults.

470 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 15
Scheme communication

The send signal (CS) might be issued in parallel both from an overreaching zone and
an underreaching, independent tripping zone. The CS signal from the overreaching
zone must not be prolonged while the CS signal from zone 1 can be prolonged.

To secure correct operations of current reversal logic in case of parallel lines the send
signal CS shall not be prolonged. Set the tSendMin to zero in this case.

There is no need to delay the trip at receipt of the signal, so set the timer tCoord to
zero.

ORA

A B

ORB

ORA CSA TRIPB = ORB+ CRB , ORB+ T2

IEC09000014-1-en.vsd
IEC09000014 V1 EN-US

Figure 192: Principle of Permissive overreaching scheme

OR: Overreaching
CR: Communication signal received
CS: Communication signal send
T2: Timer step 2

Unblocking scheme M16866-67 v5

Metallic communication paths adversely affected by fault generated noise may not be
suitable for conventional permissive schemes that rely on a signal transmitted during a
protected line fault. With power line carrier for example, the communication signal
may be attenuated by the fault, especially when the fault is close to the line end,
thereby disabling the communication channel.

To overcome the lower dependability in permissive schemes, an unblocking function

can be used. Use this function at older, less reliable, power-line carrier (PLC)
communication, where the signal has to be sent through the primary fault. The
unblocking function uses a guard signal CR_GUARD, which must always be present,
even when no CR signal is received. The absence of the CR_GUARD signal during the
security time is used as a CR signal. This also enables a permissive scheme to operate
when the line fault blocks the signal transmission. Set the tSecurity to 35 ms.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 471

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Scheme communication

15.1.2.4 Intertrip scheme M16866-71 v4

In some power system applications, there is a need to trip the remote end breaker
immediately from local protections. This applies for instance when transformers or
reactors are connected to the system without circuit-breakers or for remote tripping
following operation of breaker failure protection.

In an intertrip scheme, the send signal is initiated by an underreaching zone or from an

external protection (transformer or reactor protection). At the remote end, the received
signals initiate a trip without any further protection criteria. To limit the risk for an
unwanted trip due to the spurious sending of signals, the timer tCoord should be set to
10-30 ms dependant on the type of communication channel.

The general requirement for teleprotection equipment operating in intertripping

applications is that it should be very secure and very dependable, since both inadequate
security and dependability may cause unwanted operation. In some applications the
equipment shall be able to receive while transmitting, and commands may be
transmitted over longer time period than for other teleprotection systems.

15.1.3 Setting guidelines IP15021-1 v1

M13869-4 v4

The parameters for the scheme communication logic function are set via the local HMI
or PCM600.

Configure the zones used for the CS send and for scheme communication tripping by
using the ACT configuration tool.

The recommended settings of tCoord timer are based on maximal recommended

transmission time for analogue channels according to IEC 60834-1. It is recommended
to coordinate the proposed settings with actual performance for the teleprotection
equipment to get optimized settings.

15.1.3.1 Blocking scheme M13869-8 v5

Set Operation Enabled

Set SchemeType Blocking
Set tCoord 25 ms (10 ms + maximal transmission time)
Set tSendMin 0s
Set Unblock Disabled
(Set to NoRestart if Unblocking scheme with no alarm for loss of guard is to be
used.
Set to Restart if Unblocking scheme with alarm for loss of guard is to be used)
Set tSecurity 0.035 s

472 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 15
Scheme communication

15.1.3.2 Delta blocking scheme GUID-F4359690-F433-46CB-A173-8C14559E3FCF v1

Set Operation = Enabled

Set SchemeType = DeltaBlocking
Set tCoord =0s
Set tSendMin =0s
Set Unblock = Disabled
(Set to NoRestart if Unblocking scheme with no alarm for loss of guard is to be
used.
Set to Restart if Unblocking scheme with alarm for loss of guard is to be used)
Set tSecurity = 0.035 s
Set DeltaI = 10 %IB
Set DeltaV = 5 %VB
Set Delta3I0 = 10 %IB
Set Delta3V0 = 5 %VB

15.1.3.3 Permissive underreaching scheme M13869-25 v4

Set Operation = Enabled

Set SchemeType = Permissive UR
Set tCoord = 0 ms
Set tSendMin = 0.1 s
Set Unblock = Disabled
Set tSecurity = 0.035 s

15.1.3.4 Permissive overreaching scheme M13869-34 v4

Set Operation = Enabled

Set Scheme type = Permissive OR
Set tCoord = 0 ms
Set tSendMin = 0.1 s (0 s in parallel line applications)
Set Unblock = Disabled
Set tSecurity = 0.035 s

15.1.3.5 Unblocking scheme M13869-43 v4

Set Unblock = Restart

(Loss of guard signal will give both trip and alarm
Choose NoRestart if only trip is required)
Set tSecurity = 0.035 s

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 473

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Scheme communication

15.1.3.6 Intertrip scheme M13869-62 v5

Set Operation = Enabled

Set SchemeType = Intertrip
Set tCoord = 50 ms (10 ms + maximal transmission time)
Set tSendMin = 0.1 s (0 s in parallel line applications)
Set Unblock = Disabled
Set tSecurity = 0.015 s

15.2 Current reversal and Weak-end infeed logic for

distance protection 3-phase ZCRWPSCH (85) IP15751-1 v4

15.2.1 Identification
M15073-1 v5

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Current reversal and weak-end infeed ZCRWPSCH - 85
logic for distance protection 3-phase

15.2.2 Application IP15023-1 v1

15.2.2.1 Current reversal logic M13895-4 v6

To avoid this kind of disturbances, a fault current reversal logic (transient blocking
logic) can be used.

The unwanted operations that might occur can be explained by looking into Figure 193
and Figure 194. Initially the protection A2 at A side will detect a fault in forward
direction and send a communication signal to the protection B2 at remote end, which is
measuring a fault in reverse direction.

474 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 15
Scheme communication

CLOSED FAULT CLOSED

Strong LINE 1 Weak
source source
A:1 B:1
A B
CLOSED CLOSED
LINE 2

A:2 B:2
en99000043_ansi.vsd
ANSI99000043 V1 EN-US

Figure 193: Current distribution for a fault close to B side when all breakers are
closed

When the breaker B1 opens for clearing the fault, the fault current through B2 bay will
invert. If the communication signal has not reset at the same time as the distance
protection function used in the teleprotection scheme has switched on to forward
direction, we will have an unwanted operation of breaker B2 at B side.

CLOSED FAULT OPEN

Strong LINE 1 Weak
source source
A:1 B:1
A B
CLOSED CLOSED
LINE 2

A:2 B:2

en99000044_ansi.vsd
ANSI99000044 V1 EN-US

Figure 194: Current distribution for a fault close to B side when breaker B1 has
opened

To handle this the send signal CS or CSLn from B2 is held back until the reverse zone
IRVLn has reset and the tDelayRev time has been elapsed. To achieve this the reverse
zone on the distance protection shall be connected to input IRV and the output IRVL
shall be connected to input BLKCS on the communication function block ZCPSCH.

The function can be blocked by activating the input IRVBLK or the general BLOCK
input.

15.2.2.2 Weak-end infeed logic M13895-16 v7

Permissive communication schemes can basically operate only when the protection in
the remote IED can detect the fault. The detection requires a sufficient minimum fault
current, normally >20% of . The fault current can be too low due to an open breaker or
low short-circuit power of the source. To overcome these conditions, weak-end infeed
(WEI) echo logic is used. The fault current can also be initially too low due to the fault
current distribution. Here, the fault current increases when the breaker opens at the
strong terminal, and a sequential tripping is achieved. This requires a detection of the
fault by an independent tripping zone 1. To avoid sequential tripping as described, and

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 475

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Scheme communication

when zone 1 is not available, weak-end infeed tripping logic is used. The weak end
infeed function only works together with permissive overreach communication
schemes as the carrier send signal must cover the complete line length.

The WEI function sends back (echoes) the received signal under the condition that no
fault has been detected on the weak-end by different fault detection elements (distance
protection in forward and reverse direction).

Also, the WEI function can be extended to trip the breaker in the weak side. The trip is
achieved when one or more phase voltages are low during an echo function.

In case of single-pole tripping, the phase voltages are used as phase selectors together
with the received signal CRLn.

Together with the blocking teleprotection scheme some limitations apply:

• Only the trip part of the function can be used together with the blocking scheme. It
is not possible to use the echo function to send the echo signal to the remote line
IED. The echo signal would block the operation of the distance protection at the
remote line end and in this way prevents the correct operation of a complete
protection scheme.
• A separate direct intertrip channel must be arranged from remote end when a trip
or accelerated trip is given there. The intertrip receive signal is connect to input
CRL.
• The WEI function shall be set to WEI=Echo&Trip. The WEI function block will
then give phase selection and trip the local breaker.

Avoid using WEI function at both line ends. It shall only be activated at the weak-end.

15.2.3 Setting guidelines IP15024-1 v1

M13856-4 v5

The parameters for the current reversal logic and the weak-end infeed logic (WEI)
function are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

Common base IED values for primary current (IBase), primary voltage (VBase) and
primary power (SBase) are set in a Global base values for settings function GBASVAL.

GlobalBaseSel: It is used to select a GBASVAL function for reference of base values.

15.2.3.1 Current reversal logic M13856-6 v6

Set CurrRev to Enabled to activate the function.

476 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 15
Scheme communication

Set tDelayRev timer at the maximum reset time for the communication equipment that
gives the carrier receive (CRL) signal plus 30 ms. A minimum setting of 40 ms is
recommended, typical 60 ms.

A long tDelayRev setting increases security against unwanted tripping, but delay the
fault clearing in case of a fault developing from one line that evolves to the other one.
The probability of this type of fault is small. Therefore set tDelayRev with a good
margin.

Set the pick-up delay tPickUpRev to <80% of the minimum sum of breaker operate
time + communication delay time, but with a minimum of 20 ms.

15.2.3.2 Weak-end infeed logic M13856-10 v7

Set WEI to Echo, to activate the weak-end infeed function with only echo function.

Set WEI to Echo&Trip to obtain echo with trip.

Set tPickUpWEI to 10 ms, a short delay is recommended to avoid that spurious carrier
received signals will activate WEI and cause unwanted carrier send (ECHO) signals.

When single pole tripping is required, a detailed study of the voltages

during phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground faults should be done, at
different fault locations.

15.3 Local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH SEMOD52894-1 v4

15.3.1 Identification
M14860-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH - -

15.3.2 Application M13821-3 v3

The local acceleration logic (ZCLCPSCH) is used in those applications where

conventional teleprotection scheme is not available (no communication channel), but
the user still require fast clearance for faults on the whole line.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 477

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Scheme communication

This logic enables fast fault clearing during certain conditions, but naturally, it can not
fully replace a teleprotection scheme.

The logic can be controlled either by the autorecloser (zone extension) or by the loss-
of-load current (loss-of-load acceleration).

The loss-of-load acceleration gives selected overreach zone permission to operate

instantaneously after check of the different current criteria. It can not operate for three-
phase faults.

15.3.3 Setting guidelines M13854-4 v3

The parameters for the local acceleration logic functions are set via the local HMI or
PCM600.

Set ZoneExtension to Enabled when the first trip from selected overreaching zone shall
be instantaneous and the definitive trip after autoreclosure a normal time-delayed trip.

Set LossOfLoad to Enabled when the acceleration shall be controlled by loss-of-load in

healthy phase(s).

LoadCurr must be set below the current that will flow on the healthy phase when one
or two of the other phases are faulty and the breaker has opened at remote end (three-
phase). Calculate the setting according to equation 127.

0.5 × ILoad min

LoadCurr =
IBase
EQUATION1320 V1 EN-US (Equation 127)

where:
ILoadmin is the minimum load current on the line during normal operation conditions.

The timer tLoadOn is used to increase the security of the loss-of-load function for
example to avoid unwanted release due to transient inrush current when energizing the
line power transformer. The loss-of-load function will be released after the timer
tLoadOn has elapsed at the same time as the load current in all three phases are above
the setting LoadCurr. In normal acceleration applications there is no need for delaying
the release, so set the tLoadOn to zero.

The drop-out timer tLoadOff is used to determine the window for the current release
conditions for Loss-of-load. The timer is by default set to 300ms, which is judged to be
enough to secure the current release.

478 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 15
Scheme communication

The setting of the minimum current detector, MinCurr, should be set higher than the
unsymmetrical current that might flow on the non faulty line, when the breaker at
remote end has opened (three-phase). At the same time it should be set below the
minimum load current transfer during normal operations that the line can be subjected
to. By default, MinCurr is set to 5% of IBase.

The pick-up timer tLowCurr determine the window needed for pick-up of the
minimum current value used to release the function. The timer is by default set to 200
ms, which is judged to be enough to avoid unwanted release of the function (avoid
unwanted trip).

15.4 Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent

protection ECPSCH (85) IP14711-1 v2

15.4.1 Identification
M14882-1 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Scheme communication logic for ECPSCH - 85
residual overcurrent protection

15.4.2 Application M13919-3 v6

To achieve fast fault clearance of ground faults on the part of the line not covered by
the instantaneous step of the residual overcurrent protection, the directional residual
overcurrent protection can be supported with a logic that uses communication
channels.

One communication channel is used in each direction, which can transmit an on/off
signal if required. The performance and security of this function is directly related to
the transmission channel speed and security against false or lost signals.

In the directional scheme, information of the fault current direction must be transmitted
to the other line end.

With directional comparison in permissive schemes, a short operate time of the

protection including a channel transmission time, can be achieved. This short operate
time enables rapid autoreclosing function after the fault clearance.

During a single-phase reclosing cycle, the autoreclosing device must block the
directional comparison ground-fault communication scheme.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 479

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Scheme communication

The communication logic module enables blocking as well as permissive under/

overreaching schemes. The logic can also be supported by additional logic for weak-
end infeed and current reversal, included in the Current reversal and weak-end infeed
logic for residual overcurrent protection (ECRWPSCH, 85) function.

Metallic communication paths adversely affected by fault generated noise may not be
suitable for conventional permissive schemes that rely on signal transmitted during a
protected line fault. With power line carrier, for example, the communication signal
may be attenuated by the fault, especially when the fault is close to the line end,
thereby disabling the communication channel.

To overcome the lower dependability in permissive schemes, an unblocking function

can be used. Use this function at older, less reliable, power line carrier (PLC)
communication, where the signal has to be sent through the primary fault. The
unblocking function uses a guard signal CRG, which must always be present, even
when no CR signal is received. The absence of the CRG signal during the security time
is used as a CR signal. This also enables a permissive scheme to operate when the line
fault blocks the signal transmission. Set the tSecurity to 35 ms.

15.4.3 Setting guidelines M13920-4 v7

The parameters for the scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection
function are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

The following settings can be done for the scheme communication logic for residual
overcurrent protection function:

Operation: Disabled or Enabled.

SchemeType: This parameter can be set to Off , Intertrip, Permissive UR, Permissive
OR or Blocking.

tCoord: Delay time for trip from ECPSCH (85) function. For Permissive under/
overreaching schemes, this timer shall be set to at least 20 ms plus maximum reset time
of the communication channel as a security margin. For Blocking scheme, the setting
should be > maximum signal transmission time +10 ms.

Unblock: Select Off if unblocking scheme with no alarm for loss of guard is used. Set
to Restart if unblocking scheme with alarm for loss of guard is used.

tSendMin: Time duration, the carrier send signal is prolonged.

tSecurity: The absence of CRG signal for a time duration of tSecurity is considered as
CR signal.

480 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 15
Scheme communication

15.5 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for

residual overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH (85) IP14365-1 v4

15.5.1 Identification
M14883-1 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Current reversal and weak-end infeed ECRWPSCH - 85
logic for residual overcurrent protection

15.5.2 Application IP15041-1 v1

15.5.2.1 Fault current reversal logic M15285-3 v7

Figure 195 and figure 196 show a typical system condition, which can result in a fault
current reversal.

Assume that fault is near the B1 breaker. B1 Relay sees the fault in Zone1 and A1 relay
identifies the fault in Zone2.

Note that the fault current is reversed in line L2 after the breaker B1 opening.

It can cause an unselective trip on line L2 if the current reversal logic does not block
the permissive overreaching scheme in the IED at B2.

CLOSED FAULT CLOSED

Strong LINE 1 Weak
source source
A:1 B:1
A B
CLOSED CLOSED
LINE 2

A:2 B:2
en99000043_ansi.vsd
ANSI99000043 V1 EN-US

Figure 195: Current distribution for a fault close to B side when all breakers are
closed

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 481

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Scheme communication

CLOSED FAULT OPEN

Strong LINE 1 Weak
source source
A:1 B:1
A B
CLOSED CLOSED
LINE 2

A:2 B:2

en99000044_ansi.vsd
ANSI99000044 V1 EN-US

Figure 196: Current distribution for a fault close to B side when breaker at B1 is
opened

When the breaker on the parallel line operates, the fault current on the healthy line is
reversed. The IED at B2 recognizes the fault in forward direction from reverse
direction before breaker operates. As IED at B2 already received permissive signal
from A2 and IED at B2 is now detecting the fault as forward fault, it will immediately
trip breaker at B2. To ensure that tripping at B2 should not occur, the permissive
overreaching function at B2 needs to be blocked by IRVL till the received permissive
signal from A2 is reset.

The IED at A2, where the forward direction element was initially activated, must reset
before the send signal is initiated from B2. The delayed reset of output signal IRVL
also ensures the send signal from IED B2 is held back till the forward direction
element is reset in IED A2.

15.5.2.2 Weak-end infeed logic M15285-6 v5

Figure 197 shows a typical system condition that can result in a missing operation.
Note that there is no fault current from node B. This causes that the IED at B cannot
detect the fault and trip the breaker in B. To cope with this situation, a selectable weak-
end infeed logic is provided for the permissive overreaching scheme.

Strong Weak
source CLOSED CLOSED source
FAULT
A LINE 1 B

en99000054_ansi.vsd
ANSI99000054 V1 EN-US

Figure 197: Initial condition for weak-end infeed

15.5.3 Setting guidelines IP15042-1 v1

M13933-4 v5

The parameters for the current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual
overcurrent protection function are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

482 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 15
Scheme communication

Common base IED values for primary current (IBase), primary voltage (VBase) and
primary power (SBase) are set in a Global base values for settings function GBASVAL.

GlobalBaseSel: It is used to select a GBASVAL function for reference of base values.

15.5.3.1 Current reversal M13933-6 v5

The current reversal function is set on or off by setting the parameter CurrRev to
Enabled or Disabled. Time delays shall be set for the timers tPickUpRev and
tDelayRev.

tPickUpRev is chosen shorter (<80%) than the breaker opening time, but minimum 20
ms.

tDelayRev is chosen at a minimum to the sum of protection reset time and the
communication reset time. A minimum tDelayRev setting of 40 ms is recommended.

The reset time of the directional residual overcurrent protection (EF4PTOC) is

typically 25 ms. If other type of residual overcurrent protection is used in the remote
line end, its reset time should be used.

The signal propagation time is in the range 3 – 10 ms/km for most types of
communication media. In communication networks small additional time delays are
added in multiplexers and repeaters. Theses delays are less than 1 ms per process. It is
often stated that the total propagation time is less than 5 ms.

When a signal picks-up or drops out there is a decision time to be added. This decision
time is highly dependent on the interface between communication and protection used.
In many cases an external interface (teleprotection equipment) is used. This equipment
makes a decision and gives a binary signal to the protection device. In case of analog
teleprotection equipment typical decision time is in the range 10 – 30 ms. For digital
teleprotection equipment this time is in the range 2 – 10 ms.

If the teleprotection equipment is integrated in the protection IED the decision time can
be slightly reduced.

The principle time sequence of signaling at current reversal is shown.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 483

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Scheme communication

Tele- Tele- Tele- Protection

Protection
Protection communication Protection Function
Function
Equipment System Equipment

CS initiation to
CS from the CR to the
the CR selection and
protection CS propagation, protection
communication decision, operate
function, operate propagation function, operate
system, operate and reset time
and reset time and reset time
and reset time

Sending CR
protection reception
reset drop
CR to
CR to CR to CS to
prot.
teleprot. prot. communication
Fault Protection Fault current func
CS initiation eq. func drop
occurs pick-up reversal drop

Time

Minimum setting of tDelay IEC05000536-2-en.vsd

IEC05000536 V2 EN-US

Figure 198: Time sequence of signaling at current reversal

15.5.3.2 Weak-end infeed M13933-12 v6

The weak-end infeed can be set by setting the parameter WEI to Off, Echo or Echo &
Trip. Operating zero sequence voltage when parameter WEI is set to Echo & Trip is set
with 3V0PU.

The zero sequence voltage for a fault at the remote line end and appropriate fault
resistance is calculated.

To avoid unwanted trip from the weak-end infeed logic (if spurious signals should
occur), set the operate value of the broken delta voltage level detector (3V0) higher
than the maximum false network frequency residual voltage that can occur during
normal service conditions. The recommended minimum setting is two times the false
zero-sequence voltage during normal service conditions.

484 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 16
Logic

Section 16 Logic

16.1 Tripping logic SMPPTRC (94) IP14576-1 v4

16.1.1 Identification
SEMOD56226-2 v7

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Tripping logic SMPPTRC 94

1 -> 0
IEC15000314 V1 EN-US

16.1.2 Application M12252-3 v10

All trip signals from the different protection functions shall be routed through the trip
logic. All start signals and directional information can be routed through the trip logic
as well. In its simplest form, the trip logic will only link the TRIP signal to a binary
output and make sure that the pulse time is long enough.

Tripping logic SMPPTRC (94) offers three different operating modes:

• Three-pole tripping for all fault types (3p operating mode)

• Single-pole tripping for single-phase faults and three-pole tripping for multi-phase
and evolving faults (1p/3p operating mode).
• Single-pole tripping for single-pole faults, two-pole tripping for two-pole faults
and three-pole tripping for three-pole faults (1p/2p/3p operating mode).

The logic also issues a three-pole tripping command when phase selection within the
operating protection functions is not possible, or when external conditions request
three-pole tripping. To meet the different double, breaker-and-a-half and other multiple
circuit breaker arrangements, multiple identical SMPPTRC (94) function blocks are
provided within the IED. In such installation, use one instance of SMPPTRC function
per circuit breaker.

If the OHL is connected to the substation via more than one breaker, one SMPPTRC
(94) function block should be used for each breaker. For example when single-pole

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 485

Application manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Logic

tripping and autoreclosing is used on the line, both breakers are normally set up for
1/3-pole tripping and 1/3-phase autoreclosing. Alternatively, the breaker chosen as
master can have single-pole tripping, while the slave breaker could have three-pole
tripping and autoreclosing. In the case of a permanent fault, only one of the breakers
has to be operated when the fault is energized a second time. In the event of a transient
fault the slave breaker performs a three-pole reclosing onto the non-faulted line.

The same philosophy can be used for two-pole tripping and autoreclosing.

To prevent closing of a circuit breaker after a trip, the function offers a lockout
function.

16.1.2.1 Three-pole tripping M14828-7 v10

Connect the inputs from the protection functions to the input TRINP_3P. The
TMGAPC function block is used to combine up to 32 inputs into one output. Connect
the output TRIP to the binary outputs on the IO board.

This signal can also be used for other purposes internally in the IED. An example could
be the starting of breaker failure protection. The three outputs TR_A, TR_B, TR_C
will always be activated at every trip and can be utilized on individual trip outputs if
single-pole operating devices are available on the circuit breaker even when a three-
pole tripping scheme is selected.

Set the function block to Program = 3 phase and set the required length of the trip
pulse to for example, tTripMin = 150ms.

The typical connection is shown below in figure 199.

SMPPTRC (94)
BLOCK TRIP
BLKLKOUT TR_A
TRINP_3P TR_B
TRINP_A TR_C
TRINP_B TR1P
TRINP_C TR2P
PS_A TR3P
PS_B CLLKOU T
PS_C BFI_3P
1PTRZ BFI_A
1PTRGF BFI_B
P3PTR BFI_C
SETLKOUT STN
RSTLKOUT FW
CND REV
ANSI05000707-4-en.vsdx
ANSI05000544 V4 EN-US

Figure 199: Tripping logic SMPPTRC (94) is used for a simple three-pole tripping
application

486 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 16
Logic

16.1.2.2 Single- and/or three-pole tripping M14828-11 v6

The single-/three-pole tripping operation mode will give single-pole tripping for
single-phase faults and three-pole tripping for multi-phase fault. This operating mode is
always used together with a single-phase autoreclosing scheme.

The single-pole tripping can include different options and the use of the different inputs
in the function block. Inputs TRINP_A, TRINP_B and TRINP_C shall be used for trip
signals from functions with built-in pole selection logic such as distance or line
differential protection functions.

The inputs 1PTRZ and 1PTRGF are used for single-pole tripping from functions which
do not have built-in pole selection logic:
• 1PTRZ can be connected to the carrier aided trip signal from the distance
protection scheme (it means that another distance protection function has seen or
detected the fault)
• 1PTRGF can be connected to an earth fault function such as EF4PTOC or a carrier
aided trip signal from the earth fault protection scheme

These two inputs are combined with the external phase selection logic. Phase selection
signals from the external phase selector must be connected to the inputs PS_A, PS_B
and PS_C to achieve the tripping on the respective single-pole trip outputs TR_A,
TR_B and TR_C. The output TRIP is a general trip and is always activated
independent of which phase is involved. Depending on which phases are involved the
outputs TR1P, TR2P and TR3P will be activated as well.

When single-pole tripping schemes are used, a single-phase autoreclosing attempt is

expected to follow. For cases where the autoreclosing is not in service or will not
follow for some reason, the input prepare three-pole trip P3PTR must be activated.
This input is normally connected to the output PREP3P on the autorecloser function
SMBRREC (79) but can also be connected to other signals, for example, an external
logic signal. If two circuit breakers are involved, one SMPPTRC block instance and
one SMBRREC (79) instance are used for each circuit breaker. This will ensure correct
operation and behavior of each circuit breaker.

The output TR3P must be connected to the input TR3P on the SMBRREC (79)
function in order to switch SMBRREC (79) to perform a three-pole reclosing. If this
signal is not activated, SMBRREC will use single-pole dead time.

If a second line protection is utilizing the same SMBRREC (79), the

three-pole trip signal must be generated as OR conditions from both
line protections.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 487

Application manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Logic

Other back-up functions are connected to the input TRINP_3P as described above for
three-pole tripping. A typical connection for a single-pole tripping scheme is shown in
figure 200.

Protection functions with 3 SMPPTRC (94)

phase trip, for example time OR
BLOCK TRIP
delayed overcurrent protection
BLKLKOUT TR_A
TRINP_3P TR_B
Phase segregated trip A, B and C TRINP_A TR_C
from example line differential or TRINP_B TR1P
distance protection TRINP_C TR2P
PS_A TR3P
Phase selection A, B and C from PS_B CLLKOUT
external phase selection logic PS_C BFI_3P
1PTRZ BFI_A
Trip by communication scheme of 1PTRGF BFI_B
distance protection if required to P3PTR BFI_C
provide a single pole trip SETLKOUT STN
RSTLKOUT FW
Trip by communication scheme of CND REV
earth fault protection if required to
provide single pole trip

SMBRREC
PREP3P
To prepare 3 phase trip
for any trip signal
TR3P

To activate lockout for any trip

To reset lockout

ANSI05000545-6-en.vsdx
ANSI05000545 V6 EN-US

Figure 200: The trip logic function SMPPTRC (94) used for single-pole tripping
application

16.1.2.3 Single-, two- or three-pole tripping M14828-15 v5

The single-/two-/three-pole tripping mode provides single-pole tripping for single-

phase faults, two-pole tripping for two-phase faults and three-pole tripping for three-
phase faults. The operating mode is always used together with an autoreclosing scheme
with setting ARMode = 1/2/3 ph or ARMode = 1/2 Ph.

The functionality is very similar to the single-phase scheme described above. However,
in addition to the connections for single phase SMBRREC (79) must also be informed
that the trip is two phases by connecting the output TR2P to the input TR2P in the
SMBRREC (79) function.

488 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 16
Logic

16.1.2.4 Lock-out M14828-18 v5

The SMPPTRC function block is provided with possibilities to initiate lock-out. The
lock-out can be set to only activate the block closing output CLLKOUT or initiate the
block closing output and also maintain the trip signal output TR3P (latched trip).

The lock-out can then be manually reset after checking the primary fault by activating
the input reset lock-out RSTLKOUT.

If external conditions are required to initiate a closing circuit lock-out but not to
lockout trip, this can be achieved by activating input SETLKOUT. The setting
AutoLock = Disabled means that the internal trip will not activate lock-out so only
initiation of the input SETLKOUT will result in lock-out. This is normally the case for
overhead line protection where most faults are transient. Unsuccessful autoreclose and
back-up zone tripping can in such cases be connected to initiate lock-out by activating
the input SETLKOUT.

16.1.2.5 Example of directional data GUID-08AC09AB-2B2F-4095-B06E-1171CF225869 v2

An example how to connect the directional data from different application functions to
the trip function is given below, see Figure 201:

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 489

Application manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Logic

SMAGAPC SMPPTRC (94)

STARTCOMB BLOCK CND BLOCK TRIP
PROTECTION 1 BLOCK CND PU_DIR1 BLKLKOUT TR_A
BFI_3P BFI_3P PU_DIR2 TRINP_3P TR_B
FW FW PU_DIR3 TRINP_A TR_C
REV REV PU_DIR4 TRINP_B TR1P
BFI_A PU_DIR5 TRINP_C TR2P
FW_A PU_DIR6 PS_A TR3P
REV_A PU_DIR7 PS_B CLLKOUT
BFI_B PU_DIR8 PS_C BFI_3P
FW_B PU_DIR9 1PTRZ BFI_A
REV_B PU_DIR10 1PTRGF BFI_B
BFI_C PU_DIR11 P3PTR BFI_C
FW_C PU_DIR12 SETLKOUT STN
REV_C PU_DIR13 RSTLKOUT FW
STN PU_DIR14 CND REV
FWN PU_DIR15
REVN PU_DIR16

STARTCOMB
BLOCK CND
BFI_3P
FW
PROTECTION 2 REV
BFI_A BFI_A
FW_A FW_A
REV_A REV_A
BFI_B BFI_B
FW_B FW_B
REV_B REV_B
BFI_C BFI_C
FW_C FW_C
REV_C REV_C
STN
FWN
REVN

STARTCOMB
BLOCK CND
BFI_3P
FW
REV
BFI_A
FW_A
REV_A
BFI_B
FW_B
REV_B
BFI_C
FW_C PROTECTION 4
PROTECTION 3 REV_C -
STN STN CND
FWN FWN -
REVN REVN -
ANSI16000180-2-en.vsdx
ANSI16000180 V2 EN-US

Figure 201: Example of the connection of directional start logic

The Start Matrix (SMAGAPC) merges start and directional output signals from
different application functions and creates a common directional output signal (CND)
to be connected to the Trip function (SMPPTRC). Protection functions connect their
directional data via the STARTCOMB function to SMAGAPC and then to the
SMPPTRC, or directly to SMAGAPC and then to the SMPPTRC.

490 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 16
Logic

The trip function (SMPPTRC) splits up the directional data as general output data for
BFI_3P, BFI_A, BFI_B, BFI_C, STN, FW and REV.

All start and directional outputs are mapped to the logical node data model of the trip
function and provided via the IEC 61850 attributes dirGeneral, DIRL1, DIRL2, DIRL3
and DIRN.

16.1.2.6 Blocking of the function block M14828-21 v4

Total block of the trip function is done by activating the input BLOCK and can be used
to disable the outputs of the trip logic in the event of internal failures. Block of lock-
out output is achieved by activating the input BLKLKOUT.

16.1.3 Setting guidelines M12274-3 v8

The parameters for tripping logic SMPPTRC (94) are set via the local HMI or
PCM600.

Operation: Sets the mode of operation. Disabled switches the tripping off. The normal
selection is Enabled.

Program: Sets the required tripping scheme. Normally 3 phase or 1p/3p is used.

TripLockout: Sets the scheme for lock-out. Disabled only activates the closing circuit
lock-out output. Enabled activates the closing circuit lock-out output and latches the
TRIP related outputs. The normal selection is Disabled.

AutoLock: Sets the scheme for lock-out. Disabled only activates lock-out through the
input SETLKOUT. Enabled additionally allows lock-out activation via the trip inputs.
The normal selection is Disabled.

tTripMin: Sets the required minimum duration of the trip pulse. It should be set to
ensure that the circuit breaker is opened correctly. The normal setting is 0.150s.

tWaitForPHS: Sets a duration after any of the inputs 1PTRZ or 1PTRGF has been
activated during which external pole selection must operate in order to get a single pole
trip. If no pole selection has been achieved, a three-pole trip will be issued after this
time has elapsed.

tEvolvingFault: Secures two- or three-pole tripping depending on Program selection

during evolving faults.

16.2 Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC IP15121-1 v4

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 491

Application manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Logic

16.2.1 Identification
SEMOD167882-2 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC - -

16.2.2 Application M15321-3 v12

The trip matrix logic TMAGAPC function is used to route trip signals and other logical
output signals to different output contacts on the IED.

The trip matrix logic function has 3 output signals and these outputs can be connected
to physical tripping outputs according to the specific application needs for settable
pulse or steady output.

16.2.3 Setting guidelines M15291-3 v5

Operation: Operation of function Enabled/Disabled.

PulseTime: Defines the pulse time when in Pulsed mode. When used for direct tripping
of circuit breaker(s) the pulse time delay shall be set to approximately 0.150 seconds in
order to obtain satisfactory minimum duration of the trip pulse to the circuit breaker
trip coils.

OnDelay: Used to prevent output signals to be given for spurious inputs. Normally set
to 0 or a low value.

OffDelay: Defines a delay of the reset of the outputs after the activation conditions no
longer are fulfilled. It is only used in Steady mode. When used for direct tripping of
circuit breaker(s) the off delay time shall be set to at least 0.150 seconds in order to
obtain a satisfactory minimum duration of the trip pulse to the circuit breaker trip coils.

ModeOutputx: Defines if output signal OUTPUTx (where x=1-3) is Steady or Pulsed.

16.3 Logic for group alarm ALMCALH GUID-64EA392C-950F-486C-8D96-6E7736B592BF v1

16.3.1 Identification GUID-64EA392C-950F-486C-8D96-6E7736B592BF v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Logic for group alarm ALMCALH - -

492 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 16
Logic

16.3.2 Application GUID-70B268A9-B248-422D-9896-89FECFF80B75 v1

Group alarm logic function ALMCALH is used to route alarm signals to different
LEDs and/or output contacts on the IED.

ALMCALH output signal and the physical outputs allows the user to adapt the alarm
signal to physical tripping outputs according to the specific application needs.

16.3.3 Setting guidelines GUID-0BDD898A-360B-4443-A5CF-7619C80A17F4 v2

Operation: Enabled or Disabled

16.4 Logic for group alarm WRNCALH

16.4.1 Identification GUID-3EBD3D5B-F506-4557-88D7-DFC0BD21C690 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Logic for group warning WRNCALH - -

16.4.1.1 Application GUID-FC0DBB7B-FF86-44BF-83D6-DDF120A176DE v1

Group warning logic function WRNCALH is used to route warning signals to LEDs
and/or output contacts on the IED.

WRNCALH output signal WARNING and the physical outputs allows the user to
adapt the warning signal to physical tripping outputs according to the specific
application needs.

16.4.1.2 Setting guidelines GUID-B08F2636-33DA-4937-92EB-1A8AC0909AB4 v2

OperationEnabled or Disabled

16.5 Logic for group indication INDCALH

16.5.1 Identification GUID-3B5D4371-420D-4249-B6A4-5A168920D635 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Logic for group indication INDCALH - -

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 493

Application manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Logic

16.5.1.1 Application GUID-9BAD30FB-4B75-4E14-82A8-6A59B09FA6EA v1

Group indication logic function INDCALH is used to route indication signals to

different LEDs and/or output contacts on the IED.

INDCALH output signal IND and the physical outputs allows the user to adapt the
indication signal to physical outputs according to the specific application needs.

16.5.1.2 Setting guidelines GUID-7E776D39-1A42-4F90-BF50-9B38F494A01E v2

Operation: Enabled or Disabled

16.6 Configurable logic blocks IP11009-1 v3

The configurable logic blocks are available in two categories:

• Configurable logic blocks that do not propagate the time stamp and the quality of
signals. They do not have the suffix QT at the end of their function block name,
for example, SRMEMORY. These logic blocks are also available as part of an
extension logic package with the same number of instances.
• Configurable logic blocks that propagate the time stamp and the quality of signals.
They have the suffix QT at the end of their function block name, for example,
SRMEMORYQT.

16.6.1 Application GUID-F5D6F065-441B-4296-AC56-F4DC1F5487E3 v3

A set of standard logic blocks, like AND, OR etc, and timers are available for adapting
the IED configuration to the specific application needs. Additional logic blocks that,
beside the normal logical function, have the capability to propagate timestamp and
quality are also available. Those blocks have a designation including the letters QT,
like ANDQT, ORQT etc.

16.6.2 Setting guidelines GUID-E6BD982D-9E47-4CC2-9666-6E5CABA414C0 v3

There are no settings for AND gates, OR gates, inverters or XOR gates as well as, for
ANDQT gates, ORQT gates or XORQT gates.

For normal On/Off delay and pulse timers the time delays and pulse lengths are set
from the local HMI or via the PST tool.

Both timers in the same logic block (the one delayed on pick-up and the one delayed
on drop-out) always have a common setting value.

494 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 16
Logic

For controllable gates, settable timers and SR flip-flops with memory, the setting
parameters are accessible via the local HMI or via the PST tool.

16.6.2.1 Configuration GUID-D93E383C-1655-46A3-A540-657141F77CF0 v4

Logic is configured using the ACT configuration tool in PCM600.

Execution of functions as defined by the configurable logic blocks runs according to a

fixed sequence with different cycle times.

For each cycle time, the function block is given an serial execution number. This is
shown when using the ACT configuration tool with the designation of the function
block and the cycle time, see example below.

IEC09000695_2_en.vsd
IEC09000695 V2 EN-US

Figure 202: Example designation, serial execution number and cycle time for logic
function

IEC09000310-2-en.vsd
IEC09000310 V2 EN-US

Figure 203: Example designation, serial execution number and cycle time for logic
function that also propagates timestamp and quality of input signals

The execution of different function blocks within the same cycle is determined by the
order of their serial execution numbers. Always remember this when connecting two or
more logical function blocks in series.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 495

Application manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Logic

Always be careful when connecting function blocks with a fast cycle

time to function blocks with a slow cycle time.
Remember to design the logic circuits carefully and always check the
execution sequence for different functions. In other cases, additional
time delays must be introduced into the logic schemes to prevent errors,
for example, race between functions.

16.7 Fixed signal function block FXDSIGN IP15080-1 v2

16.7.1 Identification
SEMOD167904-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Fixed signals FXDSIGN - -

16.7.2 Application M15322-3 v12

The Fixed signals function (FXDSIGN) has nine pre-set (fixed) signals that can be
used in the configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in other
function blocks to a certain level/value, or for creating certain logic. Boolean, integer,
floating point, string types of signals are available.

One FXDSIGN function block is included in all IEDs.

Example for use of GRP_OFF signal in FXDSIGN

The Restricted earth fault function REFPDIF (87N) can be used both for auto-
transformers and normal transformers.

When used for auto-transformers, information from both windings parts, together with
the neutral point current, needs to be available to the function. This means that three
inputs are needed.

496 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 16
Logic

REFPDIF (87N)
I3PW1CT1
I3PW2CT1
I3P

ANSI11000083_1_en.vsd
ANSI11000083 V1 EN-US

Figure 204: REFPDIF (87N) function inputs for autotransformer application

For normal transformers only one winding and the neutral point is available. This
means that only two inputs are used. Since all group connections are mandatory to be
connected, the third input needs to be connected to something, which is the GRP_OFF
signal in FXDSIGN function block.

REFPDIF (87N)
I3PW1CT1
I3PW2CT1
I3P

FXDSIGN
GRP_OFF

ANSI11000084_1_en.vsd
ANSI11000084 V1 EN-US

Figure 205: REFPDIF (87N) function inputs for normal transformer application

16.8 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I SEMOD175715-1 v1

16.8.1 Identification
SEMOD175721-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Boolean 16 to integer conversion B16I - -

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 497

Application manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Logic

16.8.2 Application SEMOD175832-4 v4

Boolean 16 to integer conversion function B16I is used to transform a set of 16 binary

(logical) signals into an integer. It can be used – for example, to connect logical output
signals from a function (like distance protection) to integer inputs from another
function (like line differential protection). B16I does not have a logical node mapping.

The Boolean 16 to integer conversion function (B16I) will transfer a combination of up

to 16 binary inputs INx where 1≤x≤16 to an integer. Each INx represents a value
according to the table below from 0 to 32768. This follows the general formula: INx =
2x-1 where 1≤x≤16. The sum of all the values on the activated INx will be available on
the output OUT as a sum of the values of all the inputs INx that are activated. OUT is
an integer. When all INx where 1≤x≤16 are activated that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds
to that integer 65535 is available on the output OUT. B16I function is designed for
receiving up to 16 booleans input locally. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will
freeze the output at the last value.

Values of each of the different OUTx from function block B16I for 1≤x≤16.

The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output
OUT on the function block B16I.
Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when
activated deactivated
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 1 0
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 2 0
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 4 0
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 8 0
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 16 0
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 32 0
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 64 0
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 128 0
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 256 0
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 512 0
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 1024 0
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 2048 0
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 4096 0
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 8192 0
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 16384 0
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 32768 0

498 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 16
Logic

The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all INx (where
1≤x≤16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be
converted to an integer by the B16I function block.

16.9 Boolean to integer conversion with logical node

representation, 16 bit BTIGAPC SEMOD175753-1 v4

16.9.1 Identification
SEMOD175757-2 v5

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Boolean to integer conversion with BTIGAPC - -
logical node representation, 16 bit

16.9.2 Application SEMOD175849-4 v6

Boolean to integer conversion with logical node representation, 16 bit (BTIGAPC) is

used to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer. BTIGAPC has a
logical node mapping in IEC 61850.

The BTIGAPC function will transfer a combination of up to 16 binary inputs INx

where 1≤x≤16 to an integer. Each INx represents a value according to the table below
from 0 to 32768. This follows the general formula: INx = 2x-1 where 1≤x≤16. The sum
of all the values on the activated INx will be available on the output OUT as a sum of
the values of all the inputs INx that are activated. OUT is an integer. When all INx
where 1≤x≤16 are activated that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds to that integer 65535 is
available on the output OUT. BTIGAPC function is designed for receiving up to 16
booleans input locally. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze the output at the
last value.

Values of each of the different OUTx from function block BTIGAPC for 1≤x≤16.

The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output
OUT on the function block BTIGAPC.
Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when
activated deactivated
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 1 0
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 2 0
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 4 0
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 499

Application manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Logic

Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when

activated deactivated
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 8 0
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 16 0
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 32 0
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 64 0
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 128 0
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 256 0
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 512 0
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 1024 0
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 2048 0
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 4096 0
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 8192 0
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 16384 0
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all INx (where
1≤x≤16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be
converted to an integer by the BTIGAPC function block.

16.10 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion IB16 SEMOD158367-1 v2

16.10.1 Identification
SEMOD167941-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16 - -

16.10.2 Application SEMOD158499-5 v4

Integer to boolean 16 conversion function (IB16) is used to transform an integer into a

set of 16 binary (logical) signals. It can be used – for example, to connect integer
output signals from one function to binary (logical) inputs to another function. IB16
function does not have a logical node mapping.

The Boolean 16 to integer conversion function (IB16) will transfer a combination of up

to 16 binary inputs INx where 1≤x≤16 to an integer. Each INx represents a value

500 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 16
Logic

according to the table below from 0 to 32768. This follows the general formula: INx =
2x-1 where 1≤x≤16. The sum of all the values on the activated INx will be available on
the output OUT as a sum of the values of all the inputs INx that are activated. OUT is
an integer. When all INx where 1≤x≤16 are activated that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds
to that integer 65535 is available on the output OUT. IB16 function is designed for
receiving up to 16 booleans input locally. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will
freeze the output at the last value.

Values of each of the different OUTx from function block IB16 for 1≤x≤16.

The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output
OUT on the function block IB16.
Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when
activated deactivated
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 1 0
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 2 0
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 4 0
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 8 0
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 16 0
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 32 0
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 64 0
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 128 0
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 256 0
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 512 0
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 1024 0
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 2048 0
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 4096 0
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 8192 0
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 16384 0
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all INx (where
1≤x≤16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be
converted to an integer by the IB16 function block.

16.11 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node

representation ITBGAPC SEMOD158419-1 v3

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 501

Application manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Logic

16.11.1 Identification
SEMOD167944-2 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Integer to boolean 16 conversion with ITBGAPC - -
logic node representation

16.11.2 Application SEMOD158512-5 v7

Integer to boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation function (ITBGAPC)

is used to transform an integer into a set of 16 boolean signals. ITBGAPC function can
receive an integer from a station computer – for example, over IEC 61850–8–1. This
function is very useful when the user wants to generate logical commands (for selector
switches or voltage controllers) by inputting an integer number. ITBGAPC function
has a logical node mapping in IEC 61850.

The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation function

(ITBGAPC) will transfer an integer with a value between 0 to 65535 communicated
via IEC 61850 and connected to the ITBGAPC function block to a combination of
activated outputs OUTx where 1≤x≤16.

The values of the different OUTx are according to the Table 45.

If the BLOCK input is activated, it freezes the logical outputs at the last value.
Table 45: Output signals
Name of OUTx Type Description Value when Value when
activated deactivated
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 1 0
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 2 0
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3 4 0
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4 8 0
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5 16 0
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6 32 0
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7 64 0
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8 128 0
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9 256 0
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10 512 0
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11 1024 0
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12 2048 0
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13 4096 0
Table continues on next page

502 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 16
Logic

Name of OUTx Type Description Value when Value when

activated deactivated
OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14 8192 0
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15 16384 0
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all OUTx (1≤x≤16)
are active equals 65535. This is the highest integer that can be converted by the
ITBGAPC function block.

16.12 Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and

overflow supervision TEIGAPC

16.12.1 Identification GUID-1913E066-37D1-4689-9178-5B3C8B029815 v3

Function Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device

identification identification number
Elapsed time integrator TEIGAPC - -

16.12.2 Application GUID-B4B47167-C8DE-4496-AEF1-5F0FD1768A87 v2

The function TEIGAPC is used for user-defined logics and it can also be used for
different purposes internally in the IED. An application example is the integration of
elapsed time during the measurement of neutral point voltage or neutral current at
earth-fault conditions.

Settable time limits for warning and alarm are provided. The time limit for overflow
indication is fixed to 999999.9 seconds.

16.12.3 Setting guidelines GUID-2911D624-87D5-4427-BB2F-E0D1072394FA v3

The settings tAlarm and tWarning are user settable limits defined in seconds. The
achievable resolution of the settings depends on the level of the values defined.

A resolution of 10 ms can be achieved when the settings are defined within the range

1.00 second ≤ tAlarm ≤ 99 999.99 seconds

1.00 second ≤ tWarning ≤ 99 999.99 seconds.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 503

Application manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Logic

If the values are above this range, the resolution becomes lower due to the 32 bit float
representation

99 999.99 seconds < tAlarm ≤ 999 999.0 seconds

99 999.99 seconds < tWarning ≤ 999 999.0 seconds

Note that tAlarm and tWarning are independent settings, that is, there is
no check if tAlarm > tWarning.

The limit for the overflow supervision is fixed at 999999.9 seconds.

16.13 Comparator for integer inputs - INTCOMP

16.13.1 Identification GUID-5992B0F2-FC1B-4838-9BAB-2D2542BB264D v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Comparison of integer values INTCOMP Int<=>

16.13.2 Application GUID-4C6D730D-BB1C-45F1-A719-1267234BF1B9 v1

The function gives the possibility to monitor the level of integer values in the system
relative to each other or to a fixed value. It is a basic arithmetic function that can be
used for monitoring, supervision, interlocking and other logics.

16.13.3 Setting guidelines GUID-ADA3E806-BEF1-4D15-B270-207386A0AEE4 v2

For proper operation of comparison the set value should be set within the range of ± 2
×109.

Setting procedure on the IED:

EnaAbs: This setting is used to select the comparison type between signed and absolute
values.
• Absolute: Comparison is performed on absolute values of input and reference
values
• Signed: Comparison is performed on signed values of input and reference values.

504 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 16
Logic

RefSource: This setting is used to select the reference source between input and setting
for comparison.
• Input REF: The function will take reference value from input REF
• Set Value: The function will take reference value from setting SetValue

SetValue: This setting is used to set the reference value for comparison when setting
RefSource is selected as SetValue.

16.13.4 Setting example GUID-13302FD6-1585-42FE-BD6D-44F231982C59 v2

For absolute comparison between inputs:

Set the EnaAbs = Absolute

Set the RefSource = Input REF

Similarly for Signed comparison between inputs

Set the EnaAbs = Signed

Set the RefSource =Input REF

For absolute comparison between input and setting

Set the EnaAbs = Absolute

Set the RefSource = Set Value

SetValue shall be set between -2000000000 to 2000000000

Similarly for signed comparison between input and setting

Set the EnaAbs = Signed

Set the RefSource = Set Value

SetValue shall be set between -2000000000 to 2000000000

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 505

Application manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Logic

16.14 Comparator for real inputs - REALCOMP

16.14.1 Identification GUID-0D68E846-5A15-4C2C-91A2-F81A74034E81 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Comparator for real inputs REALCOMP Real<=>

16.14.2 Application GUID-5F7B1683-9799-4D27-B333-B184F8861A5B v1

The function gives the possibility to monitor the level of real values in the system
relative to each other or to a fixed value. It is a basic arithmetic function that can be
used for monitoring, supervision, interlocking and other logics.

16.14.3 Setting guidelines GUID-DE69FF5B-7D34-4A30-9060-214E98BFF798 v2

Setting procedure on the IED:

EnaAbs: This setting is used to select the comparison type between signed and absolute
values.

• Absolute: Comparison is performed with absolute values of input and reference.

• Signed: Comparison is performed with signed values of input and reference.

RefSource: This setting is used to select the reference source between input and setting
for comparison.

• Input REF: The function will take reference value from input REF
• Set Value: The function will take reference value from setting SetValue

SetValue: This setting is used to set the reference value for comparison when setting
RefSource is selected as Set Value. If this setting value is less than 0.2% of the set unit
then the output INLOW will never pickup.

RefPrefix: This setting is used to set the unit of the reference value for comparison
when setting RefSource is selected as SetValue. It has 5 unit selections and they are
Milli, Unity, Kilo, Mega and Giga.

EqualBandHigh: This setting is used to set the equal condition high band limit in % of
reference value. This high band limit will act as reset limit for INHIGH output when
INHIGH.

506 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 16
Logic

EqualBandLow: This setting is used to set the equal condition low band limit in % of
reference value. This low band limit will act as reset limit for INLOW output when
INLOW.

16.14.4 Setting example GUID-E7070CF6-B44B-4799-BE18-5C75B9FE2A87 v2

Let us consider a comparison is to be done between current magnitudes in the range of

90 to 110 with nominal rating is 100 and the order is kA.

For the above condition the comparator can be designed with settings as follows,

EnaAbs = Absolute

RefSource = Set Value

SetValue = 100

RefPrefix = Kilo

EqualBandHigh = 5.0 % of reference value

EqualBandLow = 5.0 % of reference value

Operation

The function will set the outputs for the following conditions,

INEQUAL will set when the INPUT is between the ranges of 95 to 105 kA.

INHIGH will set when the INPUT crosses above 105 kA.

INLOW will set when the INPUT crosses below 95 kA.

If the comparison should be done between two current magnitudes then those current
signals need to be connected to function inputs, INPUT and REF. Then the settings
should be adjusted as below,

EnaAbs = Absolute

RefSource = Input REF

EqualBandHigh = 5.0 % of reference value

EqualBandLow = 5.0 % of reference value.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 507

Application manual
508
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 17
Monitoring

Section 17 Monitoring

17.1 Measurement GUID-9D2D47A0-FE62-4FE3-82EE-034BED82682A v1

17.1.1 Identification
SEMOD56123-2 v8

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Power system measurements CVMMXN -
P, Q, S, I, U, f

SYMBOL-RR V1 EN-US

Phase current measurement CMMXU -

SYMBOL-SS V1 EN-US

Phase-phase voltage measurement VMMXU -

SYMBOL-UU V1 EN-US

Current sequence component CMSQI -

measurement
I1, I2, I0

SYMBOL-VV V1 EN-US

Voltage sequence component VMSQI -

measurement
U1, U2, U0

SYMBOL-TT V1 EN-US

Phase-neutral voltage measurement VNMMXU -

SYMBOL-UU V1 EN-US

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 509

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Monitoring

17.1.2 Application SEMOD54488-4 v12

Measurement functions are used for power system measurement, supervision and
reporting to the local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM600 or to station level for
example, via IEC 61850. The possibility to continuously monitor measured values of
active power, reactive power, currents, voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is vital
for efficient production, transmission and distribution of electrical energy. It provides
to the system operator fast and easy overview of the present status of the power system.
Additionally, it can be used during testing and commissioning of protection and control
IEDs in order to verify proper operation and connection of instrument transformers
(CTs and VTs). During normal service by periodic comparison of the measured value
from the IED with other independent meters the proper operation of the IED analog
measurement chain can be verified. Finally, it can be used to verify proper direction
orientation for distance or directional overcurrent protection function.

The available measured values from an IED are depending on the

actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits that is, low-low limit,
low limit, high limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also supported,
that is, the measured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which reduces the
impact of noise in the inputs.

Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station level
when change in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all
changes since the last time value updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure value
can also be based on periodic reporting.

Main menu/Measurement/Monitoring/Service values/CVMMXN

The measurement function, CVMMXN, provides the following power system

quantities:

• P, Q and S: three phase active, reactive and apparent power

• PF: power factor
• V: phase-to-phase voltage magnitude
• I: phase current magnitude
• F: power system frequency

,
The measuring functions CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU provide physical
quantities:

510 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 17
Monitoring

• I: phase currents (magnitude and angle) (CMMXU)

• V: voltages (phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltage, magnitude and angle)
(VMMXU, VNMMXU)

The CVMMXN function calculates three-phase power quantities by using fundamental

frequency phasors (DFT values) of the measured current and voltage signals. The
measured power quantities are available either, as instantaneously calculated quantities
or, averaged values over a period of time (low pass filtered) depending on the selected
settings.

It is possible to calibrate the measuring function above to get better then class 0.5
presentation. This is accomplished by angle and magnitude compensation at 5, 30 and
100% of rated current and at 100% of rated voltage.

The power system quantities provided, depends on the actual hardware,

(TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

The measuring functions CMSQI and VMSQI provide sequence component quantities:

• I: sequence currents (positive, zero, negative sequence, magnitude and angle)

• V: sequence voltages (positive, zero and negative sequence, magnitude and angle).

17.1.3 Zero clamping GUID-8DABC3F5-6615-493C-B839-A5C557A2FAE8 v4

Measuring functions CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU have no

interconnections regarding any settings or parameters.

Zero clampings are also handled entirely by ZeroDb separately for each function's
every output signal. For example, zero clamping of U12 is handled by UL12ZeroDb in
VMMXU, zero clamping of I1 is handled by IL1ZeroDb in CMMXU, and so on.

Example of CVMMXN operation

Outputs seen on the local HMI under Main menu/Measurements/Monitoring/

Servicevalues(P_Q)/CVMMXN(P_Q):

S Apparent three-phase power

P Active three-phase power
Q Reactive three-phase power
PF Power factor
ILAG I lagging U
ILEAD I leading U
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 511

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Monitoring

U System mean voltage, calculated according to selected mode

I System mean current, calculated according to selected mode
F Frequency

Relevant settings and their values on the local HMI under Main menu/Settings/IED
settings/Monitoring/Servicevalues(P_Q)/CVMMXN(P_Q):

• When system voltage falls below UGenZeroDB, values for S, P, Q, PF, ILAG,
ILEAD, U and F are forced to zero.
• When system current falls below IGenZeroDB, values for S, P, Q, PF, ILAG,
ILEAD, U and F are forced to zero.
• When the value of a single signal falls below its set deadband, the value is forced
to zero. For example, if the apparent three-phase power falls below SZeroDb, the
value for S is forced to zero.

17.1.4 Setting guidelines SEMOD54481-165 v14

The available setting parameters of the measurement function CVMMXN, CMMXU,

VMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQI, VNMMXU are depending on the actual hardware (TRM)
and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

The parameters for the Measurement functions CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU,

CMSQI, VMSQI, VNMMXU are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
IBase, VBase and SBase as applicable.

Operation: Disabled/Enabled. Every function instance (CVMMXN, CMMXU,

VMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQI, VNMMXU) can be taken in operation (Enabled) or out
of operation (Disabled).

The following general settings can be set for the Measurement function (CVMMXN).

PowMagFact: Magnitude factor to scale power calculations.

PowAngComp: Angle compensation for phase shift between measured I & V.

Mode: Selection of measured current and voltage. There are 9 different ways of
calculating monitored three-phase values depending on the available VT inputs
connected to the IED. See parameter group setting table.

k: Low pass filter coefficient for power measurement, V and I.

512 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 17
Monitoring

VGenZeroDb: Minimum level of voltage in % of VBase, used as indication of zero

voltage (zero point clamping). If measured value is below VGenZeroDb calculated S, P,
Q and PF will be zero.

IGenZeroDb: Minimum level of current in % of IBase, used as indication of zero

current (zero point clamping). If measured value is below IGenZeroDb calculated S, P,
Q and PF will be zero.

VMagCompY: Magnitude compensation to calibrate voltage measurements at Y% of

Vn, where Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100.

IMagCompY: Magnitude compensation to calibrate current measurements at Y% of In,

where Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100.

IAngCompY: Angle compensation to calibrate angle measurements at Y% of In, where

Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100.

The following general settings can be set for the Phase current measurement
(CMMXU).

IMagCompY: Magnitude compensation to calibrate current measurements at Y% of In,

where Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100.

IAngCompY: Angle compensation to calibrate angle measurements at Y% of In, where

Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100.

The following general settings can be set for the Phase-phase voltage measurement
(VMMXU).

VMagCompY: Amplitude compensation to calibrate voltage measurements at Y% of

Vn, where Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100.

VAngCompY: Angle compensation to calibrate angle measurements at Y% of Vn,

where Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100.

The following general settings can be set for all monitored quantities included in the
functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQI, VNMMXU) X in
setting names below equals S, P, Q, PF, V, I, F, IA,IB,IC, VA, VB, VCVAB, VBC,
VCA, I1, I2, 3I0, V1, V2 or 3V0.

Xmin: Minimum value for analog signal X set directly in applicable measuring unit.
This forms the minimum limit of the range.

Xmax: Maximum value for analog signal X. This forms the maximum limit of the
range.

XZeroDb: Zero point clamping. A signal value less than XZeroDb is forced to zero.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 513

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Monitoring

Observe the related zero point clamping settings in Setting group N for CVMMXN
(VGenZeroDb and IGenZeroDb). If measured value is below VGenZeroDb and/or
IGenZeroDb calculated S, P, Q and PF will be zero and these settings will override
XZeroDb.

XRepTyp: Reporting type. Cyclic (Cyclic), magnitude deadband (Dead band), integral
deadband (Int deadband) or Deadband and xx se cyclic (xx: 5 sec, 30 sec, 1 min). The
reporting interval is controlled by the parameter XDbRepInt.

XDbRepInt: This setting handles all the reporting types. If setting is deadband in
XRepTyp, XDbRepInt defines the deadband in m% of the measuring range. For cyclic
reporting type (XRepTyp : cyclic), the setting value reporting interval is in seconds.
Magnitude deadband is the setting value in m% of measuring range. Integral deadband
setting is the integral area, that is, measured value in m% of measuring range
multiplied by the time between two measured values.

XHiHiLim: High-high limit. Set as % of YBase (Y is SBase for S,P,Q UBase for
Voltage measurement and IBase for current measurement).

XHiLim: High limit. Set as % of YBase (Y is SBase for S,P,Q UBase for Voltage
measurement and IBase for current measurement).

XLowLim: Low limit. Set as % of YBase (Y is SBase for S,P,Q UBase for Voltage
measurement and IBase for current measurement).

XLowLowLim: Low-low limit. Set as % of YBase (Y is SBase for S,P,Q UBase for
Voltage measurement and IBase for current measurement).

XLimHyst: Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits.

All phase angles are presented in relation to defined reference channel. The parameter
PhaseAngleRef defines the reference, see Section “Analog inputs”.

Calibration curves
It is possible to calibrate the functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU and
VNMMXU) to get class 0.5 presentations of currents, voltages and powers. This is
accomplished by magnitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current
and voltage. The compensation curve will have the characteristic for magnitude and
angle compensation of currents as shown in figure 206 (example). The first phase will
be used as reference channel and compared with the curve for calculation of factors.
The factors will then be used for all related channels.

514 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 17
Monitoring

Magnitude
% of In compensation

+10
IMagComp5 Measured
IMagComp30 current

IMagComp100
5 30 100 % of In
0-5%: Constant
-10 5-30-100%: Linear
>100%: Constant

Degrees Angle
compensation

+10

IAngComp30 Measured
current
IAngComp5
IAngComp100
5 30 100 % of In

-10

ANSI05000652_3_en.vsd
ANSI05000652 V3 EN-US

Figure 206: Calibration curves

17.1.4.1 Setting examples SEMOD54481-4 v5

Three setting examples, in connection to Measurement function (CVMMXN), are

provided:

• Measurement function (CVMMXN) application for a OHL

• Measurement function (CVMMXN) application on the secondary side of a
transformer
• Measurement function (CVMMXN) application for a generator

For each of them detail explanation and final list of selected setting parameters values
will be provided.

The available measured values of an IED are depending on the actual

hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 515

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Monitoring

Measurement function application for a 380kV OHL SEMOD54481-12 v11

Single line diagram for this application is given in figure 207:

380kV Busbar

800/5 A

IED
380kV 120V
/ kV
3 3

P Q

380kV OHL ANSI09000039-1-en.vsd

ANSI09000039 V1 EN-US

Figure 207: Single line diagram for 380kV OHL application

In order to monitor, supervise and calibrate the active and reactive power as indicated
in figure 207 it is necessary to do the following:

1. Set correctly CT and VT data and phase angle reference channel PhaseAngleRef
(see Section “Setting of the phase reference channel”) using PCM600 for analog
input channels
2. Connect, in PCM600, measurement function to three-phase CT and VT inputs
3. Set under General settings parameters for the Measurement function:
• general settings as shown in table 46.
• level supervision of active power as shown in table 47.
• calibration parameters as shown in table 48.

516 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 17
Monitoring

Table 46: General settings parameters for the Measurement function

Setting Short Description Selected Comments
value
Operation Operation Off/On On Function must be On
PowAmpFact Amplitude factor to scale power 1.000 It can be used during commissioning
calculations to achieve higher measurement
accuracy. Typically no scaling is
required
PowAngComp Angle compensation for phase 0.0 It can be used during commissioning
shift between measured I & U to achieve higher measurement
accuracy. Typically no angle
compensation is required. As well
here required direction of P & Q
measurement is towards protected
object (as per IED internal default
direction)
Mode Selection of measured current L1, L2, L3 All three phase-to-ground VT inputs
and voltage are available
k Low pass filter coefficient for 0.00 Typically no additional filtering is
power measurement, V and I required
VGenZeroDb Zero point clamping in % of 25 Set minimum voltage level to 25%.
Ubase Voltage below 25% will force S, P and
Q to zero.
IGenZeroDb Zero point clamping in % of 3 Set minimum current level to 3%.
Ibase Current below 3% will force S, P and
Q to zero.
VBase (set in Base setting for voltage level in 400.00 Set rated OHL phase-to-phase
Global base) kV voltage
IBase (set in Base setting for current level in 1000 Set rated primary CT current used for
Global base) A OHL
SBase (set in Base Setting for power base in 1000 Set based on rated Power
Global base) MVA

Table 47: Settings parameters for level supervision

Setting Short Description Selected Comments
value
PMin Minimum value -100 Minimum expected load
PMax Minimum value 100 Maximum expected load
PZeroDb Zero point clamping in 0.001% of 3000 Set zero point clamping to 60 MW
range that is, 3% of 200 MW
PRepTyp Reporting type db Select magnitude deadband
supervision
PDbRepInt Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 2000 Set ±Δdb=40 MW that is, 2% (larger
0.001% of range, Int Db: In changes than 40 MW will be reported)
0.001%s
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 517

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Monitoring

Setting Short Description Selected Comments

value
PHiHiLim High High limit (physical value), 60 High alarm limit that is, extreme
% of SBase overload alarm, hence it will be 415
MW.
PHiLim High limit (physical value), in % 50 High warning limit that is, overload
of SBase warning, hence it will be 371 MW.
PLowLim Low limit (physical value), in % of -50 Low warning limit -500 MW
SBase
PLowLowlLim Low Low limit (physical value), in -60 Low alarm limit -600 MW
% of SBase
PLimHyst Hysteresis value in % of range 1 Set ±Δ Hysteresis 20 MW that is, 1%
(common for all limits) of range (2000 MW)

Table 48: Settings for calibration parameters

Setting Short Description Selected Comments
value
IMagComp5 Magnitude factor to calibrate 0.00
current at 5% of In
IMagComp30 Magnitude factor to calibrate 0.00
current at 30% of In
IMagComp100 Magnitude factor to calibrate 0.00
current at 100% of In
VAmpComp5 Magnitude factor to calibrate 0.00
voltage at 5% of Vn
VMagComp30 Magnitude factor to calibrate 0.00
voltage at 30% of Vn
VMagComp100 Magnitude factor to calibrate 0.00
voltage at 100% of Vn
IAngComp5 Angle calibration for current at 0.00
5% of In
IAngComp30 Angle pre-calibration for current 0.00
at 30% of In
IAngComp100 Angle pre-calibration for current 0.00
at 100% of In

Measurement function application for a power transformer SEMOD54481-61 v9

Single line diagram for this application is given in figure 208.

518 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 17
Monitoring

132kV Busbar

200/5

31.5 MVA IED

P Q

VAB
500/5 33kV 120V
/
3 3
33kV Busbar ANSI09000040-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000040 V1 EN-US

Figure 208: Single line diagram for transformer application

In order to measure the active and reactive power as indicated in figure 208, it is
necessary to do the following:

1. Set correctly all CT and VT and phase angle reference channel PhaseAngleRef
(see Section “Setting of the phase reference channel”) data using PCM600 for
analog input channels
2. Connect, in PCM600, measurement function to LV side CT & VT inputs
3. Set the setting parameters for relevant Measurement function as shown in the
following table 49:

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 519

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Monitoring

Table 49: General settings parameters for the Measurement function

Setting Short description Selected Comment
value
Operation Operation Disabled/Enabled Enabled Function must be Enabled
PowAmpFact Magnitude factor to scale power 1.000 Typically no scaling is required
calculations
PowAngComp Angle compensation for phase 180.0 Typically no angle compensation is
shift between measured I & V required. However here the required
direction of P & Q measurement is
towards busbar (Not per IED internal
default direction). Therefore angle
compensation have to be used in
order to get measurements in aliment
with the required direction.
Mode Selection of measured current L1L2 Only UL1L2 phase-to-phase voltage
and voltage is available
k Low pass filter coefficient for 0.00 Typically no additional filtering is
power measurement, V and I required
VGenZeroDb Zero point clamping in % of 25 Set minimum voltage level to 25%
Vbase
IGenZeroDb Zero point clamping in % of 3 Set minimum current level to 3%
Ibase
VBase (set in Base setting for voltage level in 35.00 Set LV side rated phase-to-phase
Global base) kV voltage
IBase (set in Base setting for current level in 495 Set transformer LV winding rated
Global base) A current
SBase (set in Base setting for power in MVA 31.5 Set based on rated power
Global base)

Measurement function application for a generator SEMOD54481-110 v8

Single line diagram for this application is given in figure 209.

520 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 17
Monitoring

230kV Busbar

300/5

100 MVA
IED

15/0.12kV
VAB ,, VBC

P Q

100 MVA G
15.65kV
4000/5

ANSI09000041-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000041 V1 EN-US

Figure 209: Single line diagram for generator application

In order to measure the active and reactive power as indicated in figure 209, it is
necessary to do the following:

1. Set correctly all CT and VT data and phase angle reference channel
PhaseAngleRef (see Section “Setting of the phase reference channel”) using
PCM600 for analog input channels
2. Connect, in PCM600, measurement function to the generator CT & VT inputs
3. Set the setting parameters for relevant Measurement function as shown in the
following table:

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 521

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Monitoring

Table 50: General settings parameters for the Measurement function

Setting Short description Selected Comment
value
Operation Operation Off/On On Function must be On
PowAmpFact Amplitude factor to scale power 1.000 Typically no scaling is required
calculations
PowAngComp Angle compensation for phase 0.0 Typically no angle compensation is
shift between measured I & V required. As well here required
direction of P & Q measurement is
towards protected object (as per IED
internal default direction)
Mode Selection of measured current Arone Generator VTs are connected
and voltage between phases (V-connected)
k Low pass filter coefficient for 0.00 Typically no additional filtering is
power measurement, V and I required
VGenZeroDb Zero point clamping in % of 25% Set minimum voltage level to 25%
Vbase
IGenZeroDb Zero point clamping in % of 3 Set minimum current level to 3%
Ibase
VBase (set in Base setting for voltage level in 15,65 Set generator rated phase-to-phase
Global base) kV voltage
IBase (set in Base setting for current level in 3690 Set generator rated current
Global base) A

17.2 Gas medium supervision SSIMG (63) GUID-358AD8F8-AE06-4AEA-9969-46E5299D5B4B v3

17.2.1 Identification
GUID-AD96C26E-C3E5-4B21-9ED6-12E540954AC3 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Insulation gas monitoring function SSIMG - 63

17.2.2 Application GUID-A840E38C-CC42-4995-A569-A6092DDB81B2 v5

Gas medium supervision (SSIMG ,63) is used for monitoring the circuit breaker
condition. Proper arc extinction by the compressed gas in the circuit breaker is very
important. When the pressure becomes too low compared to the required value, the
circuit breaker operation shall be blocked to minimize the risk of internal failure.
Binary information based on the gas pressure in the circuit breaker is used as an input
signal to the function. The function generates alarms based on the received
information.

522 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 17
Monitoring

17.2.3 Setting guidelines GUID-DF6BEC98-F806-41CE-8C29-BEE9C88FC1FD v2

The parameters for Gas medium supervision SSIMG can be set via local HMI or
Protection and Control Manager PCM600.

Operation: This is used to disable/enable the operation of gas medium supervision i.e.
Off/On.

PresAlmLimit: This is used to set the limit for a pressure alarm condition in the circuit
breaker.

PresLOLimit: This is used to set the limit for a pressure lockout condition in the circuit
breaker.

TempAlarmLimit: This is used to set the limit for a temperature alarm condition in the
circuit breaker.

TempLOLimit: This is used to set the limit for a temperature lockout condition in the
circuit breaker.

tPressureAlarm: This is used to set the time delay for a pressure alarm indication,
given in s.

tPressureLO: This is used to set the time delay for a pressure lockout indication, given
in s.

tTempAlarm: This is used to set the time delay for a temperature alarm indication,
given in s.

tTempLockOut: This is used to set the time delay for a temperature lockout indication,
given in s.

tResetPressAlm: This is used for the pressure alarm indication to reset after a set time
delay in s.

tResetPressLO: This is used for the pressure lockout indication to reset after a set time
delay in s.

tResetTempLO: This is used for the temperature lockout indication to reset after a set
time delay in s.

tResetTempAlm: This is used for the temperature alarm indication to reset after a set
time delay in s.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 523

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Monitoring

17.3 Liquid medium supervision SSIML (71) GUID-37669E94-4830-4C96-8A67-09600F847F23 v3

17.3.1 Identification
GUID-4CE96EF6-42C6-4F2E-A190-D288ABF766F6 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Insulation liquid monitoring function SSIML - 71

17.3.2 Application GUID-140AA10C-4E93-4C23-AD57-895FADB0DB29 v6

Liquid medium supervision (SSIML ,71) is used for monitoring the transformers and
tap changers. When the level becomes too low compared to the required value, the
operation is blocked to minimize the risk of internal failures. Binary information based
on the oil level in the transformer and the tap changer is used as input signals to the
function. In addition to that, the function generates alarms based on received
information.

17.3.3 Setting guidelines GUID-0C8E498B-2A65-44ED-91D6-53EC72F49222 v2

The parameters for Liquid medium supervision SSIML can be set via local HMI or
Protection and Control Manager PCM600.

Operation: This is used to disable/enable the operation of liquid medium supervision

i.e. Off/On.

LevelAlmLimit: This is used to set the limit for a level alarm condition in the
transformer.

LevelLOLimit: This is used to set the limit for a level lockout condition in the
transformer.

TempAlarmLimit: This is used to set the limit for a temperature alarm condition in the
transformer.

TempLOLimit: This is used to set the limit for a temperature lockout condition in the
transformer.

tLevelAlarm: This is used to set the time delay for a level alarm indication, given in s.

tLevelLockOut: This is used to set the time delay for a level lockout indication, given
in s.

524 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 17
Monitoring

tTempAlarm: This is used to set the time delay for a temperature alarm indication,
given in s.

tTempLockOut: This is used to set the time delay for a temperature lockout indication,
given in s.

tResetLevelAlm: This is used for the level alarm indication to reset after a set time
delay in s.

tResetLevelLO: This is used for the level lockout indication to reset after a set time
delay in s.

tResetTempLO: This is used for the temperature lockout indication to reset after a set
time delay in s.

tResetTempAlm: This is used for the temperature alarm indication to reset after a set
time delay in s.

17.4 Breaker monitoring SSCBR

17.4.1 Identification GUID-0FC081B2-0BC8-4EB8-9529-B941E51F18EE v7

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Breaker monitoring SSCBR - -

17.4.2 Application GUID-45572680-3A39-4B3C-8639-4E4C5A95AA26 v9

The circuit breaker maintenance is usually based on regular time intervals or the
number of operations performed. This has some disadvantages because there could be
a number of abnormal operations or few operations with high-level currents within the
predetermined maintenance interval. Hence, condition-based maintenance scheduling
is an optimum solution in assessing the condition of circuit breakers.

Circuit breaker contact travel time

Auxiliary contacts provide information about the mechanical operation, opening time
and closing time of a breaker. Detecting an excessive traveling time is essential to
indicate the need for maintenance of the circuit breaker mechanism. The excessive
travel time can be due to problems in the driving mechanism or failures of the contacts.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 525

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Monitoring

Circuit breaker status

Monitoring the breaker status ensures proper functioning of the features within the
protection relay such as breaker control, breaker failure and autoreclosing. The breaker
status is monitored using breaker auxiliary contacts. The breaker status is indicated by
the binary outputs. These signals indicate whether the circuit breaker is in an open,
closed or error state.

Remaining life of circuit breaker

Every time the breaker operates, the circuit breaker life reduces due to wear. The wear
in a breaker depends on the interrupted current. For breaker maintenance or
replacement at the right time, the remaining life of the breaker must be estimated. The
remaining life of a breaker can be estimated using the maintenance curve provided by
the circuit breaker manufacturer.

Circuit breaker manufacturers provide the number of make-break operations possible at

various interrupted currents. An example is shown in figure 210.

526 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 17
Monitoring

100000

50000

P1
20000

10000
Number of make-break operations ( n)

5000

2000

1000

500

200

P2
100

50

20

10
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50 100

Interrupted current (kA)

IEC12000623_1_en.vsd
IEC12000623 V1 EN-US

Figure 210: An example for estimating the remaining life of a circuit breaker

Calculation for estimating the remaining life

The graph shows that there are 10000 possible operations at the rated operating current
and 900 operations at 10 kA and 50 operations at rated fault current. Therefore, if the
interrupted current is 10 kA, one operation is equivalent to 10000/900 = 11 operations
at the rated current. It is assumed that prior to tripping, the remaining life of a breaker
is 10000 operations. Remaining life calculation for three different interrupted current
conditions is explained below.

• Breaker interrupts at and below the rated operating current, that is, 2 kA, the
remaining life of the CB is decreased by 1 operation and therefore, 9999
operations remaining at the rated operating current.
• Breaker interrupts between rated operating current and rated fault current, that is,
10 kA, one operation at 10kA is equivalent to 10000/900 = 11 operations at the

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 527

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Monitoring

rated current. The remaining life of the CB would be (10000 – 10) = 9989 at the
rated operating current after one operation at 10 kA.
• Breaker interrupts at and above rated fault current, that is, 50 kA, one operation at
50 kA is equivalent to 10000/50 = 200 operations at the rated operating current.
The remaining life of the CB would become (10000 – 200) = 9800 operations at
the rated operating current after one operation at 50 kA.

Accumulated energy
Monitoring the contact erosion and interrupter wear has a direct influence on the
required maintenance frequency. Therefore, it is necessary to accurately estimate the
erosion of the contacts and condition of interrupters using cumulative summation of Iy.
The factor "y" depends on the type of circuit breaker. The energy values were
accumulated using the current value and exponent factor for CB contact opening
duration. When the next CB opening operation is started, the energy is accumulated
from the previous value. The accumulated energy value can be reset to initial
accumulation energy value by using the Reset accumulating energy input, RSTIPOW.

Circuit breaker operation cycles

Routine breaker maintenance like lubricating breaker mechanism is based on the
number of operations. A suitable threshold setting helps in preventive maintenance.
This can also be used to indicate the requirement for oil sampling for dielectric testing
in case of an oil circuit breaker.

Circuit breaker operation monitoring

By monitoring the activity of the number of operations, it is possible to calculate the
number of days the breaker has been inactive. Long periods of inactivity degrade the
reliability for the protection system.

Circuit breaker spring charge monitoring

For normal circuit breaker operation, the circuit breaker spring should be charged
within a specified time. Detecting a long spring charging time indicates the time for
circuit breaker maintenance. The last value of the spring charging time can be given as
a service value.

Circuit breaker gas pressure indication

For proper arc extinction by the compressed gas in the circuit breaker, the pressure of
the gas must be adequate. Binary input available from the pressure sensor is based on
the pressure levels inside the arc chamber. When the pressure becomes too low
compared to the required value, the circuit breaker operation is blocked.

528 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 17
Monitoring

17.4.3 Setting guidelines GUID-AB93AD9B-E6F8-4F1A-B353-AA1008C15679 v2

The breaker monitoring function is used to monitor different parameters of the circuit
breaker. The breaker requires maintenance when the number of operations has reached
a predefined value. For proper functioning of the circuit breaker, it is also essential to
monitor the circuit breaker operation, spring charge indication or breaker wear, travel
time, number of operation cycles and accumulated energy during arc extinction.

17.4.3.1 Setting procedure on the IED GUID-4E895FEA-74BF-4B11-A239-0574F8FF5188 v4

The parameters for breaker monitoring (SSCBR) can be set using the local HMI or
Protection and Control Manager (PCM600).

Common base IED values for primary current (IBase), primary voltage (VBase) and
primary power (SBase) are set in Global base values for settings function GBASVAL.

GlobalBaseSel: It is used to select a GBASVAL function for reference of base values.

Operation: Enabled or Disabled.

IBase: Base phase current in primary A. This current is used as reference for current
settings.

OpenTimeCorr: Correction factor for circuit breaker opening travel time.

CloseTimeCorr: Correction factor for circuit breaker closing travel time.

tTrOpenAlm: Setting of alarm level for opening travel time.

tTrCloseAlm: Setting of alarm level for closing travel time.

OperAlmLevel: Alarm limit for number of mechanical operations.

OperLOLevel: Lockout limit for number of mechanical operations.

CurrExponent: Current exponent setting for energy calculation. It varies for different
types of circuit breakers. This factor ranges from 0.5 to 3.0.

AccStopCurr: RMS current setting below which calculation of energy accumulation

stops. It is given as a percentage of IBase.

ContTrCorr: Correction factor for time difference in auxiliary and main contacts'
opening time.

AlmAccCurrPwr: Setting of alarm level for accumulated energy.

LOAccCurrPwr: Lockout limit setting for accumulated energy.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 529

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Monitoring

SpChAlmTime: Time delay for spring charging time alarm.

tDGasPresAlm: Time delay for gas pressure alarm.

tDGasPresLO: Time delay for gas pressure lockout.

DirCoef: Directional coefficient for circuit breaker life calculation.

RatedOperCurr: Rated operating current of the circuit breaker.

RatedFltCurr: Rated fault current of the circuit breaker.

OperNoRated: Number of operations possible at rated current.

OperNoFault: Number of operations possible at rated fault current.

CBLifeAlmLevel: Alarm level for circuit breaker remaining life.

AccSelCal: Selection between the method of calculation of accumulated energy.

OperTimeDelay: Time delay between change of status of trip output and start of main
contact separation.

17.5 Event function EVENT IP14590-1 v2

17.5.1 Identification
SEMOD167950-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Event function EVENT -
S00946 V1 EN-US

17.5.2 Application M12805-6 v11

When using a Substation Automation system with LON or SPA communication, time-
tagged events can be sent at change or cyclically from the IED to the station level.
These events are created from any available signal in the IED that is connected to the
Event function (EVENT). The EVENT function block is used for remote
communication.

Analog, integer and double indication values are also transferred through the EVENT
function.

530 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 17
Monitoring

17.5.3 Setting guidelines IP14841-1 v1

M12811-3 v3

The input parameters for the Event function (EVENT) can be set individually via the
local HMI (Main Menu/Settings / IED Settings / Monitoring / Event Function) or
via the Parameter Setting Tool (PST).

EventMask (Ch_1 - 16) M12811-5 v3

The inputs can be set individually as:

• NoEvents
• OnSet, at pick-up of the signal
• OnReset, at drop-out of the signal
• OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal
• AutoDetect, the EVENT function makes the reporting decision (reporting criteria
for integers have no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)

LONChannelMask or SPAChannelMask M12811-15 v2

Definition of which part of the event function block that shall generate events:

• Disabled
• Channel 1-8
• Channel 9-16
• Channel 1-16

MinRepIntVal (1 - 16) M12811-29 v3

A time interval between cyclic events can be set individually for each input channel.
This can be set between 0 s to 3600 s in steps of 1 s. It should normally be set to 0, that
is, no cyclic communication.
M12811-34 v1

It is important to set the time interval for cyclic events in an optimized

way to minimize the load on the station bus.

17.6 Disturbance report DRPRDRE IP14584-1 v2

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 531

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Monitoring

17.6.1 Identification
M16055-1 v8

Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification device number
Disturbance report DRPRDRE - -
Disturbance report A1RADR - A4RADR - -
Disturbance report B1RBDR - B22RBDR - -

17.6.2 Application M12152-3 v9

To get fast, complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or
in the secondary system it is very important to gather information on fault currents,
voltages and events. It is also important having a continuous event-logging to be able
to monitor in an overview perspective. These tasks are accomplished by the
disturbance report function DRPRDRE and facilitate a better understanding of the
power system behavior and related primary and secondary equipment during and after
a disturbance. An analysis of the recorded data provides valuable information that can
be used to explain a disturbance, basis for change of IED setting plan, improve existing
equipment, and so on. This information can also be used in a longer perspective when
planning for and designing new installations, that is, a disturbance recording could be a
part of Functional Analysis (FA).

Disturbance report DRPRDRE, always included in the IED, acquires sampled data of
all selected analog and binary signals connected to the function blocks that is,
• Maximum 30 external analog signals,
• 10 internal derived analog signals, and
• 352 binary signals

Disturbance report function is a common name for several functions; Indications

(IND), Event recorder (ER), Sequential of events (SOE), Trip value recorder (TVR),
Disturbance recorder (DR) and Fault locator (FL).

Disturbance report function is characterized by great flexibility as far as configuration,

starting conditions, recording times, and storage capacity are concerned. Thus,
disturbance report is not dependent on the operation of protective functions, and it can
record disturbances that were not discovered by protective functions for one reason or
another. Disturbance report can be used as an advanced stand-alone disturbance
recorder.

Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED. The same applies to all events,
which are continuously saved in a ring-buffer. Local HMI can be used to get
information about the recordings, and the disturbance report files may be uploaded in

532 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 17
Monitoring

the PCM600 using the Disturbance handling tool, for report reading or further analysis
(using WaveWin, that can be found on the PCM600 installation CD). The user can also
upload disturbance report files using FTP or MMS (over 61850–8–1) clients.

If the IED is connected to a station bus (IEC 61850-8-1), the disturbance recorder
(record made and fault number) and the fault locator information are available. The
same information is obtainable if IEC 60870-5-103 is used.

17.6.3 Setting guidelines IP14874-1 v1

M12179-64 v8

The setting parameters for the Disturbance report function DRPRDRE are set via the
local HMI or PCM600.

It is possible to handle up to 40 analog and 352 binary signals, either internal signals or
signals coming from external inputs. The binary signals are identical in all functions
that is, Disturbance recorder (DR), Event recorder (ER), Indication (IND), Trip value
recorder (TVR) and Sequential of events (SOE) function.

User-defined names of binary and analog input signals is set using PCM600. The
analog and binary signals appear with their user-defined names. The name is used in all
related functions (Disturbance recorder (DR), Event recorder (ER), Indication (IND),
Trip value recorder (TVR) and Sequential of events (SOE)).

Figure 211 shows the relations between Disturbance report, included functions and
function blocks. Sequential of events (SOE), Event recorder (ER) and Indication (IND)
uses information from the binary input function blocks (BxRBDR). Trip value recorder
(TVR) uses analog information from the analog input function blocks (AxRADR),
which is used by Fault locator (FL) after estimation by Trip Value Recorder (TVR).
Disturbance report function acquires information from both AxRADR and BxRBDR.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 533

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Monitoring

AxRADR Disturbance Report

DRPRDRE FL
Analog signals
Trip value rec Fault locator

BxRBDR Disturbance
recorder

Binary signals
Sequential of
events

Event recorder

Indications

ANSI09000336-2-en.vsdx

ANSI09000336 V2 EN-US

Figure 211: Disturbance report functions and related function blocks

For Disturbance report function there are a number of settings which also influences
the sub-functions.

Three LED indications placed above the LCD screen makes it possible to get quick
status information about the IED.

Green LED:
Steady light In Service
Flashing light Internal failure
Dark No power supply

Yellow LED:
Steady light Triggered on binary signal N with SetLEDx = Start (or Start and
Trip)
Flashing light The IED is in test mode

Table continues on next page

534 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 17
Monitoring

Red LED:
Steady light Triggered on binary signal N with SetLEDx = Trip (or Start and
Trip)
Flashing The IED is in configuration mode

Operation M12179-82 v6

The operation of Disturbance report function DRPRDRE has to be set Enabled or

Disabled. If Disabled is selected, note that no disturbance report is registered, and none
sub-function will operate (the only general parameter that influences Sequential of
events (SOE)).

Operation = Disabled:

• Disturbance reports are not stored.

• LED information (yellow - pickup, red - trip) is not stored or changed.

Operation = Enabled:

• Disturbance reports are stored, disturbance data can be read from the local HMI
and from a PC for example using PCM600.
• LED information (yellow - pickup, red - trip) is stored.

Every recording will get a number (0 to 999) which is used as identifier (local HMI,
disturbance handling tool and IEC 61850). An alternative recording identification is
date, time and sequence number. The sequence number is automatically increased by
one for each new recording and is reset to zero at midnight. The maximum number of
recordings stored in the IED is 100. The oldest recording will be overwritten when a
new recording arrives (FIFO).

To be able to delete disturbance records, Operation parameter has to be

Enabled.

The maximum number of recordings depend on each recordings total

recording time. Long recording time will reduce the number of
recordings to less than 100.

The IED flash disk should NOT be used to store any user files. This
might cause disturbance recordings to be deleted due to lack of disk
space.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 535

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Monitoring

17.6.3.1 Recording times M12179-88 v5

Prefault recording time (PreFaultRecT) is the recording time before the starting point
of the disturbance. The setting should be at least 0.1 s to ensure enough samples for the
estimation of pre-fault values in the Trip value recorder (TVR) function.

Postfault recording time (PostFaultRecT) is the maximum recording time after the
disappearance of the trig-signal (does not influence the Trip value recorder (TVR)
function).

Recording time limit (TimeLimit) is the maximum recording time after trig. The
parameter limits the recording time if some trigging condition (fault-time) is very long
or permanently set (does not influence the Trip value recorder (TVR) function).

Operation in test mode M12179-492 v4

If the IED is in test mode and OpModeTest = Disabled. Disturbance report function
does not save any recordings and no LED information is displayed.

If the IED is in test mode and OpModeTest = Enabled. Disturbance report function
works in normal mode and the status is indicated in the saved recording.

Post Retrigger M12155-173 v7

Disturbance report function does not automatically respond to any new trig condition
during a recording, after all signals set as trigger signals have been reset. However,
under certain circumstances the fault condition may reoccur during the post-fault
recording, for instance by automatic reclosing to a still faulty power line.

In order to capture the new disturbance it is possible to allow retriggering (PostRetrig

= Enabled) during the post-fault time. In this case a new, complete recording will
pickup and, during a period, run in parallel with the initial recording.

When the retrig parameter is disabled (PostRetrig = Disabled), a new recording will
not pickup until the post-fault (PostFaultrecT or TimeLimit) period is terminated. If a
new trig occurs during the post-fault period and lasts longer than the proceeding
recording a new complete recording will be started.

Disturbance report function can handle a maximum of 3 simultaneous disturbance

recordings.

17.6.3.2 Binary input signals M12179-90 v9

Up to 352 binary signals can be selected among internal logical and binary input
signals. The configuration tool is used to configure the signals.

536 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 17
Monitoring

For each of the 352 signals, it is also possible to select if the signal is to be used as a
trigger for the start of the Disturbance report and if the trigger should be activated on
positive (1) or negative (0) slope.

TrigDRN: Disturbance report may trig for binary input N (Enabled) or not (Disabled).

TrigLevelN: Trig on positive (Trig on 1) or negative (Trig on 0) slope for binary input
N.

Func103N: Function type number (0-255) for binary input N according to

IEC-60870-5-103, that is, 128: Distance protection, 160: overcurrent protection, 176:
transformer differential protection and 192: line differential protection.

Info103N: Information number (0-255) for binary input N according to

IEC-60870-5-103, that is, 69-71: Trip L1-L3, 78-83: Zone 1-6.

See also description in the chapter IEC 60870-5-103.

17.6.3.3 Analog input signals M12179-92 v5

Up to 40 analog signals can be selected among internal analog and analog input
signals. PCM600 is used to configure the signals.

For retrieving remote data from LDCM module, the Disturbance report
function should be connected to a 8 ms SMAI function block if this is
the only intended use for the remote data.

The analog trigger of Disturbance report is not affected if analog input M is to be

included in the disturbance recording or not (OperationM = Enabled/Disabled).

If OperationM = Disabled, no waveform (samples) will be recorded and reported in

graph. However, Trip value, pre-fault and fault value will be recorded and reported.
The input channel can still be used to trig the disturbance recorder.

If OperationM = Enabled, waveform (samples) will also be recorded and reported in

graph.

NomValueM: Nominal value for input M.

OverTrigOpM, UnderTrigOpM: Over or Under trig operation, Disturbance report may

trig for high/low level of analog input M (Enabled) or not (Disabled).

OverTrigLeM, UnderTrigLeM: Over or under trig level, Trig high/low level relative
nominal value for analog input M in percent of nominal value.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 537

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Monitoring

17.6.3.4 Sub-function parameters M12179-389 v3

All functions are in operation as long as Disturbance report is in operation.

Indications M12179-448 v4

IndicationMaN: Indication mask for binary input N. If set (Show), a status change of
that particular input, will be fetched and shown in the disturbance summary on local
HMI. If not set (Hide), status change will not be indicated.

SetLEDN: Set red LED on local HMI in front of the IED if binary input N changes
status.

Disturbance recorder M12179-446 v4

OperationM: Analog channel M is to be recorded by the disturbance recorder

(Enabled) or not (Disabled).

If OperationM = Disabled, no waveform (samples) will be recorded and reported in

graph. However, Trip value, pre-fault and fault value will be recorded and reported.
The input channel can still be used to trig the disturbance recorder.

If OperationM = Enabled, waveform (samples) will also be recorded and reported in

graph.

Setting information GUID-B0D40F6D-3CE4-4FF3-81B4-B453FDD389CB v1

SetInfoInDrep: Parameter used to enable or disable the settings information in

disturbance header.

Event recorder M12179-444 v4

Event recorder (ER) function has no dedicated parameters.

Trip value recorder M12179-442 v3

ZeroAngleRef: The parameter defines which analog signal that will be used as phase
angle reference for all other analog input signals. This signal will also be used for
frequency measurement and the measured frequency is used when calculating trip
values. It is suggested to point out a sampled voltage input signal, for example, a line
or busbar phase voltage (channel 1-30).

Sequential of events M12179-440 v3

function has no dedicated parameters.

17.6.3.5 Consideration M12179-420 v6

The density of recording equipment in power systems is increasing, since the number
of modern IEDs, where recorders are included, is increasing. This leads to a vast
number of recordings at every single disturbance and a lot of information has to be

538 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 17
Monitoring

handled if the recording functions do not have proper settings. The goal is to optimize
the settings in each IED to be able to capture just valuable disturbances and to
maximize the number that is possible to save in the IED.

The recording time should not be longer than necessary (PostFaultrecT and
TimeLimit).

• Should the function record faults only for the protected object or cover more?
• How long is the longest expected fault clearing time?
• Is it necessary to include reclosure in the recording or should a persistent fault
generate a second recording (PostRetrig)?

Minimize the number of recordings:

• Binary signals: Use only relevant signals to start the recording that is, protection
trip, carrier receive and/or pickup signals.
• Analog signals: The level triggering should be used with great care, since
unfortunate settings will cause enormously number of recordings. If nevertheless
analog input triggering is used, chose settings by a sufficient margin from normal
operation values. Phase voltages are not recommended for trigging.

There is a risk of flash wear out if the disturbance report triggers too
often.

Remember that values of parameters set elsewhere are linked to the information on a
report. Such parameters are, for example, station and object identifiers, CT and VT
ratios.

17.7 Logical signal status report BINSTATREP GUID-E7A2DB38-DD96-4296-B3D5-EB7FBE77CE07 v2

17.7.1 Identification GUID-E0247779-27A2-4E6C-A6DD-D4C31516CA5C v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Logical signal status report BINSTATREP - -

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 539

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Monitoring

17.7.2 Application GUID-F9D225B1-68F7-4D15-AA89-C9211B450D19 v3

The Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP) function makes it possible to poll
signals from various other function blocks.

BINSTATREP has 16 inputs and 16 outputs. The output status follows the inputs and
can be read from the local HMI or via SPA communication.

When an input is set, the respective output is set for a user defined time. If the input
signal remains set for a longer period, the output will remain set until the input signal
resets.

INPUTn

OUTPUTn
t t

IEC09000732-1-en.vsd
IEC09000732 V1 EN-US

Figure 212: BINSTATREP logical diagram

17.7.3 Setting guidelines GUID-BBDA6900-4C1A-4A7C-AEA5-3C49C2749254 v2

The pulse time t is the only setting for the Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP).
Each output can be set or reset individually, but the pulse time will be the same for all
outputs in the entire BINSTATREP function.

17.8 Fault locator LMBRFLO IP14592-1 v2

17.8.1 Identification
M14892-1 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Fault locator LMBRFLO - -

17.8.2 Application M13752-3 v6

The main objective of line protection and monitoring IEDs is fast, selective and
reliable operation for faults on a protected line section. Besides this, information on

540 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 17
Monitoring

distance to fault is very important for those involved in operation and maintenance.
Reliable information on the fault location greatly decreases the downtime of the
protected lines and increases the total availability of a power system.

The fault locator is started with the input CALCDIST to which trip signals indicating
in-line faults are connected, typically distance protection zone 1 and accelerating zone
or the line differential protection. The disturbance report must also be started for the
same faults since the function uses pre- and post-fault information from the trip value
recorder function (TVR).

Beside this information the function must be informed about faulted phases for correct
loop selection (phase selective outputs from differential protection, distance protection,
directional OC protection, and so on). The following loops are used for different types
of faults:

• for 3 phase faults: loop A-B.

• for 2 phase faults: the loop between the faulted phases.
• for 2 phase-to-ground faults: the loop between the faulted phases.
• for phase-to-ground faults: the phase-to-ground loop.

LMBRFLO function indicates the distance to fault as a percentage of the line length, in
kilometers or miles as selected on the local HMI. LineLengthUnit setting is used to
select the unit of length either, in kilometer or miles for the distance to fault. The
distance to the fault, which is calculated with a high accuracy, is stored together with
the recorded disturbances. This information can be read on the local HMI, uploaded to
PCM600 and is available on the station bus according to IEC 61850–8–1.

The distance to fault can be recalculated on the local HMI by using the measuring
algorithm for different fault loops or for changed system parameters.

17.8.3 Setting guidelines IP14835-1 v1

M13769-3 v6

The parameters for the Fault locator function are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

The Fault locator algorithm uses phase voltages, phase currents and residual current in
observed bay (protected line) and residual current from a parallel bay (line, which is
mutual coupled to protected line).

The Fault locator has close connection to the Disturbance report function. All external
analog inputs (channel 1-30), connected to the Disturbance report function, are
available to the Fault locator and the function uses information calculated by the Trip
value recorder. After allocation of analog inputs to the Disturbance report function, the
user has to point out which analog inputs to be used by the Fault locator. According to
the default settings the first four analog inputs are currents and next three are voltages

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 541

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Monitoring

in the observed bay (no parallel line expected since chosen input is set to zero). Use the
Parameter Setting tool within PCM600 for changing analog configuration.

The measured phase voltages can be fine tuned with the parameters VAGain, VBGain
and VCGain to further increase the accuracy of the fault locator.

The list of parameters explains the meaning of the abbreviations. Figure 213 also
presents these system parameters graphically. Note, that all impedance values relate to
their primary values and to the total length of the protected line.

R0L+jX0L
R1L+jX1L

R1A+jX1A R1B+jX1B
Z0m=Z0m+jX0m

R0L+jX0L
R1L+jX1L
DRPRDRE
LMBRFLO
ANSI05000045_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000045 V2 EN-US

Figure 213: Simplified network configuration with network data, required for
settings of the fault location-measuring function

For a single-circuit line (no parallel line), the figures for mutual zero-sequence
impedance (X0M, R0M) and analog input are set at zero.

Power system specific parameter settings are not general settings but specific setting
included in the setting groups, that is, this makes it possible to change conditions for
the Fault locator with short notice by changing setting group.

The source impedance is not constant in the network. However, this has a minor
influence on the accuracy of the distance-to-fault calculation, because only the phase
angle of the distribution factor has an influence on the accuracy. The phase angle of the
distribution factor is normally very low and practically constant, because the positive
sequence line impedance, which has an angle close to 90°, dominates it. Always set the
source impedance resistance to values other than zero. If the actual values are not
known, the values that correspond to the source impedance characteristic angle of 85°
give satisfactory results.

17.8.3.1 Connection of analog currents M13769-16 v5

Connection diagram for analog currents included IN from parallel line shown in figure
214.

542 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 17
Monitoring

A
B
C
1 1

I1 I1
2 2

3 3

4
I2 I2 4

5 5

I3 I3
6
6

9 9

10
I5 I5
10

en07000113_1_ansi.v
sd
ANSI07000113 V2 EN-US

Figure 214: Example of connection of parallel line IN for Fault locator LMBRFLO

17.9 Limit counter L4UFCNT GUID-22E141DB-38B3-462C-B031-73F7466DD135 v1

17.9.1 Identification GUID-F3FB7B33-B189-4819-A1F0-8AC7762E9B7E v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Limit counter L4UFCNT -

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 543

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Monitoring

17.9.2 Application GUID-41B13135-5069-4A5A-86CE-B7DBE9CFEF38 v2

Limit counter (L4UFCNT) is intended for applications where positive and/or negative
sides on a binary signal need to be counted.

The limit counter provides four independent limits to be checked against the
accumulated counted value. The four limit reach indication outputs can be utilized to
initiate proceeding actions. The output indicators remain high until the reset of the
function.

It is also possible to initiate the counter from a non-zero value by resetting the function
to the wanted initial value provided as a setting.

If applicable, the counter can be set to stop or rollover to zero and continue counting
after reaching the maximum count value. The steady overflow output flag indicates the
next count after reaching the maximum count value. It is also possible to set the
counter to rollover and indicate the overflow as a pulse, which lasts up to the first
count after rolling over to zero. In this case, periodic pulses will be generated at
multiple overflow of the function.

17.9.3 Setting guidelines GUID-5AECCDBC-7385-4D9F-940C-9D4A0E59B106 v1

GUID-DA5DA8D7-4821-4BFB-86CC-28658E376270 v1

The parameters for Limit counter L4UFCNT are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

17.10 Running hour-meter TEILGAPC

17.10.1 Identification GUID-3F9EF4FA-74FA-4D1D-88A0-E948B722B64F v1

Function Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device

identification identification number
Running hour-meter TEILGAPC - -

17.10.2 Application GUID-225D8341-2D31-49F1-9B49-571346C0FE26 v1

The function is used for user-defined logics and it can also be used for different
purposes internally in the IED. An application example is to accumulate the total
running/energized time of the generator, transformer, reactor, capacitor bank or even
line.

Settable time limits for warning and alarm are provided. The time limit for overflow
indication is fixed to 99999.9 hours. At overflow the accumulated time resets and the
accumulation starts from zero again.

544 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 17
Monitoring

17.10.3 Setting guidelines GUID-D3BED56A-BA80-486F-B2A8-E47F7AC63468 v1

The settings tAlarm and tWarning are user settable limits defined in hours. The
achievable resolution of the settings is 0.1 hours (6 minutes).

tAlarm and tWarning are independent settings, that is, there is no check
if tAlarm > tWarning.

The limit for the overflow supervision is fixed at 99999.9 hours.

The setting tAddToTime is a user settable time parameter in hours.

17.11 Estimation of transformer insulation life LOLSPTR

(26/49HS) GUID-D9D1F036-EC75-40A8-860F-192CF1F6F759 v1

GUID-A3D72F4B-9567-4DF0-867A-9F657A7E9291 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Estimation of transformer winding LOLSPTR 26/49HS
insulation life 3Ihp>T

17.11.1 Application GUID-7F37B3D6-C98E-4780-AB5B-12780566FFA2 v1

A typical power transformer is composed of:

• Laminated steel core with copper or aluminium windings
• Solid refined paper insulation
• Highly refined mineral oil as insulating and cooling medium for the entire
transformer

The oil is cooled by a separate cooling system using air or water. The core, windings
and insulation have specific thermal capabilities.

Losses in the winding and core can cause temperature rises in the transformer, which is
transferred to the insulating oil. Failure to limit these temperature rises to the thermal
capability of the insulation and core materials can cause premature failure of the
transformer.

A transformer is rated at the power output. It can continuously deliver at rated voltage
and frequency without exceeding the specified temperature limit. This temperature rise
is based on thermal limitations of the core, winding and insulation. Therefore,

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 545

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Monitoring

transformer MVA rating is based on maximum allowable temperature of the insulation.

Design standards express temperature limits for transformers exceeds ambient
temperature. Use of ambient temperature as a base ensures that a transformer has
adequate thermal capacity and independent of daily environmental conditions.

Transformers in the power system are designed to withstand certain overload

conditions. The permissible transformer load level is highly depends on the
transformer cooling system. Both IEEE and IEC standards have established
transformer thermal model for all cooling system types and described formulae for
transformer temperature calculation.
Table 51: Different cooling systems used in transformers
Cooling system Description
OF (non-directed oil flow) Pumped oil from the radiators or heat exchangers
flows freely inside the tank and not forced to flow
through the windings.
ON (non-directed oil flow) Oil from the radiators or heat exchangers flows
freely inside the tank and not forced to flow through
the windings.
OD (non-directed oil flow) Part of pumped oil from the radiators or heat
exchangers is forced to flow through the windings.

In addition to types of cooling system used, size of the transformer also determines
transformer loading beyond the nameplate rating. Leakage flux density, short circuit
force and high electric stress on the insulation increases once size of the transformer
increases. Hence, determination of hot spot temperature becomes more complex.
Therefore, large transformers are more vulnerable than the smaller ones. Consequences
of transformer failures are more severe for larger sizes than for smaller ones.

As per IEC 60076 guidelines, reasonable risk degree for the expected duties are
categorized into three types:
• Distribution transformers: Only hot spot temperature in the windings and
thermal deterioration are considered.
• Medium power transformers: Hot spot temperature in the windings, thermal
deterioration and variations in the cooling modes are considered.
• Large power transformer: Hot spot temperature in the windings, thermal
deterioration, variations in the cooling modes and effects of stray leakage flux are
considered.

Conductors on top of the winding experience the maximum leakage field and the
highest transformer oil temperature. It would be natural to consider that conductors at
the top have the hottest spot. However, measurements have shown that the hottest spot
might be moved to conductors in the lower part of the winding. Therefore, direct hot
spot temperature measurement is difficult. Hence, it should be calculated using the

546 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 17
Monitoring

empirical formulae given by relevant standards. The hot spot temperature shall be
monitored continuously so that it will not exceed the transformer oil flashover value.

Figure 215 shows the complex transformer temperature distribution. The assumptions
made are:
• Oil temperature increases linearly from bottom to top irrespective of the cooling
system.
• Winding temperature rise is parallel to the oil temperature rise with constant
difference ‘g’ (average winding to average oil temperature gradient).
• The hot spot temperature rise is higher than the top winding temperature rise with
the factor called Hot Spot Factor (H).

H xg
Hot spot
Top of
Top oil
winding

Top of winding
Height of transformer

Average winding

Average oil g

Bottom of Bottom oil

winding
Temperature
IEC15000440-1-en.vsdx
IEC15000440 V1 EN-US

Figure 215: Thermal diagram

Winding hot spot temperature depends on the oil temperature inside the winding, load
losses in the winding, cooling type and ambient temperature. For most transformers in
service, oil temperature inside a winding is difficult to measure. On the other hand, top
oil temperature at the top of the tank is well known, either by measurement or
calculation.

In addition to loading of the transformer, oil temperature rise depends also on reduced
oil flow inside the winding and malfunctioning/failure of the cooling system (water or
air circulation). Therefore, hot spot temperature can be measured by sensing top oil

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 547

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Monitoring

temperature without separately considering the effects of oil flow blockage and
malfunction of cooler groups.

Normal life expected of the transformer is a conventional reference based on the

designed operating condition and ambient temperature. If the transformer load exceeds
its rated condition, ageing will accelerate. Consequences of excessive transformer
loading leads to unacceptable temperature rise in windings, leads, insulation and oil.
When temperature changes, moisture and gas content in the insulation and oil will
change.

IEEE C57.91-1995 standard has developed four different loading conditions beyond
nameplate to explain the risk involved in the higher operating temperatures, see Figure
216. The four types of loading are:
• Normal life expectancy
• Normal life expectancy loading: The transformer loading is continuous at
rated output when operated under usual conditions.
• Sacrifice of life expectancy
• Planned loading beyond nameplate: Restricted to transformers that do not
carry a continuous steady load and it is a normal, planned repetitive load.
• Long time emergency loading: Loading results from the prolonged outage of
some system element. This is not a normal operating condition, but may
persist for some time.
• Short time emergency loading: Unusually heavy loading for short time due
to occurrence of one or more unwanted events that disturb the normal system
loading seriously.

548 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 17
Monitoring

140°C
140°C

130°C
130°C

Hot spot temperature

Hot spot temperature

120°C
120°C

110°C
110°C

100°C
100°C

90°C
90°C

80°C
80°C
12 2 4 6 8 10 12 2 4 6 8 10
12 2 4 6 8 10 12 2 4 6 8 10

Hours of the day Hours of the day

Normal life expectancy loading Planned loading beyond nameplate rating

170°C

160°C

140°C
150°C

130°C
140°C
Hot spot temperature

Hot spot temperature

120°C
130°C

110°C
120°C

100°C 110°C

90°C 100°C

80°C 90°C
12 2 4 6 8 10 12 2 4 6 8 10 12 2 4 6 8 10 12 2 4 6 8 10
Hours of the day Hours of the day
Long time energy loading Short time energy loading
IEC15000441-1-en.vsdx
IEC15000441 V1 EN-US

Figure 216: Typical load cycles for example

Impact of the increased currents and temperature leads to premature transformer failure
and this may have an immediate short term effect or a cumulative long term effect.
• Short-term effect: Reduction in dielectric strength due to the possible presence of
gas bubbles which leads to super saturation of the oil and reduction in short circuit
strength.
• Long-term effect: Continuous deterioration of the conductor reduces the
transformer life.

Deterioration of insulation reduces mechanical strength and dielectric strength. Heating

from heavy overload or large electromagnetic force resulting from short circuit causes
expansion and unusual movement of conductors and it leads to turn-to-turn fault.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 549

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Monitoring

Insulation aging or deterioration is a time function of temperature, moisture content,

and oxygen content. With modern oil preservation systems, the moisture and oxygen
contributions to insulation deterioration can be minimized, leaving insulation
temperature as the controlling parameter.

Temperature distribution is not uniform in transformers, the part that is operating at the
highest temperature normally undergoes the greatest deterioration. Therefore, in aging
studies it is usual to consider the aging effects produced by the highest (hottest-spot)
temperature. Since many factors influences the cumulative effect of temperature over
time which causes transformer insulation deterioration, it is difficult to predict the
useful life of the insulation in a transformer with great degree of accuracy. However,
this function will help in reducing the accelerated aging of power transformers during
overload conditions and thus maximize the transformer operating life.

17.11.2 Setting guidelines GUID-48FC89C4-881E-49F0-AD2A-576D1BDBE9EE v1

The parameters for the estimation of transformer insulation life function LOLSPTR
(26/49HS) are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

Minimum information about the transformer parameters which are required to decide
the transformer insulation life are:
1. Top oil temperature rise over ambient temperature at rated load
2. Average conductor temperature rise over ambient temperature at rated load
3. Winding hot spot temperature rise over ambient temperature
4. Load losses at rated load
5. No-Load (core) loss
6. Oil flow design (Directed or non-directed)
7. Weight of core and coil assembly
8. Weight of tank and fittings
9. Weight of oil in the tank and cooling equipment (excluding load tap changer, oil
expansion tanks)

For information about 1 to 5, the conditions (load, ambient temperature, tap, etc.) under
which the measurements are made should be known. In order to have more precise
calculations, load loss at rated and tap extremes or all possible tap connection
combinations are required.
GUID-FED52BFB-66A9-46E9-BD11-3FA18DD0FB50 v1

Operation: Disabled or Enabled.

TrafoRating: Rated transformer power in MVA.

TrafoType: This setting is used to set the number of phases in the transformer. The
options are:

550 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 17
Monitoring

• Three Phase Trafo: The function considers the given transformer as three phase
transformer.
• Single Phase Trafo: The function considers the given transformer as single phase
transformer.

Based on the settings TrafoRating and TrafoType, transformer parameters are selected
for temperature calculations. Both IEEE and IEC standards defines the transformer
parameters based on three categories of transformer rating.

In the case of three phase transformers:

• If the transformer rating is less than 2.5 MVA, the function considers this as a
distribution transformer.
• If the transformer rating is less than 100 MVA, it is considered as a medium power
transformer.
• If the transformer rating is above 100 MVA, it is considered as a larger power
transformer.

In the case of single phase transformers:

• If the transformer rating is less than 0.833 MVA, the function considers this as a
distribution transformer.
• If the transformer rating is less than 33.3 MVA, it is considered as a medium
power transformer.
• If the transformer rating is above 33.3 MVA, it is considered as a larger power
transformer.

NoOfWindings: This setting is used to set the number of windings in the transformer.
The options are :
• Three winding: The function considers the given transformer as three winding
transformer.
• Two winding: The function considers the given transformer as two winding
transformer.

Based on the setting NoOfWindings, hot spot temperature of the winding 3 is either
calculated or assigned as zero.

ConstSelection: This setting is used to select the transformer parameters taken either
from IEC 60076-7 standard or IEEE C57.96-1995 standard. The options are:

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 551

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Monitoring

• IEC: Transformer parameters like constants, winding and oil exponents will be
taken from IEC 60076-7 standard for temperature calculations.
• IEEE: Transformer parameters like constants, winding and oil exponents will be
taken from IEEE C57.96-1995 standard for temperature calculations.

CurrSelectMode: This setting is used to select the current determining method which is
used for the load factor calculation. The function takes phase currents of each winding
as input. From each winding, only one phase current is considered for load factor
calculation. The options are:
• Average: The average of all phase currents of winding is considered for
calculation.
• Maximum: The maximum current out of the all phase currents is considered for
calculation.

TempeUnitMode: This setting is used to select the temperature unit to be used for the
function interface. The options are:
• °F: The temperature unit will be selected as °F. Since all calculation formulae
needs temperature values in °C, the temperature inputs are converted into °C for
calculation. Once the calculations are done, the outputs in °C are converted into
°F.
• °C: The temperature unit will be selected as °C. All temperature inputs will be
taken as they are and the output is given in °C.

GUID-4D6F8802-AFCC-4277-8844-A87A98A5F2C8 v1

LOLSPTR (26/49HS) can work with (n-1) winding CT availability, that is, if the given
transformer has three windings and it has CTs only in two windings, then the function
will calculate the missing winding current based on voltage transformation ratio.
Following settings are required to calculate the winding current with available CT
input:

AvailableCT: Availability of CT connection can be set by this setting. The options are:
• Winding 1: Only winding 1 CT is available. This option can be selected when two
winding transformer is considered.
• Winding 2: Only winding 2 CT is available. This option can be selected when two
winding transformer is considered.
• Winding 1&2: Only winding 1 and winding 2 CTs are available. This option can be
selected when three winding transformer is considered.

552 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 17
Monitoring

• Winding 1&3: Only winding 1 and winding 3 CTs are available. This option can be
selected when three winding transformer is considered.
• Winding 2&3: Only winding 2 and winding 3 CTs are available. This option can be
selected when three winding transformer is considered.
• All windings: All windings CTs are available. This option can be selected for both
two and three winding transformer.

RatedVoltW1: This setting is used to set the rated voltage of winding 1 in kV.

RatedVoltW2: This setting is used to set the rated voltage of winding 2 in kV.

RatedVoltW3: This setting is used to set the rated voltage of winding 3 in kV.

UPerTap: This setting is used to set the voltage increment/decrement between two
successive tap positions (ΔV) in kV.
GUID-2D78A349-4A55-441A-BEC6-A590A1742AE2 v1

Time required for the top oil temperature in relation to ambient temperature to reach its
ultimate value is a function of the thermal oil time constant. The function has the
following settings related to oil time constant.

OilTmConstMode: This setting is used to select the oil time constant mode of input to
the function. It has three options:
• Standard: Oil time constant is taken from the IEEE or IEC standard as selected for
the temperature calculations.
• User defined: Oil time constant is provided by the user through setting. The value
may be given by the transformer manufacturer.
• Calculated: Oil time constant is calculated by the function based on the
transformer parameters given by the user.

OilTimeConst: This setting is used to get the oil time constant from the user and this
will be used when OilTmConstMode setting is selected as User defined. Likely it is
between 1 and 3 hours.

AvgOilTmpRise: The top oil temperature is based on the average temperature rise of the
lumped mass. In the case of transformer, this would be the average oil temperature.
This setting is used to set the average oil temperature rise above ambient temperature
in K (Kelvin). This value should be obtained from the manufacturer based on certified
heat run test reports conducted at maximum rating given in the name plate.

CoilCoreMass: This setting is used to set the transformer coil and core assembly mass.
This mass consists of all winding mass, core mass and paper mass of the transformer.

OilMass: This setting is used to set the transformer oil mass. This mass consists of free
oil mass and oil insulation mass of the transformer.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 553

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Monitoring

TankMass: This setting is used to set the transformer tank mass. This mass is only the
tank and fittings that are in contact with heated oil.

LoadLoss: This setting is used to set the transformer load loss at rated condition.

TTLoadLoss: This setting is used to set the transformer load loss arrived from type test.

NoloadLoss: This setting is used to set the transformer no-load loss.

TTNoloadLoss: This setting is used to set the transformer no-load loss arrived from
type test.
GUID-BDD32D22-D1C2-47C2-9B4C-A055C847CCA2 v1

Winding time constant is the time for winding temperature to rise over the oil
temperature to reach 63.2% of the difference between the final rise and initial rise
during a load change. The winding time constant may be estimated from the resistance
cooling curve during thermal tests or calculated by the manufacturer using mass of the
conductor material. The function has the following settings related to winding time
constant.

WdgTmConstMode: This setting is used to select the winding time constant mode of
input to the function. It has three options:
• Standard: Winding time constant is taken from the IEEE or IEC standard as
selected for the temperature calculations.
• User defined: Winding time constant is provided by the user through setting. The
value may be given by the transformer manufacturer.
• Calculated: Winding time constant is calculated by the function based on the
transformer parameters given by the user.

WdgTimeConst1: This setting is used to get the winding time constant for winding 1.
This is used when the WdgTmConstMode setting is selected as User defined.

WdgTimeConst2: This setting is used to get the winding time constant for winding 2.
This is used when the WdgTmConstMode setting is selected as User defined.

WdgTimeConst3: This setting is used to get the winding time constant for winding 3.
This is used when the WdgTmConstMode setting is selected as User defined.

The winding time constant is likely to be in the order of 5 to 20 minutes.

ConductorType: This setting is used to select the winding material between copper and
aluminum. This setting is useful when setting WdgTmConstMode is selected for
calculation. This setting has two options:
• Copper: Winding material is selected as copper.
• Aluminum: Winding material is selected as aluminum.

554 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 17
Monitoring

GUID-5832E7AF-0A4F-4B50-8045-94BF9433A1BF v1

Winding to oil temperature gradient differs from winding to winding depending on

current density in the winding, physical dimensions, cooling system etc., This value
can be between 10 to 20 ̊ C for both distribution and power transformers. For low
current density winding it can be 10 ̊ C and for high current density winding it can be
20 ̊ C. The settings given below are also used for the calculation of winding time
constant.

WdgToOilGrad1: Winding to oil temperature gradient for the winding 1 at rated load.

WdgToOilGrad2: Winding to oil temperature gradient for the winding 2 at rated load.

WdgToOilGrad3: Winding to oil temperature gradient for the winding 3 at rated load.

CuLossW1: This setting is used to set the winding loss at rated load for the winding 1.

CuLossW2: This setting is used to set the winding loss at rated load for the winding 2.

CuLossW3: This setting is used to set the winding loss at rated load for the winding 3.

MassW1: This setting is used to set the mass of the winding 1.

MassW2: This setting is used to set the mass of the winding 2.

MassW3: This setting is used to set the mass of the winding 3.

GUID-8A9D8886-8EE5-4B02-80B8-BDDA95164BFF v1

Loss ratios at different tap positions are required for the calculation of top oil
temperature, especially when the transformer is using online tap changer. This loss
ratio is the ratio between load losses to no-load loss. It may vary from 6 -7 for
distribution transformer and 4-8 for power transformer. Normally it varies from 3 to 11.
The function has the following settings related to loss ratio calculation.

RLRated: This setting is used to set the ratio of load losses to no-load loss at principal
tapping position.

RLHighRated: This setting is used to set the ratio of load losses to no-load loss at
principal tapping +1 position.

RLMaxTap: This setting is used to set the ratio of load losses to no-load loss at
maximum tap position where maximum voltage is possible.

RLMinTap: This setting is used to set the ratio of load losses to no-load loss at
minimum tap position where minimum voltage is possible.

RatedVoltTap: This setting is used to set the position number of tap changer at rated
voltage.

HighVoltTap: This setting is used to set the position number of tap changer at possible
maximum voltage.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 555

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Monitoring

LowVoltTap: This setting is used to set the position number of tap changer at possible
minimum voltage.
GUID-E9EC48CC-08D6-498E-BFB7-6F40AD9436A7 v1

The following settings are required to perform the calculation of top oil temperature
using monthly model of ambient temperature when AMBVALID is low:

JanAmbTmp: This setting is used to set the January month average ambient
temperature.

FebAmbTmp: This setting is used to set the February month average ambient
temperature.

MarchAmbTmp: This setting is used to set the March month average ambient
temperature.

AprilAmbTmp: This setting is used to set the April month average ambient temperature.

MayAmbTmp: This setting is used to set the May month average ambient temperature.

JuneAmbTmp: This setting is used to set the June month average ambient temperature.

JulyAmbTmp: This setting is used to set the July month average ambient temperature.

AugAmbTmp: This setting is used to set the August month average ambient
temperature.

SepAmbTmp: This setting is used to set the September month average ambient
temperature.

OctAmbTmp: This setting is used to set the October month average ambient
temperature.

NovAmbTmp: This setting is used to set the November month average ambient
temperature.

DecAmbTmp: This setting is used to set the December month average ambient
temperature.
GUID-F6960AEE-E0F9-4675-B8F2-A5DD53B10FEA v1

The hot spot temperature calculation is done by estimating the temperature rise
between the hot spot and the top oil. This difference is due to stray losses, local oil
flows and additional paper on conductor. The function has the following settings
related to hot spot to top oil temperature gradient calculation.

HPTmpRiseW1: This setting is used to set the hot spot temperature rise of winding 1
above ambient temperature in K (Kelvin).

HPTmpRiseW2: This setting is used to set the hot spot temperature rise of winding 2
above ambient temperature in K (Kelvin).

556 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 17
Monitoring

HPTmpRiseW3: This setting is used to set the hot spot temperature rise of winding 3
above ambient temperature in K (Kelvin).

TopOilTmpRise: This setting is used to set the top oil temperature rise above ambient
temperature in K (Kelvin).

The above setting values (HPTmpRiseWX and TopOilTmpRise) should

be obtained from the manufacturer based on certified heat run test
reports conducted at maximum rating given in the name plate. The
IEEE C57.91-1995 also recommends assuming a value of 80 °C for a
65 °C average winding rise and a value of 65 °C for a 55 °C average
winding rise on its nameplate, respectively.

RatedCurrW1: This setting is used to set the rated RMS current of winding 1 in A.

RatedCurrW2: This setting is used to set the rated RMS current of winding 2 in A.

RatedCurrW3: This setting is used to set the rated RMS current of winding 3 in A.

CurrTypeTestW1: This setting is used to set the RMS value of the current which is
applied during the type test in A for winding 1.

CurrTypeTestW2: This setting is used to set the RMS value of the current which is
applied during the type test in A for winding 2.

CurrTypeTestW3: This setting is used to set the RMS value of the current which is
applied during the type test in A for winding 3.
GUID-6CB4E94E-1DC9-46DB-ADC0-F86922A8D611 v1

The following settings are required to perform the insulation loss of life calculation:

EnaAgeCalc: This setting is used to enable or disable the transformer insulation loss of
life calculation. It has the following options:
• Enable: Transformer insulation age calculation is enabled.
• Disable: Transformer insulation age calculation is disabled. The function only
calculates up to hot spot temperature and age calculation will not take place.

InitialLife: This setting is used to set the transformer initial insulation loss of life. This
should be set before implementing the function in service. If it is a newly installed
transformer, this setting should be set as zero hours and if it is previously installed
transformer then, the user should predetermine the transformer insulation life
consumed in hours and set it. If the transformer insulation loss of life value will start
from this value and at any time the insulation loss of life value can be reset with this
value by activating LOLRST from local HMI reset menu.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 557

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Monitoring

ExpectedLife: The transformer expected insulation life in hours can be set by this
setting. As per IEEE C57.91-1995 the normal life expectancy at a continuous hot spot
temperature of 110 ̊ C is 180,000 Hours.

AgeingRateMeth: This setting is used to select the method to be used for transformer
insulation relative ageing rate calculation between IEC standard method and IEEE
standard method. It has the following options:
• IEC: Transformer insulation age calculation based on IEC standard method.
• IEEE: Transformer insulation age calculation based on IEEE standard method.

ThermalUpgrade: This setting is used to select the transformer insulation paper type
between thermally upgraded insulation and normal insulation. It has the following
options:
• Upgraded: The function considers the given transformer has thermally upgraded
paper insulation.
• Normal: The function considers the given transformer has normal insulation.

TimeToUpdate: This setting is used to set the time interval for updating the transformer
insulation loss of life calculation outputs LOLINDAY and LOLINYRS. It can be
selected as 1 hour/ 2 hour/ 4 hour/ 8 hour/ 12 hour/ 24 hour depending on user
requirement.
GUID-B170CF21-839E-4246-A607-55A8999FAD07 v1

Two settable warning levels are available for hot spot temperature with separate
outputs. If warning level exceeds for the set time, an alarm is generated.

IEEE C57.96-1995 has suggested maximum temperature limits for the four types of
loading, see table 52.
Table 52: Suggested maximum temperature limits
Type of temperature Normal life Planned loading Long term loading Short term loading
expectancy loading beyond nameplate
rating
Insulated winding 120 130 140 180
hot spot
temperature in °C
Top oil 105 110 110 110
temperature in °C

IEEE standard has also suggested the limits of temperature and load for loads higher
than transformer nameplate.
• For distribution transformers with 65°C hot spot temperature rise:

558 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 17
Monitoring

• Top oil temperature = 120°C

• Hot spot winding temperature = 200°C
• Short-time loading (1/2 h or less) = 300%
• For power transformer with 65°C hot spot temperature rise:
• Top oil temperature = 110°C
• Hot spot winding temperature = 180°C
• Maximum loading = 200%

Settings related to warning and alarm are:

WrnHPTmpLev1: This setting is used to set the level 1 value for hot spot temperature
warning.

WrnHPTmpLev2: This setting is used to set the level 2 value for hot spot temperature
warning. This should be more than the WrnHPTmpLev1 setting.

tDelayToAlarm1: This setting is used to set the time delay for the level 1 hot spot
temperature alarm. This time setting can be less than the winding time constant. For
example if the winding time constant is 420 sec, this setting can be 400 sec.

tDelayToAlarm2: This setting is used to set the time delay for the level 2 hot spot
temperature alarm. This should be less than time setting in tDelayToAlarm1.

17.11.3 Setting example

17.11.3.1 Transformer Rated Data GUID-B3AE440F-CC5E-4742-9483-8D6448A476C8 v1

Table 53: Transformer Rated Data

Parameter Value Note
Frequency 50 Hz
Rated Power 500 MVA / 500 MVA / 20 MVA
Voltage ratio 415 kV / 230 kV / 20 kV
Tap changer ±9 1.67% of 230 kV
Winding 1 rated current 696 A
Winding 2 rated current 1255 A
Winding 3 rated current 577 A
Connection Type YNyn0d1
Cooling ONAF
p.u. Impedance 0.120
At Base 500 MVA
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 559

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Monitoring

Parameter Value Note

CT ratio Winding 1 1000/1 A
CT ratio Winding 2 2000/1 A
CT ratio Winding 3 1000/1 A

17.11.3.2 Setting parameters for insulation loss of life calculation function (LOL1) GUID-6869A06A-4DDC-4FB5-AC56-5463F3709862 v1

Table 54: Setting parameters for insulation loss of life calculation function (LOL1)
Setting Short Description Selected value
Operation Activation of transformer insulation loss Enabled
of life calculation function
TrafoRating Set the transformer rated power of the 500 MVA
function on which the parameters are
selected
TrafoType Select the transformer number of phases Three phase
NoOfWindings Select the transformer number of Three winding
windings
ConstSelection Select the standard from which the IEC
transformer parameters should be taken
CurrSelectMode Select the method for the determination Maximum
of current on which the load factor needs
to be calculated
TempeUnitMode Select the unit of temperature should be °C
used in the function
AvailableCT Select the available CT connections on All windings
the windings
RatedVoltageW1 Set the winding 1 rated nominal voltage 415.0 kV
RatedVoltageW2 Set the winding 2 rated nominal voltage 230.0 kV
RatedVoltageW3 Set the winding 3 rated nominal voltage 20.0 kV
UPerTap Set the voltage increment or decrement 3.84 kV
between two successive tap positions

Tap changer is with

winding 2 and it is
mentioned that
voltage difference
1.67 % of winding 2
rated voltage.

OilTmConstMode Select the transformer oil time constant Standard

mode of input to the function
OilTimeConst Set the transformer oil time constant 9000.0 sec
when the oil time constant mode is
selected as User defined
Table continues on next page

560 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 17
Monitoring

Setting Short Description Selected value

AvgOilTmpRise Set the transformer average oil 45° C
temperature rise for the calculation of oil
time constant
CoilCoreMass Set the transformer coil and core 65.0 t
assembly mass for the calculation of oil
time constant
OilMass Set the transformer oil mass for the 35.0 t
calculation of oil time constant
TankMass Set the transformer tank mass which is 15.0 t
having direct contact with heated oil for
the calculation of oil time constant
LoadLoss Set the rated load loss of the transformer 10.0 MW
for the calculation of oil time constant
TTLoadLoss Set the load loss of the transformer 10.0 MW
arrived from the type test for the
calculation of oil time constant
NoloadLoss Set the rated no-load loss of the 2.0 MW
transformer for the calculation of oil time
constant
TTNoloadLoss Set the no-load loss of the transformer 2.0 MW
arrived from the type test for the
calculation of oil time constant
WdgTmConstMode Select the transformer winding time Standard
constant mode of input to the function
WdgTimeConst1 Set the transformer winding time constant 420.0 sec
for the winding 1 when the winding time
constant mode is selected as User
defined
WdgTimeConst2 Set the transformer winding time constant 420.0 sec
for the winding 2 when the winding time
constant mode is selected as User
defined
WdgTimeConst3 Set the transformer winding time constant 420.0 sec
for the winding 3 when the winding time
constant mode is selected as User
defined
ConductorType Select the transformer winding material Copper
for the winding time constant Calculated
WdgToOilGrad1 Set the transformer winding to oil 20° C
temperature gradient for the winding 1
when the winding time constant mode is
selected as Calculated
WdgToOilGrad2 Set the transformer winding to oil 20° C
temperature gradient for the winding 2
when the winding time constant mode is
selected as Calculated
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 561

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Monitoring

Setting Short Description Selected value

WdgToOilGrad3 Set the transformer winding to oil 20° C
temperature gradient for the winding 3
when the winding time constant mode is
selected as Calculated
CuLossW1 Set the transformer winding loss for the 2.0 MW
winding 1 when the winding time constant
mode is selected as Calculated
CuLossW2 Set the transformer winding loss for the 4.0 MW
winding 2 when the winding time constant
mode is selected as Calculated
CuLossW3 Set the transformer winding loss for the 1.0 MW
winding 3 when the winding time constant
mode is selected as Calculated
MassW1 Set the mass of transformer winding 1 10.0 t
when the winding time constant mode is
selected as Calculated
MassW2 Set the mass of transformer winding 2 10.0 t
when the winding time constant mode is
selected as Calculated
MassW3 Set the mass of transformer winding 3 10.0 t
when the winding time constant mode is
selected as Calculated
RLRated Set the loss ratio at principal tapping 3.0
position for the calculation of ratio loss at
the given tap position
RLHighRated Set the loss ratio at principal tapping +1 5.0
position for the calculation of ratio loss at
the given tap position
RLMaxTap Set the loss ratio at maximum tapping 8.0
position where maximum voltage is
possible for the calculation of ratio loss at
the given tap position
RLMinTap Set the loss ratio at minimum tapping 11.0
position where minimum voltage is
possible for the calculation of ratio loss at
the given tap position
RatedVoltTap Set the rated voltage tap position number 10
HighVoltTap Set the tap position number where 19
maximum voltage is possible
LowVoltTap Set the tap position number where 1
minimum voltage is possible
JanAmbTmp Set the January month average ambient 30° C
temperature for the calculation of top oil
temperature when ambient temperature
sensor failure/absence
FebAmbTmp Set the February month average ambient 30° C
temperature for the calculation of top oil
temperature when ambient temperature
sensor failure/absence
Table continues on next page

562 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 17
Monitoring

Setting Short Description Selected value

MarchAmbTmp Set the March month average ambient 30° C
temperature for the calculation of top oil
temperature when ambient temperature
sensor failure/absence
AprilAmbTmp Set the April month average ambient 30° C
temperature for the calculation of top oil
temperature when ambient temperature
sensor failure/absence
MayAmbTmp Set the May month average ambient 30° C
temperature for the calculation of top oil
temperature when ambient temperature
sensor failure/absence
JuneAmbTmp Set the June month average ambient 30° C
temperature for the calculation of top oil
temperature when ambient temperature
sensor failure/absence
JulyAmbTmp Set the July month average ambient 30° C
temperature for the calculation of top oil
temperature when ambient temperature
sensor failure/absence
AugAmbTmp Set the August month average ambient 30° C
temperature for the calculation of top oil
temperature when ambient temperature
sensor failure/absence
SepAmbTmp Set the September month average 30° C
ambient temperature for the calculation of
top oil temperature when ambient
temperature sensor failure/absence
OctAmbTmp Set the October month average ambient 30° C
temperature for the calculation of top oil
temperature when ambient temperature
sensor failure/absence
NovAmbTmp Set the November month average 30° C
ambient temperature for the calculation of
top oil temperature when ambient
temperature sensor failure/absence
DecAmbTmp Set the December month average 30° C
ambient temperature for the calculation of
top oil temperature when ambient
temperature sensor failure/absence
HPTmpRiseW1 Set the hot spot temperature rise of 65° C
winding 1 for the calculation of hot spot to
top oil temperature gradient
HPTmpRiseW2 Set the hot spot temperature rise of 65° C
winding 2 for the calculation of hot spot to
top oil temperature gradient
HPTmpRiseW3 Set the hot spot temperature rise of 65° C
winding 3 for the calculation of hot spot to
top oil temperature gradient
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 563

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Monitoring

Setting Short Description Selected value

TopOilTmpRise Set the top oil temperature rise for the 55° C
calculation of hot spot to top oil
temperature gradient
RatedCurrW1 Set the rated current of the winding 1 696.0 A
RatedCurrW2 Set the rated current of the winding 2 1255.0 A
RatedCurrW3 Set the rated current of the winding 3 577.0 A
CurrTypeTestW1 Set the current applied to the winding 1 696.0 A
during type test
CurrTypeTestW2 Set the current applied to the winding 2 1255.0 A
during type test
CurrTypeTestW3 Set the current applied to the winding 3 577.0 A
during type test
EnaAgeCalc Enable the transformer insulation loss of Enable
life calculation
InitialLife Set the initial loss of insulation life 0.0 Hours
ExpectedLife Set the expected life of the transformer 1, 80,000 Hours
AgeingRateMeth Select the ageing rate method of IEC
calculation
ThermalUpgrade Select the transformer insulation paper Upgraded
type
TimeToUpdate Set the time interval for the update of loss 1 Hour
of life outputs
WrnHPTmpLev1 Set the hot spot temperature value for the 110° C
level 1 warning
WrnHPTmpLev2 Set the hot spot temperature value for the 120° C
level 2 warning
tDelayToAlarm1 Set the time delay for the alarm level 1 1800 sec
tDelayToAlarm2 Set the time delay for the alarm level 2 900 sec

564 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 18
Metering

Section 18 Metering

18.1 Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT IP14600-1 v3

18.1.1 Identification
M14879-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT -

S00947 V1 EN-US

18.1.2 Application M13395-3 v6

Pulse-counter logic (PCFCNT) function counts externally generated binary pulses, for
instance pulses coming from an external energy meter, for calculation of energy
consumption values. The pulses are captured by the binary input module (BIM), and
read by the PCFCNT function. The number of pulses in the counter is then reported via
the station bus to the substation automation system or read via the station monitoring
system as a service value. When using IEC 61850–8–1, a scaled service value is
available over the station bus.

The normal use for this function is the counting of energy pulses from external energy
meters. An optional number of inputs from an arbitrary input module in IED can be
used for this purpose with a frequency of up to 40 Hz. The pulse-counter logic
PCFCNT can also be used as a general purpose counter.

18.1.3 Setting guidelines M13396-4 v9

Parameters that can be set individually for each pulse counter from PCM600:

• Operation: Disabled/Enabled
• tReporting: 0-3600s
• EventMask: NoEvents/ReportEvents

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 565

Application manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Metering

Configuration of inputs and outputs of PCFCNT is made via PCM600.

On the Binary input module (BIM), the debounce filter default time is set to 1 ms, that
is, the counter suppresses pulses with a pulse length less than 1 ms. The input
oscillation blocking frequency is preset to 40 Hz meaning that the counter detects the
input to oscillate if the input frequency is greater than 40 Hz. Oscillation suppression is
released at 30 Hz. Block/release values for oscillation can be changed on the local HMI
and PCM600 under Main menu/Configuration/I/O modules.

The setting is common for all input channels on BIM, that is, if limit
changes are made for inputs not connected to the pulse counter, the
setting also influences the inputs on the same board used for pulse
counting.

18.2 Function for energy calculation and demand handling

ETPMMTR SEMOD153638-1 v2

18.2.1 Identification
SEMOD175537-2 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Function for energy calculation and ETPMMTR W_Varh -
demand handling

18.2.2 Application SEMOD175546-4 v5

Energy calculation and demand handling function (ETPMMTR) is intended for

statistics of the forward and reverse active and reactive energy. It has a high accuracy
basically given by the measurements function (CVMMXN). This function has a site
calibration possibility to further increase the total accuracy.

The function is connected to the instantaneous outputs of (CVMMXN) as shown in

figure 217.

566 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 18
Metering

ETPMMTR
CVMMXN
P_ INST P

Q_ INST Q

STARTACC

STOPACC

RSTACC

RSTDMD

IEC130 00190-2-en.vsdx
IEC13000190 V2 EN-US

Figure 217: Connection of energy calculation and demand handling function

ETPMMTR to the measurements function (CVMMXN)

The energy values can be read through communication in MWh and MVArh in
monitoring tool of PCM600 and/or alternatively the values can be presented on the
local HMI. The local HMI graphical display is configured with PCM600 Graphical
Display Editor tool (GDE) with a measuring value which is selected to the active and
reactive component as preferred. Also all Accumulated Active Forward, Active
Reverse, Reactive Forward and Reactive Reverse energy values can be presented.

Maximum demand values are presented in MWh or MVArh in the same way.

Alternatively, the energy values can be presented with use of the pulse counters
function (PCGGIO). The output energy values are scaled with the pulse output setting
values EAFAccPlsQty, EARAccPlsQty, ERFAccPlsQty and ERVAccPlsQty of the
energy metering function and then the pulse counter can be set-up to present the correct
values by scaling in this function. Pulse counter values can then be presented on the
local HMI in the same way and/or sent to the SA (Substation Automation) system
through communication where the total energy then is calculated by summation of the
energy pulses. This principle is good for very high values of energy as the saturation of
numbers else will limit energy integration to about one year with 50 kV and 3000 A.
After that the accumulation will start on zero again.

18.2.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD175556-4 v6

The parameters are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

The following settings can be done for the energy calculation and demand handling
function ETPMMTR:

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
IBase, VBase and SBase as applicable.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 567

Application manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Metering

Operation: Disabled/Enabled

EnaAcc: Disabled/Enabled is used to switch the accumulation of energy on and off.

tEnergy: Time interval when energy is measured.

tEnergyOnPls: gives the pulse length ON time of the pulse. It should be at least 100 ms
when connected to the Pulse counter function block. Typical value can be 100 ms.

tEnergyOffPls: gives the OFF time between pulses. Typical value can be 100 ms.

EAFAccPlsQty and EARAccPlsQty: gives the MWh value in each pulse. It should be
selected together with the setting of the Pulse counter (PCGGIO) settings to give the
correct total pulse value.

ERFAccPlsQty and ERVAccPlsQty : gives the MVArh value in each pulse. It should be
selected together with the setting of the Pulse counter (PCGGIO) settings to give the
correct total pulse value.

For the advanced user there are a number of settings for direction, zero clamping, max
limit, and so on. Normally, the default values are suitable for these parameters.

568 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 19
Ethernet-based communication

Section 19 Ethernet-based communication

19.1 Access point

19.1.1 Application GUID-2942DF07-9BC1-4F49-9611-A5691D2C925C v1

The access points are used to connect the IED to the communication buses (like the
station bus) that use communication protocols. The access point can be used for single
and redundant data communication. The access points are also used for communication
with the merging units and for time synchronization using Precision Time Protocol
(PTP).

19.1.2 Setting guidelines GUID-CEDC23B1-09F6-4C85-98D8-9D8E2C2553FE v1

The physical ports allocated to access points 2–6 have to be added in

the hardware tool in PCM600 before the access points can be
configured. The factory setting only includes the physical ports
allocated to the front port and access point 1.

The settings for the access points are configured using the Ethernet configuration tool
(ECT) in PCM600.

The access point is activated if the Operation checkbox is checked for the respective
access point and a partial or common write to IED is performed.

To increase security, it is recommended to deactivate the access point

when it is not in use.

Redundancy and PTP cannot be set for the front port (Access point 0) as redundant
communication and PTP are only available for the rear optical Ethernet ports.

Subnetwork shows the SCL subnetwork to which the access point is connected. This
column shows the SCL subnetworks available in the PCM600 project. SCL
subnetworks can be created/deleted in the Subnetworks tab of IEC 61850
Configuration tool in PCM600.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 569

Application manual
Section 19 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Ethernet-based communication

When saving the ECT configuration after selecting a subnetwork, ECT

creates the access point in the SCL model. Unselecting the subnetwork
removes the access point from the SCL model. This column is editable
for IEC61850 Ed2 IEDs and not editable for IEC61850 Ed1 IEDs
because in IEC61850 Ed1 only one access point can be modelled in
SCL.

The IP address can be set in IP address. ECT validates the value, the access points
have to be on separate subnetworks.

The subnetwork mask can be set in Subnet mask. This field will be updated to the SCL
model based on the Subnetwork selection.

To select which communication protocols can be run on the respective access points,
check or uncheck the check box for the relevant protocol. The protocols are not
activated/deactivated in ECT, only filtered for the specific access point. For
information on how to activate the individual communication protocols, see the
communication protocol chapters.

To increase security it is recommended to uncheck protocols that are

not used on the access point.

The default gateway can be selected by entering the IP address in Default gateway. The
default gateway is the router that is used to communicate with the devices in the other
subnetwork. By default this is set to 0.0.0.0 which means that no default gateway is
selected. ECT validates the entered value, but the default gateway has to be in the same
subnetwork as the access point. The default gateway is the router that is being used as
default, that is when no route has been set up for the destination. If communication
with a device in another subnetwork is needed, a route has to be set up. For more
information on routes, see the Routes chapter in the Technical manual and the
Application manual.

DHCP can be activated for the front port from the LHMI in Main menu/
Configuration/Communication/Ethernet configuration/Front port/DHCP:1

570 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 19
Ethernet-based communication

19.2 Redundant communication

19.2.1 Identification
GUID-B7AE0374-0336-42B8-90AF-3AE1C79A4116 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
IEC 62439-3 Parallel redundancy PRP - -
protocol
IEC 62439-3 High-availability seamless HSR - -
redundancy
Access point diagnostic for redundant RCHLCCH - -
Ethernet ports

19.2.2 Application GUID-172BA5D7-6532-4B0D-8C1D-2E02F70B4FCB v1

Dynamic access point diagnostic (RCHLCCH) is used to supervise and assure

redundant Ethernet communication over two channels. This will secure data transfer
even though one communication channel might not be available for some reason

Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) and High-availability Seamless Redundancy

(HSR) provides redundant communication over station bus running the available
communication protocols. The redundant communication uses two Ethernet ports.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 571

Application manual
Section 19 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Ethernet-based communication

Device 1 Device 2

AP1 AP1
PhyPortA PhyPortB PhyPortA PhyPortB

Switch A Switch B

PhyPortA PhyPortB PhyPortA PhyPortB

AP1 AP1

Device 3 Device 4

IEC09000758-4-en.vsd
IEC09000758 V4 EN-US

Figure 218: Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP)

572 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 19
Ethernet-based communication

Device 1 Device 2

AP1 AP1
PhyPortA PhyPortB PhyPortA PhyPortB

PhyPortB PhyPortA PhyPortB PhyPortA

AP1 AP1

Device 3 Device 4

IEC16000038-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000038 V1 EN-US

Figure 219: High-availability Seamless Redundancy (HSR)

19.2.3 Setting guidelines GUID-887B0AE2-0F2E-414D-96FD-7EC935C5D2D8 v1

Redundant communication is configured with the Ethernet configuration tool in

PCM600.

Redundancy: redundant communication is activated when the parameter is set to

PRP-0, PRP-1 or HSR. The settings for the next access point will be hidden and
PhyPortB will show the second port information. Redundant communication is
activated after a common write to IED is done.

PRP-1 should be used primarily, PRP-0 is intended only for use in existing PRP-
networks. PRP-1 and HSR can be combined in a mixed network.

If the access point is not taken into operation, the write option in Ethernet
Configuration Tool can be used to activate the access point.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 573

Application manual
Section 19 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Ethernet-based communication

IEC16000039-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000039 V1 EN-US

Figure 220: ECT screen with Redundancy set to PRP-1 on Access point 1 and
HSR Access point 3

19.3 Merging unit

19.3.1 Application GUID-E630C16F-EDB8-40AE-A8A2-94189982D15F v1

The IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE process bus communication protocol enables an IED to

communicate with devices providing measured values in digital format, commonly
known as Merging Units (MU). The rear access points are used for the communication.

The merging units (MU) are called so because they can gather analog values from one
or more measuring transformers, sample the data and send the data over process bus to
other clients (or subscribers) in the system. Some merging units are able to get data
from classical measuring transformers, others from non-conventional measuring
transducers and yet others can pick up data from both types.

574 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 19
Ethernet-based communication

IEC17000044-1-en.vsdx
IEC17000044 V1 EN-US

Figure 221: Merging unit

19.3.2 Setting guidelines GUID-3449AB24-8C9D-4D9A-BD46-5DDF59A0F8E3 v1

For information on the merging unit setting guidelines, see section IEC/UCA
61850-9-2LE communication protocol.

19.4 Routes

19.4.1 Application GUID-19616AC4-0FFD-4FF4-9198-5E33938E5ABD v1

Setting up a route enables communication to a device that is located in another

subnetwork. Routing is used when the destination device is not in the same subnetwork
as the default gateway.

The route specifies that when a package is sent to the destination device it should be
sent through the selected router. If no route is specified the source device will not find
the destination device.

19.4.2 Setting guidelines GUID-2C4A312A-00DC-44C8-B2D9-CD0822E1C806 v1

Routes are configured using the Ethernet configuration tool in PCM600.

Operation for the route can be set to On/Off by checking and unchecking the check-
box in the operation column.

Gateway specifies the address of the gateway.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 575

Application manual
Section 19 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Ethernet-based communication

Destination specifies the destination.

Destination subnet mask specifies the subnetwork mask of the destination.

576 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 20
Station communication

Section 20 Station communication

20.1 Communication protocols M14815-3 v13

Each IED is provided with several communication interfaces enabling it to connect to

one or many substation level systems or equipment, either on the Substation
Automation (SA) bus or Substation Monitoring (SM) bus.

Available communication protocols are:

• IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

• LON communication protocol
• SPA communication protocol
• IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
• DNP 3.0 communication protocol
• C37.118 communication protocol

Several protocols can be combined in the same IED.

20.2 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol IP14616-1 v2

20.2.1 Application IEC 61850-8-1 IP14865-1 v2

M13912-3 v4

IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol allows vertical communication to HSI clients

and allows horizontal communication between two or more intelligent electronic
devices (IEDs) from one or several vendors to exchange information and to use it in
the performance of their functions and for correct co-operation.

GOOSE (Generic Object Oriented Substation Event), which is a part of IEC 61850–8–
1 standard, allows the IEDs to communicate state and control information amongst
themselves, using a publish-subscribe mechanism. That is, upon detecting an event, the
IED(s) use a multi-cast transmission to notify those devices that have registered to
receive the data. An IED can, by publishing a GOOSE message, report its status. It can
also request a control action to be directed at any device in the network.
M13913-3 v6

Figure 222 shows the topology of an IEC 61850–8–1 configuration. IEC 61850–8–1
specifies only the interface to the substation LAN. The LAN itself is left to the system
integrator.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 577

Application manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Station communication

Engineering
Station HSI
Workstation Gateway
Base System
SMS
CC

Printer

IED IED IED IED IED IED IED IED IED

1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

KIOSK 1 KIOSK 2 KIOSK 3

IEC09000135_en.v
sd
IEC09000135 V1 EN-US

Figure 222: SA system with IEC 61850–8–1

M16925-3 v4

Figure223 shows the GOOSE peer-to-peer communication.

578 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 20
Station communication

Station HSI
MicroSCADA
Gateway

GOOSE

IED IED IED IED IED

A A A A A

Control Protection Control and protection Control Protection

en05000734.vsd
IEC05000734 V1 EN-US

Figure 223: Example of a broadcasted GOOSE message

20.2.2 Setting guidelines SEMOD55317-5 v7

There are two settings related to the IEC 61850–8–1 protocol:

Operation: User can set IEC 61850 communication to Enabled or Disabled.

GOOSEPortEd1: Selection of the Ethernet link where GOOSE traffic shall be sent and
received. This is only valid for Edition 1 and can be ignored if Edition 2 is used. For
Edition 2, the Ethernet link selection is done with the Ethernet Configuration Tool
(ECT) in PCM600.

20.2.3 Horizontal communication via GOOSE

20.2.3.1 Sending data GUID-9888ECAD-8221-4B31-A443-EB1E3A9022C4 v1

In addition to the data object and data attributes of the logical nodes, it is possible to
send the outputs of the function blocks using the generic communication blocks. The
outputs of this function can be set in a dataset and be sent in a GOOSE Control Block
to other subscriber IEDs. There are different function blocks for different type of
sending data.

Generic communication function for Single Point indication SPGAPC,

SP16GAPC SEMOD55999-1 v4

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 579

Application manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Station communication

Application SEMOD55350-5 v8

Generic communication function for Single Point Value (SPGAPC) function is used to
send one single logical output to other systems or equipment in the substation.
SP16GAPC can be used to send up to 16 single point values from the application
functions running in the same cycle time. SPGAPC has one visible input and
SPGAPC16 has 16 visible inputs that should be connected in the ACT tool.

Setting guidelines SEMOD55376-5 v5

There are no settings available for the user for SPGAPC.

Generic communication function for Measured Value MVGAPC SEMOD55402-1 v3

Application SEMOD55872-5 v10

Generic communication function for measured values (MVGAPC) function is used to

send the instantaneous value of an analog signal to other systems or equipment in the
substation. It can also be used inside the same IED, to attach a RANGE aspect to an
analog value and to permit measurement supervision on that value.

Setting guidelines SEMOD55424-5 v5

The settings available for Generic communication function for Measured Value
(MVGAPC) function allows the user to choose a deadband and a zero deadband for the
monitored signal. Values within the zero deadband are considered as zero.

The high and low limit settings provides limits for the high-high-, high, normal, low
and low-low ranges of the measured value. The actual range of the measured value is
shown on the range output of MVGAPC function block. When a Measured value
expander block (RANGE_XP) is connected to the range output, the logical outputs of
the RANGE_XP are changed accordingly.

20.2.3.2 Receiving data GUID-CAE4B020-7131-49BF-BA29-3EEE0EFEA2B8 v1

The GOOSE data must be received at function blocks. There are different GOOSE
receiving function blocks depending on the type of the received data. Refer to the
Engineering manual for more information about how to configure GOOSE.
Function block type Data Type
GOOSEBINRCV 16 single point
GOOSEINTLKRCV 2 single points
16 double points
GOOSEDPRCV Double point
GOOSEINTRCV Integer
GOOSEMVRCV Analog value
Table continues on next page

580 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 20
Station communication

Function block type Data Type

GOOSESPRCV Single point
GOOSEVCTRRCV VCTR signals parallel mode
GOOSEXLNRCV Switch status

Application GUID-808177B7-02CA-40DF-B41B-8B580E38478B v1

The GOOSE receive function blocks are used to receive subscribed data from the
GOOSE protocol. The validity of the data value is exposed as outputs of the function
block as well as the validity of the communication. It is recommended to use these
outputs to ensure that only valid data is handled on the subscriber IED. An example
could be to control the external reservation before operating on a bay. In the figure
below, the GOOSESPRCV is used to receive the status of the bay reservation. The
validity of the received data is used in additional logic to guarantee that the value has
good quality before operation on that bay.

GOOSESPRCV AND AND

Block Spout Input1 out Input1 out

Ext_Res_OK_To_Operate
DataValid Input2 Noput Input2 Noput
CommValid Input3 Input3
Test Input4 Input4
IEC16000082=1=en.vsd
IEC16000082 V1 EN-US

Figure 224: GOOSESPRCV and AND function blocks - checking the validity of the
received data

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 581

Application manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Station communication

20.3 LON communication protocol IP14420-1 v1

20.3.1 Application IP14863-1 v1

M14804-3 v5

Station HSI Control Center

MicroSCADA

Gateway

Star coupler
RER 111

IED IED IED

IEC05000663-1-en.vsd
IEC05000663 V2 EN-US

Figure 225: Example of LON communication structure for a substation automation

system

An optical network can be used within the substation automation system. This enables
communication with the IEDs through the LON bus from the operator’s workplace,
from the control center and also from other IEDs via bay-to-bay horizontal
communication. For LON communication an SLM card should be ordered for the
IEDs.

The fibre optic LON bus is implemented using either glass core or plastic core fibre
optic cables.
Table 55: Specification of the fibre optic connectors
Glass fibre Plastic fibre
Cable connector ST-connector snap-in connector
Cable diameter 62.5/125 m 1 mm
Max. cable length 1000 m 10 m
Table continues on next page

582 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 20
Station communication

Glass fibre Plastic fibre

Wavelength 820-900 nm 660 nm
Transmitted power -13 dBm (HFBR-1414) -13 dBm (HFBR-1521)
Receiver sensitivity -24 dBm (HFBR-2412) -20 dBm (HFBR-2521)

The LON Protocol M14804-32 v2

The LON protocol is specified in the LonTalkProtocol Specification Version 3 from

Echelon Corporation. This protocol is designed for communication in control networks
and is a peer-to-peer protocol where all the devices connected to the network can
communicate with each other directly. For more information of the bay-to-bay
communication, refer to the section Multiple command function.

Hardware and software modules M14804-35 v4

The hardware needed for applying LON communication depends on the application,
but one very central unit needed is the LON Star Coupler and optical fibres connecting
the star coupler to the IEDs. To interface the IEDs from the MicroSCADA with Classic
Monitor, application library LIB520 is required.

The HV Control 670 software module is included in the LIB520 high-voltage process
package, which is a part of the Application Software Library in MicroSCADA
applications.

The HV Control 670 software module is used for control functions in the IEDs. The
module contains a process picture, dialogues and a tool to generate a process database
for the control application in MicroSCADA.

When using MicroSCADA Monitor Pro instead of the Classic Monitor, SA LIB is used
together with 670 series Object Type files.

The HV Control 670 software module and 670 series Object Type files
are used with both 650 and 670 series IEDs.

Use the LON Network Tool (LNT) to set the LON communication. This is a software
tool applied as one node on the LON bus. To communicate via LON, the IEDs need to
know
• The node addresses of the other connected IEDs.
• The network variable selectors to be used.

This is organized by LNT.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 583

Application manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Station communication

The node address is transferred to LNT via the local HMI by setting the parameter
ServicePinMsg = Yes. The node address is sent to LNT via the LON bus, or LNT can
scan the network for new nodes.

The communication speed of the LON bus is set to the default of 1.25 Mbit/s. This can
be changed by LNT.

20.3.2 MULTICMDRCV and MULTICMDSND SEMOD119881-1 v3

20.3.2.1 Identification
GUID-1A6E066C-6399-4D37-8CA5-3074537E48B2 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Multiple command and receive MULTICMDRCV - -
Multiple command and send MULTICMDSND - -

20.3.2.2 Application M14790-3 v5

The IED provides two function blocks enabling several IEDs to send and receive
signals via the interbay bus. The sending function block, MULTICMDSND, takes 16
binary inputs. LON enables these to be transmitted to the equivalent receiving function
block, MULTICMDRCV, which has 16 binary outputs.

20.3.2.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD119915-1 v1

Settings M14789-4 v3

The parameters for the multiple command function are set via PCM600.

The Mode setting sets the outputs to either a Steady or Pulsed mode.

20.4 SPA communication protocol IP14614-1 v1

20.4.1 Application IP14785-1 v1

SEMOD115767-5 v6

SPA communication protocol is an alternative to IEC 60870-5-103, and they use the
same rear communication port.

584 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 20
Station communication

When communicating with a PC connected to the utility substation LAN via WAN and
the utility office LAN (see Figure 226), and when using the rear optical Ethernet port,
the only hardware required for a station monitoring system is:

• Optical fibres from the IED to the utility substation LAN

• PC connected to the utility office LAN

Utility LAN
Remote
monitoring
WAN

Substation LAN

IED IED IED

ANSI05000715-4-en.vsd

ANSI05000715 V4 EN-US

Figure 226: SPA communication structure for a remote monitoring system via a
substation LAN, WAN and utility LAN

SPA communication is mainly used for the Station Monitoring System. It can include
different IEDs with remote communication possibilities. Connection to a PC can be
made directly (if the PC is located in the substation), via a telephone modem through a
telephone network with ITU (former CCITT) characteristics or via a LAN/WAN
connection.

glass <1000 m according to optical budget

plastic <25 m (inside cubicle) according to optical budget

Functionality SEMOD115767-25 v2

The SPA protocol V2.5 is an ASCII-based protocol for serial communication. The
communication is based on a master-slave principle, where the IED is a slave and the
PC is the master. Only one master can be applied on each fibre optic loop. A program
is required in the master computer for interpretation of the SPA-bus codes and for
translation of the data that should be sent to the IED.

For the specification of the SPA protocol V2.5, refer to SPA-bus Communication
Protocol V2.5.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 585

Application manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Station communication

20.4.2 Setting guidelines M11876-3 v6

SPA, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP3 use the same rear communication port. This port can
be set for SPA use on the local HMI under Main menu /Configuration /
Communication /Station communication/Port configuration/SLM optical serial
port/PROTOCOL:1. When the communication protocol is selected, the IED is
automatically restarted, and the port then operates as a SPA port.

The SPA communication setting parameters are set on the local HMI under Main
menu/Configuration/Communication/Station communication/SPA/SPA:1.

The most important SPA communication setting parameters are SlaveAddress and
BaudRate. They are essential for all communication contact to the IED. SlaveAddress
and BaudRate can be set only on the local HMI for rear and front channel
communication.

SlaveAddress can be set to any value between 1–899 as long as the slave number is
unique within the used SPA loop. BaudRate (communication speed) can be set between
300–38400 baud. BaudRate should be the same for the whole station although different
communication speeds in a loop are possible. If different communication speeds are
used in the same fibre optical loop or RS485 network, take this into account when
making the communication setup in the communication master (the PC).

With local fibre optic communication, communication speed is usually set to 19200 or
38400 baud. With telephone communication, the speed setting depends on the quality
of the connection and the type of modem used. Refer to technical data to determine the
rated communication speed for the selected communication interfaces.

The IED does not adapt its speed to the actual communication
conditions because the communication speed is set on the local HMI.

586 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 20
Station communication

20.5 IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol IP14615-1 v2

20.5.1 Application IP14864-1 v1

M17109-3 v6

TCP/IP

Control
Station Center
HSI

Gateway

Star coupler

IED IED IED

ANSI05000660-4-en.vsd
ANSI05000660 V4 EN-US

Figure 227: Example of IEC 60870-5-103 communication structure for a substation

automation system

IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol is mainly used when a protection IED

communicates with a third party control or monitoring system. This system must have
software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.

When communicating locally in the station using a Personal Computer (PC) or a

Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) connected to the Communication and processing
module, the only hardware needed is optical fibres and an opto/electrical converter for
the PC/RTU, or a RS-485 connection depending on the used IED communication
interface.

20.5.1.1 Functionality M17109-38 v3

IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial

communication exchanging information with a control system. In IEC terminology a
primary station is a master and a secondary station is a slave. The communication is
based on a point-to-point principle. The master must have software that can interpret

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 587

Application manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Station communication

the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages. For detailed information about IEC
60870-5-103, refer to IEC 60870 standard part 5: Transmission protocols, and to the
section 103, Companion standard for the informative interface of protection equipment.

20.5.1.2 Design M17109-41 v1

General M17109-43 v2

The protocol implementation consists of the following functions:

• Event handling
• Report of analog service values (measurands)
• Fault location
• Command handling
• Autorecloser ON/OFF
• Teleprotection ON/OFF
• Protection ON/OFF
• LED reset
• Characteristics 1 - 4 (Setting groups)
• File transfer (disturbance files)
• Time synchronization

Hardware M17109-59 v1

When communicating locally with a Personal Computer (PC) or a Remote Terminal

Unit (RTU) in the station, using the SPA/IEC port, the only hardware needed is:·
Optical fibres, glass/plastic· Opto/electrical converter for the PC/RTU· PC/RTU

Commands M17109-62 v4

The commands defined in the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol are represented in dedicated
function blocks. These blocks have output signals for all available commands
according to the protocol. For more information, refer to the Communication protocol
manual, IEC 60870-5-103.

• IED commands in control direction

Function block with defined IED functions in control direction, I103IEDCMD. This
block use PARAMETR as FUNCTION TYPE, and INFORMATION NUMBER
parameter is defined for each output signal.

• Function commands in control direction

588 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 20
Station communication

Function block with pre-defined functions in control direction, I103CMD. This block
includes the FUNCTION TYPE parameter, and the INFORMATION NUMBER
parameter is defined for each output signal.

• Function commands in control direction

Function block with user defined functions in control direction, I103UserCMD. These
function blocks include the FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in the private
range, and the INFORMATION NUMBER parameter for each output signal.

Status M17109-74 v6

Measurands M17109-99 v2

The measurands can be included as type 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4 and type 9 according to the
standard.

• Measurands in public range

Function block that reports all valid measuring types depending on connected signals,
I103Meas.

• Measurands in private range

Function blocks with user defined input measurands in monitor direction,

I103MeasUsr. These function blocks include the FUNCTION TYPE parameter for
each block in the private range, and the INFORMATION NUMBER parameter for
each block.

Fault location M17109-108 v1

The fault location is expressed in reactive ohms. In relation to the line length in
reactive ohms, it gives the distance to the fault in percent. The data is available and
reported when the fault locator function is included in the IED.

Disturbance recordings M17109-111 v9

• The transfer functionality is based on the Disturbance recorder function. The

analog and binary signals recorded will be reported to the master by polling. The
eight last disturbances that are recorded are available for transfer to the master. A
file that has been transferred and acknowledged by the master cannot be
transferred again.
• The binary signals that are included in the disturbance recorder are those that are
connected to the disturbance function blocks B1RBDR to B22RBDR. These
function blocks include the function type and the information number for each
signal. For more information on the description of the Disturbance report in the
Technical reference manual. The analog channels, that are reported, are those

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 589

Application manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Station communication

connected to the disturbance function blocks A1RADR to A4RADR. The eight

first ones belong to the public range and the remaining ones to the private range.

20.5.2 Settings M17109-116 v1

20.5.2.1 Settings for RS485 and optical serial communication M17109-118 v12

General settings
SPA, DNP and IEC 60870-5-103 can be configured to operate on the SLM optical
serial port while DNP and IEC 60870-5-103 additionally can utilize the RS485 port. A
single protocol can be active on a given physical port at any time.

Two different areas in the HMI are used to configure the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol.

1. The port specific IEC 60870-5-103 protocol parameters are configured under:
Main menu/Configuration/Communication/Station Communication/
IEC60870-5-103/
• <config-selector>
• SlaveAddress
• BaudRate
• RevPolarity (optical channel only)
• CycMeasRepTime
• MasterTimeDomain
• TimeSyncMode
• EvalTimeAccuracy
• EventRepMode
• CmdMode
• RepIntermediatePos
<config-selector> is:
• “OPTICAL103:1” for the optical serial channel on the SLM
• “RS485103:1” for the RS485 port
2. The protocol to activate on a physical port is selected under:
Main menu/Configuration/Communication/Station Communication/Port
configuration/
• RS485 port
• RS485PROT:1 (off, DNP, IEC103)
• SLM optical serial port
• PROTOCOL:1 (off, DNP, IEC103, SPA)

590 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 20
Station communication

GUID-CD4EB23C-65E7-4ED5-AFB1-A9D5E9EE7CA8 V3 EN
GUID-CD4EB23C-65E7-4ED5-AFB1-A9D5E9EE7CA8 V3 EN-US

Figure 228: Settings for IEC 60870-5-103 communication

The general settings for IEC 60870-5-103 communication are the following:
• SlaveAddress and BaudRate: Settings for slave number and communication speed
(baud rate).
The slave number can be set to any value between 1 and 254. The communication
speed, can be set either to 9600 bits/s or 19200 bits/s.
• RevPolarity: Setting for inverting the light (or not). Standard IEC 60870-5-103
setting is Enabled.
• CycMeasRepTime: See I103MEAS function block for more information.
• EventRepMode: Defines the mode for how events are reported. The event buffer
size is 1000 events.

Event reporting mode

If EventRepMode = SeqOfEvent, all GI and spontaneous events will be delivered in the
order they were generated by BSW. The most recent value is the latest value delivered.
All GI data from a single block will come from the same cycle.

If EventRepMode = HiPriSpont, spontaneous events will be delivered prior to GI

event. To prevent old GI data from being delivered after a new spontaneous event, the
pending GI event is modified to contain the same value as the spontaneous event. As a
result, the GI dataset is not time-correlated.

20.5.2.2 Settings from PCM600 M17109-132 v2

I103USEDEF GUID-A41170D6-2846-4E5E-8B7F-85B53D4EF6B6 v1

For each input of the I103USEDEF function there is a setting for the information
number of the connected signal. The information number can be set to any value
between 0 and 255. To get proper operation of the sequence of events the event masks
in the event function is to be set to ON_CHANGE. For single-command signals, the
event mask is to be set to ON_SET.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 591

Application manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Station communication

In addition there is a setting on each event block for function type. Refer to description
of the Main Function type set on the local HMI.

Commands M17109-138 v2

As for the commands defined in the protocol there is a dedicated function block with
eight output signals. Use PCM600 to configure these signals. To realize the
BlockOfInformation command, which is operated from the local HMI, the output
BLKINFO on the IEC command function block ICOM has to be connected to an input
on an event function block. This input must have the information number 20 (monitor
direction blocked) according to the standard.

Disturbance Recordings M17109-141 v8

For each input of the Disturbance recorder function there is a setting for the
information number of the connected signal. The function type and the information
number can be set to any value between 0 and 255. To get INF and FUN for the
recorded binary signals, there are parameters on the disturbance recorder for each
input. The user must set these parameters to whatever he connects to the corresponding
input.

Refer to description of Main Function type set on the local HMI.

Recorded analog channels are sent with ASDU26 and ASDU31. One information
element in these ASDUs is called ACC, and it indicates the actual channel to be
processed. The channels on disturbance recorder are sent with an ACC as shown in
Table 56.
Table 56: Channels on disturbance recorder sent with a given ACC
DRA#-Input ACC IEC103 meaning
1 1 IA
2 2 IB
3 3 IC
4 4 IG
5 5 VA
6 6 VB
7 7 VC
8 8 VG
9 64 Private range
10 65 Private range
11 66 Private range
12 67 Private range
13 68 Private range
14 69 Private range
Table continues on next page

592 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 20
Station communication

DRA#-Input ACC IEC103 meaning

15 70 Private range
16 71 Private range
17 72 Private range
18 73 Private range
19 74 Private range
20 75 Private range
21 76 Private range
22 77 Private range
23 78 Private range
24 79 Private range
25 80 Private range
26 81 Private range
27 82 Private range
28 83 Private range
29 84 Private range
30 85 Private range
31 86 Private range
32 87 Private range
33 88 Private range
34 89 Private range
35 90 Private range
36 91 Private range
37 92 Private range
38 93 Private range
39 94 Private range
40 95 Private range

20.5.3 Function and information types M17109-145 v6

Product type IEC103mainFunType value Comment:

REL 128 Compatible range

REC 242 Private range, use default

RED 192 Compatible range

RET 176 Compatible range

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 593

Application manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Station communication

REB 207 Private range

REG 150 Private range

REQ 245 Private range

RER 152 Private range

RES 118 Private range

Refer to the tables in the Technical reference manual /Station communication,

specifying the information types supported by the communication protocol IEC
60870-5-103.

To support the information, corresponding functions must be included in the protection

IED.

There is no representation for the following parts:

• Generating events for test mode

• Cause of transmission: Info no 11, Local operation

Glass or plastic fibre should be used. BFOC/2.5 is the recommended interface to use
(BFOC/2.5 is the same as ST connectors). ST connectors are used with the optical
power as specified in standard.

For more information, refer to IEC standard IEC 60870-5-103.

20.6 DNP3 Communication protocol

20.6.1 Application GUID-EF1F0C38-9FF6-4683-8B10-AAA372D42185 v1

For more information on the application and setting guidelines for the DNP3
communication protocol refer to the DNP3 Communication protocol manual.

594 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 21
Remote communication

Section 21 Remote communication

21.1 Binary signal transfer IP12423-1 v2

21.1.1 Identification
M14849-1 v3

Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification device number
BinSignRec1_1
Binary signal transfer,
BinSignRec1_2 - -
receive
BinSignReceive2
Binary signal transfer, 2Mbit BinSigRec1_12M
- -
receive BinSigRec1_22M
BinSignTrans1_1
Binary signal transfer,
BinSignTrans1_2 - -
transmit
BinSignTransm2
Binary signal transfer, 2Mbit BinSigTran1_12M
- -
transmit BinSigTran1_22M

21.1.2 Application IP16245-1 v1

M12844-3 v4

The IEDs can be equipped with communication devices for line differential
communication (not applicable for RER670) and/or communication of binary signals
between IEDs. The same communication hardware is used for both purposes.

Sending of binary signals between two IEDs is used in teleprotection schemes and for
direct transfer trips. In addition to this, there are application possibilities, for example,
blocking/enabling functionality in the remote substation, changing setting group in the
remote IED depending on the switching situation in the local substation and so on.

If equipped with a 64kbit/s LDCM module, the IED can be configured to send either
192 binary signals or 3 analog and 8 binary signals to a remote IED. If equipped with a
2Mbps LDCM module, the IED can send 9 analog channels and 192 binary channels to
a remote IED.

Link forwarding GUID-DD3CF47C-A202-4416-954A-EFC0F8BEBCB7 v1

If it is not possible to have a communication link between each station, the solution has
been to set the protection up in a slave-master-slave configuration. This means that in
Figure 229, only IED-B has access to all currents and, therefore, this is the only place

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 595

Application manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Remote communication

where the differential current is evaluated. If the evaluation results in a trip, the trip
signal will be sent over the two communication links.

3-end differential protection with two communication links

Ldcm312 Ldcm312
IED-A Ldcm312
IED-B Ldcm313
IED-C

IEC16000077-1-en.vsd
IEC16000077 V1 EN-US

Figure 229: Three-end differential protection with two communication links

If the LDCM is in 2Mbit mode, you can send the three local currents as well as the
three remote currents from the other links by configuring the transmitters in IED-B:
1. Ldcm312 transmitter sends the local currents and the three currents received by
Ldcm313.
2. Ldcm313 transmitter sends the three local currents and the three currents received
from Ldcm312.

As a result, six currents are received in IED-A and IED-C. These currents can be
connected to the protection function together with the local three currents.

In order to forward the logic signals (for example, inter-trip or inter-

block) between IED-A and IED-C, the setting LinkForwarded should
be defined. In IED-B, it is set to LDCM313 for Ldcm312 and to
LDCM312 for ldcm313.

This setup results in a master-master-master configuration, but without the benefit of

reverting to a slave-master-slave configuration in case of a communication link
interruption. In case of a communication link interruption, all three IEDs would be
blocked.

21.1.2.1 Communication hardware solutions M12844-11 v5

The LDCM (Line Data Communication Module) has an optical connection such that
two IEDs can be connected over a direct fibre (multimode), as shown in figure 230.
The protocol used is IEEE/ANSI C37.94. The distance with this solution is typical 110
km/68 miles.

596 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 21
Remote communication

C M
CM LD
LD
CM CM
LD LD

en06000519-2.vsd
IEC06000519 V2 EN-US

Figure 230: Direct fibre optical connection between two IEDs with LDCM

The LDCM can also be used together with an external optical to galvanic G.703
converter as shown in figure 231. These solutions are aimed for connections to a
multiplexer, which in turn is connected to a telecommunications transmission network
(for example PDH).

Multiplexer Multiplexer

Telecom. Network

*) *)

*) Converting optical to galvanic G.703

en05000527-2.vsd
IEC05000527 V2 EN-US

Figure 231: LDCM with an external optical to galvanic converter and a multiplexer

When an external modem G.703 is used, the connection between LDCM and the
modem is made with a multimode fibre of max. 3 km/2 mile length. The IEEE/ANSI
C37.94 protocol is always used between LDCM and the modem.

21.1.3 Setting guidelines M12454-3 v6

64 kbit and 2 Mbit mode common settings

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 597

Application manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Remote communication

ChannelMode defines how an IED discards the LDCM information when one of the
IEDs in the system is out of service: it can either be done on the IED out of service by
setting all local LDCMs to channel mode OutOfService or at the remote end by setting
the corresponding LDCM to channel mode Blocked. If OutOfService is selected, the
IED should have active communication to the remote end during the whole
maintenance process, that is, no restart or removal of the fibre can be done.

This setting does not apply to two-end communication.

Blocked IED does not use data from the LDCM

OutOfService IED informs the remote end that it is out of service

TerminalNo is used to assign a unique address to each LDCM in all current differential
IEDs. Up to 256 LDCMs can be assigned a unique number. For example, in a local
IED with two LDCMs:
• LDCM for slot 305: set TerminalNo to 1 and RemoteTermNo to 2
• LDCM for slot 306: set TerminalNo to 3 and RemoteTermNo to 4

In multiterminal current differential applications,with 4 LDCMs in each IED, up to 20

unique addresses must be set.

A unique address is necessary to give high security against incorrect

addressing in the communication system. If the same number is used
for TerminalNo in some of the LDCMs, a loop-back test in the
communication system can give an incorrect trip.

RemoteTermNo is used to assign a number to each related LDCM in the remote IED.
For each LDCM, RemoteTermNo is set to a different value than TerminalNo, but equal
to the TerminalNo of the remote end LDCM. In the remote IED, TerminalNo and
RemoteTermNo are reversed as follows:
• LDCM for slot 305: set TerminalNo to 2 and RemoteTermNo to 1
• LDCM for slot 306: set TerminalNo to 4 and RemoteTermNo to 3

The redundant channel is always configured to the lower position, for

example:
• Slot 305: main channel
• Slot 306: redundant channel

598 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 21
Remote communication

The same is applicable for slot 312-313 and slot 322-323.

DiffSync defines the method of time synchronization for the line differential function:
Echo or GPS.

Using Echo in this case is safe only if there is no risk of varying

transmission asymmetry.

GPSSyncErr: when GPS synchronization is lost, synchronization of the line differential

function continues for 16 s based on the stability in the local IED clocks. After that,
setting Block blocks the line differential function or setting Echo keeps it on by using
the Echo synchronization method.

Using Echo in this case is safe only if there is no risk of varying

transmission asymmetry.

CommSync defines the Master and Slave relation in the communication system, and
should not be mistaken for the synchronization of line differential current samples.
When direct fibre is used, one LDCM is set as Master and the other as Slave. When a
modem and multiplexer is used, the IED is always set as Slave because the
telecommunication system provides the clock master.

OptoPower has two settings: LowPower is used for fibres 0 – 1 km (0.6 mile) and
HighPower for fibres >1 km (>0.6 mile).

ComAlarmDel defines the time delay for communication failure alarm. In

communication systems, route switching can sometimes cause interruptions with a
duration of up to 50 ms. Too short a time delay can thus cause nuisance alarms.

ComAlrmResDel defines the time delay for communication failure alarm reset.

RedChSwTime defines the time delay before switching over to a redundant channel in
case of primary channel failure.

RedChRturnTime defines the time delay before switching back to the primary channel
after channel failure.

AsymDelay denotes asymmetry which is defined as transmission delay minus receive

delay. If fixed asymmetry is known, Echo synchronization method can be used,
provided that AsymDelay is properly set. From the definition follows that asymmetry is
always positive at one end and negative at the other end.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 599

Application manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Remote communication

MaxTransmDelay indicates maximum transmission delay. Data for maximum 40 ms

transmission delay can be buffered up. Delay times in the range of some ms are
common. If data arrive in wrong order, the oldest data is disregarded.

MaxtDiffLevel indicates the maximum time difference allowed between internal clocks
in respective line ends.

64 kbit mode specific settings

TransmCurr is used to select among the following:

• one of the two possible local currents is transmitted
• sum of the two local currents is transmitted
• channel is used as a redundant backup channel

breaker-and-a-half arrangement has two local currents, and the Current Transformer
(CT) grounding for those can differ. CT-SUM transmits the sum of the two CT groups.
CT-DIFF1 transmits CT group 1 minus CT group 2 and CT-DIFF2 transmits CT group
2 minus CT group 1.

CT-GRP1 and CT-GRP2 transmit the respective CT groups, and setting

RedundantChannel determines that the channel is used as a redundant backup channel.
The redundant channel takes the CT group setting of the main channel.

RemAinLatency corresponds to LocAinLatency set in the remote IED.

AnalogLatency specifies the time delay (number of samples) between actual sampling
and the time the sample reaches LDCM. The value is set to 2 when transmitting analog
data. When a merging unit according to IEC 61850-9-2 is used instead of the TRM,
this parameter shall be set to 5.

CompRange value indicates the current peak value over which truncation is made. To
set this value, knowledge of fault current levels is required. It is recommended to set
the minimum range that will cover the expected fault current value. For example, if a
40kA fault level is expected on the network, the 0-50kA settings range should be
chosen.

2 Mbit mode specific settings

RedundantCh is used to set the channel as a redundant backup channel. The redundant
channel takes the CT group setting of the main channel, and ignores the CT group
configured in its own transmit block.

600 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 21
Remote communication

LinkForwarded is used to configure the LDCM to merge the inter-trip and block
signals from another LDCM-receiver. This is used when the analog signals for the
LDCM-transmitter is connected to the receiver of another LDCM.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 601

Application manual
602
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 22
Security

Section 22 Security

22.1 Authority status ATHSTAT SEMOD158575-1 v2

22.1.1 Application SEMOD158527-5 v3

Authority status (ATHSTAT) function is an indication function block, which informs

about two events related to the IED and the user authorization:

• the fact that at least one user has tried to log on wrongly into the IED and it was
blocked (the output USRBLKED)
• the fact that at least one user is logged on (the output LOGGEDON)

The two outputs of ATHSTAT function can be used in the configuration for different
indication and alarming reasons, or can be sent to the station control for the same
purpose.

22.2 Self supervision with internal event list INTERRSIG IP1721-1 v2

22.2.1 Application M12625-3 v9

The protection and control IEDs have many functions included. The included self-
supervision with internal event list function block provides good supervision of the
IED. The fault signals make it easier to analyze and locate a fault.

Both hardware and software supervision is included and it is also possible to indicate
possible faults through a hardware contact on the power supply module and/or through
the communication.

Internal events are generated by the built-in supervisory functions. The supervisory
functions supervise the status of the various modules in the IED and, in case of failure,
a corresponding event is generated. Similarly, when the failure is corrected, a
corresponding event is generated.

Apart from the built-in supervision of the various modules, events are also generated
when the status changes for the:

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 603

Application manual
Section 22 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Security

• built-in real time clock (in operation/out of order).

• external time synchronization (in operation/out of order).

Events are also generated:

• whenever any setting in the IED is changed.

The internal events are time tagged with a resolution of 1 ms and stored in a list. The
list can store up to 40 events. The list is based on the FIFO principle, that is, when it is
full, the oldest event is overwritten. The list contents cannot be modified, but the whole
list can be cleared using the Reset menu in the LHMI.

The list of internal events provides valuable information, which can be used during
commissioning and fault tracing.

The information can, in addition to be viewed on the built in HMI, also be retrieved
with the aid of a PC with PCM600 installed and by using the Event Monitoring Tool.
The PC can either be connected to the front port, or to the port at the back of the IED.

22.3 Change lock CHNGLCK GUID-B48775D0-ACF0-49C6-A7F6-69AF37F1C68F v1

22.3.1 Application GUID-51EEC9C7-8ECF-4546-BC26-326861654340 v4

Change lock function CHNGLCK is used to block further changes to the IED
configuration once the commissioning is complete. The purpose is to make it
impossible to perform inadvertent IED configuration and setting changes.

However, when activated, CHNGLCK will still allow the following actions that does
not involve reconfiguring of the IED:
• Monitoring
• Reading events
• Resetting events
• Reading disturbance data
• Clear disturbances
• Reset LEDs
• Reset counters and other runtime component states
• Control operations
• Set system time
• Enter and exit from test mode
• Change of active setting group

604 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 22
Security

The binary input controlling the function is defined in ACT or SMT. The CHNGLCK
function is configured using ACT.

LOCK Binary input signal that will activate/deactivate the function, defined in ACT or SMT.

GUID-8C333BC0-AA7A-4ED1-A772-18C22E8EEE62 v5

When CHNGLCK has a logical one on its input, then all attempts to
modify the IED configuration and setting will be denied and the
message "Error: Changes blocked" will be displayed on the local HMI;
in PCM600 the message will be "Operation denied by active
ChangeLock". The CHNGLCK function should be configured so that it
is controlled by a signal from a binary input card. This guarantees that
by setting that signal to a logical zero, CHNGLCK is deactivated. If
any logic is included in the signal path to the CHNGLCK input, that
logic must be designed so that it cannot permanently issue a logical one
to the CHNGLCK input. If such a situation would occur in spite of
these precautions, then please contact the local ABB representative for
remedial action.

22.4 Denial of service SCHLCCH/RCHLCCH

22.4.1 Application GUID-64F4D905-9F73-4073-B8F6-8D373155316A v5

The denial of service functionality is designed to limit the CPU load that can be
produced by Ethernet network traffic on the IED. The communication facilities must
not be allowed to compromise the primary functionality of the device. All inbound
network traffic will be quota controlled so that too heavy network loads can be
controlled. Heavy network load might for instance be the result of malfunctioning
equipment connected to the network.

The functions Access point diagnostics function block measure the IED load from
communication and, if necessary, limit it for not jeopardizing the IEDs control and
protection functionality due to high CPU load. The function has the following denial of
service related outputs:

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 605

Application manual
Section 22 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Security

• LINKSTS indicates the Ethernet link status for the rear ports (single
communication)
• CHALISTS and CHBLISTS indicates the Ethernet link status for the rear ports
channel A and B (redundant communication)
• LinkStatus indicates the Ethernet link status for the front port

22.4.2 Setting guidelines GUID-CE3344E8-539B-47E0-9C19-8239988BDBCF v2

The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

606 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 23
Basic IED functions

Section 23 Basic IED functions

23.1 IED identifiers TERMINALID IP15060-1 v2

23.1.1 Application M15324-3 v6

IED identifiers (TERMINALID) function allows the user to identify the individual IED
in the system, not only in the substation, but in a whole region or a country.

Use only characters A-Z, a-z and 0-9 in station, object and unit names.

23.2 Product information PRODINF GUID-F67243CA-2429-4118-BBFF-3D62BF55E080 v2

23.2.1 Application GUID-D78786E6-C34A-4E63-9D1E-0582C8F1F7E1 v8

Product information contains unchangeable data that uniquely identifies the IED.

Product information data is visible on the local HMI under Main menu/
Diagnostics/IED status/Product identifiers and under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED
Status/Identifiers:

• ProductVer
• ProductDef
• FirmwareVer
• SerialNo
• OrderingNo
• ProductionDate
• IEDProdType

This information is very helpful when interacting with ABB product support (for
example during repair and maintenance).

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 607

Application manual
Section 23 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Basic IED functions

23.2.2 Factory defined settings M11789-39 v10

The factory defined settings are very useful for identifying a specific version and very
helpful in the case of maintenance, repair, interchanging IEDs between different
Substation Automation Systems and upgrading. The factory made settings can not be
changed by the customer. They can only be viewed. The settings are found in the local
HMI under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/Product identifiers

The following identifiers are available:

• IEDProdType
• Describes the type of the IED. Example: REL670
• ProductDef
• Describes the release number from the production. Example: 2.1.0
• FirmwareVer
• Describes the firmware version.
• The firmware version can be checked from Main menu/Diagnostics/IED
status/Product identifiers
• Firmware version numbers run independently from the release production
numbers. For every release number there can be one or more firmware
versions depending on the small issues corrected in between releases.
• ProductVer
• Describes the product version. Example: 2.1.0

1 is the Major version of the manufactured product this means, new platform of the product
2 is the Minor version of the manufactured product this means, new functions or new
hardware added to the product
3 is the Major revision of the manufactured product this means, functions or hardware is
either changed or enhanced in the product

• IEDMainFunType
• Main function type code according to IEC 60870-5-103. Example: 128
(meaning line protection).
• SerialNo
• OrderingNo
• ProductionDate

23.3 Measured value expander block RANGE_XP SEMOD52451-1 v2

608 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 23
Basic IED functions

23.3.1 Identification
SEMOD113212-2 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Measured value expander block RANGE_XP - -

23.3.2 Application SEMOD52434-4 v5

The current and voltage measurements functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU

and VNMMXU), current and voltage sequence measurement functions (CMSQI and
VMSQI) and IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGAPC) are
provided with measurement supervision functionality. All measured values can be
supervised with four settable limits, that is low-low limit, low limit, high limit and
high-high limit. The measure value expander block ( RANGE_XP) has been
introduced to be able to translate the integer output signal from the measuring
functions to 5 binary signals, that is below low-low limit, below low limit, normal,
above high-high limit or above high limit. The output signals can be used as conditions
in the configurable logic.

23.3.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD113223-4 v1

There are no settable parameters for the measured value expander block function.

23.4 Parameter setting groups IP1745-1 v1

23.4.1 Application M12007-6 v9

Six sets of settings are available to optimize IED operation for different power system
conditions. By creating and switching between fine tuned setting sets, either from the
local HMI or configurable binary inputs, results in a highly adaptable IED that can
cope with a variety of power system scenarios.

Different conditions in networks with different voltage levels require highly adaptable
protection and control units to best provide for dependability, security and selectivity
requirements. Protection units operate with a higher degree of availability, especially, if
the setting values of their parameters are continuously optimized according to the
conditions in the power system.

Operational departments can plan for different operating conditions in the primary
equipment. The protection engineer can prepare the necessary optimized and pre-tested
settings in advance for different protection functions. Six different groups of setting

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 609

Application manual
Section 23 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Basic IED functions

parameters are available in the IED. Any of them can be activated through the different
programmable binary inputs by means of external or internal control signals.

A function block, SETGRPS, defines how many setting groups are used. Setting is
done with parameter MAXSETGR and shall be set to the required value for each IED.
Only the number of setting groups set will be available in the Parameter Setting tool
for activation with the ActiveGroup function block.

23.4.2 Setting guidelines M15259-3 v4

The setting ActiveSetGrp, is used to select which parameter group to be active. The
active group can also be selected with configured input to the function block
SETGRPS.

The length of the pulse, sent out by the output signal GRP_CHGD when an active
group has changed, is set with the parameter t.

The parameter MAXSETGR defines the maximum number of setting groups in use to
switch between. Only the selected number of setting groups will be available in the
Parameter Setting tool (PST) for activation with the ActiveGroup function block.

23.5 Rated system frequency PRIMVAL IP15064-1 v2

23.5.1 Identification
GUID-B8B3535D-227B-4151-9E98-BEB85F4D54DE v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Primary system values PRIMVAL - -

23.5.2 Application M15288-3 v6

The rated system frequency and phase rotation direction are set under Main menu/
Configuration/ Power system/ Primary Values in the local HMI and PCM600
parameter setting tree.

23.5.3 Setting guidelines M15292-3 v2

Set the system rated frequency. Refer to section "Signal matrix for analog inputs
SMAI" for description on frequency tracking.

610 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 23
Basic IED functions

23.6 Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM SEMOD55968-1 v2

23.6.1 Application SEMOD56004-4 v3

The analog summation block 3PHSUM function block is used in order to get the sum
of two sets of 3 phase analog signals (of the same type) for those IED functions that
might need it.

23.6.2 Setting guidelines SEMOD56006-4 v6

The summation block receives the three-phase signals from SMAI blocks. The
summation block has several settings.

SummationType: Summation type (Group 1 + Group 2, Group 1 - Group 2, Group 2 -

Group 1 or –(Group 1 + Group 2)).

DFTReference: The reference DFT block (InternalDFT Ref,DFTRefGrp1 or External

DFT ref) .

FreqMeasMinVal: The minimum value of the voltage for which the frequency is
calculated, expressed as percent of VBasebase voltage setting (for each instance x).

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
(IBase), (VBase) and (SBase).

23.7 Global base values GBASVAL GUID-2FDB0A2C-10FE-4954-B6E4-9DA2EEEF1668 v1

23.7.1 Identification
GUID-0D5405BE-E669-44C8-A208-3A4C86D39115 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Global base values GBASVAL - -

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 611

Application manual
Section 23 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Basic IED functions

23.7.2 Application GUID-D58ECA9A-9771-443D-BF84-8EF582A346BF v4

Global base values function (GBASVAL) is used to provide global values, common for
all applicable functions within the IED. One set of global values consists of values for
current, voltage and apparent power and it is possible to have twelve different sets.

This is an advantage since all applicable functions in the IED use a single source of
base values. This facilitates consistency throughout the IED and also facilitates a single
point for updating values when necessary.

Each applicable function in the IED has a parameter, GlobalBaseSel, defining one out
of the twelve sets of GBASVAL functions.

23.7.3 Setting guidelines GUID-E3F5D754-BD17-4729-895B-957A09C2AC75 v4

VBase: Phase-to-phase voltage value to be used as a base value for applicable functions
throughout the IED.

IBase: Phase current value to be used as a base value for applicable functions
throughout the IED.

SBase: Standard apparent power value to be used as a base value for applicable
functions throughout the IED, typically SBase=√3·VBase·IBase.

23.8 Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI SEMOD55793-1 v2

23.8.1 Application M15310-3 v2

The Signal matrix for binary inputs function SMBI is used within the Application
Configuration tool in direct relation with the Signal Matrix tool. SMBI represents the
way binary inputs are brought in for one IED configuration.

23.8.2 Setting guidelines M15312-3 v3

There are no setting parameters for the Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI available
to the user in Parameter Setting tool. However, the user shall give a name to SMBI
instance and the SMBI inputs, directly in the Application Configuration tool. These
names will define SMBI function in the Signal Matrix tool. The user defined name for
the input or output signal will also appear on the respective output or input signal.

612 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 23
Basic IED functions

23.9 Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO SEMOD55215-1 v2

23.9.1 Application SEMOD55213-5 v4

The Signal matrix for binary outputs function SMBO is used within the Application
Configuration tool in direct relation with the Signal Matrix tool. SMBO represents the
way binary outputs are sent from one IED configuration.

23.9.2 Setting guidelines SEMOD55228-5 v2

There are no setting parameters for the Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO
available to the user in Parameter Setting tool. However, the user must give a name to
SMBO instance and SMBO outputs, directly in the Application Configuration tool.
These names will define SMBO function in the Signal Matrix tool.

23.10 Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI SEMOD55233-1 v2

23.10.1 Application SEMOD55237-5 v2

The Signal matrix for mA inputs function SMMI is used within the Application
Configuration tool in direct relation with the Signal Matrix tool. SMMI represents the
way milliamp (mA) inputs are brought in for one IED configuration.

23.10.2 Setting guidelines SEMOD55247-5 v2

There are no setting parameters for the Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI available to
the user in the Parameter Setting tool. However, the user must give a name to SMMI
instance and SMMI inputs, directly in the Application Configuration tool.

23.11 Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI SEMOD55751-1 v2

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 613

Application manual
Section 23 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Basic IED functions

23.11.1 Application SEMOD55744-4 v10

Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI), also known as the preprocessor function
block, analyses the connected four analog signals (three phases and neutral) and
calculates all relevant information from them like the phasor magnitude, phase angle,
frequency, true RMS value, harmonics, sequence components and so on. This
information is then used by the respective functions connected to this SMAI block in
ACT (for example protection, measurement or monitoring functions).

23.11.2 Frequency values GUID-B494B93C-B5AA-4FD6-8080-8611C34C2AD8 v5

The SMAI function includes a functionality based on the level of positive sequence
voltage, MinValFreqMeas, to validate if the frequency measurement is valid or not. If
the positive sequence voltage is lower than MinValFreqMeas, the function freezes the
frequency output value for 500 ms and after that the frequency output is set to the
nominal value. A signal is available for the SMAI function to prevent operation due to
non-valid frequency values. MinValFreqMeas is set as % of VBase/√3

If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-Ph, at least two of the inputs GRPx_A,

GRPx_B and GRPx_C, where 1≤x≤12, must be connected in order to calculate the
positive sequence voltage. Note that phase to phase inputs shall always be connected as
follows: A-B to GRPxA, B-C to GRPxB, C-A to GRPxC. If SMAI setting
ConnectionType is Ph-N, all three inputs GRPx_A, GRPx_B and GRPx_C must be
connected in order to calculate the positive sequence voltage.

If only one phase-phase voltage is available and SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-
Ph, the user is advised to connect two (not three) of the inputs GRPx_A, GRPx_B and
GRPx_C to the same voltage input as shown in figure 232 to make SMAI calculate a
positive sequence voltage.

SMAI1
BLOCK SPFCOUT SAPTOF
DFTSPFC G1AI3P V3P* TRIP SAPTOF(1)_TRIP
VAB BLOCK PICK UP
REVROT G1AI1
PHASEA G1AI2 BLKTRIP BLKDMAGN
^GRP1_A G1AI4 FREQ
TRM_40.CH7(U) PHASEB
G1N
^GRP1_B
PHASEC
^GRP1_C
NEUTRAL
^GRP1_N

ANSI10000060-1-en.vsdx

ANSI10000060 V1 EN-US

Figure 232: Connection example

614 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 23
Basic IED functions

The above described scenario does not work if SMAI setting

ConnectionType is Ph-N. If only one phase-ground voltage is available,
the same type of connection can be used but the SMAI ConnectionType
setting must still be Ph-Ph and this has to be accounted for when
setting MinValFreqMeas. If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-N and
the same voltage is connected to all three SMAI inputs, the positive
sequence voltage will be zero and the frequency functions will not
work properly.

The outputs from the above configured SMAI block shall only be used
for Overfrequency protection (SAPTOF, 81), Underfrequency
protection (SAPTUF, 81) and Rate-of-change frequency protection
(SAPFRC, 81) due to that all other information except frequency and
positive sequence voltage might be wrongly calculated.

23.11.3 Setting guidelines GUID-C8D6C88B-87C6-44C1-804B-CF1594365EE6 v8

The parameters for the signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI) functions are set via the
local HMI or PCM600.

Every SMAI function block can receive four analog signals (three phases and one
neutral value), either voltage or current. SMAI outputs give information about every
aspect of the 3ph analog signals acquired (phase angle, RMS value, frequency and
frequency derivates, and so on – 244 values in total). Besides the block “group name”,
the analog inputs type (voltage or current) and the analog input names that can be set
directly in ACT.

Application functions should be connected to a SMAI block with same task cycle as
the application function, except for e.g. measurement functions that run in slow cycle
tasks.

DFTRefExtOut: Parameter valid only for function block SMAI1 .

Reference block for external output (SPFCOUT function output).

DFTReference: Reference DFT for the SMAI block use.

These DFT reference block settings decide DFT reference for DFT calculations. The
setting InternalDFTRef will use fixed DFT reference based on set system frequency.
DFTRefGrp(n) will use DFT reference from the selected group block, when own group
is selected, an adaptive DFT reference will be used based on calculated signal
frequency from own group. The setting ExternalDFTRef will use reference based on
what is connected to input DFTSPFC.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 615

Application manual
Section 23 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Basic IED functions

The setting ConnectionType: Connection type for that specific instance (n) of the
SMAI (if it is Ph-N or Ph-Ph). Depending on connection type setting the not connected
Ph-N or Ph-Ph outputs will be calculated as long as they are possible to calculate. E.g.
at Ph-Ph connection A, B and C will be calculated for use in symmetrical situations. If
N component should be used respectively the phase component during faults IN/VN
must be connected to input 4.

Negation: If the user wants to negate the 3ph signal, it is possible to choose to negate
only the phase signals Negate3Ph, only the neutral signal NegateN or both Negate3Ph
+N. negation means rotation with 180° of the vectors.

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
(IBase), (VBase) and (SBase).

MinValFreqMeas: The minimum value of the voltage for which the frequency is
calculated, expressed as percent of VBase (for each instance n).

Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value

InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available.

Even if the user sets the AnalogInputType of a SMAI block to

“Current”, the MinValFreqMeas is still visible. However, using the
current channel values as base for frequency measurement is not
recommendable for a number of reasons, not last among them being
the low level of currents that one can have in normal operating
conditions.

Examples of adaptive frequency tracking

Preprocessing block shall only be used to feed functions within the

same execution cycles (e.g. use preprocessing block with cycle 1 to
feed transformer differential protection). The only exceptions are
measurement functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU,VMMXU, etc.) which
shall be fed by preprocessing blocks with cycle 8.

When two or more preprocessing blocks are used to feed one protection
function (e.g. over-power function GOPPDOP), it is of outmost
importance that parameter setting DFTReference has the same set value
for all of the preprocessing blocks involved

616 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 23
Basic IED functions

Task time group 1

SMAI instance 3 phase group
SMAI1:1 1
SMAI2:2 2
SMAI3:3 3
SMAI4:4 4 AdDFTRefCh7
SMAI5:5 5
SMAI6:6 6
SMAI7:7 7
SMAI8:8 8
SMAI9:9 9
SMAI10:10 10
SMAI11:11 11
SMAI12:12 12

Task time group 2

SMAI instance 3 phase group
SMAI1:13 1 AdDFTRefCh4
SMAI2:14 2
SMAI3:15 3
SMAI4:16 4
SMAI5:17 5
SMAI6:18 6
SMAI7:19 7
SMAI8:20 8
SMAI9:21 9
SMAI10:22 10
SMAI11:23 11
SMAI12:24 12

Task time group 3

SMAI instance 3 phase group
SMAI1:25 1
SMAI2:26 2
SMAI3:27 3
SMAI4:28 4
SMAI5:29 5
SMAI6:30 6
SMAI7:31 7
SMAI8:32 8
SMAI9:33 9
SMAI10:34 10
SMAI11:35 11
SMAI12:36 12

IEC07000197.vsd
IEC07000197 V2 EN-US

Figure 233: Twelve SMAI instances are grouped within one task time. SMAI blocks
are available in three different task times in the IED. Two pointed
instances are used in the following examples.

The examples shows a situation with adaptive frequency tracking with one reference
selected for all instances. In practice each instance can be adapted to the needs of the
actual application. The adaptive frequency tracking is needed in IEDs that belong to
the protection system of synchronous machines and that are active during run-up and

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 617

Application manual
Section 23 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Basic IED functions

shout-down of the machine. In other application the usual setting of the parameter
DFTReference of SMAI is InternalDFTRef.

Example 1
SMAI1:13
BLOCK SPFCOUT
DFTSPFC AI3P
^GRP1_A AI1
^GRP1_B AI2
^GRP1_C AI3
SMAI1:1 ^GRP1_N AI4
BLOCK SPFCOUT TYPE AIN
DFTSPFC AI3P
^GRP1_A AI1
^GRP1_B AI2
^GRP1_C AI3
^GRP1_N AI4
TYPE AIN

SMAI1:25
BLOCK SPFCOUT
DFTSPFC AI3P
^GRP1_A AI1
^GRP1_B AI2
^GRP1_C AI3
^GRP1_N AI4
TYPE AIN

ANSI07000198.vsd
ANSI07000198 V1 EN-US

Figure 234: Configuration for using an instance in task time group 1 as DFT
reference

Assume instance SMAI7:7 in task time group 1 has been selected in the configuration
to control the frequency tracking . Observe that the selected reference instance (i.e.
frequency tracking master) must be a voltage type. Observe that positive sequence
voltage is used for the frequency tracking feature.

For task time group 1 this gives the following settings (see Figure 233 for numbering):

SMAI1:1: DFTRefExtOut = DFTRefGrp7 to route SMAI7:7 reference to the

SPFCOUT output, DFTReference = DFTRefGrp7 for SMAI1:1 to use SMAI7:7 as
reference (see Figure 234) SMAI2:2 – SMAI12:12: DFTReference = DFTRefGrp7 for
SMAI2:2 – SMAI12:12 to use SMAI7:7 as reference.

For task time group 2 this gives the following settings:

SMAI1:13 – SMAI12:24: DFTReference = ExternalDFTRef to use DFTSPFC input of

SMAI1:13 as reference (SMAI7:7)

For task time group 3 this gives the following settings:

SMAI1:25 – SMAI12:36: DFTReference = ExternalDFTRef to use DFTSPFC input as

reference (SMAI7:7)

618 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 23
Basic IED functions

Example 2
SMAI1:1
BLOCK SPFCOUT
DFTSPFC AI3P
^GRP1_A AI1
^GRP1_B AI2
^GRP1_C AI3
SMAI1:13 ^GRP1_N AI4
BLOCK SPFCOUT TYPE AIN
DFTSPFC AI3P
^GRP1_A AI1
^GRP1_B AI2
^GRP1_C AI3
^GRP1_N AI4
TYPE AIN

SMAI1:25
BLOCK SPFCOUT
DFTSPFC AI3P
^GRP1_A AI1
^GRP1_B AI2
^GRP1_C AI3
^GRP1_N AI4
TYPE AIN

ANSI07000198.vsd
ANSI07000199 V1 EN-US

Figure 235: Configuration for using an instance in task time group 2 as DFT
reference.

Assume instance SMAI4:16 in task time group 2 has been selected in the configuration
to control the frequency tracking for all instances. Observe that the selected reference
instance (i.e. frequency tracking master) must be a voltage type. Observe that positive
sequence voltage is used for the frequency tracking feature.

For task time group 1 this gives the following settings (see Figure 233 for numbering):

SMAI1:1 – SMAI12:12: DFTReference = ExternalDFTRef to use DFTSPFC input as

reference (SMAI4:16)

For task time group 2 this gives the following settings:

SMAI1:13: DFTRefExtOut = DFTRefGrp4 to route SMAI4:16 reference to the

SPFCOUT output, DFTReference = DFTRefGrp4 for SMAI1:13 to use SMAI4:16 as
reference (see Figure 235) SMAI2:14 – SMAI12:24: DFTReference = DFTRefGrp4 to
use SMAI4:16 as reference.

For task time group 3 this gives the following settings:

SMAI1:25 – SMAI12:36: DFTReference = ExternalDFTRef to use DFTSPFC input as

reference (SMAI4:16)

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 619

Application manual
Section 23 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Basic IED functions

23.12 Test mode functionality TESTMODE IP1647-1 v3

23.12.1 Application M11407-3 v8

The protection and control IEDs may have a complex configuration with many
included functions. To make the testing procedure easier, the IEDs include the feature
that allows individual blocking of a single-, several-, or all functions.

This means that it is possible to see when a function is activated or trips. It also enables
the user to follow the operation of several related functions to check correct
functionality and to check parts of the configuration, and so on.

23.12.1.1 IEC 61850 protocol test mode GUID-82998715-6F23-4CAF-92E4-05E1A863CF33 v3

The IEC 61850 Test Mode has improved testing capabilities for IEC 61850 systems.
Operator commands sent to the IEC 61850 Mod determine the behavior of the
functions. The command can be given from the LHMI under the Main menu/Test/
Function test modes menu or remotely from an IEC 61850 client. The possible values
of IEC 61850 Mod are described in Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850
Edition 1 and Edition 2.

To be able to set the IEC 61850 Mod the parameter remotely, the PST
setting RemoteModControl may not be set to Off. The possible values
are Off, Maintenance or All levels. The Off value denies all access to
data object Mod from remote, Maintenance requires that the category
of the originator (orCat) is Maintenance and All levels allow any orCat.

The mod of the Root LD.LNN0 can be configured under Main menu/Test/Function
test modes/Communication/Station communication/IEC61850 LD0 LLN0/
LD0LLN0:1

When the Mod is changed at this level, all components under the logical device update
their own behavior according to IEC 61850-7-4. The supported values of IEC 61850
Mod are described in Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 Edition 2. The IEC
61850 test mode is indicated with the Start LED on the LHMI.

The mod of an specific component can be configured under Main menu/Test/

Function test modes/Communication/Station Communication

It is possible that the behavior is also influenced by other sources as well, independent
of the mode, such as the insertion of the test handle, loss of SV, and IED configuration

620 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 23
Basic IED functions

or LHMI. If a function of an IED is set to Off, the related Beh is set to Off as well. The
related mod keeps its current state.

When the setting Operation is set to Off, the behavior is set to Off and it is not possible
to override it. When a behavior of a function is Offthe function will not execute.

When IEC 61850 Mod of a function is set to Off or Blocked, the Start
LED on the LHMI will be set to flashing to indicate the abnormal
operation of the IED.

The IEC 61850-7-4 gives a detailed overview over all aspects of the test mode and
other states of mode and behavior.

• When the Beh of a component is set to Test, the component is not blocked and all
control commands with a test bit are accepted.
• When the Beh of a component is set to Test/blocked, all control commands with a
test bit are accepted. Outputs to the process via a non-IEC 61850 link data are
blocked by the LN. Only process-related outputs on LNs related to primary
equipment are blocked. If there is an XCBR, the outputs EXC_Open and
EXC_Close are blocked.
• When the Beh of a component is set to Blocked, all control commands with a test
bit are accepted. Outputs to the process via a non-IEC 61850 link data are blocked
by the LN. In addition, the components can be blocked when their Beh is blocked.
This can be done if the component has a block input. The block status of a
component is shown as the Blk output under the Test/Function status menu. If the
Blk output is not shown, the component cannot be blocked.

23.12.2 Setting guidelines M15260-3 v6

There are two possible ways to place the IED in the TestMode= Enabled” state. If, the
IED is set to normal operation (TestMode = Disabled), but the functions are still shown
being in the test mode, the input signal INPUT on the TESTMODE function block
might be activated in the configuration.

Forcing of binary input and output signals is only possible when the IED is in IED test
mode.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 621

Application manual
Section 23 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Basic IED functions

23.13 Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN IP1750-1 v2

23.13.1 Application M11345-3 v10

Use time synchronization to achieve a common time base for the IEDs in a protection
and control system. This makes it possible to compare events and disturbance data
between all IEDs in the system. If a global common source (i.e. GPS) is used in
different substations for the time synchronization, also comparisons and analysis
between recordings made at different locations can be easily performed and a more
accurate view of the actual sequence of events can be obtained.

Time-tagging of internal events and disturbances are an excellent help when evaluating
faults. Without time synchronization, only the events within one IED can be compared
with each other. With time synchronization, events and disturbances within the whole
network, can be compared and evaluated.

In the IED, the internal time can be synchronized from the following sources:

• BIN (Binary Minute Pulse)

• DNP
• GPS
• IEC103
• SNTP
• IRIG-B
• SPA
• LON
• PPS
• IEEE 1588 (PTP)

For IEDs using PMU functionality, only PTP, GPS or IRIG-B or a combination of both
GPS and IRIG-B is allowed.

For IEDs using IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE in "mixed mode" a time synchronization from
an external clock is recommended to the IED and all connected merging units. The
time synchronization from the clock to the IED can be PTP, optical PPS or IRIG-B. For
IEDs using IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE from one single MU as analog data source, the
MU and IED still need to be synchronized to each other. This could be done by letting
the MU supply a PPS signal to the IED or by supplying a PPS signal from the IED to
the MU, by using a GTM.

Out of these, LON and SPA contains two types of synchronization messages:

622 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 23
Basic IED functions

• Coarse time messages are sent every minute and contain complete date and time,
that is year, month, day, hour, minute, second and millisecond.
• Fine time messages are sent every second and comprise only seconds and
milliseconds.

The selection of the time source is done via the corresponding setting.

It is possible to select more than one time source, in which case one is backup for the
other. The time synchronization source with the best calculated time-quality is
automatically selected. For instance, if both GPS and IRIG-B are selected and both
sources have the required accuracy, optical IRIG-B with IEEE1344 will be
automatically selected as the time synchronization source. Or if GPS and SNTP are
selected, when the GPS signal quality is bad, the IED will automatically choose SNTP
as the time-source.

If PTP is activated, the device with the best accuracy within the synchronizing group
will be selected as the source. For more information about PTP, see the Technical
manual.

IEEE 1588 (PTP)

PTP according to IEEE 1588-2008 and specifically its profile IEC/IEEE 61850-9-3 for
power utility automation is a synchronization method that can be used to maintain a
common time within a station. This time can be synchronized to the global time using,
for instance, a GPS receiver. If PTP is enabled on the IEDs and the switches that
connect the station are compatible with IEEE 1588, the station will become
synchronized to one common time with an accuracy of under 1us. Using an IED as a
boundary clock between several networks will keep 1us accuracy on three levels or
when using an HSR, 15 IEDs can be connected in a ring without losing a single
microsecond in accuracy.

23.13.2 Setting guidelines IP15089-1 v3

All the parameters related to time are divided into two categories: System time and
Synchronization.

23.13.2.1 System time M11348-119 v5

The time is set with years, month, day, hour, minute, second and millisecond.

23.13.2.2 Synchronization M11348-143 v4

The setting parameters for the real-time clock with external time synchronization are
set via local HMI or PCM600. The path for Time Synchronization parameters on local

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 623

Application manual
Section 23 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Basic IED functions

HMI is Main menu/Configuration/Time/Synchronization. The parameters are

categorized as Time Synchronization (TIMESYNCHGEN) and IRIG-B settings (IRIG-
B:1) in case that IRIG-B is used as the external time synchronization source.

TimeSynch M11348-167 v15

When the source of the time synchronization is selected on the local HMI, the
parameter is called TimeSynch. The time synchronization source can also be set from
PCM600. The setting alternatives are:

FineSyncSource which can have the following values:

• Disabled
• SPA
• LON
• BIN (Binary Minute Pulse)
• GPS
• GPS+SPA
• GPS+LON
• GPS+BIN
• SNTP
• GPS+SNTP
• IRIG-B
• GPS+IRIG-B
• PPS

CoarseSyncSrc which can have the following values:

• Disabled
• SPA
• LON
• DNP
• IEC 60870-5-103

The function input to be used for minute-pulse synchronization is called BININPUT.

For a description of the BININPUT settings, see the Technical Manual.

The system time can be set manually, either via the local HMI or via any of the
communication ports. The time synchronization fine tunes the clock (seconds and
milliseconds).

The parameter SyncMaster defines if the IED is a master, or not a master for time
synchronization within a Substation Automation System, for IEDs connected in a
communication network (IEC 61850-8-1). The SyncMaster can have the following
values:

624 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 23
Basic IED functions

• Disabled
• SNTP -Server

Set the course time synchronizing source (CoarseSyncSrc) to Disabled

when GPS time synchronization of line differential function is used. Set
the fine time synchronization source (FineSyncSource) to GPS. The
GPS will thus provide the complete time synchronization. GPS alone
shall synchronize the analogue values in such systems.

IEEE 1588 (PTP) GUID-424227EC-74A1-4628-8948-C1876840ABFE v2

Precision Time Protocol (PTP) is enabled/disabled using the Ethernet configuration

tool /ECT) in PCM600.

PTP can be set to On,Off or Slave only. When set to Slave only the IED is connected to
the PTP-group and will synchronize to the grandmaster but cannot function as the
grandmaster.

A PTP-group is set up by connecting the IEDs to a network and enabling PTP. To set
one IED as the grandmaster change Priority2 to 127 instead of the default 128.

IEC16000089-1-en.vsdx

IEC16000089 V1 EN-US

Figure 236: Enabling PTP in ECT

The PTP VLAN tag must have the same value in station clock and in the IED. The
default value is set to 0.

The PTP VLAN tag does not need to be the same on all access points in one IED. It is
possible to mix as long as they are the same for all devices on each subnet.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 625

Application manual
Section 23 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Basic IED functions

Setting example

GPS

PTP

Station bus
PTP PTP

REC REL GTM

9-2 PTP PTP 9-2 9-2

PPS
Process bus
9-2 9-2

SAM600-TS MU

SAM600-CT

SAM600-VT

IEC16000167-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000167 V1 EN-US

Figure 237: Example system

Figure 237 describes an example system. The REC and REL are both using the 9-2
stream from the SAM600, and gets its synch from the GPS. Moreover, the REL and
REC both acts as a boundary clock to provide synch to the SAM600. The REL
contains a GTM card, which has a PPS output that is used to synchronize merging units
that are not PTP compliant. As a side effect, the GTM contains a GPS receiver and the
REL acts as a backup of the GPS on the station bus.

On all access points, the PTP parameter is “ON”.

On the REL, the parameter FineSyncSource (under Configuration/Time/

Synchronization/TIMESYNCHGEN:1/General) is set to “GPS” if there is a GPS
antenna attached.

If the GTM is used as a PPS output only, the FineSynchSource is not set.

626 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 24
Requirements

Section 24 Requirements

24.1 Current transformer requirements IP15171-1 v2

M11609-3 v2

The performance of a protection function will depend on the quality of the measured
current signal. Saturation of the current transformers (CTs) will cause distortion of the
current signals and can result in a failure to operate or cause unwanted operations of
some functions. Consequently CT saturation can have an influence on both the
dependability and the security of the protection. This protection IED has been designed
to permit heavy CT saturation with maintained correct operation.

24.1.1 Current transformer basic classification and requirements M11611-3 v2

M11611-4 v5

To guarantee correct operation, the current transformers (CTs) must be able to correctly
reproduce the current for a minimum time before the CT will begin to saturate. To
fulfill the requirement on a specified time to saturation the CTs must fulfill the
requirements of a minimum secondary e.m.f. that is specified below.

CTs are specified according to many different classes and standards. In principle, there
are three different types of protection CTs. These types are related to the design of the
iron core and the presence of airgaps. Airgaps affects the properties of the remanent
flux.

The following three different types of protection CTs have been specified:
• The High Remanence type with closed iron core and no specified limit of the
remanent flux
• The Low Remanence type with small airgaps in the iron core and the remanent
flux limit is specified to be maximum 10% of the saturation flux
• The Non Remanence type with big airgaps in the iron core and the remanent flux
can be neglected

Even though no limit of the remanent flux is specified in the IEC standard for closed
core CTs, it is a common opinion that the remanent flux is normally limited to
maximum 75 - 80 % of the saturation flux.

Since approximately year 2000 some CT manufactures have introduced new core
materials that gradually have increased the possible maximum levels of remanent flux
even up to 95 % related to the hysteresis curve. Corresponding level of actual remanent

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 627

Application manual
Section 24 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Requirements

flux is 90 % of the saturation flux (Ψsat). As the present CT standards have no

limitation of the level of remanent flux, these CTs are also classified as for example,
class TPX, P and PX according to IEC. The IEC TR 61869-100, Edition 1.0 2017-01,
Instrument transformers – Guidance for application of current transformers in power
system protection, is the first official document that highlighted this development. So
far remanence factors of maximum 80% have been considered when CT requirements
have been decided for ABB IEDs. Even in the future this level of remanent flux
probably will be the maximum level that will be considered when decided the CT
requirements. If higher remanence levels should be considered, it should often lead to
unrealistic CT sizes.

Thus, now there is a need to limit the acceptable level of remanent flux. To be able to
guarantee the performance of protection IEDs, we need to introduce the following
classification of CTs.

There are many different standards and a lot of classes but fundamentally there are four
different types of CTs:

• Very High Remanence type CT

• High Remanence type CT
• Low Remanence type CT
• Non Remanence type CT

The Very High Remanence (VHR) type is a CT with closed iron core (for example.
protection classes TPX, P, PX according to IEC, class C, K according to ANSI/IEEE)
and with an iron core material (new material, typically new alloy based magnetic
materials) that gives a remanent flux higher than 80 % of the saturation flux.

The High Remanence (HR) type is a CT with closed iron core (for example,
protection classes TPX, P, PX according to IEC, class C, K according to ANSI/IEEE)
but with an iron core material (traditional material) that gives a remanent flux that is
limited to maximum 80 % of the saturation flux.

The Low Remanence (LR) type is a CT with small airgaps in the iron core (for
example, TPY, PR, PXR according to IEC) and the remanent flux limit is specified to
be maximum 10% of the saturation flux.

The Non Remanence (NR) type is a CT with big airgaps in the core (for example,
TPZ according to IEC) and the remanent flux can be neglected.

It is also possible that different CT classes of HR and LR type may be mixed.

CT type VHR (using new material) should not be used for protection CT cores. This
means that it is important to specify that the remanence factor must not exceed 80 %
when ordering for example, class P, PX or TPX CTs. If CT manufacturers are using
new core material and are not able to fulfill this requirement, the CTs shall be specified

628 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 24
Requirements

with small airgaps and therefore will be CTs of LR type (for example, class PR, TPY
or PXR). Very high remanence level in a protection core CT can cause the following
problems for protection IEDs:
1. Unwanted operation of differential (i.e. unit) protections for external faults
2. Unacceptably delayed or even missing operation of all types of protections (for
example, distance, differential, overcurrent, etc.) which can result in loosing
protection selectivity in the network

No information is available about how frequent the use of the new iron core material is
for protection CT cores, but it is known that some CT manufacturers are using the new
material while other manufacturers continue to use the old traditional core material for
protection CT cores. In a case where VHR type CTs have been already installed, the
calculated values of Eal for HR type CTs, for which the formulas are given in this
document, must be multiplied by factor two-and-a-half in order for VHR type CTs (i.e.
with new material) to be used together with ABB protection IEDs. However, this may
result in unacceptably big CT cores, which can be difficult to manufacture and fit in
available space.

Different standards and classes specify the saturation e.m.f. in different ways but it is
possible to approximately compare values from different classes. The rated equivalent
limiting secondary e.m.f. Eal according to the IEC 61869–2 standard is used to specify
the CT requirements for the IED. The requirements are also specified according to
other standards.

24.1.2 Conditions M11610-3 v1

M11610-4 v4

The requirements are a result of investigations performed in our network simulator.

The current transformer models are representative for current transformers of high
remanence and low remanence type. The results may not always be valid for non
remanence type CTs (TPZ).

The performances of the protection functions have been checked in the range from
symmetrical to fully asymmetrical fault currents. Primary time constants of at least 120
ms have been considered at the tests. The current requirements below are thus
applicable both for symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents.

Depending on the protection function phase-to-ground, phase-to-phase and three-phase

faults have been tested for different relevant fault positions for example, close in
forward and reverse faults, zone 1 reach faults, internal and external faults. The
dependability and security of the protection was verified by checking for example, time
delays, unwanted operations, directionality, overreach and stability.

The remanence in the current transformer core can cause unwanted operations or minor
additional time delays for some protection functions. As unwanted operations are not

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 629

Application manual
Section 24 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Requirements

acceptable at all maximum remanence has been considered for fault cases critical for
the security, for example, faults in reverse direction and external faults. Because of the
almost negligible risk of additional time delays and the non-existent risk of failure to
operate the remanence have not been considered for the dependability cases. The
requirements below are therefore fully valid for all normal applications.

It is difficult to give general recommendations for additional margins for remanence to

avoid the minor risk of an additional time delay. They depend on the performance and
economy requirements. When current transformers of low remanence type (for
example, TPY, PR) are used, normally no additional margin is needed. For current
transformers of high remanence type (for example, P, PX, TPX) the small probability
of fully asymmetrical faults, together with high remanence in the same direction as the
flux generated by the fault, has to be kept in mind at the decision of an additional
margin. Fully asymmetrical fault current will be achieved when the fault occurs at
approximately zero voltage (0°). Investigations have shown that 95% of the faults in
the network will occur when the voltage is between 40° and 90°. In addition fully
asymmetrical fault current will not exist in all phases at the same time.

24.1.3 Fault current M11613-3 v1

M11613-4 v3

The current transformer requirements are based on the maximum fault current for
faults in different positions. Maximum fault current will occur for three-phase faults or
single phase-to-ground faults. The current for a single phase-to-ground fault will
exceed the current for a three-phase fault when the zero sequence impedance in the
total fault loop is less than the positive sequence impedance.

When calculating the current transformer requirements, maximum fault current for the
relevant fault position should be used and therefore both fault types have to be
considered.

24.1.4 Secondary wire resistance and additional load M11614-3 v1

M11614-4 v4

The voltage at the current transformer secondary terminals directly affects the current
transformer saturation. This voltage is developed in a loop containing the secondary
wires and the burden of all relays in the circuit. For ground faults the loop includes the
phase and neutral wire, normally twice the resistance of the single secondary wire. For
three-phase faults the neutral current is zero and it is just necessary to consider the
resistance up to the point where the phase wires are connected to the common neutral
wire. The most common practice is to use four wires secondary cables so it normally is
sufficient to consider just a single secondary wire for the three-phase case.

The conclusion is that the loop resistance, twice the resistance of the single secondary
wire, must be used in the calculation for phase-to-ground faults and the phase

630 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 24
Requirements

resistance, the resistance of a single secondary wire, may normally be used in the
calculation for three-phase faults.

As the burden can be considerable different for three-phase faults and phase-to-ground
faults it is important to consider both cases. Even in a case where the phase-to-ground
fault current is smaller than the three-phase fault current the phase-to-ground fault can
be dimensioning for the CT depending on the higher burden.

In isolated or high impedance grounded systems the phase-to-ground fault is not the
dimensioning case. Therefore, the resistance of the single secondary wire can always
be used in the calculation for this kind of power systems.

24.1.5 General current transformer requirements M11615-3 v3

The current transformer ratio is mainly selected based on power system data for
example, maximum load and/or maximum fault current. It should be verified that the
current to the protection is higher than the minimum operating value for all faults that
are to be detected with the selected CT ratio. It should also be verified that the
maximum possible fault current is within the limits of the IED.

The current error of the current transformer can limit the possibility to use a very
sensitive setting of a sensitive residual overcurrent protection. If a very sensitive
setting of this function will be used it is recommended that the current transformer
should have an accuracy class which have an current error at rated primary current that
is less than ±1% (for example, 5P). If current transformers with less accuracy are used
it is advisable to check the actual unwanted residual current during the commissioning.

24.1.6 Rated equivalent secondary e.m.f. requirements SEMOD53723-1 v1

M11616-3 v2

With regard to saturation of the current transformer all current transformers of high
remanence and low remanence type that fulfill the requirements on the rated equivalent
limiting secondary e.m.f. Eal below can be used. The characteristic of the non
remanence type CT (TPZ) is not well defined as far as the phase angle error is
concerned. If no explicit recommendation is given for a specific function we therefore
recommend contacting ABB to confirm that the non remanence type can be used.

The CT requirements for the different functions below are specified as a rated
equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. Eal according to the IEC 61869-2 standard.
Requirements for CTs specified according to other classes and standards are given at
the end of this section.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 631

Application manual
Section 24 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Requirements

24.1.6.1 Breaker failure protection M11621-3 v5

The CTs must have a rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. Eal that is larger than
or equal to the required rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. Ealreq below:

Is n æ S ö
E a l ³ E a lre q = 5 × Iop × × ç R CT + R L + 2R ÷
Ipn è In ø
EQUATION1677 V1 EN-US (Equation 128)

where:
Iop The primary operate value (A)

Ipr The rated primary CT current (A)

Isr The rated secondary CT current (A)

In The nominal current of the protection IED (A)

Rct The secondary resistance of the CT (W)

RL The resistance of the secondary cable and additional load (W). The loop resistance containing the
phase and neutral wires, must be used for faults in solidly grounded systems. The resistance of a
single secondary wire should be used for faults in high impedance grounded systems.
SR The burden of an IED current input channel (VA). SR=0.020 VA/channel for Ir=1 A and SR=0.150
VA/channel for Ir=5 A

24.1.6.2 Non-directional instantaneous and definitive time, phase and residual

overcurrent protection M11622-3 v5

The CTs must have a rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. Eal that is larger than
or equal to the required rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. Ealreq below:

632 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 24
Requirements

Is n æ S ö
E a l ³ E a lre q = 1.5 × Iop × × ç R CT + R L + 2R ÷
Ipn è In ø
EQUATION1678 V1 EN-US (Equation 129)

where:
Iop The primary operate value (A)

Ipr The rated primary CT current (A)

Isr The rated secondary CT current (A)

In The nominal current of the protection IED (A)

Rct The secondary resistance of the CT (W)

RL The resistance of the secondary cable and additional load (W). The loop resistance containing the
phase and neutral wires, must be used for faults in solidly grounded systems. The resistance of a
single secondary wire should be used for faults in high impedance grounded systems.
SR The burden of an IED current input channel (VA). SR=0.020 VA/channel for Ir=1 A and SR=0.150
VA/channel for Ir=5 A

24.1.6.3 Non-directional inverse time delayed phase and residual overcurrent

protection M11339-3 v5

The requirement according to Equation 130 and Equation 131 does not need to be
fulfilled if the high set instantaneous or definitive time stage is used. In this case
Equation is the only necessary requirement.

If the inverse time delayed function is the only used overcurrent protection function the
CTs must have a rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. Eal that is larger than or
equal to the required rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. Ealreq below:

Is n æ S ö
E a l ³ E a lre q = 20 × Iop × × ç R CT + R L + 2R ÷
Ipn è In ø
EQUATION1679 V1 EN-US (Equation 130)

where

Iop The primary current set value of the inverse time function (A)

Ipr The rated primary CT current (A)

Isr The rated secondary CT current (A)

In The nominal current of the protection IED (A)

Table continues on next page

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 633

Application manual
Section 24 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Requirements

Rct The secondary resistance of the CT (W)

RL The resistance of the secondary cable and additional load (W). The loop
resistance containing the phase and neutral wires, must be used for faults in
solidly grounded systems. The resistance of a single secondary wire should be
used for faults in high impedance grounded systems.
SR The burden of an IED current input channel (VA). SR=0.020 VA/channel for Ir=1
A and SR=0.150 VA/channel for Ir=5 A

Independent of the value of Iop the maximum required Eal is specified according to the
following:

Is n æ S ö
E a l ³ E a lre q ma x = Ik ma x × × ç R CT + R L + 2R ÷
Ipn è In ø
EQUATION1680 V1 EN-US (Equation 131)

where

Ikmax Maximum primary fundamental frequency current for close-in faults (A)

24.1.6.4 Directional phase and residual overcurrent protection M11624-3 v6

If the directional overcurrent function is used the CTs must have a rated equivalent
limiting secondary e.m.f. Eal that is larger than or equal to the required rated equivalent
limiting secondary e.m.f. Ealreq below:

Is n æ S ö
E a l ³ E a lre q = Ik ma x × × ç R CT + R L + 2R ÷
Ipn è In ø
EQUATION1681 V1 EN-US (Equation 132)

where:
Ikmax Maximum primary fundamental frequency current for close-in forward and reverse faults (A)

Ipr The rated primary CT current (A)

Isr The rated secondary CT current (A)

In The rated current of the protection IED (A)

Rct The secondary resistance of the CT (W)

RL The resistance of the secondary cable and additional load (W). The loop resistance containing the
phase and neutral wires, must be used for faults in solidly grounded systems. The resistance of a
single secondary wire should be used for faults in high impedance grounded systems.
SR The burden of an IED current input channel (VA). SR=0.020 VA/channel for Ir=1 A and SR=0.150
VA/channel for Ir=5 A

634 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 24
Requirements

24.1.7 Current transformer requirements for CTs according to other

standards SEMOD53771-1 v1

M11623-4 v3

All kinds of conventional magnetic core CTs are possible to use with the IEDs if they
fulfill the requirements corresponding to the above specified expressed as the rated
equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. Eal according to the IEC 61869-2 standard. From
different standards and available data for relaying applications it is possible to
approximately calculate a secondary e.m.f. of the CT comparable with Eal. By
comparing this with the required rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. Ealreq it is
possible to judge if the CT fulfills the requirements. The requirements according to
some other standards are specified below.

24.1.7.1 Current transformers according to IEC 61869-2, class P, PR M11623-6 v4

A CT according to IEC 61869-2 is specified by the secondary limiting e.m.f. EALF. The
value of the EALF is approximately equal to the corresponding Eal. Therefore, the CTs
according to class P and PR must have a secondary limiting e.m.f. EALF that fulfills the
following:

E ALF  max E alreq

EQUATION1383 V4 EN-US (Equation 133)

24.1.7.2 Current transformers according to IEC 61869-2, class PX, PXR (and old
IEC 60044-6, class TPS and old British Standard, class X) M11623-14 v5

CTs according to these classes are specified approximately in the same way by a rated
knee point e.m.f. Eknee (Ek for class PX and PXR, EkneeBS for class X and the limiting
secondary voltage Val for TPS). The value of the Eknee is lower than the corresponding
Eal according to IEC 61869-2. It is not possible to give a general relation between the
Eknee and the Eal but normally the Eknee is approximately 80 % of the Eal. Therefore,
the CTs according to class PX, PXR, X and TPS must have a rated knee point e.m.f.
Eknee that fulfills the following:

S = TD × SOld + (1 - TD ) × S Calculated
EQUATION1893.ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 134)

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 635

Application manual
Section 24 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Requirements

24.1.7.3 Current transformers according to ANSI/IEEE M11623-22 v6

Current transformers according to ANSI/IEEE are partly specified in different ways. A

rated secondary terminal voltage VANSI is specified for a CT of class C. VANSI is the
secondary terminal voltage the CT will deliver to a standard burden at 20 times rated
secondary current without exceeding 10 % ratio correction. There are a number of
standardized VANSI values for example, VANSI is 400 V for a C400 CT. A
corresponding rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. EalANSI can be estimated as
follows:

E a lANS I = 20 × IS N × R CT + VANS I = 20 × IS N × R CT + 20 × IS N × Z bANS I

EQUATION1682 V1 EN-US (Equation 135)

where:
ZbANSI The impedance (that is, with a complex quantity) of the standard ANSI burden for the specific C
class (W)
VANSI The secondary terminal voltage for the specific C class (V)

The CTs according to class C must have a calculated rated equivalent limiting
secondary e.m.f. EalANSI that fulfils the following:

E alANSI > maximum of E alreq

EQUATION1384 V2 EN-US (Equation 136)

A CT according to ANSI/IEEE is also specified by the knee point voltage VkneeANSI

that is graphically defined from an excitation curve. The knee point voltage VkneeANSI
normally has a lower value than the knee-point e.m.f. according to IEC and BS.
VkneeANSI can approximately be estimated to 75 % of the corresponding Eal according
to IEC 61869-2. Therefore, the CTs according to ANSI/IEEE must have a knee point
voltage VkneeANSI that fulfills the following:

VkneeANSI > 0.75 × (max imum of Ealreq )

EQUATION2101 V2 EN-US (Equation 137)

The following guide may also be referred for some more application aspects of ANSI
class CTs: IEEE C37.110 (2007), IEEE Guide for the Application of Current
Transformers Used for Protective Relaying Purposes.

636 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 24
Requirements

24.2 Voltage transformer requirements M11608-3 v5

The performance of a protection function will depend on the quality of the measured
input signal. Transients caused by capacitive Coupled voltage transformers (CCVTs)
can affect some protection functions.

Magnetic or capacitive voltage transformers can be used.

The capacitive voltage transformers (CCVTs) should fulfill the requirements according
to the IEC 61869-5 standard regarding ferro-resonance and transients. The ferro-
resonance requirements of the CCVTs are specified in chapter 6.502 of the standard.

The transient responses for three different standard transient response classes, T1, T2
and T3 are specified in chapter 6.503 of the standard. CCVTs according to all classes
can be used.

The protection IED has effective filters for these transients, which gives secure and
correct operation with CCVTs.

24.3 SNTP server requirements GUID-588FCD12-C494-445E-8488-8287B34EFD9A v4

The SNTP server to be used is connected to the local network, that is not more than 4-5
switches or routers away from the IED. The SNTP server is dedicated for its task, or at
least equipped with a real-time operating system, that is not a PC with SNTP server
software. The SNTP server should be stable, that is, either synchronized from a stable
source like GPS, or local without synchronization. Using a local SNTP server without
synchronization as primary or secondary server in a redundant configuration is not
recommended.

24.4 PTP requirements GUID-741CC863-D760-49D6-85B2-AFECA222A8C3 v1

For PTP to perform properly, the Ethernet equipment that is used needs to be compliant
with IEEE1588. The clocks used must follow the IEEE1588 standard BMC (Best
Master Algorithm) and shall, for instance, not claim class 7 for a longer time than it
can guarantee 1us absolute accuracy.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 637

Application manual
Section 24 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Requirements

24.5 Sample specification of communication requirements

for the protection and control terminals in digital
telecommunication networks GUID-0A9F36AF-3802-42FE-8970-4662798C19D1 v2

The communication requirements are based on echo timing.

Bit Error Rate (BER) according to ITU-T G.821, G.826 and G.828
• <10-6 according to the standard for data and voice transfer

Bit Error Rate (BER) for high availability of the differential protection
• <10-8-10-9 during normal operation
• <10-6 during disturbed operation

During disturbed conditions, the trip security function can cope with high bit error
rates up to 10-5 or even up to 10-4. The trip security can be configured to be
independent of COMFAIL from the differential protection communication supervision,
or blocked when COMFAIL is issued after receive error >100ms. (Default).

Synchronization in SDH systems with G.703 E1 or IEEE C37.94

The G.703 E1, 2 Mbit shall be set according to ITU-T G.803, G.810-13
• One master clock for the actual network
• The actual port Synchronized to the SDH system clock at 2048 kbit
• Synchronization; bit synchronized, synchronized mapping
• Maximum clock deviation <±50 ppm nominal, <±100 ppm operational
• Jitter and Wander according to ITU-T G.823 and G.825
• Buffer memory <250 μs, <100 μs asymmetric difference
• Format.G 704 frame, structured etc.Format.
• No CRC-check

Synchronization in PDH systems connected to SDH systems

• Independent synchronization, asynchronous mapping
• The actual SDH port must be set to allow transmission of the master clock from
the PDH-system via the SDH-system in transparent mode.
• Maximum clock deviation <±50 ppm nominal, <±100 ppm operational
• Jitter and Wander according to ITU-T G.823 and G.825
• Buffer memory <100 μs

638 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 24
Requirements

• Format: Transparent
• Maximum channel delay
• Loop time <40 ms continuous (2 x 20 ms)

IED with echo synchronization of differential clock (without GPS clock)

• Both channels must have the same route with maximum asymmetry of 0,2-0,5 ms,
depending on set sensitivity of the differential protection.
• A fixed asymmetry can be compensated (setting of asymmetric delay in built in
HMI or the parameter setting tool PST).

IED with GPS clock

• Independent of asymmetry.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 639

Application manual
640
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 25
Glossary

Section 25 Glossary M14893-1 v16

AC Alternating current
ACC Actual channel
ACT Application configuration tool within PCM600
A/D converter Analog-to-digital converter
ADBS Amplitude deadband supervision
ADM Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization
AI Analog input
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AR Autoreclosing
ASCT Auxiliary summation current transformer
ASD Adaptive signal detection
ASDU Application service data unit
AWG American Wire Gauge standard
BBP Busbar protection
BFOC/2,5 Bayonet fibre optic connector
BFP Breaker failure protection
BI Binary input
BIM Binary input module
BOM Binary output module
BOS Binary outputs status
BR External bistable relay
BS British Standards
BSR Binary signal transfer function, receiver blocks
BST Binary signal transfer function, transmit blocks
C37.94 IEEE/ANSI protocol used when sending binary signals
between IEDs
CAN Controller Area Network. ISO standard (ISO 11898) for serial
communication

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 641

Application manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Glossary

CB Circuit breaker
CBM Combined backplane module
CCITT Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and
Telephony. A United Nations-sponsored standards body
within the International Telecommunications Union.
CCM CAN carrier module
CCVT Capacitive Coupled Voltage Transformer
Class C Protection Current Transformer class as per IEEE/ ANSI
CMPPS Combined megapulses per second
CMT Communication Management tool in PCM600
CO cycle Close-open cycle
Codirectional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves two
twisted pairs making it possible to transmit information in
both directions
COM Command
COMTRADE Standard Common Format for Transient Data Exchange
format for Disturbance recorder according to IEEE/ANSI
C37.111, 1999 / IEC 60255-24
Contra-directional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves four
twisted pairs, two of which are used for transmitting data in
both directions and two for transmitting clock signals
COT Cause of transmission
CPU Central processing unit
CR Carrier receive
CRC Cyclic redundancy check
CROB Control relay output block
CS Carrier send
CT Current transformer
CU Communication unit
CVT or CCVT Capacitive voltage transformer
DAR Delayed autoreclosing
DARPA Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (The US
developer of the TCP/IP protocol etc.)
DBDL Dead bus dead line

642 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 25
Glossary

DBLL Dead bus live line

DC Direct current
DFC Data flow control
DFT Discrete Fourier transform
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DIP-switch Small switch mounted on a printed circuit board
DI Digital input
DLLB Dead line live bus
DNP Distributed Network Protocol as per IEEE Std 1815-2012
DR Disturbance recorder
DRAM Dynamic random access memory
DRH Disturbance report handler
DSP Digital signal processor
DTT Direct transfer trip scheme
ECT Ethernet configuration tool
EHV network Extra high voltage network
EIA Electronic Industries Association
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EMF Electromotive force
EMI Electromagnetic interference
EnFP End fault protection
EPA Enhanced performance architecture
ESD Electrostatic discharge
F-SMA Type of optical fibre connector
FAN Fault number
FCB Flow control bit; Frame count bit
FOX 20 Modular 20 channel telecommunication system for speech,
data and protection signals
FOX 512/515 Access multiplexer
FOX 6Plus Compact time-division multiplexer for the transmission of up
to seven duplex channels of digital data over optical fibers
FPN Flexible product naming

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 643

Application manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Glossary

FTP File Transfer Protocol

FUN Function type
G.703 Electrical and functional description for digital lines used by
local telephone companies. Can be transported over balanced
and unbalanced lines
GCM Communication interface module with carrier of GPS
receiver module
GDE Graphical display editor within PCM600
GI General interrogation command
GIS Gas-insulated switchgear
GOOSE Generic object-oriented substation event
GPS Global positioning system
GSAL Generic security application
GSE Generic substation event
HDLC protocol High-level data link control, protocol based on the HDLC
standard
HFBR connector type Plastic fiber connector
HMI Human-machine interface
HSAR High speed autoreclosing
HSR High-availability Seamless Redundancy
HV High-voltage
HVDC High-voltage direct current
IDBS Integrating deadband supervision
IEC International Electrical Committee
IEC 60044-6 IEC Standard, Instrument transformers – Part 6:
Requirements for protective current transformers for transient
performance
IEC 60870-5-103 Communication standard for protection equipment. A serial
master/slave protocol for point-to-point communication
IEC 61850 Substation automation communication standard
IEC 61850–8–1 Communication protocol standard
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IEEE 802.12 A network technology standard that provides 100 Mbits/s on
twisted-pair or optical fiber cable

644 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 25
Glossary

IEEE P1386.1 PCI Mezzanine Card (PMC) standard for local bus modules.
References the CMC (IEEE P1386, also known as Common
Mezzanine Card) standard for the mechanics and the PCI
specifications from the PCI SIG (Special Interest Group) for
the electrical EMF (Electromotive force).
IEEE 1686 Standard for Substation Intelligent Electronic Devices (IEDs)
Cyber Security Capabilities
IED Intelligent electronic device
IET600 Integrated engineering tool
I-GIS Intelligent gas-insulated switchgear
IOM Binary input/output module
Instance When several occurrences of the same function are available
in the IED, they are referred to as instances of that function.
One instance of a function is identical to another of the same
kind but has a different number in the IED user interfaces.
The word "instance" is sometimes defined as an item of
information that is representative of a type. In the same way
an instance of a function in the IED is representative of a type
of function.
IP 1. Internet protocol. The network layer for the TCP/IP
protocol suite widely used on Ethernet networks. IP is a
connectionless, best-effort packet-switching protocol. It
provides packet routing, fragmentation and reassembly
through the data link layer.
2. Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529
IP 20 Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529, level
IP20- Protected against solid foreign objects of 12.5mm
diameter and greater.
IP 40 Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529, level IP40-
Protected against solid foreign objects of 1mm diameter and
greater.
IP 54 Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529, level
IP54-Dust-protected, protected against splashing water.
IRF Internal failure signal
IRIG-B: InterRange Instrumentation Group Time code format B,
standard 200
ITU International Telecommunications Union
LAN Local area network

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 645

Application manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Glossary

LIB 520 High-voltage software module

LCD Liquid crystal display
LDCM Line data communication module
LDD Local detection device
LED Light-emitting diode
LNT LON network tool
LON Local operating network
MCB Miniature circuit breaker
MCM Mezzanine carrier module
MIM Milli-ampere module
MPM Main processing module
MVAL Value of measurement
MVB Multifunction vehicle bus. Standardized serial bus originally
developed for use in trains.
NCC National Control Centre
NOF Number of grid faults
NUM Numerical module
OCO cycle Open-close-open cycle
OCP Overcurrent protection
OEM Optical Ethernet module
OLTC On-load tap changer
OTEV Disturbance data recording initiated by other event than start/
pick-up
OV Overvoltage
Overreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault
condition. For example, a distance relay is overreaching when
the impedance presented to it is smaller than the apparent
impedance to the fault applied to the balance point, that is, the
set reach. The relay “sees” the fault but perhaps it should not
have seen it.
PCI Peripheral component interconnect, a local data bus
PCM Pulse code modulation
PCM600 Protection and control IED manager
PC-MIP Mezzanine card standard

646 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 25
Glossary

PMC PCI Mezzanine card

POR Permissive overreach
POTT Permissive overreach transfer trip
Process bus Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near
proximity to the measured and/or controlled components
PRP Parallel redundancy protocol
PSM Power supply module
PST Parameter setting tool within PCM600
PTP Precision time protocol
PT ratio Potential transformer or voltage transformer ratio
PUTT Permissive underreach transfer trip
RASC Synchrocheck relay, COMBIFLEX
RCA Relay characteristic angle
RISC Reduced instruction set computer
RMS value Root mean square value
RS422 A balanced serial interface for the transmission of digital data
in point-to-point connections
RS485 Serial link according to EIA standard RS485
RTC Real-time clock
RTU Remote terminal unit
SA Substation Automation
SBO Select-before-operate
SC Switch or push button to close
SCL Short circuit location
SCS Station control system
SCADA Supervision, control and data acquisition
SCT System configuration tool according to standard IEC 61850
SDU Service data unit
SFP Small form-factor pluggable (abbreviation)
Optical Ethernet port (explanation)

SLM Serial communication module.

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 647

Application manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 401-UUS A
Glossary

SMA connector Subminiature version A, A threaded connector with constant

impedance.
SMT Signal matrix tool within PCM600
SMS Station monitoring system
SNTP Simple network time protocol – is used to synchronize
computer clocks on local area networks. This reduces the
requirement to have accurate hardware clocks in every
embedded system in a network. Each embedded node can
instead synchronize with a remote clock, providing the
required accuracy.
SOF Status of fault
SPA Strömberg Protection Acquisition (SPA), a serial master/slave
protocol for point-to-point and ring communication.
SRY Switch for CB ready condition
ST Switch or push button to trip
Starpoint Neutral/Wye point of transformer or generator
SVC Static VAr compensation
TC Trip coil
TCS Trip circuit supervision
TCP Transmission control protocol. The most common transport
layer protocol used on Ethernet and the Internet.
TCP/IP Transmission control protocol over Internet Protocol. The de
facto standard Ethernet protocols incorporated into 4.2BSD
Unix. TCP/IP was developed by DARPA for Internet working
and encompasses both network layer and transport layer
protocols. While TCP and IP specify two protocols at specific
protocol layers, TCP/IP is often used to refer to the entire US
Department of Defense protocol suite based upon these,
including Telnet, FTP, UDP and RDP.
TEF Time delayed gound-fault protection function
TLS Transport Layer Security
TM Transmit (disturbance data)
TNC connector Threaded Neill-Concelman, a threaded constant impedance
version of a BNC connector
TP Trip (recorded fault)
TPZ, TPY, TPX, TPS Current transformer class according to IEC

648 Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 511 401-UUS A Section 25
Glossary

TRM Transformer Module. This module transforms currents and

voltages taken from the process into levels suitable for further
signal processing.
TYP Type identification
UMT User management tool
Underreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault
condition. For example, a distance relay is underreaching
when the impedance presented to it is greater than the
apparent impedance to the fault applied to the balance point,
that is, the set reach. The relay does not “see” the fault but
perhaps it should have seen it. See also Overreach.
UTC Coordinated Universal Time. A coordinated time scale,
maintained by the Bureau International des Poids et Mesures
(BIPM), which forms the basis of a coordinated dissemination
of standard frequencies and time signals. UTC is derived from
International Atomic Time (TAI) by the addition of a whole
number of "leap seconds" to synchronize it with Universal
Time 1 (UT1), thus allowing for the eccentricity of the Earth's
orbit, the rotational axis tilt (23.5 degrees), but still showing
the Earth's irregular rotation, on which UT1 is based. The
Coordinated Universal Time is expressed using a 24-hour
clock, and uses the Gregorian calendar. It is used for
aeroplane and ship navigation, where it is also sometimes
known by the military name, "Zulu time." "Zulu" in the
phonetic alphabet stands for "Z", which stands for longitude
zero.
UV Undervoltage
WEI Weak end infeed logic
VT Voltage transformer
X.21 A digital signalling interface primarily used for telecom
equipment
3IO Three times zero-sequence current.Often referred to as the
residual or the ground-fault current
3VO Three times the zero sequence voltage. Often referred to as
the residual voltage or the neutral point voltage

Bay control REC670 2.2 ANSI 649

Application manual
650
651
—
ABB AB
Grid Automation Products
721 59 Västerås, Sweden
Phone: +46 (0) 21 32 50 00

abb.com/protection-control

1MRK 511 401-UUS

© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved.

Specifications subject to change without notice.